Ram Concept

RAM Concept
CONNECT Edition V8 Update 2 (v8.2)
User Manual
Last Updated: December 07, 2020
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................................................................... 45
1.1 Comparing with “traditional” methods .......................................................................................................................45
1.2 RAM Concept options ......................................................................................................................................................... 46
1.3 Strip Wizard ............................................................................................................................................................................ 46
1.4 Structural systems ............................................................................................................................................................... 46
1.5 Learning RAM Concept .......................................................................................................................................................47
1.5.1 Tutorials ........................................................................................................................................................ 47
1.5.2 Critical Chapters ......................................................................................................................................... 48
1.5.3 Know your building code ........................................................................................................................48
1.5.4 Upgrading Old Files .................................................................................................................................. 49
1.6 Technical support .................................................................................................................................................................49
Chapter 2: Looking at the Workspace ...................................................................................... 50
2.1 About the workspace .......................................................................................................................................................... 50
2.2 Creating and opening files ................................................................................................................................................ 51
2.2.1 Starting a new file ..................................................................................................................................... 51
2.2.2 Opening an existing file .......................................................................................................................... 51
2.3 Saving a file ..............................................................................................................................................................................51
2.3.1 To save and name a file for the first time ....................................................................................... 52
2.3.2 To save any open file ............................................................................................................................... 52
2.3.3 To save a file as a template ................................................................................................................... 52
2.3.4 Saving a copy of a file with a new name or location ...................................................................52
2.3.5 Reverting to a backup copy ...................................................................................................................52
2.3.6 Restoring an auto-save file ....................................................................................................................53
2.4 About templates .................................................................................................................................................................... 53
2.5 Expanding tool buttons ......................................................................................................................................................53
2.6 Rearranging toolbars .......................................................................................................................................................... 54
2.7 Using the right mouse button ..........................................................................................................................................54
2.8 Undoing changes ...................................................................................................................................................................54
Chapter 3: Understanding Layers ............................................................................................ 55
3.1 Modeling with objects ........................................................................................................................................................ 55
3.2 Managing layers .................................................................................................................................................................... 55
3.2.1 Determining which plans contain objects ...................................................................................... 57
Chapter 4: Using Plans and Perspectives ................................................................................. 59
4.1 Using plans .............................................................................................................................................................................. 59
4.2 Creating new plans .............................................................................................................................................................. 59
4.3 Viewing perspectives .......................................................................................................................................................... 59
4.3.1 Setting the projection .............................................................................................................................. 60
4.3.2 Selecting the modeling ............................................................................................................................60
4.3.3 Rotating the model ................................................................................................................................... 60
4.4 Creating new perspectives ............................................................................................................................................... 60
4.5 Controlling views ..................................................................................................................................................................60
4.5.1 Zooming to magnify or diminish ........................................................................................................ 61
RAM Concept 2 User Manual

4.5.2 Panning to reposition .............................................................................................................................. 61
4.5.3 View History ................................................................................................................................................ 62
4.5.4 Regenerating ............................................................................................................................................... 62
4.5.5 Setting the visible objects ...................................................................................................................... 62
4.5.6 Changing colors, font, and line type .................................................................................................. 64
4.5.7 Changing font size ..................................................................................................................................... 65
4.5.8 Changing font scale ...................................................................................................................................66
4.6 Setting up the grid ................................................................................................................................................................66
4.6.1 To make the grid visible for a plan .................................................................................................... 67
4.6.2 To change the grid settings for a plan .............................................................................................. 67
Chapter 5: Drawing and Editing Objects .................................................................................. 68
5.1 Precision drawing with snaps .........................................................................................................................................68
5.2 Drawing objects .....................................................................................................................................................................69
5.3 Entering coordinate points .............................................................................................................................................. 69
5.4 Using relative coordinates ................................................................................................................................................69
5.5 Selecting objects ....................................................................................................................................................................70
5.5.1 To select an object or group of objects ............................................................................................ 70
5.5.2 To select only a single object ................................................................................................................70
5.6 Deselecting objects .............................................................................................................................................................. 70
5.6.1 To deselect an object or group of objects from a selection .....................................................70
5.6.2 To deselect only a single object from a selection ........................................................................ 71
5.7 Filtering selected objects .................................................................................................................................................. 71
5.8 Cutting, copying, and pasting objects .......................................................................................................................... 71
5.8.1 To cut objects .............................................................................................................................................. 71
5.8.2 To copy objects ...........................................................................................................................................71
5.8.3 To paste objects from the clipboard ................................................................................................. 71
5.9 Copying and pasting objects by layer .......................................................................................................................... 72
5.9.1 To append objects to the layer clipboard ....................................................................................... 72
5.9.2 To paste objects from the layer clipboard ......................................................................................72
5.10 Editing polygon objects ......................................................................................................................................................72
5.10.1 To add a node to a polygonal object ..................................................................................................73
5.10.2 To delete a node from a polygonal object .......................................................................................73
5.11 Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects ............................................................................................. 73
5.11.1 To move a selection ..................................................................................................................................73
5.11.2 To stretch the selection .......................................................................................................................... 74
5.11.3 To rotate a selection .................................................................................................................................74
5.11.4 To mirror the selection ...........................................................................................................................74
5.12 Using the Utility tool to move and stretch ................................................................................................................. 74
5.12.1 To move an object by one of its grips ............................................................................................... 74
5.12.2 To stretch an object by one of its grips ............................................................................................75
5.13 Manipulating the model as a whole ..............................................................................................................................75
5.13.1 To move the entire model ..................................................................................................................... 75
5.13.2 To rotate the entire model .................................................................................................................... 75
5.13.3 To mirror the entire model ...................................................................................................................75
5.13.4 To scale the entire model .......................................................................................................................76
5.14 Editing object properties ...................................................................................................................................................76
5.15 Setting default properties ................................................................................................................................................. 76
5.16 Adding reference lines, dimensions, and text notes ..............................................................................................76
5.16.1 To draw a line ............................................................................................................................................. 77
5.16.2 To draw a dimension line ...................................................................................................................... 77

5.16.3 To draw text ................................................................................................................................................ 77
Chapter 6: Viewing Objects in Text Tables ............................................................................... 78
6.1 Customizing tables ...............................................................................................................................................................79
6.1.1 Choosing which rows and columns to show ................................................................................. 79
6.1.2 Sizing table columns ................................................................................................................................ 80
6.1.3 Sorting table rows .....................................................................................................................................80
Chapter 7: Choosing Units .......................................................................................................81
7.1 About units .............................................................................................................................................................................. 81
7.2 Selecting units ........................................................................................................................................................................ 81
7.2.1 Selecting the default units ..................................................................................................................... 81
7.2.2 Changing the units .................................................................................................................................... 81
7.3 Specifying report as zero ...................................................................................................................................................82
Chapter 8: Choosing Sign Convention ......................................................................................84
8.1 Selecting sign convention ................................................................................................................................................. 84
8.1.1 Default sign convention ..........................................................................................................................84
8.1.2 Changing the sign convention ..............................................................................................................86
8.2 About plot sign convention .............................................................................................................................................. 86
Chapter 9: Specifying Material Properties ............................................................................... 88
9.1 Viewing the available materials ..................................................................................................................................... 88
9.2 Material properties ..............................................................................................................................................................89
9.2.1 Concrete Mix ................................................................................................................................................89
9.2.2 PT Systems ................................................................................................................................................... 90
9.2.3 Reinforcing Bars ........................................................................................................................................ 91
9.2.4 SSR Systems .................................................................................................................................................91
9.3 Adding and deleting materials ........................................................................................................................................92
9.3.1 To add materials ........................................................................................................................................ 92
9.3.2 To delete materials .................................................................................................................................... 92
9.4 About post-tensioning systems ...................................................................................................................................... 92
Chapter 10: Specifying loadings .............................................................................................. 94
10.1 About default loadings ....................................................................................................................................................... 94
10.2 Viewing the loadings ........................................................................................................................................................... 95
10.3 Loading properties ...............................................................................................................................................................95
10.4 About loading types .............................................................................................................................................................96
10.5 Available loading types ...................................................................................................................................................... 96
10.5.1 About assembly loads ..............................................................................................................................97
10.5.2 About Transfer Loading Types ............................................................................................................98
10.6 Changing Loading Types ................................................................................................................................................... 98
10.7 Changing Analysis ................................................................................................................................................................ 98
10.8 Adding and deleting loadings ..........................................................................................................................................99
10.8.1 To add a loading .........................................................................................................................................99
10.8.2 To delete a loading ....................................................................................................................................99
10.9 About load pattern ............................................................................................................................................................... 99
10.9.1 How load patterns work ......................................................................................................................100
10.9.2 When to use load pattern ....................................................................................................................101
10.9.3 How load pattern can approximate moving loads ................................................................... 102
Chapter 11: Specifying Load Combinations ............................................................................103

11.1 About default load combinations ................................................................................................................................103
11.2 Viewing the load combinations ................................................................................................................................... 103
11.3 Rebuilding load combinations ......................................................................................................................................105
11.4 Adding and deleting load combinations .................................................................................................................. 105
11.4.1 To add a load combination ................................................................................................................. 105
11.4.2 To delete a load combination ............................................................................................................. 105
11.5 Load combination properties ....................................................................................................................................... 106
11.6 About group load combinations .................................................................................................................................. 106
11.7 About alternate envelope factors ................................................................................................................................107
11.7.1 Example of Alternate Load Factors .................................................................................................108
11.8 Summary of load combination types .........................................................................................................................108
Chapter 12: Selecting Design Rules ....................................................................................... 112
12.1 Using rule set designs ...................................................................................................................................................... 112
12.2 Rule set design properties ............................................................................................................................................. 113
12.3 Types of active rules .........................................................................................................................................................113
12.4 Adding and deleting rule set designs ........................................................................................................................ 114
12.4.1 To add a rule set design ....................................................................................................................... 114
12.4.2 To delete a rule set .................................................................................................................................115
Chapter 13: Using a CAD Drawing ......................................................................................... 116
13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing ..........................................................................................................116
13.1.1 Importing a CAD file .............................................................................................................................. 116
13.1.2 Checking the imported information ............................................................................................... 116
13.1.3 Making the drawing visible on other plans .................................................................................117
Chapter 14: Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System ..................................... 118
14.1 What can be imported from the RAM Structural System ................................................................................. 118
14.2 Controlling which concrete members are imported .......................................................................................... 118
14.2.1 Definition of the “import perimeter” ............................................................................................. 119
14.3 About load importation ...................................................................................................................................................119
14.4 Importing a database ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
14.5 Reimporting a database .................................................................................................................................................. 124
14.5.1 Resolving loading conflicts .................................................................................................................125
14.5.2 To reimport from the RAM Structural System ...........................................................................126
14.6 Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions ................................................................................................................... 127
14.6.1 Limitations ................................................................................................................................................ 127
14.6.2 Defaults ....................................................................................................................................................... 127
14.6.3 Assumptions ............................................................................................................................................. 128
14.7 Tight integration with the RAM Structural System .............................................................................................129
Chapter 15: Data Transfer from STAAD ................................................................................. 130
15.1 STAAD Interface ................................................................................................................................................................. 130
15.2 RAM Concept Interface ....................................................................................................................................................130
15.2.1 Data Transfer Paths ............................................................................................................................... 130
15.2.2 New file options in RAM Concept .................................................................................................... 130
15.2.3 Update file options in RAM Concept ...............................................................................................132
Chapter 16: Data Transfer from ISM ......................................................................................133
16.1 What is ISM? .........................................................................................................................................................................133
16.1.1 Purpose ....................................................................................................................................................... 133

16.1.2 ISM and Application Data ....................................................................................................................133
16.2 ISM Sync Tools Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 134
16.2.1 Create ISM Repository ..........................................................................................................................134
16.2.2 Create RAM Concept File .....................................................................................................................135
16.2.3 Update ISM Repository ........................................................................................................................ 137
16.2.4 Update RAM Concept Model .............................................................................................................. 137
16.3 Import and Export Details ............................................................................................................................................. 137
16.3.1 Filtering ...................................................................................................................................................... 137
16.3.2 The ISM Model ......................................................................................................................................... 139
16.3.3 Slabs and Openings ................................................................................................................................139
16.3.4 Support Members ...................................................................................................................................141
16.3.5 ISM Section Shapes ................................................................................................................................ 142
16.3.6 ISM Load Cases and Loads ..................................................................................................................143
16.3.7 Member Loading ..................................................................................................................................... 146
16.3.8 Rebar ............................................................................................................................................................147
16.3.9 ISM Options dialog .................................................................................................................................. 149
Chapter 17: Data Transfer from API ........................................................................................ 151
Chapter 18: Bentley iTwin Services Features ...........................................................................152
18.1 What is iTwin Design Review? ...................................................................................................................................... 152
18.2 Applications of iTwins Design Review .......................................................................................................................152
18.3 Starting an iTwin Design Review Session ................................................................................................................ 153
Chapter 19: Bentley CONNECT Features ..................................................................................154
19.1 CONNECTED Project Association .................................................................................................................................154
19.1.1 To Associate a CONNECTED Project with Your File ................................................................. 154
19.1.2 To Disassociate a CONNECTED Project from a File .................................................................. 155
19.1.3 Assign Project dialog ..............................................................................................................................156
19.1.4 Register a CONNECTED Project .........................................................................................................156
19.2 Bentley CONNECT Advisor ............................................................................................................................................ 158
19.3 Automated Updates via the CONNECTION Client .................................................................................................159
19.4 Subscription Entitlement Service ................................................................................................................................ 159
Chapter 20: Defining the Structure ........................................................................................160
20.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer ...........................................................................................................................................160
20.2 About columns and walls ............................................................................................................................................... 160
20.3 Column properties .............................................................................................................................................................160
20.3.1 General column properties .................................................................................................................160
20.3.2 Meshing column properties ............................................................................................................... 162
20.3.3 Live load reduction column properties .........................................................................................162
20.4 Drawing columns ............................................................................................................................................................... 162
20.4.1 To draw a column ...................................................................................................................................163
20.4.2 To copy columns from below to above ......................................................................................... 163
20.5 Wall properties ................................................................................................................................................................... 163
20.6 Drawing walls ......................................................................................................................................................................164
20.6.1 To draw a wall ..........................................................................................................................................164
20.6.2 To copy walls from below to above ................................................................................................ 164
20.7 About point and line supports ......................................................................................................................................165
20.8 Point support properties ................................................................................................................................................ 165
20.9 Drawing point supports .................................................................................................................................................. 165
20.10 Line support properties .................................................................................................................................................. 166

20.11 Drawing line supports ..................................................................................................................................................... 166
20.12 About springs .......................................................................................................................................................................167
20.13 Point spring properties ................................................................................................................................................... 167
20.14 Drawing point springs ..................................................................................................................................................... 167
20.15 Line spring properties ..................................................................................................................................................... 168
20.16 Drawing line springs ........................................................................................................................................................ 168
20.17 Area spring properties .................................................................................................................................................... 168
20.18 Drawing area springs ....................................................................................................................................................... 169
20.19 About floor areas and members .................................................................................................................................. 170
20.19.1 The priority method .............................................................................................................................. 170
20.19.2 Meshing beams as slabs .......................................................................................................................170
20.20 Slab area properties ..........................................................................................................................................................172
20.21 Drawing slab areas ............................................................................................................................................................174
20.22 About beams ........................................................................................................................................................................ 175
20.23 Beam properties .................................................................................................................................................................175
20.24 Drawing beams ................................................................................................................................................................... 176
20.24.1 To draw a beam .......................................................................................................................................176
20.24.2 To define mitered corners on a beam ............................................................................................177
20.25 Slab opening properties ..................................................................................................................................................177
20.26 Drawing slab openings .................................................................................................................................................... 177
20.27 Checking the structure definition ............................................................................................................................... 177
Chapter 21: Generating the Mesh ......................................................................................... 178
21.1 Generating the mesh automatically ........................................................................................................................... 178
21.1.1 Deciding what mesh element size to use ......................................................................................178
21.1.2 Limitations of the automatic meshing ...........................................................................................179
21.1.3 Viewing the finite element mesh ..................................................................................................... 180
21.1.4 Improving the mesh .............................................................................................................................. 180
21.2 Selectively refining the mesh ........................................................................................................................................182
21.2.1 Using point and line supports to refine the mesh .................................................................... 183
Chapter 22: Manually Drawing the Finite Elements ................................................................185
22.1 Using the Element layer .................................................................................................................................................. 185
22.2 About column elements and wall elements ............................................................................................................185
22.3 Column element properties ...........................................................................................................................................185
22.4 Drawing column elements ............................................................................................................................................. 186
22.4.1 To draw a column element .................................................................................................................186
22.4.2 To copy columns from below to above ......................................................................................... 186
22.5 Wall element properties ................................................................................................................................................. 187
22.6 Drawing wall elements ....................................................................................................................................................187
22.6.1 To draw wall elements on slab elements ..................................................................................... 187
22.6.2 To draw wall elements where there are no slab elements ...................................................188
22.6.3 To copy walls from below to above ................................................................................................ 188
22.7 About point and line supports ......................................................................................................................................188
22.8 Point support properties ................................................................................................................................................ 188
22.9 Drawing point supports .................................................................................................................................................. 189
22.10 Line support properties .................................................................................................................................................. 189
22.11 Drawing line supports ..................................................................................................................................................... 189
22.12 About springs .......................................................................................................................................................................189
22.13 Point spring properties ................................................................................................................................................... 190
22.14 Drawing point springs ..................................................................................................................................................... 190

22.15 Line spring properties ..................................................................................................................................................... 190
22.16 Drawing line springs ........................................................................................................................................................ 191
22.17 Area spring properties .................................................................................................................................................... 191
22.18 Drawing area springs ....................................................................................................................................................... 191
22.19 About floor areas ................................................................................................................................................................191
22.20 Slab element properties ..................................................................................................................................................192
22.21 Drawing the slab elements ............................................................................................................................................ 193
22.21.1 To draw a rectangular slab mesh area .......................................................................................... 193
22.21.2 To draw a polygon slab mesh area ................................................................................................. 193
22.21.3 To draw a single mesh element ........................................................................................................193
22.22 A few final words ............................................................................................................................................................... 194
Chapter 23: Drawing Loads ................................................................................................... 195
23.1 About self-weight ...............................................................................................................................................................195
23.2 About superposition of loads ........................................................................................................................................195
23.3 Point load properties ....................................................................................................................................................... 196
23.4 Drawing point loads ......................................................................................................................................................... 196
23.5 Line load properties ..........................................................................................................................................................196
23.6 Drawing line loads .............................................................................................................................................................197
23.6.1 Standard line load .................................................................................................................................. 197
23.6.2 Perimeter line load ................................................................................................................................ 198
23.7 Area load properties .........................................................................................................................................................198
23.8 Drawing area loads ........................................................................................................................................................... 199
23.9 Copying loads ...................................................................................................................................................................... 199
23.10 Temperature Area Load properties ............................................................................................................................200
23.11 Drawing temperature area loads ................................................................................................................................. 200
23.12 Shrinkage Area Load Properties .................................................................................................................................. 201
23.13 Drawing shrinkage area loads .......................................................................................................................................201
Chapter 24: Creating Pattern Loading ....................................................................................203
24.1 Deciding how many load patterns to use ................................................................................................................ 203
24.2 Drawing load patterns ..................................................................................................................................................... 204
24.3 Load pattern filtering ....................................................................................................................................................... 205
24.3.1 Effect of mesh on load pattern ..........................................................................................................205
Chapter 25: Defining Design Strips ........................................................................................ 211
25.1 Definition of a design strip .............................................................................................................................................211
25.2 Design strip terminology ................................................................................................................................................211
25.3 Understanding how a design strip works ............................................................................................................... 212
25.4 The design strip process .................................................................................................................................................213
25.5 Span segment properties ................................................................................................................................................214
25.6 Creating span segments .................................................................................................................................................. 224
25.6.1 Generating span segments automatically .................................................................................... 225
25.6.2 Drawing span segments manually .................................................................................................. 225
25.7 Creating span segment strips (design strips) .........................................................................................................226
25.7.1 To generate span segment strips .....................................................................................................226
25.7.2 To generate some span segment strips .........................................................................................226
25.8 Defining span segment widths and strip widths manually ............................................................................. 227
25.8.1 Defining span segment boundaries manually ............................................................................227
25.8.2 Defining strip boundaries manually ...............................................................................................228
25.9 Cross Section Trimming ..................................................................................................................................................233

25.9.1 About cross section trimming ........................................................................................................... 233
25.9.2 About shear core .....................................................................................................................................234
25.9.3 Shear core in slabs ................................................................................................................................. 236
25.9.4 Viewing a perspective of design strip cross sections ..............................................................236
25.9.5 Single Cross Section Trimming .........................................................................................................237
25.9.6 Selecting cross section trimming .....................................................................................................240
25.9.7 Inter Cross Section Slope Limit Trimming .................................................................................. 240
25.10 Improving the mesh ..........................................................................................................................................................242
25.11 Additional design strip information .......................................................................................................................... 242
25.12 Irregular column layouts ................................................................................................................................................ 243
25.12.1 Design Strip Skew Angles ....................................................................................................................243
25.12.2 Effect of tendon components on design strip cross sections ...............................................247
25.12.3 Examples of irregular grids ................................................................................................................249
25.12.4 Drawing design strips near walls ..................................................................................................... 263
25.12.5 Changing from PT to RC design ........................................................................................................ 264
25.13 Miscellaneous tips ............................................................................................................................................................. 264
25.14 A final word on design strips ........................................................................................................................................ 265
Chapter 26: Defining Design Sections .................................................................................... 266
26.1 Using design sections ....................................................................................................................................................... 266
26.2 Design section properties ................................................................................................................................................266
26.3 Drawing design sections .................................................................................................................................................269
26.4 About ignore depths ......................................................................................................................................................... 270
26.4.1 When to use ignore depths .................................................................................................................270
26.4.2 Examples of concrete form that should use ignore depth .................................................... 270
26.4.3 Effect of ignore depth on reinforcement location .................................................................... 273
26.5 A final word on design sections ...................................................................................................................................273
Chapter 27: Defining Punching Shear Checks .........................................................................274
27.1 About punching shear checks .......................................................................................................................................274
27.2 Punching shear check properties and options ......................................................................................................274
27.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................ 274
27.2.2 Ancon Shearfix Parameters ................................................................................................................277
27.2.3 AS3600 specific options .......................................................................................................................277
27.2.4 BS 8110/EC2 specific options ...........................................................................................................277
27.3 Drawing punching shear checks ................................................................................................................................. 278
27.4 A final word on punching shear checks ................................................................................................................... 278
Chapter 28: Drawing Reinforcement Bars ............................................................................. 279
28.1 Reinforcement bar definitions ..................................................................................................................................... 279
28.1.1 About User and Program Reinforcement .....................................................................................279
28.1.2 Reinforcement object types ................................................................................................................ 279
28.2 Reinforcement properties ..............................................................................................................................................280
28.3 Transverse Reinforcement properties ...................................................................................................................... 282
28.4 About drawing reinforcement ......................................................................................................................................284
28.4.1 Expected workflows ..............................................................................................................................284
28.5 Drawing concentrated reinforcement ...................................................................................................................... 284
28.5.1 Drawing concentrated reinforcement ...........................................................................................284
28.5.2 Drawing concentrated reinforcement in two directions .......................................................285
28.6 Drawing distributed reinforcement .......................................................................................................................... 285
28.6.1 Drawing distributed reinforcement ............................................................................................... 285

28.7 Drawing transverse reinforcement .............................................................................................................................286
28.7.1 Drawing transverse reinforcement ................................................................................................. 286
28.8 Concentrated and distributed reinforcement drawing examples ................................................................ 286
28.9 Transverse reinforcement drawing examples ....................................................................................................... 291
28.10 Other reinforcement plan tools ................................................................................................................................... 293
28.10.1 The Orient Reinforcement tool .........................................................................................................293
28.10.2 The Skew Reinforcement Extent tool ............................................................................................ 294
28.10.3 Auto Hook tool ......................................................................................................................................... 294
28.11 Layout and Detailing Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 298
28.12 Reinforcement Text Formatting ...................................................................................................................................299
28.12.1 Concentrated and distributed reinforcement callouts ...........................................................299
28.12.2 Transverse reinforcement callouts ..................................................................................................300
28.12.3 SSR Callout .................................................................................................................................................301
28.12.4 Examples of reinforcement text formatting ................................................................................302
28.13 About SSR callouts and SSR rails: ............................................................................................................................... 302
Chapter 29: Defining Tendons ............................................................................................... 303
29.1 Tendon definitions ............................................................................................................................................................ 303
29.1.1 Post-Tensioning terminology and definitions ........................................................................... 303
29.1.2 Using the latitude and longitude prestressing folders ........................................................... 304
29.2 Tendon Parameters Layer ............................................................................................................................................. 304
29.2.1 Tendon Parameters object types .....................................................................................................304
29.2.2 Banded Tendon Polyline and Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral Properties ...............305
29.2.3 Distributed Tendon Overlap and Tendon Void Properties .................................................. 308
29.2.4 Profile Polyline Properties ................................................................................................................. 308
29.2.5 Jack Region Properties .......................................................................................................................... 309
29.3 Tendon Parameters Group ............................................................................................................................................. 310
29.3.1 Viewing the Tendon Parameters Group ........................................................................................ 310
29.4 Manual Tendon Layer ....................................................................................................................................................... 310
29.4.1 Tendon properties ................................................................................................................................. 311
29.5 About creating tendons ...................................................................................................................................................312
29.5.1 All tendon definition done on the tendon parameters layers ............................................. 313
29.5.2 Most tendon definition done on the tendon parameters layers ........................................ 313
29.5.3 All work done on manual tendon layers .......................................................................................313
29.6 Drawing banded tendon polylines ............................................................................................................................. 313
29.7 Drawing distributed tendon quadrilaterals ........................................................................................................... 314
29.8 Defining profiles for banded tendon polylines and distributed tendon quadrilaterals ......................314
29.8.1 Drawing Profile Polylines ................................................................................................................... 315
29.8.2 Defining profile polylines using the Generate Profile Polylines tool ............................... 315
29.8.3 Defining span polylines using the Generate Span Polylines tool .......................................316
29.9 Other tendon parameter plan objects and tools ...................................................................................................317
29.9.1 Drawing Tendon Voids .........................................................................................................................317
29.9.2 Drawing Jack Regions ............................................................................................................................ 317
29.9.3 Split banded tendon polyline tool ................................................................................................... 317
29.9.4 Split profile polyline tool ......................................................................................................................318
29.9.5 Generate program tendons tool ....................................................................................................... 318
29.10 Tendon parameter drawing examples ..................................................................................................................... 318
29.11 Tendon parameter drawing and text formatting .................................................................................................319
29.11.1 Banded tendon polyline formatting options ...............................................................................319
29.11.2 Distributed tendon quadrilateral formatting options ............................................................ 320
29.12 Optimization parameters for tendons ....................................................................................................................... 321

29.13 About drawing individual tendons ............................................................................................................................ 322
29.14 Drawing single tendons .................................................................................................................................................. 322
29.14.1 Drawing a half-span tendon ...............................................................................................................323
29.14.2 Drawing a full-span tendon ................................................................................................................323
29.14.3 Drawing a multi-span tendon with the tendon polyline ....................................................... 323
29.15 Drawing multiple tendons ............................................................................................................................................. 323
29.15.1 Tendon panel layout options .............................................................................................................324
29.16 Editing tendons ...................................................................................................................................................................328
29.16.1 Calc profile tool ........................................................................................................................................328
29.16.2 Change profiles tool ...............................................................................................................................328
29.17 About jacks ........................................................................................................................................................................... 329
29.18 Jack properties .................................................................................................................................................................... 329
29.19 Drawing the jacks .............................................................................................................................................................. 330
Chapter 30: Designing and Optimizing Post-tensioning ........................................................... 331
30.1 What does RAM Concept’s optimization achieve? ................................................................................................331
30.2 What doesn’t RAM Concept’s optimization achieve? .......................................................................................... 331
30.3 How does the optimization work? ...............................................................................................................................332
30.4 Optimizable Objects ...........................................................................................................................................................332
30.4.1 Banded Tendon Polyline ...................................................................................................................... 332
30.4.2 Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral ....................................................................................................333
30.4.3 Profile Polylines ....................................................................................................................................... 334
30.4.4 Optimization Regions .............................................................................................................................335
30.5 The Optimization Process ............................................................................................................................................... 337
30.5.1 Defining Tendons and Profile Polylines .........................................................................................337
30.5.2 Setting Optimizable Properties ......................................................................................................... 338
30.5.3 Defining Optimization Regions ..........................................................................................................338
30.5.4 Starting an Optimization ...................................................................................................................... 339
30.5.5 Saving Optimization Data .....................................................................................................................340
30.5.6 Monitoring a Running Optimization ................................................................................................341
30.6 How Optimization Achieves Better Designs ............................................................................................................344
30.6.1 Slab Thickness Comparison Analysis ..............................................................................................344
Chapter 31: Using Live Load Reduction ................................................................................. 346
31.1 About Live Load Reduction ........................................................................................................................................... 346
31.2 Live Load Reduction Options ........................................................................................................................................346
31.3 Setting the Live Load Reduction Code ...................................................................................................................... 346
31.4 Live Loading Types ........................................................................................................................................................... 347
31.5 Live Load Reduction Parameters ................................................................................................................................348
31.6 Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters ......................................................................................................... 348
31.7 Implementation of Live Load Reduction ................................................................................................................. 349
Chapter 32: Calculating Results ............................................................................................. 350
32.1 Calculating the results ..................................................................................................................................................... 350
32.1.1 Calculating all of the results ...............................................................................................................350
32.1.2 Partially calculating the results ........................................................................................................350
32.1.3 Calculation options ................................................................................................................................ 351
32.1.4 General options ....................................................................................................................................... 352
32.1.5 Code options ............................................................................................................................................. 353
32.1.6 Zero tension iteration options .......................................................................................................... 353
32.1.7 Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters ......................................................................354

32.1.8 Load History / ECR tab ..........................................................................................................................354
32.1.9 Vibration options .....................................................................................................................................357
32.2 About analysis errors .......................................................................................................................................................360
32.3 Recalculating ........................................................................................................................................................................360
32.4 Calculating load history deflections ...........................................................................................................................360
32.5 Calculating vibration analysis ...................................................................................................................................... 361
32.6 Reviewing the calc log ..................................................................................................................................................... 361
32.6.1 To open the Calc Log ............................................................................................................................. 361
32.6.2 To open the Load History Calc Log ................................................................................................. 361
32.6.3 To open the Vibration Calc Log ........................................................................................................ 361
32.7 Decreasing calculation time .......................................................................................................................................... 361
Chapter 33: Viewing the Results ........................................................................................... 363
33.1 Type of results .....................................................................................................................................................................363
33.2 Viewing frequently used results ..................................................................................................................................363
33.2.1 Viewing reinforcement results ......................................................................................................... 364
33.2.2 Viewing status ..........................................................................................................................................364
33.2.3 Viewing deflections ............................................................................................................................... 365
33.2.4 Viewing support reactions ................................................................................................................. 365
33.2.5 Viewing post-tensioning precompression (P/A) ......................................................................366
33.2.6 Viewing balanced load percentages ............................................................................................... 366
33.2.7 Viewing bending moment contours ............................................................................................... 367
33.2.8 Viewing section stresses ..................................................................................................................... 367
33.2.9 Viewing punching shear results .......................................................................................................367
33.2.10 Viewing live load reduction results ................................................................................................ 368
33.2.11 Viewing soil bearing pressures ........................................................................................................ 368
33.3 Viewing other results ....................................................................................................................................................... 369
33.3.1 Changing which result objects are visible ................................................................................... 369
33.3.2 Changing which results plot .............................................................................................................. 369
33.3.3 Creating new result plans ................................................................................................................... 370
33.4 Section distribution plots ............................................................................................................................................... 372
33.4.1 Distribution plot values ....................................................................................................................... 372
33.4.2 Moment distribution plots ..................................................................................................................372
33.4.3 Shear distribution plots ....................................................................................................................... 373
33.4.4 Axial force distribution plots .............................................................................................................374
33.4.5 Selected distribution plots ..................................................................................................................374
33.4.6 Effects of averaging ................................................................................................................................374
33.4.7 Summary .................................................................................................................................................... 375
33.5 Miscellaneous results information .............................................................................................................................375
33.5.1 Top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement ..............................................................................375
33.5.2 Reinforcement bar lengths .................................................................................................................376
33.5.3 Orientation of reinforcement ............................................................................................................ 376
33.5.4 Shear reinforcement ............................................................................................................................. 377
33.5.5 Punching Shear Results ........................................................................................................................377
Chapter 34: Plotting Results ..................................................................................................379
34.1 Setting the plotted results ..............................................................................................................................................379
34.2 Slab ...........................................................................................................................................................................................379
34.2.1 About slab plotting contexts .............................................................................................................. 380
34.2.2 Max and Min context slab plot limitations ...................................................................................381
34.3 Reaction ................................................................................................................................................................................. 382

34.4 Strip ...........................................................................................................................................................................................386
34.5 Section Analysis ..................................................................................................................................................................388
34.6 Section Design ..................................................................................................................................................................... 389
34.6.1 About section design “context” plots ............................................................................................. 390
34.6.2 About skyline plots ................................................................................................................................ 391
34.7 Punching Analysis ..............................................................................................................................................................392
34.7.1 Punching Shear Results ........................................................................................................................393
34.8 Vibration Analysis ............................................................................................................................................................. 394
34.8.1 Vibration Results .................................................................................................................................... 394
34.9 Plot Animation Controls ...................................................................................................................................................395
34.9.1 Playing the Animation ........................................................................................................................... 396
34.10 Difference Plot Controls ..................................................................................................................................................396
Chapter 35: Using the Auditor ...............................................................................................398
35.1 How the Auditor can assist the design process .................................................................................................... 398
35.2 About the three design steps ........................................................................................................................................ 398
35.3 About the information displayed by the Auditor .................................................................................................399
35.4 Using the Auditor ............................................................................................................................................................... 401
35.4.1 To use the Auditor for the design summary ............................................................................... 401
35.5 Using the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning ............................................................................................401
35.6 About the information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor ...............................................................402
35.7 Using the Punching Check Auditor .............................................................................................................................403
35.7.1 To use the Auditor for the design summary ............................................................................... 403
Chapter 36: Using the Report Viewer .................................................................................... 404
36.1 Using the Report Viewer .................................................................................................................................................404
36.2 Collapsing Sections ............................................................................................................................................................404
36.3 Searching for Text ..............................................................................................................................................................404
36.4 Saving Reports .................................................................................................................................................................... 405
36.4.1 Saving One Report ...................................................................................................................................405
36.4.2 Saving All Reports .................................................................................................................................. 405
36.5 Opening Previously Saved Reports ............................................................................................................................ 405
36.6 Printing Reports ................................................................................................................................................................. 406
Chapter 37: Using the estimate ............................................................................................. 407
37.1 Viewing the estimate ........................................................................................................................................................407
37.2 What the estimate calculates ........................................................................................................................................ 407
37.3 Editing the unit costs ........................................................................................................................................................407
37.4 About unit costs ..................................................................................................................................................................408
Chapter 38: Printing ..............................................................................................................409
38.1 Basic printing instructions ............................................................................................................................................ 409
38.1.1 To print the report ................................................................................................................................. 409
38.2 General printing options .................................................................................................................................................410
38.2.1 Printer selection ......................................................................................................................................410
38.2.2 Page range ................................................................................................................................................. 410
38.2.3 Number of copies ....................................................................................................................................410
38.2.4 Printing to PDF ........................................................................................................................................ 410
38.3 Select and Configure Printer options ........................................................................................................................ 410
38.3.1 To change the print setup options .................................................................................................. 411
38.3.2 Printer selection ......................................................................................................................................411

38.3.3 Paper size and source ........................................................................................................................... 411
38.3.4 Default orientation .................................................................................................................................411
38.3.5 Margin size ................................................................................................................................................ 411
38.4 Determining the fit of plans ...........................................................................................................................................412
38.4.1 To specify the print scale .................................................................................................................... 412
38.4.2 To specify the printed area on the plan ........................................................................................ 412
38.4.3 To specify the printed area with coordinates ............................................................................ 412
38.5 Printing the desired perspective viewpoint ...........................................................................................................412
38.5.1 To show the set print viewpoint on screen .................................................................................413
38.6 Previewing the print job ................................................................................................................................................. 413
38.6.1 To preview the active window print job ...................................................................................... 413
38.6.2 To preview the report print job ....................................................................................................... 413
38.6.3 Zooming ...................................................................................................................................................... 414
38.6.4 Viewing multiple pages at once ........................................................................................................414
38.6.5 Paging through the print job ..............................................................................................................414
38.7 Printing optimizations .....................................................................................................................................................414
38.7.1 Customizing page orientation ........................................................................................................... 414
38.7.2 Customizing the printed appearance of plans and perspectives .......................................415
38.8 Changing the report contents .......................................................................................................................................415
38.8.1 Including items in the report .............................................................................................................416
38.8.2 Reordering report items ......................................................................................................................418
Chapter 39: Exporting Plans and Tables ................................................................................ 419
39.1 Exporting a plan ................................................................................................................................................................. 419
39.1.1 Selecting the text size ............................................................................................................................419
39.2 Exporting a table ................................................................................................................................................................ 419
Chapter 40: Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System .......................................... 421
40.1 About the export of reactions .......................................................................................................................................421
40.1.1 Special handling of the Self-Dead Loading and the Balance Loading during export .421
40.1.2 Special handling of the Partition Loading during export ....................................................... 422
40.1.3 The export of reactions process .......................................................................................................422
40.1.4 About export reactions access and consistency checking .................................................... 423
40.1.5 Checks performed before choosing export stories .................................................................. 423
40.1.6 Checks performed after choosing export stories ......................................................................424
40.1.7 Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete ....................................................................... 424
40.1.8 How the RAM Structural System - RAM Concept link works ...............................................424
40.2 About the export of geometry ...................................................................................................................................... 425
40.2.1 About errors and ambiguities ........................................................................................................... 427
Chapter 41: Using Strip Wizard ............................................................................................. 428
41.1 Starting Strip Wizard ........................................................................................................................................................428
41.2 Specifying general parameters .................................................................................................................................... 428
41.3 Entering span data ............................................................................................................................................................ 429
41.3.1 One-way and two-way systems ........................................................................................................429
41.3.2 Beam systems ...........................................................................................................................................430
41.3.3 Joist systems ............................................................................................................................................. 430
41.4 Entering support data ......................................................................................................................................................430
41.4.1 Support (above and below) properties .........................................................................................431
41.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels .............................................................................................................................431
41.5.1 Drop cap and drop panel properties ..............................................................................................431

41.6 Entering the loads ..............................................................................................................................................................431
41.6.1 Load properties ....................................................................................................................................... 432
41.7 Specifying the post-tensioning .....................................................................................................................................432
41.7.1 General PT information ....................................................................................................................... 432
41.7.2 Balance load ..............................................................................................................................................432
41.7.3 Profiling ...................................................................................................................................................... 433
41.8 Specifying reinforcement ............................................................................................................................................... 433
41.8.1 Reinforcing bar ........................................................................................................................................ 433
41.8.2 Reinforcement clear cover ................................................................................................................. 433
41.8.3 Punching shear checks ......................................................................................................................... 434
41.9 Completing Strip Wizard ................................................................................................................................................ 434
41.10 Generating the mesh and calculating results .........................................................................................................434
41.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings ...............................................................................................................434
41.11.1 To load strip wizard settings .............................................................................................................435
41.11.2 To save Strip Wizard settings ............................................................................................................435
Chapter 42: General Tips .......................................................................................................436
42.1 Beams ......................................................................................................................................................................................436
42.2 Walls ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 437
42.2.1 Drawing connecting walls ...................................................................................................................437
42.2.2 Walls above ................................................................................................................................................ 437
42.2.3 The difference between walls above and upstand beams of similar proportions ..... 438
42.3 Restraint ................................................................................................................................................................................ 438
42.4 Miscellaneous ...................................................................................................................................................................... 439
42.4.1 Templates .................................................................................................................................................. 439
42.4.2 Adding plans ............................................................................................................................................. 439
42.4.3 Copying and moving objects ..............................................................................................................439
42.4.4 Expanding tool buttons ........................................................................................................................439
42.4.5 The Utility tool ......................................................................................................................................... 440
42.4.6 Left Wall and Right Wall tools ...........................................................................................................440
42.4.7 Changing multiple tendon profile points ..................................................................................... 440
42.4.8 Plotting Results ........................................................................................................................................440
42.4.9 Reducing the information shown on plans ................................................................................. 440
42.4.10 Load balancing .........................................................................................................................................440
42.4.11 The Auditor ............................................................................................................................................... 441
Chapter 43: Frequently Asked Questions .............................................................................. 442
43.1 Capabilities and Modeling ..............................................................................................................................................442
43.2 Files ..........................................................................................................................................................................................443
43.3 Plans and perspectives .................................................................................................................................................... 444
43.4 Units .........................................................................................................................................................................................445
43.5 Codes ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 445
43.6 Sign Conventions ................................................................................................................................................................446
43.7 Structure ................................................................................................................................................................................ 446
43.7.1 Mesh Input layer ..................................................................................................................................... 446
43.7.2 Element layer ........................................................................................................................................... 447
43.7.3 Columns ...................................................................................................................................................... 447
43.7.4 Walls .............................................................................................................................................................447
43.7.5 Mats (rafts) ................................................................................................................................................448
43.8 Tendons ..................................................................................................................................................................................449
43.9 Loadings .................................................................................................................................................................................452

43.9.1 Lateral Self Equilibrium Example .....................................................................................................452
43.10 Analysis .................................................................................................................................................................................. 454
43.11 Design Issues ....................................................................................................................................................................... 454
43.12 Results .................................................................................................................................................................................... 454
43.12.1 Reactions .................................................................................................................................................... 455
43.12.2 Plots ..............................................................................................................................................................455
43.12.3 Torsion ........................................................................................................................................................ 457
43.12.4 Envelopes ...................................................................................................................................................457
43.12.5 Reinforcement ......................................................................................................................................... 457
43.12.6 AS3600 specific reinforcement questions ................................................................................... 458
43.12.7 BS8110 / TR43 specific reinforcement questions ................................................................... 459
43.12.8 Punching Shear ........................................................................................................................................460
43.12.9 Shear reinforcement (one-way) .......................................................................................................462
43.12.10 Deflection ................................................................................................................................................... 463
43.12.11 Soil bearing ................................................................................................................................................463
43.13 Performance .........................................................................................................................................................................464
Chapter 44: Warnings and Errors ........................................................................................... 465
44.1 To show an object number ............................................................................................................................................ 465
44.2 Meshing ................................................................................................................................................................................... 465
44.2.1 Two or more slab areas or beams with the same priority overlap at (x,y) ...................465
44.2.2 Two or more beam areas overlap with conflicting stiffnesses at (x,y) ............................ 466
44.2.3 Vertical gaps in beam elevation at (x,y) .........................................................................................466
44.2.4 Different concrete mixes specified at (x,y) ...................................................................................466
44.2.5 Line is too short at (x,y) ....................................................................................................................... 466
44.2.6 Feature eliminated at (x,y) ................................................................................................................. 467
44.2.7 Recursion too deep ................................................................................................................................ 467
44.2.8 An error has been found. Two column elements below the slab are at the same
location. Delete column element #a or #b. ..................................................................................467
44.2.9 An error has been found. A column element below the slab is not attached to the slab.
Revise column element #a (below the slab) ...............................................................................467
44.2.10 It is good modeling practice to connect wall centerlines. Click on the Fix button to
move wall endpoints to a nearby centerline .............................................................................. 468
44.3 Loads ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 468
44.3.1 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A point load is not on the
slab. Revise point load #a. .................................................................................................................. 468
44.3.2 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A line load is not totally on
the slab. Revise line load #a. ..............................................................................................................468
44.3.3 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A tendon is not totally on the
slab. Revise the tendon at #a. .............................................................................................................468
44.3.4 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. An area load is not on the
slab. Revise area load #a. ..................................................................................................................... 469
44.4 Tendons ..................................................................................................................................................................................469
44.4.1 Tendon #a has a radius (b) that is less than the minimum allowable (c). .....................469
44.4.2 Tendon #a is harped, and hence violates the minimum allowable radius (b) .............469
44.4.3 Tendon #a is a simple parabola, and hence violates the minimum allowable radius (b) 470
44.4.4 Cannot auto-position profile point at (x,y) due to profile point value ............................ 470
44.4.5 Cannot auto-position the profile elevation for tendon (a) at (b) because the tendon
represents a partial half span .............................................................................................................470
44.4.6 An error has occurred while trying to calculate a profile. A profile point is not on the
slab. Click on the Fix button to correct the profile point at (x,y). ...................................... 470

44.4.7 Tendon is not on slab at (a). ................................................................................................................470
44.4.8 Tendon elevation conflict at (a) (Profile Point above slab soffit step?) ...........................471
44.4.9 An error has occurred while trying to calculate a profile. A profile point is not within
the slab (vertically). Adjust the profile at (x,y). .........................................................................471
44.4.10 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon profiles. A tendon is out of
the slab at (x,y). ....................................................................................................................................... 471
44.4.11 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective stresses. A tendon
has a different number of strands than an adjacent tendon. Investigate tendon #a. 471
44.4.12 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective stresses. Two
connected tendons have inconsistent half span ratios. Revise tendon #a. ................... 471
44.4.13 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective stresses. Two
connected tendons have different post-tensioning systems. Revise tendon #a. ......... 472
is not connected to any jacks. Investigate tendon #a. [If any tendons are stressed then
all tendons must be stressed.] .......................................................................................................... 472
is stressed by two jacks with different wobble friction coefficients/with different
angular friction coefficients/with different long-term losses. .............................................472
is connected with other tendons in a circular fashion. Revise tendon (a) ......................472
is jacked to a stress higher than its yield stress. Revise the jack connected to tendon
#a .................................................................................................................................................................... 473
44.4.18 An error has occurred while trying to stress a tendon. There are no tendons at a jack/
There are multiple tendons at a jack. Investigate jack #a ......................................................473
44.5 Load History Deflections ................................................................................................................................................ 473
44.5.1 An error has been found while calculating load history deflections. The floor may have
incomplete design strip/cross section coverage to accurately calculate load history
deflections. The slab coverages are a and b in orthogonal directions .............................473
44.6 Optimization ......................................................................................................................................................................... 473
44.7 Miscellaneous ...................................................................................................................................................................... 475
44.7.1 An error has occurred while triangularizing the stiffness matrix. The structure is
unstable at (a). Revise the structure. ............................................................................................. 475
44.7.2 An error has occurred: (a) has horizontal loads, but the structure is automatically
stabilized in the X and Y directions ..................................................................................................475
44.7.3 The code rules selected in Rule Set “Service” (Sustained Service / Max Service) do not
appear compatible with the load factors in the load combinations using the rule set.
This is likely an error. ........................................................................................................................... 475
44.7.4 Load Combination “Service” (Sustained Service / Max Service) has unusual balance
and / or hyperstatic load factors. This is likely an error. ......................................................476
44.7.5 Rule Set “Strength Design” is being used by load combinations that appear to have
load factors set for different purposes. This is likely an error. ...........................................476
44.7.6 The mat / raft is likely unstable. There is less that 25% contact area. ........................... 476
44.7.7 Punching Check #a is not located at a column ...........................................................................477
44.7.8 Too many slab shapes intersecting the column shape at (x,y) ........................................... 477
44.7.9 An error has been found. The cross section trimming for strip ab-c has caused there to
be no concrete remaining at one or more locations. ...............................................................477
44.7.10 An error has been found. [Design strip] ab-c has reinforcing bars with too much cover
(the bottom bar is closer to the top than the top bar). ...........................................................477
44.7.11 A cross section in design strip ab-c has no shear core ............................................................ 477
44.7.12 A cross section in design strip ab-c has a very small shear core ........................................ 478

44.7.13 ab-c contains user transverse reinforcement but has multiple shear cores. Shear/
torsion calculations may be approximate .....................................................................................478
44.7.14 ab-c contains user reinforcement that is not within the primary (largest) shear core.
This transverse reinforcement will be ignored ..........................................................................478
44.7.15 An error has been found. ab-c contains multiple user transverse rebar regions ........478
Chapter 45: Warnings and Errors Management Tool .............................................................. 479
45.1 To launch the warnings and errors management tool ....................................................................................... 479
45.2 Using the warning and error tool to find and resolve problems ....................................................................480
45.3 Hiding and Unhiding Individual Warnings or Errors ..........................................................................................481
45.4 Filtering Warnings and Errors by Type .................................................................................................................... 481
Chapter 46: Simple RC Slab Tutorial ...................................................................................... 482
46.1 Defining the structure ......................................................................................................................................................482
46.1.1 Define the column locations and properties ...............................................................................482
46.1.2 Draw the slab area ................................................................................................................................. 483
46.1.3 Hatch the slab area .................................................................................................................................484
46.1.4 Generate the mesh ................................................................................................................................. 484
46.1.5 View the mesh ..........................................................................................................................................484
46.1.6 View the structure ..................................................................................................................................485
46.2 Drawing the loads ..............................................................................................................................................................486
46.3 Defining the design strips .............................................................................................................................................. 487
46.3.1 Draw latitude design strips ................................................................................................................ 487
46.3.2 Draw longitude design strips ............................................................................................................ 489
46.3.3 Regenerate the mesh .............................................................................................................................490
46.4 Drawing punching shear checks ................................................................................................................................. 490
46.5 Calculate and view the results ......................................................................................................................................491
46.5.1 Design status ..............................................................................................................................................491
46.5.2 Design reinforcement ........................................................................................................................... 494
46.5.3 Design reinforcement plots ................................................................................................................498
46.5.4 Punching shear ........................................................................................................................................ 500
46.5.5 Deflection ................................................................................................................................................... 502
46.5.6 Bending Moments ...................................................................................................................................506
46.6 Drawing reinforcement ...................................................................................................................................................507
46.6.1 Drawing a bottom reinforcement mat ...........................................................................................508
Chapter 47: PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08 ....................................................................... 511
47.2 Import the CAD drawing .................................................................................................................................................511
47.3 Define the structure ..........................................................................................................................................................511
47.3.1 Show the drawing on the mesh input layer ................................................................................ 511
47.3.3 Draw the balcony slab area ................................................................................................................ 513
47.3.4 Draw the drop caps ................................................................................................................................514
47.3.5 Draw the opening ................................................................................................................................... 515
47.3.6 Hatch the slab areas .............................................................................................................................. 516
47.3.8 Define the wall location and properties ....................................................................................... 517
47.3.10 View the mesh ..........................................................................................................................................519
47.4 Define the loads .................................................................................................................................................................. 520

47.4.1 Define the typical live load ................................................................................................................. 520
47.4.2 Define the balcony live load ............................................................................................................... 520
47.4.3 Define the other dead loading ...........................................................................................................521
47.5 Define the post-tensioning .............................................................................................................................................522
47.5.1 Define the manual latitude tendons Pt. 1 .....................................................................................522
47.5.5 Define a latitude tendon polyline .................................................................................................... 525
47.5.6 Define the latitude profile polylines ...............................................................................................526
47.5.7 Define the manual longitude tendons Pt. 1 ................................................................................. 527
47.5.12 Replace some manual longitude tendons with a distributed tendon quadrilateral ..532
47.5.13 Define the longitude profile polylines Pt. 1 .................................................................................532
47.6 Create the design strips ...................................................................................................................................................534
47.6.1 Generate the latitude spans ............................................................................................................... 535
47.6.2 Generate the latitude strips ............................................................................................................... 535
47.6.3 Hatch the strips ....................................................................................................................................... 536
47.6.4 Straighten a span segment ................................................................................................................. 536
47.6.5 Edit the span cross section orientation .........................................................................................537
47.6.6 Draw a Span Boundary Polyline .......................................................................................................537
47.6.7 Regenerate the latitude span strips ................................................................................................537
47.6.8 Generate the longitude spans ............................................................................................................538
47.6.10 Delete the span segment over the wall ......................................................................................... 539
47.6.12 Generate the longitude strips ............................................................................................................540
47.6.13 Check for punching shear ................................................................................................................... 540
47.7 Regenerate the mesh ........................................................................................................................................................541
47.8.1 Review Calc Options ..............................................................................................................................542
47.8.2 Calculate ..................................................................................................................................................... 542
47.8.3 View the design strips with tendons ..............................................................................................542
47.8.4 Edit span segment 6-2 .......................................................................................................................... 543
47.8.5 Recalculate ................................................................................................................................................ 543
47.8.6 Design status ............................................................................................................................................ 544
47.8.8 Concrete stresses ....................................................................................................................................548
47.8.9 Deflection ................................................................................................................................................... 549
47.8.10 Bending Moments ...................................................................................................................................552
Chapter 48: PT Flat Plate Tutorial: AS3600-2001 ....................................................................554

48.3.5 Draw the opening ................................................................................................................................... 558
48.3.10 View the mesh ..........................................................................................................................................562
48.4 Define the loads .................................................................................................................................................................. 563
48.5.1 Define the manual latitude tendons Pt. 1 ...................................................................................... 565
48.5.7 Define the longitude tendons Pt. 1 ................................................................................................... 570
48.5.8 Define the longitude tendons Pt. 2 ..................................................................................................571
48.6.3 Hatch the strips ....................................................................................................................................... 576
48.6.13 Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries ...................................... 581
48.8.2 Calculate ..................................................................................................................................................... 584
48.8.6 Recalculate ..................................................................................................................................................586
48.8.7 Design status ............................................................................................................................................ 586

48.8.9 Deflection ................................................................................................................................................... 588
48.8.10 Bending Moments ...................................................................................................................................590
Chapter 49: PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43 ................................................................. 592
49.3.5 Draw the opening ................................................................................................................................... 596
49.3.10 View the mesh ..........................................................................................................................................600
49.4 Define the loads .................................................................................................................................................................. 601
49.5.1 Define the latitude tendons Pt. 1 .......................................................................................................603
49.5.5 Define the latitude tendons Pt. 5 ......................................................................................................606
49.6.3 Hatch the strips ....................................................................................................................................... 613
49.6.11 Edit the span cross section orientation ..........................................................................................616

49.8.2 Calculate ..................................................................................................................................................... 619
49.8.5 Recalculate ................................................................................................................................................ 620
49.8.6 Design status ............................................................................................................................................ 621
49.8.9 Deflection ................................................................................................................................................... 624
49.8.10 Bending Moments ...................................................................................................................................626
Chapter 50: PT Flat Plate Tutorial: EC2 / TR43 ....................................................................... 628
50.3.5 Draw the opening ................................................................................................................................... 632
50.3.10 View the mesh ..........................................................................................................................................636
50.4 Define the loads .................................................................................................................................................................. 637
50.4.1 Define the typical live load .................................................................................................................. 637
50.6.3 Hatch the strips ....................................................................................................................................... 649

50.8.1 Review Calc Options ............................................................................................................................... 655
50.8.2 Calculate ..................................................................................................................................................... 655
50.8.5 Recalculate ................................................................................................................................................ 656
50.8.6 Design status ............................................................................................................................................ 657
50.8.7 Stress and Crack Width Designs .......................................................................................................658
50.8.10 Deflection ................................................................................................................................................... 665
50.8.11 Bending Moments ...................................................................................................................................668
Chapter 51: PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000 .................................................................... 672
51.3.5 Draw the opening ................................................................................................................................... 676
51.3.10 View the mesh ..........................................................................................................................................680
51.4 Define the loads .................................................................................................................................................................. 681

51.6.3 Hatch the strips ....................................................................................................................................... 694
51.6.4 Straighten a span segment ...................................................................................................................694
51.6.6 Draw a Span Boundary Polyline ........................................................................................................696
51.6.13 Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries ...................................... 699
51.8.2 Calculate ..................................................................................................................................................... 702
51.8.3 View the design strips with tendons ...............................................................................................702
51.8.6 Recalculate ................................................................................................................................................ 703
51.8.7 Design Status ............................................................................................................................................ 704
51.8.9 Deflection ................................................................................................................................................... 706
51.8.10 Bending Moments ...................................................................................................................................708
Chapter 52: PT Flat Plate Tutorial: CSA A23.3-04 ................................................................... 710
52.3.5 Draw the opening ................................................................................................................................... 714
52.3.10 View the mesh ..........................................................................................................................................718
52.4 Define the loads .................................................................................................................................................................. 719

52.6.3 Hatch the strips ....................................................................................................................................... 731
52.8.2 Calculate ..................................................................................................................................................... 736
52.8.5 Recalculate ................................................................................................................................................ 738
52.8.6 Design status ............................................................................................................................................ 738
52.8.9 Deflection ................................................................................................................................................... 745
52.8.10 Bending Moments ...................................................................................................................................747
Chapter 53: Mat Foundation Tutorial .................................................................................... 751
53.2.5 Define the area spring location and properties .........................................................................753
53.2.7 View the mesh ..........................................................................................................................................753
53.3 Define the loads .................................................................................................................................................................. 757
53.3.2 Copy to the live (reducible) loading layer ................................................................................... 757
53.3.3 Define the ultimate seismic east loading ......................................................................................758
53.4.1 Draw latitude design strips ................................................................................................................ 760

53.4.3 Hatch the strips ....................................................................................................................................... 762
53.4.4 Edit the cross section orientation ................................................................................................... 763
53.4.6 Draw longitude design strips ............................................................................................................ 764
53.4.8 Edit the cross section orientation ................................................................................................... 766
53.4.9 Regenerate the longitude span strips ............................................................................................767
53.6.2 Calculate ..................................................................................................................................................... 769
53.6.3 Look at reinforcement and design status .....................................................................................769
53.6.4 View Specific Reinforcement .............................................................................................................770
53.6.5 Bearing stresses ...................................................................................................................................... 771
Chapter 54: Strip Wizard Tutorial .......................................................................................... 773
54.1 Start Strip Wizard .............................................................................................................................................................. 773
54.2 Set the general parameters ............................................................................................................................................773
54.3 Enter the span data ........................................................................................................................................................... 774
54.4 Create the supports below .............................................................................................................................................775
54.5 Add drop caps ......................................................................................................................................................................776
54.6 Specify the loads .................................................................................................................................................................776
54.8 Specify the reinforcement parameters .....................................................................................................................777
54.9 Complete the Strip Wizard .............................................................................................................................................777
54.10 Proceed with RAM Concept ........................................................................................................................................... 777
54.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate Tutorial .................................................................................................................. 778
54.12 Conclusion .............................................................................................................................................................................778
Chapter 55: Analysis Notes ................................................................................................... 780
55.1 Review of plate behavior ................................................................................................................................................ 780
55.1.1 In-plane and out-of-plane behavior ................................................................................................780
55.1.2 In-plane behavior ................................................................................................................................... 781
55.1.3 Out-of-plane behavior .......................................................................................................................... 782
55.1.4 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane behavior .................................................................. 784
55.1.5 RAM Concept plotting and relevant axes ..................................................................................... 785
55.2 Finite element analysis ....................................................................................................................................................785
55.2.1 About finite element analysis ............................................................................................................785
55.2.2 Finite element formulation used in RAM Concept ................................................................... 786
55.2.3 Slab element general properties ......................................................................................................786
55.3 Orthotropic behavior ....................................................................................................................................................... 786
55.3.1 K Factors and Instability ..................................................................................................................... 786
55.3.2 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane stiffnesses ............................................................... 787
55.4 Deep beam considerations ............................................................................................................................................ 787
55.4.1 Analysis of slab and beam elements ...............................................................................................787
55.4.2 Analysis and design of deep beams for bending moment and shear ...............................790
55.4.3 Analysis and design of deep beams with transverse bending moments ........................791
55.4.4 Analysis of deep beams with torsion ............................................................................................. 793
55.4.5 Analysis and design of moment transfer through step-beams ...........................................795
55.5 Wall behavior ...................................................................................................................................................................... 796

55.5.1 Walls above slab ......................................................................................................................................796
55.6 Post-tensioning loadings ................................................................................................................................................ 797
55.6.1 Hyperstatic loading ................................................................................................................................797
55.7 Self-equilibrium analysis ................................................................................................................................................ 797
55.7.1 About self-equilibrium analysis ....................................................................................................... 798
55.7.2 Uses of Self-Equilibrium Analyses ...................................................................................................798
55.7.3 Using Self-Equilibrium Analyses ......................................................................................................798
55.7.4 Self-Equilibrium Analyses Details ................................................................................................... 799
55.8 Design strip and design section forces ..................................................................................................................... 800
55.8.1 Design section axes and sign convention .....................................................................................800
55.8.2 Design strip segment axes and sign convention ....................................................................... 800
55.8.3 Design centroids ..................................................................................................................................... 800
55.8.4 Calculating the forces on the cross section ................................................................................. 801
55.8.5 Calculating the balanced load percentages ................................................................................. 801
55.8.6 Using the “Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change” option .................... 802
55.9 Result categories in RAM Concept ..............................................................................................................................803
55.9.1 Standard results ...................................................................................................................................... 803
55.9.2 Envelope results ......................................................................................................................................804
55.9.3 How RAM Concept calculates envelope results .........................................................................804
Chapter 56: Section Design Notes ......................................................................................... 806
56.1 General Design Approach ...............................................................................................................................................806
56.1.1 Strip and Section Design – A 3 Step Process ...............................................................................806
56.1.2 Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain Curves .......................................................... 806
56.1.3 Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves ..........................................................................806
56.1.4 Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains ....................807
56.1.5 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – General Theory .................................808
56.1.6 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation ............ 809
56.1.7 Tendons – External Load or Internal Force? .............................................................................. 809
56.1.8 Tendons – inclusion of force vector on a cross section ..........................................................810
56.1.9 Tendons – calculation of number of ducts ...................................................................................810
56.1.10 Concrete Stress-Strain Curves .......................................................................................................... 810
56.1.11 Creep and Shrinkage Effects .............................................................................................................. 811
56.1.12 Cracked Section Analyses ................................................................................................................... 811
56.1.13 Branson’s Stress Ratio ..........................................................................................................................812
56.1.14 Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio ...................................................................................... 813
56.1.15 Use of ECR ..................................................................................................................................................813
56.1.16 Crack Width Predictions ......................................................................................................................814
56.1.17 “Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations ......................................................................815
56.1.18 Concrete “Core” Determination ........................................................................................................816
56.1.19 Torsion Considerations ........................................................................................................................816
56.1.20 Wood-Armer Torsion Design ............................................................................................................ 817
Chapter 57: Live Load Reduction Notes ................................................................................. 818
57.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets .......................................................818
57.1.1 Loadings ..................................................................................................................................................... 818
57.1.2 Load Combinations and Rule Sets ................................................................................................... 818
57.2 Tributary Area Calculations .......................................................................................................................................... 819
57.3 Influence Area Calculations ...........................................................................................................................................819
57.3.1 Example of Influence Areas ................................................................................................................820
57.4 ASCE-7 2002 Live Load Reduction .............................................................................................................................824

57.5 ASCE-7 2010 Live Load Reduction .............................................................................................................................825
57.6 ASCE-7 2016 Live Load Reduction ..............................................................................................................................825
57.7 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction .....................................................................................................................................825
57.10 IBC 2012 Live Load Reduction ......................................................................................................................................827
57.11 IBC 2015 Live Load Reduction ......................................................................................................................................827
57.12 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction ................................................................................................................................... 827
57.13 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction ............................................................................................................828
57.14 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction ...................................................................................................................... 828
57.15 IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction ...........................................................................................................828
57.16 Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Live Load Reduction ...........................................................................................829
57.17 National Building Code of Canada 2005 Live Load Reduction .......................................................................829
57.18 Mat Foundations ................................................................................................................................................................ 829
57.19 Special Member Considerations ..................................................................................................................................829
57.19.1 Columns Above the Slab ...................................................................................................................... 830
57.19.2 Columns Above and Below the Slab ............................................................................................... 830
Chapter 58: Reinforcement Notes ......................................................................................... 831
58.1 Span detailing ...................................................................................................................................................................... 831
58.1.1 About Concept’s detailing calculations ......................................................................................... 832
58.1.2 Span detailing assumptions ............................................................................................................... 833
58.1.3 ACI 318-99, 318-02, 318-05, 318-08, 318-11 Code Span Detailing Rules .....................834
58.1.4 AS 3600 - 2001 Code Span Detailing Rules ................................................................................. 834
58.1.7 BS 8110 - 1997 Code Span Detailing Rules ................................................................................. 834
58.1.8 CSA A23.3-04 Code Span Detailing Rules ......................................................................................835
58.1.9 IS 456 - 2000 Code Span Detailing Rules ..................................................................................... 835
58.1.10 EC2 Code Span Detailing Rules .........................................................................................................835
58.2 Development lengths / anchorage ............................................................................................................................. 835
58.2.1 ACI 318-99, 318-02, 318-05, 318-08, 318-11 Development Lengths ............................. 837
58.2.2 ACI 318-14 Development Lengths ................................................................................................... 838
58.2.3 AS 3600-2001 and AS 3600-2009 Development Lengths ..................................................... 839
58.2.4 AS 3600-2018 Development Lengths ............................................................................................. 841
58.2.5 BS 8110-1997 Development Lengths ............................................................................................ 842
58.2.6 IS 456-2000 Development Lengths ................................................................................................ 843
58.2.7 EC2 Development Lengths ................................................................................................................. 844
58.2.8 CSA A23.3-04 Development Lengths .............................................................................................. 845
58.3 How RAM Concept lays out longitudinal program reinforcement ...............................................................846
58.4 How RAM Concept details longitudinal user and program reinforcement .............................................. 847
58.5 How Concept treats transverse user and program reinforcement and individual transverse bars 849
58.6 Example 1: reinforcement results .............................................................................................................................. 849
58.6.1 Strength (only) calculations ...............................................................................................................850
58.6.2 Code Minimum and Strength calculations ...................................................................................855
Chapter 59: ACI 318-99 Design .............................................................................................. 861
59.1 ACI 318-99 default loadings ..........................................................................................................................................861
59.1.1 Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading ..................................................................... 861
59.2 ACI 318-99 default load combinations .....................................................................................................................861
59.2.1 All Dead LC ................................................................................................................................................ 862

59.2.2 Initial Service LC ..................................................................................................................................... 862
59.2.3 Service LC: D + L + Lr ............................................................................................................................ 862
59.2.4 Service LC: D + L + S .............................................................................................................................. 862
59.2.5 Sustained Service LC ............................................................................................................................. 863
59.2.6 DL + 0.25LL LC .........................................................................................................................................863
59.2.7 Factored LC: 1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7S ........................................................................................................863
59.2.8 Service Wind LC: D + L + Lr + W .......................................................................................................864
59.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + L + S + W .........................................................................................................864
59.2.10 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + W ................................................................................................................. 864
59.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + L + Lr + 0.7E ............................................................................................. 864
59.2.12 Service Seismic LC: D + L + S + 0.7E ............................................................................................... 865
59.2.13 Service Seismic LC: 0.6D + 0.7E ........................................................................................................865
59.2.14 Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L + 1.28S + 1.6W ....................................................................865
59.2.15 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L + 0.7S + E ..................................................................................866
59.3 ACI 318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors .............................................................................................. 866
59.4 ACI 318-99 Material Behaviors .....................................................................................................................................866
59.4.1 Concrete Behavior ..................................................................................................................................867
59.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behavior ..............................................................................867
59.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior ...........................................................................867
59.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior ..................................................................... 868
59.5 ACI 318-99 code rule selection .................................................................................................................................... 868
59.5.1 Code Minimum Reinforcement .........................................................................................................868
59.5.2 User Minimum Reinforcement .......................................................................................................... 869
59.5.3 Initial Service ............................................................................................................................................870
59.5.4 Service ......................................................................................................................................................... 870
59.5.5 Sustained Service ....................................................................................................................................871
59.5.6 Strength ...................................................................................................................................................... 871
59.5.7 Ductility ...................................................................................................................................................... 872
59.5.8 UBC DL + 0.25 LL .................................................................................................................................... 872
59.6 ACI 318-99 code implementation ...............................................................................................................................873
59.6.1 Section 7.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement ................................................... 873
59.6.2 Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) ...........................................873
59.6.3 Section 10.3.3 Ductility (Non prestressed) ................................................................................. 874
59.6.4 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) ...874
59.6.6 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Non Prestressed) ............................................... 875
59.6.7 Section 11.4 Shear Resistance of Beams (Prestressed) ......................................................... 875
59.6.8 Section 11.6 Beam Torsion .................................................................................................................876
59.6.9 Chapter 13 (Two-way slab systems) ..............................................................................................877
59.6.10 Section 18.4.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit .........................................877
59.6.11 Section 18.4.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit .................................................... 877
59.6.12 Section 18.4.2a Sustained Compressive Stress Limit ..............................................................877
59.6.13 Section 18.4.2b Service Compressive Stress Limit .................................................................. 878
59.6.14 Section 18.4.2c Service Tensile Stress Limit ...............................................................................878
59.6.15 Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed) .........................................................878
59.6.16 Section 18.8.1 Ductility (Prestressed) ...........................................................................................879
59.6.17 Section 18.8.3 Cracking Moment ..................................................................................................... 879
59.6.18 Section 18.9.2 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way ............................................................... 879
59.6.19 Section 18.9.3.2 Midspan Two Way Minimum Reinforcement .......................................... 880
59.6.20 Section 18.9.3.3 Support Two Way Minimum Reinforcement ............................................880
59.6.21 Punching Shear Design .........................................................................................................................881

60.2.1 All Dead LC ................................................................................................................................................ 883
60.2.3 Service LC: D + L + Lr ............................................................................................................................ 883
60.2.4 Service LC: D + L + S .............................................................................................................................. 884
60.2.6 Factored LC: 1.4D ................................................................................................................................... 884
60.2.7 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr ......................................................................................................884
60.2.8 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6Lr ......................................................................................................... 885
60.2.9 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S ........................................................................................................885
60.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S ........................................................................................................... 886
60.2.11 Service Wind LC: D + L + Lr + W .......................................................................................................886
60.2.12 Service Wind LC: D + L + S + W .........................................................................................................886
60.2.14 Service Seismic LC: D + L + Lr + 0.7E ............................................................................................. 887
60.2.15 Service Seismic LC: D + L + S + 0.7E ............................................................................................... 887
60.2.17 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W .............................................................................888
60.2.18 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5S + 1.6W ............................................................................... 888
60.2.19 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W ....................................................................................... 889
60.2.20 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6S + 0.8W ..........................................................................................889
60.2.21 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L+ f2S + E .....................................................................................889
60.3 ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors ............................................................................................... 889
60.5.2 User Minimum Reinforcement .......................................................................................................... 892
60.5.3 Initial Service ............................................................................................................................................893
60.5.4 Service ......................................................................................................................................................... 894
60.5.6 Strength ...................................................................................................................................................... 895
60.5.7 Ductility ...................................................................................................................................................... 895
60.6.10 Section 18.3.3 Service Tensile Stress Limit .................................................................................901

60.6.15 Section 18.4.4 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C Members ................................ 903
61.2.1 All Dead LC ................................................................................................................................................ 908
61.2.3 Service LC: D + L ......................................................................................................................................908
61.2.4 Service LC: D + Lr ....................................................................................................................................909
61.2.5 Service LC: D + S ......................................................................................................................................909
61.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr .......................................................................................................... 909
61.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S ............................................................................................................ 909
61.2.9 Factored LC: 1.4D ................................................................................................................................... 910
61.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr ......................................................................................................910
61.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S ........................................................................................................911
61.2.13 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S ........................................................................................................... 911
61.2.14 Service Wind LC: D + W ....................................................................................................................... 911
61.2.15 Service Wind LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.75W ........................................................................... 912
61.2.16 Service Wind LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S + 0.75W ............................................................................. 912
61.2.18 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.7E .............................................................................................................. 913
61.2.19 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.525E ......................................................................913
61.2.20 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S + 0.525E ........................................................................913
61.5.2 User Minimum Reinforcement ......................................................................................................... 918
61.5.3 Initial Service ............................................................................................................................................919

61.5.4 Service ......................................................................................................................................................... 920
61.5.6 Strength ...................................................................................................................................................... 921
61.5.7 Ductility ...................................................................................................................................................... 921
62.2.1 All Dead LC ................................................................................................................................................ 934
62.2.3 Service LC: D + L ......................................................................................................................................934
62.2.4 Service LC: D + Lr ....................................................................................................................................935
62.2.5 Service LC: D + S ......................................................................................................................................935
62.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr .......................................................................................................... 935
62.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S ............................................................................................................ 935
62.2.9 Factored LC: 1.4D ................................................................................................................................... 936
62.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr ......................................................................................................936
62.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S ........................................................................................................937
62.2.13 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S ........................................................................................................... 937
62.2.14 Service Wind LC: D + W ....................................................................................................................... 937
62.2.19 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.525E ......................................................................939

62.2.27 Factored Seismic LC: 0.9D + E ...........................................................................................................941
62.5.3 Initial Service ............................................................................................................................................945
62.5.4 Service ......................................................................................................................................................... 946
62.5.6 Strength ...................................................................................................................................................... 947
62.5.7 Ductility ...................................................................................................................................................... 947
62.6.12 Section 18.4.1c Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit ......................................................954
Chapter 63: ACI 318-11 Design ............................................................................................... 959
63.2.1 All Dead LC ................................................................................................................................................ 960
63.2.3 Service LC: D + L ......................................................................................................................................960

63.2.4 Service LC: D + Lr ....................................................................................................................................961
63.2.5 Service LC: D + S ......................................................................................................................................961
63.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr .......................................................................................................... 961
63.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S ............................................................................................................ 961
63.2.9 Factored LC: 1.4D ................................................................................................................................... 962
63.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr ......................................................................................................962
63.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S ........................................................................................................963
63.2.13 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S ........................................................................................................... 963
63.2.14 Service Wind LC: D + 0.6W ................................................................................................................. 963
63.2.17 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + 0.6W ...........................................................................................................964
63.2.21 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + W ................................................................................... 965
63.2.22 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5S + W ..................................................................................... 966
63.3 ACI318-11 / ASCE-7 / live load factors ....................................................................................................................967
63.5.3 Initial Service ............................................................................................................................................971
63.5.4 Service ......................................................................................................................................................... 971
63.5.6 Strength ...................................................................................................................................................... 973
63.5.7 Ductility ...................................................................................................................................................... 973
63.6.12 Section 18.4.1c Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit .....................................................980

Chapter 64: ACI 318-14 Design ............................................................................................... 985
64.2.1 All Dead LC ................................................................................................................................................ 986
64.2.3 Service LC: D + L ......................................................................................................................................986
64.2.4 Service LC: D + Lr ....................................................................................................................................987
64.2.5 Service LC: D + S ......................................................................................................................................987
64.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr .......................................................................................................... 987
64.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S ............................................................................................................ 987
64.2.9 Factored LC: 1.4D ................................................................................................................................... 988
64.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr ......................................................................................................988
64.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S ........................................................................................................989
64.2.13 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S ........................................................................................................... 989
64.2.14 Service Wind LC: D + 0.6W ................................................................................................................. 989
64.2.17 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + 0.6W ...........................................................................................................990
64.2.21 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + W ................................................................................... 991
64.2.22 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5S + W ..................................................................................... 992
64.3 ACI318-14 / ASCE-7 / live load factors ....................................................................................................................993
64.5.3 Initial Service ............................................................................................................................................997
64.5.4 Service ......................................................................................................................................................... 997
64.5.6 Strength ...................................................................................................................................................... 998
64.5.7 Ductility ...................................................................................................................................................... 999
64.6.1 Section 7.6.1.1 and 8.6.1.1 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement ............................................ 999

64.6.2 Sections 7.5.2, 8.5.2 and 9.5.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) .....1000
64.6.3 Sections 7.3.3.1, 8.3.3.1, and 9.3.3.1 Ductility (Non prestressed) ...................................1001
64.6.4 Sections 9.6.1.1 and 9.6.1.2 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non
Prestressed) ........................................................................................................................................... 1001
64.6.5 Sections 7.7.2.2 and 9.7.2.2 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non
Prestressed) ............................................................................................................................................ 1002
64.6.6 Sections 7.5.3, 8.5.3 and 9.5.3 Shear Resistance (Non Prestressed) ..............................1002
64.6.7 Sections 7.5.3, 8.5.3 and 9.5.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Prestressed) ................... 1003
64.6.8 Section 9.5.4 Beam Torsion ............................................................................................................. 1003
64.6.10 Section 24.5.2.1 Service Tensile Stress Limit .......................................................................... 1005
64.6.11 Section 24.5.3.1 Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit .....................................1005
64.6.12 Section 24.5.3.2 Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit .................................................1006
64.6.13 Section 24.5.4.1 Sustained Compressive Stress Limit ..........................................................1006
64.6.14 Section 24.5.4.1 Service Compressive Stress Limit ...............................................................1006
64.6.15 Sections 7.7.2.2 and 9.7.2.2 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C Members ...1007
64.6.16 Section 7.5.2, 8.5.2 and 9.5.2 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed) .....................1007
64.6.17 Sections 7.6.2.1, 8.6.2.2 and 9.6.2.1 Cracking Moment ........................................................1008
64.6.18 Sections 7.6.2.3 and 9.6.2.3 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way ..................................1008
64.6.21 Punching Shear Design ......................................................................................................................1009
Chapter 65: AS 3600-2001 Design ........................................................................................1011
65.1 AS 3600-2001 default loadings .................................................................................................................................1011
65.1.1 Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading ...................................................................1011
65.1.2 Snow Loading ........................................................................................................................................ 1011
65.2 AS 3600-2001 default load combinations ............................................................................................................ 1012
65.2.1 All Dead LC ..............................................................................................................................................1012
65.2.2 Initial Service LC ...................................................................................................................................1012
65.2.3 Service LC: D + ψ L .............................................................................................................................. 1012
65.2.4 Service LC: D + ψ L + S ....................................................................................................................... 1013
65.2.5 Max Service LC: D + L ......................................................................................................................... 1013
65.2.6 Ultimate LC: 1.35D ...............................................................................................................................1013
65.2.7 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L ................................................................................................................... 1013
65.2.8 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + ψ L + S ..............................................................................................................1014
65.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + ψ L + W .........................................................................................................1014
65.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + ψ L + E ......................................................................................................1014
65.2.11 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + ψ L + W ................................................................................................1015
65.2.12 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + ψ L + E ................................................................................................... 1015
65.2.13 Sustained Service LC ...........................................................................................................................1015
65.2.14 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors ...............................................................................1016
65.3 AS 3600-2001 Material Behaviors ............................................................................................................................1016
65.3.1 Concrete Behavior ............................................................................................................................... 1016
65.3.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behavior ........................................................................... 1017
65.3.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior ........................................................................ 1017
65.3.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior .................................................................. 1017
65.4 AS 3600-2001 code rule selection ........................................................................................................................... 1017
65.4.1 Code Minimum Reinforcement ......................................................................................................1018
65.4.2 User Minimum Reinforcement .......................................................................................................1018
65.4.3 Initial Service ......................................................................................................................................... 1019

65.4.4 Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 1020
65.4.5 Max Service .............................................................................................................................................1020
65.4.6 Strength ....................................................................................................................................................1021
65.4.7 Ductility ....................................................................................................................................................1021
65.5 AS 3600-2001 code implementation ......................................................................................................................1022
65.5.1 Concrete Modulus of Elasticity ...................................................................................................... 1022
65.5.2 Concrete Flexural Tensile Strength ..............................................................................................1022
65.5.3 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Stress-Strain Curves ..................................................................1022
65.5.4 Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending ................................................................................ 1023
65.5.5 8.1.4 Minimum Flexural Strength ................................................................................................. 1023
65.5.6 8.1.4.2 Transfer Compressive Stress Limits .............................................................................1023
65.5.7 Section 8.1.3 Ductility of Beams in Bending .............................................................................1024
65.5.8 Section 8.2 Shear Design ...................................................................................................................1024
65.5.9 Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design ................................................................................................. 1025
65.5.10 Section 8.6.1 RC Beam Crack Control ..........................................................................................1025
65.5.11 Section 8.6.2 PT Beam Crack Control ..........................................................................................1026
65.5.12 Section 9.1 Strength of Slabs in Bending ................................................................................... 1027
65.5.13 Section 9.4.1 RC Slab Crack Control .............................................................................................1027
65.5.14 Section 9.4.2 PT Slab Crack Control .............................................................................................1028
65.5.15 Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature ............................................................................ 1028
66.1.2 Snow Loading ........................................................................................................................................ 1030
66.2.1 All Dead LC ..............................................................................................................................................1031
66.2.3 Service LC: D + ψ L .............................................................................................................................. 1031
66.2.4 Service LC: D + ψ L + S ....................................................................................................................... 1032
66.2.5 Max Service LC: D + L ......................................................................................................................... 1032
66.2.6 Ultimate LC: 1.35D ...............................................................................................................................1032
66.2.7 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L ................................................................................................................... 1033
66.2.8 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + ψ L + S ..............................................................................................................1033
66.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + ψ L + W .........................................................................................................1033
66.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + ψ L + E ......................................................................................................1033
66.2.11 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + ψ L + W ................................................................................................1034
66.2.12 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + ψ L + E ................................................................................................... 1034
66.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors .......................................................................................................... 1035
66.5.3 Initial Service ......................................................................................................................................... 1039
66.5.4 Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 1039

66.5.5 Max Service .............................................................................................................................................1040
66.5.6 Strength ....................................................................................................................................................1040
66.5.7 Ductility ....................................................................................................................................................1041
66.6.10 Section 8.6.1 RC Beam Crack Control ..........................................................................................1045
66.6.11 Section 8.6.2 PT Beam Crack Control ..........................................................................................1045
66.6.13 Section 9.4.1 RC Slab Crack Control .............................................................................................1046
66.6.14 Section 9.4.2 PT Slab Crack Control .............................................................................................1047
66.6.15 Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature ............................................................................ 1047
67.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors .......................................................................................................... 1053
67.5.3 Initial Service ......................................................................................................................................... 1057
67.5.4 Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 1057
67.5.5 Max Service .............................................................................................................................................1058
67.5.6 Strength ....................................................................................................................................................1059
67.5.7 Ductility ....................................................................................................................................................1059
67.6.11 Section 8.6.1/9.5.1 Crack Control .................................................................................................. 1064
67.6.12 Section 8.6.2.2/9.5.2.2 Assessment of Crack Widths for RC Beams and Slabs Without
Direct Calculation (Tables) ............................................................................................................... 1065
67.6.13 Section 8.6.3/9.5.2.3 Crack Control for PT Beams and Slabs Without Direct Calculation
(Tables) .................................................................................................................................................... 1066
67.6.14 Section 8.6.3/9.5.2.3 Crack Control with Direct Crack Width Calculation ...................1067

67.6.15 Section 9.5.3.2 Minimum Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement in Primary
Direction ................................................................................................................................................... 1068
Chapter 68: BS 8110: 1997 Design ....................................................................................... 1070
68.1 BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings ............................................................................................................................ 1070
68.1.1 Default Pattern Loading Factors ................................................................................................... 1070
68.2 BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations ..................................................................................................... 1071
68.2.1 All Dead LC ..............................................................................................................................................1071
68.2.3 Service LC: D + L + S ............................................................................................................................1072
68.2.4 Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6L + 1.6S ......................................................................................................1072
68.2.5 Service Wind LC: D + L + S + W ...................................................................................................... 1072
68.2.6 Service Wind LC: D + W .....................................................................................................................1072
68.2.7 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2S + 1.2W ..........................................................................1073
68.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: D + 1.4W ............................................................................................................1073
68.2.9 Accident LC ............................................................................................................................................. 1073
68.3 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors ................................................................................................................... 1074
68.4 BS 8110/TR43 Material Behaviors .......................................................................................................................... 1074
68.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behavior ....................................................................................1076
68.5 BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection .......................................................................................................................1078
68.5.3 Initial Service (“Transfer”) ...............................................................................................................1080
68.5.4 Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 1081
68.5.5 Strength ....................................................................................................................................................1081
68.5.6 Ductility ....................................................................................................................................................1082
68.5.7 Accident ................................................................................................................................................... 1082
68.6 BS8110 / TR43 code implementation ....................................................................................................................1083
68.6.1 Section 3.2.2.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check) .......................................... 1083
68.6.2 Section 3.4.4 Design resistance moment of beams ............................................................... 1084
68.6.3 Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of beams ..................................................................... 1084
68.6.4 Section 3.4.5.13 Torsion ................................................................................................................... 1085
68.6.5 Section 3.5.4 Resistance moment of solid slabs ..................................................................... 1086
68.6.6 Section 3.5.5 Shear resistance of solid slabs ............................................................................ 1086
68.6.7 Section 3.12.5 Minimum areas of reinforcement in members .........................................1086
68.6.8 Section 3.12.11.2.1 Bar spacing ..................................................................................................... 1087
68.6.9 Section 3.12.11.2.4 Beam Bar spacing ........................................................................................ 1087
68.6.10 Section 3.12.11.2.7 Slab Bar spacing ........................................................................................... 1087
68.6.11 Section 4.2.3.1 Redistribution of Moments (Ductility Check) .......................................... 1088
68.6.12 Section 4.3.4.2 Compressive stresses in concrete ................................................................. 1088
68.6.13 Section 4.3.4.3 Flexural tension stresses in concrete ...........................................................1088
68.6.14 Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections .................................................... 1089
68.6.15 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement ................................................1090
68.6.16 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per 4.3.4.3(c) .............................................. 1090
68.6.17 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR 43, 6.10.5 .......................................1090

68.6.18 Section 4.3.5.1 Design compressive stresses (Transfer) .................................................... 1091
68.6.19 Section 4.3.5.2 Design tensile stresses in flexure (Transfer) ............................................1091
68.6.20 Section 4.3.7 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure ....................................................... 1092
68.6.21 Section 4.3.8 Design shear resistance of beams ..................................................................... 1092
68.6.22 Section 4.3.9 Torsion ..........................................................................................................................1094
68.6.23 Section 4.4.1 / 4.3.8 Slabs (shear) ................................................................................................ 1094
68.6.24 Section 4.12.2 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons ............................................... 1094
68.6.25 Part 2, Section 3.8.3 Assessment of Crack Widths .................................................................1094
68.6.26 TR 43 / Section 6.10.6 Minimum un-tensioned reinforcement .......................................1095
68.6.27 Punching shear design .......................................................................................................................1096
Chapter 69: IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design ................................................................ 1097
69.1 IS 456 / IS 1343 default loadings ............................................................................................................................. 1097
69.2 IS 456 Default Load Combinations ........................................................................................................................... 1097
69.2.1 All Dead LC ..............................................................................................................................................1098
69.2.3 Service LC: D + L + S ............................................................................................................................1098
69.2.4 Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L + 1.5S ......................................................................................................1098
69.2.5 Service Wind LC: D + 0.8L + 0.8S + 0.8W ...................................................................................1099
69.2.6 Service Wind LC: D + W .....................................................................................................................1099
69.2.7 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2S + 1.2W ..........................................................................1099
69.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.5W ..................................................................................................... 1099
69.2.9 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.8L + 0.2S + 0.8E ................................................................................ 1100
69.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + E ..................................................................................................................1100
69.2.11 Ultimate Seismic LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 0.3S + 1.2E .......................................................................1100
69.2.12 Ultimate Seismic LC: 0.9D + 1.5E .................................................................................................. 1101
69.3 IS 875 (Part 2) live load factors ................................................................................................................................ 1102
69.4 IS 456 Material Behaviors ............................................................................................................................................ 1102
69.5 IS 456 code rule selection ............................................................................................................................................1105
69.5.4 Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 1108
69.5.5 Strength ....................................................................................................................................................1109
69.5.6 Ductility ....................................................................................................................................................1110
69.6 IS 456 code implementation ...................................................................................................................................... 1110
69.6.1 Section 26.5.1.1 .....................................................................................................................................1111
69.6.2 Section 26.5.2.1 .....................................................................................................................................1111
69.6.3 Section 31.7.1 ........................................................................................................................................ 1111
69.6.4 Section 37 / 38 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check) .........................................1112
69.6.5 Section 38 Design resistance moment of beams .................................................................... 1112
69.6.6 Section 40 Design shear resistance ..............................................................................................1113
69.6.7 Section 41 Torsion ...............................................................................................................................1114
69.6.8 Annex F Assessment of Crack Widths .........................................................................................1114
69.7 IS 1343 code implementation ....................................................................................................................................1115

69.7.1 Section 18.6.3.2c Minimum transverse reinforcement ....................................................... 1115
69.7.2 Section 18.6.3.3 Minimum longitudinal reinforcement ...................................................... 1116
69.7.3 Section 18.6.3.3 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons ........................................... 1116
69.7.4 Section 21.1.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check) ........................................... 1116
69.7.5 Section 22.1 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure ........................................................ 1116
69.7.6 Section 22.4 Design shear resistance of beams ...................................................................... 1117
69.7.7 Section 22.5 Torsion ...........................................................................................................................1118
69.7.8 Section 22.7.1 Flexural tension stresses in concrete ............................................................1119
69.7.10 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement ................................................1119
69.7.11 Section 22.8.1 Design compressive stresses ............................................................................ 1120
69.7.12 Section 22.8.2 Design compressive stresses (Transfer) ..................................................... 1120
Chapter 70: EN 1992-1-1: 2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design ........................................... 1121
70.1 EC2 default loadings ...................................................................................................................................................... 1123
70.1.2 Snow Loading ........................................................................................................................................ 1123
70.1.3 Live (Parking) Loading ...................................................................................................................... 1123
70.2 EC2 Default Load Combinations ............................................................................................................................... 1123
70.2.1 All Dead LC ..............................................................................................................................................1124
70.2.2 Dead + Balance LC ............................................................................................................................... 1124
70.2.4 Characteristic Service LC: D + L + 0.5S ....................................................................................... 1124
70.2.5 Characteristic Service Snow LC: D + ψ0L + S ...........................................................................1125
70.2.6 Frequent Service LC: D + ψ 1 L ...................................................................................................... 1125
70.2.7 Frequent Service Snow LC: D + ψ2L + 0.2S .............................................................................. 1126
70.2.8 Quasi-Permanent Service LC: D + ψ2L ....................................................................................... 1126
70.2.9 Ultimate LC: 1.35D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0L + 0.75S ............................................................................1126
70.2.10 Ultimate LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0L + 1.5S ........................................................................... 1127
70.2.11 Ultimate LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5L + 0.75S ...............................................................................1127
70.2.12 Accident LC ............................................................................................................................................. 1128
70.2.13 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + ψ0L + 0.5S + W ........................................................... 1128
70.2.14 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + ψ0L + S + ψ0W ............................................................1128
70.2.15 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + L + 0.5S + ψ0W ........................................................... 1129
70.2.16 Frequent Service Wind LC: D + ψ2L + 0.2W ............................................................................ 1129
70.2.17 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0L + 0.75S + 1.5ψ0W ......................................... 1130
70.2.18 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5L + 0.75S + 1.5ψ0W ............................................ 1130
70.2.19 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0 L + 1.5S + 1.5ψ0W ........................................1131
70.2.20 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0 L + 0.75S + 1.5W ........................................... 1131
70.2.21 Equilibrium Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.5W .............................................................................................. 1132
70.2.22 Eurocode 1 Part 1-1 (UK National Annex) Live Load Reduction .................................... 1132
70.3 EC2 Material behaviors ................................................................................................................................................ 1132
70.4 EC2 code rule selection .................................................................................................................................................1135

70.4.4 Characteristic Service ........................................................................................................................ 1137
70.4.5 Frequent Service .................................................................................................................................. 1138
70.4.6 Quasi-Permanent Service ................................................................................................................. 1139
70.4.7 Strength .....................................................................................................................................................1140
70.4.8 Ductility ....................................................................................................................................................1141
70.4.9 Accident ................................................................................................................................................... 1141
70.5 EC2 code implementation ........................................................................................................................................... 1141
70.5.1 Section 5.5 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check) ..................................................1142
70.5.2 Section 5.10.2.2 Limitation of Concrete Stress (Transfer) .................................................1142
70.5.3 Section 6.1 Design resistance moment .......................................................................................1142
70.5.4 Section 6.2 Design shear resistance .............................................................................................1143
70.5.5 Section 6.3 Torsion ..............................................................................................................................1144
70.5.6 7.2 Stress Limitation ...........................................................................................................................1145
70.5.7 7.3.1 Assessment of Crack Widths ................................................................................................1145
70.5.8 Section 9.2.1.1 Beam Minimum Reinforcement ..................................................................... 1147
70.5.9 Section 9.3.1.1 RC Slab Minimum Reinforcement ..................................................................1147
70.5.10 Section 9.10 Tying Systems for Accidental Design Situations ..........................................1148
70.5.12 TR-43 5.8.1 PT Service Stresses (UK National Annex only) .............................................. 1149
70.5.13 TR-43 5.8.2 PT Initial Service (transfer) Stresses (UK National Annex Only) .......... 1151
70.5.14 TR-43 5.8.3 PT Crack Control (UK National Annex Only) .................................................. 1152
70.5.15 TR-43 5.8.5 PT Ultimate Limit State ............................................................................................ 1152
70.5.16 TR-43 5.8.7 PT Un-tensioned Reinforcement (UK National Annex Only) ...................1152
70.5.17 TR-43 5.8.8 PT Minimum Reinforcement (UK National Annex Only) ...........................1152
70.5.18 TR-43 5.9 Shear Strength ................................................................................................................. 1153
Chapter 71: CSA A23.3-04 Design ........................................................................................ 1154
71.1 CSA A23.3-04 default loadings .................................................................................................................................. 1154
71.1.2 Snow Loading ........................................................................................................................................ 1154
71.2 CSA A23.3-04 default load combinations ............................................................................................................. 1155
71.2.1 All Dead LC ..............................................................................................................................................1155
71.2.3 Service LC: D + L + 0.45S ...................................................................................................................1155
71.2.4 Service Snow LC: D + 0.5L + 0.9S .................................................................................................. 1156
71.2.6 Service Wind LC: D + L + 0.45S + 0.3W .......................................................................................1156
71.2.7 Service Wind LC: D + 0.5L + 0.9S + 0.3W ...................................................................................1157
71.2.9 Factored LC: 1.4D .................................................................................................................................1157
71.2.10 Factored LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S .................................................................................................. 1158
71.2.11 Factored LC: 1.25D + 0.5L + 1.5S .................................................................................................. 1158
71.2.12 Factored Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.5L+ 0.5S + 1.4W ....................................................................... 1158
71.2.13 Factored Wind LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S + 0.4W ...................................................................... 1159
71.2.14 Factored Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.5L+ 1.5S + 0.4W ....................................................................... 1159
71.2.15 Factored Seismic LC: D + 0.5L+ 0.25S + E ................................................................................. 1160
71.3 CSA A23.3-04/NBC 2005 live load factors ........................................................................................................... 1160
71.4 CSA A23.3-04 Material Behaviors ............................................................................................................................. 1160

71.5 CSA A23.3-04 code rule selection ............................................................................................................................ 1162
71.5.3 Initial Service ......................................................................................................................................... 1164
71.5.4 Service ...................................................................................................................................................... 1164
71.5.5 Sustained Service ................................................................................................................................. 1165
71.5.6 Strength ....................................................................................................................................................1165
71.5.7 Ductility ....................................................................................................................................................1166
71.6 CSA A23.3-04 code implementation ....................................................................................................................... 1166
71.6.1 Section 7.8 Minimum Reinforcement in Slabs .........................................................................1166
71.6.2 Section 10.1 Factored Moment Resistance ...............................................................................1167
71.6.3 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement in Beams (Non prestressed) ........................ 1168
71.6.4 Section 10.5.2 Redistribution of Moments - Ductility Check (Non prestressed) ..... 1168
71.6.5 Section 10.6.1 Beams and One-way Slabs - Crack Control .................................................1168
71.6.6 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) 1169
71.6.7 Section 10.6.1 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) 1169
71.6.8 Section 11.3 Shear and Torsion Tension ................................................................................... 1169
71.6.9 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams ....................................................................................1170
71.6.10 Section 11.3 Torsion Design ............................................................................................................1170
71.6.11 Chapter 13 (Two-way slab systems) ...........................................................................................1171
71.6.12 Section 18.3.1.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit .................................. 1172
71.6.13 Section 18.3.1.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit ..............................................1172
71.6.14 Section 18.3.2a Sustained Compressive Stress Limit ...........................................................1172
71.6.15 Section 18.3.2b Service Compressive Stress Limit ................................................................1172
71.6.16 Section 18.7 Cracking Moment ...................................................................................................... 1173
71.6.17 Section 18.8.2 Minimum Bonded Reinforcement .................................................................. 1173
71.6.18 Section 18.8.3 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Prestressed) ..........1174
Chapter 72: Load History Deflections .................................................................................. 1176
72.1 About RAM Concept’s load history deflection calculations .......................................................................... 1176
72.2 The load history deflection calculation process ................................................................................................ 1178
72.3 Load history calculations on the cross section ...................................................................................................1178
72.3.1 Material Stress Strain Curves ......................................................................................................... 1179
72.3.2 Creep ......................................................................................................................................................... 1179
72.3.3 Shrinkage .................................................................................................................................................1179
72.3.4 Creep and Shrinkage Models ........................................................................................................... 1180
72.3.5 Cracking/Tension Stiffening ............................................................................................................ 1183
72.3.6 Load History ...........................................................................................................................................1185
72.4 Element stiffness adjustments .................................................................................................................................. 1186
72.5 Why are load history deflection results different from Long Term Deflection results plotted for the
strip? ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 1186
72.6 Advice on drawing cross sections ............................................................................................................................1187
72.7 A final word of caution ..................................................................................................................................................1187
Chapter 73: Punching Shear Design Notes ........................................................................... 1188
73.1 Punching shear overview ............................................................................................................................................ 1188
73.1.1 What is a “punching shear” failure? .............................................................................................1188
73.1.2 How are forces really transferred in a punching zone? ...................................................... 1188
73.1.3 How do the building codes handle punching shear? ............................................................1188

73.2 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear? .............................................................................................1189
73.2.1 Step 1: Determine the force envelopes to be checked ......................................................... 1189
73.2.2 Step 2: Determine the “column” critical sections ...................................................................1190
73.2.3 Step 3: Determine the code-model stresses on the column sections ............................ 1191
73.2.4 Step 4: Determine the code-allowable stresses on the column sections .....................1191
73.2.5 Step 5: Design stud shear reinforcement (SSR) if necessary ............................................ 1191
73.2.6 Step 6: Summarize the Results .......................................................................................................1192
73.3 Using RAM Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement (SSR) systems ............................ 1192
73.4 Column connection type .............................................................................................................................................. 1193
73.4.1 About Connection Type ......................................................................................................................1193
73.5 ACI 318/CSA A23.3 Punching Shear Design ........................................................................................................1195
73.5.1 Critical Section Properties and Equations for Actual Stress .............................................. 1195
73.5.2 ACI 318 Specific Provisions .............................................................................................................. 1197
73.5.3 CSA A23.3 Specific Provisions ......................................................................................................... 1199
73.6 AS 3600 Punching Shear Design ...............................................................................................................................1200
73.7 EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Design ..................................................................................................................1203
73.7.2 Calculation of punching resistance for the unreinforced section ................................... 1204
73.8 Sign convention ................................................................................................................................................................1208
73.9 Advice on the selection of punching check properties ................................................................................... 1209
73.10 Miscellaneous information ......................................................................................................................................... 1210
73.11 Some final words of advice ......................................................................................................................................... 1210
Chapter 74: Vibration Analysis Notes .................................................................................. 1211
74.1 Dynamic Characteristics of Structures .................................................................................................................. 1211
74.1.1 Free Vibration ....................................................................................................................................... 1211
74.1.2 Damping ...................................................................................................................................................1212
74.1.3 Resonant vs. Impulsive Response .................................................................................................1213
74.2 Resonant Footfall Response ....................................................................................................................................... 1213
74.2.1 Resonant Simplified (fast) Analysis .............................................................................................1214
74.2.2 Resonant Modal Analysis ................................................................................................................. 1215
74.2.3 RMS Values for Resonant Response ............................................................................................ 1215
74.2.4 Calculation of Response Factor ......................................................................................................1215
74.3 Impulsive Footfall Response ...................................................................................................................................... 1216
74.3.1 RMS Values for Impulsive Response ........................................................................................... 1216
74.3.2 Calculation of Response Factor ......................................................................................................1216
74.4 Evaluating Vibration Performance and Interpreting Results ...................................................................... 1216
74.4.1 Excitation and Response Node Options ..................................................................................... 1216
74.4.2 Recommendations for Analysis Options ....................................................................................1217
74.4.3 Mode Data Text Table ......................................................................................................................... 1218
74.4.4 Velocity and Acceleration Contour Plots ................................................................................... 1218
74.4.5 Evaluation of Response Factor Plots ........................................................................................... 1218

Introduction
1
RAM Concept is an analysis and design program that uses the finite element method for elevated concrete floor
systems, or mat foundations. The floors or mats can be post-tensioned concrete (PT), reinforced concrete (RC),
or hybrid (a mixture of PT and RC). RAM Concept is extremely powerful and allows you to design an entire floor
in one model, or design individual strips or beams.
In this context, the term “design” means that:
• You (the user) define the following: structural geometry, loads, load combinations, and post-tensioning
layout (if applicable).
• RAM Concept calculates (for any number of load combinations): the required amount of reinforcement for
flexure and one-way shear according to relevant code requirements; the stud shear reinforcement (SSR) for
punching shear, stresses for flexure, and deflections.
• RAM Concept has a post-tensioning optimization feature that allows to select better and economic tendon
designs analyzing many alternatives using cloud computing to get a fast optimization process.
A model consists of anything from a single simply supported beam or slab to an entire floor. All models are
three-dimensional (even those developed with Strip Wizard).
RAM Concept does not generally use strip methods other than to replicate the intent of concrete code rules, and
with the Strip Wizard interface.
Note: The Equivalent Frame method is not used.
1.1 Comparing with “traditional” methods

Historically, the vast majority of concrete floors have been analyzed by approximating a region of a slab as a
frame (or design strip), and then analyzing the frame/strip using variations of conventional frame or moment
distribution analysis techniques. There are two limitations to this approach. First, in irregular structures, the
approximation of the real structure into a frame model could be grossly inaccurate and designing with the
analysis results might not even satisfy equilibrium requirements in the real structure. The second limitation is
that even in regular structures with regular loadings, the frame analysis approximates the slab/column
interaction and provides no information regarding the distribution of forces across the design strip.
RAM Concept enables you to design post-tensioned and reinforced concrete slabs by using a finite element
model of the entire slab. RAM Concept can predict the elastic behavior of a slab much more accurately than
frame models. In addition, the finite element method guarantees that the analysis satisfies all equilibrium
requirements, regardless of a structure’s irregularities.

Introduction
RAM Concept options
1.2 RAM Concept options

RAM Concept is available in the core configuration which is suitable for the analysis and design of reinforced
concrete mat foundations (rafts) of any size and shape as well as reinforced concrete floor systems of any size
and shape.
Increase RAM Concept’s analysis and design capabilities by adding the post-tension option:
• RAM Concept PT option (post-tensioned option) Analysis and design of post-tensioned floors or mats in
conjunction with reinforced concrete.
1.2.1 Manage License Restrictions

Bentley's Open Access licensing scheme does not prevent the use of the post-tensioning option when a license
has not been purchased. Use of this feature is permitted, but can result in additional usage fees. To prevent the
inadvertent use of the post-tensioning option, a dialog opens when RAM Concept is started which allows you to
restrict the use of post-tensioning features.
In the event a post-tensioning feature is selected with this restriction option set, a message dialog opens to
provide you the option of changing your license restriction settings, or to cancel the operation.
Select Help > Manage License Restrictions to change these settings at any time.
1.3 Strip Wizard

Strip Wizard uses text input to generate a model. This allows the designer to perform quick preliminary design
in 2-D, or final design of straightforward structures.
Strips generated by Strip Wizard are three-dimensional, but boundary conditions are automatically introduced
which effectively model 2-D behavior. All models use the finite element method.
You can use Strip Wizard to design a beam or one-way slab without many mouse clicks. It can provide an initial
design of tendons and profiles, negating the need for the designer to start with a guess.
1.4 Structural systems

You can use RAM Concept for models that contain any combination of the following:
• one-way slab systems
• two-way slab systems
• beams

Introduction
Learning RAM Concept
• girders
• “wide shallow” beams (that behave similarly to slabs)
• ribs (joists)
• waffles (two-way rib systems)
• mats (rafts)
• openings
There may be steps and changes in thickness and elevations for all of these items.
RAM Concept is not effective, or you cannot use it directly, for the following:
• deep beams using the strut and tie method
• I-shaped sections
• ramps
• concrete sections with internal voids or cells
In most cases, you could model ramps with a large number of steps. The authors do not recommend that you do
this for evaluating post-tensioning behavior, as it is not particularly relevant.
1.5 Learning RAM Concept

The RAM Concept design process could be considered to comprise six stages:
1. Defining the concrete form (**)
2. Drawing loads (*)
3. Defining design strips (*****)
4. Defining tendons (if used) (***)
5. Interpreting results (****)
6. Optimization of tendons (only for post-tensioning with cloud computing services) (****)
The (**) rating is meant to indicate relative degree of difficulty, or relative time you would expect to spend on
the stage.
You should not use RAM Concept for final design without a sufficient grounding in concrete design, or adequate
understanding of the program.
The manual contains a large amount of information. Ideally, you should read it all, but this may not be practical.
We recommend that you do the tutorials and read critical chapters.
1.5.1 Tutorials
We recommend that you start by doing the tutorials:

• Chapter 41, “Simple RC Slab Tutorial”.
• One of the following PT Tutorial Chapters: 42, 43, 44,45 46, or 46.

Introduction
Learning RAM Concept
Note: Even if you do not have access to the PT version, it is advisable to do one of these tutorials as a thicker RC
slab.
• For Mat (Raft Users): Chapter 48, “Mat Foundation Tutorial”.

The tutorials introduce you to the “philosophy” of the program. They quickly give you experience in some basic
modeling and many of the tools. The descriptions are not exhaustive, and you should reference the actual tool
description in the appropriate chapter for further information. This should prove useful for real projects.
It is recommended that you redo the tutorials. The completed tutorial files are available from the program
directory, so you don’t have to start from scratch. For example, you could open the ACI 318-02 PT Tutorial,
delete the design strips, and then start with the design strips input.
1.5.2 Critical Chapters

We consider that you should at least read the following chapters, together with the tips in this chapter before
starting your first design.
• Introduction (on page 45)
• Looking at the Workspace (on page 50)
• Understanding Layers (on page 55)
• Using Plans and Perspectives (on page 59)
• Drawing and Editing Objects (on page 68)
Note: Chapter 5 describes snapping. Nearly all meshing problems are due to the user’s failure to use snapping
properly.
• Defining the Structure (on page 160)
• Defining Design Strips (on page 211)
• General Tips (on page 436)
• Frequently Asked Questions (on page 442)
• Warnings and Errors (on page 465)
• Load History Deflections (on page 1176)
• The appropriate code chapter. See the section below: “Know your building code”.
1.5.3 Know your building code

RAM Concept does not replace the code. It implements some, but not all, of the code. Using the program does not
absolve you of knowing your building code.
You should review the appropriate code chapter:
• ACI 318-14 Design (on page 985)
• AS 3600-2018 Design (on page 1049)
• BS 8110: 1997 Design (on page 1070)
• IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design (on page 1097)
• EN 1992-1-1: 2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design (on page 1121)

Introduction
Technical support
• CSA A23.3-04 Design (on page 1154)

These chapters discuss the following code specific issues:
• default loadings
• default load combinations
• live load reduction
• assumptions on material behavior
• rule selection
• rule implementation
In particular, you should review what rules are used and how the authors interpret and implement the rules.
Rules not considered

Specifically, Concept does not consider the following:
• ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05, ACI 318-08, ACI 318-11: Rule 13.5.3
• ACI 318-14: Rule 8.4.2.3.1
• AS3600-2001/2009 Rules 9.1.2 (detailing bars for 25% of the negative moment) and 9.1.3
• BS8110: 1997 Rule 3.7.3.1
1.5.4 Upgrading Old Files

Recommendations for Old Files
We do not recommend that you upgrade old files that contain models that have been fully designed or are
nearing final design.
We recommend that you upgrade files that contain partially designed slabs.
1.6 Technical support

Bentley Systems want you to get the maximum benefit from your purchase of RAM Concept. If you have any
questions that are not answered in this manual, please contact us.
For customer support, please contact:
www.bentley.com/serviceticketmanager

Looking at the Workspace
2
This chapter provides a basic orientation to the RAM Concept interface.
2.1 About the workspace

When you create a new file, RAM Concept generates layers, plans and perspectives for you to begin design. As
you open windows in the workspace, RAM Concept activates the relevant toolbars.
Workspace with a plan open:
Figure 1: A. Standard toolbar for general operations. B. Menu Bar contains the set of menus for the program.
Includes the File, Edit, Criteria, Layers, Tools, Process, Report, View, Window, and Help menus. C. Action Tools for
manipulating the current view. D. Snap toolbar for setting coordinate snaps for the active plan. E. General Tools for
editing the active plan window. F. Layer Specific Tools for editing the active plan window. G. Report Contents
Window for viewing, opening, and reordering report sections. H. The active window. I. Status Bar for program
status information. J. Command Prompt for displaying tool relative instructions and the current cursor location in
plan coordinates.

Creating and opening files
2.2 Creating and opening files

When you start RAM Concept, you can create a new file or open an existing file. You can also create a new file
based on a template.
2.2.1 Starting a new file

When creating a new file, you make basic decisions about your model in the New File dialog, which appears
when you choose File > New. You specify the type of slab, code and units to use. You can copy an existing RAM
Concept file or template by clicking Copy File on the New File dialog.
To start a new file

1. Start RAM Concept and choose File > New.
2. Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click OK.
Related Links
• About templates (on page 53)
To start a new file from a template

1. Start RAM Concept, and choose File > New.
2. Click Copy File in the New File dialog.
3. Select the file or template you want to copy.
2.2.2 Opening an existing file

Use File > Open to open an existing RAM Concept file. For quick access, RAM Concept keeps track of the last ten
files you opened and lists them at the bottom of the File menu.
1. Choose File > Open.

2. Select the RAM Concept file you want to open.
Note: See “Upgrading Old Files” for discussion on using files from an earlier version.
Related Links
• Upgrading Old Files (on page 49)

Saving a file
2.3 Saving a file

Save your files often. When you save, you ensure that the file is stored on your computer even in the event of a
power failure or system crash.
2.3.1 To save and name a file for the first time

1. Choose File > Save As (since the file has not yet been saved, you could also choose File > Save).
2. Select the folder in which to save the file.
3. Type a name for your file and click Save.
RAM Concept adds the filename extension .cpt if not provided.
2.3.2 To save any open file

1. Choose File > Save (if you have not yet saved the file, and the Save As dialog box appears, follow the previous
steps for saving for the first time).
2.3.3 To save a file as a template

1. Choose File > Save Template.
2. Click Continue on the warning message box.
3. Type a name for the template and click Save.
RAM Concept adds the filename extension .cpttmp (if not provided) and saves the file without the objects.
Related Links
• About templates (on page 53)
2.3.4 Saving a copy of a file with a new name or location

Use the Save As command to create a copy of a file and change its name or location. The original file and the copy
are completely separate and any work you do on one file does not affect the other.
2.3.5 Reverting to a backup copy

For version control, RAM Concept creates a copy of your last save every time you save your file to allow you to
go back to an older version if necessary. RAM Concept creates the file with the filename extension .cpt.bak1.
If you need to revert to an older version of a file, use the backup copy created by RAM Concept.

About templates
2.3.6 Restoring an auto-save file

As a safety net, RAM Concept automatically saves a copy of your working file in the same folder as the original
and with the filename extension .autosave. RAM Concept updates the auto-save file approximately every 2
minutes if you have made changes to your original file. Once you save your file, RAM Concept deletes the auto-
save file since your saved version is up to date. We recommend that you save often to prevent loss of work.
If a computer malfunction or loss of power occurs while you are using RAM Concept, when you restart RAM
Concept it detects the last auto-save file and open it automatically. If you open a second copy of RAM Concept
while one is running, the second copy may detect the auto-save file of the first and open it. In this case, just close
the auto-save file and continue.
2.4 About templates

A template file contains everything a normal file includes (such as specification settings, plans, etc.) but has no
objects. You can create a template from any RAM Concept file by choosing File > Save Template. RAM Concept
saves a copy of your file without any objects and with the .cpttmp filename extension. For details on how to
save a template, see “To save a file as a template:”. Copy an existing template file by choosing File > New and
clicking Copy File to create a new file based on the template. For more information on starting a new file from a
template, see “Starting a new file”.
Related Links
• To save a file as a template (on page 52)
• To start a new file (on page 51)
2.5 Expanding tool buttons

Some tool button icons have a small triangle in the lower right corner ( ). This indicates that there are other
similar tools available for this button. Press down on the left mouse button for one second over the tool button
to reveal a pop-up menu. Select a tool from the menu. The selected tool becomes the new tool for that button.
Expanding tool button with pop-up:

Rearranging toolbars
Figure 2: Pressing down on the left mouse button for one second over the Selection tool reveals a pop-up menu.
2.6 Rearranging toolbars

You can move the toolbars in RAM Concept to suit your particular work habits. To move a tool bar, click on the
handle of the toolbar and drag the toolbar to its new location. The toolbar handle is two lines on the right edge of
horizontal toolbars or at the top edge of vertical toolbars. The toolbars snap to the edges of the application
window or can remain floating in the workspace.
2.7 Using the right mouse button

RAM Concept provides some of the commands available from the menus or toolbars in a special context-
sensitive pop-up menu that appears when you click the right mouse button. The contents of the menu vary
depending on where you click, what window is active, and whether there is a current selection.
2.8 Undoing changes

RAM Concept provides multiple levels of undo to correct mistakes or reverse actions you have taken. RAM
Concept limits the amount of memory used to record undo information. RAM Concept is therefore able to undo
more small operations (deleting 10 objects) than large operations (deleting 1000 objects). Choose Edit > Undo
to reverse the last action taken. To redo a command that has been undone, choose Edit > Redo.
Note: The Undo command cannot reverse the Generate Mesh and Calc All commands. All changes you have made
are committed once you perform one of these operations.

Understanding Layers
3
In RAM Concept, objects (such as walls, columns, slab areas, springs, loads, tendons, design strips, etc.) make up
the structural model. Since there are so many objects involved in modeling a structure, RAM Concept uses layers
to organize these objects.
A layer is a collection of related objects and each object in RAM Concept resides on one and only one layer. You
can handle all of the objects on a single layer as a group or individually.
3.1 Modeling with objects

Since objects make up the structural model, they are more than a combination of points and lines. Each object is
an individual entity with properties. Column object properties, for example, include concrete mix, height, width,
depth, and more.
You draw some objects on plans, and RAM Concept creates some objects automatically when you generate the
finite element mesh or run an analysis calculation. If you have wall, column, and slab area objects on the Mesh
Input layer, RAM Concept creates corresponding wall element, column element, and slab element objects on the
Element layer when you generate the finite element mesh.
If you want to create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans on that layer. When you draw columns on the
Standard Plan of the Mesh Input layer, you are creating objects on the Mesh Input layer. These objects belong to
the layer and not the plan. They are editable by any plan on the Mesh Input layer, but not by plans on any other
layer. Each object is an individual entity so you can manipulate it both separately and together with other objects
on the same layer.
3.2 Managing layers

RAM Concept performs most of the layer management automatically. Almost all of the layers you need to design
a structure are already in place when you start a new file. RAM Concept adds appropriate layers when you create
new Loadings, Load Combinations, and Rule Set Designs.
Note: You can create and edit a separate group of Line Objects, Dimension Objects, and Text Note Objects on
every layer.
Drawing Import Layer This layer contains all the imported CAD drawing information. RAM Concept
automatically stores any imported drawings on this layer.

Managing layers
Mesh Input Layer This layer contains the objects that define the geometry of the structure. RAM
Concept uses these objects to generate corresponding finite element objects on
the Element Layer.
Layer-Specific Objects: Column, Wall, Slab Area, Slab Opening, Beam, Point
Support, Line Support, Point Spring, Line Spring, Area Spring.
Element Layer This layer contains the finite element objects. These objects can be generated by
RAM Concept based on the information on the Mesh Input Layer, or can be
created by hand.
Layer-Specific Objects:Column Element, Wall Element, Slab Element, Point
Support, Line Support, Point Spring, Line Spring, Area Spring.
Loading Layers (Self-dead, These layers contain all the information that defines the loads on the structure.
Balance, Hyperstatic, In RAM Concept, a loading is a set of loads applied as a group, such as the live
Temporary Construction loads. The loading layers also contain the loading analysis results.
(at Stressing), Other Dead,
RAM Concept provides the self-dead, balance, and hyperstatic loading layers by
Live (Reducible), Live
default and you cannot delete them.
(Unreducible), Live
(Storage), Live (Roof) and You can define an unlimited number of loadings and RAM Concept creates a
User-defined) corresponding layer for each.
Layer-Specific Objects:Point Loads, Line Loads, Area Loads.
Note: You cannot edit the load objects on the Self-Dead Loading Layer, Balance
Loading Layer, and Hyperstatic Loading Layer.
Pattern Layer This layer contains the load patterns for the structure.
Layer-Specific Objects:Load Patterns.
Design Strip Layer This layer contains the design strips, design sections and punching checks for the
structure.
Layer-Specific Objects:Span Segments, Span Boundaries, Strip Boundaries, Design
Sections, Punching Checks.
Tendon Parameters These layers contain high level post-tensioning objects. Although there are two
Layers (Latitude and tendon layers, Latitude and Longitude, there is no requirement to use both
Longitude) layers. You can draw tendon parameters on the tendon parameters layers in
whatever manner you wish.
Layer-Specific Objects:Banded Tendon Polyline, Distributed Tendon
Quadrilateral, Tendon Void, Profile Polyline.
Manual Tendon Layers These layers contain the layout of post-tensioning tendons and jacks for the
(Latitude and Longitude) structure. Although there are two tendon layers, Latitude and Longitude, there is
no requirement to use both layers. You can draw tendons on the tendon layers in
whatever manner you wish.
Layer-Specific Objects:Tendon, Jack.
Load Combination Layers These layers contain the load combination analysis results.
(All Dead, Dead and
Balance, Initial Service, Note: The load combinations listed are for ACI318. Other codes use some
Service, Sustained Service, different terminology.

Managing layers
Factored and User-

defined)
Rule Set Design Layers These layers contain the rule set design analysis and design results.
(Code Minimum, User
Minimum, Initial Service, Note: The rule set designs listed are for ACI318, other codes use some different
Service, Sustained Service, terminology.
Strength, Ductility)
Load History Deflection These layers contain the results of the load history analyses.
Layers
Additional Mass Loading This layer contains loads that are converted to mass for the vibration analysis.
Layer
Layer-Specific Objects: Point Loads, Line Loads, Area Loads.
Vibration Analysis Layer This layer contains vibration related analysis results.
Layer-Specific Objects: Excitation Areas.
Design Status Layer This layer contains the summary of all the design results. The summary
information is automatically created by RAM Concept when you Calc All. You
cannot create, edit, or delete the objects on this layer but you can view them.
Optimization Layer This layer contains the definition of all Optimization Regions. See the
Optimization Chapter for further details.
3.2.1 Determining which plans contain objects

Some layer icons next to a layer name in the contents window have a dot on the top “sheet”. This indicates that
there is at least one object resident on that layer. In other words, the dot means there exists at least one object
that belongs to that layer. This is different to any visible objects on one of the layers’ plans, which may or may
not belong to that layer.
Note: There may be a lag time (such as 10 seconds) for this to happen after the first item on the layer is drawn.
Note: This feature is added in response to the frustration of having to search every layer in support files to see if
they contained any items.
Note: Dots do not typically appear on Load Combination layers as these layers have no items drawn on them.
This does NOT mean the load combo is not used in the design.

Managing layers
Figure 3: Layer icons indicating that there are objects on the following layers: Drawing Import, Mesh Input,
Element, Design Strip, Reinforcement, Design Status

Using Plans and Perspectives
4
Plan windows are used to create, view, and edit objects in two dimensions while perspective windows provide a
three dimensional view of those objects.
4.1 Using plans

A plan is a view of the geometric model and results. You can view any object on any plan. You can only create and
edit an object on a plan belonging to the object’s layer. For example, an other dead load can only be edited on a
plan belonging to the Other Dead Loading layer.
Objects are drawn and edited with tools located in Layer-Specific toolbars, and the Tools menu. The available
tools are dependent on which plan is the active window in the workspace. Once you draw an object on a plan,
the object belongs to that plan’s layer.
Note: For information on drawing and editing objects, see the following chapter.
4.2 Creating new plans

Create new plans when you need additional ones to those provided by default.
1. Choose Layers > New Plan.

2. Enter a name for the plan. (RAM Concept automatically prepends the layer name and appends the word
“Plan”).
3. Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.
4.3 Viewing perspectives

Perspectives provide a three dimensional view of the model. You can view the model from any angle by rotating
the perspective about the x-, y-, and z-axes. The model can be viewed in parallel projection or perspective
projection and can be modeled as a solid or wire structure.

Creating new perspectives
4.3.1 Setting the projection

You can render the model in either parallel or perspective projection. In parallel projection, lines that are
parallel in the original model are also drawn parallel in the three dimensional image. In perspective projection,
near objects appear larger than far objects of the same size. The Parallel Projection ( ) and Perspective
Projection ( ) toggles control which way the image is rendered. One, and only one, of these toggles is always
set.
4.3.2 Selecting the modeling
The Wire Frame Modeling ( ) and Solid Modeling ( ) toggles control how the image is rendered. The wire
frame is made of only the edges of the visible objects whereas the solid model shows the visible objects’ surfaces.
The solid model is more realistic, however the wire frame image is often useful since it allows you to see through
the model. One, and only one, of these toggles is always set.
4.3.3 Rotating the model
Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) and the Rotate about z-axis tool ( ) to rotate the model about
the screen’s x-, y-, and z-axes.
1.
Select the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) or the Rotate about z-axis tool ( ).
2. Click once on the perspective window to begin and move the cursor until you position the model as desired.
3. Click on the perspective again to set the view.
4.4 Creating new perspectives

Create new perspectives when you need additional ones to those provided by default.
1. Choose Layers > New Perspective.

2. Enter a name for the perspective. (RAM Concept automatically prepends the layer name and appends the
word “Perspective”).
3. Select the layer on which you want the plan and click OK.

Controlling views
4.5 Controlling views

You can manipulate the plan and perspective windows to show the desired view or information. Zooming and
panning allow you to change what portion of the model you are viewing. RAM Concept usually regenerates the
view automatically. It is sometimes necessary, however, to use the Redraw command ( ) to update the image
on the screen.
Plans and perspectives represent unique views of the model. You control which object types are visible and their
colors, font, and line type for each plan and perspective.
4.5.1 Zooming to magnify or diminish

Use zooming to magnify or diminish the plan or perspective view. If you have a mouse with a wheel button, roll
the wheel to zoom in and out at the cursor location. Zoom In ( ) and Zoom Rectangle ( ) magnify the view.
Zoom Out ( ) diminishes the view. You can set the view to encompass the entire model by using Zoom Extent
( ).
To magnify or diminish the view with the mouse wheel button

1. Place the cursor on a location over the active plan or perspective window. This is the zoom center point.
2. Roll the mouse wheel button away from you to zoom in, and toward you to zoom out.
To magnify a specific area in the view

1.
Select the Zoom Rectangle tool ( ).
2. Fence the area you want to magnify.
4.5.2 Panning to reposition

Panning allows you to reposition the view in the plan or perspective window. If you have a mouse with a wheel
button, press down on the wheel over the view and pan. You can use the Pan tool ( ) to move the view as well.
In addition, plans have scroll bars along the bottom and right side of the window that you can use to reposition
the view.
To reposition the view with the mouse wheel button

1. Press down on the mouse wheel button over the active plan or perspective window.
2. Pan the view into position and release the wheel button.

Controlling views
To reposition the view with a tool

1.
Select the Pan tool ( ).
2. Click once on the plan to begin panning, click again when the view is in the desired position.
4.5.3 View History
The View Previous ( ) and View Next ( ) tools implement a history of your views.
The view history operates much like the forward and backward buttons in a web browser. Each zoom or pan
action is added to the view history. The View Previous ( ) button steps back through previous views and the
View Next button ( ) steps forward through the views. The buttons are disabled if there are no views in that
direction. If you step back to a previous view and perform a zoom or pan action, the new view will replace the
entire next view history.
The View History is implemented for plans and perspectives. Each plan or perspective’s view history is
maintained separately. Switching from one plan or perspective to another does not affect the view history for
either plan.
All zoom, extent, pan, and rotation view changes are recorded in the view history. Some consecutive view
changes of the same type are compressed into one view history item to prevent the history from getting
cluttered with many similar views. For example, consecutive Zoom In actions -- whether by the Zoom In tool or
by mouse wheel movements -- add only one new view to the history.
4.5.4 Regenerating
Regenerating the view is necessary when anything occurs that invalidates the current view. When you generate
the mesh, analyze the model or change the settings, the open windows may need updating. In most cases, RAM
Concept automatically regenerates for you. If you find that the view is not up to date, click Redraw ( ) to
regenerate the view in the active window.
4.5.5 Setting the visible objects

Use the Visible Objects dialog box to set which objects types are visible on a plan or perspective. Plans and
perspectives can show objects from any layer, but you can only edit objects on a plan from the object’s layer.

Controlling views
Figure 4: Visible Objects dialog box (Mesh Input tab)
To show or hide objects on a plan or perspective

To show or hide objects on a plan or perspective
1. Make the plan or perspective the active window.

2.
Choose View > Visible Objects ( ).
3. Click on the tab for the object’s layer.
The plan or perspective’s layer is the one initially selected.
4. Check boxes to show objects and uncheck to hide objects, then click OK.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible Objects command.

Controlling views
4.5.6 Changing colors, font, and line type

Each plan and perspective has an associated appearance scheme that dictates the colors, font, and line type used
for the objects shown. When a plan or perspective is the active window, you can select and modify its
appearance scheme using the Appearance dialog. If you change the settings of an appearance scheme, it affects
all the plans and perspectives that use that scheme. You can create as many appearance schemes as you need to
customize the look of your plans and perspectives. When you create a new plan or perspective, the window
initially uses the default scheme.
Figure 5: Appearance dialog
To set the appearance scheme for a plan or perspective

2.
Choose View > Appearance ( ).
3. Select the scheme from the list of schemes on the left side of the Appearance dialog and click OK.

Controlling views
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Appearance command.
To create a new appearance scheme

1.
2. Click New below the list of schemes in the Appearance dialog.
3. Type a name for the new scheme and select the base scheme. The settings from the base scheme initialize the
new scheme.
To delete an appearance scheme

1.
2. Select the scheme you want to delete from the list of schemes in the Appearance dialog.
3. Click Delete below the list of schemes to delete the highlighted scheme.
To set a new default scheme

1.
2. Select the scheme you want to make the new default scheme from the list of schemes in the Appearance
dialog.
3. Click Set As Default below the list of schemes to make the highlighted scheme the new default scheme. RAM
Concept uses this scheme to initialize newly created plans and perspectives.
You can select the color of every drawn object type for each appearance scheme. You can also set the
background, grid and highlight colors. If an object type has no color selected ( ), RAM Concept uses the
color setting for the object’s layer. For example, you can set the Tendon object color to no selection, and then
set the Latitude Tendon layer to red and Longitude Tendon layer color to blue. RAM Concept uses the
foreground color in the case that you have selected neither the object type color nor the layer default color.
To change the colors in an appearance scheme

1.
2. Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is the active window, the selection is already the
scheme set for that window).
3. Select the item from the drop-down list (if changing plotting colors skip this step).
4. Click on the color selection box for the item and choose a color.
Lines of drawn objects can be set to solid, dashed, or dotted. Reference lines have Line Type and Line Width
properties that are independent of the appearance scheme setting.
The transparency of all Strip Plots in both 2-D and 3-D are controlled via the Transp. % control in the
Appearance Settings dialog. This setting is used to modify the transparency already set in the default strip plot
colors defined.

Setting up the grid
4.5.7 Changing font size

You can change the font size in two ways. In the appearance schemes, you can select the font size for all text
other then text notes. With the font buttons, you can temporarily change the font size.
1.
Click Enlarge Fonts ( ) or Shrink Fonts ( ).
Note: The temporary font size change only affects the active window and RAM Concept discards the change
when the window is closed.
4.5.8 Changing font scale

You can select the font scale so that the font size either changes or stays unchanged as you zoom in and out on a
plan.
1.
2. Select the appearance scheme (if a plan or perspective is the active window, the selection is already the
scheme set for that window).
3. Enter the font scale and click OK.
Note: A font scale of zero causes the font to stay a constant size regardless of the plan scale. A non-zero value
scales the font to be the same relative size as you zoom in and out
4.6 Setting up the grid

A grid can be set up to help you draw objects accurately by providing snap points at a designated spacing. The
Plan Grid Setup dialog allows you to make the grid visible and to change the spacing, origin, and rotation angle of
the grid. You can change the grid setting for the active plan window or all plan windows at once.

Setting up the grid
Figure 6: Plan grid dialog box
4.6.1 To make the grid visible for a plan

1. Make the plan the active window.
2. Choose View > Grid.
3. Check Show Grid and click OK.
Note: If you want the grid to be visible on all plans then check Set for all Plans.
Note: You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Grid.
4.6.2 To change the grid settings for a plan

1. Make the plan the active window.
2. Choose View > Grid.
3. Enter values in the Plan Grid Setup dialog box and click OK.
Note: If you want the grid settings to apply to all plan windows then check Set for all Plans.

Drawing and Editing Objects
5
Drawing objects is the cornerstone of using RAM Concept. There are many tools available to make this as
straightforward as possible.
To create or edit objects on a layer, use the plans on that layer. You draw and edit objects on plans using the
tools from the Layer-Specific toolbar.
5.1 Precision drawing with snaps

RAM Concept provides drawing tools and settings to help you work precisely. Snap tools allow you to snap the
cursor to precise points on objects or locations on the screen.
Using snaps is a quick way to specify an exact location on an object without drawing construction lines or
knowing the exact coordinate. Whenever you move your cursor over an object, RAM Concept identifies snap
points based on what snaps are active. To turn on a snap, click on its button. Click on the button again to turn off
the snap.
Snap to Intersection ( ) snaps to the intersection of any two lines including polygon vertices.
Snap to Point ( ) snaps to any defined point such as the center of a column, end point of a line, or vertex of a
polygon.
Snap to End Point ( ) snaps to the end points of lines (including vertices of polygons).
Snap to Mid Point ( ) snaps to the mid points of lines.
Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) snaps to the point on a drawn object nearest to the cursor.
Snap Orthogonal ( ) snaps orthogonally in the direction of the grid’s local x- or y-axis. This need not be
parallel with the global x- and y-axes.
Snap to Perpendicular ( ) snaps perpendicularly from the last click to a line.
Snap to Center ( ) snaps the center of polygons and columns.
Snap to Grid ( ) snaps to the grid.
Snap Extension ( ) does not create a snapping mode by itself, but it affects the behavior of some of the other
snap settings.
In general, the snap extension setting causes the other snap calculations to behave as if the line segments
displayed extended to be infinitely long lines. The specific changes to the other snap settings are:
• Intersection: intersections between infinite lines (defined by visible line segments) are snappable points.

Drawing objects
• Point: no effect.
• End Point: no effect.
• Mid Point: no effect.
• Nearest: nearby infinite lines (defined by visible line segments) are snappable.
• Orthogonal: no effect.
• Perpendicular: perpendicular point on infinite lines (defined by visible line segments) are snappable.
• Center: no effect.
• Grid: no effect.
5.2 Drawing objects

To draw objects on a plan, first select a drawing tool by clicking on it or choosing it from the Tools menu. The
selected tool will be the active drawing tool for the plan until you select a new tool. Follow the command
prompts for points to enter. For example, with a Mesh Input layer plan open, and the Column tool selected, the
command prompt will read “Enter column center point:”.
If you are drawing with a tool and wish to cancel what you have drawn, click the right mouse button, or press the
<Esc> key.
If you need to reposition or magnify the view while you are drawing and do not want to cancel the work you are
doing, use the mouse wheel button to pan or zoom. See “Controlling views” for more information on how to use
the mouse wheel button.
5.3 Entering coordinate points

Each point on a plan is a location represented by coordinates. Many tools require you to locate one or more
points on a plan. With a tool selected, you can enter points by clicking at a location on the plan, entering the
coordinates in the command line, entering the relative coordinates in the command line, or by using snaps.
1. With the appropriate tool selected, type the x- and y-coordinates separated by a comma (e.g. 10, 5).
5.4 Using relative coordinates

Relative coordinates locate a point on a plan by referencing it to the last point entered. They can be very useful
for moving and copying objects a set distance.
To enter relative coordinates
1. With the appropriate tool selected, type the letter “r” followed by the x- and y-coordinates separated by a
comma (e.g. r10, 5).

Selecting objects
5.5 Selecting objects

Before you can edit objects on a plan, you must select them. Use the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( ) to
select objects on a plan. You select visible objects by fencing the area in which they are located. For example, if
you have a slab opening (on the Mesh Input layer) in the middle of a slab, fencing the opening selects both the
opening and the slab area because the rectangle crosses the slab area and surrounds the opening. If you want to
select just the opening, double click on it. You can select any single object by double clicking on it. To add objects
to the current selection, hold the <Shift> key down as you select.
5.5.1 To select an object or group of objects

1.
Choose the Selection tool ( ) or the Utility tool ( ).
2. Click at opposite corners of a rectangle. This selects objects within and crossing the rectangular selection
area. (Hold down the Shift key on the first click to add objects to the current selection.)
5.5.2 To select only a single object

1.
2. Double click on the object you wish to select (Hold down the <Shift> key as you click to add the object to the
current selection).
When you are selecting, RAM Concept interprets a very small rectangle as a double click.
5.6 Deselecting objects

You can deselect objects from the current selection by holding the <Shift> key while you select objects to
remove from the selection.
5.6.1 To deselect an object or group of objects from a selection

1.
2. Hold down the <Shift> key as you fence the objects in the selection you want to deselect.
This deselects the selected objects within and crossing the rectangular area, and selects any objects in the
rectangular area not previously selected.

Filtering selected objects
5.6.2 To deselect only a single object from a selection

1.
2. Hold down the <Shift> key as you double click on the object in the selection you wish to deselect. When you
are deselecting, RAM Concept interprets a very small rectangle as a double click.
5.7 Filtering selected objects

You can deselect objects from the current selection set by choosing the Selection Filter tool ( ). This tool will
invoke a dialog that lists all of the currently selected objects grouped by object type. All of the objects of a
particular type can be removed from the selection set by unselecting the objects in the list.
5.8 Cutting, copying, and pasting objects

To cut or copy objects, first select the objects then choose the appropriate command from the Edit menu. RAM
Concept places objects that you cut or copy on the Windows clipboard. The coordinate locations of objects
pasted from the clipboard are the same as the coordinate location from where you copied or cut them. RAM
Concept makes the pasted objects the current selection, so you can reposition them after you paste.
5.8.1 To cut objects

1. Select the object or group of objects you want to cut.
2. Choose Edit > Cut (or right-click and choose Cut from the popup menu that appears).
5.8.2 To copy objects

1. Select the object or group of objects you want to copy.
2. Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy from the popup menu that appears).
5.8.3 To paste objects from the clipboard

1. Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from the popup menu that appears).

Copying and pasting objects by layer
You can also copy and move, rotate, stretch or mirror an object in one step by pressing the <Shift> key while you
use the Move tool ( ), Stretch tool ( ), Rotate tool ( ) or Mirror tool ( ). See “Moving, rotating, stretching,
and mirroring objects” for more information.
5.9 Copying and pasting objects by layer

The “layer” clipboard mode simplifies the process of copying data from multiple layers of one Concept file to
another Concept file. Clipboard data is built up from multiple objects on different layers. Each object added to
the clipboard data is tagged with its source layer. When the layer clipboard data is pasted into a plan, only data
that originated from the same layer as the destination plan will be pasted into the plan.
5.9.1 To append objects to the layer clipboard

1. Select the object or group of objects you want to copy.
2. Choose Edit > Append (or right-click and choose Append from the popup menu that appears).
3. Repeat for each layer.
When objects are appended from a layer, they completely replace the objects for that layer. Other layers are not
affected.
5.9.2 To paste objects from the layer clipboard

1. Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from the popup menu that appears).
2. Repeat for each layer.
When the clipboard contains layer data, the Paste menu item is only enabled when the clipboard contains data
for the current plan's layer. The contents of the layer data cannot be viewed directly, but the enabled Paste menu
item is an indication that the clipboard contains data from the current layer.
The layer clipboard data is stored in the system clipboard selection. This means that the layer clipboard data is
cleared any time another Copy operation is performed, by Concept or by any other application on the system.
The selection is also lost if the system is shut down or restarted.
5.10 Editing polygon objects

Nodes can be added or removed from polygonal objects with the Add Node ( ) and the Delete Node tools
( ).

Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects
5.10.1 To add a node to a polygonal object

1. Select the object or group of objects to edit.
2.
Select the Add Node tool ( ).
3. Click on any edge of a polygonal object.
Nodes must be added to an edge of a polygonal object. It is possible to enter the new node coordinates, but it will
be ignored if the new location is not exactly on an edge. It is better to add the node at an approximate location,
then stretch the node to the final position. The exact location can be specfied as coordinates or by snapping with
the Stretch tool.
5.10.2 To delete a node from a polygonal object

1. Select the object or group of objects to edit.
2.
Select the Delete Node tool ( ).
3. Click on any node of a polygonal object.
A node cannot be deleted if it would create a misshapened polygon (less than 3 points, or all points colinear).
Some polygonal objects may define a varying property, e.g. the force constant of an Area Spring. The varying
property is defined by seed values of the first 3 nodes of the polygon. Therefore, the first 3 nodes cannot be
colinear when the varying property is defined. Adding or deleting nodes does not change the value of the varying
property. However, the start of the polygon may have to be shifted to a new node, so that the first 3 nodes are
not colinear. The seed values will be adjusted accordingly for the new locations.
5.11 Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects

An object or group of objects must be selected before using the Move tool ( ), Stretch tool ( ), Rotate tool ( )
or Mirror tool ( ) (See “Selecting objects”). If you hold down the <Shift> key on the first click of a move, rotate,
or mirror, the operation will be performed on a copy of the selection rather then the selection itself.
5.11.1 To move a selection

1. Select the object or group of objects to move.
2. Choose the Move tool ( ).
3. Enter the point from which to move (hold down the <Shift> key as you click to move a copy of the selection).
4. Click on the point to where you want the object, or group of objects, to move.

Using the Utility tool to move and stretch
5.11.2 To stretch the selection

1. Select the object or group of objects to stretch.
2. Choose the Stretch tool ( ).
3. Snap to the point you want to stretch on the selection (limited to highlighted control points).
4. Click on the point to where you want the object, or group of objects, to stretch.
5.11.3 To rotate a selection

1. Select the object or group of objects to rotate.
2. Choose the Rotate tool ( ).
3. Enter the rotation center point (hold down the <Shift> key as you click to rotate a copy of the selection).
4. Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to rotate.
5. Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an end angle.
5.11.4 To mirror the selection

1. Select the object or group of objects to mirror.
2. Choose the Mirror tool ( ).
3. Enter the two points that create the line across which you would like to mirror the selected object(s). (Hold
down the <Shift> key as you click to mirror a copy of the selection.)
5.12 Using the Utility tool to move and stretch

The Utility tool ( ) is a multi-purpose tool used for selecting, moving, and stretching objects. See “Selecting
objects” for information on how to select objects with the Utility tool. Once you have selected an object or group
of objects, you can move or stretch a grip point by snapping to it on the selection.
5.12.1 To move an object by one of its grips

1. Choose the Utility tool ( ).
2. Select an object or group of objects.
3. Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the top half of the snap area until you see the move cross
cursor ( ) then click. (Hold down the <Shift> key as you click to move a copy of the selection.)

Manipulating the model as a whole
4. Click on the point to where you want the object, or group of objects, to move.
5.12.2 To stretch an object by one of its grips

1. Choose the Utility tool ( ).
2. Select an object or group of objects.
3. Snap to a grip point and position the cursor in the bottom half of the snap area until you see the stretch
cursor ( ) then click.

4. Click on the point to where you want the object, or group of objects, to stretch.
5.13 Manipulating the model as a whole

The Move Model tool ( ), Mirror Model tool ( ), and Rotate Model tool ( ) work just like the Move tool
( ), Mirror tool ( ), and Rotate tool ( ) except they affect the whole model (all layers). You can also scale the
entire model with the Scale Model tool ( ).
5.13.1 To move the entire model

1.
Choose the Move Model tool ( ).
2. Enter the start point.
3. Enter the move point.
5.13.2 To rotate the entire model

1.
Choose the Rotate Model tool ( ).
2. Enter the rotation center point (hold down the <Shift> key as you click to rotate a copy of the model).
3. Enter the rotation start angle or a point to create a line to rotate.
4. Click on the new end point of the rotation line or enter an end angle.
5.13.3 To mirror the entire model

1.
Choose the Mirror Model tool ( ).

Editing object properties
2. Enter the two points that create the line across which you would like to mirror the model (hold down the
<Shift> key as you click to mirror a copy of the model).
5.13.4 To scale the entire model

1.
Choose the Scale Model tool ( ).
2. Enter a scale center point.
3. In the Scale Model dialog box, enter the relative scale factors and click OK.
5.14 Editing object properties

The properties of an object define its individual characteristics. For example, the properties of a Line object
include the Line Type and Line Width. Some objects’ properties can be edited together as a group. Specifically,
you can always modify objects of the same type together, and you can often modify objects of different types but
with similar properties together. For example, you can edit the Concrete Mix and Height properties of Column
and Wall objects together.
To change the properties of an object or group of objects
1. Select the object or group of objects.

2. Choose Edit > Selection Properties, or right-click and choose Selection Properties.
3. Specify the property values in the Properties dialog and click OK.
5.15 Setting default properties

It is useful to set the default properties of object drawing tools so that when you use the tool the drawn object
has the desired properties. This is valuable when many objects will have the same properties.
To set the default properties for an object drawing tool
1. Double click on the drawing tool or with the tool selected, choose Tools > Current Tool Properties.
2. Specify default property values in the Properties dialog and click OK.
When you now use the tool, it will draw objects with the specified default properties.
Note: Changing the default properties of an object drawing tool does not change the properties of such objects
already drawn.

Adding reference lines, dimensions, and text notes
5.16 Adding reference lines, dimensions, and text notes

The Line tool ( ), Dimension tool ( ), and Text tool ( ) are all used to add information to plans. These
objects are not part of the structural model and RAM Concept does not consider them when generating the mesh
or calculating results. As for all objects, the lines, dimensions and text objects belong to the layer on which they
are drawn.
5.16.1 To draw a line

1.
Choose the Line tool ( ).
2. Click at the line start point (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
3. Click at the line end point (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
5.16.2 To draw a dimension line

1.
Choose the Dimension tool ( ).
2. Click at the start point.
3. Click at the end point.
4. Click at the offset point where the dimension line will be located.
5.16.3 To draw text

1.
Choose the Text tool ( ).
2. Click at a point (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
3. Right click and choose Selection Properties.
4. Enter the text and its properties.

Viewing Objects in Text Tables
6
A text table shows all the objects of a particular type on a specific layer. Tables provide a customizable textual
view of each objects’ properties. You can access text tables from the Tables folder of any layer.
1. Go to the Tables folder of the object type’s layer.

2. Open the appropriate text table from the folder.
For example, the text table for Walls Below on the Mesh Input layer can be opened by choosing
Layers > Mesh Input > Tables > Walls Below.

Customizing tables
Figure 7: Mesh Input: Walls Below Table
6.1 Customizing tables

You can choose which columns and rows are visible in the table, and the column widths. You can also sort the
rows based on a particular column’s values in ascending or descending order.
6.1.1 Choosing which rows and columns to show

Customize the table columns and rows by clicking on the Customize button above the table. In the Customize
dialog box, you can select which rows and columns are visible in the table. Check the columns you want to see
and uncheck the columns you want hidden.
To make a table column visible or hidden
1. Click on the Customize button above the table.

Customizing tables
2. In the Customize dialog box, to make a column visible, check the checkbox. To hide the column, uncheck the
checkbox.
3. Click OK.
6.1.2 Sizing table columns

You can resize columns by changing the width of the column header.
To resize the width of the column
1. Place your cursor on the line between two columns on the table header and press down on the left mouse
button.
2. Drag the table header to its new width and release the left mouse button.
The table will print as seen on screen so the column widths you set will appear the same way on paper.
6.1.3 Sorting table rows

To sort the table rows according to the values in a column, click on the column header once for ascending order.
Click on the column header again to sort in the descending order.

Choosing Units
7
RAM Concept allows you to work with three unit systems: US, SI and MKS.
Some designers refer to the US units system as “US customary units”, and others call it “Imperial”. SI and MKS
are metric unit systems, with MKS using mass rather than weight.
It is up to you which system you use but local practice should dictate your choice.
The choice of actual units is more subjective. For example, after choosing the US system, one designer might use
the default area load units of pounds per square feet, and another might change the selection to kips per square
feet.
7.1 About units

Internally, RAM Concept performs all calculations with the SI unit system. It converts all property values into an
equivalent SI unit prior to calculation. Once complete, it converts the values back into the selected units for
reporting.
It is possible to mix unit systems (e.g. pounds and meters) but this is not advisable.
7.2 Selecting units

A new file has default units that you can change at any time.
7.2.1 Selecting the default units

The default units depend on how you created the file. When you use a template or an existing file, the default
units are those of the source.
When you create a file using the New command, you only have a choice of default units for ACI 318 (US or SI).
For all other codes, the default units are SI.

Choosing Units
Specifying report as zero
7.2.2 Changing the units

You can change either the unit system or individual units.
1. Choose Criteria > Units.

2. Do one of the following:
Select each unit by accessing the appropriate drop down box.
or
Select a unit system by clicking on US, SI, or MKS at the top of the window.
Note: There is often a long list of choices for the units. Scroll down the drop down menu to view the options.
Figure 8: Units Window

Choosing Units
Specifying report as zero
7.3 Specifying report as zero

RAM Concept allows you to filter out trivial results with the Report as Zero option. For example, column
reactions have components for Fr, Fs, Fz, Mr and Ms. Some of these values, such as Fr and Fs, may be very
small and hence not important. Filtering small values from plan plots can make the results easier to read.
Note: Using this feature could result in human error, as you might later assume zeroed values are exactly equal
to zero.
You specify Report as Zero in the Units window.
1. Choose Criteria > Units.

2. Enter one or more Report as Zero values.
Note: You can also turn off plotted values such as Fr and Fs with the plot menu. See “Setting the plotted results”.

Choosing Sign Convention
8
RAM Concept allows you to choose the sign convention for loads, analysis and reactions.
RAM Concept uses the Cartesian coordinate system with the following sign convention for axes:
Z
Y
X
You cannot change the sign of the coordinates’ axes.
Sign convention dictates how you input parameters and how RAM Concept displays results. For example, the
sign convention of an applied load dictates whether the input value is positive or negative.
Note that changing a sign setting does not change the real value of any previously specified data. For example if a
+10 kips downward load was specified when RAM Concept had a downward-positive load sign convention and
then the load sign convention was changed to upward-positive, the load value would now be reported as -10 kip,
but the load would still be a 10 kip downward load. Similarly, a change in sign convention does not affect the
true value of results.
When you add loads after a change in sign convention, you must observe the new sign convention.
8.1 Selecting sign convention

A new file has a default sign convention that you can change at any time.
8.1.1 Default sign convention

The default sign convention depends on how you created the file. If you use a template or an existing file then the
default sign convention is that of the source.
When you create a file (not from a template), the sign convention is as follows:

Selecting sign convention
Figure 9: Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes).

Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fz In the negative z-direction (see coordinate axes).
Mx (moment about the X-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
My (moment about the Y-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Mz (moment about the Z-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Figure 10: Top row, left to right: Vertical Element Shear, Element Bending, Element Axial, Vertical Deflection.
Bottom row, left to right: Horizontal Shear, Twist, Lateral Deflection, Angular Deflection.
Vertical element shear Positive z-shear on the positive x- and y-faces.

Element bending Tension bottom face.
Element axial Tension.
Vertical deflection In negative z-direction (down).
Horizontal shear Positive y-shear on Positive x-face (equivalent to Positive x-shear on Positive y-face).
Twist Positive x-axis moment on positive x-face (equivalent to negative y-axis moment on positive y-face).
Lateral deflection Positive in x- and y-axes directions.
Angular deflection Per right-hand-rule about x- and y-axes.
Figure 11: Left to right: Fx, Fy, Fz, Coordinate Axis, Mx, My, Mz.
Fx In the positive x-direction (see coordinate axes).

Fy In the positive y-direction (see coordinate axes).
Fz In the positive z-direction (see coordinate axes).

About plot sign convention
Mx (moment about the x-axis) Per right-hand-rule.

My (moment about the y-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Mz (moment about the z-axis) Per right-hand-rule.
Note: The only difference in defaults between Positive Loads and Positive Reactions is Fz. This is because point
loads are usually down if positive, and vertical reactions are usually up if positive.
8.1.2 Changing the sign convention

You can change the sign convention for any loads or results, but only one at a time.
1. Choose Criteria > Signs.

2. Change each positive sign by clicking the appropriate graphic. The direction changes.
Figure 12: Signs Window

About plot sign convention
8.2 About plot sign convention

With the exception of vertical deflection, line plots show positive results plotted above the axis line. This ensures
that plots do not appear upside down. For axis lines that are parallel to the y-axis (and hence have no “above the
axis line” direction), line plots show positive results to the left of the axis line.
Note: Line plots show positive vertical deflection below the axis line.
Perspectives are plotted with positive results in the global z-direction (what is considered positive is dependent
upon the sign convention of the Value Plotted). For example, a perspective of deflection shows positive
deflection up.
You cannot change the sign of the coordinates’ axes.

Specifying Material Properties
9
RAM Concept uses materials as part of the input and the results. You specify concrete mixes and post-tensioning
systems as part of the input and RAM Concept reports reinforcement bar requirements as part of the results.
You can use the materials provided or create your own. For example, you might want to redesign the floor with
the actual tested strength of the concrete poured on site. In this case, you would create a new concrete mix
defined with that strength.
You can delete any of the materials that you find are unnecessary.
9.1 Viewing the available materials

The Materials window shows the names and properties of concrete mixes, PT systems and reinforcing bars.
1. Choose Criteria > Materials.

Material properties
Figure 13: The Materials window.
9.2 Material properties

The following is a list of Material properties:

Material properties
9.2.1 Concrete Mix

Mix Name The label used to identify a concrete mix. The mix name is not necessarily the concrete
strength. Each column, wall, slab and beam has a concrete mix property.
Density The concrete mass density used to calculate various stiffness properties for Concrete.
Density for Loads The concrete mass density used to calculate self weight.
f’ci The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix at the time of applying prestress
(also known as initial strength).
f’c The characteristic cylinder strength of the concrete mix.
Note: f’ci and f’c are used for all codes except BS8110.
fcui The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix at the time of applying prestress
(also known as initial strength).
fcu The characteristic cube strength of the concrete mix.
Note: fcui and fcu are only used for BS8110 and IS456.
Poisson’s Ratio The negative of the ratio of lateral strains to axial strains for an axially loaded material.
This is usually 0.2 for concrete.
Coefficient of The concrete coefficient of thermal expansion used to calculate temperature strains.
Thermal
Expansion
Ec Calc The method used to calculate Young’s Modulus (for both initial characteristic
strength and characteristic strength). This can be according to the active code rules or a
specified value.
User Eci The user-defined Young’s Modulus used for initial cross section analysis.
User Ec The user-defined Young’s Modulus used for global analysis, service cross section analysis
and strength design.
9.2.2 PT Systems
System Name The label used to identify a PT system. It usually describes the system, such as strand size and
bonding.
Type Whether the system has unbonded or bonded strand.
Aps The cross sectional area of one strand. Since strand is usually comprised of seven wires then the area is more
complicated than πd2/4.
Eps The Young’s Modulus of the strand at zero strain.
fse The assumed effective stress in the strand after all losses. Using jacks overrides this assumption. See “About
jacks” for further information.

Material properties
fpy The yield stress of the strand.

fpu The ultimate stress of the strand.
Duct Width The width or diameter of bonded tendon duct.
Max Strands Per Duct The maximum number of strands in a bonded tendon (use 1 for unbonded tendons).
Minimum Radius The minimum vertical radius that allows satisfactory placement of tendons in the field. You
should consult with a local PT supplier. A value of zero disables radius checking for this PT system.
Jacking Stress / Anchor Friction / Wobble Friction / Angular Friction / Seating Distance / Long-Term
Losses
Friction loss calculations use these properties. They have no effect unless tendon jacks are used. See “Jack
properties” in Chapter 26, “Defining Tendons” for further information.
Related Links
• About jacks (on page 329)
9.2.3 Reinforcing Bars

Bar Name The label used to identify a reinforcing bar. It usually refers to the bar’s diameter.
As Cross sectional area of the bar.
Es The Young’s Modulus of the bar.
Fy The yield stress of the bar.
Coating The coating type of the bar (epoxy coating)
Straight Ld/Db The development length of straight bars, calculated either by “Code” or a user specified multiple
of bar diameter.
90 Hook Ld/Db The development length of 90 degree hook bars, calculated either by “Code” or a user specified
multiple of bar diameter.
180 Hook Ld/Db The development length of straight bars, calculated either by “Code” or a user specified
multiple of bar diameter.
9.2.4 SSR Systems

SSR System Name The label used to identify a SSR (stud shear reinforcement) system. It usually describes the
system, such as stud size.
Stud Area Cross sectional area of the stud stem that is used in strength calculations
Head Area The area of the stud head, generally about 10 times the stem area. RAM Concept uses this to calculate
the head diameter for clear spacing calculations.
Min Head Spacing The minimum clear spacing between stud heads along the length of a rail. The design will not
succeed if this value is too large.

Adding and deleting materials
Specified Stud Spacing The desired stud spacing for the SSR design. If set to “none”, RAM Concept automatically
designs the stud spacing.
Fy The yield stress of the SSR reinforcement.
Stud Spacing Rounding Increment Specifies an increment to which all stud designs are rounded down. For
example, specifying a larger number forces a larger number of designs to have the same spacing, creating the
potential for “grouping” of designs at different columns.
Min Studs Per Rail Specifies the minimum number of studs that RAM Concept designs on any rail. This can be
useful in a number of situations. For example, if one face of a column has a small overhang for which the
designer does not want SSR reinforcement, this minimum stud number can be increased to prevent the design of
rails on that face.
System Type The type of system to use in the SSR design.
9.3 Adding and deleting materials

You can add materials to define properties of concrete mixes, PT systems and reinforcing bars. You can delete
materials as long as at least one material of each type remains.
9.3.1 To add materials

2. Click Add Concrete Mix, or Add PT System, or Add Reinforcing Bar, or Add SSR System.
3. In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new material and click OK.
A new row appears at the bottom of the appropriate table.
4. Enter the property value for each cell in the new row.
9.3.2 To delete materials

2. Click Delete Concrete Mix, Delete PT System, or Delete Reinforcing Bar, or Delete SSR System.
A dialog box appears with a list of the available materials.
3. Choose the material to delete and click OK.
9.4 About post-tensioning systems

There are two types of systems considered in RAM Concept.
• Unbonded systems: greased strand encased in plastic sheathing.
• Bonded systems: bare strand within grouted ducts.

About post-tensioning systems
Strands are typically comprised of seven wires spirally wound. There are two dominant strand sizes used in
building construction:
• 0.5 inch diameter (12.7 mm)
• 0.6 inch diameter (15.2 mm)
For further discussion on post-tensioning systems, see Chapter 26, “Defining Tendons”.

Specifying loadings
10
A loading is a set of point, line and area loads applied as a group.
You define loading properties in the loadings window. You draw the actual loads on the loading plans.
Loadings can be added (e.g. seismic, snow, soil and wind).
Loadings can be deleted (other than those of a special type, as described in “About loading types” below).
RAM Concept can perform pattern (or skip) loading and you define the factors that control this process in the
loading window.
10.1 About default loadings

RAM Concept provides default loadings for self-weight, post-tensioning and gravity loads. For mat files, RAM
Concept provides additional default loadings for wind and seismic.
Self-Dead Loading This is the self-weight of the concrete. All other dead loading is superimposed.
Balance Loading Post-tensioning tendons and anchors apply internal loads to the concrete structure. We call
this set of loads the Balance Loading because you normally design the post-tensioning to balance or offset the
other loadings applied to the slab.
Hyperstatic Loading The hyperstatic loading is a theoretical loading that considers the restraining effect of the
supports on the structure as it tries to deform due to the application of post-tensioning. Many people use the
term “secondary” in place of “hyperstatic”. The loading is not necessarily secondary in nature. RAM Concept
calculates the effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects (elements, springs, supports, design sections,
design strip segments and punching checks) as described in “Post-tensioning loadings”.
Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading This set of superimposed loads is present during
construction when the contractor stresses the tendons. This loading is rarely used, and you need not consider it
for RC structures.
Other Dead Loading This set of superimposed dead loads applies to PT structures after stressing of post-
tensioning tendons. It is simply the superimposed dead loads for RC structures.
Live (Reducible) Loading
Live (Unreducible) Loading
Live (Storage) Loading
Live (Parking) Loading
Live (Roof) Loading

Specifying loadings
Viewing the loadings
Different sets of live loads. See About loading types (on page 96) for further description.
Snow Loading The snow loads on the structure.
Service Wind North Loading The set of wind loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
Service Wind East Loading The set of wind loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
Ultimate Seismic North Loading The set of seismic loads in the north-south direction (for mat defaults only).
Ultimate Seismic East Loading The set of seismic loads in the east-west direction (for mat defaults only).
10.2 Viewing the loadings

The Loading window lists the different loadings and their type and pattern factors.
1. Choose Criteria > Loadings.

2. If there are many loadings, scroll down to view them all.
Figure 14: Loadings Window
10.3 Loading properties

Loadings have the following properties:
Loading Name The label used to identify the loading.
Loading Type See “About loading types” for more information.

Specifying loadings
About loading types
Analysis The type of analysis, which can be Normal, Hyperstatic or Lateral SE.
A Hyperstatic analysis is used for only the Hyperstatic Loading described in “About default loadings”.
For information on Lateral SE, see “Self-equilibrium analysis” in Chapter 50, “Analysis Notes”.
On-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that are located within the loading pattern when performing
pattern-loading calculations. See “About load pattern” for more information.
Off-Pattern Factor The factor that applies to loads that are not located within the loading pattern when
performing pattern-loading calculations.
Note: Concept ignores the pattern factors if both factors are the same value. Setting both factors to 2.0 is
identical to setting both factors to 1.0
10.4 About loading types

Every loading in RAM Concept has a loading type. RAM Concept uses loading type to generate the appropriate
load combinations from the defined set of loadings, and to apply appropriate live load reductions.
See “Rebuilding load combinations” for information on how RAM Concept generates load combinations.
Related Links
• Rebuilding load combinations (on page 105)
10.5 Available loading types

The available loading types are:
Self-Weight The structure’s concrete self-weight loads are always generated with this loading type.
There is always one and only one loading of this type.
Balance As described in “About default loadings”. There is always one and only one loading of this
type.
Hyperstatic As described in “About default loadings”. There is always one and only one loading of this
type.
Stressing Dead Loadings of this type contain superimposed loads applied before stressing of post-
tensioning tendons.
This loading type is rarely used and is generally not considered for other loading
conditions. You need not consider it for RC structures.
Dead Loadings of this type contain permanent dead loads other than those from the self-weight
type.
Live (Reducible) Loadings of this type contain typical floor live loads that are reducible. See Chapter 52,
“Live Load Reduction Notes” for detailed information regarding how each live load
reduction code handles loadings of this type.

Specifying loadings
Available loading types
Live (Unreducible) Loadings of this type contain typical floor live loads that are not reducible (typically
assembly loadings - see “About assembly loads”).
Live (Storage) Loadings of this type contain typical floor live loads that are reducible using special
storage loading reduction rules.
Live (Parking) Loadings of this type contain typical loads for parking garages or car parks.
Live (Roof) Loadings of this type contain typical roof live loads - except snow - that are reducible.
RAM Concept never reduces these loads (the RAM Structural System may reduce these
loads).
Snow Loadings of this type contain typical snow loads. They generally do not consider drift or
exceptional circmstances, and they may be characteristic or design loads. See the specific
code chapters for further details.
Other Loadings of this type contain loads of an unspecified nature. RAM Concept never
considers these loadings except in manually created or edited load combinations (or load
combinations created in previous files). All loading from Floor versions 2.3 and before,
and RAM Concept versions 1.3 and before (except self-dead, balance and hyperstatic) are
given this type; it is often useful to change the loading types of these loadings from earlier
program versions.
Service Wind Loadings of these types contain wind loads at service force levels. Service Wind Loading
N is assumed to correspond to Ultimate Wind Loading N (if it exists).
Ultimate Wind Loadings of these types contain wind loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Wind
Loading N is assumed to correspond to Service Wind Loading N (if it exists).
Service Seismic Loadings of these types contain seismic loads at service force levels. Service Seismic
Loading N is assumed to correspond to Ultimate Seismic Loading N (if it exists).
Ultimate Seismic Loadings of these types contain seismic loads at ultimate force levels. Ultimate Seismic
Loading N is assumed to correspond to Service Seismic Loading N (if it exists).
Temperature Loadings of this type account for axial strains or element curvature induced by
temperature changes.
Shrinkage Loadings of this type account for axial strains and or element curvatures. These loadings
behave similar to temperature loadings but are not dependent on temperature changes
or thermal material properties.
Most of these loading types are also available in a “transfer” variation. See About Transfer Loading Types (on
page 98) for more information.
Notes:
• All loading types except self-weight, balance and hyperstatic may be used for more than one loading.
• Temperature and shrinkage loadings are not included in default load combinations.
10.5.1 About assembly loads

Assembly loadings deserve special consideration

Specifying loadings
Changing Loading Types
Assembly loads It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you define assembly loads on
a Live (Unreducible) layer.
Refer to the applicable live load reduction section for detailed information regarding how a specific code handles
loadings of this type:
10.5.2 About Transfer Loading Types

Almost all of the loading types previously discussed are available with a “transfer” variation. The transfer
variations represent loads transferred from the structure above onto the level under consideration (via columns
or walls). A few loading types are not available with a transfer variation, or have a somewhat different meaning
with a transfer variation. These are:
Self-Weight There is no transfer variation of this loading type.

Balance The transfer variation of this loading type is for loads generated by the tendons in the
structure above the level under consideration. Unlike the non-transfer balance type: multiple
loadings of this type may exist; the loadings do not contain loads generated from the tendons;
and the loadings of this type are user-editable. Loadings of this type are considered in the
calculation of hyperstatic effects.
Hyperstatic There is no transfer variation of this loading type.
Stressing Dead There is no transfer variation of this loading type.
Temperature There is no transfer variation of this loading type.
Shrinkage There is no transfer variation of this loading type.
10.6 Changing Loading Types

2. Click the loading type of the loading name.
A drop down menu appears.
3. Select the new loading type.
Notes:
Loading types for self-weight loading cannot be changed.

Loading types for balance, hyperstatic, temperature, and shrinkage loading cannot be changed since they are
not compatible with other loading types.

Specifying loadings
Adding and deleting loadings
10.7 Changing Analysis

The analysis of any loading (except Self-Dead, Balance, Hyperstatic, Temperature, and Shrinkage) may be
changed in the Loadings window.

2. Click the analysis of the loading name.
A drop down menu appears.
3. Select the new analysis.
10.8 Adding and deleting loadings

At times, you may wish to add loadings such as seismic or temperature loadings. Conversely, you may choose to
delete loadings such as Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading.
10.8.1 To add a loading

2. Click Add Loading.
3. In the Add Loading dialog box, do the following:
a. Type a name for the new loading.
b. Select the loading type (standard, temperature, or shrinkage).
c. Click OK.
The new loading appears in a row at the bottom of the table.
4. Enter the Loading Type and Analysis for the new loading.
(standard loadings only)
5. Enter the On-Pattern Factor and Off-Pattern Factor for the new loading.
(standard loadings only)
10.8.2 To delete a loading

2. Click Delete Loading.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current loadings.
3. Choose the loading to delete and click OK.

Specifying loadings
About load pattern
10.9 About load pattern

In structural engineering, pattern loading refers to a load arrangement that ignores or reduces loads on selected
spans for the purpose of maximizing moments, shears or reactions. In 2D analysis, it is not difficult to create an
algorithm that determines the important patterns, but this is extremely difficult for a 3D program, especially for
irregular column layouts and panels. To handle pattern loading, RAM Concept uses the concept of load patterns.
Note: Some refer to pattern loading as skip loading.
10.9.1 How load patterns work

A load pattern creates a (invisible) pattern loading that contains only filtered loads for each standard loading.
The On-Pattern and Off-Pattern factors control the filtering.
The inclusion and exclusion of loads within the pattern area defines the pattern loading. RAM Concept multiplies
loads inside the pattern area by the on-pattern factor and multiplies loads outside the pattern area by the off-
pattern factor. The actual pattern area is dependent upon the finite element mesh. See Creating Pattern Loading
(on page 203), for further explanation.
On-Pattern areas (shaded) for 6-panel slab:

Specifying loadings
About load pattern
For the figures above, if the live load is 100 psf, the on-pattern factor is 0.8 and the off-pattern factor is 0.1 then
two pattern loadings are created with a load of 80 psf on the hatched areas and a load of 10 psf on the remainder
of the slab.
RAM Concept uses the load patterns for a loading - along with the full loading - to determine the design force
envelopes for design strip segments, design sections and punching checks.
10.9.2 When to use load pattern

Whether you use pattern loading is a matter of which code you are using and your engineering judgment. Some
codes allow you to ignore pattern loading for certain types of structures and magnitudes of live loading.
Common sense should lead you to logical load patterns that produce very close to the maximum moments,
shears and reactions.
In most circumstances, you only pattern the live loading. There could be circumstances where you pattern other
loadings.
For patterned loads, the on-pattern factor often has a value of 0.75 and the off-pattern factor often has a value of
zero.

Specifying loadings
About load pattern
For non-patterned loads, both factors should be 1.0. In special circumstances, the on-pattern factor can exceed a
value of 1.0.
When in doubt, all on-pattern and off-pattern factors should be 1.0. This results in no pattern loading.
See Chapter 21, “Creating Pattern Loading”, for further discussion.
10.9.3 How load pattern can approximate moving loads

You can approximate moving loads by using load patterns.
1. Specify an on-pattern factor of 10 and an off-pattern factor of zero.

2. Specify load factors (in the load combinations window) for the “moving” loading of one-tenth their actual
values.
3. Define the movement using the load patterns.
4. Draw the load once in each pattern.
Note: Concept still analyses a load combination with all the loads present that is included in the envelope. This is
the reason for scaling the on-pattern, off-pattern and load factors - it diminishes the effect of the “all the loads”
load combination.

Specifying Load Combinations
11
A load combination is a factored linear combination of loadings. Strictly speaking, we should call it “loading
combination”, but we have adopted the commonly used terminology.
11.1 About default load combinations

Codes generally specify which loadings you need to consider in the design of a structure and how you should
combine these loadings.
RAM Concept's default load combinations depend on how you created the file. When you use a template or an
existing file then the default load combinations are those of the source.
When you create a file using the New command the default load combinations depend on the code selected.
These load combinations are usually appropriate for the selected code, but there may be times when you need to
modify the load factors and add loadings. For example, temperature and shrinkage loadings are not included in
the default load combinations.
The default load combinations for each code are described in detail in the relevant chapter:
• ACI 318-14 Design (on page 985)
• AS 3600-2018 Design (on page 1049)
• BS 8110: 1997 Design (on page 1070)
• IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design (on page 1097)
• EN 1992-1-1: 2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design (on page 1121)
• CSA A23.3-04 Design (on page 1154)
11.2 Viewing the load combinations

The Load Combinations window lists the different load combinations and their design criteria and load factors.
1. Choose Criteria > Load Combinations.

2. If there are many load combinations, scroll down to view them all.

Viewing the load combinations
Figure 15: Load Combination Window

Rebuilding load combinations
11.3 Rebuilding load combinations

At times, you may wish to rebuild an existing load combination that includes a new or revised loading. For
example, if a loading’s type changes, it affects the load factors and live load reduction process. You can account
for these changes by using the rebuild command.
RAM Concept will not automatically update load factors when a loading's loading type changes. RAM Concept
only sets the load factors when rebuilding load combinations.
1. Choose Criteria > Rebuild Load Combos

Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify if the load combinations are for an elevated slab or
mat foundation.
2. Select elevated slab or mat foundation
3. Select Rebuild
11.4 Adding and deleting load combinations

At times, you may wish to add load combinations such as seismic plus dead or snow plus dead. Conversely, you
might choose to delete load combinations such as Temporary Construction (At Stressing) LC.
11.4.1 To add a load combination

2. Click Add Load Combination.
3. In the dialog box that appears, enter a name for the new load combination and click OK.
Another dialog box appears that requires you to specify the plans that you want RAM Concept to create (Slab
Stress, Slab Deflection and Slab Force). These plans appear in the new load combination’s folder.
4. Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
The new load combination appears at the bottom of the window.
5. Select the active rule sets.
6. Enter the load factors and the alternative load factors for each loading in the load combination.
11.4.2 To delete a load combination

2. Click Delete Load Combination.
A dialog box opens with a list of the current load combinations.
3. Choose the load combination to delete and click OK.

Load combination properties
11.5 Load combination properties

Load Combination Name The label used to identify the load combination.
Combo Type The choices are:
• Single: this is the standard type.
• Lateral Group: this is used for a floor that is part of the lateral force resisting system [especially mat
foundations (rafts)].
Note: The primary purpose of Load Combination types is to reduce the number of lateral load combinations. A
secondary purpose is to provide easy enveloping for results such as soil bearing pressure.
Analysis Type The choices are:

• Linear: this is the standard type.
• Zero-Tension: these load combinations do NOT have alternate load factors and never consider pattern
loading.
Active Rule Sets These control which rule sets are used for design calculations. Up to six active rule sets can be
associated with each load combination. See Chapter 12, “Selecting Design Rules” for further explanation.
Load Factor The factor applied to a particular loading in the load combination.
Alternate Envelope Factor You should only use these if you fully understand the principle involved. Do not set
these factors to zero without understanding their use. If you are unsure then set them to equal the
corresponding load factors. See “About alternate envelope factors”.
11.6 About group load combinations

A group load combination has load factors for every non-lateral loading and for one single lateral loading type.
Effectively, a group load combination's results are the envelope of all the results from N invisible single load
combinations, where N is the number of loadings for the given lateral loading type.
A linear group load combination has a standard and alternate load factor for every non-lateral loading, and a
standard and alternate load factor for the selected lateral loading type. It never has zero tension iterations.
A zero-tension group load combination has a single load factor for every non-lateral loading, and a single load
factor for the selected lateral loading type. It has zero-tension iterations as necessary for invisible (internal)
component load combo, and will be the envelope of all of the component load combos combined. It never
considers pattern loading.
The following figure is intended to explain the ramifications of load combination type selection.

About alternate envelope factors
Load Combination TYPE
Single Lateral
All loadings are listed All non-lateral loads are listed

Each loading has load factors One –and only one– key loading
type can be used (per load
Linear Load Combinations have combination)
an Alternate Envelope Factor
All N loadings within the Key
Zero-Tension Load Combinations Loading Type are used to
do not have Alternate Envelope generate N load combinations
Factors
Figure 16: Ramifications of Load Combination Type
Refer to Summary of load combination types (on page 108) for more information.
11.7 About alternate envelope factors

There can be situations where the application of a loading has an unconservative effect on the results.
For example
• a retaining wall loading that applies compression to a floor.
• a cantilever live loading that reduces the internal span moment.
In such circumstances, it is desirable to analyze the structure both with and without the full loading. While you
could do this by creating an additional load combination, RAM Concept provides a much simpler solution -
Alternate Envelope Factors (AEF).

Summary of load combination types
Figure 17: This beam supports dead loads (not shown) and live loads (shown). The live loading reduces the positive
span moment. By using an AEF less than the corresponding load factor, you create a load combination with a
reduced live loading. Note that the AEF affects the entire live loading, not just the live load on the cantilever.
Conceptually, RAM Concept considers alternate envelope factors by analyzing the load combination 2L times
(where L is the number of loadings) - once for every permutation of load factors and alternate envelope factors
for all of the loadings. RAM Concept then envelopes the design strip forces, design section forces and punching
shear reactions for all of the load combination analyses. RAM Concept uses these force envelopes later for design
purposes. You can also plot the force envelopes or view them in tables.
RAM Concept fully considers any pattern loading effects while considering the load factors.
Note that the general analysis forces that are not used as design forces by RAM Concept - such as standard slab
bending moments and deflections - are only stored for the load combination considering the standard load
factors.
As stated above, you should only use alternate envelope factors if you fully understand the principle involved. Do
not set them to zero without understanding their use. If you are unsure then set them to equal the corresponding
load factors.
11.7.1 Example of Alternate Load Factors

The following figure shows the suggested way to use the factors for a strength design of the ACI318-05 Factored
LC.
Figure 18: Factored LC load factors and alternate envelope factors.

11.8 Summary of load combination types

The effects of using different load combination types and analysis types are summarized in the following table.
Table 1: Load Combination Summary
Linear Zero-tension
Single • Standard and Alternate load • Standard load factor for every
factors for every loading loading
• No zero-tension iterations • Zero-tension iterations as
• Considers pattern loading necessary
• Ignores pattern loading
Group • Standard and Alternate load • Standard load factor for every
factors for every non-lateral non-lateral loading
loading • Standard load factor for the
• Standard and Alternate load selected lateral loading type
factors for the selected lateral • Zero-tension iterations as
loading type necessary
• No zero-tension iterations • Ignores pattern loading
• Considers pattern loading • No results for point springs, line
• No results for point springs, line springs, point supports, line
springs, point supports, line supports, walls.
supports, walls. • No “Standard” results for any
• No “Standard” results for any quantity
quantity • See the second figure in this
• See the second figure in this chapter for more information.
chapter for more information.
ACI 318-05 Elevated floor file with lateral loadings added

To simplify the example, four loadings have been deleted from the standard file.

Figure 19: Loading table for ACI 318-05 Elevated Floor - six wind loadings have been added (and one stressing dead
and three live loadings have been deleted)
After adding and deleting some loadings, the load combinations have been rebuilt. See “Rebuilding load
combinations”.
The Rebuild operation adds the load combination “Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W”, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 20: Rebuilt load combination: Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W
RAM Concept now expands this load combination and calculates the following load combinations:
1. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) + 1.6 North Wind + 1.6 North Wind
(transfer)
2. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) - 1.6 North Wind - 1.6 North Wind
(transfer)
3. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) + 1.6 East Wind
4. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) - 1.6 East Wind

5. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) + 1.6 Trade Wind + 1.6 Sirocco Wind +
1.6 Zephyr Wind
6. 1.2 Self-dead + 1.0 Hyperstatic + 1.2 Other dead + 0.5 Live (reducible) - 1.6 Trade Wind - 1.6 Sirocco Wind -
1.6 Zephyr Wind

Selecting Design Rules
12
You design concrete floors manually by calculating the resultants (moments, shears and axial forces) of a load
combination and applying the appropriate code rules and formula. You select code rules based upon the type of
member (reinforced slab, post-tensioned beam, etc.) and the type of load combinations. For example, codes
intend some load combinations are for strength design and others for serviceability design.
RAM Concept uses a similar method. It sorts code rules into sets of rules and applies them to the resultant
envelopes of load combinations. Thus, a rule set design is one or more code rules applied to the resultant
envelope of one or more load combinations.
For example, the set of code formula for bending and shear strength is the strength rule set. RAM Concept
applies this rule set to the envelope of all “factored” (or ultimate) load combinations. The strength rule set does
not apply to service load combinations.
You design most floors or members for more than one rule set. For example, a post-tensioned floor is usually
checked for initial service stresses, service stresses and strength, all with different load combinations.
12.1 Using rule set designs

RAM Concept uses the concept of a design strip to link finite element analysis with concrete code rules (see
Chapter 22, “Defining Design Strips”). Each design strip’s properties include design system (beam / one-way
slab / two-way slab) and the “considered as post-tensioned” option. Design strips contain design cross sections.
You assign each load combination active rule set designs in the load combinations window.
How RAM Concept utilizes rule set designs:
1. Load combinations generate envelopes for resultants (moments, shears, axial forces and torsions).
2. All load combination envelopes with the same rule set design are in turn enveloped. This is a rule set design
envelope.
3. For each rule set design envelope, design strips generate rule set design force envelopes.
4. Each design strip determines which code rules are appropriate for each rule set design. Design strip
properties impact which particular rules are used.
5. Design and checking rules are applied to the rule set design section envelopes.
6. A design summary envelopes the reinforcement requirements and section status for all rule set design
section envelopes.
Example:
The following example describes how RAM Concept selects the ACI 318-02 design rules for a post-tensioned
beam with live and wind loadings.

Rule set design properties
Figure 21: Example of load combinations and rule sets
RAM Concept’s process is as follows:

• The two load combinations generate envelopes for resultants.
• The five active rule set designs (service design, code minimum design, user minimum design, strength design
and ductility design) each create envelopes from the load combinations.
• Each rule set design envelope creates a rule set design section envelope.
• The design strip properties of “Structural system: beam” and “consider as post-tensioned” determines the
following rules from ACI 318-02 are applicable:
• Strength Design: rules 18.7.2 (flexural strength) and 11.4 and 11.5 (shear strength) are used with the
beam clauses.
• Minimum Design: rule 18.9.2.
• Service Design: rules 18.3.3 and 18.4.2 (b).
• These rules are applied to the rule set design section envelopes.
• The reinforcement requirements and section status for all rule set design section envelopes are in turn
enveloped for a design summary.
12.2 Rule set design properties

The following is a list of rule set design properties:
Name This relates to the rule set design. It most cases it is the same as the active rules, but there can be
exceptions (see adding rule set designs - below).
Active Rules This describes the set of rules applied by this rule set.
12.3 Types of active rules

The available ACI 318-02 active rules are:

Adding and deleting rule set designs
Code Minimum Rules for minimum reinforcement (shrinkage, detailing, etc.) based upon geometry
Design rather than stress or moment level. Does not include shear reinforcement.
User Minimum Reinforcement based on user defined reinforcement ratio. See the design strip
Design property description in chapter 22.
Initial Service Design Checks of PT floor stresses just after application of prestress (when dead load is
minimal).
Service Design Checks of PT floor stresses due to service loads.
Rules for reinforcement bar based upon bar stress levels.
Sustained Service Checks of PT floor compression stresses due to sustained loads.
Design
Strength Design Rules to ensure section has sufficient strength in bending and shear for factored (or
ultimate) moments, and minimum shear reinforcement.
Ductility Design Rules intended to produce ductile behavior.
Soil Bearing This is used in mat foundation (raft) files to facilitate the enveloping of soil bearing
pressure. It does not use any active rules.
12.4 Adding and deleting rule set designs

Adding a duplicate rule set design allows you to separate the results for different load combinations with the
same active rules. For example, if a strength design is required for three different load combinations (1. Dead
and Live; 2. Dead, Reduced Live and Snow; 3. Seismic) then you could keep the results separate by creating two
new rule set designs with names such as “Snow” and “Seismic” which both use the code strength rules. This way
you can view the strength reinforcement requirements separately.
You can delete non-applicable rule set designs to simplify the file. For example, in ACI 318-02, initial service
design, and sustained service design are not required for floors without post-tensioning. Another example is DL
+ 0.25LL Design is not required if the UBC is not used.
12.4.1 To add a rule set design

1. Choose Criteria > Design Rules.
2. Click Add Rule Set Design.
3. Type a name for the new Rule Set Design in the Add Rule Set Design dialog box and click OK.
A dialog box appears that requires you to specify the plans that you want created (Top and Bottom
Reinforcement, Shear Reinforcement and Punching).
4. Choose the plans that you want created and click OK.
The new rule set design appears at the bottom of the window.
5. Select the active rules.

Adding and deleting rule set designs
12.4.2 To delete a rule set

1. Choose Criteria > Design Rules.
2. Click Delete Rule Set Design.
A dialog box appears with a list of the current rule set designs.
3. Choose the rule set design to delete and click OK.

Using a CAD Drawing
13
You can define the model’s geometry quickly if there is a CAD file (with .dwg or .dxf filename extension)
available to use as a background. You trace the CAD drawing with object tools to facilitate the finite element
mesh generation. You can also use the CAD drawing to locate other objects such as loads. Snap tools make
tracing the imported CAD drawing easier.
Note: RAM Concept itself does not recognize the meaning of actual drawing lines.
It is not necessary, however, to use a CAD file. If the floor is straightforward, or there is no drawing available, you
should skip this chapter. For strip-like models that do not warrant the use of a CAD file, it may be better to use
Strip Wizard.
13.1 Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing

To use a background drawing you import the drawing and then verify that it is at the correct scale.
13.1.1 Importing a CAD file

You can import a drawing at any time. An imported drawing overwrites any previously imported drawing. RAM
Concept can work with either a .dwg or a .dxf file. It is typically best to use a .dwg file.
1. Choose File > Import Drawing.

2. Select the CAD drawing file you want to import.
If Concept cannot determine the units of CAD file, the File Units dialog box will appear with a list of units. The
units relate to the CAD file, not the RAM Concept file.
3. Select the appropriate units and click OK.
Note: It is possible to import a CAD drawing with one set of units into a model with another set of units.
13.1.2 Checking the imported information

When you import the drawing file, it will be visible on the Standard Plan of the Drawing Import Layer. You
should verify that the plan scale is correct.

Using a CAD Drawing
Importing, verifying and viewing a drawing
To check that the imported drawing is at the correct scale
1. Choose Layers > Drawing Import > Standard Plan.

2.
Click Zoom Extent ( ) to ensure that you are viewing the entire CAD plan.
3.
Select the Dimension tool ( ) and draw a dimension line between two snapable points that are a known
distance apart. The distance between the two points will appear as a dimension.
If this dimension is not as expected then the imported file may be in the wrong scale. Consider importing the
drawing with different units to fix this problem.
13.1.3 Making the drawing visible on other plans

You can make the imported drawing visible on any plan through the Visible Objects dialog box. Usually you want
to make it visible on the Mesh Input Standard Plan (for defining the floor geometry), and perhaps on some
loading plans (for locations of line and point loads). You may choose to turn off some CAD layers if they clutter
the drawing. If you happened to bring in an architectural drawing, it is probably a good idea to turn off the
furniture. See “Controlling views” for more information on making objects visible or hidden.

Importing a Database from the RAM Structural
14
System
Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural System is referred to as “RSS”.
RAM Concept can import concrete structure information and loads from the RAM Structural System (Version
9.01 or higher) into a RAM Concept file.
RAM Concept can also export support member forces back to RSS.
14.1 What can be imported from the RAM Structural System

RAM Concept allows the selective import of concrete members (slabs, beams, openings, columns and walls),
applied loads and member loads from one story of a RAM Structural System database. Member loads can be from
gravity and / or lateral analyses.
14.2 Controlling which concrete members are imported

A story defined in the RAM Structural System can have two types of floors: elevated or mat foundation. The floor
type designation determines which concrete members in the story are imported.
The following figure and table show the relationship between the selected story, the import slab type and the
slab area imported. Note that mats are below the designated story. For example, the 2nd story mat is the mat
that supports the second story elevated floor.
2nd Story B
1st Story A
D
Figure 22: The slab areas shown above (A,B,C,D) will be imported based upon the selections shown below.

Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System
About load importation
Table 2: Relationship between the selected story, the import slab type, and the slab area imported.
Story Import Type
Elevated Mat Foundation
1st A C
2nd B D
14.2.1 Definition of the “import perimeter”

The selected slab areas define the import perimeter. Only RAM Structural System support members within the
import perimeter will be imported. For example, in the figure in “Controlling which concrete members are
imported”, if the 1st story elevated slab is imported with the “columns above” setting, the two furthermost right
columns between the 1st story and 2nd story will not be imported as they are not within the slab perimeter of
the 1st story elevated slab.
The following structural members can be imported:
1. Slabs
• All slabs of the selected slab type.
2. Beams
• All concrete beams from the selected story.
3. Openings and Penetrations
• All openings and penetrations within the import perimeter.
4. Columns
• Any column (below and / or above) whose center point lies inside the import perimeter.
5. Walls
• Any wall (below and / or above) whose center line is contained by or crosses any part of the import
perimeter.
6. Grids
• All orthogonal and radial grids.
Note: All structural members are imported into RAM Concept’s Mesh Input layer. Grids are imported into the
Drawing Import layer.
14.3 About load importation

RAM Concept imports applied loads and analyzed member forces from the selected member group.

About load importation
Certain components of member loads are ignored when importing. The components that are ignored depend on
the slab type and whether the member forces are from gravity and lateral loads.
The following table summarizes the force components that are imported onto a mat foundation and an elevated
slab.
Table 3: Relationship between the slab type, member loading type, and imported force components for a slab.
Slab Type Loading Type Forces Imported
Mat Transfer Gravity Fz, Mx, My
Mat Transfer Lateral Fx, Fy, Fz, Mx, My
Elevated Transfer Gravity Fz
Elevated Transfer Lateral Fz, Mx, My
Wall forces are resolved into a statically equivalent linearly varying force applied along the length of the wall.
The following loads can be imported
1. Direct gravity loads
• Point, line and area gravity loads applied directly to the imported slabs.
The following table shows how RSS load cases are mapped to RAM Concept loading layers.
Table 4: Mapping of RSS load cases
RSS Load Case RAM Concept Loading Layer
Dead Dead Load
Live Ignored (imported as 4 individual live loadings)
Live Reducible Live Reducible
Live Unreducible Live Unreducible
Live Storage Live Storage
Live Roof Live Load Roof
Partition Partition (imported as “Live Unreducible” type)
Construction Dead Construction Dead Load
Construction Live Ignored
Mass Dead Ignored
2. Transfer gravity loads

Importing a database
• RAM Concept imports transferred gravity loads from RSS members above the import slabs. The loads
include member self-weight with the transferred gravity loads. The loads are imported as point loads and
line loads into separate RAM Concept loading layers.
• A new RAM Concept transfer gravity loading layer is created for each RSS Load Case, as in Table 14-3, but
with the string “(transfer)” appended to the name. For example, transfer loads from the RSS Dead load
case are imported into the Concept “Dead Load (transfer)” loading layer. The Concept “(transfer)” loading
layers are not created if the Transfer Gravity Loads are not imported.
•
3. Lateral Member Loads
• Lateral member forces (such as wind and seismic) from members above and below the imported slab are
imported as point loads. The member loads are imported into a new loading layer for each analyzed load
case in RSS. RAM Concept creates the name for the new loading layer from the user's label and the RSS
load type.
• For example, the name could be “mySeismic(EQ_UBC97_X_+E_F)”.
Note: Mat foundation loads imported from the RAM Structural System will always be reduced during the import.
For this reason you should always choose the live load reduction code of “None” in these files.
14.4 Importing a database

You can import from the RAM Structural System at anytime. An import overwrites some or all previously
imported time. An import overwrites some or all previously imported data, and may overwrite information you
have directly input to RAM Concept.
Note: RAM Concept may not be able to import data correctly if the RSS file does not pass the “Data Check”
operation in the RAM Modeler module. It is strongly recommended that your RSS file have no errors before
attempting to import it into RAM Concept.
1. Select the RAM Structural System file to import:

a. Select File > Import RAM Structural System.
b. If there is no open RAM Concept file the Open RAM Structural System Database dialog opens. Browse
and select a RSS database (. RSS) file and click OK.
When a valid RSS database file is selected, the RAM Structural System Import dialog opens. The RSS
filename selected appears after File: at the top of the window.
c. (Optional) Click Browse at the top of the dialog to select a different file with the file browser.
Note: If you select a file with a version prior to 9.0, an error will be displayed and you will be returned to the
file browser. Clicking the Cancel button cancels the import operation.
Note: If you are using RSS version 9, select RSS database files with the .RAM extension.

Figure 23: RSS import dialog box

2. Select the story label from the Choose story drop-down list and then select the Slab Type.
3. Select the RSS Structure options to import:, select the structural members from the check boxes.
a. Check the individual structure elements (e.g., Slab/Mat Areas, Beams, etc.) to import for the selected
story.
Note: For Mat Foundations, the Columns Below Slab, Walls Below Slab, Beams and Openings and
Penetrations objects are disabled.

b. (Optional) Select the Use RAM Structural System crack factors for member stiffness if you want to use the
cracked factors of the imported members as calculated by RSS.
If this option is not selected, then the crack factors for slab areas, beams, and columns are set to 1.0. When
this option is selected, the stiffness values are set according to the following table.
Object Concept RAM Structural System
Slab kMr, kMs, kMrs Bending Cracked Factor
kFr, kFs, kVrs Diaphragm Cracked Factor
Beam kMs Cracked Factor
kMrs Torsion Factor
kFr Axial Factor
kMr, kFs, kVrs 1.0
Column IFactor Axial Factor
4. Select the load types to import from the check boxes in the Loading group.
Note: For Mat Foundations, the Direct Gravity Loads option is disabled.
5. Click OK.
After an RSS file is imported, the RAM Import Status opens with a summary and any warnings.

Reimporting a database
Figure 24: Example of an import summary with warnings
The RSS geometry definitions and loads are now imported into RAM Concept.
You can now generate the finite element mesh. See Generating the Mesh (on page 178).
Note: If you are re-importing, there could be additional dialogs that appear with more warnings.
Note: Importing lateral analysis loads from RSS models which contain a large number of lateral load cases will
cause RAM Concept to create a corresponding large number of load combinations. This will result in sluggish
performance in RAM Concept.
14.5 Reimporting a database

If the information in the RAM Structural System database changes, the RAM Concept model will not be
automatically updated. You can, however, reimport the changed information.

Changes to structural members and loads made in RAM Concept can be lost when importing an RSS file, so care
should be taken to avoid losing information.
14.5.1 Resolving loading conflicts

If the RAM Concept file has existing loadings that do not match the RSS loadings to be imported, a dialog box like
that in the following figure asks if you want to keep or delete the existing loadings.
If you have already specified (drawn) loads in the loadings that RAM Concept has proposed to delete, then you
should keep the loadings that RAM Concept offers to remove. If you want to export the reactions from these pre-
existing loads to RSS, you need to copy the loads from the original loadings to the corresponding RSS loadings
that are being imported (after which you should manually delete the non-RSS loadings).
Note: If you have used the Export Geometry to RAM Structural System feature (section 36.2) prior to importing,
then you always see this warning. The recommended workflow is to either draw the loads in RSS or draw the
loads in Concept after importing from RSS; with either of these workflows, you can safely allow the loadings
proposed for removal to be deleted.
Figure 25: Choices for dealing with new loadings
RAM Concept will also prompt you to determine if you require rebuilding of the load combinations and design
rules, as shown in the following figure.
You have three choices:
• Rebuild: load combinations and design rules in the RAM Concept file are rebuilt
• Don’t Rebuild: the new load cases are added to the RAM Concept file, but not included in the load
combinations.
• Cancel: RAM Concept returns you to the file browser.

Note: When reimporting a particular member type, e.g. beams, all entities of that category are removed from the
RAM Concept file before importing. For example, if beams are imported, all beams in the RAM Concept file are
removed first. Any beams you have added manually in RAM Concept will be lost. If beams are not selected for
import, then beams in the RAM Concept file will not be affected when the file is reimported.
Note: If any loading categories are selected, then ALL loads in reimported loading layers are removed. Any loads
you have added manually on a loading layer being reimported will be lost.You have the option whether to
regenerate load combinations or not.
RAM Concept always asks you to confirm a reimport operation, because it may lead to loss of information. It
warns you if the data to be reimported would be significantly different from the previously imported data, or if
significant information will be lost. For example, RAM Concept warns you when reimporting a mat foundation
after previously importing an elevated slab, or vice versa.
14.5.2 To reimport from the RAM Structural System

1. Select File > Import RSS.
A file dialog box will open with the name of the last RSS file you imported into this RAM Concept file.
2. Select the RSS file and click OK.
The file can be a different RSS file which may have a significant (and possibly negative) effect on the RAM
Concept model.
The RAM Structural System Import dialog box will appear with a list of options. The default options will be
the story and slab type from the last import.
3. Select the story, slab type, structure and loading and click OK.
A New Loadings confirmation box may appear that describes loadings in the RSS file that are not in the
current RAM Concept file. Click Replace, Add, or Cancel.
Figure 26: Examples of warnings for an import operation with different levels and structure type

Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions
A confirmation box appears that warns about differences from previously imported data.
4. Click Replace or Cancel.
A RSS Import Status dialog box will appear with a summary and any warnings.
5. Click OK.
14.6 Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions
14.6.1 Limitations
• Not all information stored in a RAM Structural System database can be transferred into RAM Concept.
• RAM Concept models RAM Structural System data using one of the following building codes: ACI 318-99, ACI
318-02, ACI 318-05, ACI 318-08, ACI 318-11, ACI 318-14, AS 3600:2001, AS 3600:2009, Eurocode 2:2004,
CAN/CSA A23.3-04, or BS 8110:1997. A RAM Structural System database that has live load reduction set to
China GB or Hong Kong will be imported using the BS 8110: 1997 building code; a live load reduction setting
of NBC of Canada will be imported using the CAN/CSA A23.3-04 standard; otherwise the building code set in
RAM Concrete is used to set the RAM Concept code. The building code can be changed, if necessary after the
importation is complete.
• RAM Concept does not model beam fixity.
• RAM Concept models a column end as fixed if the RAM Structural System column is fixed along either its
major or minor axis.
• RAM Concept only models walls of constant height. RAM Concept will create a wall with the average height of
the RAM Structural System wall.
• The lateral loads applied to the structure in RAM Frame Analysis are not imported.
• RAM Concept ignores holes in walls modeled in RAM Structural System version 10.
14.6.2 Defaults
RAM Concept uses the following defaults for properties that are not defined in the RAM Structural System.
Beams

Limitations, Defaults and Assumptions
• Surface elevation is 0.0.

Columns
• Compressible is true.
• Roller is false, except above mat foundations.
• Columns above mat foundations are pinned at the top regardless of the setting in the RAM database.
Walls
• Neither the top nor the bottom is fixed.
• Modeled as a Shear Wall.
• Modeled as compressible.
• The RAM Structural System “cracked section factor” is ignored.
14.6.3 Assumptions
• All loads are applied to the surface of the slab.
• Wall forces are applied as a linearly varying force along the length of the wall that is statically equivalent to
the wall forces and moments.
Refer to the following tables for mapping of RAM load cases and types to RAM Concept’s loadings and force
levels.
Table 5: RAM Modeler Force Level Assumptions
RSS Load Type RAM Concept Loading RAM Concept Loading Force Level
(Limit State)
Wind Wind Service *
Seismic Seismic Ultimate *
Other Seismic Ultimate *
Virtual Ignored
Note: * denotes assumed
Table 6: RAM Frame Load Cases
RSS Load Case Type Sub-Type RAM Concept Loading RAM Concept Loading
Force Level (Limit State)
Wind User defined story forces Wind Service *
Wind all others Wind Service

Tight integration with the RAM Structural System
RSS Load Case Type Sub-Type RAM Concept Loading RAM Concept Loading
Force Level (Limit State)
Seismic User defined story forces Seismic Ultimate *
Seismic UBC 94 Seismic Service
Seismic all others Seismic Ultimate
Dynamic Eigen solution Ignored
Dynamic all others Ignored
User defined story forces Seismic Ultimate *
Center of rigidity Ignored
Virtual Work Ignored
Note: * denotes assumed
14.7 Tight integration with the RAM Structural System

Starting with version 14.5, the RAM Structural System can be used to control the model data exported, run
Concept, and manage the Concept data file as part of the RSS model file. Selection of the data to be imported into
Concept is very similar to that described here. For more information, refer to the RSS Structural System
documentation.
Concept executes in a restricted mode when it is run from RAM Manager. The following operations are disabled:
• New
• Open
• Close
• Save As
• Save Template
• Strip Wizard
• Sync ISM / New from Repository
• All Sync RSS Operations
• All Sync STAAD Operations
These restrictions are in place primarily to maintain the integrity of the Concept files when they are imbedded in
the RSS model file.

Data Transfer from STAAD
15
The STAAD analysis and design program can transfer structure geometry and loading information to RAM
Concept.
15.1 STAAD Interface

In STAAD, you can select slabs elements, wall elements, column elements and beams for export into RAM
Concept. You can also select STAAD load cases for export and associate them with RAM Concept loading types.
The STAAD interface allows you to either run RAM Concept immediately with the exported data or to save the
data to a GCFF file for later import into RAM Concept.
If the STAAD file changes (perhaps loads or column sizes change), you can update the RAM Concept file by re-
exporting the STAAD information.
Please see the STAAD manuals for more information on the STAAD interface.
15.2 RAM Concept Interface
15.2.1 Data Transfer Paths

RAM Concept can import STAAD information in four ways:
1. RAM Concept is started by STAAD to create a new file.
2. RAM Concept is started by STAAD to update a previously created file.
3. The RAM Concept File menu item New From STAAD GCFF file is chosen to create a new file.
4. The RAM Concept File menu item Update from STAAD GCFF file is chosen to update an already opened RAM
Concept file.

RAM Concept Interface
15.2.2 New file options in RAM Concept

When creating a new file from STAAD information - either via the New from STAAD GCFF file menu item or by
STAAD starting RAM Concept, the dialog box shown in the following figure opens.
Figure 27: File options dialog box

RAM Concept Interface
The options at the top of the dialog window are the same as for creating any new RAM Concept file and are not
discussed further here.
The checkboxes at the bottom of the window allow you to import one or more of the following classes of
information: slabs (including beams), walls, columns and loads.
15.2.3 Update file options in RAM Concept

When updating a ConceptRAM Concept file with new STAAD information - either via the Update From STAAD
GCFF file menu item or by STAAD starting RAM Concept, the following dialog box opens.
Figure 28: Update file options dialog box
The options in the window are the same as those discussed in “New file options in RAM Concept,” but behave
slightly differently due to the operation being an “update”. For example if “Columns” is selected, all existing
columns will be removed and new columns defined by the STAAD information. If “Columns” is not selected, no
changes will be made to the columns in the RAM Concept file.

Data Transfer from ISM
16
RAM Concept can exchange structure information with Bentley’s Integrated Structural Model (ISM) technology.
16.1 What is ISM?

Bentley’s Integrated Structural Model (ISM) is a technology for sharing structural engineering project
information among structural modeling, analysis, design, drafting and detailing applications. ISM is similar to
Building Information Modeling (BIM), but focuses on the information that is important in the design,
construction and modification of the load bearing components of buildings, bridges and other structures.
16.1.1 Purpose
There are two related purposes for ISM:
• The transfer of structural information between applications.
• The coordination of structural information between applications.
To provide for transferring information, ISM provides a means of defining, storing, reading and querying ISM
models.
To provide for coordination of information, ISM can detect differences between ISM models, allowing you to
selectively update either an ISM repository or an application’s data. This gives you control over the consistency
between the two data sets.
16.1.2 ISM and Application Data

ISM is not intended to store all of the information that all of its client applications contain. Rather, it is intended
to store and communicate a consensus view of data that is common to two or more of its client applications, such
as RAM Concept.
RAM Concept continues to hold and maintain its own private copy of project data. Some of RAM Concept’s data
will duplicate that of the associated ISM repository. RAM Concept’s data may even conflict with that in the ISM
repository. RAM Concept (or you as its user) may decide that maintaining conflicting data is best for RAM
Concept’s and ISM’s different uses.

ISM Sync Tools Overview
16.2 ISM Sync Tools Overview

RAM Concept can send structural data to and from an ISM repository through a set of ISM synchronization tools.
These tools allow you to both create and update RAM Concept models as well as ISM repositories. These flexible
tools also allow you to create models and move data as your workflow dictates.
There are four ISM operations:
• Create ISM repository: creates a new ISM repository from the model currently open in RAM Concept.
• Create RAM Concept file: creates a new RAM Concept model from an existing ISM repository.
• Update ISM repository: transfers changes made to the current RAM Concept model into an existing ISM
repository, and allows you to accept some or all of those changes.
• Update RAM Concept model: transfers changes made to the ISM repository into the current RAM Concept
model, and allows you to accept some or all of those changes.
When the Update operations are executed, the Structural Synchronizer update dialog opens to coordinate which
changes are to be reflected in the models and repository.
16.2.1 Create ISM Repository

To create an ISM repository from a RAM Concept model:
1. Select File > Sync ISM > Create repository.

2. Select the repository file and click OK.
The Export Story dialog opens, as in the following figure.
Figure 29: ISM Export Dialog

3. Type a story Name and Elevation (in the indicated units), and click OK.
The story name and elevation are both required.
4. (Optional) Type a Substructure name, if wanted.
If included, the substructure is created –if it does not already exist– and all ISM objects exported by RAM
Concept are made members of this substructure.

5. (Optional) Set the Open Structural Synchronizer checkbox to open the Structural Synchronizer update
dialog next.
Use this window for manual inspection and filtering of the items to be exported.
6. Click OK.
16.2.2 Create RAM Concept File

To create a RAM Concept File from one story defined in an ISM repository:
1. Select File > Sync ISM > New from repository.

2. Select the ISM repository file and click OK.
The New File dialog opens, as in the following figure.

Figure 30: New File (from ISM) dialog

3. Select the file's Structure Type.
4. Select an option for the Code and Units.
5. Select the story to be imported from the Story drop-down list.
6. The Substructure drop-down list is populated with the names of substructures defined in the ISM
repository. Either:

Import and Export Details
Selection Result
select a substructure name only the members within that substructure will be imported in the model
select No Substructure no substructure filtering is applied to the selected story
7. (Optional) Set the Recompute nodes for support members.
Nodes determine which walls and columns will be imported and the height RAM Concept models for them. If
the nodes in the import model are incomplete, some support members will not be imported. This option
recomputes the import model's nodes for internal use only. The new nodes are not added to the model.
8. (Optional) Set the Open Structural Synchronizer checkbox to open the Structural Synchronizer update
dialog next.
Use this window for manual inspection and filtering of the items to be imported.
9. Click OK.
Related Links
• ISM Options dialog (on page 149)
16.2.3 Update ISM Repository

To update the ISM repository with changes made to the RAM Concept file, select File > Sync ISM > Update
repository. The Structural Synchronizer update dialog opens, giving you control over each change to the
repository. If the ISM repository cannot be found, you are given the opportunity to select its new location or
cancel the operation.
16.2.4 Update RAM Concept Model

To update the RAM Concept File with changes made to the ISM repository, select File > Sync ISM > Update from
repository. The Structural Synchronizer update dialog opens, giving you control over each change to the RAM
Concept file.
16.3 Import and Export Details

It is useful to describe here the differences between the ISM and RAM Concept models, the conversion process,
and how the RAM Concept model is modified to make the conversion process smoother.
16.3.1 Filtering
The ISM model is very general. It can represent diverse structure types, such as buildings and bridges, and
material types like steel, wood, and concrete. RAM Concept filters out any part of the ISM repository that it does
not model or is not relevant. The Update operations use the filtered model to determine the context of the
changes to be applied.

For example, RAM Concept filters out all steel members. When RAM Concept updates the ISM repository, it does
not need to replicate steel members in the model. The Change Management deduces that RAM Concept is not
deleting the steel members because it never read them in.
The RAM Concept filter retains only the following objects from the ISM model:
• The imported story information
• Concrete slabs, footings and beams on the imported story
• Concrete walls and columns that are connected to the slabs or beams retained
• Static load cases and their loads that are applied to the slabs or beams retained
• Concrete materials and curve member sections that are used by the members retained
• Concentrated and area surface rebar in slabs
• Layer parallel rebar inside and parallel to a beam
• Rebar materials used by imported rebar
• Straight, rectangular tie, and open U tie perpendicular rebar in slabs or inside and parallel to a beam
RAM Concept ignores the following ISM objects:
• Non-planar slabs, walls, and surface loads
• Sloped slabs
• Modifiers and openings in walls
• Beams, columns, and curve loads with geometry not equivalent to a single line segment
• Beams and columns that do not have the Orientation, Section, and SectionPlacementPoint properties
set
• Beams with a non-vertical Orientation
• Duplicate load cases that correspond to fixed RAM Concept loadings
• Hyperstatic load case cause
• Rebar in walls or columns
• Non-horizontal rebar
RAM Concept and ISM use slightly different terminology for structural members and loading types. The
following table is a cross-reference of RAM Concept and ISM type names.
Table 7: Concept and ISM Type Name Cross-Reference
RAM Concept Name ISM Type(/Use)
N/A Story
Concrete Mix Concrete
Slab Area Surface Member/Slab or Surface Member Modifier
Slab Opening Surface Opening
Beam Curve Member/Beam
Column Curve Member/Column
Wall Surface Member/Wall

RAM Concept Name ISM Type(/Use)
Loading Load Case
Point Load Point Load
Line Load Curve Load
Area Load Surface Load
N/A Section
Rebar Rebar Material
Concentrated Rebar Concentrated Surface Rebar
Distributed Rebar Area Surface Rebar
Transverse Rebar Perpendicular Rebar
16.3.2 The ISM Model

ISM structure models consist of multiple stories. Each slab or beam is “on” exactly one story. Wall and column
members may extend through multiple stories and are connected to slab and beam members. Load Cases
contain point, line and area loads that are applied to exactly one member.
16.3.3 Slabs and Openings

ISM and RAM Concept model slab areas differently. It is instructive to describe the differences in detail here to
explain how the import and export operations are affected.
RAM Concept slabs are defined by a collection of slab areas and openings with arbitrary overlapping polygonal
boundaries. Each slab area defines material, thickness and surface elevation properties. An integer priority
determines which slab area or opening takes precedence where two or more slab areas overlap.
ISM slabs are defined by a collection of surface members with polygonal boundaries. Each surface member may
contain any number of surface member modifiers. The surface member and its modifiers define the slab
material, thickness and surface position properties. Modifier boundaries must lie inside the parent surface
member's boundary. Modifier boundaries may overlap, so modifiers have an integer priority to determine
precedence in overlapping areas. Modifiers always take precedence over the parent surface member. Normal
practice is for modifier priorities to be sequential, starting at 1.
A surface member may also contain any number of surface member openings. Like modifier boundaries, opening
boundaries must lie within the parent surface member's boundary and may overlap. However, openings always
take precedence over the surface member and its modifiers. In effect, surface members have an infinitely low
priority, surface member modifiers have an explicit integer priority, and openings have an infinitely high
priority.

Note: We use the term effective shape to mean the surface member boundary minus all of its openings. This
shape is not necessarily polygonal. Although not common, it may have holes and islands. The effective shape may
also be disjoint if surface member openings split it into pieces. We also use the term outer boundary of an
arbitrary shape. This is the shape with all interior holes filled. It may consist of more than one disjoint shapes,
but each shape will be polygonal.
Therefore, ISM surface member boundaries may overlap, as long as there is no overlap between the surface
member effective shapes.
Importing ISM Slabs to RAM Concept

Importing a single ISM surface member as a set of RAM Concept slab areas and openings is straightforward. The
surface members and surface member modifiers are imported as RAM Concept slab areas. The openings are
imported as RAM Concept openings. The slab area created from the surface member is assigned a priority of 0.
The openings are assigned a priority of 90. The slab areas created from the surface member modifiers are
assigned priorities in the range 10-89, with an increment of at least 2. Modifier priorities are compressed where
possible (e.g., where two non-overlapping modifiers may be set to the same priority). A surface member that
overflows this range (i.e., it contains modifiers in a configuration that requires more than 45 distinct modifier
priorities) should be very rare. In this case, some of the modifiers will have duplicate priorities. You will need to
fix this model in the RAM Concept modeler and then update the ISM repository.
The priority mapping is applied to each surface member on the story. If the boundaries of surface members
overlap, it should only be in the opening of one surface member. The priorities of the slab areas and openings of
the overlapping surface member are offset by a multiple of 100 to make the RAM Concept model unambiguous.
Exporting RAM Concept slabs to ISM

Exporting overlapping RAM Concept slab areas and openings to ISM objects is more complicated. The ISM
repository creation and update operations will be less error-prone and less confusing if the RAM Concept slabs
and openings map directly to ISM objects. The RAM Concept slab area and opening geometries and priorities will
sometimes be modified before the export operation so that they will map directly to ISM objects.
The lowest priority RAM Concept slab area is expanded to contain overlapping slab areas and is then exported as
a parent ISM surface member. Overlapping slab areas are exported as surface modifiers of the parent surface
member. RAM Concept slabs that do not overlap are exported as separate ISM surface members. Any RAM
Concept slab that does not have any effect on the slabs it overlaps is not exported.
ISM surface openings effectively have an infinite priority. In order to model ISM surface openings, any RAM
Concept slab openings that are obscured by higher-priority slab areas are first trimmed to their effective shape.
New slab openings are added to the RAM Concept model if the trimming operation splits an opening into two or
more pieces. Openings that are completely obscured by higher-priority slab areas are not added to the ISM
model.
The slab areas and slab opening priorities are compressed and reassigned as described for importing ISM
surface members. You will be notified when the shape or priority of a RAM Concept slab area or opening is
changed or when openings are added or removed. You can stop the export operation at any point and the RAM
Concept model will not be changed.
Small Features
Changing the shape of a slab can sometimes introduce small features that are not detected until the model is
meshed. For example, the corner of a drop cap might extend slightly past the edge of the lowest priority slab.
When the lowest priority slab is extended to contain the drop cap, it may have a very small (< 50 mm) edge. The

“Line too short” (39.1.2) or “Feature eliminated” (39.1.3) warnings will be generated when meshing the model.
Removing these features will generally not hurt anything, but it is best to fix them manually in RAM Concept and
update the ISM repository to eliminate future warnings.
Slab Modeling Guidelines

Almost any RAM Concept slab model can be converted to an equivalent ISM model. Following these modeling
guidelines in RAM Concept will reduce the chance of problems in model consistency.
• Drop Caps and Panels, on the interior or exterior, should not be modeled by adding openings to a slab and
filling them with other slabs. Instead, increase the priority on the drop panel slabs so that they override the
base slab.
• Slab area islands can be handled properly if modeled with care. A slab area island is completely contained
within, and higher priority than, a slab opening. The slab opening is contained within or on the edge of, and
higher priority than, another slab area. If the island slab area does not overlap the outer slab area's effective
shape, it will converted into a separate ISM surface member. The preferred ISM model is a surface member
with an opening and a modifier. This can be accomplished by splitting the opening so that it surrounds the
island slab without covering the larger slab. If the RAM Concept slab is constructed with openings whose
priorities are larger than all of the slab areas, then it will map correctly to the ISM surface member.
16.3.4 Support Members

ISM wall and column definitions are much more flexible than those in RAM Concept. However, because most
building structures have regular features such as vertical columns, this normally won’t be a significant issue.
An ISM repository models an entire building. Support members may extend through all stories of the building
and be connected to members on each story. ISM walls are surface members; they may be as complex as slabs,
with openings, arbitrary shapes and thickness variations. Walls and columns can also be sloped.
On the other hand, RAM Concept only models vertical support members, and their height is assumed to extend
just to the next slab above or below. RAM Concept walls are rectangular and openings are not supported.
Importing ISM Support Members to RAM Concept

RAM Concept imports only ISM support members that are connected to a slab or beam that is on the story
imported. RAM Concept creates one or two support members above and below the imported slab. RAM Concept
models the support member height from the imported story to the next connected slab or beam above (or
below), or to the end of the member if it is not connected to another story above (or below). If the ISM support
member ends at the imported story or the next connected story, RAM Concept models the complete support
height to that end. If the support member does not terminate on one of these stories, the RAM Concept member
height is modeled from the elevation midpoint of all slabs and beams connected to it on that story.
RAM Concept will not create support members shorter than 500 mm for cases where the member extends only a
short distance past the import story. If the ISM support member is sloped, RAM Concept models the sloped
length of the member, not the difference in elevation of ends (i.e. the modeled height will be greater than the
elevation difference).
For example, consider a column that is connected to a slab on the imported story and stories above and below,
and ends on the stories above and below. The column heights will be computed relative to the elevation
midpoint of the imported slab. If a drop cap or deep beam is added to the imported slab and connected to the
column in the ISM repository, the elevation midpoint imported slab will shift downward. When the RAM Concept

model is updated, the RAM Concept column height above will increase and the column height below will
decrease by equal amounts.
Exporting Concept Support Members to ISM

When exporting support members to ISM, pairs of matching support members at the same location are merged
to create a single ISM support member. Two support members are merged only if all of their properties match
(e.g., concrete mix, thickness, etc.), and either they were imported from the same ISM support member, or they
are both new in RAM Concept. If a pair of support members at a location cannot be merged, then two ISM
support members are exported.
The support member exported by RAM Concept extends only to the ends of the heights modeled in RAM
Concept, relative to the center of the slab or beam the support member passes through. Dealing with this
geometry approximation requires some care when updating RAM Concept or ISM. When updating RAM Concept
from ISM, the RAM Concept model may have shortened support members. In general, the ISM geometry can be
accepted to capture changes made to the repository, and RAM Concept will just create a new approximation.
There are times when you should reject changes to the RAM Concept support member geometry. For example,
when the RAM Concept support member geometry has been adjusted to compensate for a problem in the RAM
Concept approximation. In those cases, the Reject setting in the Structural Synchronizer update dialog will
prevent the RAM Concept geometry from changing.
It is usually not desirable to update the ISM repository with the approximate RAM Concept support member
geometry. For this reason, updating the ISM repository support member is disabled by default. See 16.3.10 for
information on enabling updates to support members. If updating support members is enabled, you can decide
which properties should be changed. The support member geometry—defined by the Location or Boundary
properties—can be updated for simple one or two story support members. Changes to concrete mixes,
dimensions or column orientation can also be updated.
16.3.5 ISM Section Shapes
ISM supports a wide array of section shapes, including parametric sections, custom section shapes, composite
sections, and linearly varying sections. RAM Concept supports only two section shapes: solid rectangles for
beams and solid rectangles or circles for columns. RAM Concept must therefore create a rectangular or circular
approximation for any non-rectangular or non-circular ISM section shape.
ISM Parametric Sections use a small number of parameters to define the most common section shapes. For
column members, RAM Concept maps solid and hollow circular ISM parametric section shapes to solid circles.
All other parametric shapes for beams and columns are approximated by rectangles.
The following table shows the width and height the RAM Concept rectangular section approximations for each
ISM Parametric Section Type:
Table 8: Rectangular Section Approximations to ISM Parametric Section Shapes
ISM Parametric Section Type RAM Concept Width RAM Concept Height
Solid Rectangle Width Height
Hollow Rectangle Width Height

ISM Parametric Section Type RAM Concept Width RAM Concept Height
Solid Circle Outer Diameter Outer Diameter
Hollow Circle Diameter Diameter
I Web Thickness Depth
T Web Thickness Depth
L Thickness Depth
C Web Thickness Depth
Double L 2×Thickness Depth
Double T 2×Web Thickness Depth
ISM also defines Custom, Built Up and Varying section shapes. ISM Custom sections are defined by an arbitrary
geometric shape. RAM Concept approximates Custom sections by a square of the same area. ISM Built Up
sections are composites of other parametric or custom sections. RAM Concept approximates Built Up sections by
a square with the area of the sum of the areas of the section's components.
ISM Varying sections vary shape linearly along a member. RAM Concept approximates a Varying section shape
by applying the rules for constant sections to the start of the first varying section segment.
When updating an ISM repository, RAM Concept section approximations will appear as changes in the Structural
Synchronizer update dialog. The Change action on these changes can be set to Always Reject to prevent the ISM
sections from being replaced.
16.3.6 ISM Load Cases and Loads

ISM Load Case objects and their Load Cause property are analogous to RAM Concept Loadings and their Loading
Type property. The following table gives the RAM Concept Loading Type imported for each ISM Dead Load
Cause.
Table 9: Concept Dead Loading Types Imported
Ism Load Cause RAM Concept Loading Type
DeadConstruction Stressing Dead
DeadStructure Other Dead
DeadSuperimposed Other Dead
DeadUnspecified Other Dead

The following table gives the RAM Concept Loading Type imported for each ISM Floor Load Cause.
Table 10: Concept Floor Loading Types Imported
FloorAssembly Live Unreducible
FloorOffice Live Reducible
FloorResidential Live Reducible
FloorRetail Live Reducible
FloorStorage Live Storage
FloorUnspecified Live Reducible
ParkingHeavy Live Parking
ParkingLight Live Parking
ParkingUnspecified Live Parking
The following table gives the RAM Concept Loading Type imported for each ISM Roof Load Cause
Table 11: Concept Roof Loading Types Imported
RoofAccess Live Roof
RoofRain Live Roof
RoofSnowDrift Snow
RoofSnowUniform Snow
RoofSnowUnspecified Snow
RoofUnspecified Live Roof
The following table gives the RAM Concept Loading Type imported for each ISM Lateral Load Cause.

Table 12: Concept Lateral Loading Types Imported
SeismicService Seismic Service
SeismicUltimate Seismic Ultimate
SeismicUnspecified Seismic Ultimate
WindService Wind Service
WindUltimate Wind Ultimate
WindUnspecified Wind Service
The following table gives the RAM Concept Loading Type imported for each ISM Other Load Cause.
Table 13: Concept Other Loading Types Imported
EarthPressureService Other
EarthPressureUltimate Other
EarthPressureUnspecified Other
FloorConstruction Other
FluidContained Other
FluidUncontained Other
FluidUnspecified Other
GroundWaterPressure Other
Hydrodynamic Other
Hydrostatic Other
Ice Other
Other Other
PostTensioning Balance
Settlement Other

Shrinkage Other
Thermal Other
The following table defines the ISM Load Cause exported for each RAM Concept Loading Type.
Table 14: ISM Load Cases Exported
RAM Concept Loading Type Ism Load Cause
Balance PostTensioning
Stressing Dead DeadConstruction
Other Dead DeadSuperimposed
Live Reducible FloorUnspecified
Live Unreducible FloorAssembly
Live Storage FloorStorage
Live Parking ParkingUnspecified
Live Roof RoofAccess
Snow RoofSnowUnspecified
Other Other
Wind Service WindService
Wind Ultimate WindUltimate
Seismic Service SeismicService
Seismic Ultimate SeismicUltimate
The Balance loading is not exported to ISM by default. It is not always useful to other programs, and it may
significantly increase the size of the ISM repository. See the Options section below for information on enabling
Balance loading export.

16.3.7 Member Loading

RAM Concept loads are applied to the highest priority slab or beam they intersect. ISM loads are applied to a
single ISM member. When exporting loads to ISM, RAM Concept must determine which single ISM member the
load should be applied to. RAM Concept may have to split line or area loads that straddle more than one ISM
member.
A RAM Concept Point Load is applied to an ISM beam if it lies on the beam centerline. Otherwise, it is applied to
the surface member whose effective shape contains the point.
A RAM Concept Line Load that is completely contained in the beam centerline is applied to that beam. Otherwise,
the line load is trimmed to the effective shape of each ISM surface member it intersects. If the line load intersects
more than one surface member or has a disjoint intersection with a single surface member, it is split into shorter
line loads and applied to the surface members they overlap.
RAM Concept area loads are trimmed to the outer boundary of the effective shapes of all ISM surface members
that they intersect. If the intersection is disjoint, the RAM Concept area load is split into smaller polygonal area
loads and applied to the surface members they overlap.
It is possible to create a RAM Concept model in a way that makes it impossible for RAM Concept to maintain the
accuracy of both the RAM Concept and ISM models. For example, consider a RAM Concept slab containing an
opening and a second slab inside the hole (an island). RAM Concept maintains the user's intentions by creating
an ISM surface member for each slab. If there is an area load covering both slabs, RAM Concept must create an
additional area load for the island slab. However, the larger RAM Concept area load will still cover the island
slab, so the next Update operation would create yet another area load on the island slab. Instead, RAM Concept
does not create a new area load for the island slab and will leave the ISM surface member unloaded. The
preferred method for modeling this configuration is to split up the larger area load so that it does not overlap the
island slab.
16.3.8 Rebar
Exporting RAM Concept Rebar to ISM

RAM Concept exports three types of rebar to ISM.
User Concentrated Rebar

RAM Concept User Concentrated rebar are exported as ISM Concentrated Surface Rebar. When the RAM Concept
rebar is entirely contained within a beam and is parallel to the beam centerline, it is exported as ISM Layer
Parallel Rebar. Plain, anchor, 90 degree, and 180 degree hook types are exported.
User Distributed Rebar

RAM Concept User Distributed Rebar are exported as ISM Area Surface Rebar. Plain, anchor, 90 degree, and 180
degree hook types are exported.

User Transverse Rebar

RAM Concept User Transverse Rebar are exported as ISM Straight Perpendicular, Rectangular Tie, and Open U
Tie rebar. ISM does not directly support shear rebar with 3 or more legs. A RAM Concept User Transverse Rebar
with 3 or more legs will be exported as a Rectangular or Open U Tie rebar and one or more Straight rebar for the
interior legs.
The RAM Concept User Transverse Rebar object is intended to be used in areas of uniform slab geometry. ISM
Perpendicular rebar are completely uniform with respect to the width, depth, and spacing of the bars. A RAM
Concept User Transverse Rebar that crosses nonuniform regions slab geometry will be exported as end-to-end
groups of ISM Perpendicular rebar.
The actual width, depth, and spacing properties of the RAM Concept shear rebar are only determined after
analyzing the RAM Concept model and generating individual shear rebar. Also, no individual shear rebar will be
generated for a RAM Concept User Transverse Rebar if it is not required structurally. Therefore, a RAM Concept
User Transverse Rebar is not exported at all if individual shear rebar have not been generated for it.
Importing ISM Rebar into Concept

RAM Concept imports only rebar that reinforces slabs or beams that are also being imported. RAM Concept does
not import non-horizontal ISM rebar. It also does not import any incompletely defined ISM rebar type.
Rebar Type Required Properties
ISM Concentrated Surface rebar

BarDirection
BarSpacing
BarCount
BarLength
LayoutDirection
LayoutPoint
HookLocalAxes
ISM Area Surface rebar

BarDirection
BarSpacing
LayoutBoundary
HookLocalAxes
ISM Layer Parallel rebar

LayoutPath
ISM Perpendicular rebar

LayoutPath
ISM Anchor, Hook90, Hook180 and None (straight) rebar end types are supported. An Unset or Other hook type
is imported as straight. Hook135 is imported as a 90 degree hook. LapSplice, OffsetLapSplice, MechanicalSplice
and WeldedSplice are imported as anchors.

RAM Concept imports ISM Concentrated Surface Rebar and ISM Area Surface Rebar into RAM Concept as User
Concentrated and User Distributed rebar. ISM Layer Parallel Rebar that are in an imported beam are imported as
User Concentrated rebar.
Importing ISM Perpindicular Rebar

When importing ISM Perpendicular Rebar, RAM Concept first clusters together groups of ISM Perpendicular to
define stirrups of 3 or more. Any Straight Perpendicular rebar that starts and ends on the first and last stirrup
bar of a Rectangular Tie or Open U Tie rebar is considered an interior leg of the stirrup. The Straight
Perpendicular rebars do not have to be spaced uniformly or parallel to the Rectangular Tie or Open U Tie rebar.
The groups of ISM Perpendicular rebar are considered User Transverse Rebar candidates, with the Rectangular
Tie or Open U layout path. The intersection of each candidate's path with each beam or slab generates a separate
RAM Concept User Transverse Rebar. Priority is given to beam intersections where the candidate path intersects
both.
It may be the case that a single RAM Concept User Transverse Rebar—drawn across nonuniform slab geometry
—will be exported as several groups of ISM Perpendicular rebar. When the RAM Concept model is updated from
ISM, the original User Transverse Rebar object's geometry will be changed, and new User Transverse Rebar
objects will be added for the additional ISM Perpendicular rebar.
16.3.9 ISM Options dialog

This dialog is used to set options controlling the ISM operations.
Select File > Sync ISM > Options to open this dialog.
Figure 31: ISM Options dialog
Recompute This option is stored in the model and is initially set by the Recompute nodes for support
nodes for members option in the ISM import dialog. This option is used when updating the RAM
support Concept model from ISM and when updating the ISM model from RAM Concept if the
members Update Support Members in ISM Repository option is also enabled. Nodes determine
which walls and columns are connected to the import story and their heights. If the nodes
in the import model are incomplete, some support members will not be imported. This
option recomputes the import model's nodes for internal use only. The new nodes are not
added to the model.
Update Support Walls and columns in the ISM repository are updated only when this option is enabled. This
Members in ISM option is stored in the file; by default, support members are not updated. Support members
Repository

are always imported from the ISM repository to create or update the RAM Concept model
and are always exported when creating an ISM repository.
Export Balance the Balance loading is exported to ISM only when this option is enabled. This option is
Loading stored in the file. It is off by default, so the Balance loading is not exported
Related Links
• Create RAM Concept File (on page 135)

Data Transfer from API
17
RAM Concept includes a Python scripting API that allows you to automate routine RAM Concept tasks such as
creating models, running analyses, and accessing the results.
More information on the scripting API can be found in the Scripting API Documentation (Help > Scripting API),
including:
• Instructions for installing the API
• Getting started guides
• Detailed documentation
• Sample scripts
The scripting API permits RAM Concept to be run “headless” (from command lines without the graphical
interface). RAM Concept and/or RAM Concept Post Tension licenses are consumed when running the program in
this mode. Normal license rules and restrictions still apply.

Bentley iTwin Services Features
18
RAM Concept can integrate with Bentley's iTwin Services, including the iTwins Design Review feature.
More information on iTwin Services can be found in the iTwin Analytical Services wiki (iTwin Services > iTwin
Analytical Services Wiki
Technical Preview: This feature is included as a Technical Preview. Please use this feature now in your
normal business environment, evaluate its capabilities, and send us your feedback. As a Technology Preview,
this feature is provided to you “as-is” without the benefit of any Bentley warranty, indemnity, or support
obligation.
18.1 What is iTwin Design Review?

Bentley iTwin Design Review is a collaborative service hosted on the web that allows two or more interested
parties to communicate with one another in the context of a 3D model or, more accurately, an iTwin.
The iTwin Services Add-in within the desktop application publishes the analysis model to an iTwinDesign
Review session, and therefore into an intuitive point of collaboration that facilitates review of design work in
progress
The web-based interface (accessible with a web browser) of Design Review offers a set of commands for
navigating, viewing from different perspectives, isolating key elements, and clipping views.
Several review tools are included with the service:
• Measurements, including distance, area, location, radius, and angle
• Querying elements for physical information, such as dimensions, construction materials, and coordinates
• Querying analytical information, such as member fixities, applied loads, and reactions
18.2 Applications of iTwins Design Review

Many aspects of iTwin Design Review are particularly relevant to engineering analysis workflows. Project
managers or other stakeholders in a project may not be skilled in, or have access to, the analytical software used
by engineers to analyze and design a structure. These individuals may instead have a practice of reviewing a set
of 2D drawings or a BIM model that is disconnected from the engineering analysis models. In this case, the
reviewer may not have a complete understanding of the assumptions used by the designers. iTwin Design

Bentley iTwin Services Features
Starting an iTwin Design Review Session
Review can therefore help project managers catch incorrect assumptions or errors during the design phase
before it becomes a construction problem.
Some of the practical applications of this technology to the traditional engineering review and collaboration
process include:
• Have a conversation with participants via chat in the context of a 3D model, annotating and marking up
objects, and leaving questions, comments, and markups for specific stakeholders.
• Include stakeholders, such as project managers and other engineering disciplines, that are not users of
Engineering Simulation software, in this review process. All that is needed is a web browser and anyone
invited can contribute to the review.
• Resolve issues raised by team members directly in the desktop application.
• Save a record of conversations (chats) in the review so that reasons for key decisions can be revisited at a
later point if needed.
• Create specific views of the structure, with objects of interest isolated and zoomed to, that collaborators and
reviewers can see immediately without needing to recreate the view themselves.
18.3 Starting an iTwin Design Review Session

To start a new iTwin Design Review session:
Note: You must have a Bentley CONNECT account in order to use iTwin Design Review.
1. Either:
Select iTwin Services > iTwin Services
or
Select the iTwin Services tool ( )

A web browser window opens the iTwin Services panel.
2. In the iTwin Services panel, click Get Started.
The iTwin Design Review information for the current model loads.
3. Click Create Session.
Your default web browser opens and prompts you to allow for the sharing of data.
4. Click Allow.
5. In the iTwin Services panel, enter data used to describe the design review session:
a. Type a unique Session Name.
b. (Optional) Type one or more Session Tags that may be helpful metadata for the model.
Type the tag string and press <Enter> to add a tag.
c. In the Session Participants field, begin typing a participant's name.
Account names will appear that match the partial name string.
d. Select a participant's name from this list to add them.
e. Repeat steps 5c and 5d to add more participants as needed.
6. Click Next.
Your design review session is created and opened in your web browser.
You may visit https://review.itwin.bentley.com/home to see all your current design review sessions.

Bentley CONNECT Features
19
19.1 CONNECTED Project Association
RAM Concept CONNECT Edition allows you associate a file with a CONNECTED Project.
A CONNECTED project is a single definition of a project for your entire organization and represents a one-to-one
relationship with the contracted work being done by your organization.
Note: In order to utilize this feature in RAM Concept, you must:

1. Have the Bentley CONNECTION client running. The CONNECTION client is typically installed with RAM
Concept.
2. Register with Bentley Cloud Services.
3. Sign in using your credentials with the CONNECTION client.
For additional details on the benefits of using CONNECTED Projects, please visit http://www.bentley.com/
connect/.
19.1.1 To Associate a CONNECTED Project with Your File

When you create a new file or open an existing file which is not associated with a project, use the following
procedure to associate your file with a CONNECTED project.
Note: You must be signed in using the CONNECTION client to associate a CONNECTED project with your file.
Tip: If you want to change the CONNECTED project associated with your file, use the same following procedure.
1. Select Bentley Cloud Services > Associate Project.

The Assign Project dialog opens.

CONNECTED Project Association
2. (Optional) If you want to register a new project, do the following:

a. Click Register Project.
The Register a Project page opens in your browser.
Note: Only users with Admin/Co-admin roles can register a project.

b. Type or select the required items (marked with an asterisk, “*”)
c. Click Save.
A list of registered projects within your organization opens. The newly created project is highlighted in
green.
Tip: Alternately, you can visit connect.bentley.com and select +New on the Recent Projects tile on your
personal dashboard.
3. Select the desired project from the list.
Tip: Use the View controls and Search tool to locate your project.
4. Click Associate.
Related Links
• Assign Project dialog (on page 156)
• Starting an Optimization (on page 339)
19.1.2 To Disassociate a CONNECTED Project from a File

When you need to disassociate a file from a CONNECTED project, use the following procedure.

Tip: If you want to change the CONNECTED project association to another CONNECTED project, this procedure is
not necessary.
1. Select Bentley Cloud Services > Disassociate CONNECT Project

The project association is removed from the file.
Related Links
19.1.3 Assign Project dialog

Used to select a project to associate with your current file or model.
Register Opens the Register a Project page in your browser from where you can register a project.
Project
Refresh Refreshes the list of available ProjectWise Projects.

View Allows you to choose the list of projects that you want to see in the list box. Following are the
options:
• Favorites - Displays the projects that are marked as favorites.
• Recent - Displays the recently used projects.
• All - Displays all the projects.
Search Searches through the list of available projects.

List box Displays the following columns:
• Favorite - Allows you to favorite a project. Select the star icon in this column for the project
that you want to mark as favorite.
• Number - Displays the number of the project.
• Name - Displays the name of the project.
• Location - Displays the geographic location of the project.
• Industry - Displays the industry of the project.
• Asset Type - Displays the asset type of the project.
Related Links
• To Disassociate a CONNECTED Project from a File (on page 155)
• To Associate a CONNECTED Project with Your File (on page 154)
• To Register a CONNECTED Project (on page 157)
19.1.4 Register a CONNECTED Project

Organizations can enable CONNECTED Users to register and collaborate on CONNECTED Projects. These projects
contain project information such as Project Name, Asset Industry, Asset Type, Location etc. While creating a file

in a CONNECT Edition product, you can associate it to a CONNECTED Project where the project information is
included in the data files as properties.
Note: Project files, such as DGN files and library files are not stored on the cloud. They can be stored locally, on a
network, or in ProjectWise.
What is the CONNECTED Project Registration Utility?

The Project Registration utility is an administrative interface for registering an Organization’s projects with
Bentley. Registered projects are referred to as CONNECTED Projects. CONNECTED Projects provide information
regarding the project themselves, as well as serving as a focal point for tying together other sources of project
information.
For example, user and product usage for reporting and access to services available for each project.
Who can register a CONNECTED Project?

To register a CONNECTED Project a user must have Administrator or Co-administrator privileges associated
with their Bentley account. These privileges are required because registered CONNECTED Projects are
Organization-wide resources that represent real-world projects and are used in many different locations for
information organization and reporting. Therefore, access is limited to those members of an Organization with
sufficient privileges to ensure that only recognized and permitted CONNECTED Projects be registered on behalf
of an Organization.
Note: Users within the organization who were not designated as an Administrator or Co-Administrator who are
requesting rights should contact their organizations Administrator. Bentley does not fulfill these requests.
To Register a CONNECTED Project

The Project Registration utility is used to provide information about a project as well as manage previously
registered projects.
From the Assign Project dialog:
1. Click Register Project.

The Register a Project page opens in your browser.
2. Type or select the required items (marked with an asterisk, “*”):
Number Project ID officially used in Organization for tracking project internally (e.g., EAP id, like
DMO-063 VP 778).
Name Common name for project within an Organization (e.g. I-565 Interchange at County Line
Road).
Asset industry An Industry is a group of like organizations with a common business function centered on
a like set of infrastructure assets. Example, Electric Utility.
Asset type An Asset Type is a set of related Assets. Example, the Asset Class Electric Network is
comprised of the following Assets: Distribution Network, Substation, and Transmission
Network.
Location Geographic location of the Project (Example, city/state/country, Latitude/longitude)

Bentley CONNECT Advisor
Status Project state, either Active meaning the project is open for participation or inactive, closed
for participation.
3. Click Save.
A list of registered projects within your organization opens. The newly created project is highlighted in green.
Related Links
• Starting an Optimization (on page 339)
19.2 Bentley CONNECT Advisor

The Bentley CONNECT Advisor is a unified interface that enables you to view a variety of Bentley content at one
location, thereby eliminating the need to browse through various sources separately. As an end user, you get the
ability to browse, search, view, and interact without having to leave the product (RAM Concept) that you are
working on.
The Bentley CONNECT Advisor scans through different sources such as Bentley Communities, Bentley
LEARNserver, and Bentley YouTube channels to display relevant information with links to the web pages. For
example, if you want to search for information on the Place SmartLine tool, you can enter the tool name in
Bentley CONNECT Advisor dialog's Search field. You will get a list of relevant results from different locations
such as forum posts, blogs and wiki posts on Bentley Communities, Bentley LEARNserver courses that discuss
about the tool, and so on. You can also look out for other information such as news and announcements,
upcoming events, and QuickStarts.
The Bentley CONNECT Advisor performs the following functions:
• Gathers information from the following sources:
• Forum posts, wikis and blogs from Bentley Communities
• Videos, Hands-on and Assessments from Bentley LEARNserver
• Videos from Bentley YouTube channels
• Bentley News and Announcements
• Upcoming Bentley Events
• Provides a unified interface that displays the above items gathered from their respective sites and locations
• Searches information within all the available sources (Bentley Communities, Bentley LEARNserver, Bentley
YouTube channels, Bentley News and Announcements, Bentley Events)
• Filters information based on:
• Product
• Generation
• Release Label
• Language
• Content type
• Tags, region, and so on
Note: To be able to access the Bentley CONNECT Advisor, you need to sign into the Bentley Cloud Services using
the CONNECTION Client.

Automated Updates via the CONNECTION Client
19.3 Automated Updates via the CONNECTION Client

You will be notified of updates to RAM Concept automatically in the Bentley CONNECTION Client application.
This application is installed with RAM Concept CONNECT Edition and runs in the Windows system tray. You can
manually check for updates by opening the CONNECTION Client and selecting the Applications tab.
19.4 Subscription Entitlement Service

Subscription Entitlement Service is Bentley's process for product activation and usage tracking, improving our
licensing capabilities with features such as:
• License alert notifications when you are approaching a custom usage threshold
• Replacing site activation keys with user validation, enhancing security around your Bentley licenses and
subscriptions
With traditional SELECT Licensing, product activation has been through an activation key that an Organization
distributed to all users. With Subscription Entitlement Service, product activation is managed by user sign in
through the CONNECTION Client, which is installed on each machine that uses Bentley applications. This offers a
more secure and manageable system as it offers usage alerts, notifying your users when they are about to reach
a certain usage limit set by the Administrator.
Select Help > Licensing > Licensing Service for more information on using and managing Subscription
Entitlement Service.

Defining the Structure
20
The easiest and recommended way to define the concrete structure is to use RAM Concept’s automatic meshing
facility (otherwise known as the “Mesher”). This approach requires that you define supports, slabs (of varying
thickness), beams and openings with objects that Mesher uses to generate the finite element model. You do this
on the Mesh Input Layer’s Standard Plan.
20.1 Using the Mesh Input Layer

There is no set order in which you must define objects. Some people choose to draw supports first, whereas
others draw the slab outline first. You can edit whatever drawn objects later.
If you have imported a CAD drawing, make it visible on the Mesh Input Plan before drawing the structure.
20.2 About columns and walls

RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you define columns and walls below and above the slab.
Supports above the slab do not provide vertical support, only horizontal support and bending resistance.
20.3 Column properties

RAM Concept column properties are separated into three categories: general, meshing, and live load reduction.

Column properties
20.3.1 General column properties
Figure 32: Column properties: general
Concrete Mix Type of concrete used (defined in Materials Specification).

Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of column.
Support Set Defines the column as below or above the floor.
Width Measured along the column’s r-axis. Set to zero for round columns.
Depth / Diameter Measured along the column’s s-axis.
Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the global x-axis. It determines the column’s r-axis (and is
usually zero).
Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending stiffness without changing the dimensions or height. For
example, you may expect an edge column to crack and rotate more than an internal column and so you might
consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to increase a column’s stiffness, but this is an unlikely
scenario.
Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in column.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) between column and slab; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the z-direction according to Hooke’s law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce results that are more accurate.

Drawing columns
20.3.2 Meshing column properties
Mesh Slab When checked meshed elements are generated within and bounded by the column shape.
Support Region
Slab Support The entered multiplier is used to factor the flexural stiffness terms (KMr, KMs, and KMrs)
Region Stiffness for the meshed slab elements that are generated in the support region. The default value
Factor is 10, which will result in a nearly rigid zone over the column. Consideration of such a
stiffened zone may be important for accurate deflection prediction.
20.3.3 Live load reduction column properties

See “Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters”.
Related Links
• Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters (on page 348)
20.4 Drawing columns

Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two columns cannot have the same coordinates unless one
is above and one is below.

Wall properties
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not the Element layer.
Note: See “Setting default properties” for relevant information.
Related Links
• Setting default properties (on page 76)
20.4.1 To draw a column

1.
Choose the Column tool ( ).
2. Click at the column center.
20.4.2 To copy columns from below to above

1. Select the columns and choose Edit > Copy.
2. Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column objects in the same location as the original column objects.
The pasted columns are the active selection.
3. Change the Support Set property from “below” to “above” in the Column Properties dialog box.
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation then there are duplicated columns that do not allow
the model to run properly. If you have copied a large number, it is tedious to delete the second column at
each location (one by one).
20.5 Wall properties

Wall properties are similar to column properties though instead of width, depth and angle there is thickness. The
fixity settings are somewhat different, and there is no Bending Stiffness Factor.
20.5.1 General
The following is a list of RAM Concept general wall properties:

Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of wall.
Support Set Defines the wall as below or above the floor.
Thickness
Shear wall “Locks” the wall to the slab horizontally and thus restrains it; otherwise, the slab can “slide”
over the wall.

Drawing walls
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between wall and slab about the wall’s r-axis; otherwise
pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the wall’s r-axis at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for the wall to elongate in the z-direction according to Hooke’s law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible walls usually produce results that are more accurate.
20.5.2 Meshing
The following is a list of RAM Concept meshing wall properties:
Mesh Slab When checked meshed elements are generated within and bounded by the wall shape.
Support Region
Slab Support The entered multiplier is used to factor the flexural stiffness terms (KMr, KMs, and KMrs)
Region Stiffness for the meshed slab elements that are generated in the support region. The default value
Factor is 10, which will result in a nearly rigid zone over the wall. Consideration of such a
stiffened zone may be important for accurate deflection prediction.
20.6 Drawing walls

The wall tool is very similar to the column tool except that it uses a line rather than a point. A wall can pass
through a column, or intersect another wall.
Note: Ensure you are working on the Mesh Input layer, not the Element layer.
Note: The Wall tool ( ), Right Wall tool ( ) & Left Wall tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific
toolbar. See “Expanding tool buttons”.
20.6.1 To draw a wall

1.
Choose the Wall tool ( ).
2. Click at the wall end center points.
20.6.2 To copy walls from below to above

1. Select the walls and choose Edit > Copy.
2. Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall objects in the same location as the original wall objects. The
pasted walls are the active selection.
3. Change the Support Set property from “below” to “above” in the Wall Properties dialog box.

About point and line supports
20.7 About point and line supports

The result of defining a point support is a single support at a finite element node. The result of defining a line
support is one or more line supports that are each located at a finite element edges. RAM Concept uses the
thickness of the lowest numbered element in determining the support elevation. For this reason, it is not
advisable to locate point supports or line supports at slab steps.
All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
“Elevation above slab soffit” to be one-half of the slab depth).
Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point and line supports, as RAM Concept automatically
stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the General tab
of the Calc Options dialog box). One situation where you might use a horizontal support is a structure braced
against sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps something other than a concrete wall
provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but “Fixed in z-direction” for point supports and “Translation in z-
direction fixed” for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point support in the r- or s-direction could result
in arch / membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab translation along or across the support could result
in arch / membrane action.
20.8 Point support properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept point support properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the point support and the soffit.
Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Allows you to set the local axes.
Fixed in r-direction Prevents movement along the local r-axis.
Fixed in s-direction Prevents movement along the local s-axis.
Fixed in z-direction Prevents movement along the global z-axis.
Rotation about r-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the local r-axis.
Rotation about s-axis fixed Prevents rotation about the local s-axis.
20.9 Drawing point supports

Each point support is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two point supports cannot have the same
coordinates.

Line support properties
Note: The Point Support tool ( ) and Line Support tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer Specific
To draw a point support
1.
Choose the Point Support tool ( ).
2. Click at the point support location.
Related Links
• Expanding tool buttons (on page 53)
20.10 Line support properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept line support properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the line support and the soffit.
Translation along support fixed (OFF for line of symmetry) Prevents the slab from moving along the support
axis.
Translation across support fixed (ON for line of symmetry) Prevents the slab from moving across the
support axis.
Translation in z-direction fixed (OFF for line of symmetry) Prevents the slab from deflecting up or down at
the support axis.
Rotation about support axis fixed (ON for line of symmetry) Prevents rotation of the slab about the
support’s longitudinal axis.
Rotation about perp.-to-support fixed (OFF for line of sym) Prevents rotation of the slab about the support’s
transverse axis.
20.11 Drawing line supports

You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is very useful if a floor is symmetrical and you wish to
model only half of it. Be aware that line supports could prevent post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor.
1.
Choose the Line Support tool ( ).
2. Click at the support end points.
Related Links

About springs
20.12 About springs

The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a finite element node. The result of defining a line spring
is one or more line springs that are each located at a finite element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
lowest numbered element in determining the spring elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate
springs at slab steps.
All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
“Elevation above slab soffit” to be one-half of the slab depth). For slabs with varying centroid elevations, it can be
difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to the slab when using lateral springs and supports.
Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as RAM Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the
x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the General tab of the Calc Options dialog
box). One situation where you might use a horizontal spring is a structure braced against sidesway but modeled
without bracing members (perhaps soil friction provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force constant. R- and s-force constants could result in
membrane action.
20.13 Point spring properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept point spring properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the point spring and the soffit.
Spring Angle (r=x, s=y@0) Orientation of the local axes. The plan shows spring orientation.
R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local r-axis.
S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local s-axis.
Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the global z-axis.
R-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local r-axis.
S-Axis Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local s-axis.
20.14 Drawing point springs

Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two point springs cannot have the same coordinates.
Note: The Point Spring tool ( ), Line Spring tool ( ), and Area Spring tool ( ) share the same button on
the Layer Specific toolbar. See “Expanding tool buttons”.
To draw a point spring

Line spring properties
1.
Choose the Point Spring tool ( ).
2. Click at the spring location.
Related Links
20.15 Line spring properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept line spring properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the line spring and the soffit.
Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local axes. The plan shows spring orientation.
R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local r-axis at each end.
S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the local s-axis at each end.
Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the global z-axis at each end.
R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local r-axis at each end.
S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local s-axis at each end.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform you need to enter only one value. Otherwise you
need to enter two values separated by a comma (ends 1 and 2). This allows linear variation of the force constant
(or moment constant).
20.16 Drawing line springs

The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool except that it uses a line rather than a point.
To draw a line spring
1.
Choose the Line Spring tool ( ).
2. Click at the line spring end points.
Related Links

Drawing area springs
20.17 Area spring properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept area spring properties:
Elevation above slab soffit Vertical distance between the area spring and the soffit.
Spring Angle (R=X, S=Y@0) Orientation of the local axes. The plan shows spring orientation.
R-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the r-axis.
S-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the s-axis.
Z-Force Constant Spring constant in the direction of the global z-axis.
R-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local r-axis.
S-Moment Constant Angular spring constant about the local s-axis.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) is uniform you need to enter only one value.
Note: The force constant (or moment constant) can linearly vary in any direction.
Note: If the force constant (or moment constant) varies you need to enter three values, separated by commas
(corners 1, 2 and 3). This allows linear variation of the force constant (or moment constant) in two directions.
See the following figure.
Note: If you use the Area Spring tool to specify a varying force constant (or moment constant), Concept
calculates the unique value of the fourth corner (three points define a plane).
Figure 33: Area spring properties varying from 100 to 200 to 300 units at the first three corners. For quad areas,
Concept calculates the fourth corner value.

About floor areas and members
20.18 Drawing area springs

You use the Area Spring tool ( ) to locate the spring area corners.
To draw an area spring
1.
Choose the Area Spring tool ( ).
2. Click at the vertices of the area spring (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
3. Close the polygon by typing “c” in the command line or clicking at the first vertex.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the structure it supports.
Related Links
20.19 About floor areas and members

Objects representing slabs, beams and openings define floor areas and members. Often these objects overlap.
20.19.1 The priority method

At any floor location, only one thickness (depth) is used, and the object with the highest priority defines that
thickness.
The thicknesses of overlapping objects do not add to define the thickness.
For example, you would expect the overall thickness of a drop panel located at a column to take priority over the
slab thickness. By assigning a Priority to each object, the automatic mesh generator understands how to
generate the finite elements.
The lowest Priority is 1. This is so that you can keep adding beams, thickenings and slab areas with higher
priorities. There is no limit to the highest priority (other than your computer and text overflow).
Note: Overlapping objects for slabs, beams and openings must have different priorities. Priority numbers need
not be sequential.

About floor areas and members
20.19.2 Meshing beams as slabs

Beam objects by default do not need to have priorities specified. However, beams have an option to be meshed
“Mesh as Slab” using the priority method. Any beams using the priority method will be meshed first along with
slab and opening areas. The remaining beams are meshed last and are merged with the elements that result
from the mesh resulting from the priority method. Any “gaps” between the beams and other meshed surfaces are
filled during the process, although this will result in a warning.
Note: Supports do not have priorities.
Figure 34: Slab, beam and opening objects defined in the Mesh Input Standard Plan

Slab area properties
Figure 35: The Element Slab Summary Plan after mesh generation from the previous figure.
20.20 Slab area properties

Slab area properties fall into two categories: general and behavior.
The following is an explanation of RAM Concept slab area properties:

Slab area properties
Figure 36: Slab area properties - general

Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps and drop panels, by specifying an increased thickness.
Surface Elevation It is customary to set the typical elevation as 0. Setting the elevation to a very large value
(such as 100 feet or 30 m) may result in round off errors in the analysis. You create surface and soffit steps by
using different surface elevations for different areas.
Priority Generally, the typical slab thickness has a Priority of 1.

Drawing slab areas
Figure 37: Slab area properties - behavior
R-Axis defines an orientation for the slab. If the slab is a two way slab with identical properties in all directions
(“isotropic”), then the R-Axis is irrelevant, because there is no inherent orientation of the slab. However, if the
slab is not isotropic, then this axis (defined as the counter-clockwise angle from 3 o'clock) defines the r-axis
which is used along with the other slab area properties to define the behavior of the slab. The s-axis is always 90
degrees counter-clockwise from the r-axis.
Behavior This defines the slab area’s behavior type. It has four possible designations:
• Two-way slab The slab is isotropic and behaves in the same manner in all directions.
• One-way slab The slab has normal bending stiffness along the r-axis and about the s-axis (Ms). The slab has
only minimal bending stiffness in the perpendicular direction (Mr). The slab also has reduced torsional
stiffness (Mrs). The in-plane stiffnesses are not affected by this setting.
• No-torsion 2-way slab The slab behaves like a two-way slab, except that it has only minimal torsional
stiffness (Mrs).
• Custom All of the stiffnesses (relative to the isotropic slab stiffness) can be specified by the user. These
values are called KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs and KVrs. In general, we do not recommend using this option.
Refer to “Orthotropic behavior” for further information on the use of Behavior properties.
20.21 Drawing slab areas

Use the Slab Area tool ( ) to define the slab area by clicking on each consecutive point (vertex). To close the
polygon, click on the first polygon point or type “c” and press <Return>.
To draw a slab area
1.
Choose the Slab Area tool ( ).

About beams
2. Click at each slab area vertex consecutively.

3. Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or type “c” and press <Return>).
Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight edges.
20.22 About beams

In RAM Concept, you model beams as thickened slabs with the beam tool. You can assign properties that
differentiate beam behavior from slab behavior.
20.23 Beam properties

Beam properties fall into two categories: general and behavior.
The following is an explanation of RAM Concept beam properties:
Figure 38: Beam properties - general

Thickness is the same as beam depth.
Width The beam width automatically appears to scale.
Priority Generally, beams have higher priorities than slabs.

Drawing beams
Mesh As Slab If checked, this beam will be meshed identically to slabs using the priority method.
Figure 39: Beam properties - behavior
The beam behavior properties are very similar to the slab area properties. The beam R-Axis is automatically set
to the beam longitudinal axis.
Behavior This defines the beam’s behavior type. It has four possible values:
• Standard The beam is isotropic and behaves in the same manner in all directions.
• No-torsion The beam behaves like a two-way slab, except that it has only minimal torsional stiffness (Mrs).
• Custom All of the stiffnesses (relative to the isotropic slab stiffness) can be specified by the user. These
values are called KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs and KVrs. In general, we do not recommend using this option.
20.24 Drawing beams

You draw a beam by clicking the start and end points of its centerline using the Beam tool ( ). Each beam has
six control points. The four additional points are automatically located so that the beam-ends are perpendicular
to the sides. You can stretch the corner grip points to define mitered corners.
Note: The Beam tool ( ), Right Beam tool ( ) & Left Beam tool ( ) share the same button on the Layer
Specific toolbar. See “Expanding tool buttons”.
20.24.1 To draw a beam

1.
Choose the Beam tool ( ).
2. Click at the each end of the beam centerline.

Slab opening properties
20.24.2 To define mitered corners on a beam

1. Select the beam and choose the Stretch tool ( ).
2. Snap to the beam corner grips and stretch them into position.
20.25 Slab opening properties

There is only one slab opening property:
Priority Generally, openings have the highest priorities in the floor.
20.26 Drawing slab openings

The Slab Opening tool ( ) defines an opening in the slab.
To draw a slab opening
1.
Choose the Slab Opening tool ( ).
2. Click at each slab-opening vertex consecutively.
Note: You approximate curves with a series of straight edges.
20.27 Checking the structure definition

After you have fully defined the structure’s geometry, you should check for obvious errors. RAM Concept flags
illegal modeling when generating the mesh. A list of possible errors appears in Chapter 18, “Generating the
Mesh”.
Once you have drawn all the support and floor objects on the Mesh Input Plan, you must generate the actual
finite element mesh. The structure does not exist until you generate the mesh.

Generating the Mesh
21
There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in RAM Concept:
• Using the automatic meshing facility that uses the mesh input objects described in Defining the Structure (on
page 160).
• Using the manual meshing tools.
The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the recommended method for nearly all models.
The second method allows more control over mesh intensity. The mesh size can be more widely varied in
different areas of the floor, but editing is more difficult. Instructions for the second (manual) method are in
Manually Drawing the Finite Elements (on page 185).
21.1 Generating the mesh automatically

Finite elements do not exist (and hence there is no structure) until the mesh has been generated. You need to
have defined the mesh input objects (using the procedure described in the preceding chapter) before generating
the mesh.
It is preferable to generate the mesh as soon as possible, although it is possible to draw additional objects on
other layers (such as loads) before generation.
21.1.1 Deciding what mesh element size to use

When generating the mesh you need to decide what element size to use. The maximum is 32.8 feet (10 meters).
To speed the analysis, it is useful to choose a coarse mesh for preliminary design and a fine mesh for final design.
A coarse mesh might have an element size of span length / 6. A fine mesh might have an element size of span
length / 12. If in doubt, you should investigate the effects of different mesh element sizes.
1.
Click Generate Mesh ( ).
The following dialog box will appear.

Generating the Mesh
Generating the mesh automatically
Figure 40: Generate mesh dialog box

2. Specify the Element Size in the Generate Mesh dialog box.
3. Click Generate.
The time taken to generate the mesh depends upon the size of the floor and the specified mesh element size. For
most models, the mesh generates in less than 15 seconds.
Note: Every time you generate a mesh, RAM Concept deletes any existing mesh and generates a new one.
21.1.2 Limitations of the automatic meshing

The main automatic meshing limitation is that the minimum element size is 50 mm (0.164 feet). RAM Concept
can usually overcome this limitation by adjusting the mesh input objects to generate a mesh. RAM Concept
moves mesh input line objects (for example, walls, line supports) to accommodate point objects (for example,
columns, point supports).
RAM Concept automatically adjusts the mesh input objects if:
• Two control points are closer than the minimum element size.
• A control point is closer to a line than the minimum element size.
Note: RAM Concept generates warnings during the meshing if it was necessary to make adjustments. You can
stop the meshing and make corrections. If you continue, you should check the mesh to see if the adjustments are
satisfactory.
Note: RAM Concept generates a warning if two slab areas (or beams or openings) with the same priority overlap.
You can stop the meshing and make corrections. If you continue you should check the mesh to see if the
adjustments are satisfactory as the choice of which slab area (or beam) governs the elements is effectively
random.
Note: RAM Concept moves two columns to the same point that you draw closer than the minimum element size.
A mesh generates but the model does not run properly if:
• A column or point support is outside of the slab areas.
• A wall or line support is partially outside the slab areas.
• An area spring is completely outside the slab areas.

Generating the Mesh
• Two columns or walls of the same support set are duplicated (intersecting walls are allowed).
To avoid mesh warnings

Do any one of the following:
1. Adjust objects on the Mesh Input plan so that the minimum element size dimension (or more) separates
them.
2. Edit priorities so that slab areas, beams and openings with the same priorities do not overlap.
21.1.3 Viewing the finite element mesh

You can view the finite element mesh on any plan, but the Standard Plan of the Element layer is the preferred
plan to use.
1. Open Layers > Element > Standard Plan

2. The mesh generated at this stage appears to be somewhat random. This is normal and in fact, for sensible
mesh sizes it produces highly satisfactory design results. At times, however, such a mesh (adversely) affects
the contour plots.
21.1.4 Improving the mesh

You can significantly improve the mesh once design strips are drawn. The following diagrams show the
differences.

Generating the Mesh
Figure 41: Mesh before Design Strips

Generating the Mesh
Selectively refining the mesh
Figure 42: Mesh after drawing Design Strips and Regenerating.
21.2 Selectively refining the mesh

Although there is no setting that makes the mesh finer in some areas than others, you can employ a trick to
achieve this.

Generating the Mesh
21.2.1 Using point and line supports to refine the mesh

You can draw “dummy” point or line supports to ensure that the mesh is finer in particular areas. You must
ensure that all fixity boxes are unchecked, as shown in the two following figures.
A refined mesh example is shown in the last figure.
Figure 43: Point support dialog with all fixity boxes unchecked
Figure 44: Line support dialog with all fixity boxes unchecked

Generating the Mesh
Figure 45: Two slabs, identical in every way except for the implementation of line supports to refine the mesh.

Manually Drawing the Finite Elements
22
Note: In most cases, you do not need to draw the finite element mesh manually. If you have used the automatic
method, there is no need to read this chapter
There are two ways to generate the finite element mesh in RAM Concept:
• Using the automatic meshing facility, described in Generating the Mesh (on page 178), that uses the mesh
input objects, described in Defining the Structure (on page 160).
• Using the manual meshing tools described in this chapter.
The first method is certainly easier and faster. It is the recommended method for nearly all models.
The second method allows more control over mesh intensity: the mesh size can be more widely varied in
different areas of the floor. The method is, however, more prone to user error and editing is more difficult.
Do not use the manual method to supplement a mesh made with the automatic meshing facility. This is because
manual elements would be lost if you used the mesh generation facility. For example, if you added a column
element above in the element layer it would be lost when you regenerated.
22.1 Using the Element layer

There is no set order in which you must define objects. Most people choose to draw supports first.
If you have imported a CAD drawing, make it visible on the Element Standard Plan before drawing the structure.
22.2 About column elements and wall elements

RAM Concept allows for single story models whereby you define columns and walls below and above the slab.
Supports above the slab do not provide vertical support, only horizontal support and bending resistance.
22.3 Column element properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept column element properties:

Drawing column elements
Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of column.
Support Set Defines the column as below or above the floor.
Width Measured along the column’s r-axis. Set to zero for round columns.
Depth / Diameter Measured along the column’s s-axis.
Angle Plan angle measured counterclockwise from the global x-axis. It determines the column’s r-axis (and is
usually zero).
Bending Stiffness Factor Used to modify the bending stiffness without changing the dimensions or height. For
example, you may expect an edge column to crack and rotate more than an internal column and so you might
consider setting this value to 0.5. You could use the BSF to increase a column’s stiffness, but this is an unlikely
scenario.
Roller at Far End Results in zero horizontal shear in column.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) between column and slab; otherwise pinned.
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection (about x- and y-axes) at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for column to elongate in the z-direction according to Hooke’s law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible columns usually produce results that are more accurate.
22.4 Drawing column elements

Each column is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two columns cannot have the same coordinates unless one
is above and one is below.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw column elements at slab element nodes.
22.4.1 To draw a column element

1.
Choose the Column Element tool ( ).
2. Click at the column center.
22.4.2 To copy columns from below to above

1. Select the column elements and choose Edit > Copy.
2. Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new column elements in the same location as the original column
elements. The pasted column elements are the active selection.
3. Change the Support Set property from “below” to “above” in the Column Element Properties dialog box.

Wall element properties
Note: If you do not change the Support Set designation then there are duplicated column elements that do not
allow the model to run properly. If you have copied a large number, it is tedious to delete the second column
element at each location (one by one).
22.5 Wall element properties

Wall element properties are similar to column element properties though instead of width, depth and angle
there is thickness. The fixity settings are somewhat different, and there is no Bending Stiffness Factor.
The following is a list of RAM Concept wall element properties:
Height Vertical distance from centroid of slab element to far end of wall element.
Support Set Defines the wall element as below or above the floor.
Thickness
Shear wall “Locks” the wall element to the slab horizontally and thus restrains it; otherwise, the slab can “slide”
over the wall.
Fixed Near Provides a moment connection between the wall element and the slab about the wall element’s r-
axis; otherwise pinned
Fixed Far Provides a moment connection about the wall element’s r-axis at far end; otherwise pinned.
Compressible Allows for wall element to elongate in the z-direction according to Hooke’s law; otherwise
incompressible. Compressible walls usually produce results that are more accurate.
22.6 Drawing wall elements

The wall element tool is very similar to the column tool except that it uses a line rather than a point.
A wall element can pass through a column element, or intersect another wall element.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw wall elements along the edge of the slab elements.
The ends of the wall elements must be at slab element nodes. Wall elements cannot traverse a slab finite
element.
22.6.1 To draw wall elements on slab elements

1.
Choose the Wall Element tool ( ).

About point and line supports
22.6.2 To draw wall elements where there are no slab elements

1.
Choose the Wall Element tool ( ).
3. Specify the number of elements in the Wall Element Tool dialog box and click OK.
22.6.3 To copy walls from below to above

1. Select the wall elements and choose Edit > Copy.
2. Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new wall elements in the same location as the original wall element
objects. The pasted wall elements are the active selection.
3. Change the Support Set property from “below” to “above” in the Wall Element Properties dialog box.
22.7 About point and line supports

The result of defining a point support is a single support at a finite element node. The result of defining a line
support is one or more line supports that are each located at a finite element edge. RAM Concept uses the
thickness of the lowest numbered element in determining the support elevation. For this reason, it is not
advisable to locate point supports or line supports at slab steps.
All supports that have a horizontal rigidity should be placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they may cause an
unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal rigidity (mid-depth placement is done by setting the
“Elevation above slab soffit” to be one-half of the slab depth).
Normally there is no need to use horizontal fixities in point and line supports, as RAM Concept automatically
stabilizes the structure in the x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the General tab
of the Calc Options dialog box). One situation where you might use a horizontal support is a structure braced
against sidesway but modeled without bracing members (perhaps something other than a concrete wall
provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but “Fixed in z-direction” for point supports and “Translation in z-
direction fixed” for line supports. For point supports, fixing the point support in the r- or s-direction could result
in arch / membrane action. For line supports, fixing the slab translation along or across the support could result
in arch / membrane action.
22.8 Point support properties

See “Point support properties” for more information on point support properties.

Drawing point supports
22.9 Drawing point supports

You draw point supports by clicking at their location with the Point Support tool ( ).
toolbar.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw point supports at slab element nodes.
To draw a point support
1.
Choose the Point Support tool ( ).
2. Click at the point support location.
22.10 Line support properties

See “Line support properties” for more information on line support properties.
22.11 Drawing line supports

You can use line supports as an axis of symmetry. This is very useful if a floor is symmetrical and you wish to
model only half of it. Be aware that line supports could prevent post-tensioning forces being applied to the floor.
toolbar.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw line supports along the edge of the slab elements.
The ends of the line supports must be at slab element nodes. Line supports cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To drawing a line support on slab elements
1.
Choose the Line Support tool ( ).
2. Click at the support end points.

Point spring properties
22.12 About springs

The result of defining a point spring is a single spring at a finite element node. The result of defining a line spring
is one or more line springs that are each located at a finite element edge. RAM Concept uses the thickness of the
lowest numbered element in determining the spring elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate
springs at slab steps.
All springs that have a horizontal stiffness should be placed at the mid-depth of the slab or they RAM Concept
may cause an unintended arch action in addition to their horizontal stiffness (mid-depth placement is done by
setting the “Elevation above slab soffit” to be one-half of the slab depth). For slabs with varying centroid
elevations, it can be difficult to avoid adding a rotational restraint to the slab when using lateral springs and
supports.
Normally there is no need to use horizontal springs, as RAM Concept automatically stabilizes the structure in the
x- and y-directions (you can turn this automatic stabilization off in the General tab of the Calc Options dialog
box). One situation where you might use a horizontal spring is a structure braced against sidesway but modeled
without bracing members (perhaps soil friction provides the bracing).
Be very careful about specifying anything but a z-force constant. R- and s-force constants could result in
membrane action.
22.13 Point spring properties

See “Point spring properties” for more information on point spring properties.
22.14 Drawing point springs

Each point spring is located with an x- and y-coordinate. Two point springs cannot have the same coordinates.
the Layer Specific toolbar.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw point springs at slab element nodes.
To draw a point spring
1.
Choose the Point Spring tool ( ).
2. Click at the spring location.
22.15 Line spring properties

See “Line spring properties” for more information on line spring properties.

Drawing line springs
22.16 Drawing line springs

The line spring tool is very similar to the point spring tool except that it uses a line rather than a point.
Note: If slab elements are already drawn, you need to draw line springs along the edge of the slab elements. The
ends of the line springs must be at slab element nodes. Line springs cannot traverse a slab finite element.
To draw a line spring
1.
Choose the Line Spring tool ( ).
2. Click at the line spring end points.
22.17 Area spring properties

See “Area spring properties” for more information on area spring properties.
22.18 Drawing area springs

You use the Area Spring tool ( ) and locate the spring area corners.
To draw an Area Spring
1.
Choose the Area Spring tool ( ).
2. Click at the four corner point locations of the area spring.
Note: An Area Spring object can be larger than the structure it supports.

Slab element properties
22.19 About floor areas

You define floor slabs and beams manually with the slab meshing tools. Drawing elements manually requires
more thought on the drawing process. Poor decisions could require a significant amount of editing and
duplication of work.
Drawing elements manually also requires careful application of the tools to ensure that the side of each element
is the same length as the adjacent element. In other words, each element node must be at the corner of any
element that touches it. Elements cannot overlap.
You model beam elements as thickened slab elements with the same slab element tools. You model openings as
empty spaces in the mesh.
22.20 Slab element properties

Slab area properties fall into two categories: general and behavior.
The following is an explanation of RAM Concept slab area properties:
Thickness You define slab thickenings, such as drop caps and drop panels, by specifying an increased thickness.
Figure 46: Slab element properties - behavior
R-Axis defines an orientation for the slab. If the slab is a two way slab with identical properties in all directions
(“isotropic”), then the R-Axis is irrelevant, because there is no inherent orientation of the slab. However, if the
slab is not isotropic, then this axis (defined as the counter-clockwise angle from 3 o'clock) defines the r-axis

Drawing the slab elements
which is used along with the other slab area properties to define the behavior of the slab. The s-axis is always 90
degrees counter-clockwise from the r-axis.
KMr, KMs, KMrs, KFr, KFs, KVrs Relative stiffnesses (compared to isotropic slab stiffness).
Refer to “Orthotropic behavior” for further information on the use of Behavior properties.
22.21 Drawing the slab elements

You can draw slab elements one or more at a time. Usually you would attempt to draw as many as practical in
one operation using the Rect Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) or the Poly Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ). This
would often mean drawing slab panels (with columns in the corners) in one operation.
Note: The Rect Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) and Poly Slab Mesh Elements tool ( ) share the same button on
the Element layer toolbar.
Note: You can approximate curves by a series of straight edges.
22.21.1 To draw a rectangular slab mesh area

1.
Choose the Rect Slab Mesh Elements ( ) tool.
2. Click at two opposite corners of the rectangle.
3. Specify the element size in the Rect Mesh Tool dialog box and click OK.
22.21.2 To draw a polygon slab mesh area

1.
Choose the Poly Slab Mesh Elements ( ) tool.
2. Click at each slab panel vertex consecutively.
4. Specify the element size in the Poly Mesh Tool dialog box and click OK.
22.21.3 To draw a single mesh element

1.
Choose one of the single element tools ( ).
2. Click at each of the three (or four) slab panel vertices consecutively.

A few final words
22.22 A few final words

Do not click Generate Mesh ( ) after drawing the mesh elements manually. It deletes all the elements that you
have drawn.

23
Drawing Loads
RAM Concept allows you to draw point, line and area loads and moments on any loading plan. These loads can be
in the directions of the global x-, y- and z-axes and the moments can be about the global x- and y-axes.
Each load belongs to a loading layer, such as Live Loading. You define each loading in the loadings window, and
draw the loads on plans.
There is no limitation to the number of loads defined.
Loads are independent of the finite element mesh and have no effect on the automatic mesh generation. This is
satisfactory for most loads. For very heavy point or line loads (such as on a mat or transfer slab), however, the
loads should correlate with the finite element mesh nodes. You can do this by drawing pinned columns and walls
above the floor, and drawing the loads at these locations with the help of snaps. Alternatively, you can refine the
mesh locally with the use of “dummy” slab objects. Refer to “ Selectively refining the mesh (on page 182)” for
further information.
Horizontal loads may cause applied moments depending upon the elevation above the slab surface of the loads.
If a load is located at a slab surface step, RAM Concept uses the thickness of the lowest numbered slab element in
determining the load elevation. For this reason, it is not advisable to locate point or line loads at steps.
Tip: Importing a CAD drawing may assist you in drawing loads.
23.1 About self-weight

RAM Concept automatically calculates the floor’s self-weight for the Self-Dead Loading.
23.2 About superposition of loads

Point loads cannot be at the same location on the same loading layer.
Line loads can intersect or overlap, but cannot have the exact same length and location on the same loading
layer.
With the exception of temperature and shrinkage loadings, area loads can overlap but cannot have the exact
shape and location on the same loading layer.
Overlapping area loads are additive.

Drawing Loads
Point load properties
23.3 Point load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept point load properties:
Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance between the point load and the slab surface.
Fx Point force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal force).
Fy Point force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal force).
Fz Point force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical force).
Mx Point moment about the global x-axis.
My Point moment about the global y-axis.
Note: Although point loads need not be located at a finite element node, you should consider locating very large
loads at nodes. Point loads must be located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this rule.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs. See Chapter 8, “Choosing Sign Convention”.
Note: Horizontal forces (Fx, Fy) cause applied moments unless the Elevation above slab surface is set to apply
the load at the slab centroid.
23.4 Drawing point loads

Each point load is located with an x- and y-coordinate.
To draw a point load
1.
Choose the Point Load tool ( ).
2. Click at the load location (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
23.5 Line load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept line load properties:
Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance between the line load and the slab surface.
Fx Line force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal force).
Fy Line force in the direction of global y-axis at each end (horizontal force).
Fz Line force in the direction of global z-axis at each end (vertical force).
Mx Line moment about the global x-axis at each end.

Drawing Loads
Drawing line loads
My Line moment about the global y-axis at each end.
Note: If the line force (or moment) is uniform you need to enter only one value. Otherwise you need to enter two
values separated by a comma (ends 1 and 2). This allows linear variation of the line force (or moment). See the
following figure.
Note: Although line loads need not be located at a finite element node, you should consider locating very large
loads at element edges. Line loads must be completely located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if
you violate this rule.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs.
Figure 47: Line load properties varying from 10 to 20 units.
23.6 Drawing line loads

There are two line load tools.
23.6.1 Standard line load
The line load tool is very similar to the point load tool except that it uses two points rather than one point.
To draw a line load
1. Choose the Line Load tool ( ).

Drawing Loads
Area load properties
2. Click at the load end points (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
23.6.2 Perimeter line load
The perimeter line load tool facilitates the drawing of multiple line load objects around the perimeter, with or
without an offset.
To draw a perimeter line load
1. Choose the Perimeter Line Load tool ( ).

2. Click anywhere on the slab.
3. In the dialog box that appears, enter the Inset Distance, and click Apply.
23.7 Area load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept area load properties:
Elevation above slab surface Vertical distance between the area load and the slab surface.
Fx Area force in the direction of global x-axis (horizontal force).
Fy Area force in the direction of global y-axis (horizontal force).
Fz Area force in the direction of global z-axis (vertical force).
Mx Area moment about the global x-axis.
My Area moment about the global y-axis.
Note: If the area force (or moment) is uniform you need to enter only one value per axis.
Note: The area force (or moment) can linearly vary in any direction. The area force variation could be for
snowdrift, or sloping soil.
Note: If the area force (or moment) varies you need to enter three values, separated by commas (vertices 1, 2
and 3). This allows linear variation of the line force (or moment) in two directions. See the following figure.
Note: If you use more than three vertices, Concept calculates the unique value at all vertices (three points define
a plane).
Note: Area loads must be at least partially located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you violate this
rule. Concept ignores any part of an area load not on a finite element.
Note: Sign convention is defined in Criteria > Signs.

Drawing Loads
Drawing area loads
Figure 48: Area load properties varying from 10 to 20 to 30 units at the first three vertices. Concept calculates the
values at all other vertices.
23.8 Drawing area loads

You use the Area Load tool ( ) to locate the area load vertices.
While it is neater to draw area loads that match the floor, it is satisfactory to make the load oversize. RAM
Concept ignores any part of an area load that is not on a floor element. Exaggerating the size too much affects the
automatic printing and zooming bounds.
To draw an area load
1. Choose the Area Load tool ( ).

2. Click at the vertices of the area load (or enter the coordinates in the command line).
3. Close the polygon by typing “c” in the command line or clicking at the first vertex.
23.9 Copying loads

You can copy point, line, and area loads from one Loading plan to another using the following procedure.
This is convenient since in practice most loads have values for more than one loading.
1. Select the load and choose Edit > Copy.

2. Open the loading plan to which you wish to paste.
3. Choose Edit > Paste. This pastes the new load in the same plan location as the original load. The pasted load
is the active selection.
4. Edit the properties of the new load.

Drawing Loads
Temperature Area Load properties
Note: You can copy, paste, and edit multiple loads simultaneously.
23.10 Temperature Area Load properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept temperature area load properties:
ΔT Top Temperature change at the top of the slab.

ΔT Bot Temperature change at the bottom of the slab.
The defined temperature change is converted to a strain by multiplying it by the coefficient of thermal
expansion, which is a property of the concrete mix.
Notes:
• Positive temperature changes expand elements. Negative temperature changes contract elements.
• When different values are input for ΔT Top and ΔT Bot, a curvature is induced in the elements.
• The area temperature change cannot linearly vary. Only a single temperature change value can be input for
ΔT Top and ΔT Bot.
• Temperature area loads must be at least partially located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you
violate this rule. Concept ignores any part of an area not on a finite element.
• Units associated with the temperature changes are defined in Criteria > Units.
• Overlapping temperature area loads are not permitted.
• Where elements intersect multiple temperature area loads, the temperature area load covering the largest
area of the element is used for the entire element.
23.11 Drawing temperature area loads

You use the Area Temperature Load tool ( ) to locate the area vertices.
While it is neater to draw area loads that match the floor, it is satisfactory to make the area oversize. RAM
1. Select the Area Temperature Load tool.
2. Either:
Click at the vertices of the area load
or
Type the coordinates in the command line
3. Close the polygon by either:

Drawing Loads
Shrinkage Area Load Properties
clicking on the first vertex

or
typing <c> in the command line
23.12 Shrinkage Area Load Properties

The following is a list of RAM Concept shrinkage area load properties:
Δε Top Strain change at the top of the slab.
Δε Bot Strain change at the bottom of the slab.
Notes:
• Positive strain changes expand elements. Negative strain changes contract/shrink elements.
• When different values are input for Δε Top and Δε Bot, a curvature is induced in the elements.
• The area strain change cannot linearly vary. Only a single strain change value can be input for Δε Top and Δε
Bot.
• Shrinkage area loads must be at least partially located on finite elements; Concept issues a warning if you
violate this rule. Concept ignores any part of an area not on a finite element.
• Overlapping shrinkage area loads are not permitted.
• Where elements intersect multiple shrinkage area loads, the shrinkage area load covering the larges are of
the element is used for the entire element.
23.13 Drawing shrinkage area loads

You use the Area Shrinkage Load tool ( ) to locate the area vertices.
While it is neater to draw area loads that match the floor, it is satisfactory to make the area oversize. RAM
For multi-story structures, it is recommended to input the shrinkage strain that represents the relative
shrinkage change between the level being analyzed and the restrained level below. Using a total shrinkage
instead of a differential shrinkage will normally be overly conservative.
1. Select the Area Shrinkage Load tool.
2. Either:
Click at the vertices of the area load
or

Drawing Loads
Drawing shrinkage area loads
Enter the coordinates in the command line

3. Close the polygon by either:
Click the first vertex
or
Type <c> in the command line

Creating Pattern Loading
24
RAM Concept generates pattern loadings based upon the load patterns that you draw. Refer to “ About load
pattern (on page 99)” explains the principle of load pattern.
24.1 Deciding how many load patterns to use

Mathematically, there could a large number of floor pattern loadings, which would all have different results. For
practical reasons, the maximum number of load patterns is ten. This allows you to draw five load patterns in
each direction.
Typical pattern loading configurations are:

Drawing load patterns
Figure 49: Beam Pattern Loadings. Note that these will not necessarily produce the maximum negative moments,
but they will produce moments that are very close to the maximum and represent a practical solution in most
situations.
24.2 Drawing load patterns

You draw load patterns as part of the pattern loading process.
1. Choose Layers > Pattern.

2. Open one of the load pattern plans (from Load Pattern 1 through Load Pattern 10).
3. Double click the Pattern Load tool ( ).
4. Specify which pattern number you wish to use (the number should correspond to the load pattern plan’s
number). Draw the on-pattern areas with a polygon.
5. Click at each slab area vertex consecutively.

Load pattern filtering
7. Repeat for all patterns.
Note: Regardless of which load pattern plan you are using, the pattern number will be the last one specified. You
will need to change this for each different pattern plan.
24.3 Load pattern filtering

Internally, RAM Concept resolves a pattern loading by determining which slab and beam finite elements are
partially or wholly within the related load pattern. The loads on these elements (the element loads) are
multiplied by the on-pattern factor. For elements totally outside the pattern, the element loads are multiplied by
the off-pattern factor.
Thus, RAM Concept’s calculation pattern areas approximate the pattern areas that you draw. You should
consider this when drawing load patterns and choosing mesh size as it will affect the actual pattern loadings
generated.
24.3.1 Effect of mesh on load pattern

The finite element mesh regularity and intensity has an effect on the load pattern process. The following
example best explains the process.
Load pattern for four-panel slab

Figure 50: To generate the maximum My at midspan you would use this load pattern.
Actual pattern areas for an irregular coarse mesh

Figure 51: The point load and some additional area load will be included in the pattern loading.
Actual pattern areas for an irregular fine mesh

Figure 52: With the finer mesh, the point load will not be included and there will be less additional area load in the
pattern loading.

Actual pattern areas for a regular coarse mesh
Figure 53: This mesh generates a pattern loading with an area that closely resembles the load pattern.

Drawing design strips significantly improves the mesh. See Chapter 18, “Generating the Mesh” for more
information on improving the mesh.
Note:
The mesh becomes more regular if you generate or regenerate after design strips are drawn.

Defining Design Strips
25
Note: Design strips are perhaps the most important tool in RAM Concept. It is highly recommended that the
designer takes the time to fully understand what a design strip does, and how to use them. If you use design
strips improperly then the results will be meaningless.
Finite element analysis often produces high peak moments and stress concentrations which are inappropriate
for calculation of reinforcement and evaluating performance.
Code rules are generally intended for strip methods that assume an averaging (or “smearing”) of moment and
shear across a designated width, such as a column strip. RAM Concept uses design strips and design sections to
link finite element analysis with concrete code rules and concrete design.
25.1 Definition of a design strip

A design strip is an object that:
• contains a series of cross sections at specific locations
• is usually the length of a span, or part of a span, but can in fact have any length within the structure
• integrates resultants (moments, shears, axial forces, torsions) for all load combinations along each cross
section (and, hence, across the design strip’s width)
• applies appropriate code rules to the resultants
A design strip is the same as a span segment strip.
25.2 Design strip terminology

It is important to understand the different objects used to define design strips.
Span segment A line segment-line entity that is intended to indicate a portion of a structural span or a whole
structural span. The “at support” properties of the Span Segment indicate where the span starts and stops.
Span One or more connected Span Segments that together make up a single structural span. Nearly all spans
require only one Span Segment.
Frame One or more Spans that are connected together to form a continuous line of spans.
Span Segment Strip A set of cross sections associated with a Span Segment. The Span Segment can have up to
three Span Segment Strips (left, center and right). These are known as design strips.

Understanding how a design strip works
See the following image for further explanation.
Figure 54: Design strips for a two-way flat plate.
25.3 Understanding how a design strip works

RAM Concept generates design strips from span segments.
A design strip is normally the length of a span with a logical width.
RAM Concept subdivides each individual design strip segment according to the following parameters:
• minimum number of divisions
• maximum division spacing
• support width
• changes in concrete section along the span
RAM Concept locates a design strip cross section at the start of each division, plus one at the end. The length of
each cross section equals the width of the design strip at that location.
RAM Concept modifies the geometrical properties of each design strip cross section according to the cross
section trimming and inter cross section slope limit settings.
RAM Concept integrates the resultants for each load combination along the length of each design strip cross
section (and hence across the width of the design strip).
RAM Concept uses some properties of each span segment to determine applicable code rules (beam or slab, post-
tensioned or reinforced) for the corresponding design strip.
RAM Concept applies the code rules to the envelope of the load combination integrals within a rule set. Other
span segment properties (reinforcement bar sizes, cover) facilitate the actual code rule calculations. See “Span
segment properties” for more information.

The design strip process
RAM Concept separates design strips into two sets: latitude and longitude. The two sets are for convenience and
recognize that concrete floors should be designed in two directions.
Note: As with all plans, you can rename the Latitude Design Strip Plan and Longitude Design Strip Plan by
choosing Layer > Rename.
Figure 55: Column strip and two middle strips belonging to one span with cross sections visible.
Figure 56: Moment about the y-axis (My) plotted across one cross section of three design strips.
25.4 The design strip process

1. Create the span segments. Specify the default span segment properties by either:
Generate span segments (and supplement and adjust if necessary)
or
Draw span segments manually.
These two methods can be used in conjunction.
2. Create span segment strips.
You can create span segment strips from span segments with the Generate Strips tool. You cannot draw or
directly edit span segment strips.

Span segment properties
3. Review and modify span segment strips:

a. Examine span segment strips.
Check the Lock Generated Strips box of any Span Segment that has satisfactory strips.
b. Edit span segment properties.
Use the Strip Generation tab of the Span Segment properties dialog to modify the span segment strips.
c. Edit span segments manually.
Use the Span Boundary, Strip Boundary, and Orient Span Cross Section tools to control the strip
generation.
d. Set cross section trimming.
This enables you to modify the concrete section used for shear and flexure calculations.
4. Continue by repeating steps 2 and 3 as necessary.
25.5 Span segment properties

Span segment properties serve different purposes. RAM Concept uses properties to determine the following:
• design method (e.g. inclusion of axial force)
• design strip width and cross section geometry
• appropriate code design rules (e.g. beam or slab)
• reinforcement
• live load reduction
The following is an explanation of RAM Concept span segment properties:

25.5.1 General tab
Figure 57: Span segment properties - General
Span Set Determines the set the span segment belongs to: latitude or longitude.
Environment The environment setting affects which service rules RAM Concept selects in some
codes.
Refer to the appropriate code discussion chapter for more information:
• See Service (on page 894) for relevance to ACI318-02.
• See Service (on page 1020) for relevance to AS3600-2001, see Service (on page
1039) for relevance to AS3600-2009, and Service (on page 1057) for relevance to
AS3600-2018.
• See Service (on page 1081) for relevance to BS8110.
• See Service (on page 1108) for relevance to IS 456.
• See Characteristic Service (on page 1137) for relevance to EC2.

• See Service (on page 1164) for relevance to CSA A23.3.
Note: This setting has a significant effect on reinforcement quantities.
Consider Axial Force Uses the net section axial force in bending design.
in Strength Design
This is a very important setting related to the effect of axial force resultants (not
necessarily axial loads) in a cross section. If you select this option, RAM Concept
includes the interaction of the axial force with the bending in the cross section strain
calculations, similar to typical column design using strain compatibility. We generally
recommend the consideration of axial forces in strength design. For sections with net
axial compression this will tend to reduce the reinforcement demand while for sections
with net axial tension it will typically increase the reinforcement demand.
Consider as Post- Enables RAM Concept to decide which code rules are used.
Tensioned
This determines if the design strip segment is checked for initial service design code
rules (for the Initial Service LC) and whether RC or PT code rules are used (some codes
do not make this distinction).
Note: If consider as post-tensioned is not used then Concept ignores tendons in

strength calculations.
Precompression Calc Determines how precompression is calculated and used to plot Section Analysis results
on the User Minimum Layer. See also Creating a new precompression plan (on page
371).
The choices are:
• None: No precompression calculation is performed. This is the default setting.
• Balance Loading: Precompression is calculated using the resultant axial force in
the cross section divided by its area. This calculation includes the loss of
precompression due to support restraints.
• FseAps/Ac: Precompression is calculated using the effective tendon force
multiplied by the perpendicular vector component of the tendon area intersecting
the section divided by the cross section area. This calculation does not include the
loss of precompression due to support restraint.
Don’t reduce The intent of this option is to allow for safe, conservative designs where cross sections
integrated M and V include regions of moment (or shear) with opposite signs that cause the moment (or
due to sign change shear) recorded for the cross section to be less than that for a shorter sub- cross
section.
When this option is selected, the design forces are always more conservative than
when the option is not selected. This option should not be used without due
consideration.
See Using the Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change option (on page
802) for explanation.
Number of Stories This input will only be visible when the Eurocode 2-2004 (UK Annex) is the active
for Accident Design Design Code. It is used to determine the number of stories that are used for accident
rule set calculations for this span.

(Eurocode 2 UK NA
only)
25.5.2 Strip Generation tab
Figure 58: Span segment properties - Strip Generation
Span Width Calc This determines how RAM Concept calculates the span width.
The choices are:
• Automatic: this applies (sometimes fallible) logic to calculate the span width as the
closest of:

• the Span Boundaries (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment)
• the slab edges
• half-way to the nearby spans or walls
• Manual: this overrides the automatic calculation and determines span widths by the
closest Span Boundary items (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment).
See “Drawing span segments manually” for further information.
Note: When the Manual setting is used in a strip segment, all of the span boundaries for
that strip segment must be defined. A strip segment generates a span width of zero when
some of its length does not have any span boundaries defined.
Column Strip This determines how the column strip width is determined. The term “column strip
Width Calc width” is used for more than flat slabs with column and middle strips. The choices are:
• Full Width: this is typical for PT slabs designed to ACI318 and TR43. The column strip
width is the same as the span width.
• Code Slab: this is typical for two-way RC slabs, and two-way PT slabs designed to
AS3600. The column strip width is the narrower of:
• the span width
• the Strip Boundaries (in the same latitude/longitude set as the Span Segment)
• a fraction of the distance to the adjacent spans or supports (for all current codes
this fraction is 0.25)
• a fraction of the span length on each side of the span line (for all current codes this
fraction is 0.25)
• Code T-beam: the column strip width is the narrower of:
• the span width
• the web width plus 8 times the flange thickness on either side (ACI codes only)
• 25% of the span length (ACI codes only)
• the web width plus 0.07 times the span length on either side (AS 3600 and BS 8110
only)
• the web width plus 0.058 times the span length plus 3 times the flange thickness on
either side (IS 456 only)
• the web with plus 0.07 times the span length plus 0.2 times the overhanging flange
width on either side, not to exceed 0.14 times the span length (EC2 only)
• The web width plus 12 times the flange thickness on either side (CSA A23.3 codes
only)
• The web width plus 0.1 times the span length on either side (CSA A23.3 codes only)
• % of Total Width: the column strip is the input column strip width % of the total strip
width
• Manual: the column strip width is the narrower of:
• the span width

Design Column This option instructs RAM Concept to combine the column and middle strip forces into a
Strip for Column + single resultant at the centroid of the column strip cross section. The middle strip cross
Middle Strip sections will still be generated, but the resulting forces in them will be zero.
Resultants
This can be useful, for example, when designing a beam with a column strip sized for the
effective flange width and middle strips for the slab between the beam effective flanges.
Using this option in this scenario will result in the beam cross section being designed for
all forces in the entire bay. The middle strip cross sections will not have any design forces,
but can still be designed for minimum reinforcement.
Skew Angle The angle between the design strip cross section and a line perpendicular to the span
segment. The typical value is zero.
Min Number of Determines how many design cross sections per span.
Divisions
For N divisions there are N+1 design cross sections. It is generally advisable to make N an
even number. The upside of more divisions is greater design accuracy; RAM Concept’s
ability to find critical design locations and length of reinforcement is a function of the
number of divisions. The downside of more divisions is that calculating takes longer; for
large models, you might consider using a small number of divisions (say, 4) and then
increasing the number for final design (but you should consider the effect of the next
property).
There is no reason for all design strips to have the same number of divisions. Should you
be designing a transfer beam within a flat plate it would probably make sense to have
more divisions for the beam design strip.
Max Division Overrides the Min Number of Divisions with an upper bound on division spacing.
Spacing
Detect Supports This detects:
and Edges
• the presence of supports at ends of span segments and overrides “Consider End as
Automatically
Support” and “Support Width”.
(resets supports
and widths • where the span spine is near the slab edge and “pulls back” the closest cross section by
below) “x”, where x is the bar end cover plus 1 inch / 25 mm.
• This is done by setting the support width to x.
• If the spine end near the slab edge has detected a support, then the slab edge
detection is NOT performed (and the regular support width calcs are used).
Critical Section Places the first and last cross section in the design strip at a distance equal to the specified
Support Ratio ratio times the distance from the support centerline to the support face. The default value
is 1 for all design codes expect AS 3600 design codes, which uses a default value of 0.7
(refer to AS 3600-2018 6.2.3). A value of 1 places the first and last cross section in the
design strip at the face of the support.
Consider End 1 as These checkboxes allow RAM Concept to determine your interpretation of “spans” in the
Support structure. This determination of spans affects how RAM Concept applies code rules that
are span-related, including determining support regions, span regions and areas used in
live load reduction.
Support Width at The dimension of the support parallel to the design strip. The support width determines
End 1 where the first and last design strip cross sections are located. Their locations are at half
the support width (measured in the direction of the span) from the ends of the design

strip. This is to facilitate reduction of moments to face of supports (it is thus important to
start and end design strips at the center of supports). It is conservative to enter the
support width as zero.
25.5.3 Column Strip tab
Figure 59: Span segment properties - Column Strip
Cross Section Reduces design strip cross sections based on geometry. See About cross section
Trimming trimming (on page 233) for more information.
Inter Cross Section Reduces design strip cross sections based on slope limits. See Inter Cross Section
Slope Limit Slope Limit Trimming (on page 240) for more information.
CS Top Bar The label used to identify the top face reinforcing bar used for flexural design.
CS Bottom Bar The label used to identify the bottom face reinforcing bar used for flexural design.
CS Shear Bar The label used to identify the reinforcing bar used for one-way shear design.

The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement bar labels (and their
properties) are specified in the Criteria > Materials. It is possible for different
design strips to have different bars.
After completing the calculation process, RAM Concept reports design strip
reinforcement requirements based upon the bars specified in the design strip
properties. You can view the required reinforcement area in plots and tables.
CS Top Cover Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars.
CS Bottom Cover Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal bars.
CS Legs in Shear Determines the area of vertical shear reinforcement by multiplying the number of
Reinforcement legs by the Shear Bar area.
CS Shear Effective (ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05, ACI 318-08, ACI 318-11, and Eurocode2 only) The
Depth Calc approach for determining the effective depth in shear calculations. The choices are:
• All tension reinforcement: Uses all tension reinforcement in the cross section to
calculate effective depth.
• Maximize effective depth: Performs two calculations and utilizes the maximum
result, one using all tension reinforcement in the cross section and the other
utilizing only the reinforcement in the 1/4 depth of the cross section nearest the
tension most face and ignoring post-tensioning.
See the ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05, ACI 318-08, ACI 318-11, and Eurocode 2 code
implementation chapters for additional information.
CS Min Shear (AS 3600-2018 only). Controls design of minimum fitments. The choices are:
Reinforcement
Requirement Code: Designs minimum fitments for shear and/or torsion as required by code
Shear: Designs open fitments per AS 3600-2018 8.2.1.7 even if not required
otherwise
Shear and Torsion: Designs closed fitments per AS 3600-2018 8.2.5.5 even if not
required otherwise
CS Torsion Design The method used for torsion design.

See Torsion Considerations (on page 816) for further explanation.
CS Design System The design system (beam / one-way slab / two-way slab) for the design strip.
Minimum reinforcement and other rules are dependent upon what type of system is
in use in the span. For example, the minimum requirements for beam stirrups are
different to those for a one-way slab.
CS Service Design Type (Eurocode 2 only) The service design type for members defined as PT for the design
strip.
The choices are:
Stress: Perform a hypothetical stress limit design as prescribed in TR43.

Crack Width: Perform a crack width design in accordance with Eurocode 2
clause 7.2/7.3.
Stress & Crack Width: Perform both Stress and Crack Width design.

CS Crack Control (AS 3600-2018 only). Method used for crack control checks. The choices are:
Design Type
Without Direct Calculation (Tables): Reinforcement stress is limited to the
values in Tables 8.6.2.2(A) and (B) or Table 8.6.3 for beams or Tables 9.5.2.1(A)
and (B) or Table 9.5.2.3 for slabs.
Crack Width Calculation: Crack widths are calculated directly using the
equations in 8.6.2.3
CS Crack Width Limit (Eurocode 2 only) The crack width limit wmax to use when designing for Eurocode 2
clause 7.3. When “Code” is selected the values in UK National Annex Table NA.4 are
used.
(Eurocode 2 and AS 3600-2018 only). For Eurocode 2, the crack width limit wmax to
use when designing for Eurocode 2 clause 7.3. When Code is selected, the values in
UK National Annex Table NA.4 are used. For AS 3600-2018, the crack width limit
w'max to use when designing for AS 3600-2018 clause 8.6 or 9.5. When Code
(Environment) is selected, the crack width limit is determined from the selected
Environment option. See AS 3600-2018 Code Implementation chapter for details.
CS Span Detailer The detailing system used. See Span detailing (on page 831) .
The choices are:
• None
• Code
• User-defined
CS Min. Reinforcement Determines the face for minimum reinforcement.

Location
The choices are:
• Elevated Slab: Some minimum tensile reinforcement code rules do not consider
flexural stress conditions; they determine minimum reinforcement based solely
on geometry and the “expected” tensile face. For example, ACI 318-99 Rule
18.9.3.3 stipulates that the minimum reinforcement at a column in an elevated
slab should be in the top face. This setting ensures RAM Concept uses that face.
• Mat Foundation: Similar to above, you would expect the minimum
reinforcement at a column in a mat to be in the bottom face.
• Tension Face: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the tensile
face, or the face with the least amount of compression.
• Top: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the top face, regardless
of the concrete stresses.
• Bottom: This setting details the minimum reinforcement on the bottom face,
regardless of the concrete stresses.
• None: No minimum reinforcement is detailed.
CS Min. Top The user-defined reinforcement ratio for the top face. RAM Concept multiplies the
Reinforcement Ratio trimmed cross sectional area by this ratio.
CS Min. Bottom The user-defined reinforcement ratio for the bottom face.
Reinforcement Ratio
CS Min. The user-defined minimum precompression limit.
Precompression

CS Max. The user-defined maximum precompression limit.

Precompression
25.5.4 Middle Strip tab
Figure 60: Span segment properties - Middle Strip
Note: Middle strips have one additional property to column strips. The rest of the properties are the same, but
can have different values to those of the column strips.
Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties Sets the middle strip properties to those of the column strip.

Creating span segments
25.5.5 Live Load Reduction tab
Figure 61: Span segment properties - Live Load Reduction
Max live Load Reduction See Live Load Reduction Notes (on page 818) for information on RAM Concept’s
implementation of live load reduction.
User specified LLR See Live Load Reduction Notes (on page 818) for information on RAM Concept’s
parameters implementation of live load reduction.
25.6 Creating span segments

You can create span segments in two ways: automatic and manual. For most models you use the automatic
feature to generate span segments once in each orthogonal direction, and then make manual adjustments.

Creating span segments
25.6.1 Generating span segments automatically

Unless you have a truly one-way concrete floor, it would be usual to first generate one set of span segments (and
hence design strips) on the Latitude Design Spans Plan, and then an orthogonal set on the Longitude Design
Spans Plan.
1.
Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process > Generate Spans.
The Generate Spans dialog box appears.
2. Set Spans to Generate to latitude.

3. Select other options and click OK.
The span segments appear (with nominated orientation) on the Latitude Design Spans Plan.
You should repeat this process for the longitude direction.
25.6.2 Drawing span segments manually

You sometimes need to manually draw or adjust span segments for floors that are not rectilinear or have
complications.
To draw a single span segment

1. Choose the Span Segment tool ( ).

Creating span segment strips (design strips)
2. Click at the span segment start point.

3. Click at the span segment end point.
The two clicks define the span segment spine.
To draw multiple span segments

1. Choose the Span Segment Polyline tool ( ).
2. Click at the first span segment start point.
3. Click at the first span segment end point.
4. Click at the second span segment end point.
5. Continue to click segment end points until all related segments are drawn.
6. Right click and select enter to close the operation.
Note: Start and end points are normally supports. There are, however, exceptions, such as a design strip used for
a pour strip to discriminate between PT and RC areas, or used for a span with user-defined reinforcement in
discrete locations.
25.7 Creating span segment strips (design strips)

You generate span segment strips from span segments. This can be done for all strips (on both latitude and
longitude plans) or just selected strips.
25.7.1 To generate span segment strips

1. Select either:
the Generate Strips tool ( )
or
Process > Generate Strips
Note: The Generate Strips command does not generate strips for any span segment with the Lock Generated
Strips checked. This is useful when you are satisfied with some, but not all, of the design strips.
Note: Each span segment can generate up to 3 strips: a center (“column”) strip, a left (“middle”) strip and a right
(“middle”) strip. Together, these three strips form the entire span strip.
25.7.2 To generate some span segment strips

1. Select one or more span segments
2. Choose the Generate Selected Strips tool ( ).

Defining span segment widths and strip widths manually
RAM Concept recalculates the span segment strips for the selected span segments.
25.8 Defining span segment widths and strip widths manually

RAM Concept often generates span segment widths and strips that require modification. This tendency becomes
apparent once you have tried the span segment generation a few times. You should always examine the strip
widths to determine that they are to your satisfaction.
25.8.1 Defining span segment boundaries manually

You can manually define the span segment width when the automatic span width calculation has not provided a
satisfactory result.
To set the span segment width
1. Choose the Span Boundary Polyline tool.

2. Click at the span boundary start point.
3. Click at the next span boundary point.
4. Continue to click span boundary points until all are defined.
5. Right click and select enter to close the operation.
Note: Boundaries with a span set of latitude (longitude) only affect latitude (longitude) span segment strips.
Figure 62: Slab with span segments.

Figure 63: Strips generated from the span segments in previous figure. One span has some illogical design strips
because the calculated span width is excessive.
Figure 64: Regenerated design strips after modification of span width with span boundaries (shown inside ellipses).
Figure 65: The same span segment strips with the cross sections oriented to ninety degrees. This did not require
manual span boundaries.
25.8.2 Defining strip boundaries manually

You can manually define the “column” strip boundaries when the Column Strip Width Calc has not provided a
satisfactory result.
To set the strip boundary

1. Choose the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( )

2. Click at the strip boundary start point.
3. Click at the next strip boundary point.
4. Continue to click strip boundary points until all are defined.
Unequal spans are a source of varying column strip widths. You can choose to accept the column strip widths
that RAM Concept calculates, or make some modifications.
BS8110 Clause 3.7.2.9

BS8110 Clause 3.7.2.9 states the following:
“Columns strips between unlike panels: Where there is a support common to two panels of such dimensions
that the strips in one panel do not match those in the other, the division of the panels over the region of the
common support should be taken as that calculated for the panel giving the wider column strip.”
The column strips in the following example are modified with logic derived from this clause.
The following three figures show the use of strip boundaries to control the column strip width
Figure 66: Slab with span segments.
Figure 67: Strips generated from the span segments in the previous figure.

Figure 68: Strip boundaries have made transitioning column strip widths
Note: The short span segments in the preceding figure have Column Strip Width Calc set to Manual
The following four figures show the use of strip boundaries to control the column strip width.
Figure 69: Slab with span segments

Figure 70: Strips generated from the span segments in previous figure. One span (with gray shading) has illogical
span width and column strip width.
Figure 71: Span boundaries have made a logical span width, but the column strip width is still a problem.

Figure 72: Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
Short spans and cantilevers present problems for the design because RAM Concept will generate narrow column
strips.
Codes recommend that columns strips are no more than half the span in width. RAM Concept makes the
(commonly used) assumption that the equivalent length of a cantilever is 2L. The cantilever column strip width
is thus L. This can be quite narrow for short cantilevers.
Figure 73: Slab with span segments

Cross Section Trimming
Figure 74: Strips generated from the span segments in previous figure.
Figure 75: Strip boundaries have made a logical column strip width.
25.9 Cross Section Trimming

RAM Concept automatically trims cross sections in span segment strips according to the trimming settings in the
associated span segments.
25.9.1 About cross section trimming

True cross section shapes in a slab can be quite irregular due to slab steps and other forming or architectural
considerations. While it is generally advised to model the geometry of the concrete as per the form in the
constructed building, it is not advised to always use the true geometry in design. It is often better to modify cross
sections considering both their own shape and that of the nearby concrete.

RAM Concept offers two types of cross section trimming: Single Cross Section Trimming and Inter Cross Section
Slope Limits.
Single Cross Section Trimming considers one cross-section at a time and modifies the cross-section based on the
user-specified trimming type.
Inter Cross Section Slope Limits trims the top and/or bottom of cross-sections based on the adjacent cross-
sections, their elevations, and the distance between the cross-sections.
Inter Cross Section Slope Limit trimming always occurs after Single Cross Section Trimming.
25.9.2 About shear core

It is important to understand “shear core” before using cross section trimming.
RAM Concept defines the shear core as the parts of the trimmed cross section that include any vertical slices
that extend from the top of the cross section to the bottom of the cross section, as shown in the following figure.
RAM Concept bases one-way shear calculations on the entire shear force and shear core. For example, in a T-
beam the shear calculations are based on the cross-sectional area of the stem and the flange immediately above
the stem.
Cross-sections can have multiple separate cores. For example, in a double-T-beam, the core is the two stems and
the flange areas above the two stems. RAM Concept typically considers this core to be the same as a single core
with the same (total) width.
Note: The shear core is modified for post-tensioning ducts as described in “Concrete “Core” Determination”.

Figure 76: Shear core (shaded) for various cross sections

Some odd shaped cross-sections do not have a shear core. In such cases, RAM Concept cannot calculate some
capacity values (such as shear capacity).
Figure 77: One cross section with a narrow shear core and one with zero shear core.
25.9.3 Shear core in slabs

It is common for RAM Concept to report unexpected shear reinforcement in slabs with section changes when the
trimming is not set appropriately.
It is quite possible for a slab cross section with a small shear core to show large amounts of shear reinforcement
or even design failure, even when the shear force is small. See Section 22.9.5 for trimming settings for
rectification.
Figure 78: Slab depression showing shear core (right). Such narrow shear core “slivers” often result in shear
reinforcement and design failure.
25.9.4 Viewing a perspective of design strip cross sections
Viewing a perspective of the design strip cross sections is a useful way of checking the validity of the design strip
cross section trimming settings.
1. Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Cross Sections Perspective

Figure 79: Design strip cross section perspective. Parts of the cross section not in the shear core are a different
color.
25.9.5 Single Cross Section Trimming

RAM Concept offers six different types of single cross section trimming:
Max Rectangle The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed, and other pieces may be removed to
produce a cross section with a uniform top and bottom elevation, and a maximum area. The “rectangle” formed
may actually be multiple separated rectangles with the same top and bottom elevations.

Figure 80: Untrimmed slab showing cross-section (left) and shear core (right).
Figure 81: “Beam rectangle” trimming (left) and “Slab Rectangle trimming” (right) showing revised cross-sections.
The shear core is now the same as the cross section.
Beam Rectangle Vertical slices of the cross section are removed until the remaining portion is the maximum
height rectangle possible. This rectangle can be multiple separated rectangles with the same top and bottom
elevations.
Slab Rectangle The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed to produce a cross section with a uniform
top and bottom elevation, and a maximum width. If multiple maximum-width rectangles are possible, the
deepest on (maximum area) is used. The “rectangle” formed may actually be multiple separated rectangles with
the same top and bottom elevations.
T or L The top and bottom of the cross section is trimmed, and other pieces may be removed to produce a cross
section with a uniform top elevation, and only two bottom elevations (flange bottom and web bottom). The Tees
and Els formed can be joined (such as double-tees) or separated. Rectangles are considered the same as
flangeless Tees.
Figure 82: Untrimmed beam showing cross-section (left) and shear core (right).

Figure 83: “T or L” trimming showing revised section (left) and shear core (right).
Inverted T or L Same as T or L, but with the flange on the bottom.

Max Shear Core The top and/or bottom of the cross section is trimmed to produce a cross section with the
maximum shear core area.
Figure 84: Untrimmed beam showing cross- section (left) and shear core (right).

Figure 85: “Max Shear Core” trimming showing revised section (left) and shear core (right).
None - No (single) cross section trimming is performed.
25.9.6 Selecting cross section trimming

You must determine which cross section trimming is most appropriate, but the following is provided for
guidance:
Typical slabs with drop caps (but not The best trimming is usually Max Rectangle.
drop panels):
Slabs with drop panels (but not drop The best trimming is usually T or L.
caps):
Slabs with drop panels and drop The best trimming is usually T or L, but this assumes that the drop
caps: cap cross-sectional area is smaller than the drop panel cross sectional
area.
Down-turned beams: The best trimming is usually T or L.
Up-turned beams: The best trimming is usually Inverted T or L.
After a Calc-All, you can view the actual cross-section perspectives. See “Viewing a perspective of design strip
cross sections”.
Related Links
• Selecting cross section trimming (on page 240)
25.9.7 Inter Cross Section Slope Limit Trimming

Once cross sections have been individually trimmed, they are trimmed relative to each other. This Inter Cross
Section Slope Limit trimming effectively trims the top and bottom elevations of adjacent cross section to limit the
slopes between them.
This is done because compression and tension forces cannot “flow” at sharp angles from one cross-section to the
next.

Figure 86: Elevation of thickened slab. It would be unrealistic to use a design depth of t2 at cross-section A-A.
Figure 87: Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope limit of 0.25.
A slope limit of 0.0 will not allow any change between adjacent cross sections’ top elevations and bottom
elevations. This effectively trims all the cross sections in a span segment strip to have the same top and bottom
elevation.
In general, we do not recommend using a slope limit over 0.25.
Figure 88: Elevation of stepped slab. It would be unrealistic to use the full depth for all cross-section design

Improving the mesh
Figure 89: Elevation of effective design slab thickness using a slope limit of 0.25.
25.10 Improving the mesh

The presence of design strips can significantly improve the regularity of the finite element mesh. We recommend
that once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate the mesh. See Chapter 18, “Generating the Mesh”
for more information.
25.11 Additional design strip information

RAM Concept automates a large percentage of the design strip process. It is relatively straightforward to
rationalize the layout of design strips when the support arrangement is rectilinear.
The more complicated the geometry the more you have to think about the design strip layout and make manual
changes.
If there is a lot of repetitive geometry in a floor then it should not be necessary to use design strips everywhere.
You should only use as many as required to adequately design the floor. For example, if a floor has many beams
of the same loading, tributary area, span and size then there is no need to use design strips for each similar
beam. This is just as you would not perform hand calculations for each of twenty identical beams. Not
withstanding, although slabs or beams may appear identical, continuity effects and other considerations may
have a significant influence and the results could be different.
It is better to define design strips properly in some critical areas than to cover the floor with unsuitable strips.
When in doubt, draw a design strip, but keep in mind that the number of design strips affects the calculation
time. Some engineering judgement is always a good thing.
Keep in mind that any area without strips will not have the finite elements improved when you regenerate the
mesh.
In general, design strips for one span set (latitude or longitude) should not overlap.
For beam and slab systems, you might consider placing design strips parallel and in between the beams. This is
because the beam strips only collect the moments and shears over the width of the strip. If the beams are not
significantly stiffer than the slab, there may be design reinforcement required for the slab.
The following sections discuss some situations with irregular geometry.

Irregular column layouts
Note: See “Miscellaneous tips” for some more tips and hints.
25.12 Irregular column layouts

Laying out design strips for irregular column layouts requires consideration of a number of issues.
These include:
1. Skew angles: whether latitude and longitude design strips should be strictly orthogonal.
2. If tendons components from two directions are affecting the design strip.
The following sections discuss these issues.
25.12.1 Design Strip Skew Angles

It is intuitive that there would be a limit on the skew angle of design strips. One reference guideline is the
Eurocode (EC2: 4.3.1.1 P(8)): “For slabs, deviations between the direction of the principal stress and the main
reinforcement of less than 15 degrees may be ignored”.
This suggests that flat slabs / flat plates should be designed for two directions that are between 75 and 105
degrees apart, which means the skew angle should not exceed fifteen degrees.
The span segment property Skew Angle enables you to manipulate span segments such that design strip cross
sections are normalized in each direction.

Figure 90: Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew angle is zero so the cross sections (shown in
Figure ) are perpendicular to the span segment.

Figure 91: Design strip cross-section

Figure 92: Span segment 2-2 has an angle of 15 degrees. The skew angle is minus fifteen degrees so the cross
sections (shown in the following figure) are parallel to those of adjacent spans

Figure 93: Revised design strip cross sections.
25.12.2 Effect of tendon components on design strip cross sections

In many instances the “latitude” and “longitude” tendons may be detailed and constructed in a non-orthogonal
manner. This is often ignored in hand or strip calculations but it is a real issue that can affect design criteria such
as service, strength and ductility.
RAM Concept considers the force components of all tendons that cross a design strip cross section (or a design
section). The following figures show an example.

Figure 94: A skewed design strip with three design cross sections. The latitude tendons are not orthogonal to the
longitude tendons.

Figure 95: Perspective shows the central cross section is perpendicular to the latitude tendons which are at the low
point. Due to the layout the strip collects a component of the longitude tendon which is at its high point. This
configuration may cause design issues.
25.12.3 Examples of irregular grids

The following examples show design strip layouts for non-rectilinear grids.
Column and middle strips

Figure 96: Irregular column layout

Figure 97: Spans generated by Concept.

Figure 98: Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatisfactory design strips.

Figure 99: Span 2-1, 3-2 and 4-1 deleted

Figure 100: Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering

Figure 101: Regenerated design strips based on revised spans.

Figure 102: Regenerated design strips after using the “Orient Span Cross Section” tool.
Full panel design strips for an irregular grid (ACI318 and TR43 post-tension design)

Figure 103: Irregular column layout

Figure 104: Spans generated by Concept.

Figure 105: Design strips generated by Concept. Span 3-2 has unsatisfactory design strips.

Figure 106: Span 2-1, 3-2 and 4-1 deleted

Figure 107: Manually drawn spans (2-1, 3-1, 4-1 and 5-1) after renumbering

Figure 108: Regenerated design strips based on revised spans.

Figure 109: Regenerated design strips after using the “Orient Span Cross Section” tool.
25.12.4 Drawing design strips near walls

There are some considerations for drawing design strips near walls.
Omission of design strips parallel to walls
Since a wall is a continuous support, there is usually no need to design a floor over, and parallel to, a wall for
strength.
You may, however, be interested in the minimum reinforcement requirements and so a design strip could be
warranted.
Strips over or under walls will occasionally have unrealistic stress peaks as the forces and moments are
continually transferred back and forth between the wall elements and the slab elements. For this reason, some
designers eliminate span segments over and under walls.

Miscellaneous tips
Figure 110: Column and middle strips with strip omitted over wall.
25.12.5 Changing from PT to RC design

It is quite common for a floor to have a mixture of PT and RC areas. For example, a pour strip (an area with no
post-tensioning that joins two post-tensioned slabs).
For most codes, PT design rules are different from those for RC. As such, you should use multiple design strip
segments in one span.
The following figure shows two examples of a slab with tendons stopping either side of a pour strip (in gray).
On the left, span segment 2-1 has been generated and extends from support to support. This means that the
entire segment is designed according to the “Consider as Post-Tensioned” option. If the option is checked, then
the pour strip design is wrong.
On the right, span segments 1-1, 1-2(2) and 1-1 (3) have been drawn manually. The “Consider End x as Support”
options have been unchecked, and support widths set to zero, where end “x” is at the pour strip.
The “Consider as Post-Tensioned” option is checked for 1-1 and 1-1(3), but not 1-1(2). The pour strip is thus
designed as reinforced, not post-tensioned, concrete. RAM Concept designs the PT span segments for service
stress rules and checks initial stresses, but not the RC areas.
Figure 111: Multiple span segments used to model an RC pour strip.
Note: You could define the pour strip to have orthotropic behavior such that it is very flexible in the Y direction.
This is done in the Mesh Input Layer. See “Slab area properties” of Chapter 17, “Defining the Structure”.
25.13 Miscellaneous tips

Middle strip support widths

A final word on design strips
Middle strip support widths are the same as those of the associated column strip. Should you require to use
middle strips with a different support width (say, zero), you need to manually draw span segments for the
column and middle strips and use the span boundary tool.
Span segments that have no width
A span segment has zero width if the Span Width Calc is set to “manual” and some of its length does not have any
span boundaries defined.
Design strips (span segment strips) with no cross sections
You can specify a design strips’ minimum number of divisions as zero. Combined with a large maximum spacing,
the number of cross sections could then be zero.
This could be useful in affecting other span segments’ strip generation, without slowing down the calculations.
(The overall number of cross sections has a significant effect on calculation time).
For an example of this application, see steps 13 to 15 in Chapter 48, “Mat Foundation Tutorial”.
25.14 A final word on design strips

Design strips are extremely powerful tools, but that is all they are: tools. It is important that you understand the
calculations that these tools perform, so you can determine the appropriateness of the calculation for the
situation under consideration, and so you can set the tools’ parameters correctly.

Defining Design Sections
26
A design section is the equivalent of one design strip cross section. You draw design sections manually to
supplement design strips.
26.1 Using design sections

There are situations where you may choose to use design sections rather than design strips. This would include:
• In some areas, you may only require design information at one cross section rather than for an entire span.
• A design strip may not provide sufficient design information.
• A design strip may be inappropriate. For example, a slab step may not be orthogonal to the span (and design
strip) and you want the reinforcement bars designed perpendicular to the step. In this case, you might draw a
design section parallel to the step.
• You find it is too difficult to define a design strip for an area with very complicated structural geometry.
26.2 Design section properties

Design sections have similar properties to design strips. See Span segment properties (on page 214) for
definitions and explanations.
The following properties are unique to design sections:

Design section properties
Figure 112: Design section properties - General
Top Ignore The top concrete ignored in flexural and one-way shear design. See About ignore depths
Depth (on page 270) for more information on this important issue.
Bottom Ignore The bottom concrete ignored in flexural and one-way shear design. See About ignore
Depth depths (on page 270) for more information on this important issue.

Design section properties
Figure 113: Design section properties - Design Parameters
Span Length Used to calculate the following:

• Minimum reinforcement rules for some codes.
• The upper bound on f ps for unbonded tendons based upon the selected code’s criteria
(these criteria often include a span length parameter).
Tributary This creates a zone over which the reinforcement required by the design section must be
Length provided (development lengths, if required, are in addition to this zone).
The zone length on the right side of the design section is the smaller of these two values:
• TributaryLength/2.0
• (SpanRatio - 0.0) * SpanLength
The zone length on the left side of the design section is the smaller of these two values:
• TributaryLength/2.0
• (1.0 - SpanRatio) * SpanLength
The intent of the span-ratio-based limit is to restrain the reinforcement zone to within the
span, even if the design section is at the beginning or end of a span.

Drawing design sections
Note: The Visible Objects dialog can be used to show the reinforced zone to be outlined and
hatched. The region displayed also considers all the span ratio implications. The hatched
region does not display before a calc-all.
Span Ratio Determines the location of the design section relative to supports and midspan.
Strip Type (Eurocode 2 only) Determines the type of strip defined by this design section.
The choices are:
• Col. Strip (Full Width): Use design rules for full bay width cross sections (generally
used without middle strips).
• Col. Strip (w/ Mid. Strips): Use design rules for partial bay width column strips
(generally used in conjunction with middle strips).
• Middle Strip: Use design rules for partial bay width middle strips (generally used in
conjunction with column strips).
CS Service (Eurocode 2 only)The service design type for members defined as PT for the design strip.
Design Type
The choices are:
• Stress: Perform a hypothetical stress limit design as prescribed in TR43.
• Crack Width: Perform a crack width design in accordance with Eurocode 2 clause
7.2/7.3.
• Stress & Crack Width: Perform both Stress and Crack Width design.
See EN 1992-1-1: 2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design (on page 1121) for additional
information.
CS Crack Width The crack width limit wmax to use when designing for Eurocode 2 clause 7.3. When “Code” is
Limit (Eurocode selected the values in UK National Annex Table NA.4 are used.
2 only)
Number of This input will only be visible when the Eurocode 2-2004 (UK Annex) is the active Design
Stories for Code. It is used to determine the number of stories that are used for accident rule set
Accident Design calculations for this span.
(Eurocode 2 UK
NA only)
26.3 Drawing design sections

When using design sections it is advisable to draw one set on the Latitude Design Spans Plan, and the other on
the Longitude Design Spans Plan.
Design sections are located by a line that has a start point and an end point.
1. Choose the Design Section tool ( ).

2. Click at the design section start point.
3. Click at the design section end point.

About ignore depths
Note: You can use relative coordinates to define exact lengths. Alternatively, you can draw User Lines to provide
snap points to define exact lengths.
26.4 About ignore depths

Design sections use the full concrete section available unless overridden by “Top Ignore Depth” or “Bottom
Ignore Depth”.
In many instances, it is inappropriate to use the full concrete cross-section properties of a design section for
flexural and one-way shear design since some concrete is not effective.
Note: Design section “ignore depth” settings are the equivalent of design strip “cross section trimming” settings.
See “Cross Section Trimming” in Chapter 22, “Defining Design Strips” for more information.
26.4.1 When to use ignore depths

It is sometimes obvious when to use ignore depth. Often, however, engineering judgement is required to
determine the use of ignore depth.
You should decide if the concrete is effective based on code rules and a practical assessment of the situation.
There are too many permutations of concrete form to lay down rules, and, as such, the following is for discussion
purposes only.
26.4.2 Examples of concrete form that should use ignore depth

The following are examples of when design sections should ignore part of the concrete cross-section.
Example 1
A two-way slab thickening that the building code deems does not comply as a drop panel. That is, a
drop cap. You should ignore the incremental thickness of the drop cap below the slab. RAM Concept
then only uses the drop cap for punching checks.

About ignore depths
Figure 114: Two-way slab with drop cap that should be ignored for flexure.
Example 2
A beam or slab that supports an upstand that is not an effective part of the concrete section. You
should enter an appropriate Top Ignore Depth value.
Figure 115: Beam with upstand to be ignored.
Example 3
A beam or slab that deepens abruptly and the full depth of the concrete cannot be mobilized for
flexure. You should enter an appropriate Bottom Ignore Depth value.
The following figure shows bending moments in a slab perpendicular to a beam. For such an
arrangement you need to decide if the slab should be designed for the bending moment at the face of
the beam, or within the beam.

About ignore depths
Figure 116: Slab bending moments
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment at the face of beam, then it is a matter of locating
a design section within the slab depth.
If the slab is to be designed for the bending moment within the beam then you should consider the
actual depth that can be mobilized for bending.
Figure 117: Slab supported by a beam that is effective for slab bending.

A final word on design sections
Figure 118: Slab supported by a deep beam that is not fully effective for slab bending. Ignore depth
should be used for the design sections to utilize a shallower section.
26.4.3 Effect of ignore depth on reinforcement location

RAM Concept locates reinforcement based upon the covers and ignore depth settings. You should consider this
to ensure that reinforcement bars are designed at the appropriate depth.
26.5 A final word on design sections

Design sections are powerful tools, but that is all they are: tools. It is important that you understand the
calculations that these tools perform, so you can determine the appropriateness of the calculation for the
situation under consideration, and so you can set the tools’ parameters correctly.

Defining Punching Shear Checks
27
Punching shear is often a critical consideration when designing slabs, In particular, post-tensioned slabs are
usually thinner than their reinforced counterparts and hence punching considerations are even more important.
27.1 About punching shear checks

RAM Concept can calculate punching failure planes and the punching shear stresses due to column reactions (Fz,
Mx, My).
RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of potentially critical sections. For unusual geometries, RAM
Concept may not check the appropriate section and / or may check inappropriate sections that give higher than
appropriate stress ratios. You should review RAM Concept’s selections of potentially critical sections and use
engineering judgment to decide if RAM Concept’s selections and the application of the ACI 318 model are
appropriate.
27.2 Punching shear check properties and options

The following explains the general and code specific Punching Shear Check properties and options.
27.2.1 General
Maximum The radius that defines the area RAM Concept searches for potential failure locations. The
Search Radius analysis is conservative when you set a very large radius, but this has two detrimental
effects: RAM Concept will need to review a larger area of slab and hence take longer to check
that punching location. More importantly, RAM Concept will consider slab openings that are
far from the column in determining the potentially critical section that may result in a
smaller critical section than is appropriate.
Cover to CGS The distance that will be subtracted from the slab depth in each region to determine the
“effective depth” for critical section calculations.
For columns under, this is usually the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the
top bar. RAM Concept subtracts this distance from the slab thickness to determine the “d”
distance.

Punching shear check properties and options
If the depth in any region is smaller than the specified Cover to CGS, the region is treated as
a hole.
Angle This is the angle of the first ray measured counter-clockwise from the global x-axis.
Number of A zone can be envisioned as a region outside a column, drop cap, beam, etc. A column
Desired connection in a simple plate will have only one zone. A column connection with a drop cap
Sections per will have multiple zones. This property enables RAM Concept to determine how many
Zone sections you want to generate in each of these “zones”.
This property can be used to eliminate unwanted sections, but caution should be used when
reducing the desired number of sections. The sections generated are based upon the
minimum critical section cross-sectional area, and they are not actually analyzed until after
they are generated. By setting this value to 1 you would be likely to get only the most critical
section in each zone but this is not guaranteed.
Edge Treatment This determines how RAM Concept treats edges and openings.
• An edge treatment of Sector Voids is always conservative. For columns near a slab edge,
however, the Sector Voids setting stops the critical section before it reaches the slab edge
(at a ray from the column center to the slab edge that has a length equal to the search
radius).
• An edge treatment of Failure Planes probably produces better results for critical sections
at edge and corner locations. This setting, however, requires you to review the results
more carefully to ensure that RAM Concept has checked all the appropriate sections.
• An edge treatment of Ignore Edges is generally unconservative. You may want to try this
setting to see if RAM Concept finds a critical section that it missed with the other settings.
Connection This determines which column classification RAM Concept uses for calculating allowable
Type stresses.
• A Corner type uses corner column rules.
• An Edge type uses edge column rules.
• An Interior type uses interior column rules.
• An Auto type determines if the column is corner, edge, or interior type based upon the
number of calculated “sides” of a particular critical section.
See Column connection type (on page 1193) for more information.
Note: See specific code sections in Punching Shear Design Notes (on page 1188) for rules
regarding usage of post-tensioning allowable stress rules.
SSR System The stud shear reinforcement system used, if required, for design. These systems can be
edited on the Materials page. Predefined Ancon Shearfix systems are also available for
selection from this drop-down list.
Max Overhang The maximum distance, as a function of effective depth “d”, to allow the critical sections to
Factor extend from the originating shape (column or SSR group). The sections will be generated
without limitation, then trimmed to the specified distance.

Align with Aligns the punch check angle with the rectangular column angle during a “calc all”.
Rectangular
Columns
Design SSR if Generates an SSR design (if possible) where the unreinforced strength is insufficient.
Necessary
Align SSR w/ Aligns the SSR with the punch check axis. For example, it is intended to be used when the
Punch Check slab edge is not parallel to the column faces and it would be preferable to have the rails align
Axis with the slab geometry instead of the column face.
Note: This option is not available for AS3600 as the SSR are always aligned with the
punching check axis.

27.2.2 Ancon Shearfix Parameters

Top and Bottom Cover The cover is used in conjunction with the slab depth to determine the physical rail
depth.
Stud Size The Ancon Shearfix stud size (diameter) to use in the design. If “auto” is selected, RAM Concept will
design the smallest stud size possible for the maximum stud spacing and fixed rail layout.
Note: These parameters are only used when the “Use Ancon Shearfix SSR System” option is selected.
Use ACI 421.1R-99 Increased Max Vn Suggestion Allows the use of a higher maximum ΦVn for SSR design.
Use ACI-421.1R-99 Increased Vc Suggestion Allows the use of a higher vc value for use in strength
computations for SSR design.
Use ACI-421.1R-99 Increased Max Stud Spacing Suggestion Allows higher maximum stud spacings,
depending upon the stress levels in the critical sections.
Note: Although ACI 421.1R-99 is an ACI publication, it is not officially recognized by the ACI 318 standard. As
such, it should only be utilized under the discretion and judgment of an Engineer with a full understanding of the
provision and its recommendations.
27.2.3 AS3600 specific options

Closed Ties In R/S-Axis Torsion Strip Use these options if you are providing minimum closed ties in the
torsion strips in accordance with AS3600. RAM Concept does not actually design this reinforcement, but uses the
appropriate code provisions in calculating the punching capacity. You should ensure that this reinforcement is
provided if using these options.
27.2.4 BS 8110/EC2 specific options

Rail Layout Pattern Controls the layout of the primary rails around a column. The cruciform layout selection
will provide parallel rails along each column face and a diagonal rail in each corner. The
radial layout selection will provide rails that are radial from the punch check center.
Note that for columns with small dimensions it is possible for the layout selection to
produce identical layouts.
Apply This option provides a supplemental maximum stress limit on the basic control
supplemental max perimeters as suggested in the paper “Effectiveness of punching shear reinforcement to
stress limit EN 1992-1-1:2004” in The Structural Engineer 87 (10) May 2009.
Reinforcement For specification of ρ1 for equation 6.47. You should calculate the input value using the
Ratio equation in clause 6.4.4 of the EN 1992-1-1:2004 code. This value is only used if the
Auto Calc Reinforcement Ration option is not specified.

Drawing punching shear checks
Auto-Calc Automatically calculate the ρ value used in equation 6.47 using the user reinforcement
Reinforcement on the specified face. Program reinforcement is not used in this calculation. See the notes
Ratio on auto calculation of ρ1 (on page 1206).
Bar Location Specifies the user bar location (top or bottom) to use in the auto calculation of
reinforcement ratio.
Beta Factor This represents a ratio of the maximum stress on a critical section (including shear and
moment transfer) over the maximum stress due to shear only. This option allows the
user to select Auto Calc, 1.15 (interior), 1.4 (edge), 1.5 (corner), or input any positive
value for Beta directly.
The factors for each column condition are taken from clause 6.4.3 (6) of the EN
1992-1-1:2004 Code and are meant to be used only when lateral stability does not
depend upon frame action and where adjacent spans do not differ in length by more
than 25%.
Auto Calc uses the model and calculation methods described in Chapter 66, Punching
Shear Design Notes (on page 1188).
27.3 Drawing punching shear checks

You can draw punching shear checks for all columns simultaneously.
1. Choose Layers > Design Strips > Punching Checks Plan.

2.
Select the Punching Shear Check tool ( ).
3. Fence the columns.
A circle of the prescribed radius appears at each column within the fence.
27.4 A final word on punching shear checks

Punching shear checks are extremely powerful tools, but that is all they are: tools. It is important that you
understand the calculations that these tools perform, so you can determine the appropriateness of the
calculation for the situation under consideration, and so you can set the tools’ parameters correctly.

Drawing Reinforcement Bars
28
Note: Drawing your own reinforcement bars is not necessary but an advanced feature you may wish to utilize
once you are experienced with the program.
The Reinforcement layer allows you to:

• supplement the Program reinforcement by drawing actual (User) bars on plans using various tools
• change some Program bars to User reinforcement
The Reinforcement layer facilitates a production quality reinforcement layout.
28.1 Reinforcement bar definitions
28.1.1 About User and Program Reinforcement

There are two types of reinforcement bar: Program and User. All reinforcement is tagged (identified) as one type
or the other.
When performing design calculations, RAM Concept generates Program reinforcement required in addition to
any existing User reinforcement. In subsequent calculations, RAM Concept removes all of the Program
reinforcement before starting the calculations.
You can change Program Concentrated Reinforcement to User Concentrated Reinforcement merely by changing
its tag (in the object properties window). You might do this to modify RAM Concept's design. When performing
subsequent calculations, RAM Concept only designs reinforcement needed in addition to the reinforcement
tagged as User.
You could also change “User” reinforcement to “Program” reinforcement, but this has no value since RAM
Concept removes all existing program reinforcement when it generates new “Program” reinforcement.
28.1.2 Reinforcement object types

There are seven object types in the Reinforcement layer:
• Concentrated Reinforcement - a fixed number of bars over a parallelogram area

Reinforcement properties
• Distributed Reinforcement - a bar spacing applied over a polygon area.

• Individual Bars - single bars that are generated from Concentrated and Distributed Reinforcement.
• Transverse Reinforcement - a fixed number of transverse bars at a fixed spacing.
• Transverse Individual Bars - single transverse bars (strirrups/links/ligatures) that are generated from
Transverse Reinforcement
• Stud Shear Reinforcement (SSR) Callouts - a fixed number of SSR rails with a fixed number of studs.
• SSR Rails - individual rails that are generated from SSR Callouts.
You can directly create (by drawing) Concentrated Reinforcement, Distributed Reinforcement, and Transverse
Reinforcement. You cannot directly create any of the other types of reinforcement.
28.2 Reinforcement properties
Figure 119: Concentrated rebar properties - General

Reinforcement properties
Figure 120: Distributed rebar properties - General
Span Set Determines the set the reinforcement belongs to: latitude or longitude.
Elevation Reference The choices are:
• Absolute: the elevation relative to the zero datum. This is not recommended other than for very complicated
geometry.
• Above Soffit: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the center of the bar.
• Above Surface: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the center of the bar. The value is
almost always negative
• Top Cover: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the top of the bar. The value is always
positive.
• Bottom Cover: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the underside of the bar. The value is
always positive.
Elevation The distance used with the elevation reference.
Ending at End 1 The choices are:
• Straight:
• 90 Hook:
• 180 Hook:
• Anchored:
Ending at End 2 Similar to End 1
Slab Face This is used for (1) graphic display purposes (2) design rules.
The choices are:

Transverse Reinforcement properties
• Per Elev. Reference - the default and typical setting

• Top
• Bottom
• Both
• Auto
Note: Special Caution - Reinforcement set to “Auto” face will not appear on either the “top” or the “bottom”
reinforcement plans. If you use “Auto” face reinforcement, change the default plan settings (or add some plans)
to be certain that all of the reinforcement used is visible on the plans in your report.
Bar Type The label used to identify the reinforcing bar. The label is not necessarily the bar size. Reinforcement
bar labels (and their properties) are specified in the Criteria > Materials.
Bar Extent Skew The orientation of the bar’s extent line in degrees (concentrated reinforcement only - see “The
Skew Reinforcement Extent tool” for more information).
Quantity Type The choices are:
• Quantity: number of bars
• Spacing: bar spacing
Number of bars Only editable if Quantity Type is set to Quantity
Spacing Only editable if Quantity Type is set to Spacing.
Orientation The plan angle of the reinforcement (distributed reinforcement only - see “The Orient
Reinforcement tool” for more information).
Zone Width The width of the concentrated reinforcement zone.
Designed By The choices are:
• User: Bars drawn by the user
• Program: Bars calculated and drawn by RAM Concept.
Note: See “Concentrated and distributed reinforcement callouts” for discussion on the second (Presentation) tab.
Related Links
• The Skew Reinforcement Extent tool (on page 294)
• The Orient Reinforcement tool (on page 293)

Transverse Reinforcement properties
28.3 Transverse Reinforcement properties
Figure 121: Transverse rebar properties - General
In addition to properties that are common with longitudinal reinforcement, transverse reinforcement has the
following special properties:
Shape The choices are:
Open: Capable of resisting shear only

Closed: Two legs are capable of resisting torsion in addition to shear
Number of The number of vertical legs in the transverse reinforcement

Legs
Spacing If the length/spacing are not in equal increments, this controls which is the independent
Control property (that remains fixed) and which is the dependant property (that gets adjusted). The
choices are:
Length Fixed: The length remains fixed, and the input spacing is taken as a maximum
spacing and adjusted down to create an equal number of spaces.
Spacing Fixed: the spacing remains fixed, and the input length is adjusted up to an equal
increment of the input spacing. The length is always adjusted at the end of the transverse
rebar object, and the start point remains fixed.
Length The specified length of the region which contains transverse reinforcement.
Spacing The specified spacing between the transverse reinforcement along the region.

About drawing reinforcement
28.4 About drawing reinforcement

You can draw reinforcement in a number of ways:
• A group of one or more concentrated reinforcement bars using one of the three Concentrated Reinforcement
tools
• A group of distributed reinforcement bars using one of the three Distributed Reinforcement tools
• A region of transverse reinforcement using the Transverse Reinforcement tool
28.4.1 Expected workflows

It is expected that you will typically convert the “Program” reinforcement to “User” reinforcement and modify it.
One common exception to this might be that you may want to specify a bottom mat of reinforcement. There is no
difficulty if you convert some reinforcement and directly draw other reinforcement.
28.5 Drawing concentrated reinforcement

Concentrated reinforcement consists of one or more bars located within a parallelogram.
The parallelogram is initially a rectangle with a default width, but you can use the stretch tool to edit the width
and the skew tool to change the shape.
28.5.1 Drawing concentrated reinforcement

You can draw concentrated rebar by specifying the end points or specifying the midpoint and one endpoint.
1. Select the Concentrated Reinforcement tool ( ).

2. Click at one endpoint.
3. Click at the other endpoint.
Note: See “Drawing concentrated bottom bars” for more information.
To draw concentrated reinforcement #2

1.
Select the Concentrated Reinforcement tool ( ).
2. Click at the midpoint.

Drawing distributed reinforcement
Note: See “Drawing concentrated bottom bars by defining the midpoint” for more information.
28.5.2 Drawing concentrated reinforcement in two directions

You can draw concentrated rebar in two directions by specifying the midpoint and one endpoint.
1. Select the Concentrated Reinforcement Cross tool ( ).

2. Click at the midpoint.
Note: This creates two reinforcement objects: one that belongs to the latitude reinforcement layer and one that
belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer.
Note: See “Drawing concentrated bottom bars in two directions” for more information.
28.6 Drawing distributed reinforcement

Distributed reinforcement consists of a group of bars located within a polygon.
28.6.1 Drawing distributed reinforcement

You draw distributed reinforcement within a polygon. This is done by defining the polygon with mouse clicks or
using the slab perimeter.
1. Choose the Distributed Reinf. tool ( ).

2. Click at each polygon vertex consecutively.
Note: This creates two objects: a polygon and a reinforcement object that belongs to either the latitude
reinforcement layer or longitude reinforcement layer.
Note: Once the file is run you can view the individual bars through the Visible Objects dialog box.
Note: See “Drawing distributed bottom bars over part of the floor” for more information.
To draw distributed reinforcement #2

1. Choose the Distributed Reinf. in Perimeter tool ( ).
2. Click somewhere on the slab.
3. Click at another point to define the orientation of the reinforcement.

Drawing transverse reinforcement
Note: This creates two objects: a polygon matching the slab outline and a reinforcement object that belongs to
either the latitude reinforcement layer or longitude reinforcement layer.
Note: Once the file is run you can view the individual bars.
Note: See “Drawing distributed bottom bars over the entire floor” for more information.
To draw distributed reinforcement #3

1. Choose the Distributed Reinf. Cross in Perimeter tool ( ).
3. Click at another point to define the orientation of the reinforcement.
A polygon appears that is the shape of the slab. Once the file is run you can view the individual bars.
Note: This creates three objects: a polygon matching the slab outline, a reinforcement object that belongs to the
latitude reinforcement layer and a reinforcement object that belongs to the longitude reinforcement layer.
Note: See “Drawing a bottom mat over the entire floor” for more information.
28.7 Drawing transverse reinforcement

Transverse reinforcement consists of one or more transverse bars located along a line segment.
28.7.1 Drawing transverse reinforcement

You can draw transverse reinforcement by specifying the end points.
1.
Select the Transverse Reinforcement tool ( ).
You can use the stretch tool to edit the length and location of the region, or change the length and/or spacing
properties. The transverse reinforcement line segment must intersect any shear cores in cross sections you want
to reinforce. The size, shape, and orientation of the transverse reinforcement take on the size and shape of the
containing shear core.

Concentrated and distributed reinforcement drawing examples
28.8 Concentrated and distributed reinforcement drawing examples
28.8.1 Drawing concentrated bottom bars
Figure 122: Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with the first Concentrated
Reinforcement tool.

28.8.2 Drawing concentrated bottom bars by defining the

midpoint
Figure 123: Concentrated bars drawn by clicking at points A and B with the second Concentrated
Reinforcement tool.
28.8.3 Drawing concentrated bottom bars in two directions
Figure 124: Concentrated bars in two directions drawn by clicking at points A and B with the
Concentrated Reinforcement Cross tool.

28.8.4 Drawing distributed bottom bars over part of the floor
Figure 125: Distributed bar polygon drawn over part of the slab by clicking at 5 vertices with the
Distributed Reinforcement tool. Hatching is turned ON.
Figure 126: Individual distributed bars shown via Visible Objects dialog box. Hatching is turned OFF.

28.8.5 Drawing distributed bottom bars over the entire floor
Figure 127: Distributed bars polygon drawn over the slab by clicking at points A and B with the
Distributed Reinforcement in Perimeter tool. Hatching is turned ON.

Transverse reinforcement drawing examples
28.8.6 Drawing a bottom mat over the entire floor
Figure 129: Distributed bottom mat polygon drawn over the slab by clicking at points A and B with the
Distributed Reinforcement Cross in Perimeter tool. Hatching is turned ON.

Transverse reinforcement drawing examples
28.9 Transverse reinforcement drawing examples
Figure 131: Two scenarios of user transverse reinforcement, both resulting in individual bars that are coplanar to
the cross sections that the line segment intersects.
Figure 132: Resulting individual transverse bars when with no cross section trimming

Other reinforcement plan tools
Figure 133: Resulting individual bars when cross section trimming is set to Slab Rectangle
28.10 Other reinforcement plan tools

There are three special tools in the Reinforcement layer that you can use to edit the plan properties of
reinforcement.
28.10.1 The Orient Reinforcement tool

This tool allows you to draw a line segment that represents the desired orientation of selected reinforcement
objects’ individual bars.
After you draw this line, RAM Concept rotates any selected concentrated reinforcement objects, and orients any
distributed reinforcement parallel to the drawn line. The selected reinforcement creates individual bars of the
same orientation after calculation.
1. Select the reinforcement object.

2. Choose the Orient Reinforcement tool ( ).
3. Click anywhere on the plan.
4. Click at a location on the plan to create a line parallel to the desired direction of the reinforcement.
Note: Use snap orthogonal or snap to perpendicular to help with orientation where appropriate
Note: Selecting both reinforcement objects created with the Concentrated Rebar Cross tool or the Distributed
Rebar Cross in Perimeter tool orientates both reinforcement objects.
Note: See “Orientating concentrated reinforcement” for more information.

28.10.2 The Skew Reinforcement Extent tool

This tool allows you to draw a line segment that represents the desired orientation of selected Concentrated
Reinforcement objects' extent line. This tool allows you to create parallelogram regions of Concentrated
Reinforcement. Distributed reinforcement cannot be skewed.
1. Select the concentrated reinforcement object.

2. Choose the Skew Reinforcement Extent tool ( ).
3. Click anywhere on the plan (but preferably near the reinforcement object)
4. Click at a location on the plan to create a line parallel to the desired extent line.
Note: See “Skewing concentrated reinforcement” for more information.
28.10.3 Auto Hook tool

This tool allows you to automatically extend concentrated rebar callouts in close proximity to the slab edge and
apply hooks to a selected set of user reinforcement.
To apply hooks to reinforcement near the slab edge
1. Select the user concentrated reinforcement that you wish to modify.

2.
Choose the Auto Hook tool ( ).
3. Select the hook type from the drop down menu.
4. Set the Edge Detection Tolerance. Only bar ends within this distance of a slab edge will be modified
5. If you want the bar end extended to the slab edge, check the “Perform Bar Extension” box and set the desired
edge cover and bar rounding length.
6. Click “OK”.
Note: See “Automatically applying hooks to user reinforcement” for more information.

Orientating concentrated reinforcement
Figure 134: Using the Orient Reinforcement tool to define the line A B parallel to the desired orientation
Figure 135: The reoriented concentrated reinforcement

Skewing concentrated reinforcement
Figure 136: Using the Skew Reinforcement tool to define the line A B parallel to the desired skewed ends
Figure 137: The skewed concentrated reinforcement with the extent line parallel to line AB.

Stretching concentrated reinforcement
Figure 138: Using the stretch tool at point A to widen the concentrated reinforcement parallelogram
Figure 139: The stretched concentrated reinforcement

Layout and Detailing Parameters
Automatically applying hooks to user reinforcement
Figure 140: Use the auto hook tool to apply hooks to all four concentrated bar callouts
Figure 141: Hooks applied and bars extended to the slab edge
28.11 Layout and Detailing Parameters

There are five calculation option parameters that influence how RAM Concept lays out and details
reinforcement. Refer to “Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters” in Chapter 28, “Calculating Results”.

Reinforcement Text Formatting
28.12 Reinforcement Text Formatting

Concentrated Reinforcement, Distributed Reinforcement and SSR Callouts all have format specifiers that you can
modify so the reinforcement is described per your office standards.
28.12.1 Concentrated and distributed reinforcement callouts
Figure 142: Concentrated rebar properties - Presentation

Figure 143: Distributed rebar properties - Presentation
Callout by The Concentrated and Distributed Reinforcement format specifiers use the following key
Quantity/Spacing values:
Format
• $Q - Bar quantity
• $F - Bar face
• $B - Bar name
• $L - Bar length
• $U - Bar length units
• $u - Bar spacing units
• $S - Bar spacing
• \n - Start new line

28.12.2 Transverse reinforcement callouts
Figure 144: Transverse reinforcement properties - Presentation
Callout Format The transverse reinforcement format specifiers use the following key values:
• $B - Bar name
• $S - Spacing
• $N - Number of spaces
• $L - Number of legs (and shape)
• $U - Spacing units
• \n - Start a new line
28.12.3 SSR Callout

The SSR Callout format specifiers use the following key values:
• $R - Rail quantity
• $S - Studs per rail
• $F - First stud spacing
• $T - Typical stud spacing
• $N - SSR system name
• $U - Stud spacing units
• $S - Stud spacing
• \n - Start new line

About SSR callouts and SSR rails:
The SSR Callout format specifier “($R)$S@$T First Spacing = $F $U\n$N” would generate text on the plan view
such as:
(12)8@3 First Spacing = 2.5 inches
3/8” SSR
For the same SSR Callout, the format specifier “$R rails with $S studs” would generate the text:
12 rails with 8 studs
28.12.4 Examples of reinforcement text formatting

The following examples show generated text for different codes.
ACI 318-05
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier “$Q $B x $L $U $F@$S $u” would generate text on the plan
view such as:
28 #5 x 15 feet T @ 12.1 inches
For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format specifier ($Q)$Bx$L$F" would generate the text:
(28)#5x15T
AS 3600-2001
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x $L $U $F@$S $u" would generate text on the plan
view such as:
28 N16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm
For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format specifier “($Q)$Bx$L$F” would generate the text:
(28)N16x4.57T
BS 8110 : 1997, EC2 and IS456-2000
The Concentrated Reinforcement format specifier $Q $B x $L $U $F@$S $u" would generate text on the plan
view such as:
28 T16 x 4.57 m T @ 307 mm
For the same Concentrated Reinforcement, the format specifier “($Q)$Bx$L$F” would generate the text:
(28)T16x4.57T
28.13 About SSR callouts and SSR rails:

RAM Concept generates SSR Callouts and SSR Rails from the results of its punching shear calculations. This
generated reinforcement is for display purposes only - it is not used in calculations and cannot be changed to
“user” reinforcement.

Defining Tendons
29
Note: You could bypass this chapter if you are designing a structure with only bar reinforcement.
There is no unique quantity or layout of post-tensioning that provides a satisfactory PT design. This is
particularly true with partial prestress design where the emphasis is on strength, deflection and crack control
rather than hypothetical service stresses.
Historically, many 2D programs have used allowable service stresses to drive their algorithms for providing a PT
solution. This is fast losing favor; some codes have all but abandoned using (hypothetical) service stresses as a
design criterion, and other codes (such as ACI 318) are moving in that direction. Some computer generated
tendon layouts are not practical for real design.
Whereas you expect a 2D program to help provide a workable tendon design based upon spans, sections and
loads, the possible randomness of supports makes this extremely difficult in 3D.
Thus, in RAM Concept, it is necessary for you to define the tendons by generating or drawing them in plan and
specifying parameters such as profile and number of strands. For guidance, you should use one of the following
for your first estimate:
• your experience
• a preliminary run with Strip Wizard
• a logical guess based upon precompression (P/A) considerations
• a random guess (correctly drawn design strips flag incorrect guesses, and you can use “The Auditor” for help
in iterating)
RAM Concept's PT Optimization feature (see Designing and Optimizing Post-tensioning (on page 331))
automates the search for an economical design and eliminates the need for manual iteration.
29.1 Tendon definitions
29.1.1 Post-Tensioning terminology and definitions

• Strand - a single wire or group of bundled wires. In post-tensioned construction a strand is a unit of post-
tensioning reinforcement, similar to a reinforcing bar being the unit of RC reinforcement.
• Duct - a tube, conduit, or sheathing containing one or more strands with a single anchorage. The maximum
number of strands in a duct is defined in the prestressing material properties. For monostrand tendons
(bonded or unbonded), each duct contains a single strand.

Defining Tendons
Tendon Parameters Layer
• Tendon - In practice, the PT industry defines a tendon as a group of strands that share a common anchorage.
The “group” may be just one strand, as is the case with most unbonded systems, or “monostrand”. It is not
always necessary for real tendons to match RAM Concept tendon exactly. For example, it is common practice
in monostrand to group tendons together in the field. For this situation, it is usually convenient to specify the
total number of strands in the group in a single RAM Concept tendon. In this case the correct number of ducts
can still be calculated correctly using the input duct properties.
29.1.2 Using the latitude and longitude prestressing folders

RAM Concept has two folders for prestressing called latitude and longitude.
By using RAM Concept’s two tendon folders, you can separate tendons and tendon parameters into two groups.
Separating orthogonal tendons allows for easier editing and a clearer presentation.
Each folder contains three layers:
• Tendon Parameters Layer - defines high level objects used for the generation of individual tendons. This
layer facilitates a production quality presentation of high level tendon layout information.
• Generated Tendon Layer - contains the individual tendons generated from the parameter objects on the
Tendon Parameters Layer. The generated individual tendons can not be edited, but can be selected and
copied to the Manual Tendon Layer for further manipulation.
• Manual Tendon Layer - contains individual tendons drawn or otherwise manipulated manually by the user.
During analysis and design, all tendons on the generated tendon layers (latitude and longitude) and the manual
tendon layers (latitude and longitude) are included in the calculations. Therefore it is important not to duplicate
tendons on the generated and manual layers.
Note: Latitude and longitude are just names. You could define all tendons, which might be at various plan angles,
on one plan.
29.2 Tendon Parameters Layer
29.2.1 Tendon Parameters object types

There are six object types in the Tendon Parameters Layer:
• Banded Tendon Polyline - a polyline representing a specification for generation of a group of tendons at a
fixed spacing and parallel to the polyline segments.
• Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral - a quadrilateral representing a specification for generation of an array of
tendons at a specified angle within the shape.
• Distributed Tendon Overlap - a graphical only object that displays the cumulative force or number of strands
in an area of overlapping distributed tendon quadrilaterals.
• Tendon Void - a polygon shape that represents an area where no tendons are to be generated. Typical usage
might be stressing blockouts or small slab areas that are too short for tendons to get stressed.

Defining Tendons
• Profile Polyline - a polyline that defines a tendon elevation at the location where any banded tendon polyline
or distributed tendon quadrilateral intersects it.
• Jack Region – a polygon shape with jack properties that applies a jack on the generated tendon layer to all
generated tendon ends that are contained within it.
29.2.2 Banded Tendon Polyline and Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral Properties
Figure 145: Distributed tendon quadrilateral properties - General

Defining Tendons
Figure 146: Banded tendon polyline properties - General
Group Allows for selection of a banded tendon or distributed quadrilateral group which will
control some of this object’s properties. If a group is selected, the following properties are
set by the assigned group:
• Effective Force/Number of Strands
• PT System
• Inflection Point Ratio
• Tending Spacing (Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral only)
• Optimization Properties
See Tendon Parameters Group (on page 310) for additional information about groups.
Tendon Determines the mode for specifying strand quantities that go into the generated tendons.
Specification Type The choices are:
• Force
• Strands

Defining Tendons
Effective Force Only enabled when “force” is selected for “Tendon Specification Type”. For banded tendon
polylines, this value represents the total effective force to be generated in the banded
group. For distributed tendon quadrilaterals, this represents the effective force per unit
width of slab to generate in the distributed tendon array.
Number of Only enabled when “strands” is selected for “Tendon Specification Type”. For banded
Strands tendon polylines, this value represents the total number of strands to be generated in the
banded group. For distributed tendon quadrilaterals, this represents the number of
strands per unit width of slab to generate in the distributed tendon array.
Max Strands/ For banded tendon polylines, this value defines the maximum number of strands to put
Tendon into a single generated tendon.
Layout Type For banded tendon polylines, this value defines the layout type of the generated tendons.
The choices are:
• Spacing
• Width
Tendon Spacing Defines the lateral spacing between generated tendons.

Layout Width For banded tendon polylines, defines the total width of the generated tendon layout when
“width” is selected for “Layout Type”. The width includes a half space on each side of the
outermost generated tendons.
Tendon Type For banded tendon polylines, defines the behavior of the banded tendon polyline and the
properties of the generated tendon. The choices are:
• Primary
• Added
Added Tendon For banded tendon polylines, controls the behavior of the automatic generation of added
Generation tendons to balance forces at connected banded tendon polyline ends. The choices are:
• None
• Fixed Length
• Span Fraction
Added Tendon For banded tendon polylines when “Fixed Length” is selected for “Added Tendon
Length Generation”, controls the length of the automatically generated banded tendon polyline.
Added Tendon For banded tendon polylines when “Span Fraction” is selected for “Added Tendon
Span Fraction Generation”, controls the length of the automatically generated banded tendon polyline as
a function of the span containing the joint that the added tendon is attached.
PT System The label used to identify the PT system for the generated tendons. The label is not
necessarily the size and type of strand. The Materials Specification defines the PT system
properties. It is possible to mix systems in a single tendon parameters layer.
Inflection Point Determines the distance, x, from end 1 in the span to the point where the tendon
Ratio curvature changes sign. The inflection point ratio is the ratio of x to the distance from end
1 to end 2. A value of 0.2 places the inflection point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if
end 2 is at midspan. This is a commonly used value.
Note: An inflection point ratio of zero results in a simple parabola.

Defining Tendons
Harped Specifies the tendon segment as having a straight profile (as opposed to a parabolic
profile).
29.2.3 Distributed Tendon Overlap and Tendon Void Properties

These objects have no user editable properties
29.2.4 Profile Polyline Properties
Group Allows for selection of a profile polyline group which will control some of this object’s
properties. If a group is selected, the following properties are set by the assigned group:
• Elevation Reference
• Elevation
• Optimization Properties
See Tendon Parameters Group (on page 310) for additional information about groups.
Elevation The vertical distance from the elevation reference to the centroid of the tendon’s strands, also
referred to as CGS (center of gravity of strand).
Note: This version of RAM Concept measures the top and bottom cover to the CGS of the
strands. Future versions will allow inputting of duct dimensions and allow a top and bottom
cover to the outside of the duct to be input.
Note: The CGS is not the same as mid-depth of a bonded tendon’s duct.
Elevation The choices are:

Reference
• Absolute: the elevation relative to the zero datum. This is not recommended other than for
very complicated geometry.
• Above Soffit: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the CGS of the tendon.

Defining Tendons
• Above Surface: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the CGS of the
tendon. The value is almost always negative.
• Top Cover: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the CGS of the tendon.
The value is always positive.
• Bottom Cover: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the CGS of the tendon.
The value is always positive.
Profile Determines the orientations of the created tendon half-spans (and the corresponding inflection
Location point location). The choices are:
• Support
• Span
The support profile polylines are displayed graphically as solid lines on plan, while the span
polylines are displayed as dashed lines.
29.2.5 Jack Region Properties

Set the default jack properties in the Default Jack Properties dialog box by double clicking the Jack Region tool
( ). You can choose to ignore the jack region property values in the Jack Region Properties dialog and instead
use the PT System values.
The following is a list of jack region properties:
Jacking Stress The stress in the strand at the jack at jacking.

Anchor Friction Loss of stress due to friction in the anchorage. It is a fraction with no units. You would
Coefficient enter a 2% loss as 0.02. Most PT suppliers recommend a value of zero for unbonded
tendons. You might consult with a local PT supplier regarding bonded tendons.
Wobble Friction Friction calculations use this property (k) to estimate losses due to accidental curvature (in
Coefficient the horizontal and vertical planes). It is the product of the angle friction coefficient and the
accidental angular change per unit length.
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in particular) use a definition of wobble

coefficient that is the accidental angular change per unit length. These communities can
calculate the wobble coefficient that Concept uses, k, with the following relationship: k =
AngularWobbleCoefficient * mu.
Angle Friction Loss due to deliberate curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). Most designers
Coefficient know it as mu.
Seating Distance The distance that the wedges recede into the anchorage. This occurs when the field
operator releases the tension in the jack.
Long Term The sum of losses such as creep and shrinkage of concrete, and relaxation of strand. It also
Losses includes the loss due to elastic shortening of the concrete even though it is a short-term
loss.

Defining Tendons
Tendon Parameters Group
29.3 Tendon Parameters Group

In some instances, it is beneficial for multiple banded tendon polyline objects, distributed tendon quadrilaterals
object, or profile polyline objects to have identical properties. One example is in symmetrical structures, where
for practicality the resulting tendon layout and design should also be symmetrical. It might also be desirable for
many different profile elevations to be identical for a typical span in a structure. This can be accomplished using
Tendon Parameters Groups.
Once groups are created, they can be selected and assigned to any number of their respective object types, at
which point those objects will belong to that group. The properties of the banded tendon polyline, distributed
tendon quadrilateral, or profile polyline that are in the group will then be controlled by the group properties,
allowing multiple object properties to be updated by changing the group property value.
Groups can also be useful for optimization, especially in cases where it may be practical or desirable to optimize
multiple objects in unison or to reduce the number of optimizable objects in the problem. See Designing and
Optimizing Post-tensioning (on page 331) for additional information.
29.3.1 Viewing the Tendon Parameters Group

The Tendon Parameters Groups window (opens when Criteria > Tendon Parameters Groups is selected)
shows the names and properties of the banded tendon polyline groups, the distributed tendon quadrilateral
groups, and the profile polyline groups. New groups can be created by selecting Add Banded Tendon Polyline
Group, Add Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral Group, or Add Profile Polyline Group.
Selecting the objects in a group

The objects belonging to a group or multiple groups can be selected by selecting Select Banded Tendon
Polyline Group, Select Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral Group, or Select Profile Polyline Group. Upon
selecting the desired group(s) and clicking OK, all objects belonging to the selected groups on any plan that has
the Tendon Parameters Layer as the active layer will be selected.

Defining Tendons
Manual Tendon Layer
29.4 Manual Tendon Layer
29.4.1 Tendon properties

Before you begin drawing tendons, specify the default properties for the tool(s) you will use. The default values
are set in the Default Properties dialog box. Double click one of the tendon drawing tools (Half Span Tendon
( ), Full Span Tendon ( ), Half Span Tendon Panel ( ), or Full Span Tendon Panel ( )) to edit its
properties.
Note: Setting the default properties for one tendon drawing tool sets properties for all the tendon drawing tools.
The following is a list of RAM Concept tendon properties:

PT System The label used to identify the PT system for the generated tendons. The label is not necessarily the
size and type of strand. The Materials Specification defines the PT system properties. It is possible to mix
systems in a single tendon layer.
Strands per Tendon Specifies the number of strands in the selected tendon(s). It need not be an integer value.
While the total number of strands in RAM Concept and the real structure must match, the grouping of strands
into tendons need not be the same in RAM Concept as in the real structure. It is usually not necessary to model
each real tendon as a RAM Concept tendon - fewer RAM Concept tendons (with a larger number of strands per
tendon) are often used. An exception is for specific code rules that require a deduction in shear area for duct
size. In those situations you should specify the correct duct size and number of strands per tendon.
For example, if you model six 4-strand ducts containing 2 strands each, as three 4-strand ducts containing 4
strands each, RAM Concept considers the correct number of strands (12), but only three of the six ducts.
Elevation (Elevation Value at end 1 and Elevation Value at end 2) The vertical distance from the elevation
reference to the centroid of the tendon’s strands, also referred to as CGS (center of gravity of strand).
Note: This version of RAM Concept measures the top and bottom cover to the CGS of the strands. Future versions
will allow inputting of duct dimensions and allow a top and bottom cover to the outside of the duct to be input.
Note: The CGS is not the same as mid-depth of a bonded tendon’s duct.
Elevation Reference The choices are:

• Absolute: the elevation relative to the zero datum. This is not recommended other than for very complicated
geometry.
• Above Soffit: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the CGS of the tendon.
• Above Surface: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is
almost always negative.
• Top Cover: The elevation is measured from the surface elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is always
positive.
• Bottom Cover: The elevation is measured from the soffit elevation to the CGS of the tendon. The value is
always positive.

Defining Tendons
About creating tendons
The dimension from the elevation reference (at that exact plan location) to the CGS is the Elevation Value. Thus,
if a profile point is located over a slab thickening (drop cap, beam etc.) then the thickening should be taken into
account if the elevation reference refers to the changing surface. RAM Concept does not currently use
dimensions to underside of duct, or cover, to determine elevation values. Future versions will incorporate this
calculation.
The path of a tendon along with the number of strands determines the forces the tendon exerts on the concrete.
Profile points (that are usually the tendon high and low points) define this path. If necessary, you can introduce
intermediate profile points.
Tendons are comprised of segments. For elevated floors, each segment has a high point (end 1) and a low point
(end 2). For mats, the reverse is generally true. Each segment can represent a half of a span, or a partial half
span.
Most user defined spans have a tendon with two segments. Cantilevers and some user defined spans have
tendons with one segment.
Selections for Elevation Value and Elevation Reference should consider cover and load balancing. Profiles
typically vary according to span lengths.
Note: Profile values displayed in RAM Concept are always from the soffit. When structure and/or tendon
changes are made, the profile values can be temporarily out of date and incorrect. In order to update the profile
values, use the “Generate Tendons” command or run a “Calc All”.
Inflection Point Ratio Determines the distance, x, from end 1 in the span to the point where the tendon
curvature changes sign. The inflection point ratio is the ratio of x to the distance from end 1 to end 2. A value of
0.2 places the inflection point 10% of the span distance from end 1 if end 2 is at midspan. This is a commonly
used value.
Note: An inflection point ratio of zero results in a simple parabola.
Harped Specifies the tendon segment as having a straight profile (as opposed to a parabolic profile).
Half Span Ratio (Half Span Ratio End 1 and Half Span Ratio End 2) Specifies the portion of the half span that
this segment represents. The end 2 half span ratio must always be greater than the end 1 half span ratio. Half
span ratios of 0 and 1 represent an entire half span. It is not recommended that these values be changed by the
user.
Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads If two entire half span tendon segments in a single span have
different values for end 1 then the Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option moves the low point in
plan to equilibrate the uplift during an analysis calculation.
Note: Do not select this option if the half span ratios of both tendon segments are not 0 and 1 or if the profile
values are at the same elevation. A segment with such profiles would have zero uplift and so the formulation
does not work.
29.5 About creating tendons

There are two ways to generate tendons:
• Specification of objects on the tendon parameters layers, resulting in generated tendons on the generated
tendon layers.

Defining Tendons
Drawing banded tendon polylines
• Drawing individual tendons directly on the manual tendon layers.

These tendon generation schemes support a number of workflows related to tendon generation and design. The
most common are outlined here:
29.5.1 All tendon definition done on the tendon parameters layers

The Engineer specifies all prestressing on the tendon parameters layers, allowing RAM Concept to automatically
generate individual tendons from the tendon parameters objects. When making changes to the tendon layout the
Engineer will add, delete, or edit objects on the tendon parameters layer only. The Engineer might use the
tendon parameter plans or the generated tendon plans for their tendon design plans.
29.5.2 Most tendon definition done on the tendon parameters layers

The Engineer specifies most prestressing on the tendon parameters layers but wants to supplement with
isolated individually drawn tendons on the manual tendon layers. This might be faster to make minor
adjustments than changing tendon parameter objects. The drawing production workflow might be to export
tendon parameter and manual tendon plans on the plan(s), then modify those objects in CAD to product the final
drawings.
29.5.3 All work done on manual tendon layers

The Engineer prefers working with individual tendons for both design and production of final tendon plans. The
Engineer can draw the individual tendons on the manual tendon layers, or define objects on the tendon
parameters layers to quickly generate a large number of tendons that can then be manipulated manually. Since
the tendon objects on the generated tendon layers can not be edited, they will need to be copied and pasted from
the generated tendon layers to the manual tendon layers. The objects on the tendon parameters layers would
then be deleted to avoid duplication.
29.6 Drawing banded tendon polylines

Banded tendon polylines consist of two or more connected points that define a polyline. Once drawn the stretch
tool can be used to modify the location of any of the points.
1.
Choose the Banded Tendon Polyline tool ( ).
2. Click at the tendon polyline start point.
3. Click the next tendon polyline point (can be drawn across multiple spans or partial spans).
4. Continue to click tendon polyline points until all are defined.
5. Right click and select enter to complete the operation.

Defining Tendons
Drawing distributed tendon quadrilaterals
Note: Banded tendon polylines can be connected at their end points to single or multiple other banded tendon
polylines. However, it is an error to define banded tendon polylines that overlap.
29.7 Drawing distributed tendon quadrilaterals

Distributed tendon quadrilaterals define a specification to generate a specific force or number of strands per
unit width at a given angle within a defined 4 sided polygon.
1.
Choose the Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral tool ( ).
2. Click each of the four vertices of the quadrilateral vertex sequentially (the quadrilateral can extend across
multiple spans or bays).
Since distributed tendon quadrilaterals are meant to represent a “smeared” tendon force, the spacing specified
isn’t typically critical. However, due to geometrical irregularities inaccuracies can be introduced near the edges
of the shape. RAM Concept automatically attempts to provide a half space at each edge of the tendon layout area
to minimize this effect. This effect can also be minimized by specifying a smaller spacing, at the expense of a
larger number of generated tendons and increased run time. A spacing of 2 ft (0.75 m) will normally provide a
good balance between accuracy and computational expense.
Notes: Distributed tendon quadrilaterals with common spacing, PT System, inflection point ratio, and harped
property can be drawn overlapping and RAM Concept will consider the cumulative force/strands in overlapping
regions.
29.8 Defining profiles for banded tendon polylines and distributed

tendon quadrilaterals
Profiles are determined for banded tendon polylines and distributed tendon quadrilaterals by creating profile
polylines. Tendon half spans are created wherever a generated tendon intersects a profile polyline.
The generated half span tendons are oriented in the following direction (which will determine the inflection
point location):
• support polyline - span polyline
• support polyline - slab edge
• slab edge - span polyline
Where generated tendons intersect identical profile polyline types (i.e, both supports), the tendon is oriented
from the location of highest absolute elevation to the location of lowest absolute elevation. If the end elevations
are the same then the orientation will be random (and not important).
Where banded tendon polylines end away from a profile polyline or intersect a slab edge, the tendon is profiled
to the mid-depth of the slab at the end or slab edge intersection location.
Where distributed tendon quadrilaterals end between two profile polylines or the slab edge, the tendons are
profiled as if they were extended to the next adjacent profile polyline or slab edge (representing a partial half

Defining Tendons
Defining profiles for banded tendon polylines and distributed tendon quadrilaterals
span). This allows two distributed tendon quadrilaterals with different angles to be drawn adjacent to each
other along a span and represent continuous span tendons. Where distributed tendon quadrilaterals intersect
the slab edge and there is no profile polyline near the edge, the tendons are profiled to the mid-depth of the slab.
Profile polylines can be created in a number of ways:
• Drawing them manually.
• Generating them for the entire floor in one span direction using the Generate Profile Polylines tool.
• Generate span polylines from already defined support polylines using the Generate Span Polylines tool.
29.8.1 Drawing Profile Polylines

1.
Choose the Banded Tendon Polyline tool ( ).
2. Click at the profile polyline start point.
3. Click the next profile polyline point.
4. Continue to click profile polyline points until all are defined.
5. Right click and select enter to complete the operation.
29.8.2 Defining profile polylines using the Generate Profile Polylines tool
This tool allows you to generate profile polylines automatically using span segments that have already been
defined on the design strip layer. Support polylines are generated from existing span segments. Latitude tendon
support polylines are generated from longitude span segments and vice-versa. Span polylines are created from
the support polylines created in the first step of the operation. If no span segments are drawn on the
corresponding layer then no profile polylines will be created.
To generate profile polylines
1.
Choose the Generate Profile Polylines tool ( ).
2. Select the span set to generate profile polylines for. Generally you will select the layer in the prestressing
folder you are currently working in.
3. To generate support polylines from the span segments, check the “generate support polylines” box and set
the elevation reference and elevation desired for the generated support polylines.
4. If support polylines are generated, to generate span polylines check the “generate span polylines” box and set
the elevation reference and elevation desired for the generated span polylines. If the tendon span angle is
consistent throughout the floor then set it in the Span Orientation Angle box. This will generate the span
polylines in the specified direction between the generated support polylines. If there is more than one span
orientation angle in the floor then “Use Medial Axis” can be selected. The Use Medial Axis option will generate
span polylines that are equidistant from the generated support polylines. For a single spanning direction, the
best results will normally be achieved by setting this angle.

Defining Tendons
Defining profiles for banded tendon polylines and distributed tendon quadrilaterals
Figure 147: Generate profile polylines tool
29.8.3 Defining span polylines using the Generate Span Polylines tool
This tool allows you to generate span polylines automatically using support polylines that have been previously
generated.
To generate profile polylines
1.
Select the support polylines that you want span polylines generated between ( ).
2.
Choose the Generate Profile Polylines tool ( ).
3. Set the elevation reference, elevation, and span orientation angle for the generated span polylines.
4. Set the span ratio for the generated span polylines. This is the desired span control point. For a profile
control point at mid-span, set this value to 0.5.
Figure 148: Generate span polylines tool

5. Set the optimization parameters when the tendons will be optimized.

Defining Tendons
Other tendon parameter plan objects and tools
See Designing and Optimizing Post-tensioning (on page 331) for further details.
29.9 Other tendon parameter plan objects and tools
29.9.1 Drawing Tendon Voids

Tendon void polygons can be defined in areas where generated tendons are not desired. This might be used to
create a stressing blockout in a banded tendon polyline or to prevent very short tendons from being created in
an area covered by a distributed tendon quadrilateral. Tendon void polygons prevent creation of tendons inside
their boundaries and apply only to the layer on which they are drawn. These objects do not affect the manual
tendon layers.
1.
Select the Tendon Void tool ( ).
3. Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon (or type <C> and press <Return>).
29.9.2 Drawing Jack Regions

Jack region polygons can be drawn where jacks are desired to be applied to generated tendons. Any
discontinuous generated tendon end that lies within a jack region will have a jack defined with the jack region’s
properties.
1.
Select the Jack Region tool ( ).
3. Either:
Snap to the first vertex and click to close the polygon.
or
Type <C> and press <Return>.
29.9.3 Split banded tendon polyline tool

The split banded tendon polyline tool is used to segment previously created banded tendon polylines where they
cross the defined splitting line.
This can be useful, for example, where tendons need to be added in an end span of a previously defined banded
tendon polyline.

Defining Tendons
Tendon parameter drawing examples
1.
Select the Split Banded Tendon Polylines tool ( ).
2. Click two points defining a line that will segment all banded tendon polylines that cross it.
29.9.4 Split profile polyline tool

The split profile polyline tool is used to split previously created profile polylines where they cross the defined
splitting line.
This can be useful, for example, where different profiles are desired in different bays and the current profile
polyline is defined across the bays.
1.
Select the Split Profile Polylines tool .
2. Click two points defining a line that will split all profile polylines that cross it.
29.9.5 Generate program tendons tool

The generate program tendons tool is used to create tendons on the generated tendon layers from the objects on
the tendon parameters layer. It also updates the graphical representation of the objects on the tendon
parameters layer such as the fillet data for the banded tendon polylines.
These operations will also be performed during a “calc all”, if they are out of date.
1.
Click the Generate Program Tendons tool ( ).
A log will be displayed if any warnings or errors occurred during the generation.
29.10 Tendon parameter drawing examples

Drawing banded tendon polylines

Defining Tendons
Tendon parameter drawing and text formatting
Figure 149: Banded tendon polylines drawn by clicking on points A,B,C,D,E in sequence with Banded Tendon
Polyline tool.
Drawing distributed tendon quadrilaterals
Figure 150: Three distributed tendon quadrilaterals drawn by clicking on points A-D with distributed tendon
quadrilateral tool.
29.11 Tendon parameter drawing and text formatting

Banded tendon polylines, distributed tendon quadrilaterals, and distributed tendon overlap areas have drawing
controls and format specifiers intended to aid in the production of design quality drawings.

Defining Tendons
Tendon parameter drawing and text formatting
29.11.1 Banded tendon polyline formatting options

• Banded tendon polylines have a number of formatting properties to aid in the production of drawings:
• Description - a user formatted string used to describe the banded tendon polyline properties.
The formatted description strings for the banded tendon polyline use the following key values:
• $F - force
• $f - force units
• $N - number of strands
• $P - PT system name
• $I - inflection point ratio
• $S - spacing
• $s - spacing units
• $T - number of tendons
• \n - new line
• Draw Fillets - displays filleted connections between segments of banded tendon polylines using the Fillet
Radius property set. The Fillet Radius property can be set to “Use Maximum” or a value smaller than the
maximum can be typed into this box.
• Profile Points - displays the profile control point information for the banded tendon polyline. The profile
values are always referenced from the slab soffit to the CGS of the strands.
• Symbol @ End 1,2 - displays the symbol at the end of the banded tendon polyline. Choices are:
• None
• Stressing End
• Dead End
29.11.2 Distributed tendon quadrilateral formatting options

• Distributed tendon quadrilaterals have a number of formatting properties to aid in the production of
drawings:
• Description - a user formatted string used to describe the distributed tendon quadrilateral properties.
The formatted description strings for the banded tendon polyline use the following key values:
• $F - force/width
• $f - force/width units
• $N - number of strands
• $n - number of strands/width units
• $P - PT system name
• $I - inflection point ratio
• $S - spacing
• $s - spacing units
• $A - angle and units
• \n - new line

Defining Tendons
Optimization parameters for tendons
• Profile Points - displays the profile control point information for the banded tendon polyline. The profile
values are always referenced from the slab soffit to the CGS of the strands. In addition to the profile points
where the main tendon intersects profile polylines, the following additional points are provided to describe
the distributed tendon profiles:
• Edges - profiles at the edge of the distributed tendon quadrilaterals or slab edges.
• Span Changes - profiles at drastic changes in span profiles.
• Concrete Elevation Changes - profile changes where the concrete reference plane changes such as beams
or drop caps.
• Profile Polyline Ends - profiles at the ends of profile polylines
The intent is that with all these points displayed the profiling of all tendons within the distributed tendon
quadrilateral are defined by connecting support and span profile points. Profile points are not displayed at slab
edges where no profile polylines are used.
• Symbol @ End 1,2 - displays the symbol at the end of the distributed tendon quadrilateral main tendon.
Choices are:
• None
• Stressing End
• Dead End
• Break
• Symbol @ Extent Ends - displays the symbol at the end of the distributed tendon quadrilateral extent line.
Choices are:
• None
• Arrow
29.12 Optimization parameters for tendons

Banded tendon polylines, distributed tendon quadrilaterals, and profile polylines have optimization parameters
that are used only if the optimization process is launched. See Designing and Optimizing Post-tensioning (on
page 331) for additional information.
29.12.1 Profile polylines optimization options

Profile polylines have parameters that can be defined for the optimization process:
• Optimize - used to define the profile polyline as part of the optimization.
• Minimum Elevation - the minimum elevation value (from the specified elevation reference).
• Maximum Elevation - the maximum elevation value (from the specified elevation reference).
• Elevation Increment - the increment value to explore in the range between the minimum and maximum
values.
29.12.2 Banded tendon polyline optimization options

Banded tendon polylines have parameters that can be defined for the optimization process:

Defining Tendons
About drawing individual tendons
• Optimize - used to enable the optimization of the effective force or number of strands, depending upon the
“Tendon Specification Type” selected on the General tab. The input values need not to be integers.
• Minimum Effective Force / Number of Strands - the minimum effective force or number of strands. For
performance-based codes with no lower limits, it may be reasonable to set the minimum to zero. Otherwise,
consider setting any code prescribed minimum limit (such as minimum precompression) as a minimum
value.
• Maximum Effective Force / Number of Strands - the maximum effective force or number of strands. This
value can normally be set to the maximum value that would be practical for the given code.
• Effective Force / Number of Strands Increment - the increment value to explore in the range between the
minimum and maximum values.
29.12.3 Distributed tendon quadrilateral optimization options

Distributed tendon quadrilaterals have parameters that can be defined for the optimization process:
• Optimize - used to enable the optimization of the effective force or number of strands, depending upon the
“Tendon Specification Type” selected on the General tab. The input values need not to be integers.
• Minimum Effective Force / Number of Strands - the minimum effective force or number of strands per
unit width. For performance-based codes with no lower limits, it may be reasonable to set the minimum to
zero. Otherwise, consider setting any code prescribed minimum limit (such as minimum precompression) as
a minimum value.
• Maximum Effective Force / Number of Strands - the maximum effective force or number of strands per
unit width. This value can normally be set to the maximum value that would be practical for the given code.
• Effective Force / Number of Strands Increment - the increment value to explore in the range between the
minimum and maximum values.
29.13 About drawing individual tendons

You can draw individual tendons on the manual tendon layers in a number of ways:
• A single tendon one segment at a time using the Half Span Tendon tool (typically used for cantilevers).
• A single tendon one span at a time using the Full Span Tendon tool.
• A single tendon with numerous spans using the Tendon Polyline tool.
• A number of tendons one segment at a time using the Half Span Tendon Panel tool.
• A number of tendons one span at a time using the Full Span Tendon Panel tool.
You use these tools in different situations. You might find drawing one tendon and then copying it is quicker
than using the polyline and panel tools.
29.14 Drawing single tendons

The following instructions are relevant for elevated floors where the tendon has a high point at supports and a
low point near midspan. For mats, the reverse is generally true.

Defining Tendons
Drawing multiple tendons
29.14.1 Drawing a half-span tendon

You might use the half-span tendon tool for cantilevers and short end spans. For such uses, the Profile at End 2
value would commonly be half the slab thickness or the beam centroid dimension.
1.
Select the Half Span Tendon tool ( ).
2. Click at the tendon high point.
3. Click at the tendon low point.
Note: The order of mouse clicks is very important when drawing half-span tendons because the tool measures
the inflection point from the high point (end 1).
29.14.2 Drawing a full-span tendon

You typically use the full-span tendon tool for conventional spans.
1.
Select the Full Span Tendon tool ( ).
2. Click at the two tendon high points. The low point (End 2) automatically locates at the midpoint of the
tendon.
The low point can be adjusted with the Stretch tool ( ) or the “Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads”
option in the Tendon Properties dialog box.
29.14.3 Drawing a multi-span tendon with the tendon polyline
The Tendon Polyline tool ( ) allows you to draw a series of full span tendons with fewer mouse clicks.
1.
Select the Tendon Polyline tool ( ).
2. Click a series of tendon high points. The low points (End 2) automatically locate at the midpoint of high
points.
3. Right-click after clicking the last high point.
4. Click Enter
29.15 Drawing multiple tendons

You can draw a group of tendons in one operation with the tendon panel tools. You designate the panel to lay out
the tendons, along with the desired tendon spacing, and RAM Concept draws the tendons.

Defining Tendons
The drawing process requires you to draw the panel points sequentially in a clockwise or counter-clockwise
manner to form a quadrilateral.
29.15.1 Tendon panel layout options

Layout The choices are Parallel and Splayed.
Figure 151: Tendons with parallel layout and spacing not to exceed five feet.
Tendons with splayed layout and spacing not to exceed five

feet.

Defining Tendons
Figure 152:
Tendon Spacing The choices are Fixed, Equal and Auto Connect.
“Fixed” draws tendons at exactly the specified spacing distance apart. It is not available with splayed tendons.
“Equal (not to exceed maximum)” draws tendons an equal distance apart that is at most the spacing value.
“Auto connect (based on last edge)” draws tendons connected to the profile points on the last edge of the tendon
panel area.
Skip Start Tendon / Skip End Tendon Omits edge tendons.

Defining Tendons
Figure 153: Tendons after Auto Connect.

Defining Tendons
Figure 154: Tendons after Auto Connect.
To draw a Half-Span Tendon Panel

1.
Select the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ).
2. Click at the tendon high and low points of the first tendon in the tendon panel area.
3. Click at the tendon low and high points of the opposite edge of the tendon panel area.
The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4. Select options (see discussion above).
To draw a Full-Span Tendon Panel

1.
Select the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ).
2. Click at the tendon high points of the first tendon in the tendon panel area.

Defining Tendons
Editing tendons
3. Click at the tendon high points of the opposite edge of the tendon panel area (following a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction).
The Tendon Panel dialog box appears after the fourth click.
4. Select options (see discussion above).
Note: A low point (End 2) automatically locates at the midpoint of each tendon.
29.16 Editing tendons

As with any object, you can edit tendons on the manual tendon layers after they are drawn.
29.16.1 Calc profile tool
You can adjust profiles manually or use the Calc Profile tool ( ) for automatic adjustment.
Too much uplift in a tendon can cause deflection reversals that may crack the slab. For this and other reasons, it
is a good idea to have the amount of uplift or load balance somewhat consistent from span to span.
To edit a tendon based on uplift
1. Select a tendon segment.

2.
Click the Calc Profile tool ( ).The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the current balance
load.
3. Input the desired balance load (values are typically negative) in the Calc Tendon Profile dialog box and click
Calc.
The low point (end 2) adjusts to provide the desired uplift. You can select two segments in the same span and
RAM Concept calculates the low point based on average uplift. It is generally not necessary to balance exactly the
same amount of load in each span. It is not advisable to have an excessive number of different low points.
Manually rounding the profile values can produce a more practical design.
If the desired balance load is too high then RAM Concept could calculate a negative profile that causes an error
when calculating the results.
Note: RAM Concept does not check cover violations
29.16.2 Change profiles tool

When a plan viewing one of the tendon layers is active, RAM Concept adds a Change Profiles items to the Tools
menu.
This menu item allows you to change all tendon profiles with a given value to a new value. This can be very
useful in circumstances such as change slab or beam depths.

Defining Tendons
About jacks
1. Open a plan from the Latitude Tendon or Longitude Tendon layer.

2. Choose Tools > Change Profiles.
The Change Tendon Profiles dialog box appears.
3. Enter the profile value that you wish to change.
4. Enter the new profile value.
5. Uncheck either tendon layer that you do not want edited.
6. Uncheck either end number that you do not want edited, and click OK.
Figure 155: Change tendon profiles tool
29.17 About jacks

Jacks can be specified for tendons on manual tendon layers.
RAM Concept calculates the force losses in a tendon if you draw jacks at live (stressing) ends. If you draw a jack
at each end of a tendon then it is double end stressed. If only one jack is drawn then the other end of the tendon
is a dead end. If you draw a single jack on a tendon layer then every tendon on that layer must have at least one
jack attached.
RAM Concept uses the relevant value of fse (specified in the Materials criteria page) as the effective stress for any
tendon without a jack.

Defining Tendons
Drawing the jacks
29.18 Jack properties

Set the default jack properties in the Default Jack Properties dialog box by double clicking the Jack tool ( ). You
can choose to ignore the jack property values in the Jack Properties dialog and instead use the PT System values.
The following is a list of jack properties:
Jacking Stress The stress in the strand at the jack at jacking.
Anchor Friction Coefficient Loss of stress due to friction in the anchorage. It is a fraction with no units. You
would enter a 2% loss as 0.02. Most PT suppliers recommend a value of zero for unbonded tendons. You might
consult with a local PT supplier regarding bonded tendons.
Wobble Friction Coefficient Friction calculations use this property (k) to estimate losses due to accidental
curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). It is the product of the angle friction coefficient and the
accidental angular change per unit length.
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in particular) use a definition of wobble coefficient that is the
accidental angular change per unit length. These communities can calculate the wobble coefficient that Concept
uses, k, with the following relationship: k = AngularWobbleCoefficient * mu.
Angle Friction Coefficient Loss due to deliberate curvature (in the horizontal and vertical planes). Most
designers know it as mu.
Seating Distance The distance that the wedges recede into the anchorage. This occurs when the field operator
releases the tension in the jack.
Long Term Losses The sum of losses such as creep and shrinkage of concrete, and relaxation of strand. It also
includes the loss due to elastic shortening of the concrete even though it is a short-term loss.
29.19 Drawing the jacks

You draw jacks with the Jack tool ( ) by clicking a rectangle around the stressed ends of the tendons.
1. Select the Jack tool ( ).

2. Click at opposite corners of a rectangle encompassing the tendon live ends.
Note: You can delete a single jack by double clicking it. To delete multiple jacks, consider making all objects
except the jacks invisible, then select and delete the jacks.

Designing and Optimizing Post-tensioning
30
Designing post-tensioning traditionally has been a highly iterative and time-consuming process. There are
virtually an infinite number of valid post-tensioning designs for a given concrete floor system. Variations can
consist of different numbers of strands, in potentially different locations (layouts), and with different amounts of
drape. Each solution requires a different amount of rebar and punching shear reinforcement.
The traditional design approach for engineers has been to define a post-tensioning solution that satisfies the
minimum precompression and maximum spacing requirements in the system and then add strands until the
flexural tension stress limits are satisfied. For codes that do not use flexural tensile stress limits the number of
potential solutions is even larger as a wide array of post-tensioning, rebar, and punching shear combinations
could be employed. Drapes are often determined using a load balancing approach, where the drapes are set to
“balance” a predetermined fraction of the gravity loads. After the strand quantity and drapes have been
determined, the corresponding supplemental rebar and punching shear reinforcement are calculated.
Because the traditional process can be tedious and time consuming, engineers typically do not investigate many
design alternatives (normally only 1 or 2). As such, it is difficult to know how economical the final design is (total
cost of materials and labor for concrete, post-tensioning, rebar, and punching shear reinforcement).
The post-tensioning optimization feature in RAM Concept uses intelligent search algorithms to compare
thousands of design alternatives. This allows engineers to easily review and compare many different solutions
side by side and select the best design for the situation. For a given strand layout, the post-tensioning
optimization feature automatically weeds out invalid trials that do not satisfy required code criteria, which
eliminates the need for manual iteration and saves hours of engineering time.
30.1 What does RAM Concept’s optimization achieve?

Once you have set the initial post-tensioning layout and defined a reasonable range for tendons and profiles,
RAM Concept’s optimization process automatically searches for the most economical solution. Economical
solutions are defined as ones with lower total material and labor costs, and no failing design criteria. To calculate
the material and labor costs, RAM Concept uses the post-tensioning, rebar, and SSR quantities in the resulting
design multiplied by their respective cost factors, which are set by the user in the Estimate window (Report >
Estimate). Because changing the cost of a single material (due to availability, labor issues, etc.) may result in a
different most economical solution, it is important to set the costs in the estimate as accurately as possible for
the job and location being designed.

How does the optimization work?
30.2 What doesn’t RAM Concept’s optimization achieve?

RAM Concept’s optimizer cannot generate a good design from a bad tendon layout. Also, RAM Concept may not
find the best solution if the range of tendon quantities or profile elevations is set too narrow such that the best
solution lies outside this range.
30.3 How does the optimization work?

The optimization calculations are based in genetic algorithms, which takes a pool of the best trials found thus far,
mutates (modifies) them, and then crosses them with each other to create a new generation of trials. The best
trials from this generation are identified, and this new “elite” group is used to calculate the next generation by
mutating them and crossing them with each other. This process is repeated until the improvements over a
number of these cycles becomes smaller than a specified convergence tolerance.
Since this process requires many trials to be evaluated, cloud computing is employed to calculate many of these
trials in parallel. This decreases the optimization computation time and frees the user's desktop for other
processes.
30.4 Optimizable Objects

Banded tendon polylines, distributed tendon quadrilaterals, and profile polylines are currently optimizable in
RAM Concept.
This means that the program can automatically adjust the property values defined for these objects to solve for a
valid design and find the most economical solution. Manual tendons can be drawn and will be considered in the
calculations, but cannot be optimized. Therefore, while optimizing you will normally only work with objects on
the tendon parameters layer and not the manual tendon layer.
30.4.1 Banded Tendon Polyline

Banded tendon polylines can be optimized by selecting an existing polyline (or the default banded tendon
polyline), clicking Edit > Section Properties (or right-click and choose Selection Properties), and then clicking
on the Optimization tab.

Optimizable Objects
To optimize the banded tendon polyline, check the Optimize option, set the minimum and maximum values in
the range, and then the increment values to explore between the range. The values need not be integers. If there
are code limits that impose lower and upper values on this range, it is appropriate to set them here (for example,
precompression limits). For performance based codes with no lower or upper limits, it may be beneficial to set
the lower limit to 0 to explore the entire range of potential solutions.
30.4.2 Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral

Like the banded tendon polylines, distributed tendon quadrilaterals can also be optimized by selecting a
distributed tendon quadrilateral (or the default distributed tendon quadrilateral) clicking Edit > Section
Properties (or right-click and choose Selection Properties), and then clicking on the Optimization tab.

Optimizable Objects
To optimize the distributed tendon quadrilateral, check the Optimize option, set the minimum and maximum
values in the range, and then the increment values to explore between the range. If there are code limits that
impose lower and upper values on this range, it is appropriate to set them here (for example, precompression
limits). For performance based codes (with no lower or upper limits, it may be beneficial to set the lower limit to
0 to explore the entire range of potential solutions.
30.4.3 Profile Polylines

In RAM Concept, profile polylines control the elevation and control points of the tendon parameter objects that
cross them. Normally, these profile elevations are configured to “balance” a certain fraction of the gravity load
which often achieves the design objectives. RAM Concept can also optimize these profile elevations by selecting a
profile polyline (or the default profile polyline), clicking Edit > Section Properties (or right-click and choose
Selection Properties), and then clicking on the Optimization tab.
To optimize the profile polyline, check the Optimize option, set the minimum and maximum values in the range,
and then the increment values to explore between the range. Note that the elevation values set in the
optimization tab refer to the Elevation Reference set in the general tab. Usually, it is valuable to explore the
entire range of physical elevations within a member, as sometimes counterintuitive values work best.

Optimizable Objects
30.4.4 Optimization Regions

RAM Concept has an optimization layer on which optimization regions can be drawn. Optimization regions serve
the following purposes:
1. Break up a large optimization problem into smaller parts to keep total solution time in a reasonable range.
2. Identify a specific part of the floor to be optimized. If any optimization regions are drawn, only the objects
within the optimization region will be optimized. Optimizable objects outside the optimization region will be
considered in the calculations but will not be optimized.
If no optimization regions are drawn, the optimizable objects in the whole slab will be optimized.
The number of optimizable objects can be displayed on this layer by selecting visible objects and on the
Optimization tab check the Number of optimizable objects option. The optimization regions can also be given
user defined names by selecting a region and choosing selection properties.

Optimizable Objects
The number of objects in a single region (or whole model) is limited to 75, with a recommended maximum of 50.
This can normally be achieved by drawing optimization regions of a size that might resemble a typical pour in
the structure. Note that optimizable objects are not permitted to cross optimization region boundaries. During
optimization preprocessing, banded tendon polylines and profile polylines will automatically be split at
optimization region boundaries. Distributed tendon quadrilaterals will also automatically be split, provided that
the post-split geometry results in quadrilateral shapes. If it does not, RAM Concept will provide an error message
that the geometry was too complicated for automatic splitting.
Grouped tendon objects that cross optimization region boundaries will also be automatically split and regrouped
according to the region in which they occur.

The Optimization Process
This can be resolved by manually manipulating the distributed tendon quadrilaterals such that they do not cross
optimization boundaries, or modifying the geometry of the distributed tendon quadrilaterals and optimization
regions such that splitting at the boundaries will result in quadrilateral shapes.
30.5 The Optimization Process

With the optimization objects defined, this section will focus on the process of carrying out an optimization on a
floor.
30.5.1 Defining Tendons and Profile Polylines

Before an optimization can begin, the tendon parameter objects (banded tendon polylines and distributed
tendon quadrilaterals) must be arranged in a logical fashion. This step essentially is no different than if the
model was going to be designed by hand. Banded tendons are normally aligned with the long axis of the building,
unless the columns align better in the orthogonal direction. A couple of helpful strategies can be employed
during this stage:
• Single tendon objects can be defined over large slabs, with the idea that the preprocessing will later
automatically split them at the optimization region boundaries.
• For end spans that are approximately the same length or larger than interior spans, added tendons will often
be necessary in these bays. The optimizer can calculate the quantity automatically, but the banded tendon
polylines need to be split at the end span and additional overlapping distributed tendon quadrilaterals drawn
in the end spans.
• Eliminating profile polylines that you do not need is a good idea as it can reduce the number of optimizable
objects.
• It is also possible to group profile polylines such that adjacent bays with identical spans get the same profile.
This may be desirable from the standpoint of the final design; however, caution should be exercised when
doing this as sometimes this can prevent the optimizer from arriving at the best solution.

•
You can use the Adjust Profile Polylines tool ( also found at Tools > Profile Polyline Tool) on the
Tendon Parameters Layer to help manipulate automatically generated tendons to prepare them for
optimization. This tool can automatically extend profile polylines to the slab edge, trim profile polylines to
the slab edge, delete short polylines, and connect nearby endpoints for polylines with like properties (which
merges them into a single polyline).
• In general, draw the distributed tendon quadrilaterals to be smaller than the optimization regions. This helps
ensure that the splitting results in quadrilateral objects. One way to achieve this is to draw them just large
enough to cover the slab, and later draw the optimization regions to extend outside the slab. This helps
ensure that the splitting results in quadrilateral objects.
• The high point (support polyline) elevations should normally be set to the highest possible elevation while
respecting the required concrete top cover. The low point (span polyline) elevations can be adjusted to
achieve the desired balanced load.
30.5.2 Setting Optimizable Properties

Once the tendons and profile polylines are defined, the optimizable properties can be selected and ranges and
increments set. Generally, all tendon objects (banded tendon polyline and distributed tendon quadrilateral)
should be set as optimizable. The ranges should be set broad, even if they are slightly outside values that might
be intuitively expected. For supplemental distributed tendon quadrilaterals that are drawn over the primary
quadrilaterals, the minimum range can be set to zero in case they are not necessary.
For the profile polylines, normally only the low point (span polyline) elevations are adjusted, leaving the high
point (support polyline) elevations at the highest possible elevation. These high point elevations should then be
set with their Optimize check box left unchecked. The only exception is the high point at a cantilever support,
which may sometime need to be reduced from the maximum value so the cantilever is not overbalanced. This,
and any other support profile polyline that is appropriate, can be set to be optimized with a reasonable range.
Normally, all span profile polylines will all be set to be optimizable, with a range set to the entire physical range
of valid profiles that fit within the concrete while respecting covers. The increments for profile polylines can be
set to standard support chair increments, or something large, if desired.
30.5.3 Defining Optimization Regions

Once the tendons and profile polylines are defined and optimizable properties are set, you can define
optimization regions by using the Optimization Layer using the Optimization Region tool ( also found at
Tools > Optimization Region).
The maximum recommended number of optimizable properties in a single region is 50, with a hard limit set at
75. There are two ways to see how many optimizable properties are currently defined:
1. Clicking the optimize tendons tool will bring up a dialog that displays the number of optimizable properties
in each region (see next section for more details).
2. Alternatively, if optimization regions are defined the number of optimizable properties can be displayed as a
property of that region using visible objects.
A good rule of thumb that will normally result in an acceptable number of optimizable objects in each region is
to define the optimization regions in a similar way to how the floor is expected to be broken into pours. This has

the added benefit that tendon quantities can change at region boundaries (due to object splitting), which is also
normally possible at pour breaks.
It is good practice to draw optimization regions using snaps in such a way that their corners along a common
edge are connected to prevent small gaps or overlaps causing problems with the optimization.
30.5.4 Starting an Optimization

Before optimizations can be run in RAM Concept, the user must be signed into the CONNECTION client and a
project must be associated with the model.
A new optimization can be started by selecting the Optimize Tendons tool ( also found at Optimize >
Optimize Tendons). This will start a preprocess that performs a series of checks, and splits the tendon and
profile polyline objects (if necessary). If this preprocess changes the file, you will be prompted with a Save As
dialog to have the opportunity to keep the original version as well as the modified version. Then the Start
Optimization dialog will open.
It is possible to start a series of parallel optimizations on the same file, with each of these optimizations called a
scenario.

Optimization This box identifies each optimization region (by name, if any) and the number of
Regions optimization properties associated with it. If no optimization regions are defined, “whole
slab” will appear of the region name.
Number of Trials This slider tells the optimizer how hard to look for the best solution, with the left end
representing a less intensive search with the lowest usage cost, and the right end
representing the most intensive search with the highest usage cost. For most situations,
the slider can be placed at the default location in the center with a good chance of finding
the optimal solution at a low cost.
Seed with model’s This option tells the optimizer to use the current tendon and profile parameters as a
current starting point in the optimization. This may reduce the total number of iterations needed
parameters to complete the optimization. You could check this if you have manually iterated to what
you think is a good design and you want the optimizer to see if it can improve it.
Maximum Number This value tells RAM Concept to stop the optimization after the specified number of
of Iterations search iterations, even if the given convergence criteria has not been met. This parameter
could be used to stop a model that is struggling to converge and running indefinitely.
Most models will converge in less than about 100 iterations, so this should not normally
be a factor.
Number of Non- This value tells the optimizer the range over which to measure the % change for
Improvement convergence purposes. For example, a value of 20 tells the optimizer to take the
Iterations percentage change between the best solution found through this iteration and the best
solution found 20 iterations ago when testing against the Improvement Tolerance.
Improvement This value tells the optimizer when to stop because it thinks it has converged upon an
Tolerance (%) optimum solution. The percent change is measured over the number of non-
improvement iterations value. Setting this number very small could cause the optimizer
to calculate a large number of iterations with little improvement, driving up the cost of
the optimization.
Maximum ACU This value tells the optimizer to stop when a specified number of ACUs are consumed.
Consumption When the threshold is reached and the optimization is stopped, the Edit button can be
used to increase the specified maximum value. The optimization can then be continued
by clicking Resume.
Clicking OK on this dialog will start the optimization.

Related Links
• To Associate a CONNECTED Project with Your File (on page 154)
• To Register a CONNECTED Project (on page 157)
30.5.5 Saving Optimization Data

When an optimization is started, RAM Concept automatically creates a local scenario folder to store the results of
the optimization. RAM Concept also saves a copy of the Concept (.cpt) file in the scenario folder along with the
scenario data. This model is referred to as the “scenario model.” This behavior is to ensure consistency between
the Concept file and any optimization data stored with it. The scenario model represents a snapshot of the model
at the point in time that the optimization was run. The original model, referred to as the “base model,” is not
affected by this behavior and can be modified after an optimization is run. Any number of optimizations (which
create associated scenario models) can be generated from a single base model. When viewing the optimization

manager with a base model open, the scenario table will show all optimizations that were started with that base
model. If you select any scenario and choose “load scenario model,” it will open the scenario model associated
with that scenario. The scenario model will also be automatically loaded when loading any trial from the Trials
table. This will close the base model (after prompting to save any unsaved changes that have been made). You
can make changes to a scenario model, but the changes cannot be saved as that would corrupt the scenario
model. Any changes made to a scenario model will be discarded without warning when loading any other trial or
loading the base model. It is possible to “save as” any changes to a scenario model and choose a different file
name. Once a scenario model is loaded, it is possible to navigate back to the base model it was created from by
choosing “Load Base Model.” This will close the scenario model (after prompting to save any unsaved changes
that have been made). The scenario model and base model can get out of sync if any changes are made to the
base model after the optimization is run, but this makes it possible to load and examine the state of any model at
the time any previous optimization was run.
30.5.6 Monitoring a Running Optimization

At any time, the status of a running optimization can be monitored by selecting the Optimization Manager tool
( also found at Optimize > Optimization Manager) which launches the Optimization Manager dialog.

Scenarios Table The top table shows information for scenarios that are running, completed, or stopped
running during the optimization.
Column Description
Name The unique name that given to the scenario when it was started
Status The state of the optimization (whether it is running, finished,
stopped, or failed due to a runtime error
Iterations Indicates how many iterations the optimization has completed
Completed
% Improvement The percentage improvement of the best trial in the last iteration,
measured against the best trial in the specified Number of Non-
Improvement Iterations. Until the number of Non-Improvement
iterations is reached, it will display N/A.
ACU (Analytical The standard unit of consumption for Bentley analytical cloud
Compute Unit) compute resources. The total number of ACU's consumed for a

Column Description
single optimization is calculated based on the total optimization
time and the Resource Consumption Rate noted in the Number of
Trials box.
Stop Suspends an optimization (it can be subsequently resumed).

Resume Restarts an optimization that is not running, either because it was stopped, experienced an
error, power outage, etc.
Edit Edit the properties, such as stopping criteria, of a stopped optimization.
Delete Deletes the scenario, including any local files and folders as well as any cloud storage.
Note: This cannot be undone.
Load Scenario Load the scenario model associated with the selected scenario (this action will close the
Model currently open model)
Export Scenario Exports the cost information for each trial of the scenario selected in the Scenarios Table to
Data a CSV file.
Load Base Load the base model associated with the currently loaded scenario model (only available
Model when a scenario model is open - this action will close the currently open model)
New Scenario Launches the Start Optimization dialog to start a new optimization/scenario.
Convergence Tabulates the Total Cost (y-axis) versus Total ACU's consumed (x-axis) for the selected
Chart scenario. Three lines are plotted: Best Overall Design (w/ penalty for failures), Best Overall
Design (w/o failure penalty), Best Valid Design (no failure).
Trials Table The bottom table displays the cost information and failures for each trial that is calculated.
The tables can be sorted by clicking on the column headers.
Column Description
Optimized Cost Sum of the material and labor costs for all the PT, rebar, and SSR in the
trial. The lowest value here is generally the most economical solution.
PT Cost Cost of material and labor for the PT in the trial.
Rebar Cost Cost of material and labor for the rebar in the trial.
SSR Cost Cost of the material and labor for the SSR in the trial.
Failures The number of design code criteria failures in the trial. The optimizer
should eliminate these, if possible, as the solution progresses. Any trial
with a failure is not considered a valid solution.
Model Cost Sum of the material and labor costs for PT, rebar, and SSR (Optimized
Cost) and the material and labor costs for concrete and formwork
Load Best Allows you to load the best trial that has been found to date in the model. The model can
then subsequently be run so that the details of the trial and its associated results can be
viewed and investigated. (this action will load the scenario model associated with the
current loaded scenario)

How Optimization Achieves Better Designs
Load Selected Allows you to load the trial selected in the Trials Table. The model can then subsequently be
run so that the details of the trial and its associated results can be viewed and investigated.
(this action will load the scenario model associated with the selected trial)
30.6 How Optimization Achieves Better Designs

With a good tendon layout provided, the optimization process in RAM Concept generally results in more
economical designs than an engineer would arrive at if designing manually in only a small fraction of the
engineering time. It does so by exploring a much wider array of alternatives and comparing them side by side,
where the manual design process is limited to only comparing a handful of alternatives due to the time it takes
to investigate each one.
For example, the optimizer does a good job of adjusting profile elevations to balance the moments at each of the
column joints, thereby limiting or eliminating punching shear reinforcement as well as the demand on the
columns. It is impractical for an engineer to do this manually due to the time it would take. The optimizer
produces best results that are not always intuitive, which is why it is difficult for engineers to arrive at these
solutions manually by looking at only a few alternatives.
30.6.1 Slab Thickness Comparison Analysis

Because the optimizer can solve for the design, it makes it quick and easy to compare solutions with different
slab thicknesses. This is prohibitive to do manually due to the time it takes to solve for the design for each slab
thickness. By referencing the span elevations from the soffit and the support elevations from the surface,
virtually no changes are required to set up an optimization model for a different slab thickness. These different
thickness runs can also be performed in parallel, using separate scenarios models created from the same base
model. To accomplish this:
1. Start an optimization scenario from the model with a given slab thickness.
2. On the mesh input layer, change the slab thickness and re-mesh.
Regenerating the mesh is important because the model is not re-meshed when it is passed into the optimizer.
3. Make any adjustments necessary to the properties in the model.
Normally this will be minimal, the most common being adjustments to the tendon optimization ranges to
enforce proper precompression limits.
4. Start a new optimization scenario.
If you want to explore multiple different slab thicknesses simultaneously, you can repeat this process for each
different slab thickness. Generally setting up each different thickness model only takes a few minutes. After the
optimizations are finished, you can load the scenario models, load the best trials, and compile the best design
data into a chart to allow side by side comparison.

How Optimization Achieves Better Designs
From a chart like this, it is easy to see that the most economical slab depth is 10". There may be other
performance/serviceability considerations, but these can be easily explored by loading the best model from each
thickness optimization and comparing them side by side.

Using Live Load Reduction
31
RAM Concept can automatically perform live load reduction calculations on columns, punching checks, design
strip segments and design sections per the requirements of the selected live load reduction code.
31.1 About Live Load Reduction

Most design codes allow the design of members supporting large areas to ignore a fraction of the live load effects
on the member. This “live load reduction” is allowed because the probability of all of a large supported area
being simultaneously fully loaded is small. While each code has its own rules, the common approach is that the
larger the supported area, the larger the allowed reduction, up to a limit.
31.2 Live Load Reduction Options

RAM Concept currently allows several different live load reduction calculation options:
ASCE 7-02 – Reduction using ASCE 7-02, section 4.8.

IBC 2003 – Reduction using IBC 2003, section 1607.9.
UBC 1997 – Reduction per UBC 1997, section 1607.5.
AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 – Reduction per AS/NZS 1170.1, section 3.4.2.
BS 6399-1:1996 – Reduction per BS 6399, sections 6.1 through 6.3.
IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction – Reduction per IS 875 (Part 2) section 3.2
Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Reduction per clause 6.3.1.2 and UK Annex 2.5-2.6
National Building Code of Canada 2005 – Reduction per clause 4.1.5.9
None – No live load reduction is performed.

Live Loading Types
31.3 Setting the Live Load Reduction Code

You choose the live load reduction code in the Calc Options. The default live load reduction code is “None”,
causing no reductions to be used.
1. Choose Criteria > Calc Options

2. Choose the General tab
3. Choose the live load reduction code, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 156: Calc Options Dialog

Live Load Reduction Parameters
31.4 Live Loading Types

RAM Concept allows several different live loading types. These types are affected by live load reduction in
different ways, depending upon the design code. The types are:
Live (Reducible) Loading Standard live load reduction is performed
Live (Unreducible) Loading No live load reduction is performed
Live (Storage) Loading Special “storage” live load reduction is performed if allowed in the specified code.
Live (Parking) Loading Special “parking” live load reduction is performed if allowed in the specified code.
Live (Roof) Loading No live load reduction is performed.
These loading types are specified in the Loadings window. See section 10.2 though section 10.6 of Chapter 10,
“Specifying Loadings” for more information.
Note: Live (Roof) Loading is reducible in the RAM Structural System, but not in RAM Concept.
31.5 Live Load Reduction Parameters

RAM Concept uses up to six parameters to determine the allowed reduction factors:
Loading type - Only certain loading types may be reduced (as is discussed above)
Member type - Most codes have special reduction rules for certain member types (such as columns)
Maximum allowed reduction - The user may specify a maximum reduction value for each member.
Number of levels supported - Most codes consider the number of levels supported when calculating the
allowed reductions. If RAM Concept's automatic calculation of areas is used, then the number of levels supported
is assumed to be one.
Tributary area - Most codes use the tributary area of the member as the primary live load reduction parameter.
Influence area - RAM Concept has options for two codes that use the influence area of the member as the
primary live load reduction parameter.
RAM Concept calculates the last three parametric values. You can view the values on plan as described in “To
view the column element LLR results” and “To view the latitude design strip LLR results”.
You can override the calculation by specifying the parameters’ values. The next section describes how to edit
these values.
31.6 Specifying Live Load Reduction Parameters

You can specify live load reduction values for columns, punching checks, design strip segments and design
sections.
To specify overriding values for number of levels supported, tributary area, and influence area

Implementation of Live Load Reduction
1. Open the appropriate plan

2. Select the object(s)
3. Choose Edit > Selection properties
4. In the Default Properties dialog box (see the following figure):
a. Click the Live Load Reduction tab
b. Check the Use Specified LLR Parameters box
c. Set the values for LLR Levels, Trib Area, and Influence Area.
5. Click OK.
Figure 157: Live Load Reduction Properties
31.7 Implementation of Live Load Reduction

See Live Load Reduction Notes (on page 818) for information on RAM Concept’s implementation of live load
reduction.

Calculating Results
32
You generally calculate results many times during the modeling and design process. You can calculate as soon as
elements have been generated (e.g. self-weight deflection) or wait until modeling is close to finished.
It is conceivable that you would not calculate results until all tendons, loads and design strips are drawn. It
makes sense, however, to “run” the file during modeling to check for errors. That way you could avoid repeating
the same modeling error.
32.1 Calculating the results

You can calculate all or some of the results with or without a review of the calculation options.
32.1.1 Calculating all of the results

1. Click Calc All ( ), or choose Process > Calc All.
Modeling errors are common and you may encounter error messages when calculating results. If the file runs
successfully without errors, the Calc All icon becomes grayed-out. If errors occur then the calculator does not
become grayed-out. See “About analysis errors” for more information.
Related Links
• About analysis errors (on page 360)
32.1.2 Partially calculating the results

1. Do either of the following:
Click Calc Partial ( )
or
Select Process > Calc Partial

Calculating Results
Calculating the results
Figure 158: Calc dialog box
The slider on the left side of the Calc dialog box determines the level to which RAM Concept performs the
calculations. The options are:
Through Calculations are performed up to and including the global slab analysis (slab moments
analysis deflections, etc.) and the strip and section forces.
Through design RAM Concept performs the design of strips, sections and punching shear checks, in addition
to all the Through analysis calculations.
Through layout RAM Concept performs the layout of program reinforcement on the Reinforcement layer, in
addition to all the Through design calculations.
All RAM Concept performs the detailing of program reinforcement into individual bars
(viewable in perspectives), in addition to all the Through layout calculations.
The checkboxes on the right side of the Calc dialog window provide options on how RAM Concept performs the
calculations. The options are:
Skip warnings Optional warnings do not stop the calculations, but are added as notes to the Calc
Log. This setting is off by default.
Calculate only out-of- Existing calculation results are not replaced by new calculations unless RAM Concept
date items detects that the existing calculations are out-of-date. This setting is on by default.
Warnings invalidate Previous calculation warnings are considered to invalidate their associated results,
calculations causing the re-calculation of the item that caused the warning. This setting is on by
default.
32.1.3 Calculation options

You can review and change the calculation options.
To access the Calc Options
1. Choose Criteria > Calc Options.

Calculating Results
2. Choose the General tab.
Figure 159: Calc options dialog, General tab
The following describes the calculation options:
32.1.4 General options

Auto-stabilize structure in X- and Y-directions Auto-stabilization introduces a small horizontal brace for
structures that have no horizontal restraint. This is only suitable for structures with no external horizontal loads.
Create viewable self-dead loading This setting controls whether RAM Concept creates loads that are viewable
in plans and perspectives for the self-dead loading. This setting has no effect on the actual loading calculations.
You would normally leave this unchecked.
Include supports above slab in self-dead loading This includes the weight of supports (columns and walls) as
loads. You should consider that RAM Concept bases punching shear calculations at columns below on the total
column reaction that includes any loads applied directly above.

Calculating Results
Include tendon component in punch check reaction This includes the vertical component of the tendon force
within the punch zone (which often reduces the punch check reaction). See “Contribution from the Vertical
Component of Prestress” in Step 1: Determine the force envelopes to be checked (on page 1189) for more
information.
Check capacity of long. user reinf. without designing additional program reinf. This option instructs RAM
Concept to perform a check of the existing defined longitudinal user reinforcement and post-tensioning and
report any failed locations. Since RAM Concept does not currently have user defined transverse (shear)
reinforcement, RAM Concept always performs a transverse shear (and SSR design for punching shear) design for
the given longitudinal reinforcement. When a “calc all” is run using this option, any program reinforcement will
be deleted before the start of the analysis and no additional program reinforcement will be designed.
Related Links
32.1.5 Code options

Design The applicable design code.
You can switch design codes during the design process. Note that switching codes does not automatically change
the load factors. See “Rebuilding load combinations” for information on changing code specific load factors.
Live load reduction The applicable loading code.
See Chapter 27, “Using Live Load Reduction”, for information on the loading code.
32.1.6 Zero tension iteration options

If a mat is flexible or there are large overturning loads then the springs may initially be resisting tension. You can
reduce this tension by iteration.
Zero tension iterations use an “accelerator” factor to make convergence faster. An accelerator value of 1 results
in no acceleration, while a value that is too large may result in wild oscillations instead of convergence. RAM
Concept calculates the accelerator value as follows:
accelerator = (T j / T i )power ≤ maxAccelerator
where
Tj = the tension force offset in iteration j (j = i+1)
Ti = the tension force offset in iteration i
power = the user-controlled “Accelerator Power” (typically 1.0)
maxAccelerator = the user-controlled maximum allowed acceleration
(typically 1.5)
Iterations to use The number of iterations used in calculations. The higher the number of iterations, the closer
the tension is to zero.
Accelerator Power The power in the above formula; typically this is 1.
Max. Acceleration The maximum allowed acceleration.

Calculating Results
32.1.7 Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters

There are five parameters that influence how Concept lays out and details reinforcement.
Three of the parameters are layout “cost” values that affect RAM Concept's priorities when laying out program
reinforcement. They have no effect on user reinforcement.
The cost parameters are:
Bar Length Cost When this value is increased RAM Concept gives a higher priority to minimizing the weight of
the reinforcement. This also causes RAM Concept to create a larger number of callouts.
Bar Group Length Cost When this value is increased RAM Concept gives a higher priority to minimizing the
total length of all of the callouts summed together. This also causes RAM Concept to use more reinforcement
than necessary in some areas.
Bar Callout Cost When this value is increased RAM Concept gives a higher priority to minimizing the total
number of callouts. This also causes RAM Concept to use more reinforcement than necessary in some areas, and
may cause RAM Concept to provide reinforcement where none is required.
Using the default values for these three cost parameters usually results in acceptable program reinforcement
layouts. However, you may want to try adjusting these parameters if you want RAM Concept to arrive at
different layouts.
The other two parameters are as follows:
Bar Rounding Length RAM Concept lays out the program reinforcement with lengths that are a multiple of this
value. The only instance where the program reinforcement does not use this rounding length is where both ends
of a reinforcement callout are not straight (they are hooked or anchored).
Bar End Cover RAM Concept uses this value when detailing both user and program reinforcement. Bar ends -
except for bar ends with anchors - are always pulled back from slab edges by this amount.
32.1.8 Load History / ECR tab

These are parameters that apply to RAM Concept's load history calculations.

Calculating Results
Figure 160: Calc options dialog, Load History / ECR tab
Load History Options

Creep/Shrinkage The design code model used to determine creep and shrinkage strains over time. Available
Model selections include ACI 209R-92 (ECR Values), ACI 209.2R-08/GL 200, AS 3600-2018, and
Eurocode 2-2004. See Creep and Shrinkage Models (on page 1180) for additional
information.
Initial Load The time of application of the initial loads. This becomes the start time of the first load
Application history step specified in the Load History Criteria page.
Cure Duration The duration of the moist cure period. This is used in the calculation of shrinkage strains.
Ageing The coefficient that accounts for various behaviors in the calculation of sustained loads. See
Coefficient Load History Deflections (on page 1176) for additional information.
External A percentage of the free shrinkage strain to consider as externally restrained. The
Shrinkage shrinkage restraint is used to calculate a hypothetical tension strain which is included in
Restraint the tension stiffening calculations. The user may select one of the pre-set options mapped
below or enter a specific value in the field box. See Load History Deflections (on page 1176)
for additional information.
Basic Creep (ACI 209.2-08/GL2000, AS 3600-2018, and Eurocode 2-2004 only). The unadjusted creep
Coefficient factor or coefficient as defined by the selected code model. When “code” is selected the
coefficient is determined as outlined in Creep and Shrinkage Models (on page 1180). You
may also enter a specific value in the field box.

Calculating Results
Basic Shrinkage (ACI 209.2-08/GL2000 only). The unadjusted shrinkage strain as defined by the selected
Strain code model. When code is selected the coefficient is determined as outlined in Creep and
Shrinkage Models (on page 1180). You may also enter a specific value in the field box.
Basic (AS 3600-2018 and Eurocode 2-2004 only). The unadjusted autogenous shrinkage strain
Autogenous as defined by the selected code model.. When code is selected the coefficient is determined
Shrinkage Strain as outlined in Load History Deflections (on page 1176). You may also enter a specific value
in the field box.
Basic Drying (AS 3600-2018 and Eurocode 2-2004 only). The unadjusted drying shrinkage strain as
Shrinkage Strain defined by the selected code model. When “code” is selected the coefficient is determined
as outlined in Load History Deflections (on page 1176). The user may also enter a specific
value in the field box.
Relative (ACI 209.2-08/GL2000 and Eurocode 2-2004 only). The relative humidity as a percentage
Humidity used to determine adjustment factors for the basic creep coefficient and/or basic shrinkage
strain.
Environment (AS 3600-2018 only). The environment classification used to determine adjustment factor
k4 for the basic drying shrinkage strain that is defined in AS 3600-2018 3.1.7.2
Option Description
Arid k4 = 0.7
Interior k4 = 0.65
Temperate Inland k4 = 0.60
Tropical/Coastal k4 = 0.50
Exposure (ACI 209.2-08/GL2000, AS 3600-2018, and Eurocode 2-2004 only).Option to define the
concrete surfaces subject to shrinkage, which is used as an adjustment factor for creep and
shrinkage strain in some code models.
Options Description
Top and Bottom Both top and bottom of the cross section used to calculate surface
area subject to shrinkage.
Top Only Only the top of the cross section used to calculate surface area subject
to shrinkage.
Bottom Only Only the bottom of the cross section used to calculate surface area
subject to shrinkage.
Cement Class (ACI 209R-92 (ECR Values), ACI 209.2-08/GL2000, and Eurocode 2-2004 only). The
cement type used to determine adjustment factors for various parameters in the creep and
shrinkage models. Options for ACI 209R-92 (ECR Values) and ACI 209.2-08/GL2000 are
Type I, Type II, and Type III. For ACI 209R-92 (ECR Values) Type II results is assumed
equivalent to Type I. Options for Eurocode 2-2004 are Class S, Class N, and Class R.
ECR Options
RAM Concept calculates an effective curvature ratio (ECR) at every cross section:
ECR = Ce/Cg
where

Calculating Results
Ce = the effective cross section curvature

Cg = the gross section curvature
RAM Concept calculates Ce by the approximate formula:
Ce = (kc BSR Cg) + ((1 – BSR)Cccs)
where
kc = the concrete design creep factor (often 3.35) = total strain / elastic strain
Note: Most standards utilize a creep coefficient which is the ratio of

creep strain to initial strain. The creep factor in RAM Concept represents
the ratio of total strain (initial strain plus creep strain) to initial strain.
Before inputting into RAM Concept, a creep coefficient representing only
the creep strain would need to be increased by 1.0 to transform to a
creep factor representing the total strain. ACI 209 reports the value of
2.35 as an average creep coefficient, so the corresponding creep factor
would be 3.35. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a default.
BSR = Branson's Stress Ratio
Cccs = the cross section curvature considering cracking, creep and shrinkage
See Section Design Notes (on page 806) for further explanation.
Creep factor, kc As defined above. The input value should represent the final ultimate creep value and should
take into account concrete mix, environmental considerations, etc. and can reflect any
considerations required by regional building codes.
Shrinkage The design shrinkage value used to determine long-term curvature in cross sections. The
strain input value should represent the final ultimate shrinkage and should take into account
concrete mix, environmental considerations, etc. and can reflect any considerations required
by regional building codes.
Load History Convergence Options

These parameters apply to RAM Concept's load history calculations.
Convergence The maximum specified difference in calculated deflection between iterations in order
Tolerance to consider RAM Concept to have converged upon the solution.
32.1.9 Vibration options

Vibration and footfall analysis options are accessible on the vibrations tab.
These are parameters that apply to RAM Concept's vibration calculations.

Calculating Results
Figure 161: Calc options dialog, Vibrations tab
Number of The number of modes for RAM Concept to calculate in the Eigenvalue analysis.
modes
Dynamic The ratio of concrete modulus of elasticity to use in the dynamic analysis over the concrete
concrete modulus of elasticity defined for the static analysis.
modulus factor
Stiffness matrix Controls the stiffness matrix that is used to solve the Eigenvalue analysis. The global linear
elastic analysis model can be used, or any load history step can be selected.
Minimum The minimum footstep frequency to consider in the footfall analysis. Normal footstep rates
footstep range from 1.5 to 2.5 Hz.
frequency
Maximum The maximum footstep frequency to consider in the footfall analysis. Normal footstep rates
footstep range from 1.5 to 2.5 Hz.
frequency

Calculating Results
Damping Ratio The damping ratio to use in the vibration analysis, as a fraction of critical damping (damping
ratio = 1). Normal range for concrete buildings is 0.01 to 0.04.
Response Type Select one or both of the types:
Type Description
Resonant Check this option to perform a resonant response calculation. A
response resonant response tends to build up over time, and is generally most
critical for lower frequency modes less than about 4 times the footstep
frequency.
Impulsive Check this option to perform an impulsive response calculation. An
response impulsive response tends to dissipate before the next footstep, and is
generally most critical for higher frequency modes.
Resonant Option Description

Response
Options Simplifed (fast) This analysis uses a fast calculation technique that is generally
calculation suitable for day to day design where RMS velocity values are not
required.
Modal Analysis This analysis uses a comprehensive dynamic modal superposition
analysis which is suitable for structures that are vibrationally
sensitive or if RMS velocity values are required.
Parameter Description
Duration, Time Defines the number of time points that are used to calculate the
Increment modal analysis. The duration should generally be set to capture at
least 30 cycles of forcing and the time increment should be set to at
least 10 times shorter than the 4th harmonic of the fastest walking
frequency.
Weight of Person The static weight of the person walking.
Max natural Defines the maximum natural frequency that is used in the dynamic
frequency analysis for the resonant response.
Excitation Option Description

Nodes
All nodes Will consider excitation at every node.
Critical Nodes Will consider excitation only at nodes where the expected response factor
is greater than or equal to the Excitation Response Factor Threshold.
Parameter Description
Excitation Response Factor When considering Critical Nodes, the threshold value
Threshold of interest.
Response Option Description

Nodes
All DOF at all nodes Will calculate a response at every DOF at every node for the
Modal Analysis (not recommended).

Calculating Results
About analysis errors
Option Description
Vertical DOF at all nodes Will calculate a response at every node, but only for
vertical DOF.
Vertical DOF at only Will calculate a response only at the excited nodes.
excited node
32.2 About analysis errors

Two types of errors can occur during calculation: fatal and non-fatal. RAM Concept generates an Analysis Error
message if an error occurs.
If a fatal error occurs, analysis cannot continue. You must correct the problem, then recalculate. For example, if
the structure is unstable then RAM Concept cannot triangularize the stiffness matrix.
After non-fatal error occurs, you can choose whether to continue the analysis calculation or not. For example, if a
point load is not located on the structure, you can do one of the following:
• continue the analysis and ignore the point load
• fix the problem and continue calculation
• stop the analysis
32.3 Recalculating
Some or all of the calculation analysis information becomes out-dated when you edit the model. Click Calc All
( ) to run a new analysis calculation. If the Calc All option is grayed-out ( ), the analysis results are current.
When you recalculate, the analysis starts from the point where the information is no longer valid. For example, if
you were to add a load, it would not affect the stiffness matrix. The recalculation would start with the analysis of
loads and then move on to design. If you were to edit the concrete elements however, the calculation would start
from the beginning.
32.4 Calculating load history deflections

To calculate results
1. Click Calc Load History Deflections( ), or choose Process > Calc Load History Deflections.
If any calculations are out of date at the time, a “Calc All” will effectively be performed prior to calculating the
Load History Deflections.

Calculating Results
Calculating vibration analysis
32.5 Calculating vibration analysis

To calculate results
1. Click Calc Vibration Analysis(), or choose Process > Calc Vibration Analysis.
Note: If a load history stiffness matrix is selected, the load history analysis must be run after specifying the load
history step to use and prior to running the vibration analysis.
32.6 Reviewing the calc log

After RAM Concept calculates results, you can review the calc log to check for detected errors.
32.6.1 To open the Calc Log

1. Choose Report > Calc Log.
32.6.2 To open the Load History Calc Log

1. Choose Report > Load History Calc Log.
32.6.3 To open the Vibration Calc Log

1. Choose Report > Vibration Calc Log.
32.7 Decreasing calculation time

The time it takes RAM Concept to calculate results is dependent upon a number of parameters. You have control
over some of these parameters.
Desired Element The time to analyze the stiffness matrix is a function of the number of finite element nodes.
Size You can speed up the analysis time by using larger finite elements for preliminary work.
This means specifying a large Desired Element Size when generating the mesh.

Calculating Results
Decreasing calculation time
Design Strip The calculation time is a function of the number of span segment strip cross sections and
“Min Number of design sections on the slab. Each span segment strip with “n” internal divisions produces at
Divisions” and least “n+1” design cross sections; more if the maximum spacing governs. You can speed up
“Max Division the analysis time by using a small number of divisions and large maximum spacing for
Spacing” preliminary design.
Enveloping Load patterns and alternate envelope factors produce additional calculations. The RAM
Concept algorithms for enveloping are quite efficient and so do not slow down the
calculations very much. You could, however, speed up the calculation time by eliminating
load patterns and setting alternate envelope factors to the same as load factors in the Load
Combinations window (Choose Criteria > Load Combo to open the Load Combinations
window).
SSR Design Stud shear reinforcement design adds significantly to the calculation time. You might
consider delaying the drawing of punching checks until most of the design is close to finish.
Detailed Section A cracked section analysis takes significant time. If you are not interested in these results
Analysis or they are not appropriate then you can turn the detailed section analysis off.
In order to turn off a detailed section analysis, select Criteria > Design Rules and then
clear the Include detail section analysis check box in each design rule.
Load History Load history deflection calculation time is affected significantly by the number of cross
Deflections sections and the convergence tolerance/iterations to use. Calculation time can be reduced
by reducing the number of cross sections or increasing the convergence tolerance and/or
reducing the iterations to use.

Viewing the Results
33
RAM Concept produces a large volume of results from the model analysis.
If you take the time to understand how RAM Concept calculates results (and their accessibility), RAM Concept
can be a much more powerful tool in your workplace.
33.1 Type of results

You can view the results generated via text tables, plans, and perspectives on layers of the following types:
• Loading
• Load Combination
• Rule Set Design
• Vibrations
• Design Status
• Load History Deflections
To locate a particular result, you need to know on which layer it belongs. Only that layer contains the plans,
perspectives and text tables that show those results. For example, you find the Live Loading: Deflection Plan on
the Live Loading layer, but the service deflection is in the Service LC layer.
33.2 Viewing frequently used results

In general, using plans is the most useful way to view results. Most results of interest relate to the following:
• reinforcement quantities
• status
• deflections
• support reactions
• precompression
• load balance
• bending moment contours
• section stresses (for some codes)
• punching shear
• bearing pressures

Viewing the Results
Viewing frequently used results
This section explains how to find such results.
Note: When you create a new file without using a template, the file hasRAM Concept's default new file setup. The
default new file setup provides preconfigured plans to show some of the results in an organized way. You can
change these plans by editing the visible objects and plots. Keep in mind that this may void or make irrelevant
some of the instructions below.
33.2.1 Viewing reinforcement results

RAM Concept stores the envelope of all required reinforcement for all rule set designs in the Design Status
folder. There are a number of plans available to show different reinforcement. The names of reinforcement plans
in the default new file setup match the visible reinforcement.
To view reinforcement
1. Choose Layers > Design Status > Reinforcement Plan.
If this plan shows more information than you require, consider using an alternate plan such as the Longitude
Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
To view longitudinal direction bottom reinforcement

1. Choose Layers > Design Status > Longitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
To view a reinforcement plot

1. Choose a reinforcement plan.
2.
Choose View > Plot ( ).
The Plot dialog box appears with the Section Design dialog.
3. Check the Active box.
4. Select a reinforcement radio button.
5. Enter the Min Frame # and Max Frame #, and click OK.
33.2.2 Viewing status

It is possible for a concrete member not to comply with code irrespective of the reinforcement provided. For
example, there is a limit on how much shear a member can resist. RAM Concept reports a violation when the
shear exceeds the limit.
Status refers to code violations. When a design strip complies with all code rules in a rule set design then its
status is “OK”. If there are violations then the status is “Failed” or “Exceeded” (depending on the rule) and RAM
Concept identifies the code rule.
RAM Concept stores the envelope of status for all rule set designs in the design status layer folder.
1. Choose Layers > Design Status > Status Plan.

Viewing the Results
Note: There is no consideration of deflection limits in the status report.
33.2.3 Viewing deflections

You may be interested in a number of different deflection plans. Usually these are for vertical deflection but RAM
Concept does calculate lateral deflections and hence these are viewable.
All deflection intensity and contour plots use uncracked section (Igross) results and do not consider cracking
(unless the load factors have been increased for this purpose).
Note: Intensity and contour plots are accessed via the plot “Slab” tab.
Deflection results that do consider cracking are available via plots that use the Section Analysis tab and L.T.
Deflection plot.
Note: You could change these plans with the plot setting such that the plot is no longer consistent with the plan
name. As such, changing the plot is discouraged.
See Chapter 65, “Load History Deflections” for more information.
Note: “Slab” (identified by the plot tab) deflection plots are available for loadings and load combinations.
“Section Analysis” (identified by the plot tab) deflection plots are available for rule sets.
To view service deflection

1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC > Max Deflection Plan.
To view the strip-based long term deflection for ACI318 or BS8110

1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan.
To view the strip-based long term deflection for AS3600

1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Max Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan.
To view the strip-based long term deflection for EC2

1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Quasi-Permanent Service Design > L.T. Deflection Plan.
33.2.4 Viewing support reactions

Support reaction plans are available by default for most loadings and some load combinations.
Filtering can make trivial reactions invisible.

Viewing the Results
To view self-weight reactions

1. Choose Layers > Loadings > Self-Dead Loading > Reactions Plan.
To view live load reactions

1. Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Std Reactions Plan.
To view dead load reactions

1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > All Dead LC > Std Reactions Plan.
To view factored load reactions

1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC > Std Reactions Plan.
33.2.5 Viewing post-tensioning precompression (P/A)

Precompression plans can be useful for viewing the level of tendon prestress and the effect of restraining
supports. The default plans plot axial stress at mid-depth at each finite element node. These values include the
effects of the post-tensioning and the restraining effects of walls and columns in the specified direction.
To view the precompression in the x-direction
1. Choose Layers > Loadings > Balance Loading > Fx Precompression Plan.
Strip-based precompression plots with options to include or exclude the restraining effects can also be plotted.
Related Links
• Creating new result plans (on page 370)
33.2.6 Viewing balanced load percentages

You can view the percentage of load that is balanced by the post-tensioning within design strips.
To view the balanced load percentages on the latitude design strips plan
1. Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips Plan
2.
3. Check the Balanced Load Percentages box, and click OK.
Note: See “Calculating the balanced load percentages” for more information.
Related Links
• Calculating the balanced load percentages (on page 801)

Viewing the Results
33.2.7 Viewing bending moment contours

Bending moment contour plans can be useful for understanding the flexural behavior of complicated floors. The
Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ) increases the usefulness of the plan.
To view the factored moments about the x-axis
1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC > Mx Plan.
33.2.8 Viewing section stresses

Some codes have concrete stress limits for post-tensioned floors. You may want to know these stresses for the
Initial Service Design and Service Design. Usually you want to view stresses based upon the design strips rather
than contours, as the design process rarely uses peak stresses derived from contours.
To view the strip-based initial top stresses

1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service Design > Top Stress Plan.
To view the strip-based initial bottom stresses

1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Initial Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
To view the strip-based service top stresses

1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Top Stress Plan.
To view the strip-based service bottom stresses

1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress Plan.
Note: If too much information is visible then edit the plot. You could make the capacities invisible, or limit the
range of strip numbers
33.2.9 Viewing punching shear results

RAM Concept checks punching (or two-way) shear for the appropriate code. It calculates the stresses at each
vertex of a potential failure plane and compares the calculated stresses to allowable values.
To view the punching shear status
1. Select Layers > Design Status > Punching Shear Status Plan.

Viewing the Results
Note: “USR” is unreinforced stress ratio
Note: “RSR” is reinforced stress ratio
Note: “CTSR” is closed ties stress ratio. This is only available for AS3600. See The “AS 3600 Punching Shear
Model” of Chapter 66, “Punching Shear Design Notes”.
Related Links
• AS 3600 Punching Shear Design (on page 1200)
To view the punching shear SSR

1. Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan.
33.2.10 Viewing live load reduction results

You can view live load reduction results for each “member” (columns, punching checks, design strip segments
and design sections) and some loadings.
To view the column element LLR results
1. Choose Layers > Element > Slab Summary Plan.

2.
3. Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK.
To view the latitude design strip LLR results

1. Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Strip Plan.
2.
3. Check the LLR Parameters box, and click OK.
33.2.11 Viewing soil bearing pressures

Files created with “Mat foundation” checked in the New File dialog box have bearing pressure plans provided.
To view live loading soil bearing pressure
1. Choose Layers > Loadings > Live Loading > Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
To view service soil bearing pressure

1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC > Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Note: You can add soil bearing pressure plans to files. See “Creating new result plans”.

Viewing the Results
Viewing other results
Related Links
• Creating new result plans (on page 370)
33.3 Viewing other results

There are times when the result you seek is not visible on the default plans. The following describes how to
show such results.
33.3.1 Changing which result objects are visible

In the default new file setup, specific objects are visible by default. You can modify the visible objects to show
less or more results.
1.
2. Choose options in the Visible Objects dialog box and click OK
Note: See “Controlling views” for more information.
Related Links
• Controlling views (on page 60)
33.3.2 Changing which results plot

The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a perspective. The default file setup has specific plot
settings for particular plans or perspectives. You may decide to change the settings to suit your requirements, or
to make the plan easier to read.
1.
The Plot dialog box appears.
2. Make changes and click OK.
Note: The way plans and perspectives are named is often a reflection of the plot settings used. If you change the
plot settings, you might make the names inaccurate.
Note: You must first open the plan or perspective before you can use the plot command.
Plotting the strip bending moment on an existing plan

The following example demonstrates plotting the bending moment envelope on the Strength Design:
Reinforcement Plan:

Viewing the Results
• Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design > Reinforcement Plan.
•
• On the Strip tab, check “Active”.
• Select “Bending”
• Check “Maximum Moment”, and “Minimum Moment”.
• Click OK.
33.3.3 Creating new result plans

You can create new plans for results that are not available in the plans in the default new file setup. See Creating
new plans (on page 59) and Creating new perspectives (on page 60) for more information on how to create new
plans and perspectives.
Related Links
• Creating new plans (on page 59)
• Creating new perspectives (on page 60)
• Viewing post-tensioning precompression (P/A) (on page 366)
Creating a new bending moment plan

The following example demonstrates creating a bending moment plot plan for the Strength Rule Set.

2. Type a name.
For example, Strength BMD.
RAM Concept automatically appends the word “plan” to the name and prepends the layer name.
3. Select the Strength Design layer and then click OK.
The Visible Objects dialog box appears.
4. Click Show Nothing and then and click OK.
5.
6. Select the Section Analysis tab.
7. Check Active.
Keep the Value as Bending Moment
8. Uncheck Maximum Capacity and Minimum Capacity.
9. Click OK.
Note: You can select specific frame numbers in the dialog box. This could be used to show a plot for, say, a single
beam.
Note: You can selectively turn off left, middle and right strips. Left and right are the “half” middle strips. Center is
the column strip.

Viewing the Results
Creating a new reactions plan

The following example demonstrates creating a Service LC reactions plan:

2. Type a name.
For example, Reactions.
3. Select the Service LC layer and then click OK.
4. Click OK.
5.
6. Select the Reaction tab.
7. Check Active.
8. Select Standard.
9. Check the supports (under Value) for which you want to view reactions.
Creating a new precompression plan

The following example demonstrates configuring span segments to calculate precompression and then creating
a precompression plan for the User Minimum Rule Set.
To create the precompression plan:

2. Type a name.
For example, Precompression.
3. Select the User Minimum layer and then click OK.
4. Click Show Nothing and then click OK.
5.
6. Select the Section Analysis tab.
7. Check Active.
8. Toggle Precompression under Value.
9. Click OK.
The span segments must be configured to calculate precompression prior to viewing precompression stresses.
To configure existing span segments:
1. Select one or more existing span segments modeled on Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans
Plans.
2. Choose Edit > Selection Properties. The Edit Selected Items dialog box appears.
3. Select the General tab.
4. Check Consider as Post-Tensioned.

Viewing the Results
Section distribution plots
5. Select FseAps/Ac for Precompression Calc.

This will plot the effective tendon force multiplied by the perpendicular vector component of the tendon area
intersecting the section divided by the cross section area and will not include restraining effects of walls and
columns.
6. Click OK.
33.4 Section distribution plots

RAM Concept’s section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of analysis values across any line drawn
on the structure. These distribution plots can be very helpful in understanding the behavior of the structure
(especially for moments and deflections), but they are not intended to be used for quantitative design purposes.
33.4.1 Distribution plot values
Distribution plots are created using the Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ), Vertical Shear Distribution tool
( ), Axial Force Distribution tool ( ) and Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ). These plots display
predictions of values along the lines drawn across the slab. RAM Concept bases these predictions on the
calculated results of the individual elements.
RAM Concept’s calculation method guarantees that the results for design strip segments and design sections are
in equilibrium with the nodal loads. The results for plots across elements are not necessarily exact, however, and
can be much less accurate for coarse meshes or elements with high aspect ratios. Even though RAM Concept's
calculation method guarantees stored elastic energy of the stresses in each element is equal to the energy of the
loads applied to the element, for some oddly shaped elements (such as pointy triangles), the energy formulation
can result in local fictitious stress spikes. Note that this limitation does not affect design strip segments or design
sections and does not affect RAM Concept’s reinforcement calculations.
33.4.2 Moment distribution plots
You can create moment distribution plots using the Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ). The plot
displayed along the drawn line shows the distribution of bending moment about the axis of the line. The values
in the main 2D plot (if any) controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on the moment distribution
plot. The integrated moment value shown below the moment distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot,
but does not include the bending moment that is due to axial forces and variations in the centroid elevation of
the slab (such as the bending moment caused by axial forces in the web and flanges of a T-beam). You should use
design strips and design sections to determine design quantities as they capture both components of the
bending moment.
The following figure shows a moment distribution plot for My moments drawn on a contour plot for Mx
moments. The distribution plot shows My moments because the line drawn on the plan is parallel to the y-axis.
The distribution plot has an integrated value of –657 kip-ft and a peak value of –73.9 kips (or –-73.9 kip-ft/foot).
The contour plot values have no effect on the distribution plot values. If you used the Selected Plot Distribution

Viewing the Results
tool ( ) instead of the Bending Moment Distribution tool ( ), the contour plot and the distribution plot
would display the same values.
Figure 162: Moment distribution plot showing My moments on an Mx contour plot.
33.4.3 Shear distribution plots
You can create shear distribution plots using the Vertical Shear Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along
the drawn line shows the distribution of vertical shear force across the line. The values in the main 2D plot (if

Viewing the Results
any) controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on the shear distribution plot. The integrated shear
value shown below the shear distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot. Design strips and design sections
provide a more accurate calculation of this integrated value.
33.4.4 Axial force distribution plots
You can create axial force distribution plots using the Axial Force Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed
along the drawn line shows the distribution of axial (horizontal) force across the line. The values in the main 2D
plot (if any) controlled by the Plot ( ) dialog box have no effect on the axial force distribution plot. The
integrated axial force value shown below the axial force distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot.
Design strips and design sections provide a more accurate calculation of this integrated value.
33.4.5 Selected distribution plots

You can create selected distribution plots using the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ). The plot displayed along
the drawn line shows the distribution of the values shown in the main 2D plot (controlled in the Plot ( )
dialog box). The integrated value shown below the distribution plot is the sum of the area of the plot. This
integrated value may or may not be useful depending upon the plotted quantity (for example, the integration of a
top-stress plot is a force/length value, which is largely useless).
You need to take special care when using the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ) with the “max” and “min” axis
contour plots (such as a Service LC Max Bottom Stress Plan). The “max” and “min” stress plots show the
maximum or minimum principal value at every point in the slab. At each point along a selected plot distribution
of the principal values, the principal axes may be different. The integrated value for the distribution plot has
mathematical meaning, but does not have any structural meaning.
If you want to see the distribution of stresses (or moments, etc.) about a particular axis, you can use the Plot
( ) dialog box to set the contour plot axis (using the Value Plotted Axis) to be the axis of the results you want
to view. The Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ) then shows the values for that axis.
33.4.6 Effects of averaging

Distribution plots display the calculated results of the individual elements. At the shared edge of two elements,
RAM Concept uses simple averaging. This produces reasonable results in most cases, but can cause distortions of
the integrated result when RAM Concept averages a small element’s result with a large element’s result. The
selected distribution plots are additionally affected by the plan averaging that occurs in the 2D plot controlled by
the Plot ( ) dialog box.
This distortion caused by averaging is another reason why you should always use design strips and design
sections to determine design quantities.

Viewing the Results
Miscellaneous results information
33.4.7 Summary
Section distribution plots allow you to see the variation of analysis values across any line draw on the structure.
These distribution plots are very helpful in understanding the behavior of the structure, but you should not use
them for quantitative design purposes. You should always use design strips and design sections to determine
design quantities.
33.5 Miscellaneous results information

The following sections are for clarification of some results.
33.5.1 Top and bottom longitudinal reinforcement

RAM Concept shows longitudinal reinforcement on plan with the following parameters:
• number of bars
• bar type (as defined as a design strip property)
• length of the bars
• bar spacing
The reinforcement shown on the Rule Set Designs and Design Status layers represents what is required in
addition to any specified user reinforcement and does not include development length considerations. For a
complete consideration of all parameters including development length refer to the Reinforcement Layer.
The following two figures show top reinforcement at a column. There are two callouts because the design strips
terminate at the column. The required reinforcement is different on each side, as often happens. You need to
rationalize this information and detail the bars in a logical manner. The left hand reinforcement is nine #5 bars,
each 6.5 ft. long [nine 16 mm bars, each 1.8 m long].
Figure 163: Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (US units)
Figure 164: Design Status: Latitude Top Reinforcement Plan (metric)

Viewing the Results
The following two figures show bottom reinforcement. The reinforcement is thirteen #4 bars, each 9.5 ft. long
[fifteen 12 mm bars, each 2.9 m long].
Figure 165: Design Status: Bottom Reinforcement Plan (US units)
Figure 166: Design Status: Bottom Reinforcement Plan (metric)
33.5.2 Reinforcement bar lengths

RAM Concept calculates the reinforcement bar lengths by determining termination points. The termination
points are located at design strip segment cross sections where the bars are no longer required for any rule set
design.
The bar lengths shown on plan do not include development or embedment lengths.
33.5.3 Orientation of reinforcement

RAM Concept draws and plots reinforcement along an axis determined by the first and last cross section of the
design strip.
Top bars appear “over” the axis and parallel to it. Bottom bars appear “under” this axis and parallel to it.
Reinforcement plots are perpendicular to the axis.
The following figure shows the axis, line A-B, for a middle strip. Point A is at the midpoint of the first middle strip
cross section, and point B is the midpoint of the last middle strip cross section.
Design and capacity calculations always assume that the reinforcement (other than tendons) is perpendicular to
the cross sections. If the reinforcement is placed away from the perpendicular orientation (such as that shown in
the following figure), the reinforcement quantity may need to be increased.
Figure 167: Reinforcement drawing and plotting relative to local axis

Viewing the Results
33.5.4 Shear reinforcement

RAM Concept shows shear reinforcement zones on plan with the following parameters:
• number of spaces in the zone
• number of legs per shear reinforcement set
• spacing of the sets
• length of the zone
The following figure shows shear reinforcement.
For US units and bar size, the zone is 2.78 ft. long and has 4 spaces with two #4 legs @ 8.34” centers.
For metric units and bar size, the zone is 0.772 m long and has 4 spaces with two 12 mm legs @ 193” centers.
For both unit systems, there are five shear reinforcement sets (spaces + 1).
Figure 168: Design Status: Shear Reinforcement Plan (US and metric units).
33.5.5 Punching Shear Results

Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 66, “Punching Shear Design Notes”.
Non-Standard Sections: ACI 318 and CSA A23.3
Some times the punching shear status is “Non-Standard Section”. This is a warning, not an error. “Non-Standard
Section” means that at least one of the critical sections that RAM Concept is investigating for that column does
not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner.
When you get a “Non-Standard Section”, you need to inspect the critical sections that RAM Concept has defined,
and use your engineering judgment to determine if you feel they fit the ACI/CSA punching model (you should
always visually inspect the critical sections, even if RAM Concept does not flag them as non-standard). RAM
Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.
Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456

Viewing the Results
Some times the punching shear status is “Non-Standard Section”. This is a warning, not an error. “Non-Standard
Section” means that at least one of the critical sections that RAM Concept is investigating for that column does
not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner.
When you get a “Non-Standard Section”, you need to inspect the critical sections that RAM Concept has defined,
and use your engineering judgment to determine if you feel they fit the code punching model (you should always
visually inspect the critical sections, even if RAM Concept does not flag them as non-standard). RAM Concept still
calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.
If a punching section can be classified by any of the “standard” rules, it is considered to be a “standard” section.
The rules for “standard” sections are:
1. Interior Rectangular:
• must be uniform thickness
• must have 4 sides
• section centroid must coincide with column centroid
• opposite sides must be parallel and have same length
• adjacent sides must be perpendicular
• must be continuous (no gaps)
2. Edge Rectangular:
• opposite sides must be parallel and have same length
• adjacent sides must be perpendicular
• can only have two discontinuous ends (assumed at slab edge)
3. Corner Rectangular:
• sides must be perpendicular
4. Interior Round (circular shape idealized into straight line segments):
• section centroid must coincide with column centroid
• all segment ends must be on same radius from the center of the column
• must be continuous (no gaps)
5. Corner or Edge Round (circular shape idealized into straight line segments):
• column must be round
• can only have two segment end points that are a different radius from the center of the column than all
other segment end points (assumed at slab edge)
• discontinuous segment end points must be the “off radius” points (at slab edge)
Note: The rules are applied to EC2 sections before the corners are filleted.

34
Plotting Results
The plot settings control which results plot on a plan or a perspective. The default file setup has specific plot
settings for particular plans and perspectives. You can customize these settings or create new plans and
perspectives that show your desired plots.
Plot settings are controlled via the Plot dialog which is accessed through the Plot command ( ).
34.1 Setting the plotted results

You may decide to change the settings to suit your requirements.
To change a plot setting
1. Open the plan or perspective you want to change.

2.
ChooseView > Plot ( ).
3. Select a tab and check Active to make that plot active.
4. Make changes and click OK.
Note: The name of a plan or perspective is often indicative of its plot settings. If you change the plot settings, you
may want to rename the plan or perspective.
34.2 Slab
Checking the Active box in the Slab tab allows you to display and control various slab analysis plot quantities
such as moment, shear, axial, torsion, deflections, and area spring reactions. For plotting axial stresses or in-
plane shear stresses, select the depth at which to plot the value. Other plot values are not dependent upon depth.
For load history layer plots only, some additional plot quantities are available - see Load History Deflections (on
page 1176) for more information.
We recommend curve smoothing for contour plots. Without curve smoothing, contours will be plotted element
by element, which can make it difficult to observe the results of a larger region (also, for some plotted quantities,
nothing will be shown unless curve smoothing is on). RAM Concept allows you to define a resolution for the
selected plot value. Finer plot resolutions require longer screen regeneration times.

Plotting Results
Slab
For contour plots, you can control the frequency of the contour lines by unchecking “Use default magnitudes”
and entering the desired contour value. For color contour plots, you can set the upper and lower limits of the
contour values by entering the minimum and maximum values.
Slab plots are available for loading, load combination, rule set, and load history layers.
Figure 169: The plot dialog with slab result plotting active.
The “Animation Control” is described in more detail in the section, “Plotting Results.”

Plotting Results
Slab
34.2.1 About slab plotting contexts

There are three possible contexts: “Standard”, “Max” and “Min”. The Max and Min context are used to envelope
the maximum and minimum values for each point in the slab.
While the meaning of the Standard, Max and Min contexts is somewhat self-evident, the following table lists how
RAM Concept calculates these values considering load patterns and standard and alternate load factors.
34.2.2 Max and Min context slab plot limitations

RAM Concept stores only a limited number of slab analysis values. For example, standard, maximum and
minimum Mx, My and Mxy values are stored, while moment values about other axes (not x- or y- axis) are
calculated via Mohr’s Circle calculations. Similarly, standard, maximum and minimum Px, Py, Vxy, Mx, My and
Mxy values are used to calculate stress values at the top, center and bottom of the slab.
Because minimum and maximum values are not stored for these derived values, the calculation of the minimum
and maximum values is approximate.
Example: if one loading pattern gives an x-deflection of 10 and a y-deflection of 0, while another pattern gives a
x-deflection of 0 and a y-deflection of 10, the Max context deflection will be reported as 14.4, even though the
true maximum deflections never exceeded 10.
The following slab maximum and minimum context plot values should always be considered approximate:
• Values for any axis that is not the x- or y- axis.
• Stress values for any depth that is not mid-depth.
• Lateral deflection values for any depth that is not mid-depth.
• Lateral deflection values where the center of the slab is not at elevation zero.
Table 15: Calculation of Standard, Max and Min values
Layer Type Standard Max Min
Loading Values with full applied Maximum values that Minimum values that
loads (no pattern loading) occur considering each occur considering each
pattern loading (complete pattern loading (complete
with pattern factors) and with pattern factors) and
the full loading. the full loading.

Plotting Results
Reaction
Layer Type Standard Max Min
Single Linear combination of Values that occur when Values that occur when
Loading Standard values combining all loadings, combining all loadings,
Load Combination using the Standard load taking the maximum value taking the minimum value
factors of the following four of the following four
values for each loading: values for each loading:
• Standard Load Factor * • Standard Load Factor *
Max Max
• Alt Load Factor * Max • Alt Load Factor * Max
• Standard Load Factor * • Standard Load Factor *
Min Min
• Alt Load Factor * Min • Alt Load Factor * Min
Lateral Group (not available) Values that occur when Values that occur when
combining all gravity combining all gravity
Load Combination
loadings, taking the loadings, taking the
maximum value of the minimum value of the
following four values for following four values for
each loading: each loading:
• Std Load Factor * Max • Std Load Factor * Max
• Alt Load Factor * Max • Alt Load Factor * Max
• Std Load Factor * Min • Std Load Factor * Min
• Alt Load Factor * Min • Alt Load Factor * Min
Plus the maximum single Plus the minimum single
value of all of the lateral value of all of the lateral
loadings' (of the correct loadings' (of the correct
type) values: type) values:
• Std Lateral Load Factor • Std Lateral Load Factor
* Max * Max
• Alt Lateral Load Factor • Alt Lateral Load Factor
* Max * Max
• Std Lateral Load Factor • Std Lateral Load Factor
* Min * Min
• Alt Lateral Load Factor • Alt Lateral Load Factor
* Min * Min
Rule Set (not available) Maximum of all of the Minimum of all of the
related load combination related load combination
values values

Plotting Results
Reaction
34.3 Reaction
Checking the Active box in the Reaction tab allows you to display and control analysis reaction quantities.
Selecting the Standard context button displays reactions corresponding to the standard results (more
information about standard and enveloping results is available in Chapter 50, “Analysis Notes”). For the
standard results, you can display any number of reactions for column above/below, wall above/below, point
spring/support, line spring/support, and the standard reactions used for the punching checks. If a column above
and below occur at the same location in plan, and both Column Above and Column Below boxes are checked, the
sum of the reactions is shown at that location. The same holds true for walls above and below.
The other buttons in the Context group are for the enveloped results. RAM Concept displays reactions for
columns (above/below) and punching checks for the envelope result of the selected context. Wall reactions will
be enveloped and available for plotting in future versions.
The “standard” reaction context values are only available for loading and load combination layers, while the six
enveloped contexts are available for loading, load combination and rule set design layers.

Plotting Results
Reaction
Figure 170: Plot dialog reaction tab

Plotting Results
Reaction

Plotting Results
Strip
34.4 Strip
Checking the Active box in the Strip tab allows you to display analysis results for the design strips. Each plot
value represents the variation of the selected value at each design strip segment cross section (along the axis of
each strip selected). Plots related to the maximum and minimum moments and shears can be displayed, enabling
the envelope for a particular plot value to be displayed.

Plotting Results
Strip
The Torsion value is the torsion about the centroid of the design strip segment, in equilibrium with the element
nodal forces.
The Twist value is the component of the torsion due to the slab twisting moment (Mxy for design strips parallel
to the x- or y- axes) calculated from the element stress predictions (and is not necessarily in equilibrium with the
element nodal forces). The Twist value is not recommended for use in torsion design.
Absolute Twist is the sum of the absolute value of the twist along the cross section. This value differs from the
“Twist” value in that it is always positive, and that in its calculation, twist values of different signs do not cancel
out.
The Absolute Twist value is not used in design unless Wood-Armer torsion design is selected.
Note: The accuracy of the Twist and Absolute Twist values are determined from element stress predictions and
are dependent upon the quality and the refinement of the mesh. Unlike the Torsion value, there is no guarantee
that these values will be in equilibrium with the applied nodal loads.
Definitions of other values can be found in Chapter 50, “Analysis Notes”.

The “standard” strip context values are only available for loading and load combination layers, while the four
enveloped contexts are available for loading, load combination and rule set design layers.

Plotting Results
Section Analysis
Figure 173: Plot dialog strip tab.
34.5 Section Analysis

Checking the Active box in the Section Analysis tab allows you to display analysis and design results for the
design strips including moments, shears, stresses, crack width, and effective curvature ratio. The plotted analysis
results are for the envelope results. They can be plotted against the design capacity resulting from RAM
Concept’s final design. Note that some quantities may not have capacity values defined.

Plotting Results
Section Design
Section analysis plots are only available for rule set design layers.
Figure 174: Plot dialog section analysis tab.
34.6 Section Design

Checking the Active box in the Section Design tab allows you to plot top, bottom and shear reinforcement
quantities corresponding to RAM Concept’s final design or a design for a particular rule set.

Plotting Results
Section Design
The “Top Developed” and “Bottom Developed” values represent the amount of fully developed top and bottom
reinforcement that is required at each location.
Section design plots are only available for rule set designs and the design status layers.
Figure 175: Plot dialog section design tab
34.6.1 About section design “context” plots

The Section Design plot group box, “Context” allows for three possible contexts:

Plotting Results
Section Design
• With Span Detailing

• Without Span Detailing, and
• User Provided Reinf.
Span detailing is explained in Section 53.1 in Chapter 53, “Reinforcement Notes”.
The effects of the Span Detailing Contexts on plots are explained in the following two tables.
For the Design Status layer, the context of “With Span Detailing” includes the effects of the assumed
reinforcement development calculations in the plots of developed reinforcement.
34.6.2 About skyline plots

When you select the “With Span Detailing” or “User Provided Reinf” contexts, RAM Concept plots the
reinforcement with a “skyline” plot.
In a skyline plot, each calculated value is valid for a portion of the span (as shown by a horizontal line) instead of
the values being interpolated between cross sections. While this is primarily just a graphical difference, the
actual detailing of the reinforcement into bar callouts is performed using the skyline plot values.
For rule set designs, the effects of the Span Detailing Context (other than the skyline plotting) are as shown in
the following table.
For the Design Status layer, the effects of the Span Detailing Context (other than the skyline plotting) are as
shown in the second table below.
Table 16: Effects of span detailing context on rule set plots
Value Without span detailing With span detailing User provided

reinforcement
Top As calculated per section Values calculated per Vector component of area
section are lengthened of user individual bars
Bottom according to the span intersected by the cross
Top and Bottom detailer rules (see Section sections
53.1 “Span detailing” of
Chapter 53,
“Reinforcement Notes”) .
Top Dev As calculated per section As calculated per section Vector component of
developed area of user
Bottom Dev individual bars
intersected by the cross
sections
Shear As calculated per section As calculated per section (none)
Shear Density
Shear Spacing

Plotting Results
Punching Analysis
Table 17: Effects of Span Detailing Context on Design Status Plots
Value Without span detailing With span detailing User provided

reinforcement
Top As calculated per section Values calculated per Vector component of area
section are lengthened of user individual bars
Bottom intersected by the cross
according to the span
Top and Bottom detailer rules (see Section sections
53.1 “Span detailing” of
Chapter 53,
Top Dev As calculated per section Plotted values are the Vector component of
maximum of the developed area of user
Bottom Dev individual bars
reinforcement calculated
per section and the intersected by the cross
amount of developed sections
reinforcement calculated
from the span-detailed
amounts of non-
developed reinforcement
(see Section 53.1 “Span
detailing” of Chapter 53,
These values are used in
the final capacity check
calculations.
Shear As calculated per section As calculated per section (none)
Shear Density
Shear Spacing
34.7 Punching Analysis

Checking the Active box in the Punching Analysis tab allows you to display information about the punching
analysis including stresses for each critical section for any of the enveloped force sets. The values displayed are
for the selected critical section(s) with the selected force set, and are not necessarily the worst case for the
column. The most critical punching case can always be displayed by selecting the Max Stress Ratio button and
checking Section 1.
Punching analysis plots are only available for rule set design and the design status layers.

Plotting Results
Punching Analysis
Figure 176: Plot dialog punching analysis tab
34.7.1 Punching Shear Results

Punching shear design notes appear in Chapter 66, “Punching Shear Design Notes”.
There is discussion of “Non-Standard Section” in “Punching Shear sesults”.

Plotting Results
Vibration Analysis
34.8 Vibration Analysis
34.8.1 Vibration Results

Vibration analysis notes can be found in Vibration Analysis Notes (on page 1211).

Plotting Results
Plot Animation Controls
Figure 177: Plot dialog vibration analysis tab
34.9 Plot Animation Controls

Slab and Vibration plot data can be animated in an endless loop. The animation scales most plot values from
their normal values to zero and back. Vibration mode plot values are scaled from +1 to -1 to simulate oscillating
values. You have control over playing the animation, the number of animation frames, and the animation speed.

Plotting Results
Difference Plot Controls
Figure 178: Plot animation setup
To enable animation
1. Check the Enable Animation box.

2. Enter a positive number in # Frames.
34.9.1 Playing the Animation

When the Plot Settings dialog is confirmed, the first frame of the animation is displayed with the maximum plot
values. When the animation is played, the data will shrink to the minimum values, then grow to the maximum
and repeat.
Figure 179: Plot animation controller
Playing the animation is controlled by buttons in the main tool bar. Press the play/pause button to play or pause
the animation. The slider controls the duration of the animation. When set at the leftmost value (-), the duration
of the animation (from minimum to maximum values) will be approximately 10 seconds. The next slider
positions set the duration to 5 seconds, 2 seconds and 1 second. The rightmost value (+) plays the animation as
fast as possible.
Many Concept functions, such as zooming and panning, will function while the animation is playing, although
some mouse motions will freeze the animation temporarily. The animation speed slider can be changed at any
time.
The geometry for each animation frame is cached the first time the frame is displayed. A small status box is
displayed when the frame is being computed. Each subsequent display of a frame uses the cached geometry for
fast display. Pausing or resuming the animation while the animation frames are being computed does not affect
the cached data. However, the animation geometry cache is discarded when switching to another plan or
perspective view, and must be recomputed when switching back. Any change to the plot settings also invalidates
the cached geometry.
The cached geometry can consume a significant amount of process memory. Memory consumption grows
linearly with the number of frames. Intensity plots generally consume more memory than Color Contour plots,
and Color Contour plots consume much more memory than Contour line plots. The static portions of the scene,
e.g. slabs, walls and columns, do not contribute to the memory consumption.

Plotting Results
Difference Plot Controls
34.10 Difference Plot Controls

The difference between two plot layers can be plotted if the results of the two layers are compatible. Select the
layer to be subtracted from the Diff Layer choice box, or None if no difference is desired.
Figure 180: Plot difference control
Section Analysis, Section Design, Punching Analysis and Vibration results cannot be differenced. Otherwise, a
difference layer is compatible with the plot layer if the difference layer has results available for the data selected
in the plot layer. The dialog cannot be be confirmed if there is a difference incompatibility.
For example, consider Plot Layer set to Self-Dead Loading and Diff Layer set to Code Minimum Design. The Code
Minimum Design layer has results for Slab, Reaction and Strip, therefore any (or all) of these layers can be active.
The Code Minimum Design layer does not have standard context results; selecting the standard context on any of
the tabs will be incompatible. The text next to the Diff Layer choice box will describe the first incompatibility
detected.
Now consider the layers reversed, Plot Layer set to Code Minimum Design and Diff Layer set to Self-Dead
Loading. Any settings can be differenced on the Slab, Reaction and Strip tabs, because the Code Minimum Design
layer contains a subset of the results available in the Self-Dead Loading layer. However, activating any one of the
Section Analysis, Section Design or Punching Analysis tabs will be incompatible.

Using the Auditor
35
There will be times when a design result calculated by RAM Concept may be confusing or unexpected. This could
be due to incorrect input, an unusual set of resultants (for example: a negative moment at mid-span), or a code
rule interpretation. The Auditor assists in displaying design information for you to review.
35.1 How the Auditor can assist the design process

The Auditor is a tool that displays input data, parameters, resultants and code specific results for design strip
cross sections, design sections and punching checks.
The Auditor displays information that could be useful for:
1. Checking input data such as reinforcement bar cover.
2. Checking calculated data such as the elevation of the center of a reinforcement bar.
3. Reviewing the rule set designs (service, strength etc.)
4. Checking the envelope of resultants (moment, shear force, axial force etc.).
5. Revising the number of strands in a tendon to satisfy code stress limits.
35.2 About the three design steps

RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps:
Step 1: Each Rule set performs its “Pass 1” selection of reinforcement. For most rule sets this is the entire design.
Step 1b: The selected reinforcement of all the rule sets is summarized.
Step 2: Each Rule set performs its “Pass 2” selection of reinforcement needed in addition to that summarized in
step 1b. For most rule sets nothing happens in this step, but for some rule sets –such as shear design and
ductility design the summarized step 1 reinforcement needs to be known before the design can be performed.
Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no reinforcement is added in this step) and final analysis.
The Auditor reports the three steps as the following:
• Pass 1
• Pass 2
• Final check

Using the Auditor
About the information displayed by the Auditor
35.3 About the information displayed by the Auditor

The Auditor display information for a single cross section of one span segment strip, or a design section.
The Auditor displays the following:
1. Design strip and cross-section number, or design section number
2. Concrete components for a cross section
• number of concrete blocks
• top and bottom elevation of each block
• depth and width of each block
• initial and final strengths (cylinder and cube)
• initial and final Ec (modulus of elasticity) values
• density
• inclusion or exclusion of block from shear core
See “Concrete “Core” Determination” for discussion of shear core.
3. Reinforcement properties for each bar type
• elevation
• yield stress
• Ec (modulus of elasticity) value
• bar area
• bar diameter
4. Tendon properties for each tendon type
• elevation of cgs (center of gravity of strand) above datum
• ultimate strength (stress)
• yield stress
• effective stress
• Ec (modulus of elasticity) value
• area of strand
• bonding
• R-component [the component of the tendon parallel to the design strip cross section (perpendicular to the
design strip spine)]
• S-component [the component of the tendon perpendicular to the design strip cross-section (parallel to the
design strip spine)]
• Z-component [the vertical component of the tendon across the cross-section (only used for hyperstatic
calculations)]
• length
• initial concrete strain
• duct width
• number of strands per duct
• cross sectional area per strand
• number of ducts

Using the Auditor
About the information displayed by the Auditor
5. Base design envelopes (for each Rule Set Design):

The envelopes for maxima and minima of moment and shear force are displayed. These are modified, as
appropriate, for torsion and axial force design. The envelopes list the following resultants:
• Vr (horizontal shear)
• Ps (axial tension)
• Vz (vertical shear)
• Mr (bending)
• Ts (torsion)
• Mz (diaphragm bending)
6. Reinforcement (for each Rule Set Design):
Depending upon the rule set, RAM Concept adds reinforcement to the cross section.
• As Top
• As Bot.
• As Shear Density
• As Shear Spacing
• As Shear (density multiplied by spacing)
Brackets appear after each result showing which code rule governed.
7. Cross Section Forces (Analysis)
Depending upon the rule set, the Auditor displays cross section forces and other information.
• Cross Section Strains
• curvature
• top, centroid and bottom strains
• Concrete Forces for each block
• top and bottom stress
• force
• force elevation
• Untensioned reinforcement forces for each bar
• elevation
• strain
• stress
• bar area
• force
• Post-tensioning forces for each tendon
• elevation
• cross-section strain
• component cross-section strain (considers tendon angle)
• Tendon Force (effective force in cross section plane)
Related Links
• Concrete “Core” Determination (on page 816)

Using the Auditor
Using the Auditor
35.4 Using the Auditor

The Auditor can be used for specific rule set designs, or for the design summary.
Note: A rule set audit has significantly less data than a design summary audit. As such, a rule set audit may be
more useful.
1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Selected Design > Selected Plan
2. Select the Auditor tool ( ).
3. Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section, or design section, you wish to audit.
4. Scroll to find the information you require.
Note: You may find it convenient to make the design cross sections visible for the purpose of selecting the
correct one.
Note: The Auditor selects either (i) the nearest cross-section (of a visible span segment strip) to the point you
click, or (ii) nothing, if there is no cross section within 3 feet [1m] of the point you click. The cross-sections
themselves do not need to be visible.
Note: The Auditor will not display results if a Calc All has not been performed.
The Auditor’s results may not be current if the analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-out ( ),
the analysis results are current).
35.4.1 To use the Auditor for the design summary

1. Choose Layers > Design Status > Selected Plan.
2. Follow instructions for “strength rule set design” above.
35.5 Using the Auditor for guidance on post-tensioning

Certain codes limit the service stresses and designers are required to comply with the limits. The Auditor
displays advice on how much additional post-tensioning strand is required in a design strip to satisfy certain
code clauses.
This information is accessible from many plans, but the instructions below are for using the Service Rule Set
Design.
1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Status Plan
2. Select the Auditor tool ( ).

Using the Auditor
About the information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor
3. Click on the plan at the design strip cross-section which has failed a stress criterion and for which you
require guidance.
4. Scroll to the text bordered by two lines of asterisks (top and bottom) near the bottom of the audit.
5. Open all items
6. Search for the string "SUGGESTIONS" using the Report Viewer Find tool
If the maximum tensile stress is within code then the search string will not be found. If the calculated concrete
tensile stresses exceed the allowable limit then the Auditor suggests the percentage increase in strand required
to satisfy the stress limit.
SUGGESTIONS:
Top Stress Exceeds Tensile Limits:
Suggest increasing number of tendons by 8.4% or more.
(Due to diversion of prestress into other areas, above percentage may not be exact)
Figure 181: Auditor text indicating percentage increase required to comply with code.
Note: The precompression and balance effects of a tendon are not necessarily limited to the area (and design
strip) where the tendon is located. Due to the diversion of prestress (bleed of P/A) beyond the design strip the
suggested percentage increase may not be exact.
Note: If there are tendons intersecting the cross-section at an angle other than ninety degrees then the suggested
percentage increase may be inaccurate.
35.6 About the information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor

The information displayed by the Punching Check Auditor is for a punching check at a single column.
The Auditor displays the following:
1. Punching check number
2. Location (coordinates)
3. Geometry
• axis angle
• radius
4. Cover to CGS
5. Concrete Strength
6. Precompression
7. Resultant envelopes
8. Critical section perimeter properties
• number of critical sections
• perimeter length
• perimeter depth
• torsion strip properties (for AS3600)
9. Unreinforced stress ratio
10. Stud shear reinforcement rail properties (if required for design).
11. Summary

Using the Auditor
Using the Punching Check Auditor
35.7 Using the Punching Check Auditor

The Auditor can be used for the strength rule set design, or for the design summary.
1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Strength Design > Selected Plan
2. Select the Punching Check Auditor tool ( ).
3. Click on the plan at the punching check location you wish to audit.
Note: The Auditor will not display results if a Calc All has not been performed.
Note: The Auditor’s results may not be current if the analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is grayed-out
( ), the analysis results are current).
35.7.1 To use the Auditor for the design summary

1. Choose Layers > Design Status > Selected Plan.
2. Follow instructions for the “strength rule set design” above.

Using the Report Viewer
36
It is sometimes desirable to search, save or print a report for a particular aspect of the design. The report viewer
provides this functionality for auditor or punch check results.
36.1 Using the Report Viewer

The Report Viewer can be invoked for punch checks from the design strip layer, the design summary layer, or for
an individual rule set design layer. The information the report contains will always be the entire design
summary.
1.
Select the Report Viewer tool ( ).
2. Draw a rectangle around all the punch checks you wish to generate a report for.
The Report viewer window opens.
3. A report for each punch check will be contained on an individual tab. Select the tab for the desired punch
check.
Note: No report will be displayed if a Calc All has not been performed.
Note: The generated report’s results may not be current if the analysis is not current. (If the Calc All option is
grayed-out ( ), the analysis results are current).
36.2 Collapsing Sections

Cross Section Audit reports are displayed with collapsible sections to assist in managing the lengthy reports.
Clicking on the triangle next to a section heading opens or closes that section. All sections in the report can be
opened (or closed) by clicking on the Open/Close All Items button at the bottom of the window.

Saving Reports
36.3 Searching for Text

The report viewer has a Find Text feature to assist in locating the desired information. The search text entry area
is located at the bottom of the screen, next to the word “Find”. The page is repositioned at the next occurrence of
the text entered. The Next/Prev buttons position the page down/up to the next/previous occurrence of the
search string. The Match Case button controls whether the upper or lower case of the text is considered. The
Highlight All button causes all matching text to be highlighted.
Note: Only displayed text is searched. You may want to open all items before searching.
36.4 Saving Reports

It will sometimes be desirable to save generated reports. Reports can be saved individually as an HTML5 file or
as a zipped bundle of HTML5 files.
36.4.1 Saving One Report

To save the report displayed in the current tab of the Report Viewer
1. Select File > Save Tab from the Report Viewer menu.
2. Enter a filename and save the file.
The file will be saved as an HTML5 file, which may be opened by any web browser.
Note: As of this writing, not all web browsers available are capable of displaying the collapsible sections.
36.4.2 Saving All Reports

To save all reports in a zipped bundle of files
1. Select File > Save All from the Report Viewer menu.
2. Enter a filename and save the file.
The file created is a zip file of each tab's HTML5 output. The default file extension is .crvz.
36.5 Opening Previously Saved Reports

1. Select File > Open from the Report Viewer menu or the RAM Concept menu. Select “HTML” under “Files of
type:” to open a single report file or “RAM Concept Reports” to select a zipped bundle of reports.
2. Type or select the name of the file to be opened.

Printing Reports
The file will be opened in a new tab. If a bundle is selected, each file in the bundle will be opened in a new tab.
36.6 Printing Reports

1. Select File > Print from the Report Viewer menu.
The current tab will be opened in the print preview window.
2. Configure the desired print settings and select the print icon from the toolbar.
Note: The resolution of the printed report can be controlled by using the zoom controls on the View menu of the
Report Viewer.

Using the estimate
37
When preparing a design, it can be useful to know the amount and cost of the materials used in the model. The
estimate window serves this purpose.
The estimate is particularly useful for comparing preliminary schemes. You can also use it to compare changes
made to a design and in the optimization process.
RAM Concept automatically calculates material quantities. Specified unit costs allow supply and installation
costs to be calculated.
37.1 Viewing the estimate

The Estimate window lists the different material quantities and their unit costs for supply and installation
(labor).
1. Choose Report > Estimate.
37.2 What the estimate calculates

The material quantities calculated are:
Concrete The volume of the concrete floor excluding supports.

Formwork The area of horizontal soffit formwork.
Post-Tensioning The weight of strand based upon tendon plan length. This does not include stressing
tails or allowance for drape.
Mild Steel The weight of reinforcement based upon the detailed reinforcement in the
Reinforcing Reinforcement layer. This does include bar hooks, but does not include laps. The
quantities do not include bars not shown in the Reinforcement layer such as “detailing”
or tendon support bars.

Using the estimate
About unit costs
37.3 Editing the unit costs

You can only edit unit costs. The estimate separates unit costs into materials and installation (labor).
1. Choose Report > Estimate.

2. Enter the costs for each material.
Note: The costs update when you press <Enter> or <Tab>.
37.4 About unit costs

Unit costs can vary for many reasons, including the following:
• Region (labor availability and skill).
• Size of the floor and the project.
• Formwork system (usually flat slabs are more economical to form than beams).
• Post-tensioning costs are not the same for different systems. Unbonded systems are often less expensive in
some countries, but this may not be true if large bonded tendons are used in beams.
• Large diameter reinforcing bar is generally less expensive than small diameter bar for materials and labor.

38 Printing
RAM Concept provides a range of printing customization options to help you create professional printouts and
reports. You control the information included on a page and in a report. Every window in RAM Concept can be
printed individually or as part of a report. This chapter describes the printing features you can use to achieve the
result you want and offers techniques for printing efficiently.
Note: See “Determining the fit of plans” for more information on setting the print scale of plan windows.
38.1 Basic printing instructions

You can selectively print windows, or the entire report.
To print a window
1. Make the window you want to print the active window.

2. Choose Report > Print Window.
3. Select the printing options you want. See “General printing options” for more information.
4. Click Print.
Related Links
• General printing options (on page 410)
38.1.1 To print the report

1. Choose Report > Print Report
2. Select the printing options you want. See “General printing options” for more information.
3. Click Print.
Note: To make sure you get the desired printing results, preview the print job before you print. See “Previewing
the print job” for more information.
Related Links
• General printing options (on page 410)

Printing
General printing options
38.2 General printing options

The Print dialog tells RAM Concept what printer to use, which pages to print, and how many copies you need.
Review these settings every time you print a window or report.
38.2.1 Printer selection

Specify the printer you want RAM Concept to print via the Select and Configure Printers menu item. The printer
can also be selected in the Select Printer section of the Print dialog, but the per printer stored settings will not be
used. With the latest compatible drivers installed, RAM Concept can print on any Windows printer or plotter
connected directly to your computer or connected via a network.
Consult your printer documentation for information on setting up your printer and selecting the appropriate
printer driver.
38.2.2 Page range

In the Page Range section of the Print dialog box, select which pages to print:
• Use the All option to print all the pages in the report, or all the pages that are required to print the active
window.
• Specify the range of pages you want to print. Type a hyphen between two numbers to print the pages in that
range (inclusive). You must type the numbers separated by hyphens in ascending order (4-7, not 7-4).
38.2.3 Number of copies

In the Print dialog box, the Number of copies option indicates the number of printed copies of the print job you
want. Enter a value from 1 to 9999.
38.2.4 Printing to PDF

RAM Concept has the ability to print directly to the .pdf file format. Desired paper size, orientation, and margins
can be set up by choosing the Report > Setup PDF Export dialog.

Printing
Select and Configure Printer options
38.3 Select and Configure Printer options

In the Select and Configure Printer dialog box, you can set the printer, page size and source, default orientation,
and margin size for your printed pages. These per-printer settings are stored on your system and are used as the
default settings every time you print.
38.3.1 To change the print setup options

1. Choose Report > Select and Configure Printers.
2. Select the printer that is of interest.
3. Click on the Page Setup button and select the options that you want in the dialog that opens.
4. Click OK.
38.3.2 Printer selection

The last printer selected in the Select and Configure Printers dialog is the default printer for RAM Concept. RAM
Concept can print on any printer with the appropriate printer drivers installed.
38.3.3 Paper size and source

Select the paper size and paper source the printer uses from the Paper section of the Page Setup portion of the
Select and Configure Printer dialog. The printer selection dictates the options for the size and source.
38.3.4 Default orientation

In the Orientation section of the Page Setup portion of the Select and Configure Printers dialog, select the default
page orientation:
• Use Portrait for a vertical page orientation.
• Specify Landscape for a horizontal page orientation.
Page orientation is also customizable for each individual printed window in the Report Contents window. See
“Printing optimizations” for more information.

Printing
Determining the fit of plans
38.3.5 Margin size

Set the page margins in the Margins section of the Page Setup portion of the Select and Configure Printers dialog.
If the left, right, top, or bottom margin sizes you select overlap, or they are off the paper, an alert message
appears.
38.4 Determining the fit of plans

Plans print according to their Print Area and Print Scale settings. Everything within the printing area boundary
prints using as many pages as necessary to print at the desired scale.
38.4.1 To specify the print scale

1. Select the Print Scale tool ( ).
2. Enter the scale in the Print Scale dialog and click OK.
Note: Typically, you want to check “Set for all plans” in the Print Scale dialog if you are printing a report.
38.4.2 To specify the printed area on the plan

1. Select the Print Area tool ( ).
2. Click at two opposite corners to identify the rectangular boundary.
38.4.3 To specify the printed area with coordinates

1. Choose View > Print Area or double click on the Print Area tool ( ).
2. Uncheck the option to “Automatically calculate printing area” and enter the left, right, top, and bottom
coordinates in the Printing Area Setup dialog. Check “Set for all plans” if you want this printing area to be
used by all plans.
3. Click OK.
38.5 Printing the desired perspective viewpoint

The saved print viewpoint determines how a perspective window prints. Sometimes a viewpoint that looks good
on screen may not appear as desired in print due to the dimensions of the page. Remember to examine the print

Printing
Previewing the print job
preview carefully after setting the print viewpoint to verify that the scale and orientation of the model fit on the
page as intended.
Use the Set Print Viewpoint tool ( ) to save the print viewpoint to what is visible on screen. This viewpoint
does not change unless you reset it. You can manipulate the model on screen without affecting the saved print
viewpoint. To display the saved print viewpoint, use the Show Print Viewpoint tool ( ).
To set the print viewpoint
1. Adjust the on screen viewpoint by:

a.
Setting the relative scales of the coordinate axes using the Scale tool ( ).
b.
Rotating the model with the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) and the Rotate about z-axis tool ( ).
c. Zooming to show the desired portion of the model.
d. Setting the projection to Parallel Projection ( ) or Perspective Projection ( ) and the modeling to Solid
Modeling ( ) or Wire Modeling ( ).
2. Click Set Print Viewpoint ( ).
38.5.1 To show the set print viewpoint on screen

1. Click Show Print Viewpoint ( ).
38.6 Previewing the print job

Preview the print job before you send it to the printer to ensure the images and text fit as desired on the chosen
paper with the specified margin, and orientation settings. See “Select and Configure Printer options” for more
information on how to change the page setup.
38.6.1 To preview the active window print job

1. Choose Report > Window Preview.
2. Examine the preview as described in the following sections and click Close.
38.6.2 To preview the report print job

1. Choose Report > Report Preview.
2. Examine the preview as described in the following sections and click Close.

Printing
Printing optimizations
38.6.3 Zooming
Scale the print preview by setting the zoom percentage in the print preview window. You can choose a zoom
factor of 500%, 200%, 150%, 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 10%, Fit Page or Fit Width, or you can type a numeric
percentage of your choice (between 5% and 500%).
38.6.4 Viewing multiple pages at once

You can view the print preview one, two, or four pages at a time. Use One Page ( ) to view one page of the print
job at a time. Click Multi Page ( ) and select 2-up to view two pages at a time or 4-up to view four pages at
once.
38.6.5 Paging through the print job
The print preview automatically opens to the first page in the print job. Use Next ( ) to page forward through
the print job and Previous ( ) to page back.
38.7 Printing optimizations

To achieve the best possible results when printing, you may need to customize the page orientation and
appearance settings for the individual report items (or windows).
38.7.1 Customizing page orientation

You can print each window or report item in RAM Concept in Portrait or Landscape orientation. The default page
orientation is set in the Select and Configure Printer dialog box. See “Select and Configure Printer options” for
more information on setting the default orientation. You may want some items in a report or a specific window
to print in a different orientation than the rest. Use the Orientation column of the Report Contents window to
specify the orientation of an item. Choose Default to use the Page Setup settings, or Portrait or Landscape to
override the Page Setup orientation.
To set the orientation of a particular window or item
1. Make sure the Orientation column is visible in the Report Contents window. You may need to widen the
window or scroll horizontally.

Printing
Changing the report contents
2. Click on the Orientation column value for the item to toggle between Default, Portrait and Landscape. A value
of Default in the Orientation column sets the orientation to the default orientation set in the Page Setup
dialog box.
38.7.2 Customizing the printed appearance of plans and perspectives

In the same way that you change the colors, font, and line type of plan and perspective windows on the screen,
you can customize their appearance in print.
Use the Print tab for schemes in the Appearance dialog to set the appearance settings for a plan or perspective
you wish to print. See “Changing colors, font, and line type” for more information about appearance schemes and
changing appearance settings.
If you want the printed plan or perspective to have the same appearance settings as what you see in the
respective window, click Set Same As Screen on the Print tab. In most cases, you want:
• background color in printing to be white (no printed background)
• print font size to be smaller then the screen font
• print line scale to be larger then on screen
To change the printed appearance of a plan or perspective
1. Make the Plan or Perspective the active window.

2. Choose View > Appearance.
3. Specify options on the Print tab of the Appearance Settings dialog box and click OK.
Related Links
• Changing colors, font, and line type (on page 64)
38.8 Changing the report contents

The contents of the report are customizable to suit your specific needs. You have control over what plans,
perspectives and text items are included in a report and their order and orientation. You change the report
contents through the Report Contents window.

Printing
Figure 182: In the Report Contents Window, you can change the order of report items, set whether an item is
included in the report, and change the printed orientation or an item.
38.8.1 Including items in the report

Any window can be included as an item in the report. Modify the selection of plans, perspectives and tables to be
included in the report via the Report Contents window. Toggle the Include column value to specify whether an
item is included in the report or not.
For something to print in the report, it requires that its Include value is “Yes” and every item above it in the
report hierarchy is also “Yes”. For example, if you want the Standard Plan on the Latitude Tendon Layer to be
included in the report, the plan itself should have an Include value of “Yes”, the Latitude Tendon layer should be
“Yes” and the Layers folder should be “Yes”. Likewise, with an Include value of “No” for the Criteria folder, RAM
Concept does not include anything in that folder in the report.

Printing
This functionality is especially useful if you want to omit everything on a particular layer from the report. You
can do so with one click, rather then changing the Include value of every plan, perspective, and text table on that
layer to “No”.
1. Make sure the Include column is visible in the Report Contents window. You may need to widen the window
or scroll horizontally.
2. Click on the Include column value for the item you wish to include or exclude to toggle between Yes and No.
A value of Yes in the Include column includes the item in the report printout while a value of No excludes the
item.
Note: If you want to include an item in the report, make sure every item in the hierarchy above it is also
included.
Example
The following is an example list of windows you might include in a report for an elevated PT slab
using the ACI 318 design approach:
• Report Cover
• Units
• Signs
• Materials
• Loadings
• Load Combinations
• Design Rules
• Estimate
• Element: Standard Plan
• Element: Slab Summary Plan
• Element: Structure Summary Perspective
• Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan
• Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan
• Temporary Construction (at Stressing) Loading: All Loads Plan (if used)
• Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
• Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
• Live (Unreducible) Loading: All Loads Plan
• [other live loadings (Storage, Roof) if used]
• Service LC: Deflection Plan
• Factored LC: Mx Plan
• Factored LC: My Plan
• Factored LC: Reactions Plan
• Reinforcement: Latitude Bars Plan
• Reinforcement: Longitude Bars Plan
• Reinforcement: SSR Plan
• Design Status: Status Plan
• Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan
• Load History Deflection Plans

Printing
38.8.2 Reordering report items

The order of report items in the Report Contents window is the order they print in the report. You can reorder
items that are within the same folder or layer by dragging them to a new position. You cannot move items
outside their folder or layer. For example, you can move the Units item to a new location inside the Criteria
folder but you cannot move it into the Layers folder.
To change the location of a report item
1. In the Report Contents Window, press down on the left mouse button over the report item you want to move.
2. Drag the report item to its new location and release the left mouse button. (RAM Concept does not allow you
to move a report item outside of it’s folder or layer)

Exporting Plans and Tables
39
You can export any plan or text table in RAM Concept. RAM Concept supports export of plans as .dwg or .dxf
files in AutoCAD® R12 through AutoCAD® 2004 format. Tables export as text files, which you can open with
most spreadsheet software.
39.1 Exporting a plan

RAM Concept exports a plan with whatever information is visible at the time. You need to open a plan and make
it the active window before exporting. You make a plan the active window by clicking on it.
To export the active plan
1. Choose File > Export Drawing.

The Export Drawing dialog box appears.
2. Choose a name and type for the AutoCAD file and click Save.
The File Units dialog box appears.
3. Select the units for the AutoCAD file and click OK.
39.1.1 Selecting the text size

The exported text size depends on the visible text size on the screen. You can change the text size to suit the
export.
1. Choose View > Appearance.

2. In the Font section of the Appearance dialog box, click AaBbZz to select a font.
The point size of text is 72 times the actual size. Thus, 9 points is one-eighth of an inch.
3. In the Select Font dialog box, choose the font size and click OK.
4. Set the font scale to zero and click OK.
Note: Do not use Enlarge Fonts ( ) or Shrink Fonts ( ) to change the text size before exporting.

Exporting Plans and Tables
Exporting a table
39.2 Exporting a table

Text tables export to tab-delimited text files that you can open with most spreadsheet software.
1. Open the text table you wish to export.

2. Click Export (at the top of the window).
3. Enter a name for the text file and click Save.

Exporting a Database to the RAM Structural System
40
Note: In many places in this chapter the RAM Structural System is referred to as “RSS”.
RAM Concept has functions that can export reactions and geometry to the RAM Structural System.
40.1 About the export of reactions

RAM Concept has a function that exports wall and column reactions to the RAM Structural System.This export
capability allows RSS to use RAM Concept's accurate load distribution to calculate wall, column and foundation
gravity forces. The export capability also allows RSS to consider the effects of floor tendons on columns and
walls for post-tensioned structures.
This export capability only applies to elevated slab models created in RAM Concept by importing from the RAM
Structural System.
Note: The RAM Structural System requires RAM Concrete to consider the exported Concept reactions.
The RAM Concept force export function transfers column and wall reactions to the RAM Structural System
database.
The export only sets the wall and column reactions for the end of the columns and/or walls that are touching the
elevated slab. Exporting of reactions does not affect the support axial force of walls and columns above the slab.
The structure above the column or wall determines the axial force.
RAM Concept only exports reactions from gravity loadings imported from RSS back to RSS. For example, if you
add “Swimming Pool Loading” to a RAM Concept file, the export function will not transfer reactions from that
loading to RSS.
Note: RAM Concept does not export Construction Dead Loading reactions, as they would have no further use in
RSS.
Note: RAM Concept never exports lateral loadings (imported from RSS or otherwise) to RSS.
Note: “Loadings” in RAM Concept are analogous to “load cases” in RSS.

About the export of reactions
40.1.1 Special handling of the Self-Dead Loading and the Balance Loading during
export
RAM Concept adds the “Self-Dead Loading” reactions to the “Dead Load” reactions during export. This ensures
that the RAM Concrete Analysis of the structure considers the self-weight of the slab.
Note: The RAM Structural System provides the option to have beam and slab self-weights calculated
automatically, or input manually as part of the dead load case. Conversely, RAM Concept always automatically
includes beam and slab self-weights in its analysis. We recommend that, when using RSS in combination with
Concept, you have RSS automatically calculate the beam and slab self-weight loads. That will eliminate any
confusion regarding whether self-weight loads are included in the analysis or need to be manually specified as
part of the dead load case, even when some levels are designed with RSS and some levels are designed with
Concept.
RAM Concept does not currently export “Transfer” loading reactions to RSS. When analyzing a building with a
transfer slab, RSS uses its own internal distribution of the transfer forces in the slab rather than forces from RAM
Concept's floor analysis. RAM Concept’s exported “Direct” loading reactions will be used by RSS, if you so direct.
See “Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete” for further information.
RAM Concept exports the balance loading reactions to a “hyperstatic” load case that is only visible in RAM
Concrete. Generally, balance forces and hyperstatic forces are not the same, but for a support that contains no
tendons, however, the balance forces are equal to the hyperstatic forces.
Note: See “Post-tensioning loadings” for a discussion of balance and hyperstatic loadings.
Related Links
• Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete (on page 424)
40.1.2 Special handling of the Partition Loading during export

RAM Concept adds the “Partition Load” reactions to the “Live Load Unreducible” reactions during export.
40.1.3 The export of reactions process

You can export reactions to RSS at any time after you perform a “Calc All” operation and you save the file.
To export to the RAM Structural System
Choose File > Export Reactions to RAM Structural System.
A dialog box, as shown in the following figure, opens with a list of RSS story names to which you can export
reactions. RAM Concept labels one story name as “Source Story”. This is the RSS story previously imported to
create this RAM Concept file. RAM Concept lists other stories in the RSS file with the same floor type, and labels
them “Identical Story” or “Compatible Story”. A story is compatible with, but not identical to, the source story if it
has a different story height, member sizes, or (for the top story of the type) any columns above it have different
orientations.

Select any combination of stories, and click “OK”. RAM Concept displays a log detailing the results of the export
operation when the export is completed.
Figure 183: Export Reactions to RAM Structural System dialog box
40.1.4 About export reactions access and consistency checking

RAM Concept performs consistency checking before the actual export operation to ensure that it can export
reactions correctly. RAM Concept performs the checks before and after choosing the export stories.
40.1.5 Checks performed before choosing export stories

The first check performed is your access to the RSS file from which the RAM Concept floor was imported. The
export operation can proceed only if the RSS file exists, it is not currently open in RSS and you are able to access
and modify it.
RAM Concept also checks the RSS file for changes made to the source story since importation into the RAM
Concept file. If someone has made a “major” change to the source story, you must reimport from RSS and
recalculate results before exporting. If someone has made a “minor” change to the source story, RAM Concept
gives you the option of reimporting. Major changes include adding or deleting columns or walls. Changing a
column size is a minor change.

RAM Concept cannot export the file if someone has added columns or walls after importing from RSS, or if any
springs or rigid supports are present in the RAM Concept model.
40.1.6 Checks performed after choosing export stories

RAM Concept checks each story you choose to export against the RSS file in detail. If RAM Concept detects any
errors, you may cancel the export operation or return to the story selection window to deselect the stories with
errors. If RAM Concept issues only warnings, you may continue with the export or return to the story selection
window.
RAM Concept generates warnings for any columns or walls above the RAM Concept slab that do not have
matching columns or walls above the export story selected. This typically only happens at the highest story of
the floor type, where it transitions to a different floor type or the roof.
RAM Concept also generates warnings if a selected story's height is different from the source story height.
40.1.7 Using RAM Concept reactions in RAM Concrete

Once you export the column and wall reactions to RSS, they become available to RAM Concrete for analysis and
design purposes, but only if you inform RSS that you want to use them.
To set RAM Concrete to use RAM Concept’s reactions
1. Start RAM Concrete

2. Choose Criteria > Column Forces
Select the button at the top to “Use RAM Concept Analysis Forces at selected levels”. Select the levels by checking
the box in the “Use” column.
You can use this dialog to review the RSS levels that have RAM Concept forces and the RAM Concept file name
from which you exported the forces. The “Read” column displays the date you imported each level from RSS into
RAM Concept. The “Saved” column displays the date you exported member reactions from RAM Concept to that
level. The “Source Story” column indicates the source story of the RSS file used to import data into the RAM
Concept file. If the “Source Story”, “Saved” and “RAM Concept File” entries are empty, then you have not exported
member forces to that level. If the “Read” entry is empty, then you have never imported that level to RAM
Concept.
Note: RSS uses Concept wall reactions on all levels where Concept column reactions are used.
Note: After exporting Concept reactions to RSS, you will need to perform a RAM Concrete reanalysis of the
structure before designing any members or importing any member forces from RSS to Concept (such as for a
mat foundation).

About the export of geometry
40.1.8 How the RAM Structural System - RAM Concept link works
The key to the export of RAM Concept's reactions to RSS are the imported walls and columns and the imported
direct gravity loadings.
Walls and columns that you import from RSS have special RSS identifiers “tagged” to them. These identifiers
allow RAM Concept to match its column and wall elements to the corresponding members in RSS. RAM Concept
will even allow you to move the walls and columns slightly (up to 50mm or 2").
RAM Concept will not allow you to export if you add, delete, or significantly move imported columns or walls (or
do not import walls and columns). RAM Concept does this to ensure transfer of the full equilibrium gravity load
between RAM Concept and RSS.
Note: If you accidentally delete an imported support, or the supports change in RSS, you can always reimport the
walls and columns.
RSS tracks a fixed set of gravity loadings through the structures. These loadings are Dead Load, Live Load
Reducible, Live Load Unreducible, Live Load Storage and Live Load Roof (when RAM Concept and RAM Concrete
are used the Hyperstatic loading is tracked as well). To ensure compatibility with RSS, RAM Concept will not
allow you to delete these imported gravity loadings.
RAM Concept does allow you to modify the imported RSS gravity loading and to add more gravity loadings. RAM
Concept assumes that you are fully aware that it considers only the loads that appear in the imported RSS
loadings in the reactions it exports back to RSS.
40.2 About the export of geometry

Column and wall geometry can be exported to a new or existing RAM Structural System database file. This
geometry can only be exported to a new RSS floor type.
To export geometry to the RAM Structural System
1. Choose File > Export Geometry to RAM Structural System.
Note: The menu item is disabled if there is no model currently open.
A file browser appears which allows the selection of an RSS file.

2. Select a RSS file or enter a new filename.
If a new RSS filename is entered, a new RSS database is created with the current RAM Concept model’s units.
If the RAM Concept model design code is ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, ACI 318-05 or BS8110, the design code of
the RSS database is set accordingly. Otherwise the database design code of the new RSS database will be the
user's default design code.
After a file is selected, the “Export Geometry to RAM Structural System” dialog appears, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 184: Export Geometry to RAM Structural System dialog box
The dialog lists the floor types present in the RSS file.
3. Enter the new floor type name in the “New Floor Type Name” text field.
A popup notifies you if the floor type name entered is already defined.
The “General snapping distance” is the maximum distance structural features could be moved in order to
merge closely spaced objects together.
If the “Snap slab/deck edges to wall centerlines” box is checked, RAM Concept will attempt to move slab and
deck edges that are close to wall centerlines to be coincident in the exported data. The originating RAM
Concept data will not be modified. This will potentially eliminate small elements in the RSS mesh and thus
improve run times.
If the “Export uniform thickness deck” box is checked, RAM Concept will export a single deck to RSS of a
uniform thickness designated. The concrete properties from the largest slab area in Concept are used if this
option is selected.
The “Columns (below)”, “Walls (below)”, “Beams”, and “Slabs” check boxes select whether columns, walls,
beams, and slabs are exported. RAM Concept exports only the columns and walls below the floor, because it is
those elements that are associated with a floor type in RSS.
If you check “Start RSS after Export”, then RSS starts on the file after the geometry is exported. This has no
effect if RSS is already running.
4. Click “Create New Floor Type” to export the selected members to the new floor type.
Note: Column, wall, beam, and slab geometry can only be exported to a new RSS floor type.

40.2.1 About errors and ambiguities

Errors and ambiguities in a RAM Concept model are normally detected and corrected when the model is meshed.
RAM Concept allows models to be exported before they are meshed, so some errors are detected and arbitrarily
corrected when the geometry is exported.
If two or more walls overlap, completely or partially, only one of the overlapping segments will be exported. If
two or more columns have the same location, only one column at that location will be exported. In either case, a
pop-up dialog describes the columns and wall segments that were not exported.
If any columns or wall segments are not exported, the user should check the material properties of the elements
that were exported to RSS. If the overlapping columns or walls had different properties, the user may have to
reassign the desired values in RSS. The user can also mesh the model and resolve such errors within RAM
Concept before exporting.
Walls defined in RSS may not intersect other walls or span columns or the ends of other walls. Each RAM
Concept wall is split into segments at each of these locations before being exported. The splitting of walls is not
reported, but the effect will be seen as individual walls in RSS.

Using Strip Wizard
41
Strip Wizard is a dialog that automates the initial steps in the process of creating a model in RAM Concept. When
modeling a straightforward slab or beam, you can efficiently use Strip Wizard to enter the structural data
without having to draw in a plan window. With the wizard, you can enter the spans, tributaries, loads and post-
tensioning in the same way you would with a conventional two-dimensional program. Since entering the
structural data in Strip Wizard is so quick and easy, it is particularly useful for preliminary design of slabs,
beams, and joists.
Strip Wizard uses the structural information you provide to build a model in a new RAM Concept file. You can
then modify the file by drawing openings, surface steps, point loads, and such using plan windows. Strip Wizard
is deliberately simple, so use it to create the basic structure, and then modify the structure in plans if necessary.
The authors intend that Strip Wizard be largely for assessment of two-dimensional behavior. The (automatic)
design results are only for one direction (the x-axis). Since RAM Concept is a three-dimensional program, line
supports are automatically included along the edges of the model that allow deflection but no rotation. This
closely simulates two-dimensional behavior.
41.1 Starting Strip Wizard

When you start Strip Wizard, it prompts you to create a new RAM Concept file. This file is where the wizard
generates your model once you enter all the structural data. Strip Wizard uses all the generic settings defined in
the new file (such as units, materials, loadings, etc). If you want Strip Wizard to use your custom settings, create
the new file from a template. For example, if you want certain concrete mixes to be available when specifying
general design parameters, you should create the new file from a RAM Concept template with these concrete
mixes.
After you have chosen options in the New File dialog, the Strip Wizard dialog appears. At this point, you can load
previously saved Strip Wizard settings if you want (see “Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings” for more
information). To start defining your strip, proceed to the next page in the wizard by clicking Next.
1. Choose File > Strip Wizard.

2. Specify options in the New File dialog box and then click OK. The Strip Wizard dialog appears.
3. Click Next to proceed or you can load Strip Wizard Settings (see “Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings”
for more information).

Using Strip Wizard
Entering span data
41.2 Specifying general parameters

Specify the structure type, spans and concrete mixes on the General Parameters page of the Wizard.
Structure Decide what type of structure you want Strip Wizard to create and whether to use post-
Type tensioning. The floor can be set up as post-tensioned or reinforced and can be one of the
following systems:
• Two-way slab
• One-way slab
• Beam
• Joist
Spans Enter the number of spans for the strip (not including cantilevers). Decide if you are using
start or end cantilevers. Check “Asymmetric” to allow the model to have different tributaries
on either side of the columns.
Concrete Choose a concrete mix for the slabs and beams and one for the supports.
Mixes
Note: The concrete mixes available are the mixes in the new file created when you started Strip Wizard. If you
want to use specific mixes, use a template when creating the new file.
41.3 Entering span data

The table you see on the Span Data page depends on the information you entered on the General Parameters
page. The cantilevers and spans appear as rows in the table. The table columns depend on whether you are
modeling a one-way or two-way system, beam system, or joist system.
For this table and subsequent pages, the top data row’s name is “Typical”. Data entered here automatically
copies to the rows below. You can overwrite the copied data.
41.3.1 One-way and two-way systems

Span length, slab thickness and tributary width define these systems. They can vary span by span.
Length The span length from center to center of supports.

Thickness The span length from center to center of supports.
Start Width The slab width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the span. For asymmetric strips, L Start
Width is the left start width, and R Start Width is the right start width.
End Width The slab width at the end of the span. For asymmetric strips, L End Width is the left end width,
and R End Width is the right end width.

Using Strip Wizard
Entering support data
41.3.2 Beam systems

Span length, beam depth, beam width, slab thickness and tributary width define these systems. They can vary
span by span.

W Depth The beam web structural depth (including the flange depth).
W Width The beam web width.
F Depth The flange (slab) depth (thickness).
Start Trib Width The tributary (and hence slab) width at the beginning (or left hand end) of the span. For
asymmetric strips, L Trib Start Width is the left tributary start width, and R Trib Start Width
is the right tributary start width.
End Trib Width The tributary (and hence slab) width at the end of the span. For asymmetric strips, L Trib
End Width is the left tributary end width, and R End Width is the right tributary end width.
41.3.3 Joist systems

Span length, web properties (depth, width, spacing and number), slab thickness and tributary width define these
systems. They can vary span by span. This system does not allow asymmetry.
W Depth The joist web structural depth (including the flange depth).
W Width The joist web width.
F Depth The flange (slab) depth (thickness).
Pan Start Offset The distance from the beginning (or left hand end) of the span to the pan (or void
former).
Pan End Offset The distance from the end of the pan (or void former) to the end of the span.
Additional Web The following properties determine the tributary width for the whole model. The
Properties width cannot vary span by span.
Spacing The center-to-center spacing of the webs.
Number The total number of webs
41.4 Entering support data

The Support Data page is for entering supports above and below. You must specify supports below but they are
optional above.

Using Strip Wizard
Adding drop caps and drop panels
41.4.1 Support (above and below) properties

Depth, width, height, bottom fixity and top fixity define the supports. They can vary span by span.
Strip Wizard interprets a support with a width four or more times the depth as a wall. Otherwise, it is a column.
Depth The support dimension parallel to the span.

Width The support dimension perpendicular to the span (enter zero for round columns).
Height The support’s height from its base to mid-depth of the floor.
Bottom Fixity The moment connection at the base of the support.
Top Fixity The moment connection between the support and the floor.
41.5 Adding drop caps and drop panels

The Drop Caps and Drop Panels page is for entering drop caps and drop panels for two-way slabs. The page is
not available for one-way slabs, beams or joists.
Strip Wizard uses drop caps for punching shear only; it ignores them for flexural design. Some codes provide
guidance on what dimensions are required to consider a thickening as a drop panel. Strip Wizard does not check
such rules.
41.5.1 Drop cap and drop panel properties

Thickness, width, before length and after length define the drops. They can vary span by span.
It is possible to have drop caps and drop panels at the same support. The drop cap should be the thicker of the
two.
Thickness The total thickness (structural depth) of the drop. This is not the incremental increase in
thickness.
Width The drop dimension perpendicular to the span.
Before Length The dimension parallel to the span from the beginning of the drop to the support center.
After Length The dimension parallel to the span from the support center to the end of the drop.
41.6 Entering the loads

The Loads page is for entering area and line loads in the z-direction for two standard loadings.

Using Strip Wizard
Specifying the post-tensioning
41.6.1 Load properties

Area and line loads can be input for two different loadings on each span.
Dead Area Load The area load over the entire span.
Dead Line Load The line load from the first support center to the second support center for each span.
Live Area Load The live load over the entire span.
Live Line Load The live load from the first support center to the second support center for each span.
Loadings to use The Dead and Live are just names. You can specify the loads as belonging to any of the
Standard loadings in the RAM Concept file.
“Dead” This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM Concept file.
“Live” This can be any one of the standard loadings in the RAM Concept file (except for that used for
“Dead”).
41.7 Specifying the post-tensioning

The Post-Tensioning page is only available if you checked “Post-Tensioned” in the Structure Type section of the
General Parameters page.
Most of the data entered on this page relates to minimum precompression, load balancing and tendon cover.
Strip Wizard uses this data in conjunction with data for spans, depths and loads to generate a single profiled
tendon.
41.7.1 General PT information

You specify the type of tendon and information that helps to determine the number of strands.
PT System Specifies the size and type of strands for the tendon (as defined in the Materials Specification of
the RAM Concept file).
Stressing Specifies the stressing (jack) locations. RAM Concept calculates tendon friction and other losses if
jacks are located at one or both ends.
Min P/A The minimum average precompression required for the concrete. Following the code minimum
does not usually result in the most economical design.

Using Strip Wizard
Specifying reinforcement
41.7.2 Balance load

Balance load refers to the amount of uplift provided by the tendons. The industry has traditionally expressed
this as a percentage of gravity loads.
Min Balance Load The percentage of the specified load balanced by tendons.
Percentage:
Balance Load Considers: Specifies the loadings that the balance loading is based upon. The choices are
self-weight of concrete, self-weight plus “dead”, or total load.
41.7.3 Profiling
These selections vary the tendon profile shape.
Straight Profile The length of tendon that is horizontal at a support. The dimension is the total flat
Distance at Supports distance, not the distance each side of the support.
Round Profiles to The profile distance increment. This allows rounding of tendon high and low points to
Nearest convenient values. If this value is too large it may cause cover violations.
41.8 Specifying reinforcement

The Reinforcement page is for specifying reinforcement bars and general covers.
41.8.1 Reinforcing bar

You specify the bars from those available in the RAM Concept file.
Top Name of reinforcement bar used in the top face for flexural design.
Bottom Name of reinforcement bar used in the bottom face for flexural design.
Shear Name of reinforcement bar used for one-way shear design.
41.8.2 Reinforcement clear cover

The covers are for bars and tendons. Rounding of tendon profiles could override the tendon covers.
Top Clear cover to the top longitudinal bars and tendons.

Bottom Clear cover to the bottom longitudinal bars and tendons.

Using Strip Wizard
Completing Strip Wizard
41.8.3 Punching shear checks

You decide if RAM Concept performs punching shear calculations.
Perform punching Checking this box instructs RAM Concept to draw punching shear checks at each column.
shear checks
Cover to CGS The distance from the top of the slab to the centroid of the top reinforcement. Usually this
is the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar. RAM Concept
subtracts this distance from the slab thickness to determine the “d” distance.
41.9 Completing Strip Wizard

The Completing Strip Wizard page is the final page in the wizard dialog. At this point, you can choose to save the
information you have just entered so that you may load it into the wizard later. See “Loading and saving Strip
Wizard settings” for more information.
When you click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard page, Strip Wizard draws your model in the RAM Concept
file based on the data you have provided. The leftmost support of your model is located at the origin (0,0).
Open plans on the Mesh Input, Latitude Tendon, and Design Strip layers to view your model. You cannot view
the finite element mesh, however, until you generate the mesh.
1. Click Finish on the Completing Strip Wizard page.
41.10 Generating the mesh and calculating results

After completing Strip Wizard, you are ready to generate the mesh and run an analysis calculation on your
model.
To get the best finite element mesh you need to regenerate twice: once before, and once after, calculating.This is
because calculating generates the design strips, which in turn can be used to improve the mesh the second time
you generate.
See Chapter 18, “Generating the Mesh” and Chapter 28, “Calculating Results” for further information.
41.11 Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings

The data you entered into the Strip Wizard can be saved as a Strip Wizard Settings file (with a filename
extension of .cptstrip) and reloaded into the wizard later. The Strip Wizard Settings file contains only the

Using Strip Wizard
Loading and saving Strip Wizard settings
information you entered into the wizard pages. Save your Strip Wizard Settings before you click Finish on the
final page of the dialog.
Loading Strip Wizard Settings just sets the values in the Strip Wizard dialog to the values stored in the Settings
file. After you load your Strip Wizard Settings, you then page through the dialog as usual by clicking Next. You
can change the data in the wizard to create a different strip. This does not affect the Settings file you loaded. You
must save a new Strip Wizard Settings file if you want your changes to be stored for later use.
41.11.1 To load strip wizard settings

1. Click Load on the Welcome to Strip Wizard page.
2. Select the Strip Wizard Settings file (with a filename extension of .cptstrip) and click Open.
41.11.2 To save Strip Wizard settings

1. Click Save on the Completing the Strip Wizard page (before you click Finish).
2. Enter the name of your Strip Wizard Settings file and click Save.

42
General Tips
This chapter provides advice on learning RAM Concept and tips that are not explained elsewhere.
Note: It is strongly suggested that you refer to Learning RAM Concept (on page 47) before reading this chapter.
42.1 Beams
You should be careful when modeling beams. If you use standard finite elements then the beam’s torsional
stiffness could be overestimated, which could erroneously reduce the deflection in the adjacent slabs.
In RAM Concept, there is no difference between standard slab and beam elements, and standard elements have a
torsional stiffness that is proportional to their depth cubed.
The actual torsional stiffness of a beam is proportional to the cube of the lesser value of depth and width.
Standard elements thus overestimate the torsional stiffness of beams that are deeper than they are wide.
For this reason, you should consider using the “No-torsion” behavior for beams, especially deep edge beams. See
“Beam properties” for more information.
Figure 185: No-torsion beam setting

General Tips
Walls
42.2 Walls
42.2.1 Drawing connecting walls

It is recommended that intersecting walls are drawn such that one wall terminates at the centerline of the other,
as shown in the following figure.
Figure 186: Connecting walls
42.2.2 Walls above

Walls above behave similarly to beams: they stiffen the floor. This is especially relevant in transfer floors. The
floor moments DO NOT include the bending moments in the actual walls.
We recommend that if you are in doubt as to the effect of walls above, do not model them.
Figure 187: Comparison of two floors identical in all respects except that one has a wall above (Two images with
slab shown, two with no slab shown).

General Tips
Restraint
Figure 188: Effect of wall modeled above: no wall (left) vs. wall above (right) - plot of slab moment about x-axis.
42.2.3 The difference between walls above and upstand beams of similar
proportions
RAM Concept treats walls above the slab similarly to beams. Using “wall-beams” instead of just thickened slab
elements has both advantages and disadvantages; overall it is not recommended to model walls above the slab
as beams.
Slab elements have two major advantages over wall elements (“wall-beams”):
RAM Concept design strip cross sections automatically integrate the forces across slab elements. Wall-beam
elements are ignored in these integrations. Also, RAM Concept provides you many controls over how slab
element results can be displayed; wall-beam elements (like wall elements) can only plot their reactions to the
slab.
However, as discussed in “Beams,” RAM Concept’s standard slab elements have a torsional stiffness that is
proportional to their depth cubed. This can cause a large over-estimation of the torsional stiffness for a very
thick slab element if it is adjacent to relatively thin elements. “Wall-beam” elements do not have this problem.
As such, walls above that are modeled as upstand beams should use the “No-torsion” beam setting discussed in
“Beams”.
When modeling wall-beams, RAM Concept interprets some of the wall element parameters differently. If the
wall-beam is not rotationally fixed to the slab then the wall-beam will have zero torsional stiffness. If the wall-
beam is not a shear wall then it will have zero axial stiffness. The vertically compressible and rotationally fixed at
far end parameters are ignored.
Wall-beam elements have one advantage over slab elements. Slab elements of drastically differing thicknesses in
the same structure can cause the automatic plotting controls to show (correctly) huge force variations in and
adjacent to thick slab elements and almost no variation within the thin slab element areas. This does not
generally happen if walls above are modeled as wall-beams.
42.3 Restraint
Columns and walls restrain the floor against (post-tensioning induced) axial deformations unless you model
columns with rollers and walls as “slip” walls (shear wall property unchecked).
It is unlikely that columns above restrain the floor so a roller above will generally be appropriate
Restraint generally reduces the precompression and hence increases the service reinforcement. It usually
increases strength reinforcement too.

General Tips
Miscellaneous
42.4 Miscellaneous
There are many tools and capabilities described in the preceding chapters that are useful but often overlooked.
42.4.1 Templates
We have created a template (for the purpose of starting a file) that may or may not suit your needs. You can
create your own template with additional plans, materials and settings that you can use when you start a new
file. See “About templates”.
42.4.2 Adding plans

You can add plans. See “Creating new plans” and “Creating new result plans”.
42.4.3 Copying and moving objects

Many users do not appreciate that selected objects can be copied and moved through a combination of holding
down the shift key and using the move command (or similar). See “Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring
objects”.
You should also familiarize yourself with using the relative coordinates command. See “Using relative
coordinates”.
To copy and move an object using relative coordinates
1.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the object.
3. Hold down the <Shift> key and click anywhere on the workspace.
4. Type the letter “r” followed by the x- and y-coordinates separated by a comma (e.g. r10, 5), and press
<Return>.
This moves a copy of the selection x units to the right and y units upward.
Related Links
• Moving, rotating, stretching, and mirroring objects (on page 73)
42.4.4 Expanding tool buttons

You can expand many tools to reveal additional capabilities. See “Expanding tool buttons”.

General Tips
Miscellaneous
42.4.5 The Utility tool

The Utility tool can save you a lot of time when you need to move and stretch many objects or control points. See
“Using the Utility tool to move and stretch”.
Related Links
• Using the Utility tool to move and stretch (on page 74)
42.4.6 Left Wall and Right Wall tools

The Left Wall and Right Wall tools can be very useful. See “Drawing walls”.
42.4.7 Changing multiple tendon profile points

You can seek and change profile points that have the same value in one operation. See “Change profiles tool”.
Related Links
• Change profiles tool (on page 328)
42.4.8 Plotting Results

Many users are unaware of the power of the plot capabilities. You can plot many results including (strip based)
moments (actual and demand), crack widths and reinforcement, to name just a few.
Some clients prefer to plot the reinforcement on new plans rather than use the template plans that show bar
call-outs.
42.4.9 Reducing the information shown on plans

You can remove trivial results such as small reactions in two different ways. See “Specifying report as zero,”
“Reaction,” and “Figure”.
Related Links
• Specifying report as zero (on page 82)

General Tips
Miscellaneous
42.4.10 Load balancing

You can view the percentage of load that is balanced by the post-tensioning within design strips. See “Viewing
balanced load percentages”.
Related Links
• Viewing balanced load percentages (on page 366)
42.4.11 The Auditor

This can be invaluable in unlocking the “black-box” of calculations. See Chapter 31, “Using the Auditor”.
Note: Many users complain that there is too much information revealed by the auditor. You can reduce the
information by auditing a rule set rather than the design summary.

Frequently Asked Questions
43
This chapter addresses many of the questions that we are frequently asked.
It should be read in conjunction with:
• Learning RAM Concept (on page 47)
• General Tips (on page 436) and
• Warnings and Errors (on page 465)
43.1 Capabilities and Modeling

Question: What can Concept design?
Answer: Elevated (suspended) concrete floors and mat foundations (rafts). They can be reinforced concrete,
post-tensioned concrete or hybrid. See “Structural systems” for more information.
Question: Is there a limit on the size of structure modeled?
Answer: The only limit is the performance of the computer hardware. The analysis run time is approximately
proportional to the square of the number of nodes in the model, so large structures may take a significant
amount of time to analyze. Design time is approximately proportional to the number of span segment strip
cross sections. See Decreasing calculation time (on page 361) for more information. The file size can also be
limited by the amount of RAM the computer has available.
Question: Is there any restriction to the maximum thickness of slab that can be modeled?
Answer: RAM Concept's analysis of slab elements considers shear deformation as well as bending
deformation. This ensures that RAM Concept gives reasonable results for both thin slabs and thick slabs.
In general, RAM Concept's design provisions apply the code requirements that are appropriate for slabs with
typical span-to-depth ratios. If the geometry of your slab is outside the usual ranges, you may need to consider
if any special design considerations are necessary.
Question: Can Concept design more than one story at a time?
Answer: Not by itself. You can use the RAM Structural System to integrate numerous floors into one large
model.
Question: Can I use Concept to design slab-on-ground?
Answer: The expression “slab-on-ground” is often used to described residential house slabs. The designer has
to use engineering judgment to determine if mat analysis and design techniques are suitable for such
structures. See the FAQ for “Mats (rafts)”.
Question: Is Concept capable of running a single design strip for quick preliminary runs without modeling the
whole building?

Files
Answer: Yes. See Using Strip Wizard (on page 428) and Strip Wizard Tutorial (on page 773).
Question: Can I model a pour strip?
Answer: Yes, although there are limitations.
1. Use the orthotropic properties for the pour strip area such that the axial stiffness perpendicular to the strip
is significantly reduced.
2. Terminate tendons either side of the pour strip.
Note: Modeling a pour strip in this manner does not consider the temporary situation before the strip is
poured back. This could affect deflections and resultants.
Question: How can I model curved edges or walls?

Answer: Use a series of straight lines. The approximation should have negligible effect.
Question: Can Concept be used to design retaining walls by drawing the wall as a slab?
Answer: While RAM Concept is not optimized for this use, it can perform most of the analysis and design tasks
if you are very careful.
Care must be used as RAM Concept assumes that gravity loads are in the downward Z direction. You need to
set all of the self-dead loading load factors to zero and create your own self-weight loadings. You probably
want to apply these loads at the mid-slab depth; otherwise the eccentricity will add a self-weight moment to
the slab.
While RAM Concept's design cross sections reports all of the moments and forces on the design cross section,
RAM Concept does not perform design considering all of the forces and moments. Specifically, RAM Concept
does not consider the Mz value in design, because RAM Concept does not specify the positioning of
reinforcement that is important for Mz design.
RAM Concept does not consider “P-delta” effects.
Question: What does hybrid mean?
Answer: A hybrid floor is one that contains both PT and RC areas. Most post-tensioned floors have some RC
elements such as pour strips and elevator core slabs. By selecting the appropriate design rules these regions
can be designed at the same time as the PT elements.
43.2 Files
Question: What is the difference between creating a mat (raft) file and an elevated slab file?
Answer: There is really no difference; all files give you the same capabilities. The default files are setup
differently because there are usually additional load cases and plans for a mat (lateral load cases, soil bearing
plans, etc.). With some work, you could turn any elevated slab file into a mat file and vice versa.
Question: Can I save the data file with results?
Answer: This cannot be done with the current version - you need to open the file and recalculate. We expect to
add this feature in a future version (but the “save with results” files will be huge).
Question: Can I work from CAD drawings?
Answer: Yes. See Using a CAD Drawing (on page 116).
Question: Is it necessary to start a model with a DWG or DXF file?

Plans and perspectives
Answer: No. For straightforward geometry it may be quicker to draw “from scratch”. It can be useful to specify
a grid and then use snap to grid to locate columns and walls.
Question: I deleted the imported drawing – can it be brought back?
Answer: Yes. It is sometimes a good idea to delete the imported drawing as it affects the extent that RAM
Concept displays and prints. Any DWG or DXF file can be re-imported if necessary.
If you moved the imported drawing or structure after the first import then the new import will not match. You
can move the new drawing if necessary.
Question: Can Concept export to a drawing file to aid in drafting?
Answer: Yes. See Exporting a plan (on page 419).
Question: Can I export results?
Answer: Yes. See Exporting a table (on page 419).
Question: Can I change the default new file settings?
Answer: Yes. See About templates (on page 53).
Question: Can I set the default file for an RC design?
Answer: Yes. You could create a template that is suited to RC design, such as eliminating the Initial Service
Load Combination and Initial Service Rule Set, and unchecking the Consider as Post-Tensioned option in the
span segment properties. See About templates (on page 53).
43.3 Plans and perspectives

Question: What's the difference between a plan and a layer?
Answer:
A layer is an organizational concept. A layer is a collection of related objects and results and each object and
result resides on one and only one layer. For example, all slab elements are on the Element layer.
Plans, on the other hand, are a display and editing concept. Each plan is a filtered view of all of RAM Concept’s
layers. A plan can be set up to edit a particular layer, but the plan does not “own” the layer. All changes that
are made to the layer using the plan will be visible in all other plans, because all plans are viewing the same
set of layers.
See Understanding Layers (on page 55) and Using Plans and Perspectives (on page 59) for more information.
Question: How do I delete unwanted plans?
Answer:
1. Choose Layers > Delete.
A dialog box appears.
2. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
Question: Can I view all information on one plan?
Answer:
Yes, but it is generally not advised. You can turn on all objects from one layer in one operation, and then
repeat for the next layer.

Units
2.
3. Click on the tab for the object’s layer.
The plan or perspective’s layer is the one initially selected.
4. Check the Show All box, and click OK.
Question: How can I tell if there is an object on a layer?

Answer: See Determining which plans contain objects (on page 57).
Question: I have two items at the same location, how do I select just one of them?
Answer: Double click at the location and you should select just one object. Hold down <Shift> and double click
again and you select the other object.
Question: Why do I see nothing in a perspective display?
Answer: The perspective “camera” may be looking in the wrong direction. Click Zoom Extent ( ) or Show
Print Viewpoint ( ).
Question: Why can I not see the area springs in a perspective?
Answer: Area springs can take a long time to generate in a perspective and so are not turned on in the default
files. You need to turn them on with the Visible Objects dialog.
Question: What does conflicting mean in a Selected Items field?
Answer:
This means that more than one object has been selected and they have different values for that property. For
example, if you select two slab objects that have different thicknesses then the thickness field displays
“conflicting”.
Note: In versions prior to 3.0 the field would be blank in such instances.
43.4 Units
Question: What units can I use
Answer: See Choosing Units (on page 81)
Question: Can I switch units after creating a file?
Answer: Yes. See Changing the units (on page 81).
43.5 Codes
Question: Can I change codes after creating a file?

Sign Conventions
Answer: Yes. See Code options (on page 353).
43.6 Sign Conventions

Question: What is the sign convention for moments shears and reactions?
Answer: See Selecting sign convention (on page 84) and About plot sign convention (on page 86).
Question: Can I change the sign convention?
Answer: Yes. See Changing the sign convention (on page 86).
43.7 Structure
43.7.1 Mesh Input layer

Question: Why is it necessary to have priorities?
Answer:
Without the priority system the modeling of floors would require one of two methods:
• Objects for slabs of different thicknesses, beams, openings etc. could not overlap - this would be very
tiresome for all but very simple floors, or
• Depths would have to additive. For example, you would have to deduct slab depth from beam depth. If you
had to change the slab depth then a change would be required for the beam, unless its depth changed by
the same amount.
Question: Can I copy columns or walls below to the same above?
Answer: Yes.
1. Select all of the columns or walls you wish to copy.
2. Choose Edit > Copy (or right-click and choose Copy from the pop-up menu that appears).
3. Choose Edit > Paste (or right-click and choose Paste from the pop-up menu that appears).
The pasted objects are the current selection.
5. Change Support Set from Below to Above, and click OK.
Note: It is important that you do not abandon the process after pasting. Otherwise, you will have two supports
below at various locations, which causes calculation errors.
Question: The meshing operation produces a very irregular mesh. Is this satisfactory?

Structure
Answer: This depends upon a number of factors. See Deciding what mesh element size to use (on page 178)
and Improving the mesh (on page 180).
Question: Can I vary the mesh intensity at different locations?
Answer: Indirectly. See Selectively refining the mesh (on page 182).
Question: What value should I use for the area springs Z force constant?
Answer:
The geotechnical engineer commonly provides a value called the “subgrade modulus” or “modulus of
subgrade reaction”.
As a guide only: realistic values vary from 100 pci (approx. 25 MN/m3) for soft clay to 750 pci (approx. 200
MN/m3) for very dense gravel.
43.7.2 Element layer

Question: How can I view the slab without the mesh?
Answer: Choose Layers > Element > Slab Summary Plan.
Question: What is the difference between beam and slab elements?
Answer: There is no difference unless you modify their behavior. See discussion of behavior in Slab area
properties (on page 172) and Beam properties (on page 175).
Question: How many nodes or elements are allowed?
Answer: There is no limit, other than the limitations of your computer.
Question: How many elements should I use per span or panel?
Answer: This cannot be answered directly as it depends upon the structure and loads. See Deciding what
mesh element size to use (on page 178).
43.7.3 Columns
Question: Do columns restrain the slab?
Answer: Depending upon the defined fixity, columns can provide rotational and lateral restraint.
If the far end of a column is defined as a “roller” support (or both ends of the column are pinned) then the
column does not provide any lateral restraint to the slab.
Question: Do columns above the slab support the slab vertically?
Answer: No. Columns only restrain the slab rotationally and laterally.
43.7.4 Walls
Question: Do walls restrain the slab laterally?

Structure
Answer: Yes, if you select Shear Wall as a property. If the Shear Wall is unchecked then the slab is allowed to
slip freely over the top of the wall. The walls rotational stiffness is independent of the Shear Wall setting; use
the fixity settings to control the walls rotational stiffness about its longitudinal axis.
Question: What is the effect of specifying walls above?
Answer: Wall elements can be used to model the stiffness and spanning ability of walls connected to the slab.
You should exercise caution when using them. See Walls above (on page 437).
Question: Do walls above the slab support the slab vertically?
Answer: No, they act like beams. See Walls above (on page 437).
Question: Do walls above the slab provide rotational restraint?
Answer: There is no restraint at the far end of a wall above. (Even if Rotationally Fixed at Far End is
checked, it is ignored).
43.7.5 Mats (rafts)

Question: How do I design a mat foundation?
Answer: The Mat Foundation Tutorial (on page 751) introduces the concepts for mat design.
Question: Does Concept ignore soil tension?
Answer: You can reduce the tension by iteration. The tension gets closer to zero with an increase in the
number of iterations.
See Zero tension iteration options (on page 353) for more information.
Question: Does Concept design for soil heave?
Answer: Not directly. You could draw spring supports that approximate varying soil support.
Question: Do I need to draw the columns above in a mat foundation model?
Answer: No, but it is a good idea. It ensures a node is placed at that location where there is likely to be a heavy
point load.
Question: Can Concept design for pile supports?
Answer: Yes. Use either (flexible) columns under, or point springs. Skin friction is not considered.
Question: Can Concept design for pile and mat (raft) action together?
Answer: Yes, but the results could be very susceptible to variations in geotechnical parameters. For example,
if the soil’s stiffness is overestimated, the actual pile reactions could be significantly underestimated. Use
caution.
Question: Does the area spring support have to match the mesh?
Answer: No.
Question: Can the soil stiffness vary?
Answer: Yes. You can vary the stiffness in two directions. See Area spring properties (on page 168).
Question: Where do I select the allowable soil bearing pressure?
Answer: This is not an input parameter. You need to look at soil bearing pressure plans (which have a
maxima / minima legend) to assess the maximum pressures. Also, see the FAQ on Soil bearing (on page 463).
Question: Does Concept iterate to remove tension in a point or line spring?

Tendons
Answer: No, only for area springs.
43.8 Tendons
Question: Why are some tendons shown at the wrong elevation in the tendon perspective?
Answer: The soffit elevation at each profile point is determined during the Analyze All and Calculate All
commands. If one of these commands is not performed since the drawing (or moving, etc.) of a tendon, or
since a change in the mesh, the tendon elevations in perspectives are not accurate.
The same is true for elevations optionally shown as text on the plans.
It is quicker to analyze (but not using “Calculate All”) with Process > Analyze All. This avoids processing the
design calculations.
Question: What do Latitude and Longitude Tendons mean?
Answer: In the USA, Britain and other countries it is typical practice to place all the tendons in one direction in
a concentrated band over column lines. If the designer is using another practice then we recommend that you
still use the Latitude and Longitude tendon layers because it makes editing the PT easier. i.e. Put the tendons
in the X direction on one layer and the Y tendons on the other. Latitude and Longitude are just layer names.
Question: Do I have to draw the tendons for a post-tensioned slab?
Answer: Yes. It is not difficult, and encourages you to address detailing issues before they become field
problems.
Question: How do I draw tendons?
Answer: See About drawing individual tendons (on page 322), Drawing single tendons (on page 322) and
Drawing multiple tendons (on page 323).
You double click the tendon tool to change default tendon properties and then draw tendons span by span, or
panel by panel.
You can select a specific tendon segment and right-click to change that segment’s properties.
You can seek and change profile points that have the same value in one operation. See Change profiles tool (on
page 328).
Question: Can I harp tendons?
Answer: Yes. Any tendon segment can be declared to be harped. The “half-span” tendon tool is useful for any
harp point (or any low point) that is not at mid-span. Multiple harp points can be located in any span by using
multiple tendon segments.
Question: Does it matter how I draw half tendons?
Answer: Yes. The inflection point is measured from the first point clicked and the profiles are specified in the
order of the points clicked. To be compatible with the tendons created using the Full Span Tendon tool, we
strongly recommend that you always start at the high point.
Question: Can I terminate some strands past a column?
Answer: This can be done with one of two methods.
1. The tendon can be “forked” such that the number of strands decreases. As shown in the following figure, if
the transition is from 15S (15 strands) to 10S (because an adjacent span does not require that many
strands) then terminate 5S using a half span tendon. It is common to terminate strands at quarter span and
at the slab centroid.

Tendons
Note: You should only use this method for tendons with no jacks attached. This is because a jack attached
to tendons of different lengths has inaccurate seating (wedge draw-in) loss calculations.
Figure 189: Termination of strands (no jacks)

2. The second method can be used when jacks are modeled. If the total number of strands is 15S then one
tendon with 10S needs to be continuous with an additional tendon with 5S alongside. It is common to
terminate tendons at quarter span and at the slab centroid.
Figure 190: Termination of strands / tendons (jacked). Plan alignment of tendons is subjective.
Question: Does Concept check to make sure the number of strands in connected tendon segments is consistent?
Answer: Yes. See An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A tendon is not totally on the slab.
Revise the tendon at #a. (on page 468).
Question: How does Concept calculate friction losses?
Answer: RAM Concept only calculates friction losses if jacks are specified.
RAM Concept performs friction loss calculations considering the (elevation view) curvature of the tendons, the
(plan view) horizontal kinks in the tendon and the jacking and friction parameters. The stress in the tendon is
assumed to vary linearly along each tendon segment.
Along each tendon the following formula used is:
P2 = P1 × e-(μ×θ + k×L)
where
P1 = the known stress at one end of a tendon segment
P2 = the unknown stress at the other end of a tendon segment
μ = the angular friction coefficient (in units of 1/radians)
θ = the total angular change along the tendon segment
k = the wobble coefficient (in units of 1/length)
L = the tendon segment length
Note: Some engineering communities (Australia in particular) use a definition of wobble coefficient that is the
accidental angular change per unit length. These communities can calculate the wobble coefficient that RAM
Concept uses, k, with the following relationship: k = AngularWobbleCoefficient × μ.
At the joints between tendon segments RAM Concept uses the following formula:
P4 = P3 * e-(μ × ɑ)
where
P4 = the unknown stress in the next tendon segment
P3 = the known stress in the previous tendon segment (or the jack stress)
μ = the same angular friction coefficient as above
ɑ = the total angle change at the tendon profile point (includes both
horizontal and vertical kinks)

Tendons
RAM Concept incorporates seating loss (wedge draw-in loss) into the losses using the standard strain
integration formulation. The equations above are still used, but the known and unknown values are swapped.
RAM Concept adjusts the tendon stresses iteratively until the integration of the strain change in the tendon
equals the specified anchorage seat loss.
Long term losses are input by the user as a jack parameter.
See About jacks (on page 329) and Jack properties (on page 329) for more information.
Question: Do I have to specify jacks?
Answer: No. RAM Concept uses the relevant value of fse (specified in the Materials criteria page) as the
effective stress for any tendon without a jack.
Question: Does Concept calculate elongations (extensions)?
Answer: Yes, if jacks are specified. Use the Visible Objects dialog to view Jack Elongation on a plan.
Question: Do the elongations (extensions) include the effect of the seating distance (wedge draw-in)?
Answer: Yes. The elongation reported includes the deduction of the seating distance.
Question: Where are tendon profiles measured from?
Answer: See discussion on Profile in Drawing banded tendon polylines (on page 313).
Question: It's much easier to take all the strands and put them into one tendon bundle instead of having to lay
them all out. Is there much difference to the model whether you distribute tendons over the tributary or not?
Answer: This is a matter of engineering judgment. There is certainly no need to lay out individual strands and
it is usually satisfactory to group strands in larger tendon groups than that installed in the field. Keep in mind
that design strip cross sections consider only the tendons that they cut through to calculate strength etc. There
could be instances where you want to model banded tendons in multiple groups (if the band is very wide).
Question: I have laid out the longitude tendons but want to change the number of strands per group. Do I have
to lay them out again?
Answer: No. The number of strands in a tendon does not have to be an integer, so you can change it by any
increment.
Question: Can I determine the force in a tendon?
Answer: Yes. Use the Visible Objects dialog to view the Tendon Forces on a plan.
Question: Does Concept check for tendons being outside of the concrete?
Answer: Yes. See discussion in Cannot auto-position profile point at (x,y) due to profile point value (on page
470) and Cannot auto-position the profile elevation for tendon (a) at (b) because the tendon represents a
partial half span (on page 470).
Question: Do I need to do a load balancing calculation with all the tendons?
Answer: No. The load balance tool is available to help you calculate low points, but is not mandatory.
Question: The load balancing percentage shown on the design strips plan does not make sense. How is this
calculated?
Answer: RAM Concept’s balanced load percentage calculation assumes that what you define as a span, actually
behaves like a span. Sometimes this is not the case.
To calculate the effective dead load applied, RAM Concept uses:
D = 8 Md / L2
where
D = the dead load to be calculated
Md = the total dead load span moment (calculated from the moments at the
first, middle and last cross sections of the span)

Loadings
L = the span length (as determined from the span segments, support
conditions, etc.)
The calculation for the effective balance load is similar:
B = 8 Mb / L2
The percentage balanced is 100 . (-B/D)
If, for example, the dead load moments at the start, middle and end cross sections are not negative, positive
and negative then percentage balance calculation will not be useful.
This does not mean your strips are wrong, but it might mean that your tendon layout is not doing what you
think it is doing. Look at the DL (or DL + LL) deflections (without balance loading) and try to get a better
feeling for how the structure is working and from there determine where to add and remove tendons.
43.9 Loadings
Question: Is pattern loading possible?
Answer: Yes. See Creating Pattern Loading (on page 203).
Question: For an irregular structure it is very time consuming to draw the area loads to match the structure. Is
there a faster way?
Answer: It is not necessary for area loads to match the structure. Area loads can overlap each other and they
can “overhang” the floor. This is shown in the PT tutorial.
Question: Are area loads additive or does the maximum govern?
Answer: Loads are additive.
Question: Can I input thermal loads into Concept?
Answer:
Yes, see Drawing Loads (on page 195) for more information on temperature and shrinkage area loads.
Question: How do Lateral Self Equilibrium loadings work?
Answer: Refer to Self-equilibrium analysis (on page 797).
However, the best way to understand Lateral SE could be this simple example:
43.9.1 Lateral Self Equilibrium Example
Consider the structure with two elevated floors shown in the following figure. Each level is 3m high
and the structure is 10m wide.

Loadings
Figure 191: Example with two elevated floors
Assume the following:

• a frame analysis has been performed on the building for this 100kN loading and the column forces
are known
• a very simple distribution of forces (reasonable for beams much stiffer than columns)
The forces on the top level slab (including column reactions) are:
Figure 192: Forces on top level slab
Fx0 = 100kN
Fx1 = -50kN Fx2 = -50kN
Fz1 = -15kN Fz2 = 15kN
My1 = 75kN-m My2 = 75kN-m
These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to the slab in a lateral SE loading. RAM
Concept then calculates the correct forces in the slab, design strips and punching checks.
For the intermediate level there are more forces to consider (all of these are from the frame analysis).
The forces that the columns apply to the slab are:
Figure 193: Forces on intermediate level slab
Fx3 = 50kN Fx4 = -50kN
Fx5 = 50kN Fx6 = -50kN
Fz3 = 15kN Fz4 = -45kN
Fz5 = -15kN Fz6 = 45kN

Analysis
These forces are in equilibrium and are applied directly to the slab in a lateral SE loading.
Since the “3” and “4” forces occur at the same location, they can be added together and applied as a
single load (same for “5” and “6”).
RAM Concept then calculates the correct forces in the slab, design strips and punching checks.
Note: There is one simplification - if you do not care about diaphragm forces, then you can
ignore all the Fx and Fy forces. This assumes that the Fx and Fy forces act at the center of your
slab and that the centroid elevation of your slab is constant. When these two assumptions are
not true, the effects of these forces are typically still not large, but you may need to use some
judgment before you ignore them.
43.10 Analysis
Question: Should I use Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions in the Calc Options?
Answer: This is only necessary if your structure has no lateral stability, such as an elevated floor with columns
on rollers, or a mat (raft) with no X or Y direction springs. Auto-stabilize does not work if there are lateral
loads.
43.11 Design Issues

Question: What support width is used for round columns?
Answer: RAM Concept calculates the support width for an equivalent (in area) square column.
Question: What is the relevance of the Include Detailed Section Analysis box in Criteria > Design Rules?
Answer: That box instructs RAM Concept to do a cracked section analysis even if one is not required for the
code criteria.
The only reason to check the box is if you want to see cracked section stresses even when they are not used for
code checking / design.
The only reason not to check the box is that cracked section analyses can be slow. See Decreasing calculation
time (on page 361).
43.12 Results

Results
43.12.1 Reactions
Question: Does Concept include the weight of columns and walls in self weight calculations?
Answer: RAM Concept never includes the weight of supports below.
You decide if the weight of supports above is included. This is a choice you can make in the Calculation
Options.
Question: Can I choose which column and wall reactions are shown?
Answer: Yes - you can change what RAM Concept plots. See Reaction (on page 382).
If there are columns (and or walls) above and below an elevated slab you can select (through the Plot dialog)
which reactions are shown. The choices are:
• the total reaction on the slab (below and above)
• the reaction below
• the reaction above
Question: The reaction plans show many small values for Fx and Fy which makes the plan difficult to read. Can I
look at just Fz?
Answer: You can control this in two ways. The simplest way is to turn off Fx and Fy with the plot settings. See
Changing which results plot (on page 369).
Alternatively, you can filter out small reactions and moments through the Units window. See Specifying report
as zero (on page 82).
Question: The wall reactions are shown per straight section of wall. Can I see the reaction per wall element?
Answer: No. This is not available because there would be too much information shown.
Question: I have modeled columns at the end of walls. The column reactions are huge and the wall reaction is
negative. Is this realistic?
Answer: The huge result is mathematically correct but may not be realistic. Try modeling the column and
walls in question as vertically compressible. This may reduce the column reaction to a more realistic value.
Question: How can I determine the reaction at the end of a wall?
Answer: Reactions are reported for continuous walls, so if you need discrete reactions leave a gap in the wall
or specify a column at the end of a wall.
43.12.2 Plots
Question: Why is there moment shown at a free edge about an axis parallel to the edge?
Answer:

Results
Figure 194: Plan of moment about Y-Y axis at opening. The circled moment is displayed as non-zero.
The plotted moments are smoothed curves of the element center moments.
A slab element at a free edge may have a small moment at it center. The values shown between element
centers are interpolated, but since there is no element outside the edge, there is no way for that value to ever
reach zero.
For better visual results (values closer to zero at the edge), you should use smaller elements at the edge. The
distance from the edge to the edge element center is the most important parameter.
Question: I have a pinned column at the edge of the slab. Why is there moment shown at the edge about an axis
parallel to the edge?
Answer:
The explanation is the same as the preceding question.

Question: Why are there two lines for deflection in the strip plots?
Answer:
The two plots for maximum and minimum differ if you have one of the following conditions:
• Alternate envelope factors that are not the same as the load factors (see About alternate envelope factors
(on page 107) ).
For example, for the service load combination, the load factor on live load could be 1.0 and the alternate
envelope factor could be 0.0. This would produce differing maximum and minimum values.
• Pattern loadings
• More than one load combination using the same rule set.
The default plot shows the maximum and minimum deflections. You could choose to show just the maximum
values via the plot dialog, but remember that the absolute of minimum could be more than the maximum. It
would be possible that minimum governs if you have upward deflection.

Results
Note: This also applies for plots of demand for resultants such as moment or shear.
43.12.3 Torsion
Question: I have set the Behavior of a beam to No-torsion. Why is there still torsion in the beam?
Answer:
When you set your beams to have “no torsion”, you are really setting them to have no “twist” (Mxy).
Twist is only one component of torsion. Torsion is a moment that in RAM Concept is measured about the
centroid point of the cross section. The z-coordinate of this centroid is the mathematical centroid elevation of
the cross section, the x- and y- coordinates of the centroid are the centre of the “core” portion of the centroid.
The vertical shear in the cross section will create torsion unless it is centred upon the centroid. In an edge
beam, the vertical shear at the ends must be centered on the column, or there must be torsion to maintain
equilibrium.
43.12.4 Envelopes
Question: What is the significance of Envelopes in the Audit?
Answer:
An envelope is a resultant (set of forces) in which one of the force values is a maximum or minimum for an
item (such as a cross section) under consideration. All of the force values within a single envelope occur
simultaneously.
Audit envelopes are created by the following process:
• for each rule set, 6 envelopes are added to a list (Max M, Min M, Max V, Min V, Max P, Min P)
• duplicates are removed (if Max M and Max V are identical, one of them will be removed)
• torsion conversion is performed (this can modify the torsion values, it can also create additional
envelopes)
The result is a list of envelopes (possibly just one, but also possibly up to 12).
Note: Some “torsion conversions” (such as modifying the bending moment due to the torsion) can double the
number of envelopes in effect.
43.12.5 Reinforcement
Question: Can I determine the reinforcement spacing?
Answer:
Yes.

Results
1. Choose the appropriate reinforcement plan.

2.
3. Check Bar Spacings under the Span Designs or Section Designs columns.
Note: Plotted reinforcement quantities cannot show bar spacing.
Question: Why is the Minimum Reinforcing required placed on the wrong slab face?
Answer:
This sometimes happens for an ACI318 or BS8110 / TR43 design.
RAM Concept locates the minimum reinforcing required by certain design criteria on the tension face of the
slab (or the face with the least amount of compression); this normally works well for both elevated slabs and
mat foundations.
However, in certain cases the moment at a design strip cross section is of the opposite sign of what would be
expected given the location. For an elevated slab this can lead to reinforcing at columns being at the bottom of
the slab and reinforcing at mid-span being at the top of the slab.
For example, for ACI318 or TR43 if there is no tension at a slab location under service conditions, then RAM
Concept places the minimum support rebar on the face with the least amount of compression. This could be
the bottom face at a column.
You can overrule this by choosing Elevated Slab for the design strip property CS Min. Reinforcement Location.
See Span segment properties (on page 214).
Question: I am getting more reinforcement than expected. Why is this?
Answer:
This can be for a number of reasons. The common ones are:
1. The floor is post-tensioned and yet you have not checked the Consider as Post-Tensioned option. RAM
Concept is ignoring the tendons. See the description in Span segment properties (on page 214).
2. The depth of the span segment strip cross section contributes to a large amount of minimum
reinforcement. This may be because the cross section depth is based upon a thickened area.
3. The bonded tendons are not in the tensile zone.
Question: Why are the reinforcement results on the Design Status layer in different colors?
Answer: The default Appearance scheme uses different colors for “Failed Span Design” and “OK Span Design”.
Related Links
• Span segment properties (on page 214)
43.12.6 AS3600 specific reinforcement questions

Question: I am getting more reinforcement than expected. Why is this?

Results
Answer: The default setting for design strip Environment is Normal. Changing to Protected can reduce the
amount of reinforcement. See Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature (on page 1028) for further
clarification.
43.12.7 BS8110 / TR43 specific reinforcement questions

Question: Why is there bottom steel at the column?
Answer:
There are a couple of possibilities:
1. See “Why is the Minimum Reinforcing required placed on the wrong slab face?” (on page 0 ).
2. TR43 (1st Edition) clause 6.10.5 states that “additional un-tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to
cater for the full tension force generated by the assumed flexural tensile stresses in the concrete” for
“Support zones in all flat slabs”.
The note under TR43 table 2 states that “the support zone shall be considered as any part of the span under
consideration within 0.2 x L of the support, where L is the effective span”.
This often means that there is tension on the bottom face near the “edge” of the support zone, beyond
contraflexure.
Per 6.10.5, RAM Concept adds reinforcement to the bottom face in such instances.
Note:
• Concept might draw reinforcement bars to the column, but a plot could reveal that is only required over a
limited zone.
• Using column and middle strips for a TR43 PT flat plate tends to increase the likelihood of this situation.
Question: Why is there mild service reinforcement near midspan of a bonded post-tensioned flat plate?
Answer:
When designing to TR43 (BS8110) with bonded tendons, many designers are surprised to see bottom service
reinforcement.
TR43 (1st Edition) clause 6.10.5 states that “…additional un-tensioned reinforcement shall be designed to
cater for the full tension force generated by the assumed flexural tensile stresses in the concrete for … span
zones in flat slabs using unbonded tendons where the tensile stress exceeds 0.15 f cu ”.
Many designers consider that they do not have to provide un-tensioned reinforcement if they use bonded
tendons. However, what they miss is that the reinforcement “shall be placed in the tensile zone, as near as
practicable to the outer fibre”.
RAM Concept examines the location of the bonded tendons and determines if it is effective. See Calculation of
Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR 43, 6.10.5 (on page 1090) for further explanation.
The following figures show where bonded tendons would not provide serviceability crack control.

Results
Figure 195: Assumed stress distribution
Figure 196: Example 1: tendons in compression zone (not effective)
Figure 197: Example 2: ineffective tendons in tension zone: (i) small number of strands (ii) near neutral axis
43.12.8 Punching Shear

Question: How does Concept check punching shear?
Answer: See Punching Shear Design Notes (on page 1188).
Question: Does Concept check punching shear at the ends of the walls?
Answer: No.
Question: What is the stress ratio?
Answer: The ratio of maximum stress to allowable stress.
Question: Does Concept use redistributed moments in punching shear checks?
Answer: No. The biaxial moments are factored elastic moments.
Question: Is the design insufficient if the stress ratio exceeds 1.0?
Answer: The punching shear at such a column is either:
1. sufficient if provided with design punching shear reinforcement, or
2. insufficient (reinforcement cannot solve the problem and the concrete form needs revision).
Question: Why is there a punching failure at a beam? I thought that punching shear failures occur only in flat
slabs.

Results
Answer: The code provides formula for calculating punching shear. This does not apply any logic as to
whether a punching failure can occur.
RAM Concept is only doing a punching check at a column supporting a beam because the user drew a punching
check there. You should decide the nature of the potential failure mechanism and thus whether punching
check is appropriate.
Shallow beams could certainly have punching failure. Deep beams are less likely to have punching failure, and
one-way shear failure would be the likely failure mechanism.
For example, column A in the following two figures is satisfactory for one-way shear (with reinforcement in
the beam) but the code equation determines that there is a punching failure. You need to decide if this is
appropriate.
It would be possible, but very rare, for a punching failure at column B since it is satisfactory for one-way shear
in the beam (with reinforcement).
Figure 198: Mixed form: flat slab with column capitals and beams

Results
Figure 199: Shear results
43.12.9 Shear reinforcement (one-way)

Question: Why does my flat slab (or flat plate) model have one-way shear reinforcement results? I would expect
punching shear to govern, not one-way shear.
[Similarly: Why does my flat slab (or flat plate) model have one-way shear failures?]
Answer:
When engineers design flat slabs by hand, they often ignore the one-way checks. They decide that punching is
all that is appropriate. (This is often decided without much consideration – it just “seems right”).
RAM Concept does not make this decision, as nowhere does the code advise to ignore one-way shear checks in
a flat slab or flat plate. Nonetheless, you should decide what the possible failure mechanism is and so what is
appropriate. It may, or may not, be appropriate to ignore the one-way shear results. For example, columns C in
the previous two figures are satisfactory for punching shear (without reinforcement) but the mathematics of
the code requires one-way shear reinforcement. It is up to you to decide if this is appropriate.
Note: In fact, ACI 318-02 rule 11.12.1.1 specifically requires a one-way shear check in flat plates.
Question: The results have a lot more shear reinforcement than expected.
Answer:
This is likely to be a shear core issue. Refer to About shear core (on page 234) and Shear core in slabs (on page
236).
For a post-tensioned beam, the reason could be that RAM Concept is deducting a fraction of the (bonded) duct
from the web width per the appropriate code rules.

Results
RAM Concept calculates the number of duct by dividing the Strands per tendon by the Max strands per duct (as
specified in the Materials) and rounding up to the next integer.
Refer to the following sections for an explanation of RAM Concept’s shear web calculation:
• For AS 3600, Section 8.2 Shear Design (on page 1024)
• For BS 8110, Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of beams (on page 1084).
• For IS 456, Section 22.4 Design shear resistance of beams (on page 1117).
• For EC2, Section 6.2 Design shear resistance (on page 1143).
• For CSA A23.3, Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (on page 1170)
Note: There is no ACI318 rule concerning deduction of ducts.
Question: What does this audit text mean: Depth d is zero - replacing with column effective depth. Depth is still
zero - giving up.?
Answer:
The is likely a combination of two things:
• there is net compression force and a small moment, and as such the bending designer does not provide any
reinforcement
• the minimum designer has been turned off
If this is the case, you should consider turning the minimum designer back on.
43.12.10 Deflection
Question: Is cracking taken into account for deflection?
Answer: Not all deflection results consider creep and cracking. It is very important that you understand which
ones do and which do not. See Load History Deflections (on page 1176).
Question: Does Concept warn if deflection is too high?
Answer: No. Allowable deflection is a very subjective issue and RAM Concept does not warn if deflections
exceed conventional limits.
Note: RAM Concept does display a warning when deflections are so large that the analysis itself may no longer
be valid. This typically happens for structures that are unstable or nearly unstable. Often the instability is
related to unrestrained lateral displacements.
43.12.11 Soil bearing

Question: There are many soil bearing pressure plans. Is there a summary?
Answer:
The “Soil Bearing Design” rule set envelopes the maximum and minimum bearing pressures for all load
combinations.

Performance
Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design > Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan
43.13 Performance
Question: What are the graphics cards requirements?
Answer:
It is recommended that you use a graphics card supported by DirectX 9.0. See the graphics card manufacturer
for latest information on DirectX drivers.
If no graphics card supported by DirectX can be found, RAM Concept attempts to use software emulation
under Windows XP SP2 ,Vista and Windows 7. At least 128 MB of video RAM is recommended, but 256 MB is
more desirable. For optimal performance, graphics display color depth should be set to 24-bit or higher. When
using a color depth setting of 16-bit, some inconsistencies will be noted.

Warnings and Errors
44
RAM Concept has many error and warning messages that can be triggered during modeling and analysis. Some
messages are self-explanatory and do not warrant further explanation.
This chapter explains some of the more complicated warning and error messages that commonly arise.
Most errors and warnings advise of a coordinate (x,y) or an object number. RAM Concept shows coordinates at
the bottom of the workspace (see the first figure in Chapter 2). You can turn on object numbers with the Visible
Objects ( ) dialog box.
44.1 To show an object number

1. Choose Layers > Plan.
2.
3. Check the Numbers box under the appropriate object’s column, then click OK.
44.2 Meshing
RAM Concept can generate several different errors and warnings for meshing. A general description of meshing
limitations is in Limitations of the automatic meshing (on page 179).
It is strongly advised that you heed such errors and warnings and fix the problems. Otherwise, RAM Concept
generates the mesh every time you do a “Calc All”.
Note: Nearly all meshing problems are due to the user’s failure to use snapping properly.
44.2.1 Two or more slab areas or beams with the same priority overlap at (x,y)
Overlapping slabs and beams should have different priorities. This is explained in “The priority method”.

Warnings and Errors
Meshing
The error is generated when two or more overlapping slab or beam objects have the same priority.
To fix this error
1. Choose Layers > Mesh Input Layer > Standard Plan.

2.
3. Check the Priorities boxes under Beams and Slab Areas, then click OK.
4. Use the coordinates in the error dialog box to find the location of the problem, and revise the assigned
priorities. Usually this requires making sure that the thickest slab or beam have the higher priority (the
lowest priority is 1).
Note: The highest priority is not always assigned to the thickest element. For example, where a standard slab
area overlaps a depressed slab area.
44.2.2 Two or more beam areas overlap with conflicting stiffnesses at (x,y)
Overlapping beams have different material properties that affect their rigidity. In this case their properties
should be similar.
44.2.3 Vertical gaps in beam elevation at (x,y)

Vertical gaps have been detected in the defined beams at the given coordinate. Vertical gaps can drastically
reduce the strength of a beam.
44.2.4 Different concrete mixes specified at (x,y)

It is not recommended to have different material properties in the same member. Thus this warning is triggered
to notice this problem.
44.2.5 Line is too short at (x,y)

RAM Concept has a minimum element size of 50 mm (approximately 2 inches). This is effectively a “snap”
distance. When an object such as a slab area has two nodes closer than this distance the line between them is too
short. In such cases, RAM Concept merges the two nodes together and reports the coordinates of this occurrence
in the dialog box.
You can view the resulting elements and nodes in the element standard plan.

Warnings and Errors
Meshing
44.2.6 Feature eliminated at (x,y)

This warning is a result of one of two things:
• A feature is too small to model (for example, a 1" (25mm) wide slab area), or
• Failure to use snapping, causing small overlaps.
44.2.7 Recursion too deep

If the mesh ends up with 3 nodes at a tight angle, RAM Concept attempts to use recursion numerous times to
adjust the nodes and make the minimum angle larger. In such a case, the standard number of recursions did not
solve the tight angle, so the warning message reported that the recursion was too “deep”.
This does not generally cause a problem, although it is indicative that there is a “pointy” element which can
affect the contour plots. Generally, it is best to avoid this situation. See “Feature eliminated at (x,y)”.
Note: You should investigate the meshing / modeling of the problem area to ensure that Concept's elements are
reasonable for the area.
Note: This error is usually caused by a failure to use snapping while drawing: two lines that are supposed to be
in the same place are instead slightly off parallel and intersect.
44.2.8 An error has been found. Two column elements below the slab are at the
same location. Delete column element #a or #b.
This error occurs when you inadvertently draw a column at the same location twice, or copy and paste a column
and do not change the Support Set (above or below).
To fix this error
1. Choose Layers > Mesh Input Layer > Standard Plan.

2.
3. Check the Column numbers box.
4. Place the cursor at the appropriate column, double click and delete.
44.2.9 An error has been found. A column element below the slab is not attached
to the slab. Revise column element #a (below the slab)
This error occurs when a column is outside the slab boundary (or within an opening). To fix the problem you
should move the column or edit the slab such that the column is within the slab boundary.

Warnings and Errors
Loads
44.2.10 It is good modeling practice to connect wall centerlines. Click on the Fix
button to move wall endpoints to a nearby centerline
This warning occurs when the end of a wall is drawn within close proximity, but not coincident with another
wall centerline. Walls should be modeled this way in order to create the best analytical finite element mesh.
The dialog box offers an automatic fix (Click on the Fix button). If you click this button, RAM Concept moves the
wall endpoint to the centerline of the nearby wall.
44.3 Loads
44.3.1 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A point load is not
on the slab. Revise point load #a.
A point load that is not on a finite element is considered an error. Apart from generating the error, RAM Concept
essentially ignores the load.
44.3.2 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A line load is not
totally on the slab. Revise line load #a.
A line load that is not completely on finite elements generates this error. There may be times you ignore the
error, such as when a line load crosses an opening. RAM Concept ignores the part of the load crossing the
opening.
Note: You should closely investigate such an error. A line load may appear to be on a slab edge, but actually be
outside it. If you believe you have a line load across an opening and ignore the error, you may miss a real
problem.
44.3.3 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. A tendon is not
totally on the slab. Revise the tendon at #a.
A tendon that is not completely on finite elements generates this error.

Warnings and Errors
Tendons
Note: You should closely investigate such an error. A tendon may appear to be on a slab edge when it is actually
outside the slab boundary.
44.3.4 An error has occurred while assembling the load vector. An area load is
not on the slab. Revise area load #a.
An area load that is not completely on finite elements generates this error.
44.4 Tendons
44.4.1 Tendon #a has a radius (b) that is less than the minimum allowable (c).
Parabolic tendons with a large drape relative to their length have a small radius. A warning is triggered when the
tendon segment radius is less than the minimum radius for that tendon system.
A tendon’s minimum (vertical) radius is specified in the Materials section. RAM Concept does not check
horizontal radii as tendon segments are straight in plan.
The radii shown are suggestions based on industry standards. You can change them based on advice from
prestress companies.
Note: The warning can be indicative of an overbalanced condition (too much uplift) for parabolic tendons.
To remove the warning, you can adjust the tendon profile or change the minimum radius in the Material section.
To edit the minimum radius

2. Edit the minimum radius for the PT system.
44.4.2 Tendon #a is harped, and hence violates the minimum allowable radius (b)
A harped tendon has (vertically) straight segments. There is thus a zero radius at the profile point(s).
To avoid the harped tendon warning

2. Create a new PT system (possibly called “Harped”).
3. Set the minimum radius for the new PT system to zero.
4. Use the new system for the harped tendons.

Warnings and Errors
Tendons
44.4.3 Tendon #a is a simple parabola, and hence violates the minimum

allowable radius (b)
A simple parabola is violating the minimum ratio.
• To avoid this warning, set the minimum ratio to zero.
44.4.4 Cannot auto-position profile point at (x,y) due to profile point value
This warning occurs when both of the following are true for two tendon segments that share a Profile Point 2:
1. The tendon segments have the Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option checked, and
2. One, and only one, of the tendon segments is flat (that is, the values for Profile Point 1 and Profile Point 2
produce a flat tendon segment: this usually occurs when the two values are equal).
The Position Profile Point 2 for equal balance loads option is intended to move the plan position of Profile Point 2
so that the uplift is equal for both tendon segments. This is not possible when one tendon segment is flat (zero
drape) as there is no uplift in that tendon segment.
44.4.5 Cannot auto-position the profile elevation for tendon (a) at (b) because the
tendon represents a partial half span
A node on a single half-span tendon cannot be auto-positioned.
44.4.6 An error has occurred while trying to calculate a profile. A profile point is
not on the slab. Click on the Fix button to correct the profile point at (x,y).
This occurs when a tendon extends beyond the slab edge. To fix this error, stretch the profile point so its end is
on the edge or slightly inside the slab edge.
The dialog box offers an automatic fix (Click on the Fix button). If you click this button, RAM Concept moves the
profile point to the nearest concrete element.
44.4.7 Tendon is not on slab at (a).

A point along the tendon has been detected out of the slab.

Warnings and Errors
Tendons
44.4.8 Tendon elevation conflict at (a) (Profile Point above slab soffit step?)
The start or end point of a tendon is located in a place where the slab has a change step and there is a conflict in
determining the elevation of the tendon. Place the point out of this threshold change.
44.4.9 An error has occurred while trying to calculate a profile. A profile point is
not within the slab (vertically). Adjust the profile at (x,y).
This occurs when a tendon profile point is not within the slab thickness. Profile values are always relative to the
slab or beam soffit at the location of the profile point. The easiest way to find these problems is to look at a
tendon perspective.
If a profile point is at a top or bottom surface step, RAM Concept moves the profile point so that there is no
ambiguity. You should check that the profile point is within the expected slab area.
44.4.10 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon profiles. A
tendon is out of the slab at (x,y).
This is different to the previous error in that the profile points are within the slab, but the tendon is out of the
slab somewhere between the profile points. This usually occurs when there is a top or bottom surface step.
44.4.11 An error has occurred while trying to calculate the tendon effective
stresses. A tendon has a different number of strands than an adjacent
tendon. Investigate tendon #a.
You can vary the number of strands along a continuous tendon, but it is discouraged. This warning alerts you
that the number of strands within the tendon is variable.
To avoid the warning go to the appropriate tendon layer (the dialog box indicates on which layer the tendon is
located) and change the number of strands in the tendon.
Note: It is usually best to use the Select Connected Tendons tool.
See “Can I terminate some strands past a column?” in Chapter 39, “Frequently Asked Questions” for more advice.

Warnings and Errors
Tendons
stresses. Two connected tendons have inconsistent half span ratios.
Revise tendon #a.
The orientation of two consecutive half span ratios is wrong and not compatible to the other.
stresses. Two connected tendons have different post-tensioning systems.
Revise tendon #a.
The prestressed systems of two consecutive tendons are different.
stresses. A tendon is not connected to any jacks. Investigate tendon #a.
[If any tendons are stressed then all tendons must be stressed.]
RAM Concept calculates losses in tendons that have one or two jacks attached. RAM Concept does not allow a
(latitude or longitude) tendon layer to have some tendons with jacks but other tendons with no jacks. You can
have one tendon layer (say, latitude) with jacked tendons and the other tendon layer with no jacks.
When you encounter this error, find the tendon (from the number given) and draw at least one jack on the
tendon.
stresses. A tendon is stressed by two jacks with different wobble friction
coefficients/with different angular friction coefficients/with different
long-term losses.
Some characteristics of the two jacks are incompatible. Revise one of the jacks and set it like the other.

Warnings and Errors
Load History Deflections
stresses. A tendon is connected with other tendons in a circular fashion.
Revise tendon (a)
The path of a tendon returns to the same point and this is not allowed.
stresses. A tendon is jacked to a stress higher than its yield stress. Revise
the jack connected to tendon #a
The jack force is too high. Reduce the force or increment the number of tendons.
44.4.18 An error has occurred while trying to stress a tendon. There are no
tendons at a jack/There are multiple tendons at a jack. Investigate jack #a
The jack is either not connected or connected to several tendons.
44.5 Load History Deflections
44.5.1 An error has been found while calculating load history deflections. The
floor may have incomplete design strip/cross section coverage to
accurately calculate load history deflections. The slab coverages are a and
b in orthogonal directions
In order to accurately calculate load history deflections, RAM Concept needs each element containing significant
forces to be covered by the tributary of a design strip cross section or design section tributary. In order to make
sure the user hasn’t forgotten to define strips over a large portion of the slab, RAM Concept performs some
rudimentary checks to make sure a large portion of the slab is covered by cross section tributaries in two
perpendicular directions. This warning can be safely ignored in one-way slab regions where the spanning
direction is appropriately covered by cross sections.

Warnings and Errors
Optimization
44.6 Optimization
44.6.1 CONNECTION Client Sign In

This means that the CONNECTION Client is not running or the user has not signed in. The CONNECTION Client
that was installed with RAM Concept should be running and the user should be signed in to the CONNECTION
Client. The user should also be already registered with Bentley Cloud Services. Currently, only one sign on
session is allowed per user.
44.6.1 Cloud Services initialization error. Optimization configuration error.

A problem with the environment or the application ID and/or cluster ID was encountered.
44.6.1 Manual tendons cannot be optimized.

The program displays this error when manual tendons are detected within the optimization regions. The
program gives an option to delete them or to keep them. Either way, the manual tendons will not be part of the
optimization process.
44.6.1 The minimum optimizable property count of (a) is less than the permitted
minimum of 1.
The number of optimizable objects in a single region (or in the whole model) is zero. At least one optimizable
object should be considered in one optimizable region.
44.6.1 The maximum optimizable property count of (a) is greater than the
permitted maximum of 75.
The number of optimizable objects in a single region (or in the whole model) is over the maximum value of 75.
Reduce the region size, reduce the number of optimizable objects or combine like objects into one. This limit has
been used to avoid problems in the optimization to guarantee the finding of good solutions. The maximum
recommended value to use in a region is 50.
44.6.1 The maximum number of iterations of (a) is greater than the permitted
maximum value of 500.
The maximum number of iterations of 500 has been reached. Most models converge normally in less than 100
iterations. The program is having problems in finding a solution. An option would be to reduce the number of
optimizable objects or use more optimizable regions to simplify the problem. This limit was set to avoid long
optimization processes that may not have good results.

Warnings and Errors
Miscellaneous
44.6.1 Running scenarios must be stopped before the file can be closed. Stop (a)
running scenarios?
You cannot save and close the file if there are running optimization scenarios. If required, the user can run
another instance of RAM Concept to continue working with another file.
44.7 Miscellaneous
44.7.1 An error has occurred while triangularizing the stiffness matrix. The
structure is unstable at (a). Revise the structure.
This means that the structure has no lateral stability. You need to either provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear
walls, columns with sufficient moment connections, lateral springs etc.) or auto-stabilize the structure when the
Skyline solver is used.
To auto-stabilize the structure
1. Choose Criteria > Calc Options

2. Choose the General tab
3. Check the Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions box.
Note: This does not work if there are lateral loads.
44.7.2 An error has occurred: (a) has horizontal loads, but the structure is
automatically stabilized in the X and Y directions
You cannot auto-stabilize the structure if there are horizontal loads (other than tendons).
1. Uncheck the Auto-stabilize structure in X and Y directions box in the General tab of the Calc Options.
2. Provide some lateral stability (e.g. shear walls, columns with sufficient moment connections, lateral springs,
etc.).

Warnings and Errors
Miscellaneous
44.7.3 The code rules selected in Rule Set “Service” (Sustained Service / Max
Service) do not appear compatible with the load factors in the load
combinations using the rule set. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have
a load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the presence of tendons) and load factors of no more
than 1 for dead and live loadings. RAM Concept provides the warning when this is violated.
The warning usually occurs when you have added load combinations and forgotten to enter the Balance Loading
load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors for the Balance Loading to 1 for all of the load
combinations that utilize the service (sustained service / max service) rule sets.
44.7.4 Load Combination “Service” (Sustained Service / Max Service) has unusual
balance and / or hyperstatic load factors. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Service (and Sustained Service / Max Service) rule sets should logically have
a load factor of 1 for the Balance Loading (regardless of the presence of tendons) and a load factor (and alternate
envelope factor) of zero for the Hyperstatic Loading. RAM Concept provides the warning when this is violated.
The warning usually occurs when you have added load combinations and forgotten to enter the Balance Loading
load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors for the Balance Loading to 1 for all of the load
combinations that utilize the service (sustained service / max service) rule sets.
44.7.5 Rule Set “Strength Design” is being used by load combinations that appear
to have load factors set for different purposes. This is likely an error.
Any load combination that uses the Strength (or Ductility) rule sets should logically have a load factor (and
alternate envelope factor) of 1 for the Hyperstatic Loading (regardless of the presence of tendons). RAM Concept
provides the warning when this is violated.
The warning usually occurs when you have added load combinations and forgotten to enter the Hyperstatic
Loading load factors. To avoid the warning change all load factors (and alternate envelope factors) for the
Hyperstatic Loading to 1 for all of the load combinations that utilize the strength or ductility rule sets.
44.7.6 The mat / raft is likely unstable. There is less that 25% contact area.
When the mat (raft) has a significantly reduced bearing area it is likely that bearing pressures are very high and
there could be instability.

Warnings and Errors
Miscellaneous
44.7.7 Punching Check #a is not located at a column

This error occurs when a column is relocated after the punching checks have been drawn and the punching
check is no longer centered on the column. You need to remove and redraw the punching check. It usually helps
to show the punching check number.
To display the punching check number (as opposed to column number)
1. Choose Layers > Design Strips > Punching Checks Plan.

2.
3. Check the Punching Shear Checks numbers box.
44.7.8 Too many slab shapes intersecting the column shape at (x,y)
RAM Concept uses very sophisticated algorithms to find the critical sections around the column and slab
irregularities. If the column intersects a large number of slab thickness changes (such as where beams frame in
on each side), the run time could be very long. In this instance, RAM Concept just reports this error. This error
can be resolved by making the punch check smaller, simplifying the slab geometry around the column, or
deleting the punch check.
44.7.9 An error has been found. The cross section trimming for strip ab-c has
caused there to be no concrete remaining at one or more locations.
This error is typically reported at steps in the slabs.
The inter cross section slope limit is trimming the entire cross section away at the step. See “Inter Cross Section
Slope Limit Trimming” for more information.
You can avoid the problem by setting the inter cross section slope limit to a large value in spans containing large
steps. You should, however, consider the underlying reason for the error.
44.7.10 An error has been found. [Design strip] ab-c has reinforcing bars with too
much cover (the bottom bar is closer to the top than the top bar).
The trimmed cross section has a thickness and covers such that the location of the bars is illogical.
This is likely to happen with thin slabs, or steps.

Warnings and Errors
Miscellaneous
44.7.11 A cross section in design strip ab-c has no shear core

Due to generated cross section geometry, no part of the cross section extends from the top most elevation in the
cross section to the bottom most elevation. This will usually result in shear/torsion failures. This can normally
be avoided by rearranging the span segments and design sections to make sure each cross section contains a
shear core.
44.7.12 A cross section in design strip ab-c has a very small shear core
This normally occurs at small steps in the slab or changes in geometry in the slab. If a design cross section clips a
small change in slab thickness it can result in a small part of the cross section comprising the shear core. This can
normally be avoided by utilizing cross section trimming.
44.7.13 ab-c contains user transverse reinforcement but has multiple shear cores.
Shear/torsion calculations may be approximate
If user reinforcement is drawn in a cross section that contains multiple separate shear cores, the distribution of
the reinforcement between the cores is not known. The distribution of the transverse reinforcement within the
cores can significantly affect the strength. The calculations for this situation may therefore be approximate. To
eliminate this approximation, the span segment strips and design sections should be refined such that each cross
section only contains a single shear core.
44.7.14 ab-c contains user reinforcement that is not within the primary (largest)
shear core. This transverse reinforcement will be ignored
If user transverse reinforcement is drawn within a design cross section, but is not contained in the shear core (or
in the case of multiple shear cores, the largest shear core), it will be ignored. This error can be resolved by
moving the user transverse reinforcement to a plan location that will intersect the shear core of the cross
section.
44.7.15 An error has been found. ab-c contains multiple user transverse rebar
regions
Each cross section shear core can only contain a single user transverse reinforcement region. This error occurs
when more than one user transverse rebar has been drawn through a single cross section shear core. The error
can be resolved by deleting or moving the extraneous user transverse rebar.

Warnings and Errors Management Tool
45
The warning and error dialogs in RAM Concept normally report object numbers and/or coordinates where the
issue occurs. RAM Concept also provides an interactive tool to aid in finding and resolving calculation warnings
and errors that occur.
45.1 To launch the warnings and errors management tool

To show the warnings and errors dialog following a meshing or calculation operation choose Process > Display
Warnings ( ) or select the Display Warnings tool on the toolbar. The Warnings and Errors dialog opens to
display each warning or error in each row of the table.
Each warning or error is categorized by severity:
• Performance This item doesn’t represent a calculation error, but can cause increased model run time.
• Warning This item may represent an input or calculation error and should be evaluated. The calculations can
continue after the warning.
• Error This item represents an error in the input or calculations and should be fixed. The calculations can
continue after this type of error.
• Fatal This item represents an error that is severe and the calculations cannot continue. Calculations will stop
immediately and no subsequent errors or warnings will be logged during this calculation.
The warnings and errors dialog can be set to display automatically in the event that at least one warning or error
at the minimum severity specified is experienced. For example, if the Automatic display severity drop-down is
set to “Warning” then if a warning, error, or fatal error is experienced the warnings and errors dialog will display
automatically at the end of the calculation. The automatic display severity can also be set to “Never” in which
case the warnings and errors dialog will never display automatically. The dialog can always be launched
manually after the completion of a calculation.

Using the warning and error tool to find and resolve problems
45.2 Using the warning and error tool to find and resolve problems
Warnings and errors can be sorted by severity by clicking on the Severity column header. The Layer column
shows the layer that the warning or error is associated with, and the Type column provides a short description

Hiding and Unhiding Individual Warnings or Errors
of the warning or error. Hovering the mouse over the short description in the Type column will provide a more
detailed description.
45.2.1 Highlighting error geometry

Selecting one or more warning or error in the table will highlight any geometry associated with that warning or
error. The geometry is shown on the active plan regardless of the layer that contains the error object. There
must be an active plan displayed in order to view the geometry.
45.2.2 Selecting objects associated with warnings and errors

If there is an object associated with the warning or error, click Select to open a plan that displays the object's
plot layer and selects the appropriate object. This makes it easy to change the object's properties and either
revise or delete the object in order to resolve the issue. Double-clicking on an individual warning or error row is
equivalent to choosing that row and clicking Select.
45.2.3 Zooming the view to highlighted error extent

Click Zoom to change the current plan view zoom to the extent of the highlighted error and warning objects.
45.3 Hiding and Unhiding Individual Warnings or Errors

Once a warning or error has been resolved, you may wish to hide it from view in the table. Click Hide to hide all
selected warnings and errors. Click Unhide All to show all previously hidden warnings and errors.
45.4 Filtering Warnings and Errors by Type

Errors and warnings can be filtered by their type.
Click Filter by Type to select and unselect the types of warnings and errors that are shown in the list. The pull-
down will allow you to select “Show All” which will remove all current filters and show all rows that are not
hidden, and the “Filter All” selection will filter all types, temporarily removing everything from the table. After
using the “Filter All” command it would then be easy to target an individual error or warning type from the pull-
down to show.

Simple RC Slab Tutorial
46
This chapter describes the steps for modeling a single panel two-way flat plate with uniform loads.
The objective of the tutorial is to help you learn some basic modeling skills and expose you to a number of tools
and methods that should prove useful for real projects.
The codes used are ACI 318-02, AS3600-2001, BS8110:1997, EC2 - 2004, IS 456 : 2000, and CSA A23.3-04.
The instructions show “US units” for an ACI 318 design, with metric values and units in square brackets for
AS3600, BS8110, EC2, IS 456, and CSA A23.3. The metric values are not exact conversions.
For information on creating a new file, see Creating and opening files (on page 51).
46.1 Defining the structure

You start by drawing the structure and generating the element mesh.
46.1.1 Define the column locations and properties

1. Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan.
2.
Double click the Column tool ( ).
3. In the Default Column Properties dialog box:
a. Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 & EC2, M40 for IS 456;
30 MPa for CSA A23.3].
b. Set Width to 24 inches [600 mm].
c. Set Depth to 24 inches [600 mm].
4. Click OK.
Define the column locations by one of the following three methods. We strongly recommend you try all of
them for the purpose of learning different procedures.
5. Enter the following coordinates (x, y) and press return after each:
a. 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
b. 24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m]
c. 24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m]
d. 0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]

Defining the structure
Note: The coordinates will appear in the command line, see the first figure in Chapter 2.
Note: Do not enter the actual units (ft., m)

6. Go to “ Draw the slab area: ”, or select and delete the four columns and try the next method.
7. Right click over the plan and choose Grid.
8. In the Grid Setup dialog box:
a. Set x and y to 1 foot [0.25 meters].
b. Click OK.
9. Turn on Snap to Grid ( ).
10.
Click the Column tool ( ).
11. Place the cursor near the following coordinates and click (the cursor will snap to the grid and the coordinates
appear in the command line):
a. 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m]
b. 24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m]
c. 24, 20 ft. [7.25, 6 m]
d. 0, 20 ft. [0, 6 m]
12. Go to “ Draw the slab area: ”, or select and delete the four columns and try the next method.
13. Draw the two columns at 0, 0 ft. [0, 0 m] and 24, 0 ft. [7.25, 0 m] by one of the previous two methods.
14. Select the two columns.
15. Click the move tool ( ).
16. Hold down <Shift> and click anywhere on the workspace.
17. Type r0,20 [r0, 6], and press <Return>.
Note: This copies the two columns using the relative command. See “Using relative coordinates” for further
explanation.
46.1.2 Draw the slab area

1. Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ).
2. If previously turned on, turn off Snap to Grid ( ).
3.
Double click the Slab Area tool ( ) to edit the default properties.
4. In the Default Slab Area Properties dialog box:
a. Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 & EC2, M40 for IS 456;
30 MPa for CSA A23.3].
b. Set Thickness to 12 inches [300 mm].
c. Leave Surface Elevation as 0 and Priority as 1.
d. Click OK.
5.
With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the four corners of the slab by snapping at the “outside” corner
of each column.
6. Complete the rectangle by clicking at your starting point (or type “c” in the command line and press
<Return>).

46.1.3 Hatch the slab area

1.
The Visible Objects dialog box will appear.
2. Check “Hatching” under “Slab Areas”, and then click OK.
You have now defined the slab but the element mesh does not yet exist.
Figure 200: After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab area (hatched), and the columns.
46.1.4 Generate the mesh

1.
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 2 feet [0.6 m].
3. Click Generate.
46.1.5 View the mesh

1. Choose Layers > Element > Standard Plan.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This produces reasonable results, but a regular mesh is better. You
can regenerate a significantly improved mesh once you have defined design strips. This mesh is shown in the third
figure.

Figure 201: Element: Standard Plan (ACI318 example dimensions).
Figure 202: Element: Standard Plan (AS3600, BS8110, EC2, IS 456 and CSA A23.3 example).
Figure 203: Element: Standard Plan after regeneration (for ACI318 example; the metric codes produce a similar
mesh)
46.1.6 View the structure

1. Choose Layers > Element > Structure Summary Perspective.
2.
Use the Rotate about x- and y-axes tool ( ) to rotate the floor.
3. Click the Set Print Viewpoint tool ( ).
Upon returning to this perspective, you can look at the saved view by clicking Show Set Viewpoint ( ).

Drawing the loads
Figure 204: Element: Structure Summary Perspective.
46.2 Drawing the loads

RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight automatically. There is no limit to the number of loadings than
can be specified but this example defines only Live Loading.
1. Choose Layers > Loadings > Live (Reducible) Loading > All Loads Plan.
2. Double click the Area Load tool ( ).
3. In the Default Area Load Properties dialog box:
a. Change Fz to 50 psf [2.5 kN/m2].
b. Click OK.
This tool will now draw area loads of 50 psf [2.5 kN/ m2].
4. Define an area load over the entire slab by clicking four corners of a quadrilateral and then typing “c”. This
shape need not match the slab’s exact dimensions, but should cover the slab.
Figure 205: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on): ACI318 example.

Defining the design strips
Figure 206: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on): AS3600, BS8110, EC2, IS
456, & CSA A23.3 example.
46.3 Defining the design strips

Design strips are an essential part of RAM Concept because they link finite element analysis with concrete
design. Their properties include reinforcement bar sizes, cover, and parameters that RAM Concept uses to
determine which code rules are applicable for cross-section design. There are two directions named Latitude
and Longitude.
It is normal practice to design two-way RC flat plates with column and middle strips in two orthogonal
directions, and that practice is used here.
46.3.1 Draw latitude design strips

1. Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans Plan.
2. Double click the Span Segment tool ( ).
3. The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip Generation properties.
a. Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is the default for the AS3600 and IS 456 templates).
b. Click the General tab.
c. Uncheck the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
d. Click the Column Strip tab.
e. Change CS Top Bar to #6 [N20 for AS3600; T20 for BS8110; H20 for EC2; T20 for IS 456; 20M for CSA
A23.3].
f. Change CS Bottom Bar to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16 for BS8110; H16 for EC2; T16 for IS 456].
g. Click the Middle Strip tab.
h. Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box.
i. Click OK.
4.
5. The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to Generate set to Latitude (as shown in the following
figure):
a. Set Minimum Span Length to 2 feet [0.6 meters].
b. Click OK.

Figure 207: Generate spans dialog box
The latitude spans appear, as shown in the following figure.

6. Click the Generate Strips tool ( ), or choose Process > Generate Strips.
The latitude design strips appear, as shown in the second figure.
Figure 208: Latitude direction spans
Figure 209: Latitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)

46.3.2 Draw longitude design strips

1. Choose Layers > Design Strip > Longitude Design Spans Plan.
3. Click the Column Strip tab in the Default Span Properties dialog box. The defaults set up in the Latitude
Design Spans Plan will have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be the same for both directions,
change it for the longitudinal direction.
a. Change CS Top Cover to 2.25 inches [60 mm].
b. Change CS Bottom Cover to 1.38 inches [41 mm].
c. Click OK.
4.
5. In the Generate Spans dialog box:
a. Set Spans to Generate to Longitude.
b. Click the “up-down” orientation button, and click OK.
The longitude spans appear, as shown in the following figure.

The longitude design strips appear, as shown in the second figure.

Drawing punching shear checks
Figure 211: Longitude direction spans
Figure 212: Longitude direction design strips (with hatching turned on)
Now that there are design strips, you can generate a much more regular mesh.
46.3.3 Regenerate the mesh

1.
2. Click Generate.
3. There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the Element Standard Plan.
46.4 Drawing punching shear checks

Drawing the punching checks is very straightforward.
1. Choose Layers > Design Strip > Punching Checks Plan.

2.
Double click the Punching Shear Check tool ( ).
3. In the Default Punching Shear Check Properties dialog box:
a. Change Cover to CGS to 2.25 inches [60 mm] (the average top cover)
b. Click OK.
4. Fence the slab with the Punching Shear Check tool.
See the following figure to view the punching checks.

Calculate and view the results
Figure 213: Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan
46.5 Calculate and view the results

You can “run” the file at any time during modeling to analyze and check for errors. After you have drawn design
strips, RAM Concept can analyze and design. You can then view the results.
1. Click Calc All ( ).

46.5.1 Design status

The purpose of status plans is to indicate whether there are any violations of code limits for ductility, one-way
shear, and punching shear.
View Status
1. Select Layers > Design Status > Status Plan.
For ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the status plan shows OK for all design strips and punching shear checks. See
first following figure.
The BS8110 status plan shows punching shear failure. See second following figure.
The EC2 and CSA A23.3 status plan show OK for all design strips and OK with SSR for all punching shear checks.
Note: Status does not flag excessive deflections.

Figure 214: Design Status: Status Plan for ACI318, AS3600 & IS 456

Figure 215: Design Status: Status Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2)
46.5.2 Design reinforcement

You can view reinforcement results as bar drawings or plots.
View Reinforcement
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the eight design strips. See the following
figures.

Figure 216: Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for ACI318
Figure 217: Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for AS3600
Figure 218: Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2)

Figure 219: Design Status: Reinforcement Plan for IS 456
Such plans often suffer from “information overload” with congested results. For this reason, you can access plans
in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom), direction (latitude or
longitude), and type (flexural or shear). You should decide which plans best convey the results without too much
clutter.
View Specific Reinforcement

1. Choose Layers > Design Status > Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
See the four following figures.
Concept provides you with the code clause numbers that control the maximum top and bottom reinforcement at
any design strip cross section. The following uses latitude bottom reinforcement as an example.
View Reinforcement Controlling Criteria

2.
3. In the span designs (not section designs) column: uncheck Bar Descriptions and check Controlling Criteria,
and click OK.
See the last four of the following figures for latitude bottom reinforcement controlling criteria.
Figure 220: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for ACI318.

Figure 221: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for AS3600.
Figure 222: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 223: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS 456.
Figure 224: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for ACI318 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and
controlling Criteria checked.

Figure 225: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for AS3600 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and
Controlling Criteria checked.
Figure 226: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and
Figure 227: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS 456 with Bar Descriptions unchecked and

46.5.3 Design reinforcement plots

RAM Concept has plotting options that you can use to view various strip-based results such as moment, shear,
precompression, reinforcement and crack width.
This section steps you through setting up a reinforcement plot.
You can bypass this section, but there are steps that help you learn the more powerful aspects of the program.
To create a new plan that plots latitude bottom reinforcement

2. Enter a name for the plan, such as “Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement”. (RAM Concept automatically
prepends the layer name and appends the word “Plan”).
3. Select the Design Status layer, and click OK.
4. Click Show Nothing and click OK.
5.
The Plot dialog box appears with the Section Design dialog.
6. Check the Active box.
7. Select the Bottom radio button.
8. Change Max Frame Number to 2, and click OK.
See the following figures for the reinforcement plots.
Figure 228: Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for ACI318.

Figure 229: Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for AS3600
Figure 230: Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 231: Design Status: Plot: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan for IS 456
46.5.4 Punching shear

You can view punching shear results on dedicated plans.

View Punching Shear

1. Select Layers > Design Status > Punching Shear Status Plan.
You can see that, for ACI318, AS3600 and IS 456, the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0 and hence
punching shear capacity is satisfactory.
The USR for BS8110 is 1.17. Since the stress ratio exceeds 1.0, shear reinforcement is required. RAM Concept
designs stud shear reinforcement (SSR) for such situations.
View SSR
1. Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan.
The result for BS8110 is shown in the fourth figure.
Figure 232: Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for ACI318.
Figure 233: Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for AS3600

Figure 234: Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 235: Design Status: SSR Plan for BS8110 (Amd #1 & #2).
Figure 236: Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan for IS 456
46.5.5 Deflection
Usually you are interested in deflections for Service (Dead and Live Load plus PT if applicable) and Long Term.
RAM Concept uses gross section inertia for deflection contours. You can investigate the effects of creep,
shrinkage and cracking with Load History Deflections. See Chapter 65, “Load History Deflections” for more
information.
Note: The following deflection plans DO NOT consider cracking, creep or shrinkage.

View service deflection

1. Select Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC > Deflection Plan
The service deflection contours should be visible, as shown in the following figures.
Note: These models use compressible columns and hence the deflection includes column
deflection.
Note: The AS3600 template uses 70% of live load for the Service LC.
Figure 237: Service LC: Deflection Plan for ACI318.

Figure 238: Service LC: Deflection Plan for AS3600.

Figure 239: Service LC: Deflection Plan for BS8110.
Figure 240: Service LC: Deflection Plan for IS 456.
View service deflection without colors

1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC > Deflection Plan.
2.
Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ) to change Plot Type from Color Contour to Contour.

Note: As previously mentioned, you are strongly advised to review Chapter 65, “Load History Deflections” to
understand how Concept considers cracking, creep and shrinkage for deflection calculations.
46.5.6 Bending Moments

While it is not necessary to view bending moments, it can be useful, especially for irregular structures. Even
though principal moments are important, the default moment contours plans are for Mx (moment about the x-
axis) and My. This is because most designers detail reinforcement orthogonally, and the directions are usually
the x- and y-axes. You can view moments about any axes, including the principal axes.
It is not particularly easy to assess the moment contours. This is why Plot Distribution Tools are so useful.
Note: Plot Distribution Tools are useful for qualitative results but not quantitative results. Refer to “Section
distribution plots” and, in particular, the “Summary”
View Moments
1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Code Specific Load Combination > Mx Plan.
For ACI318, use Factored LC: 1.4D.
For AS3600, use Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5 L.
For BS8110, use Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6L + 1.6S.
For IS 456, use Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5 L + 1.6S.
For EC2, use Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L + 0.75S
For CSA A23.3, use Factored LC: 1.4D.
The contours are moment per unit length about the global x-axis.
2. Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( )
3. Click the Selected Plot Distribution tool ( ).
4. Click first at the top of the structure and again on the bottom side.
This shows the bending moment shape, about the x-axis, along the line you have drawn. See the following
figures.
5. Now click from left to right across the structure.
This shows how Mx varies along the span. If you do it through the column centers, you will see how the column
strip has large negative moments and a small positive moment near midspan. If you do it in the middle strip, you
will see only positive moments.
See “About plot sign convention” in Chapter 8, “Choosing Sign Convention” for further information.

Drawing reinforcement
Figure 241: Factored LC: 1.4D: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for ACI318.
Figure 242: Ultimate LC: 1.2D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for AS3600.
Figure 243: Ultimate LC: 1.4D+1.6L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for BS8110.
Figure 244: Ultimate LC: 1.5D+1.5L: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool for IS 456.

46.6 Drawing reinforcement

Version 3.0 introduces vastly improved tools for drawing reinforcement bars.
46.6.1 Drawing a bottom reinforcement mat

In this section you are shown how to draw a bottom reinforcement mat and see the ramifications.
1. Choose Layers > Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan.

2. Double click the Distributed Reinf. Cross in Perimeter tool ( ).
3. The Default Distributed Reinforcement Properties dialog box opens.
a. Note that Elevation Reference is set to Bottom Cover.
b. Change Elevation to 0.75 inches [25 mm for AS3600, BS8110, IS 456, EC2, and CSA A23.3].
c. Change Bar Type to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16 for BS8110; T16 for IS 456; H16 for EC2; 15M for CSA
A23.3].
d. Change Spacing to 12 inches [225 mm for AS3600; BS8110, IS 456, EC2, and CSA A23.3].
4. Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
6. Click at another point to the left or right to define the orientation of the (primary) reinforcement.
A polygon appears that is the shape of the slab. Once the file is run you can view the individual bars via the
Visible Objects dialog box.
Note: This creates three objects: a polygon matching the slab outline, a reinforcement object that belongs to
the latitude reinforcement layer and a reinforcement object that belongs to the longitude reinforcement
layer.
7. Using the Stretch tool, you can adjust the bar grip postilions for a better appearance.
Figure 245: ACI 318: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan

Figure 246: Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C appears such that AC = AB. The bars are
shown to points A and B but the symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
Figure 247: Bottom mat modified by stretching grip points at B and C.
Figure 248: AS3600, BS8110, IS456: Reinforcement > Bottom Bars Plan

Figure 249: Bottom mat defined by clicking at points A and B. Point C appears such that AC = AB. The bars are
shown to points A and B but the symbol indicates the reinforcement continues to the slab edges.
Figure 250: Bottom mat modified by stretching grip points at B and C.

PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08
47
This chapter describes the steps for modeling a post-tensioned two-way flat plate with uniform loads.
The objective of this tutorial is to build on the skills learned in the Chapter 41 RC tutorial and introduce new
steps, such as using a CAD drawing and post-tensioning.
Some tools and methods described in the RC tutorial are not used here. As such, it is highly recommended that
you first do the RC tutorial.
This is not a particularly “aggressive” design. After you have completed the tutorial, you may wish to make the
slab thinner to investigate the ramifications.
You could also use this as a reinforced concrete tutorial by making a few adjustments (for example, a thicker
slab).
47.1
47.2 Import the CAD drawing

The CAD file you import is located in your RAM Concept program directory.

2. Select the CAD drawing file flat_plate.dwg.
3. Select Inches (the units used in the CAD file) and click OK.
47.3 Define the structure

To use the CAD file you need to make it visible on the Mesh Input layer.

Define the structure
47.3.1 Show the drawing on the mesh input layer

2.
3. Click the Drawing Import tab.
4. Click Show All, and then click OK.

1. Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap to Point ( ).
2.
a. Choose a Concrete Strength of 5000 psi.
b. Set Thickness to 10 inches.
d. Click OK.
4.
With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the 10 vertices of the slab outline by snapping to the imported
drawing’s slab corners.
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at 86, 27 ft and 86, 29 ft. Cursor plan coordinates
display next to the command prompt.
5. Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point (or type “c” in the command line and press <Enter>).

Figure 251: The slab outline on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
47.3.3 Draw the balcony slab area

1.

a. Change Thickness to 8 inches.

b. Change Surface Elevation to -2 inches.
c. Change the Priority to 2, and click OK.
3.
With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the six vertices of the balcony outline by clicking at each vertex,
and then click at your starting point (or type “c” in the command line and press <Enter>).
Figure 252: The balcony slab on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
47.3.4 Draw the drop caps

1.
a. Change Thickness to 20 inches.
b. Change Surface Elevation to 0, and leave the Priority as 2.
c. Click OK.
3.
With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the four drop caps with four or five vertices as appropriate.
4. Go to “ Draw the opening ”:, or try the next method
5.
With the Selection tool ( ), select (by double-clicking) and delete the drop cap at B-2.

6. Click Redraw ( ).
similar tools available for this button.
7.
Place the mouse over the Slab Area tool ( ) and press down on the left mouse button for one second.
A pop-up menu appears.
8. Select the Drop Cap tool from the menu.
The selected tool becomes current for that button.
9. Click at the column at B-2.
A Drop Cap Tool dialog box appears.
10. Enter an angle of zero degrees.
11. Enter a side dimension of 3.75 feet and click OK.
47.3.5 Draw the opening

1.
Select the Slab Opening tool ( ).
2. Define the four corners of the opening by clicking at each location, and then click at your starting point.

Figure 253: The opening on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
47.3.6 Hatch the slab areas

1.
2. Check “Hatching” under “Slab Areas”.
3. Check “Hatching” under “Slab Openings”, and click OK.


1.
Double click on the Column tool ( ).
b. Set Width to 24 inches.
c. Set Depth/Diameter to 24 inches.
3. Click OK.
4. Click at the center of all 13 column locations shown on the imported drawing.
47.3.8 Define the wall location and properties

2.
Double click on the Wall tool ( ).
3. In the Default Wall Properties dialog box:
4. Click OK.
5. Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on the centerline.
a. Place the cursor near 29.5, 87 ft and it will snap to where the center of the wall intersects the edge of the
slab, and click.
b. Place the cursor at the center of the column at C-2 (it will snap orthogonally) and click.
You have now defined the structure but the element mesh does not yet exist.
6. Go to “ Generate the mesh ”:, or try the next method.
7. The wall should be highlighted as it is the current selection. If not, select it by double-clicking and press
<Delete>.
9.
Place the mouse over the Wall tool ( ) and press down on the left mouse button for one second.
10. Select the Left Wall tool from the menu.
11. Click at the extreme corner of the slab near D-2.
12. Click at Grid C, near C-2.

Figure 254: After defining the slab, the Mesh Input: Standard Plan shows the slab areas and opening (hatched), the
columns and the wall.

1.
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 3 feet.

3. Click Generate.

1. Choose Layers > Element Standard Plan.
You will now see a somewhat random mesh. This will still produce reasonable results, but will significantly
improve when you regenerate it later on.
Figure 255: Element: Standard Plan.

2.

Define the loads
47.4 Define the loads

RAM Concept calculates the concrete self-weight automatically.
RAM Concept uses superposition of loads. The easiest way to define areas with increased area loads is to draw a
“blanket” area load over the entire floor, and then draw the additional loads.
There is no limit to the number of loadings than can be specified.
47.4.1 Define the typical live load

a. Change Fz to 40 psf and click OK.
This tool will now draw area loads of 40 psf.
47.4.2 Define the balcony live load

2. Define an area load by snapping to the six vertices of the balcony (and then type c). In this situation, it is best
for the load to match the balcony’s dimensions.

Define the loads
You have drawn another 40 psf load. This load should be highlighted as it is the current selection. If not,
select it before proceeding by double-clicking with the selection tool.
Select Edit > Selection Properties
or
right-click and choose Selection Properties
4. In the dialog box, change Fz to 60 psf and click OK.
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 100 psf.
Note: You could have drawn the 60 psf load by first changing the area load default properties and then using the
tool.
Figure 257: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (showing the balcony area load).
Figure 258: Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
47.4.3 Define the other dead loading

2.
With the Selection tool ( ), select both area loads (fencing the balcony load selects both loads).
3. Choose Edit > Copy.
4. Choose Layers > Loadings > Other Dead Loading > All Loads Plan.
5. Choose Edit > Paste.
This pastes the live loads onto the Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan, ready for editing.

Define the post-tensioning
6.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the “blanket” load by double clicking in the center of the floor.
7. Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu.
8. In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 20 psf, and click OK.
9. Double-click the balcony load.
The balcony load should be the only selected load.
11. In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to -20 psf, and click OK.
The balcony other dead load is now effectively zero.
Figure 259: Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan (with area loads hatching turned on).
47.5 Define the post-tensioning

Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to country. In the USA it is common to use the “banding”
technique for detailing tendons in two-way slabs. Banding means concentrating the tendons over support points
in one direction, and distributing them uniformly in the orthogonal direction. This method is generally used in
conjunction with full-panel design strips. That is, column and middle strips are not used.
Note: RAM Concept has two layers for tendons called latitude and longitude. Refer to “Using the latitude and
longitude prestressing folders” for more information.
Note: The tutorial in Chapter 49 explains the use of Strip Wizard to establish an estimate of the number of
strands required for the critical band.
47.5.1 Define the manual latitude tendons Pt. 1

1. Choose Layers > Latitude Prestressing > Manual Latitude Tendon > Standard Plan.
2.
4. Click Show All, and click OK.

Showing the CAD file makes the following instructions easier to follow.
5.
Double click the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) to edit its default properties.
6. In the Default Tendon Properties dialog box:
a. Set Strands per Tendon to 9.
b. Set Profile at end 1 to 8.75 inches.
c. Set Profile at end 2 to 1.25 inches, and click OK.
Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand determines these profiles.
Proceed immediately to “Define the manual latitdue tendons Pt. 2”.

Complete the steps in “Define the manual latitude tendons Pt. 1” before proceeding.
1.
With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a tendon along grid A:
a. Click at the center of the column at grid intersection A-1.
b. Click at the center of the column at A-2.
c. Click at the center of the column at A-3.
d. Right click, and then click Enter.
2.
a. Set Strands per Tendon to 21, and click OK.
4.
With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a tendon along grid B:
a. Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B-1.
b. Click at the center of the column at B-2.
c. Click at the center of the column at B-3.
d. Click at the center of the column at B-5.
e. Right click, and then click Enter.
5.
With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a tendon along grid C:
a. Click at the center of the column at grid intersection B.8-1.
b. Click at the center of the column at C-2.
c. Click at the center of the column at C-3.
d. Click at the center of the column at C-4.
The latitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the end
of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 10-inch slab.
Proceed immediately to “Define the namual latitdue tendons Pt. 3”.


1.
With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the terminated tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap,
by:
a. Double clicking at grid intersection B-1.
b. Hold the <Shift> key down and double click at B.8-1.
c. Hold the <Shift> key down and double click at C-4.
d. Hold the <Shift> key down and double click at D-2.
e. Hold the <Shift> key down and double click at D-4.
3. In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 5 inches and click OK.
4.
With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the terminated tendon segments over a drop cap, by:
a. Double clicking at grid intersection A-1.
b. Hold the <Shift> key down and double click at A-3.
c. Hold the <Shift> key down and double click at B-5.
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the centroid of the 10-inch slab, rather than the centroid of
the drop cap.
7.
With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon segment at B-2.
9. In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 18.75 inches and click OK.
10.
With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon segment at C-2.
12. In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 6.75 inches, and click OK.
Note: This accounts for the step near this location.

13.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segments between C-2 and C-3.
14.
Click the Calc Profile tool ( ).
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the current balance load is -2.58 kips/ft. If this is not
the number then you probably selected only one tendon segment.
15. Click Cancel.
Proceed immediately to “Define the namual latitdue tendons Pt. 4”.


1.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon between C-3 and C-4.
2.
3. Input the desired balance load as -2.6 kips/ft in the Calc Tendon Profile dialog box and click Calc.
The low point (end 2) adjusts to 5.01 inches.
4.
With the Selection tool ( ), select all the end span tendons between grids 3 and 5.
6. In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 2 to 5 inches, and click OK.
Note: These steps first used the Calc Profile tool to determine a low point that produces a similar average uplift
in an end span as the adjacent span, and then manually changed the low points for practical reasons.
Figure 260: Manual Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan
47.5.5 Define a latitude tendon polyline

This example shows that the tendon generation can be mixed between the tendon parameters and manual
tendon layers. In most cases you would use exclusively one or the other to work with tendons.
1. Choose Layers > Latitude Prestressing > Latitude Tendon Parameters.

4.
Double click the Banded Tendon Polyline tool ( ) to edit its default properties.
5. In the Default Banded Tendon Polyline Properties dialog box:
a. Set Number of Strands to 9, and click OK.
6.
With the Banded Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a banded tendon polyline:
a. Click at the center of the column at D-4.

b. Click at the edge of the slab near D-2.
47.5.6 Define the latitude profile polylines

1.
Double click the Profile Polyline tool ( ) to edit its default properties.
2. In the Default Profile Polyline Properties dialog box:
a. Set Elevation to 5 inches.
3. Draw a profile polyline:
a. Click at the top of the column intersection with column line 4 at D-4.
b. Click at the bottom of the column intersection with line 4 at D-4.
c. Right click and select Enter.
a. Click at the top of the column intersection with column line 3 at D-3.
b. Click at the bottom of the column intersection with line 3 at D-3.
a. Click at the corner of the slab at D-2.
b. Type r0,-2.
c. Right click and select Enter
6. Select the profile polyline at D-3, right click and choose Selection Properties. Change the elevation to 1.25
inches.
7. Select all 3 drawn profile polylines.
8.
Choose the Generate Span Polylines tool ( ).
9. Set the Elevation to 1.25 inches, and click OK.

Figure 261: Latitude Tendon Parameters: Standard Plan
47.5.7 Define the manual longitude tendons Pt. 1

1. Choose Layers > Longitude Prestressing > Manual Longitude Tendon > Standard Plan.
3.
Double click the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) to edit its default properties.
b. Set Profile at end 1 to 8.75 inches.
c. Set Profile at end 2 to 1.25 inches, and click OK.

Note: The one-inch cover to the half-inch diameter strand determines these profiles. Strictly speaking, you
should adjust Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with latitude tendons) but you can ignore for this
tutorial.
5.
With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons in the bottom left panel:
d. Click at the center of the column at A-2.
6. In the Tendon Panel dialog box:
a. Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
b. Set Spacing to 6 feet, and click OK.
Note: This spacing exceeds some code maxima, but the tendon layout is for design purposes and not
necessarily for detailing.
7.
With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons in the next panel:
b. Click at the center of the column at B.8-1.
a. Set Auto Connect, and click OK.
9. Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point () and Snap Orthogonal ( ).
Proceed immediately to “Define the manual longitude tendons Pt. 2”.

Complete the steps in “Define the manual longitude tendons Pt. 1” before proceeding.
1.
With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons in the balcony:
b. Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 59 ft.
c. Click at the tendon profile point at 24, 56.6 ft.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 24, 59 ft.
a. Click at the tendon profile point at 24, 56.6 ft.

4. In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 6 inches and Profile at end 2 to 4 inches, and click OK.
5.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the two shortest of the half-span (cantilever) tendon segments.

Note: This makes the short tendon segments flat.

8.
b. Set Spacing to 6 feet.
c. Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
10.
11. In the Tendon Panel dialog box, click OK to accept the last choices. Alternatively, you could select Auto
Connect, but you would have to uncheck Skip Start Tendon.

1.
This sequence is counterclockwise.
a. Click at the center of the column at grid intersection C-3.
b. Click at the center of the column at D-3.
c. Enter 31, 86 (feet).
d. Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
e. Click at the center of the column at C-2.
a. Set Auto Connect.
b. Uncheck Skip start tendon, and click OK.
3.

a. Set Layout to Splayed.

b. Set Tendon Spacing to Equal.
c. Set Spacing to 6 feet.
d. Check Skip start tendon, and click OK.
5.
c. Click at the center of the column at D-4.
Note: Auto-connect will ignore the tendons at the first click because there are already two tendon segments
connected at that point.
The panel in the top right has too many tendons and some should be deleted.
7. Select the second tendon in this panel.
8. Hold down <Shift> and select the fifth tendon in this panel, and press <Delete>.
9.
With the Half Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons that terminate in this panel:
a. Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ).
b. Click at the profile point at 63.2, 58 ft.
c. Type r0,7.
d. Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 72.8, 65 ft.
a. Click at the last tendon profile point at 72.8, 58 ft.


The longitude tendons are drawn but you need to adjust a number of profile points. Any profile point at the
end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 10-inch slab.
4.
With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the terminated tendon segments, other than those over a drop cap
or within the balcony slab:
a. Fence the tendon segments that end on grid A.

b. Hold the <Shift> key down and repeat the procedure until you have selected all applicable end tendon
segments (tendon segments terminating at grids B and D).
7.
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the centroid of the 10-inch slab, rather than the centroid of
the drop cap.
10.
12. In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 18.75 inches and click OK.
Finally, you need to move the tendon that goes through the opening.

1.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment that passes through the opening.
3. Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-1.5,0.
4.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segment above the moved tendon.
6. Stretch the end of the tendon segment to meet the end of the moved tendon.
7. Repeat for the tendon segment below the moved tendon.
Note: You could cut down the number of steps in moving the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool.
This combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to “Expanding tool buttons” and “Using the Utility
tool to move and stretch” for further information.

Figure 262: Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
47.5.12 Replace some manual longitude tendons with a distributed tendon

quadrilateral
1.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendons between lines 1 and 2, and press the delete button.
2. Choose Layers > Longitude Prestressing > Longitude Tendon Parameters.
5.
Double click the Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral tool ( ).
a. Change the Tendon Orientation Angle to 90 degrees.
b. Change the Number of Strands to 0.6667 /feet, and click OK.
6.
With the Distributed Tendon Quadrilateral tool ( ) selected:
a. Click the corner of the slab at A-1.
b. Click the corner of the slab at C-1.
c. Click the center of the column at C-2.
d. Click the edge of the slab at A-2.
47.5.13 Define the longitude profile polylines Pt. 1

1.
Double click the Profile Polyline tool ( ) to edit its default properties.
2. In the Default Profile Polyline Properties dialog box:
a. Set Elevation to 5 inches.
3. Turn off Snap Orthogonal ( ).
a. Click at the intersection of the slab edge with line B.8 near line 1.

d. Right click and select Enter.

a. Click at the intersection of the slab edge with line B near line 1.
a. Click at the intersection of the slab edge with line A near line 1.
Proceed immediately to “Define the longitude profile polylines Pt. 2”.

Complete the steps in “Define the longitude profile polylines Pt. 1” before proceeding.

2. Hold down the <Shift> key, click anywhere on the plan, and type r0,-0.75.
3. Select the profile polyline between B-1 and B-2.
5. Change the elevation to 1.25 inches.
6. Select the profile polyline between B.8-1 and C-2.
7. Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) .
9. Stretch the end of the profile polyline at C-2 to approximatley mid way between lines 1 and 2.
11. Change the Elevation Reference to Above Soffit and the Elevation to 6 inches, and click OK.
12.
Choose the Profile Polyline tool ( ).
13. Turn off Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ).
14. Turn on Snap to Point ( ).
Proceed immediately to “Define the longitude profile polylines Pt. 3”.

Complete the steps in “Define the longitude profile polylines Pt. 2” before proceeding.

a. Click at the end of the profile polyline point stretched to mid way between lines 1 and 2.
3. Change the Elevation Reference to Above Soffit and the Elevation to 4 inches, and click OK.

Create the design strips
4. Select all four profile polylines on the longitude tendon parameters layer along lines C/B.8, B, and A.
5.
Choose the Generate Span Polylines tool ( ).
6. Set the Elevation to 1.25 inches and the Span Orientation Angle to 90 degrees, and click OK.
7.
Choose the Generate Tendons tool ( ) and inspect the generated tendons on the Generated Latitude
Tendon and Generated Longitude Tendon layers.
Figure 263: Longitude Tendon Parameters: Standard Plan
47.6 Create the design strips

determine which code rules are applicable for section design. There are two directions called Latitude and
Longitude.

47.6.1 Generate the latitude spans

1. Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Spans Plan.
The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip Generation properties.
3. Click the General tab.
4. Change Environment to Class U (corrosive).
Note: This actually has no effect because ACI 318 requires two-way post-tensioned slabs to be designed as
class U.
Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already checked in the ACI 318 template.
5. Click the Column Strip tab.
6. Set Cross Section Trimming to Max Rectangle.
7. Change CS Top Cover to 1 inch.
8. Change CS Code Min. Reinforcement Location to Elevated Slab.
9. Click OK.
10.
The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to Generate set to Latitude.
11. Set Minimum Span Length to 2 feet and click OK.
The span segments appear in the latitude direction.
Figure 264: Design Strip: Latitude Design Spans Plan.
Two span segments are skewed. How you treat skewed strips is often a subjective matter, but in this tutorial we
suggest one strip is straightened and the other edited in a different manner.
47.6.2 Generate the latitude strips

The design strips appear in the latitude direction.

Figure 265: Latitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
RAM Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not always produce acceptable span segments and span
segment strips, as shown in the following three figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools
You can see this more easily if the strip hatching is turned on.
47.6.3 Hatch the strips

1.
2. Check Hatching under Latitude Span Segment Strips, and click OK.
Figure 266: Skewed span segment that snapped to end of wall
47.6.4 Straighten a span segment

1. Select span segment 4-2 (between the wall and grid D3), as shown in the previous figure.
3. Select the Rotate tool ( ).
4. Click at the end of the span segment at grid D3.
5. Click at the end of the span segment at the wall.
The command line prompts Enter rotation end angle.
6. Enter 180 and press <Enter>.
The selected span segment is now horizontal.

Figure 267: Diagonal strip that warrants manual improvement.
47.6.5 Edit the span cross section orientation

1. Select span segment 3-1 as shown in the previous figure.
2. Select the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
4. Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above or below the first click.
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now “vertical”.
Figure 268: Design strip with excessive width.
47.6.6 Draw a Span Boundary Polyline

1. Select the Span Boundary Polyline tool ( ).
2. Click at the intersection of Grid B and Grid C design strips near Grid 3 (point A in the previous figure).
3. Click to the right of the slab edge (point B).
4. Right-click, and click enter.
47.6.7 Regenerate the latitude span strips

1. Click the Generate Strips tool ( ).
The two edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 269: Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after strip regeneration.
47.6.8 Generate the longitude spans

1. Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Design Spans Plan.
The defaults set up in the Latitude Design Spans Plan will have remained the same. Since the cover cannot be
the same for both directions, change it for the longitudinal direction.
a. Change CS Top Cover to 1.63 inches.
b. Change CS Bottom Cover to 1.25.
c. Click OK.
4.
b.
Click the “up-down” orientation button tool ( ).
c. Click OK.
The spans appear in the longitude direction, as shown in the following figure.
One span segment on grid 2 is slightly skewed due to the column wall detail at C2. Another span segment
overlays a wall and is unnecessary since the slab is continuously supported (see “Drawing design strips near
walls” for discussion).

Figure 270: Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan.
Related Links
• Drawing design strips near walls (on page 263)

1. Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (the highlighted span segment in the previous figure).
4. Click at the end of the span segment at grid B2.
The selected span segment is now vertical.
47.6.10 Delete the span segment over the wall

1. Select the span segment that overlays the wall, and press <Delete>.

1. Select the diagonal span segment between B-5 and C-4.
4. Click near the diagonal span strip and then again to the left or right of the first click.
The orientation line half way along the span strip is now “horizontal”.

47.6.12 Generate the longitude strips

The design strips appear in the longitude direction.
Figure 271: Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after strip generation.
47.6.13 Check for punching shear

2.
a. Change Cover to CGS to 1.63 inches (cover to centroid of top reinforcement).
b. Click OK.

Regenerate the mesh
Figure 272: Design Strip: Punching Checks Plan.
47.7 Regenerate the mesh

that once you have completed the design strips, you regenerate the mesh.
1.
2. Enter Element Size of 2.5 feet and click Generate.

There is now a better mesh. View the mesh on the Element: Standard Plan.
Figure 273: Element: Standard Plan after regeneration.

After you run the model, you can view the results of the analysis and design calculations.
47.8.1 Review Calc Options

2. Review the options, and click OK.
Note: See “ Calculating the results (on page 350) ” for more information.
Related Links
• Calculating the results (on page 350)
47.8.2 Calculate
An error message appears concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2. Click Continue three times to clear the error message.
The source of the error messages must be investigated.
47.8.3 View the design strips with tendons

1. Choose Layers > Design Strips > Longitude Cross Sections Perspective.

2.
3. Click the Tendons tab.
4. Select the Longitude Tendons layer, check Tendons, and click OK.
5.
Use the Rotate about X and Y axes tool ( ) and the Zoom Rectangle ( ) tool to view the problem location
shown in the following two figures.
Figure 274: Longitude Cross Sections Perspective with longitude tendons visible.
Figure 275: Rotation and zoom-in of the problem location in the previous figure.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Max Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that
setting is causing a problem because of the combination of the drop cap and thinner balcony slab.
47.8.4 Edit span segment 6-2

2.
3. Check the Numbers box under Longitude Span Segments, and click OK.
4. Select span segment 6-2.
7. Change CS Cross Section Trimming to Inverted T or L, and click OK.
47.8.5 Recalculate
RAM Concept completes the calculations without errors.

See “Cross Section Trimming” for a thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
Related Links
• Cross Section Trimming (on page 233)

Look at design status
Figure 276: Design Status: Status Plan.
This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility,
flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
There are punching shear status results at each column. You can see these more easily on the dedicated
punching plan.
2. Choose Layers > Design Status > Punching Shear Status Plan.

RAM Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at six column locations and “OK with SSR” at one column.
“Non-standard Section” is a warning, not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections
that RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three ACI 318-05 cases:
interior, edge and corner. RAM Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections. Refer to “Non-
Standard Sections: ACI 318 and CSA A23.3” in Chapter 29 for more information.
Where the unreinforced stress ratio (USR) is less than 1.0, the column’s punching shear is satisfactory
without any reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning “Non-standard section”)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where RAM Concept reports “OK with SSR”.
If RAM Concept reports “Failed” then SSR does not solve the problem and a thickening is required.
Note: Choose Layers > Design Status > SSR Plan to view the stud shear reinforcement.
Figure 277: Design Status: Punching Shear Status Plan.

Look at design reinforcement

Figure 278: Design Status: Reinforcement Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. Since the slab is post-
tensioned, there is not much reinforcement. You might choose to view all design reinforcement on the one
plan, or you can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according to: face (top or
bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).
2. Choose the plans that best convey the results without too much clutter.

Figure 279: Design Status: Latitude Bottom Reinforcement Plan.
The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so
that the number is consistent each side of columns.
Look at detailed top reinforcement

1. Choose Layers > Reinforcement > Top Bars Plan.

Figure 280: Reinforcement: Top Bars Plan
47.8.8 Concrete stresses

ACI 318-05 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon
“averaging” rather than peak values.
Stress contour plots of the net flexural stresses are available in RAM Concept. Most designers will not be
interested in these plots because, in following the code, RAM Concept does not use the contours directly in
design.
What will likely be of interest are the plans that show the concrete stresses plotted along the design strips. These
are the average stresses based upon the design strip widths.
View top stress plan

2.
Right click over the plan and choose Plot ( ).
3. In the Plot Settings dialog box:
a. Change Max Frame # to 4.
b. Click OK
Figure 281: Service Design: Top Stress Plan.
To view the Max Demand more easily you can uncheck Max Capacity in the plot options.
Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers > Rule Set Designs > Service Design > Bottom Stress
Plan.

47.8.9 Deflection
Usually you are interested in short-term and long-term deflections. Load history deflections can be used to
evaluate both.
Calculate Load History Deflections

1. Click Calc Load History Deflections ( ), or choose Process > Calc Load History Deflections.
The Maximum Short Term Load, Sustained Load, and Final Instantaneous Load History Deflection Layers
provide contour plans for deflection.
View maximum short term load deflection

1. Choose Layers > Load History Deflections > Maximum Short Term Load > Std Deflection Plan.

Figure 282: Maximum Short Term Load: Deflection Plan.

2.
View sustained deflection

1. Choose Layers > Load History Deflections > Sustained Load > Std Deflection Plan.

Figure 283: Sustained Load: Deflection Plan.

View Factored LC Moments

1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr > Mx Plan.
The Mx contours should be visible.

4. Click first at grid intersection B-3, and then click at grid intersection D-3.
This shows the bending moment shape along the line you have drawn.
5. While pressing the <Shift> key, click at grid intersection B-1, and then click at grid intersection B-3.
This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the approximate nature of the ACI318-05 post-
tension design method.
See “Section distribution plots” for more information.
Figure 284: Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr: Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links
• Section distribution plots (on page 372)
View the balanced load percentages

1. Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips Plan.
2.
3. Choose “Balanced Load Percentages” in the Visible Objects dialog box and click OK.
See “Calculating the balanced load percentages” for more information.

Related Links

PT Flat Plate Tutorial: AS3600-2001
48
slab).
48.1

Import the CAD file

2. Select the CAD drawing file flat_plate_metric.dwg.
3. Select Millimeters (the units used in the CAD file) and click OK.



2.

2.
a. Choose a Concrete Strength of 32 MPa.
b. Set Thickness to 250 mm.
d. Click OK.
4.
There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at 26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates


1.

a. Change Thickness to 200 mm.

b. Change Surface Elevation to -50 mm.
3.

1.
c. Click OK.
3.
4. Go to “Draw the opening:”, or try the next method
5.

7.
11. Enter a side dimension of 1.2 m and click OK.

1.


1.
3. Check “Hatching” under “Slab Openings”, and then click OK.


1.
b. Set Width to 600 mm.
c. Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm.
3. Click OK.

2.
4. Click OK.
5. Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on the centerline:
a. Place the cursor near 8.825, 26.3 m and it will snap to where the center of the wall intersects the edge of
the slab, and click.
6. Go to “ Generate the mesh: ”, or try the next method.
<Delete>.
9.


1.
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 1 m.

3. Click Generate.


2.

Define the loads


a. Change Fz to 2 kN/m2 and click OK.
This tool will now draw area loads of 2 kN/m2.

2. Define an area load by snapping to the six vertices of the balcony (and then type “c”). In this situation, it is
best for the load to match the balcony’s dimensions.

Define the loads
You have drawn another 2 kN/m2 load. This load should be highlighted as it is the current selection. If not,
4. In the dialog box, change Fz to 3 kN/ m2 and click OK.
There is now a total live load on the balcony of 5 kN/ m2.
Note: You could have drawn the 3 kN/ m2 load by first changing the area load default properties and then using
the tool.

2.
6.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the “blanket” load by fencing the entire area.
8. In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to 1 kN/ m2, and click OK.


11. In the Properties dialog box, change Fz to -1 kN/ m2, and click OK.

Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to country. In Australia, engineers use column and middle
strips for post-tensioned flat plate design, and, generally, detail (bonded) tendons in both the column and middle
strips.
Note: For use of the tendon parameters layers as an alternative and perhaps quicker means of defining
prestressing, please refer to “PT Flat Plate Tutorial: ACI 318-08”.

1. Choose Layers > Latitude Prestressing > Latitude Tendon > Standard Plan.
2.
5.
Double click the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) to edit its default properties.


b. Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm.
c. Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK.
Note: The 25 mm cover to the 19 mm high duct (containing 12.7 mm diameter strand) determines these
profiles.
7. Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap Orthogonal ( ).
Proceed immediately to “Define the manual latitude tendons Pt. 2”.

1.
With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons in the bottom left panel:
b. Set Spacing to 2 m, and click OK.
3.
With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons in the next panel:
d. Click at the grid intersection C-1.
b. Set Spacing to 2 m,
5.
With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons in the next two panels:
8.


10.
d. Click at grid intersection D-2.
b. Set Spacing to 2 m.
12.
d. Click at the center of the column at D-3.

1. With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon on grid B.
3. In the Properties dialog box, change Strands Per Tendon to 10, and click OK.
4. With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon directly above grid B.
5. Hold down <Shift> and double-click the tendon directly below grid B.
of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.

8.
a. Fence the tendon segments that end on grid 1.
segments (tendon segments terminating at grids 2, 3, 4 and 5).

2. In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 125 mm and click OK.
3.
With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon segment above B.8-1 that terminates within the 200
mm balcony slab.
6.
With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the tendon segments that terminate over a drop cap, by:
Note: This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of
the drop cap.

1.
4.
5. Hold down the <Shift> key, and double click the tendon segment immediately below (profile point at
(9,15.7)).


8.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segments between D-2 and D-3.
9.
The Calc Tendon Profile dialog box appears and reports the current balance load is -5.67 kN/m. If this is not
10. Click Cancel.

1.
2.
3. Input the desired balance load as -6 kN/m in the Calc Tendon Profile dialog box and click Calc.
The low point (end 2) adjusts to 126 mm.
4.
Note: These steps first used the Calc Profile tool to determine a low point that produces a similar average
uplift in an end span as the adjacent span, and then manually changed the low points for practical reasons.
Finally, you need to adjust the tendon that goes through the opening.
7. Turn on Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ) and Snap Orthogonal ( ).
8.
12. With the one tendon segment selected, stretch the profile point at grid 3 to the other side of the opening.
Note: The Snap Nearest Snapable Point snaps the cursor to the edge of the opening.

Figure 294: Manual Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
48.5.7 Define the longitude tendons Pt. 1

Note: The defaults set up in the Latitude Tendon Plan remain the same. Strictly speaking, you should adjust
Profile at end 1 at columns (to avoid a clash with latitude tendons) but you can ignore for this tutorial.
3.
5.
8.
b. Click at the edge of the slab at 0, 17.8 m.
c. Click at the tendon profile point at 7.2, 17.1 m.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 7.2, 17.8 m.

a. Click at the tendon profile point at 7.2, 17.1 m.

Proceed immediately to “Define the longitude tendons Pt. 2”.

Complete the steps in “Define the longitude tendons Pt. 1” before proceeding.
2. In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 150 mm and Profile at end 2 to 100 mm, and click OK.
3.
5. In the Properties dialog box, set Profile at end 1 to 100 mm, and click OK.

6.
8.

1.

Note: This sequence is anti-clockwise.

c. Enter 9.25, 26, and press <Enter>.
b. Uncheck Skip Start Tendon, and click OK.
3.
c. Set Spacing to 1.8 m.
5.
7.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the second tendon in this panel.
8. Hold down <Shift> and select the fifth tendon, and press <Delete>.

1.


b. Click at the profile point at 19, 17.5 m.
c. Type r0,2.1.
d. Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.
Note: The snap orthogonal snaps the cursor to 22, 19.6 m.
a. Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.

5. With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon on grid 2.
8. With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon directly to the left of grid 2.
9. Hold down <Shift> and double-click the tendon directly to the right of grid 2.
end of a tendon should be at the mid-depth of the 250 mm slab.

1.
4.
This sets the tendon anchorage profile to the centroid of the 250 mm slab, rather than the centroid of the
drop cap.
7.


1.
3. Click anywhere on the plan, and type r-.5,0.
4.
This combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to “Expanding tool buttons” on page 6 and “Using
the Utility tool to move and stretch” on page 20 for further information.
Figure 295: Manual Longitude Tendon: Standard Plan.

Design strips are an essential part ofRAM Concept because they link finite element analysis with concrete design.
Their properties include reinforcement bar sizes, cover, and parameters that RAM Concept uses to determine
which code rules are applicable for section design. There are two directions called Latitude and Longitude.


4. Change Environment to Protected.
Note: This setting often has a significant effect on reinforcement quantities.
Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already checked in the AS3600 template.
7. Change CS Top Cover to 25 mm.
8. Click the Middle Strip tab.
9. Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box.
10. Click OK.
11.
Accept the Minimum Span Length as 0.5 meters.
12. Click OK.


Click the Generate Strips tool ( )

or
Select Process > Generate Strips
segment strips, as shown in the following four figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools.

1.

1. Select the span segment between the wall and grid D3 (as shown in the previous figure).



1. Select the diagonal span strip as shown in the previous figure.
Related Links
• Defining strip boundaries manually (on page 228)



The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There is one more to edit.
Figure 301: Span segment C-2 to C-3.

3. Click at point B.
5. Click at point C.
6. Click at point D.
8. Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
9. Click at point E as shown in the previous figure.
10. Click at point F, to the right of the opening.
12. Select the span segment (between grid C2 and C3).
14. In the Properties dialog box, change Span Width Calc to Manual.
15. Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
16. Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and click OK.

This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes through the opening, and hence uses less
concrete section.
17. Click the Generate Selected Strips tool ( ).
The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 302: Design Strip: Latitude Design Strips Plan after regeneration.

a. Change CS Top Cover to 41 mm.
b. Change CS Bottom Cover to 37 mm.
c. Click OK.
4.
b.
6. Click OK.
The spans appear in the longitude direction.

Related Links

1. Select the span segment between grid B2 and C2 (highlighted in the previous figure).

1. Select the span segment that overlays the wall.
2. Press <Delete>.


The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
Figure 305: Grid B3-C3 span segment and strips.
48.6.13 Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries
1. Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3 (the highlighted line in the first figure in “Generate the
longitude strips”).
3. Change Span Width Calc to Manual, and click OK.
5. Click at point A as shown in the previous figure.
8. Click at point C and D.
10. Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool( ).
12. Click at point F (the corner of the opening) and point G (another corner).
14. Select the span segment between grid B3 and C3.


1. Select the diagonal span strip between B-5 and C-4.
The new design strips appear, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 306: Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
Some of the latitude and longitude design strips (span segment strips) have different widths either side of a
column. You could rationalize these strips such that they have similar widths at the column, especially the
cantilever. See the discussion in “Defining strip boundaries manually” in Chapter 22, “Defining Design Strips”.

2.
a. Change Cover to CGS to 41 mm (cover to centroid of top reinforcement).
b. Click OK.

Regenerate the mesh

1.
2. Enter Element Size of 0.75 m and click Generate.



48.8.2 Calculate
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2. Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be investigated.
Two more errors appear to do with reinforcement detailing.
3. Click Continue twice to clear the reinforcement error messages.

2.
5.


2.

2.
3. Check the Numbers box under Latitude Span Segments, and click OK.
7. Change CS Cross Section Trimming to None.
8. Change CS Inter Cross Section Slope Limit to 0.
10. Uncheck the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box.
11. Change MS Top Cover to 25 mm.
12. Change MS Span Detailer to None, and click OK.

The above changes are made to eliminate the reinforcement warnings. In a proper design you should investigate
this further.
48.8.6 Recalculate
RAM Concept completes the calculatons without errors.
Note: See “Cross Section Trimming” for a thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
Related Links

This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-
way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
punching plan.
You can see that ten columns have an unreinforced stress ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Two columns report
“OK with SSR” which means stud shear reinforcement is required. One column fails in punching. SSR does not
solve the problem. A thickening is required.
RAM Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at five column locations. “Non-standard Section” is a
warning, not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections that RAM Concept is
investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. RAM

Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections. Refer to “Non-Standard Sections: AS3600,
BS8110, EC2 and IS 456” in Chapter 29 for more information.
without any reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning “Non-standard section”)).

This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. You might choose to view all
design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate
reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).

48.8.9 Deflection
evaluate both.




2.





1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L > Mx Plan.
This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the different column and middle strip moments.
Figure 317: Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links

1. Choose Layers > Design Strips > Latitude Design Strips Plan .
2.

Related Links

PT Flat Plate Tutorial: BS8110 / TR43
49
slab).
49.1
BS8110 does not cover post-tensioned flat plates, and refers the designer to “specialist literature”. The Concrete
Society prepared Technical Report 43 for this purpose. RAM Concept currently uses the first edition of TR43.

Import the CAD file




2.

2.
a. Choose a Concrete Strength of C32/40.
d. Click OK.
4.
Note: There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at 26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan
coordinates display next to the command prompt.
5. Complete the polygon by clicking at your starting point (or type “c” in the command line and press
<Return>).


1.


3.
and then click at your starting point (or type “c” in the command line and press <Return>).

1.
c. Click OK.
3.
4. Go to “Draw the opening:”, or try the next method
5.

7.

1.


1.


1.
3. Click OK.

2.
4. Click OK.
Delete.
9.


1.

3. Click Generate.


2.

Define the loads


This tool will now draw area loads of 2 kN/ m2.


Define the loads
the tool.

2.
6.



In the United Kingdom, engineers are directed towards Technical Report 43 (BS8110 does not cover post-
tensioned flat plates) and that document encourages the use of full panel design strips with the banding
technique. This method, with bonded tendons, is used in this tutorial.
49.5.1 Define the latitude tendons Pt. 1

2.


5.
a. Set PT System to 12.9mm Bonded.
b. Set Strands per Tendon to 9.
c. Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm.
d. Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK.
The 25 mm cover to the 19 mm high duct (containing 12.9 mm diameter strand) determines these profiles.
7. Turn Snap to Intersection ( ).
Proceed immediately to “Define the latitude tendons Pt. 2”.

Complete the steps in “Define the latitude tendons Pt. 1” before proceeding.
1.
3.
With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a tendon along grid D:
a. Click at the center of the column at grid intersection D-4.
c. Click at the corner of the slab near D-2.
5.
7.
8.



4.
by:
7.
the drop cap.

1.

4.

7.
8.
9. Click Cancel.

1.
2.
4.


3.
5.
7.

1.

a. Click at the tendon profile point at 7.2, 17.1 m.

5.

1.
3.
5.



7.
9.

1.
3.
c. Type r0,2.1.
a. Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.




1.
4.
the drop cap.
7.


1.
4.

Longitude.


Note: The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip Generation properties.
Note: Environment is already set to Class 3 - 0.1 mm.
Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already checked in the BS8110 template.
7. Click OK.
8.
9. Click OK.


segment strips, as shown in the following four figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools

1.

6. Enter 180 and press <Return>.






c. Click OK.
4.
b.
c. Click OK.
a. The spans appear in the longitude direction.

Related Links



5. The orientation line half way along the span strip is now “horizontal”.



2.
b. Click OK.

Regenerate the mesh

1.



Related Links
49.8.2 Calculate


2.
5.

2.
49.8.5 Recalculate


Related Links

This shows “OK” for all but one design strip. “OK” means that there are no violations of code limits for
ductility, flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
The failure clause shown for design strip 2C-3 is “TR43 6.10.2”. You can look up this clause in TR43 to see
that it is the “transfer condition”. It is known as the Initial Service Rule Set in RAM Concept.
It is not surprising that there is a problem in this span as there are 25 strands in half a panel. A solution
would be to terminate some strands at grid 3.
punching plan.
Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at six column locations and “OK with SSR” at eight columns.
that RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge
and corner. RAM Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections. Refer to “Non-Standard
Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456” of Chapter 29 for more information.
without any reinforcement (subject to the comments above concerning “Non-standard section)).
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports “OK with SSR”.


bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).

The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so that
the number is consistent each side of columns.


TR43 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon
design.

2.
b. Click OK
Plan.
49.8.9 Deflection
evaluate both.




2.





This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the approximate nature of the TR43 post-tension
design method.
Figure 349: Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6 Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.

Related Links

2.

Related Links

PT Flat Plate Tutorial: EC2 / TR43
50
slab).
50.1
RAM Concept’s EC2 implementation considers the base EC2 code, the UK National Annex and the second edition
of the Concrete Society’s Technical Report 43 for post-tensioned slab design.

Import the CAD file




2.

2.
d. Click OK.
4.
There are two vertices near each other near B-5 at 26.05, 8.2 m and 26.05, 8.8 m. Cursor plan coordinates
<Return>).


1.


3.

1.
c. Click OK.
3.
4. Go to “ Draw the opening: ”, or try the next method
5.

7.

1.


1.


1.
3. Click OK.

2.
4. Click OK.
<Delete>.
9.


1.

3. Click Generate.


2.

Define the loads




Define the loads
the tool.

2.
6.



In the United Kingdom, engineers are directed towards Technical Report 43 and that document encourages the
use of full panel design strips with the banding technique. This method, with bonded tendons, is used in this
tutorial.
2.


5.
a. Set PT System to 12.9mm Bonded.
profiles.

1.
3.
With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a tendon along grid D:
5.
7.
8.



4.
by:
7.
the drop cap.

1.

4.

7.
8.
9. Click Cancel.

1.
2.
4.


3.
5.
7.

1.

d. Click at the tendon profile point at 7.2, 17.1 m.


5.

1.
3.
5.



7.
9.

1.
3.
c. Type r0,2.1.

e. Click at the last tendon profile point at 22, 17.5 m.


1.
4.
the drop cap.
7.


1.
4.
You could cut down the number of steps in moving the tendon from the opening by using the Utility tool. This
combines the selection tool with move and stretch. Refer to “Expanding tool buttons” and “Using the Utility tool
to move and stretch” for further information.

Longitude.

Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Full Width.

Note: Environment is already set to Normal.
Note: The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already checked in the EC2 template.
Note: CS PT Service Design Type is already set to Stress & Crack Width. You may change this to perform only
stress checks or only crack width designs.
4. Set Cross Section Trimming to Slab Rectangle.
7. Click OK.
8.
9. Click OK.



1.







c. Click OK.
4.
b.
c. Click OK.

Related Links






2.
b. Click OK.
5. Select the punch check at 0, 15.5m and change the Beta Factor to 1.40 (edge).

Regenerate the mesh

1.



Related Links
50.8.2 Calculate

2.


5.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Slab Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that

2.
50.8.5 Recalculate

Related Links

This plan shows many failures due to EC2 section 7.3.

50.8.7 Stress and Crack Width Designs
Note: Some UK slab designers consider that designing slabs according to TR 43 is “deemed to comply” with the
EC2 crack width provisions and hence the EC2 crack width calculations need not be checked. We will take that
approach here.
To have Concept use only the TR43 stress limits

1. Open the Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans plan.
2. Select all of the design spans and edit their properties.
3. On the Column Strip tab in the properties dialog, change the CS PT Service Design Type to “Stress” and click
OK
4. Make the same changes to the Longitude Design Spans
Calculate and Review Updated Status


Figure 374: Design Status: Updated Status Plan.
This shows “OK” for all but two design strips. “OK” means that there are no violations of code limits for
ductility, flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
The failure clause shown for design strip 2C-1 is “TR43 5.8.1”. This is due to a slightly too high tensile
stresses at the column face. This can be resolved by adding one more tendon along grid B (not done in this
tutorial).
The failure clause shown for design strip 2C-3 is “TR43 5.8.2”. You can look up this clause in TR43 to see that
it is the “transfer condition”. It is known as the Initial Service Rule Set in RAM Concept.
It is not surprising that there is a problem in this span as there are 25 strands in half a panel. A solution
would be to terminate some strands at grid 3 (not done in this tutorial).
punching plan.

RAM Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at six column locations and “OK with SSR” at eight columns.
and corner. RAM Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections. Refer to “Non-Standard
Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2 and IS 456” in Chapter 29 for more information.
Stud shear reinforcement is required where Concept reports “OK with SSR”.



bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).Choose the plans that best convey the results without too much
clutter.
The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so that
the number is consistent each side of columns.



TR43 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon
design.

1. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Characteristic Service Design > Top Stress Plan.
2.
b. Click OK

Figure 379: Characteristic Service Design: Top Stress Plan.
Similarly, you can view the bottom stress plan at Layers > Rule Set Designs > Characteristic Service Design >
Bottom Stress Plan.

50.8.10 Deflection
evaluate both.




2.




View Ultimate LC Moments

1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L > Max Mx Plan.
Let’s modify this plan to show moments for the “Standard” context (full load, with standard load factors)
instead of the “Max” context (maximum value for any set of standard or alternate load factors and any load
pattern).
2.
3. In the plot window that opens, the Slab tab should be active. Change the Context item from “Max” to
“Standard”. Click OK.
Now let’s draw some section distribution plots.
This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the approximate nature of the TR43 post-tension
design method.

Figure 382: Ultimate LC: 1.25D + 0.9H + 1.5L Max Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links
View the balanced load percentages:


2.

Related Links

PT Flat Plate Tutorial: IS 456 : 2000
51
slab).
51.1

Import the CAD file




2.

2.
a. Choose a Concrete Strength of M40.
d. Click OK.
4.


1.


3.

1.
c. Click OK.
3.
4. Go to “ Draw the opening: ”, or try the next method
5.

7.

1.


1.
3. Check “Hatching” under “Slab Openings”, and then click OK.


1.
c. Set Depth/Diameter to 600 mm, and click OK.

2.
4. Click OK.
5. Define the wall by clicking at the start and end points, on the centerline:
<Delete>.
9.


1.

3. Click Generate.


2.

Define the loads




Define the loads
the tool.

2.
6.



Post-tensioning methodology varies from country to country. In India, engineers commonly use column and
middle strips for post-tensioned flat plate design, and, generally, detail (bonded) tendons in both the column and
middle strips.

2.
5.


b. Set Profile at end 1 to 212 mm.
c. Set Profile at end 2 to 38 mm, and click OK.
profiles.
7. Turn on Snap to Intersection ( ) and Snap Orthogonal ( ).

1.
With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons in the bottom left panel:
3.
With the Full Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons in the next panel:
d. Click at the grid intersection C-1.
5.
With the Full-Span Tendon Panel tool ( ) selected, draw tendons in the next two panels:
8.


10.
d. Click at grid intersection D-2.
12.
d. Click at the center of the column at D-3.

4. With the Select Connected Tendons tool ( ) selected, double-click the tendon directly above grid B.
5. Hold down <Shift> and double-click the tendon directly below grid B.


1.
a. Fence the tendon segments that end on grid 1.
segments (tendon segments terminating at grids 2, 3, 4 and 5).
4.
With the Selection tool ( ), double click the tendon segment above B.8-1 that terminates within the 200
mm balcony slab.
7.
With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the tendon segments that terminate over a drop cap, by:
the drop cap.

1.
4.
5. Hold down the <Shift> button, and double click the tendon segment immediately below (profile point at
(9,15.7)).


1.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the tendon segments between D-2 and D-3.
2.
3. Click Cancel.
4.
5.
6. Input the desired balance load as -5.3 kN/m in the Calc Tendon Profile dialog box and click Calc.
7.
Note: These steps first used the Calc Profile tool to determine a low point that produces a similar average
uplift in an end span as the adjacent span, and then manually changed the low points for practical reasons.
Finally, you need to adjust the tendon that goes through the opening.


2.
6. With the one tendon segment selected, stretch the profile point at grid 3 to the other side of the opening.
Note: The Snap Nearest Snapable Point snaps the cursor to the edge of the opening

Figure 392: Manual Latitude Tendon: Standard Plan.

3.
5.


1.

5.

1.
3.

5.

7.
9.


1.
3.
c. Type r0,2.1.


1.
4.

the drop cap.
7.

1.
4.


Longitude.

Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Code Slab.

4. Check the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
9. Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box.
10. Click OK.
11.
12. Click OK.


segment strips, as shown in the following four figures. You can make corrections with a number of tools.

1.



4. Click near the diagonal span strip and then again above or below the first click
Related Links


5. Click at point C.
6. Click at point D.
8. Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool ( ).
10. Click at point F, to the right of the opening.
12. Select the span segment (between grid C2 and C3).
14. In the Properties dialog box, change Span Width Calc to Manual.
15. Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
16. Change Support Width at End 2 from 600 to 610 mm, and click OK
This ensures that the first (design strip) cross section passes through the opening, and hence uses less
concrete section.
The edited spans produce improved span strips, as shown in the following figure.

The three edited spans produce improved span strips. There is one more to edit.

Figure 400: Span segment C-2 to C-3.


c. Click OK.
4.
a. Set Spans to Generate to Longitude .
b.
c. Click OK.

Related Links


1. Select the span segment that overlays the wall.
2. Press <Delete>.


The area to the left of the opening has no design strip. You can use the tools to locate a middle strip in that area.
Figure 403: Grid B3-C3 span segment and strips.
51.6.13 Edit span segment with Span Boundaries and Strip Boundaries
3. Change Span Width Calc to Manual, and click OK.
5. Click at point A as shown in the previous figure.
8. Click at point C and D.
10. Select the Strip Boundary Polyline tool ( ).
12. Click at point F (the corner of the opening) and point G (another corner).


1. Select the diagonal span strip between B-5 and C-4.
The new design strips appear, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 404: Design Strip: Longitude Design Spans Plan after editing.
Note: Some of the latitude and longitude design strips (span segment strips) have different widths either side of
a column. You could rationalize these strips such that they have similar widths at the column, especially the
cantilever. See the discussion in “Defining strip boundaries manually” in Chapter 22, “Defining Design Strips”.

2.
b. Click OK.

Regenerate the mesh

1.



Related Links
51.8.2 Calculate
An error message appears twice concerning a problem with a tendon out of the slab in strip 6C-2.
2. Click Continue twice to clear the error message.
The source of the tendon error messages must be investigated.
One more error appears to do with reinforcement detailing.
3. Click Continue to clear the reinforcement error message.

2.
5.


2.

1. Choose Layers > Design Strips Latitude Design Spans Plan.
2.
3. Check the Numbers box under Latitude Span Segments, and click OK.
7. Uncheck the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box.
8. Change MS Top Cover to 25 mm.
9. Change MS Span Detailer to None, and click OK.
The above change is made to eliminate the reinforcement warning. In a proper design you should investigate
this further.

51.8.6 Recalculate
RAM Concept completes the calculatons without errors.
Note: See “Cross Section Trimming” for a thorough explanation of Cross Section trimming.
Related Links
51.8.7 Design Status

This shows OK for all design strips. This means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility or one-
way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
punching plan.
You can see that seven columns have an unreinforced stress ratio (USR) of less than 1.0. Six columns report
“OK with SSR” which means stud shear reinforcement is required.
RAM Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at six column locations. “Non-standard section” is a warning,
not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections that RAM Concept is investigating for
that column does not perfectly fit one of the three cases: interior, edge and corner. RAM Concept still
calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections. Refer to “Non-Standard Sections: AS3600, BS8110, EC2
and IS 456” in Chapter 29 for more information.


This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. You might choose to view all
design reinforcement on the one plan, or you can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate
reinforcement according to: face (top or bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).

51.8.9 Deflection
evaluate both.




2.





This shows how Mx varies across the panel, and highlights the different column and middle strip moments.
Figure 415: Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links

2.

Related Links

PT Flat Plate Tutorial: CSA A23.3-04
52
slab).
52.1

Import the CAD file




2.

2.
d. Click OK.
4.
<Return>).


1.


3.

1.
c. Click OK.
3.
4. Go to “Draw the opening:” , or try the next method
5.

7.

1.


1.
You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible Objects command.


1.
3. Click OK.

2.
4. Click OK.
<Delete>.
9.


1.

3. Click Generate.


2.

Define the loads




Define the loads
the tool.

2.
6.




2.

5.
a. Set PT System to 12.7mm Unbonded.
The 25 mm cover to the 19 mm high duct (containing 12.9 mm diameter strand) determines these profiles.

1.
3.
With the Tendon Polyline tool ( ) selected, draw a tendon along grid D
5.
7.
8.


4.
by:
7.

the drop cap.
3.
6.


9.
10.
11. Click Cancel.

1.
2.
4.


3.
5.
7.

1.

5.


1.
3.
5.

c. Enter 9.25, 26, and press Enter.
7.


9.

1.
3.
c. Type r0,2.1.



1.
4.
the drop cap.
7.

1.

4.

Longitude.

Note: Column Strip Width Calc is already set to Full Width.

3. Set the Environment to Full PT - 18.3.2(c).
The Consider as Post-Tensioned box is already checked in the CAN template.
5. Set Cross Section Trimming to Slab Rectangle.

8. Click OK.
9.
Click the Generate Spans tool ( ), or choose Process > Generate Spans
10. Click OK.



1.


1. Select the diagonal span strip as shown in previous figure.





c. Click OK.
4.
b.
c. Click OK.
a. The spans appear in the longitude direction.
Related Links






2.
b. Click OK.

Regenerate the mesh
5. Select the punch checks at B.8-1 and C-3.

6. Right click on the plan and choose Selection Properties from the popup menu
7. Change the Maximum Search Radius to 2 m.
8. Click OK.


Regenerate the mesh
1.


Related Links
52.8.2 Calculate


2.
5.
The problem is that the cross sections are trimmed with the Slab Rectangle setting. For span segment 6-2, that

2.


52.8.5 Recalculate
Related Links


This shows “OK” for all design strips. “OK” means that there are no violations of code limits for ductility,
flexural stress and one-way shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.
punching plan.
RAM Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at six column locations and “OK with SSR” at one column.
“Non-standard section” is a warning, not an error. What it means is that at least one of the critical sections
and corner. RAM Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections.



bottom) and direction (latitude or longitude).Choose the plans that best convey the results without too much
clutter.
The Reinforcement layer plans show detailed reinforcement. In particular, the top bars are rationalized so
that the number is consistent each side of columns.



CSA A23.3 has limits for the hypothetical stresses due to flexure and axial loads. The code bases the rules upon

design.
2.
b. Click OK

Plan.

52.8.9 Deflection
evaluate both.




2.




View Ultimate LC Moments

1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Factored LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 1.5S > Max Mx Plan.
Let’s modify this plan to show moments for the “Standard” context (full load, with standard load factors)
instead of the “Max” context (maximum value for any set of standard or alternate load factors and any load
pattern).
2.
3. In the plot window that opens, the Slab tab should be active. Change the Context item from “Max” to
“Standard”. Click OK.
Now let’s draw some section distribution plots.
This shows how Mx varies across the panel.

Figure 446: Factored LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S Max Mx Plan showing use of Plot Distribution tool.
Related Links

2.


Related Links

Mat Foundation Tutorial
53
This chapter will walk you through the steps for modeling a mat foundation, also known as a raft. Alternative
metric values and units are identified in square brackets [ ] next to the US units. The metric values are not exact
conversions. The code used is ACI 318-05.
For information on creating a new file, see Creating and opening files (on page 51). You should ensure that you
select mat foundation in the new file dialog box.
Most mats support columns and walls. You may choose to model the columns and walls but you should be aware
that this could affect the mat behavior. In particular, if there are lateral loads then you should be very careful in
defining the supports above as having no horizontal restraint. Otherwise, the supports above rather than the soil
(springs) below could resist some lateral moment and shear.
A mat need not have columns and walls modeled above. The reasons to model columns and walls above include
improving the appearance of the model, and providing snap points for point and line loads. Additionally, a wall
above will stiffen the mat in a beneficial way.

Import the CAD file

2. Select the CAD drawing file mat_tutorial.dwg [mat_tutorial_metric.dwg].
3. Select Inches [Millimeters] (the units used in the CAD file) and click OK.



2.

2.
a. Choose a Concrete Strength of 4000 psi [25 MPa for AS3600; C25/30 for BS8110 and EC2].
b. Set Thickness to 30 inches [750 mm].
d. Click OK.
4.
With the Slab Area tool ( ) selected, define the four corners of the slab by snapping to the imported
Note: You can type “c” to close the polygon instead of entering the last point.

1. Turn on Snap to Center ( ).
2.
b. Set Height to 10 feet [3 m].
c. Set Support Set to “Above”.
d. Set Width to 30 inches [750 mm].
e. Set Diameter to 30 inches [750 mm].
f. Check “Roller at Far End”.
g. Uncheck “Fixed Near” and “Fixed Far”.
4. Click OK.


2.
b. Set Height to 10 feet [3 m].
c. Set Support Set to “Above”.
d. Set Thickness to 12 inches [300 mm].
e. Uncheck “Shear Wall”.
f. Uncheck “Fixed Near” and “Fixed Far”.
4. Click OK.
5. Define each wall by snapping to the start and end points of the wall centerlines shown on the CAD drawing.
53.2.5 Define the area spring location and properties

1.
Double click on the Quad-Area Spring tool ( ).
2. In the Default Area Spring Properties dialog box:
a. Set an r-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001 N/mm3].
b. Set an s-force constant of 0.1 pci [0.00001 N/mm3].
c. Set a z-force constant of 250 pci [0.07 N/mm3], and click OK.
Note: You need horizontal springs (r and s) with very small stiffnesses since there are lateral loads.
3. Define an area spring over the entire slab by clicking four corners of a quadrilateral. This shape need not
match the slab’s exact dimensions, but should cover the entire slab.

1.
2. In the Generate Mesh dialog box set the Element Size to 2 feet [0.7 m].
3. Click Generate.



2.

Figure 447: Mesh Input: Standard Plan

Figure 448: Element: Standard Plan

Define the loads

Mat loads could consist of point, line and area loads for a number of loadings (such as live, other dead, north
seismic, east seismic, north wind and east wind). For simplicity, this tutorial will not use area loads (except for
the automatic calculation of self-weight) and will adopt loads belonging only to other dead, live, and ultimate
seismic east loadings.

2.
6.
Double click the Point Load tool ( ).
7. In the Default Point Load Properties dialog box:
a. Change Fz to 40 Kips [180 kN], and click OK.
8. Define 40 Kip [180 kN] point loads by snapping to column centers at the following locations:
a. A-1
b. A-3
c. D-1
d. D-3
9. Define the rest of the point loads as shown in the following two figures.
10. Double click the Line Load tool ( ).
11. In the Default Line Load Properties dialog box:
a. Set Fz to 8 kip/ft [120 kN/m], and click OK.
12. With the Line Load tool ( ) selected, draw a Line Load along the centerline of the wall on grid 2.
13. Repeat for the wall at grid “2.5” with a load of 5.5 kip/ft [80 kN/m].
Note: Draw these loads to the outside face of the intersecting walls.
53.3.2 Copy to the live (reducible) loading layer

For simplicity, use the same loads for other dead and live (reducible) loads
1.
With the Selection tool ( ), select all of the other dead loads by fencing the entire slab.

Define the loads
This pastes the other dead loads onto the Live (Reducible) Loading: All Loads Plan.
Figure 449: Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan
Figure 450: Other Dead Loading: All Loads Plan [METRIC]
53.3.3 Define the ultimate seismic east loading

1. Choose Layers > Loadings > Ultimate Seismic East Loading > All Loads Plan.
2.
6. Double click the Line Load tool ( ) and in the Default Line Load Properties dialog box:
a. Set the elevation above the slab surface to 360 inches [9000 mm].

Define the loads
b. Set Fx to 4.1 kip/ft [60 kN/m].

c. Set all other items in the dialog box to 0.
d. Click OK.
7. Draw a line load by snapping to the wall intersection points, as shown in the following two figures.
Figure 451: East Seismic: All Loads Plan
Figure 452: East Seismic: All Loads Plan [METRIC]

a. Set Fy to -12.8 kip/ft [-174 kN/m].
b. Click OK.
a. Set Fy to (+)12.8 kip/ft [(+)174 kN/m].
b. Click OK.

Figure 453: East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set)
Figure 454: East Seismic: All Loads Plan (second set) [METRIC]
Note: The seismic loads are approximations for a five-storey building. The load elevation is the average floor
height (third storey).
Note: The loads in the y-direction cancel the couple about the mat centroid.

Longitude.
53.4.1 Draw latitude design strips

1. Choose Layers > Design Strip > Latitude Design Spans Plan.
3. The Default Span Properties dialog box opens to the Strip Generation properties.

a. Set Column Strip Width Calc to Code Slab (this is the default for the AS3600 template).
b. Click the General tab.
c. Uncheck the Consider as Post-Tensioned box.
d. Click the Column Strip tab.
e. Change CS Top Bar and CS Bottom Bar to #8 [N25 for AS3600; T25 for BS8110; H25 for EC2].
f. Change CS Top Cover and CS Bottom Cover to 2 inches [50 mm].
g. Set the Min. Reinforcement Location to Tension Face.
h. Click the Middle Strip tab.
i. Check the Middle Strip uses Column Strip Properties box.
j. Click OK.
4.
5. The Generate Spans dialog box opens with Spans to Generate set to Latitude (as shown in the following
figure).
6. Click OK.

Choosing span segments in a mat is a subjective matter. RAM Concept uses imperfect algorithms that do not
always produce acceptable span segments and span segment strips. It is recommended that some span
segments in this tutorial are deleted.
7.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the seven span segments highlighted in red in the previous figure and
press <Delete>.


1.
You can also right click to see a popup menu that includes the Visible Objects command.

Two span segments are slightly skewed. How you treat skewed strips is also a subjective matter, but in this
tutorial we suggest the span segment strips’ cross sections are manually reoriented.
53.4.4 Edit the cross section orientation

1.
With the Selection tool ( ), select span segments 5-2 and 6-2 as shown in the previous figure.
2. Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).
4. Click near one of the span segments, and then again above or below the first click.


Figure 458: Latitude design strips after editing and regeneration.
53.4.6 Draw longitude design strips

2.
7. Change CS Top Cover and CS Bottom Cover to 3 inches [75 mm], and click OK.
8.
b.
c. Click OK.
10. The spans appear in the longitude direction, as shown in the following figure.
Similar to the latitude direction, some editing of the span segments is required.


11.
With the Selection tool ( ), select the span segments over the walls (highlighted in red in the previous
figure) and press <Delete>.
13. With the Span Segment tool ( ), draw a span segment by clicking at the wall intersections at point A and B in
the following figure.
15. In the dialog box, change:
a. Min Number of Divisions to 0.
b. Max Division Spacing to 30 feet [10 m], and click OK.
This span segment has been drawn to assist with RAM Concept’s span segment strip width calculation.
16. Turn on Snap Orthogonal ( ) and Snap Nearest Snapable Point ( ).
17. With the Span Segment tool ( ), draw a span segment by clicking at the wall intersection at point B and then
at point C in the following figure (it should snap to the visible grid line).
19. In the dialog box:
a. Uncheck Detect Supports Automatically.
b. Uncheck Consider End 2 as Support.
c. Change Support Width at End 1 to 12 inches [300 mm], and click OK.

Figure 460: Manually drawn span segments

Two span segments are slightly skewed. We suggest the span segment strips’ cross sections are manually
reoriented.
Figure 461: Longitude design strips (with hatching turned on). Some editing is now required.
53.4.8 Edit the cross section orientation

1.
With the Selection tool ( ), select span segments 9-3 and 12-1 as shown in the previous figure.
2. Click the Orient Span Cross Section tool ( ).

3. Click near one of the span segments, and then again to the left or right of first click.
53.4.9 Regenerate the longitude span strips

Figure 462: Longitude design strips after editing and regeneration
Note: Many of the latitude and longitude design strips (span segment strips) have different widths either side of
a column. You could rationalize these strips such that they have similar widths at the column, especially the
cantilevers. See the discussion in “Defining strip boundaries manually” in Chapter 22, “Defining Design Strips”.
Related Links

2.
a. Change Cover to CGS to 3 inches [60 mm] (cover to centroid of top reinforcement).
b. Click OK.

Regenerate the mesh

1.
2. Enter Element Size of 2 feet [0.7m] and click Generate.



2. Review the options.
3. Uncheck Auto-stabilize structure in x- and y-directions and click OK.
Related Links
• General options (on page 352)
53.6.2 Calculate
53.6.3 Look at reinforcement and design status

1. Choose Layers > Design Status > Total Status Plan.
This shows OK for all design strips and punching checks. This means that there are no violations of code
limits for ductility, one-way shear, and punching shear. Note that status does not flag excessive deflections.

punching plan.
RAM Concept has noted “Non-standard section” at the corner column locations.
that RAM Concept is investigating for that column does not perfectly fit one of the three ACI 318-02 cases:
interior, edge and corner. RAM Concept still calculates a stress ratio for non-standard sections. Refer to “Non-
Standard Sections: ACI 318 and CSA A23.3” in Chapter 29 for more information.

3. Choose Layers > Design Status > Total Reinforcement Plan.
This shows all the code-determined reinforcement for each of the design strips. The results are, however, too
congested to be useful. You can access plans in the Design Status layer that separate reinforcement according
to: face (top or bottom), direction (latitude or longitude), and type (flexural or shear). You should decide
which plans best convey the results without too much clutter.
53.6.4 View Specific Reinforcement

2.
3. Check Bar Spacings under Latitude Span Designs, and click OK.

53.6.5 Bearing stresses

Maximum bearing stress is a critical consideration when designing a mat. Contour plots of the bearing stresses
are available in RAM Concept. These will vary according to the load combination. Note that the minimum and
maximum bearing values often occur for different load combinations.
The Soil Bearing Design rule set envelopes the maximum and minimum bearing pressures for all load
combinations. The maximum bearing pressure plan is probably the most useful for your design.
View bearing stress plans
1. Choose Layers > Load Combinations > Service LC > Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.
Figure 468: Service LC: Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.

2. Choose Layers > Rule Set Designs > Soil Bearing Design > Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan.

Figure 469: Soil Bearing Design: Max Soil Bearing Pressure Plan

Strip Wizard Tutorial
54
This chapter walks you through the steps for using Strip Wizard to provide a preliminary design for the slab
(grid B) in the PT Flat Plate Tutorial.
Alternative metric values and units are identified in square brackets [ ] next to the US units. The metric values
are not exact conversions.
The codes used are ACI 318-02, AS3600-2001, BS8110:1997, EC2 - 2004 and IS 456.
For more information, see Using Strip Wizard (on page 428).
54.1 Start Strip Wizard

When you choose File > Strip Wizard, the New File dialog automatically opens before the Strip Wizard dialog
box is opened. After you create the new RAM Concept file, the Strip Wizard dialog appears.
Start the Strip Wizard
1. Choose File > Strip Wizard.

2. In the New File dialog box, set the Structure Type to Elevated and choose the Code.
3. Click OK.
4. The Strip Wizard dialog box appears; click Next to proceed to the General Parameters page.
54.2 Set the general parameters

On the General Parameters page, you define the structure type, number and type of spans, and concrete mixes.
Set the general parameters as follows
1. Choose Two-Way as the structural system.

2. Check “Post-tensioned”.
3. Set the number of spans to 3.
4. Check “Asymmetric strip”.
5. Set the concrete mix for slabs and beams to 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 and EC2; M40
for IS 456].
6. Set the concrete mix for supports to 5000 psi [32 MPa for AS3600; C32/40 for BS8110 and EC2; M40 for IS
456].

Enter the span data
7. Click Next to proceed to the Span Data page.
54.3 Enter the span data

Enter the span dimensions and data on the Span Data page. (The type of data entered depends on which
structural system you chose on the General Parameters page.)
Set the span data as follows
1. Set the length of Span 1 and 2 to 30 ft [9 m].

2. Set the length of Span 3 to 25 ft [7.75 m].
3. Set the thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
Note: To set all the values in a column at once, enter the value in the “Typical” row (first row) of that column.
For example, for the step above, you can simply type 10 [250] in the “Typical” row of the “Thickness” column
to set the thickness of all three spans to 10 inches [250 mm].
4. Set the left start width of Span 1 to 11.5 ft [3.5 m].
5. Set the left start width of Span 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m].
6. Set the right start width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m].
7. Set the right start width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m].
8. Set the left end width of Spans 1, 2 and 3 to 15 ft [4.5 m].
9. Set the right end width of Span 1 and 2 to 14 ft [4.25 m].
10. Set the right end width of Span 3 to 1 ft [0.3 m].

Create the supports below
Figure 470: The Span Data page.

11. Click Next to proceed to the Support Data page.
54.4 Create the supports below

Add the four supports in the Supports Below table on the Support Data page.
Set the supports below as follows
1. Set the depth of all four supports below to 24 inches [600 mm].
2. Set the width of all four supports below to 24 inches [600 mm].
3. Set the height of all four supports below to 10 ft [3 m].
4. Leave the bottom and top fixity of all supports below as “Fixed”.
5. Click Next to proceed to the Drop Caps and Drop Panels page.

Add drop caps
54.5 Add drop caps

Enter the dimensions for a drop cap at Supports 2 and 4 in the Drop Caps table (top table) on the Drop Cap and
Drop Panels page.
Set the drop cap data as follows
1. For Support 2 in the Drop Caps table set the following values:
a. Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].
b. Set the left width to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
c. Set the right width to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
d. Set the before length to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
e. Set the after length to 22.5 inches [600 mm].
2. For Support 4 in the Drop Caps table set the following values:
a. Set the thickness to 20 inches [500 mm].
b. Set the left width to 33 inches [900 mm].
c. Set the right width to 12 inches [300 mm].
d. Set the before length to 33 inches [900 mm].
e. Set the after length to 0 inches [0 mm].
3. Click Next to proceed to the Loads page.
54.6 Specify the loads

Enter the area loads on the Loads page.
Set the loads as follows
1. Set the typical Dead Area Load to 20 psf [1 kN/m2].

2. Set the typical Live Area Load to 40 psf [2 kN/m2].
3. Click Next to proceed to the Post-Tensioning page.
Note: You can leave the Dead Line Load and Live Line Load fields blank (no need to enter zero).

Enter the post-tensioning parameters on the Post-Tensioning page.
Set the post-tensioning as follows
1. Uncheck the stressing “Start” and “End” check boxes.

2. Set the minimum P/A to 140 psi [1 MPa].

Specify the reinforcement parameters
3. Set the minimum balance load percentage to 65%.

4. Click Next to proceed to the Reinforcement page.
54.8 Specify the reinforcement parameters

Enter the reinforcement parameters on the Reinforcement page.
Set the reinforcement as follows
1. Set the top reinforcing bar to #5 [N16 for AS3600; T16 for BS8110 and IS456; H16 for EC2].
2. Set the bottom reinforcing bar to #4 [N12 for AS3600; T12 for BS8110 and IS456; H12 for EC2].
3. Set the top and bottom reinforcement clear cover to 1 inch [25 mm].
Note: Strip Wizard does not differentiate between cover to tendons and reinforcement bar.
4. Check the Perform punching shear checks box.
5. Set Cover to CGS to 1.625 inch [41 mm].
6. Click Next to proceed to the Completion page.
54.9 Complete the Strip Wizard

Completing the Strip Wizard is the final page of the Strip Wizard dialog box. You can save the data you just
entered in a Strip Wizard Settings file by clicking Save. When you click Finish, Strip Wizard creates your strip in
the open RAM Concept file.
Complete the strip
1. Click Save and name the file in the Save Strip Wizard File As dialog box that appears.
2. Click Finish.
54.10 Proceed with RAM Concept

After you have completed Strip Wizard, you can proceed with RAM Concept. After you have created your strip,
generate the mesh (with a 2.5-foot [0.75 m] mesh) and run a calculation analysis. Refer to the relevant manual
chapters, or one of the three PT Flat Plate tutorials for further information.
View your strip
1. Choose Layers > Mesh Input > Standard Plan .

Comparison with PT Flat Plate Tutorial
Figure 471: The completed strip on the Mesh Input: Standard Plan.
Figure 472: The Element: Standard Plan showing the completed strip after the mesh has been generated.
Figure 473: The Element: Standard Plan after calculation and mesh regeneration.
Figure 474: The completed strip on the ManualLatitude Tendon: Standard Plan.
54.11 Comparison with PT Flat Plate Tutorial

The results of the Strip Wizard analysis are similar but not the same as the PT Flat Plate Tutorial. The reasons for
different results include:
• Strip Wizard does not automatically consider transverse continuity effects.
• Increased balcony loads not considered by Strip Wizard.
• Strip Wizard automatically modified the drapes in spans 2 and 3 (you can change these if you wish).
• Longitude tendons not considered by Strip Wizard.

Conclusion
54.12 Conclusion
Strip Wizard allows you to perform a preliminary or final design for a strip within a floor. The results are similar
to those generated by any strip program, but not as accurate as a RAM Concept model that considers all of the
irregularities within a floor.

55
Analysis Notes
This chapter provides general information on finite element method (FEM) plate analysis as well as specific
information on how RAM Concept calculates analysis results.
55.1 Review of plate behavior

In RAM Concept, slab areas are modeled as plates. Engineers have historically used approximate methods for
designing plates; these approximate methods assume that the plate behaves in a beam-like manner in two
perpendicular directions. Because engineers have used these approximate methods for so long, RAM Concept’s
true elastic plate analysis results can sometimes be confusing. This section will review plate analysis theory, so
engineers can better understand RAM Concept’s results.
55.1.1 In-plane and out-of-plane behavior

Slabs are subject to both in-plane and out-of-plane forces.
In-plane forces stretch and shear the slab, but do not cause it to deviate from the plane defined by the slab
centroid. For horizontal slabs (like those in RAM Concept), in-plane forces cause stretching, compressing and
shearing of the centroid plane in plan view only.
Out-of-plane forces cause the slab to bend and twist, moving it perpendicular to the plane defined by the slab
centroid. For horizontal slabs (like those in RAM Concept), out-of-plane forces cause the slab to deflect vertically
from the original centroid plane.
In a horizontal slab that has one continuous centroid elevation, the equilibrium equations of in-plane and out-of-
plane forces are totally separate. However, if there is a shift in the centroid, the two sets of forces become
interrelated due to equilibrium considerations and must be solved for simultaneously; RAM Concept handles
this interrelation automatically.
For slabs that are not made of a linear-elastic material, the strains due to the in-plane and out-of-plane forces
can no longer be linearly superimposed, so the equilibrium equations of the two force systems become indirectly
related through their strains.
This interrelation of the two force systems’ strains for non-linear elastic materials can be seen in the simple
example of a flat concrete slab that is subject to transverse loads that cause out-of-plane forces and deflections. If
a uniform in-plane compression force is applied to the same slab, the slab will have less cracking, smaller out-of-
plane displacements and a somewhat different out-of-plane force pattern.

Analysis Notes
Review of plate behavior
RAM Concept’s global analysis of structures assumes that the concrete behaves like a linear-elastic material.
However, the following discussion of the in-plane and out-of-plane forces is based purely on equilibrium
considerations, and therefore is valid for any material.
Note: “P-delta” effects are not considered.
55.1.2 In-plane behavior

In-plane forces can be quantified as an axial stress in two perpendicular directions, along with a shear stress.
For a differential element (with no loads applied) the stresses are shown as follows:
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the in-plane forces can be shown to be:
δFx/δx + δVxy/δy = -Px
δFy/δy + δVxy/δx = -Py
where Px and Py are applied loads.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the forces in terms of these new axes have a Mohr’s
circle relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes:

Analysis Notes
Fr = Fx cos2 α + Fy sin2 α + 2Fxy sin α cos α

Fs = Fx sin2 α + Fy cos2 α – 2Fxy sin α cos α
Vrs = Vxy (cos2 α –sin2 α) + (Fy – Fx) sin α cos α
This Mohr’s circle relationship is based on equilibrium considerations, so it is valid for all materials.
For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular “principal axes” where the shearing stresses
are zero and the forces in the two perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum values. The
angle between the principal axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from point to point in the slab.
55.1.3 Out-of-plane behavior

Out-of-plane forces can be quantified as bending moment about two perpendicular axes, a torsional moment and
vertical shears on the two perpendicular faces.

Analysis Notes
For a differential element the moments and shears are shown as follows:
From equilibrium considerations, the variation of the out-of-plane forces can be shown to be:
δVxz/δx + δVyz /δy = -Pz
δMx/δy + δTxy/δx = -Vyz
δMy/δx + δTxy/δy = -Vxz
where Pz is an applied load.
If a different set of coordinate axes is used for references, the moment in terms of these new axes have a Mohr’s
circle relationship to the forces in terms of the original axes, the shear forces have a simple vector-like
relationship:

Analysis Notes
Mr = Mx cos2 α + My sin2 α - 2Txy sin α cos α

Ms = Mx sin2 α + My cos2 α + 2Txy sin α cos α
Trs = Txy (cos2 α –sin2 α) + (Mx – My) sin α cos α
Vrz = Vxz cos α + Vyz sin α
Vsz = -Vxz sin α + Vyz cos α
Again, these relationships are based on equilibrium considerations, so they are valid for all materials.
For every point in the slab there will be a set of two perpendicular “principal axes” where the torsion moments
are zero and the bending moments about the two perpendicular directions are at their maximum and minimum
values. The angle between the principal axes and the x- and y-axes will vary from point to point in the slab.

Analysis Notes
Finite element analysis
55.1.4 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane behavior

Where the centroid plane of a slab changes elevation, there is an interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane forces.
The interaction of the two sets of forces is simple and is defined purely by moment and force equilibrium. A
simple centroid step is shown in elevation view below:
Fx’ = Fx
Vxy’ = Vxy
Vxz’ = Vxz
My’ = My - Fx·d
Mxy’ = Mxy - Vxy·d
55.1.5 RAM Concept plotting and relevant axes

RAM Concept can plot its results relative to the x-axis, the y-axis, a specific axis (specified with an angle) or a
maximum or minimum axis. The minimum axis is defined as the axis at each and every point that gives the
minimum value for the quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis used will vary from point to point in the plot.
Similarly the maximum axis is defined as the axis at each and every point that gives the maximum value for the
quantity being plotted; the angle of the axis used will vary from point to point in the plot.
55.2 Finite element analysis

RAM Concept uses a linear-elastic finite element formulation based on gross section properties for its global
analysis.

Analysis Notes
Orthotropic behavior
55.2.1 About finite element analysis

Finite element analysis (also known as the finite element method) has become the standard way for engineers to
analyze complicated structures. While explaining the theory of the finite element method is beyond the scope of
this chapter, engineers using RAM Concept should understand how the parameters they specify affect the
program's analysis.
55.2.2 Finite element formulation used in RAM Concept

RAM Concept models the slab portion of the structure with triangular or quadrilateral slab elements. These slab
elements are based on a formulation by Robert Cook [“Two Hybrid Elements for Analysis of Thick, Thin and
Sandwich Plates”, International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, Volume 5, pages 277-288, 1972].
The elements consider both in-plane and bending deformation. Five degrees of freedom are used per node.
55.2.3 Slab element general properties

The slab elements used in RAM Concept have the following general properties:
• The elements consider both in-plane and out of plane forces.
• The elements can (optionally) have different stiffnesses in two orthogonal directions.
• The elements consider transverse shear deformations.
• The elements consider the relative elevations of adjacent slab elements.
55.3 Orthotropic behavior

RAM Concept allows you to specify six stiffness factors that modify the behavior of the slab elements (see
description of the orthotropic behavior settings in “Slab area properties” and“ Beam properties” of Chapter 17,
“Defining the Structure”). When all of the factors are set to 1.0, the slab element behave as an isotropic material
(a material having the same properties in all directions). When the factors are different from each other, the slab
elements behave as an orthotropic material (a material having different properties along its three perpendicular
axes.)
Care must be used when setting these stiffness factors. With certain combinations of factors, the structure can
become unstable and the results can become unreliable. Also, the interaction of the stiffness factors may be more
complex than it appears upon first inspection. This section gives some guidance to assist in avoiding these
issues.

Analysis Notes
Deep beam considerations
55.3.1 K Factors and Instability

When K factors other than 1 are used (either directly, or indirectly by setting the slab or beam Behavior), it is
possible that the structure may become unstable or nearly unstable. This is generally not a problem unless the
Custom option is used.
Interaction of KMrs and KMr or KMs Stiffness Factors
If custom settings are used, and both KMrs and KMr or both KMrs and KMs are reduced, the elements may
become unstable and the analysis results may be suspect. For this reason we recommend that these parameters
be kept within a limited range:
• KMr / KMs ≥ 0.5 or KMrs / KMs ≥ 0.5
• KMs / KMr ≥ 0.5 or KMrs / KMr ≥ 0.5
Similar instabilities can occur with KVrs and KFr/KFs.
55.3.2 Interaction of in-plane and out-of-plane stiffnesses

In situations where the centroid of the slab is not at a uniform elevation, the in-plane and out-of-plane stiffnesses
of RAM Concept's slab elements will interact. For example, in a T-beam, the axial stiffness of the web and the
flanges will interact with their bending stiffnesses (creating a stiffer section than just the web and flange bending
stiffnesses added together).
In these situations, you may need to modify the in-plane behavior to modify the out-of-plane behavior. For
example, if you want to reduce a T-beam bending stiffness by half, you would need to set both KMs and KFr to
0.5.
55.4 Deep beam considerations
55.4.1 Analysis of slab and beam elements

RAM Concept assumes that beam elements and slab elements behave the same; unless their “behavior” is
specified for the finite elements.
The first analysis assumption that RAM Concept makes for slab elements is that “linear sections remain linear”;
this is analogous to “plane sections remain plane” in beam theory.

Analysis Notes
Figure 475: Linear Sections Before Deformation
Figure 476: Linear Sections After Deformation
The second analysis assumption that RAM Concept makes for slab elements is that the force and stress patterns
in the element are that of a typical slab location. The following table shows the possible slab element forces and
their associated stresses.
Table 18: Relation between force and stress
Symbol Force Related Stress
Fx Axial force on x-face Uniform axial stress, σx
Fy Axial force on y-face Uniform axial stress, σy
Vxy In-plane shear force Uniform shear stress, σxy
Vxz Transverse shear force on x-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress, σxz
Vyz Transverse shear force on y-face Parabolic (along z-axis) shear stress, σyz
Mx Bending moment about x-axis Linear (along z-axis) axial stress, σy
My Bending moment about y-axis Linear (along z-axis) axial stress, σx
Txy Torsional moment Linear (along z-axis) shear stress, σxy

Analysis Notes
Figure 477: In-Plane Actions (Plan View)
Figure 478: Out-of-Plane Actions (Plan View)

Analysis Notes
55.4.2 Analysis and design of deep beams for bending moment and shear
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, RAM Concept will assume a linear
distribution of bending stress over the deep beam, while the actual stress distribution will be non-linear.
Figure 479: RAM Concept Analysis Bending Stresses
Figure 480: “True” Bending Stresses

Analysis Notes
These analysis simplifications are generally not significant and are normally ignored.
In design, RAM Concept will not perform any special capacity calculations that are appropriate only for deep
beams and RAM Concept will not provide any deep beam detailing information. RAM Concept’s shallow beam
calculations will generally be conservative for deep beams.
The engineer will need to ensure that the deep beam is laterally stable. The engineer will also need to provide
appropriate detailing for the deep beam.
55.4.3 Analysis and design of deep beams with transverse bending moments
Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, RAM Concept will over-estimate the stiffness
of a deep beam subjected to transverse bending moments. RAM Concept’s analysis will assume that the entire
beam is effective in resisting the transverse moment.
Figure 481: Concept Analysis Bending/Axial Stresses

Analysis Notes
Figure 482: “True” Bending/Axial Stresses
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored.
In design, it is important that RAM Concept’s design sections have the appropriate ignore depth settings, so only
the portion of the beam that is truly effective is used in the capacity calculations.
Figure 483: Before Ignore Depth

Analysis Notes
Figure 484: After Ignore Depth
55.4.4 Analysis of deep beams with torsion

Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, RAM Concept will over-estimate the torsional
stiffness of deep beams. At the worst case, RAM Concept’s assumptions lead to a torsional stiffness at the deep
beam that is proportional to bh3 , while the true torsional stiffness is proportional to b3h . Typically RAM
Concept’s overestimation is not that great as the slab elements have a transverse shear stiffness that makes the
beams more flexible. The larger the number of elements across a deep beam, the smaller the overestimation of
torsional stiffness.

Analysis Notes
Figure 485: RAM Concept Analysis Torsion Shear Stresses
Figure 486: “True” Torsion Shear Stresses
The torsion in the beam may be necessary for a complete structural load path - for this reason it cannot be
ignored. It may be appropriate to reduce the torsional stiffness of the beam (this will modify the structural load
path to one that is less dependent upon the beam torsional capacity). Concept provides four options of
considering this torsion in design. See “Torsion Considerations” for more information.

Analysis Notes
Note: When the torsion stiffness of a beam has been reduced using a “K-factor”, it is generally recommended to
provide a minimum level of torsion stirrups/ligatures/links to ensure that the beam can torsionally crack
without precipitating a failure.
55.4.5 Analysis and design of moment transfer through step-beams

Because RAM Concept assumes that deep beams behave like slabs, RAM Concept will not consider that a step
beam could bend about its longitudinal axis. RAM Concept’s assumption that “linear sections remain linear”
prohibits this type of bending and will cause RAM Concept to over-estimate the stiffness of the step-beam for
moment transfer.
Figure 487: RAM Concept Step-Beam Bending Stresses

Analysis Notes
Wall behavior
Figure 488: “True” Step-Beam Bending Stresses
This over-estimation of the stiffness is generally not significant and is normally ignored. However, it is up to the
engineer to assure that step-beam has the capacity and detailing to transfer the analyzed moment.
55.5 Wall behavior
55.5.1 Walls above slab

RAM Concept considers walls above the slab to act as beams. It appropriately analyzes the influence of these
walls on the slab, but it does not report the wall-beam forces nor does it design the wall-beams. Design strips
and design sections that cross walls ignore both the capacity of the wall-beam in the cross section and the forces
in the wall-beam. Wall-beams interpret some wall properties differently than walls below the slab:
Fixed Near = wall has torsional stiffness

Fixed Far = (ignored)
Shear Wall = beam has axial stiffness
Compressible = (ignored)
Note that while the prediction of the bending behavior of the slab and beam is accurate, the division of shear
between the wall and the slab is not well predicted. For a combined wall-beam / slab section the proportion of
the vertical shear force carried by the slab will be between the two extremes:
As / Atotal
Is / Itotal

Analysis Notes
Post-tensioning loadings
where
As = cross-sectional area of slab in section
Atotal = cross-sectional area of slab and wall together
Is = moment of inertia of slab
Itotal = moment of inertia of slab and wall together
55.6 Post-tensioning loadings
55.6.1 Hyperstatic loading

RAM Concept calculates the effects of the hyperstatic loading for all objects (elements, springs, support, design
sections, design strip segment cross sections and punching checks) by using the following vector relationship:
Fh = Fb - Fp
where
Fh = the hyperstatic forces and moments
Fb = the balance loading forces and moments (tendon forces on real structure)
Fp = the “primary” forces and moments in the object (forces in object due to PT
if the object was not restrained, but still contained tendons – if any)
For objects that do not contain tendons (walls, columns, springs, rigid supports, design sections without tendons
and design strips without tendons), Fp is zero, so:
Fh = Fb
For slab elements the calculation of Fp for every element is not performed, as there is no clear definition of Fp
for anything except a cross section. RAM Concept’s slab analysis plots assume Fp = Fb ( Fh = 0), but these
plotted values are not used in the slab design and checking. RAM Concept calculates design section and design
strip cross section forces (without the assumption of Fp = Fb) as follows:
Fh = Fb - Fp
RAM Concept bases the calculation of Fp on the tendons at each cross section.
Note: Because of this issue, it is incorrect to use RAM Concept’s slab analysis plots for cross-section design
values in PT structures. (It is not recommend using slab analysis plots in RC slabs either, but that is because
design strips and design sections provide much higher accuracy).
Note: For a more detailed discussion, refer to “Complete Secondary (Hyperstatic) Effects” by A. Bommer; PTI
Journal, January 2004, Vol 2 No. 1).
55.7 Self-equilibrium analysis

RAM Concept can analyze loadings using a self-equilibrium analysis.

Analysis Notes
Self-equilibrium analysis
55.7.1 About self-equilibrium analysis

Any static loading on a structure, when combined with the structure support reactions (considered as additional
loads), is a self-equilibrium loading. In such a loading the total loads upon the structure are in force and moment
equilibrium. However, the equilibrium loads still produce moments and forces in the structure.
In certain cases, it is desirable to analyze a self-equilibrium loading upon a floor system while ignoring the
effects of the floor system supports. We call this type of analysis a self-equilibrium analysis.
55.7.2 Uses of Self-Equilibrium Analyses

Load Paths Compatible with Full Building Lateral Analysis
The most common use of self-equilibrium analyses is to ensure that a load path in RAM Concept is consistent
with a load path in a lateral analysis performed by a separate program.
If a lateral analysis of a building (perhaps using RAM Frame) is performed, and that analysis considers the slab
to be part of the lateral load path, the slab - including the slab-column connections - needs to be designed to
resist the forces and moments determined in the lateral analysis. This design can be performed using a self-
equilibrium analysis. The forces/reactions from all of the supports (above and below the slab) onto the slab are
considered as loads to the slab, any forces directly applied to the slab (such as a story-force in a seismic analysis)
are also included.
The result of this self-equilibrium analysis is a slab load path that is fully consistent with the lateral analysis of
the entire building. The distribution of forces (and the displacements) within the slab may not match those in the
building lateral analysis, but the distribution of slab forces in RAM Conceptt is almost always more accurate than
those predicted in the full-building analysis.
Other Uses
While there are other potential uses of the self-equilibrium analysis, they are rare and not covered in this
manual.
55.7.3 Using Self-Equilibrium Analyses

Setting the Loading Analysis Type
To have RAM Concept analyze a loading using a self-equilibrium analysis, the loading's analysis type must be
changed to “Lateral SE” (lateral self equilibrium). The loading analysis type can be changed in the loading
window. See “Changing Analysis” in Chapter 10, “Specifying Loadings”.
Note: The term“ Lateral SE” is used instead of “Self Equilibrium” to remind users that this analysis type is
primarily intended for lateral loadings.
Defining the Loads

Analysis Notes
Self-equilibrium analysis
There is no limit to the type or quantity of loads that can be applied in a self-equilibrium loading. However, the
loads applied must be nearly in self-equilibrium. If the loads are out of equilibrium RAM Concept will apply
restraints to the slab to ensure that equilibrium can be maintained. The restraint reactions can be viewed in the
Calc Log.
Note: See “Importing a database” in of Chapter 14, “Importing a Database from the RAM Structural System” for
information on how to automatically import self-equilibrium lateral loads.
Note: Mat/Raft foundations are typically not well suited for self-equilibrium analyses as the soil reactions are
not known before the analysis.
Related Links
• Changing Analysis (on page 98)
• Importing a database (on page 121)
55.7.4 Self-Equilibrium Analyses Details

“ Floating ” Stiffness Matrix
If you use self-equilibrium loadings, RAM Concept creates an internal floating stiffness matrix in addition to the
regular stiffness matrix. The floating stiffness matrix considers the slab, but not the supports above or below the
slab. RAM Concept also adds some minimal supports to the matrix to make it stable.
Minimal Supports
The minimal supports that RAM Concept adds to the floating stiffness matrix are located at real support
locations, but not at every real support location. Typically, RAM Concept adds three supports to provide full
stability, but not to provide any restraint.
Note: Concept gives a warning if there are not at least two support locations where minimal supports can be
added.
The motivation for adding the minimal supports at the same location as real supports is that these locations are
likely to be locations where self-equilibrium loads are applied, so any reactions at these locations can typically
be considered as “corrections” to the self-equilibrium loads.
Punching Check Reactions
Punching checks consider the loads applied at the punching check location in their reaction calculations.
Punching checks are the only “support” that have reactions from self-equilibrium analyses.
Displacements
RAM Concept reports all displacements for self-equilibrium loadings as zero. Self-equilibrium loadings have no
effect on the displacements calculated for load combinations or rule sets.
Pattern Loading
Pattern loading can be used in a self-equilibrium analysis, but it should almost never be used. When used, all
patterns should contain a self-equilibrium set of loads.
Note: For an example, see the first Example in Chapter 39, “Frequently Asked Questions”.

Analysis Notes
Design strip and design section forces
55.8 Design strip and design section forces
55.8.1 Design section axes and sign convention

Design sections have a local coordinate system, with r, s and z axes:
• R-axis is collinear with the design section and is positive in the direction from end 1 to end 2. This direction is
also referred to as “Lateral”.
• S-axis is 90 degrees counter-clockwise to the r-axis (still in the x-y plane) and goes through the “design
centroid” (see below). This direction is also referred to as “Axial”
• Z-axis is parallel to the global z-axis and goes through the “design centroid”. This direction is also referred to
as “Vertical”
Forces for the design section are considered as the forces that the structure in the positive-s region applies to the
structure in the negative-s region.
A design section drawn from point B to point A will have the same forces as a design section drawn from point A
to point B except that the following two forces will have opposite signs:
• Vz (vertical shear on the s-face)
• Mz (moment about the z axis)
55.8.2 Design strip segment axes and sign convention

Design strip segments have a local coordinate system for each internal cross section. An internal cross section is
perpendicular to the design strip segment spine and extends from the left tributary boundary to the right
tributary boundary. Each internal cross section is treated exactly like a Design Section with its own r, s and z
axes (see above).
All of a DSS’s cross sections will have coordinate systems that are parallel, but for certain structure geometries
the s-axes of each cross section will not be collinear. This is due to each cross section determining its own
“design centroid” (see below).
55.8.3 Design centroids

Each design strip (span segment strip) segment cross section and design section and determines its own design
centroid location. The location is determined as follows:
1. A final cross section is determined by considering (i) the trimmed cross section for design strip segments,
and (ii) the top and bottom “ignore” depths for design sections.
2. The centroid z-elevation of this final cross section is the design centroid z coordinate.

Analysis Notes
3. A cross section “core” is determined (see “Concrete “Core” Determination”). For a T shaped section the core
will be the stem from the bottom of the section to the top of the section. For a rectangular section, the core
will be the entire section.
4. The core’s x and y centroid coordinates are the design centroid’s x and y coordinates.
5. You can view the centroid of a design strip segment cross section in the first page of an audit. See Chapter 31,
“Using the Auditor” for more information.
55.8.4 Calculating the forces on the cross section

RAM Concept calculates the cross section forces about the design centroid of the cross section (after trimming
has been taken into account).
For each of the same slab elements that make up the initial concrete cross section (before trimming has been
taken into account), the elements’ nodal forces (for all the elements’ nodes on one side of the design section) are
transformed to the centroid of the final concrete section and added to the design section forces. For slab
elements that contain the end of the design section, only a fraction (proportional to the length of the design
section in the element divided by the length across the element along a line collinear with the design section) of
the nodal forces are included.
Nodal forces are used in place of integrations of slab stresses because slab stress results may have local spikes
caused by odd-shaped elements. These local spikes can significantly alter the total integrated value. The nodal
forces used by RAM Concept are not affected by the local stress spikes and always give results that will be in
equilibrium with the nodal loads.
55.8.5 Calculating the balanced load percentages

RAM Concept calculates the percentage of load that is balanced by the post-tensioning within design strips. See
Viewing balanced load percentages (on page 366) for instructions on accessing this information.
Each design strip segment reports two values:
• xx% DL Balanced
• xx% DL + RLL Balanced
The values reported are valid for the last Calc All (tendon changes after that are not reflected).
The values are calculated based on the total static moment for the span, for the balanced loadings and the dead
and live loadings.
For a cantilever span, the effective load is:
w = 2M/L2
where
M = moment at first cross section
L = clear span
For a regular span (with supports at both ends), the effective load is:
w = 8M/L2
where

Analysis Notes
M = (M1 + M2)/2 - M3
M1 = moment at first cross section
M2 = moment at last cross section
M3 = moment at cross section closest to midway between first and last cross
sections
L = clear span
The percentage is defined as:
% = -100 Wb/Wl
where
Wb = effective load due to balance and transfer balance loadings
Wl = effective load due to load combination under consideration
(“DL” or “DL + RLL”)
There is no possible calculation for design strip segments that are not part of a span. These have an “undefined”
balance load percentage.
The balance calculation may have some differences from the calculation available in the tendon plans. The
difference are due to:
• diversion of PT effects
• clear span vs total span
• moment taken at first and last sections, not at support centerlines
In the calculations, “DL” is based on the “dead” loading types, and means:
Self Weight + Dead + Dead (transfer) but does NOT include Stressing Dead
In the calculations, “RLL” is based on the new loading types, and means:
Live (reducible) + Live (unreducible) + Live (storage) + Live (parking) + Live (roof) + Live (reducible)(transfer)
+ Live (unreducible)(transfer) + Live (storage)(transfer) + Live (roof)(transfer)
All of these loadings are reduced per the live load reduction code before addition to the total.
Related Links
• Viewing balanced load percentages (on page 366)
55.8.6 Using the “Don't Reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change” option
Design sections and span segments contain an option (checkbox) with the label “Don't reduce Integrated M and
V due to Sign Change”. If this option is selected, Concept will perform five integrations of the cross section forces
for every loading and load pattern:
1. Standard Integration - this is as described in “Calculating the forces on the cross section”.
2. Max Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated
bending moment value are considered.
3. Min Moment Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated
bending moment value are considered.
4. Max Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would increase the integrated vertical
shear value are considered.

Analysis Notes
Result categories in RAM Concept
5. Min Shear Integration - same as item 1, except that only elements that would decrease the integrated vertical
shear value are considered.
The intent of this option is to allow for safe, conservative designs where cross sections include regions of
moment (or shear) with opposite signs that cause the moment (or shear) recorded for the cross section to be
less than that for a shorter sub- cross section.
The values from the above integrations may not be considered in certain circumstances:
• Standard Integration - all values always considered.
• Max Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending
moment in Standard Integration.
• Min Moment Integration - bending moment value considered if bending moment is same sign as bending
moment in Standard Integration.
• Max Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in
Standard Integration.
• Min Shear Integration - vertical shear value considered if vertical shear is same sign as vertical shear in
Standard Integration.
When the “Don't reduce Integrated M and V due to Sign Change” option is selected, the design forces are always
more conservative than when the option is not selected. This option should not be used without due
consideration.
Note: These selective integrations are performed independently for each loading. Load(ing) Combinations cross
section forces therefore may include (and exclude) forces from different elements in each loading. This adds to
the conservatism of the option.
55.9 Result categories in RAM Concept

RAM Concept keeps track of 2 categories of results: “standard” and “envelope”.
55.9.1 Standard results

Standard results - loadings
Standard Results for a loading are the results due to the application of all loads of the loading with no patterns
considered. These results consist of the “Standard” Context results on the Slab tab, the Reaction tab, and the
Strip tab.
Standard results - load combinations

Standard Results for a load combination are the linear combination of loading standard results using the
standard load factors. These results consist of the “Standard” Context results on the Slab tab, the Reaction tab,
and the Strip tab.
Note: Only standard results are available for objects that are currently not enveloped, like walls, point springs
and supports, and line springs and supports.

Analysis Notes
Note: For rule set layers, there are no standard results; only envelope results are calculated.
55.9.2 Envelope results

Envelope results fully consider pattern loadings and alternate envelope factors (as well as standard factors).
For slab value plots, min and max values are calculated. Please refer to Max and Min context slab plot limitations
(on page 381) for more information.
For design strip segments and design sections all of the cross-section forces are calculated, and there are six
envelope result sets kept:
• Max M (forces in place at time of maximum M)
• Min M (forces in place at time of minimum M)
• Max V (forces in place at time of maximum V)
• Min V (forces in place at time of minimum V)
• Max P (forces in place at time of maximum P)
• Min P (forces in place at time of minimum P)
Note: “Min” refers to the minimum “signed” value, not the minimum absolute value.
For columns and punching checks all the reaction forces are calculated and there are 6 envelope result sets kept:
• Max Fz (reaction forces at time of maximum Fz reaction)
• Min Fz (reaction forces at time of minimum Fz reaction)
• Max Mx (reaction forces at time of maximum Mx reaction)
• Min Mx (reaction forces at time of minimum Mx reaction)
• Max My (reaction forces at time of maximum My reaction)
• Min My (reaction forces at time of minimum My reaction)
55.9.3 How RAM Concept calculates envelope results

Envelope Results - Loadings
Envelope results for a loading are determined by comparing the results for the full loading and the results of all
of the pattern loadings (considering the pattern factors). Envelope results consist of a subset of results which
occur simultaneously with minimum and maximum values of certain resultants.
For example, for a design section, all of the pattern results would be compared, and the pattern result with the
largest bending moment would become the Max M result for that design section; other design sections’ Max M
results might be determined by other patterns.
If the loading is not patterned, then all of the envelope results are identical to the standard results.

Analysis Notes
Envelope Results - Load Combinations

Envelope results for a load combination are determined by comparing all the permutations of standard and
alternate load factors multiplied by all envelopes for each loading in the load combination. For each location and
envelope type, the chosen load factors are those that create the most extreme envelope.
In mathematical terms:
There are 2n(p+1) results for n loadings and p patterns.

These 2n(p+1) results are enveloped together.
The actual calculations that RAM Concept uses do not consider 2n(p+1) load combinations, but the result of the
RAM Concept’s calculations is the same as if it did.
Envelope Results - Rule Sets

Envelope results for rule sets are determined by comparing all the envelopes for all of the load combinations
that use the rule set. For each location and envelope type, the chosen values are those that occur simultaneously
with the most extreme envelope.
Envelope results for a loading, load combination or rule set are all the results on the Reaction tab and Strip tab
except for those with the “Standard” context. The Standard context for these plots is sometimes referred to as
the “standard envelope”, but technically it is not an envelope at all.
Note: RAM Concept’s enveloping finds the critical cases in most regular and complicated models. It would be
possible, however, for the six envelopes to miss the critical case. If you believe that a set of forces not included in
the envelopes may be critical for the design, you can manually create additional loadings (without patterning)
and/or additional load combinations (without alternate load factors) and/or additional rule sets (using a single
load combination) to ensure that the force set of concern is considered in the design.

Section Design Notes
56
This chapter explains RAM Concept’s general approach to the analysis and design of cross sections. The specific
handling of each code’s requirements are detailed in the chapters that follow.
56.1 General Design Approach
56.1.1 Strip and Section Design – A 3 Step Process

RAM Concept performs its design in 3 steps:
Step 1: Each Rule set performs its “Phase 1” selection of reinforcement. For most rule sets this is the entire
design.
Step 2: Each Rule set performs its “Phase 2” selection of reinforcement needed in addition to that summarized in
step 1b. For most rule sets nothing happens in this step, but for some rule sets —such as shear design and
ductility design— the summarized step 1 reinforcement needs to be known before the design can be performed.
Step 3: Each Rule set performs a final check (no reinforcement is added in this step) and final analysis.
56.1.2 Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept considers mild steel reinforcement to be a perfectly elastic/plastic material as defined by the
modulus of elasticity and the yield stress.
56.1.3 Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept uses a post-tensioning steel stress-strain curve base on a standard “power formula” that has been
used in various forms for 25 years:

General Design Approach
fp = εp {A + B/[1 + (C εp)D]1/D} ≤ fpu

Where A, B, C, and D are coefficients chosen to best fit the experimental stress-strain curve data.
RAM Concept uses coefficients A, B, C, and D based on an analysis of prestressing steel stress-strain curves
included a paper by Develapura and Tadros [Develapura, R. K. and Tadros, M. K.,“Critical Assessment of ACI 318
Eq. (18-3) for Prestressing Steel Stress at Ultimate Flexure”, ACI Structural Journal, V. 89, No. 5, September-
October 1992, pp. 538-546]. RAM Concept’s values are:
A = 0.0311 Ep
B = Ep - A
C = 0.958 Ep/fpy
D = 7.36
These values provide exact correspondence with the recommended parameters for 270 ksi (1860 MPa) strand
with fpy of 0.9 fpu. For other prestressing materials, there may be small differences (a few percent) from the
theoretical curves in the region between the start of yield and ultimate strength.
56.1.4 Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains

The strains in a cross section can be determined using the “plane sections remain plane” assumption. However,
due to the effects of prestressing and the sequence of construction, the strains in the post-tensioning in a cross
section are not equal to the strains in the adjacent concrete.
Conceptually, to calculate the strain in a bonded tendon at that corresponds to the adjacent concrete strain is
simple:

εp = εc + (εpi – εci)
where
εp = strain in tendon
εc = strain in concrete adjacent to tendon
εpi = strain in tendon at time of bonding
εci = strain in adjacent concrete at time of bonding (typically negative)
RAM Concept uses the following procedure and assumptions when calculating the εpi and εci values for each
tendon in each design cross section:
• All tendon “long-term losses” (relaxation, elastic shortening, creep and shrinkage) occur before bonding.
• The formwork applies an upward force on the concrete exactly the same as the weight of the concrete. The
only forces in the concrete are those due to the balance loading.
• The concrete strains can be determined using gross section properties and the “initial” concrete modulus.
56.1.5 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – General Theory

RAM Concept’s treatment of the effect of cross section strains on ultimate unbonded tendon stresses is loosely
based on a paper by Naaman, Burns, French, Gable and Mattock [Naaman, A. E. et. al, “Stresses in Unbonded
Prestressing Tendons at Ultimate: Recommendation”, ACI Structural Journal, V. 99, No. 4, July-August 2002, pp.
518-529]. In the paper the authors, who are members of the Subcommittee of Stresses in Unbonded Tendons of
Joint ASCE-ACI committee 423, Prestressed Concrete, recommend code modifications for ACI 318.
The paper provides an equation for estimating tendon stresses at ultimate bending strength of a cross section.
The proposed equation is shown to have a correlation with test results that is 2.5 times better than the ACI
equations 18-4 and 18-5. The equation is:
fps = fse + Ωu Ep εcu (dp/c – 1)(L1/L2) ≤ 0.80 fpu
where
fps = tendon stress at ultimate bending strength
fse = effective prestress in prestressed reinforcement
Ep = elastic modulus of prestressed reinforcement
εcu = failure strain of concrete (typically assumed as 0.003)
dp = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed
reinforcement.
c = depth of neutral axis at ultimate strength
L = span under consideration
L1 = sum of lengths of loaded spans
L2 = total length of tendon between anchorages
Ωu = K(dp/L) where K = 3 for uniform or third point loadings and 1.5 for
midspan loading
fpu = specified tensile strength of prestressed tendons
It can be shown that:
Δεp ≈ εcu (dp/c - 1)
where
Δεp = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective
prestress level to ultimate bending
With this substitution (and the one for Ωu ) the equation becomes:

fps = fse + K(dp/L) Ep Δεp (L1/L2) ≤ 0.80 fpu

L can both realistically and conservatively be assumed to equal L1 as it is unlikely for two spans to
simultaneously have large inelastic deformations. This simplifies the equation further to:
fps = fse + Ep (Kdp/ L2)Δεp≤ 0.80 fpu
It is obvious that in the above equations that (Kdp /L2) is a strain reduction factor that accounts for the
distribution of the localized strain over the length of the tendon. The numerator is a consideration of the length
of the yielding (high strain) region, while the denominator is a consideration of the length over which this strain
is distributed.
56.1.6 Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation

RAM Concept assumes that unbonded post-tensioning stresses are not affected by service loading.
For ultimate strength considerations, RAM Concept treats unbonded tendons as partially bonded tendons:
fps = F(εpse + k Δεp ) ≤ flimit
where
fps = tendon stress at ultimate bending strength
F() = post-tensioning material stress strain curve (described above)
εpse = strain in tendon at effective prestress level
Δεp = change in strain in concrete adjacent to the tendon from effective
prestress level to ultimate bending
k = strain reduction factor, taken as 0.1
flimit = limit stress as defined by the effective code
For ACI 318-99, flimit is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the calculation of ρ p used in the ACI equations,
RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same
limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
For AS 3600-2001, flimit is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of befdp used in the AS equations, RAM
Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the tendon centroid (the same limiting
stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section).
56.1.7 Tendons – External Load or Internal Force?

Tendons need to be considered as an external load for some purposes and as an internal force for other
purposes. It is important that the tendon treatment be consistent throughout a calculation.
RAM Concept always considers tendons as internal forces in strength calculations. The full force of the tendon is
an internal force, while any hyperstatic effects generated by the tendons are considered as external forces. The
balance loading should never be included in load combinations used for strength calculations, while the
hyperstatic loading should always be included (as an external load) in strength calculations.
RAM Concept always considers the initial prestress in tendons as external forces in service calculations. Changes
in the tendons stress (from effective stress levels) – if any – are considered as internal forces. For example if a
bonded tendon is stressed with a final effective stress of 175 ksi (1207 N/mm2), but applying the service
loadings to the structure results in a stress increase to 185 ksi (1276 N/mm2), then RAM Concept will consider
the 10 ksi (69 N/mm2)stress change as an internal force, while the 175 ksi (1207 N/mm2) initial stress is

assumed to be considered in the applied loads. For this reason, the balance loading should always be included in
load combinations used for service calculations, The hyperstatic loading should never be included in service
calculations.
56.1.8 Tendons – inclusion of force vector on a cross section

Tendons are excluded from a cross section if they cross the section at an angle of less than 15 degrees (i.e. if they
are nearly parallel to the cross section).
56.1.9 Tendons – calculation of number of ducts

The calculation of number of tendon ducts for Code bar spacing rules uses the following:
• an integral number of ducts is calculated from the area of prestressing steel and the specified Aps / duct
• the number is then modified by the vector component of the tendon
This is true regardless of the angle of the tendon to the cross section, so long as the tendon is considered in the
cross section (see Section 51.1.8).
56.1.10 Concrete Stress-Strain Curves

RAM Concept uses a parabolic-plastic stress-strain curve for concrete based on the Portland Cement
Association’s parabolic stress-strain curve [see PCA’s Notes on ACI 318-99 Building Code Requirements for
Structural Concrete, Figure 6-8]. This curve is used for both strength and service cross section analyses. The
curve is totally defined by two parameters:
• f’c = Concrete Cylinder Strength
• Ec = Concrete Elastic Modulus (tangent at zero strain)
A third parameter, the strain at which the concrete behavior changes from parabolic to linear, is calculated:
ε0 = 2 (0.85 f’c)/ Ec
For εc < 0 (tension)
fc = 0
For 0 < εc < ε0 (parabolic range)
fc = 0.85 f’c [2( εc /ε0 ) – (εc /ε0 )2]
For εc ≥ ε0 (plastic range)
fc = 0.85 f’c

56.1.11 Creep and Shrinkage Effects

RAM Concept considers creep and shrinkage in any cross section by modifying the concrete stress-strain curves
to be:
σ = f((ε - εcs )/ kc)
where
σ = stress in concrete
kc = concrete creep factor (typically 3.35 = 2.35 + 1.0)
ε = strain in cross section
ε cs = shrinkage strain
f() = concrete material short-term stress-strain curve
This modified concrete stress-strain curve is only used in the ECR calcs. It is never used for gross-section or
cracked-section stress predictions.
Note: ACI 209 reports the value of 3.35 as an average creep value. RAM Concept files adopt this value as a
default.
56.1.12 Cracked Section Analyses

RAM Concept performs cracked section analyses by iteratively solving for a cross section strain (top strain and
bottom strain) that results in the cross section bending moment and axial force being equal to the applied
moment and axial force.

In the cracked section analyses, RAM Concept considers concrete to have no tension strength. Since concrete
obviously does have some tension strength, RAM Concept’s assumption is equivalent to considering that the
concrete has been previously cracked by some other loading condition. RAM Concept’s assumption is
conservative. This pre-cracked assumption is used to determine the cracked cross section stresses and the
cracked moment of inertia. This assumption does not effect the ECR calculations as Branson’s formula does not
consider the cracked moment of inertia unless the cross section stresses exceed the modulus of rupture.
When a cross section with no concrete tension strains is analyzed with a cracked section analysis, RAM
Concept’s analysis methods result in a transformed section analysis.
The parameters considered in a Rule Set’s cracked section analysis are
• For ECR (Effective Curvature Ratio) Calcs Only - The creep coefficient as specified in the Load History / ECR
tab of the Calc Options dialog. This coefficient is the value of (total strain under constant stress) / (initial
strain under same stress); a typical value is 3.35 (1.0 for initial strain and 2.35 for creep strain)
• For ECR Calcs Only - The shrinkage strain as specified in the Calc Options dialog.
• The standard instantaneous concrete stress-strain curve as defined above.
• All mild steel reinforcement (from all rule sets) in each cross section – this is the value reported by the
Design Status area of steel plots, which will often be somewhat less than the value of the detailed
reinforcement (number of bars and lengths).
• The displacement of concrete by reinforcement is not considered.
• The tendon stress strain curve for the type of rule set (see “Tendons – External Load or Internal Force?”).
Cracked section analysis is not available for rule sets – such as Minimum Design – that do not inherently have
a tendon stress-strain curve type associated with them.
56.1.13 Branson’s Stress Ratio

The most common method for determining an effective moment of inertia in concrete members is Branson’s
Formula:
Ie = (Mcr/Ma)4 Ig + [1 – (Mcr/Ma)4] Icr
where
Ie = the effective moment of inertia
Ig = the gross concrete moment of inertia
Icr = the cracked concrete moment of inertia
Mcr = the gross cross section cracking moment
Ma = the applied moment
As Branson’s formula does not consider axial forces which may be present (especially in post-tensioned
structures), we have modified it to consider axial forces:
Ie = (fcr/fa)4 Ig + [1 – (fcr/fa)4] Icr
where
fcr = the concrete flexural tensile strength
fa = the cross-section tensile fiber stress (based on gross section properties)
If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to Branson’s formula. If there are axial forces, this
formulation is a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of Branson’s formula.
We call the value (fcr/fa)4 “Branson’s Stress Ratio”. Its value is always limited to be less than or equal to 1.0.

Note that you will more commonly see Branson’s formula used with a power of 3 instead of 4. The power of 3 is
appropriate when a peak moment in a span is used to determine an effective moment of inertia for the entire
span. The power of 4 is appropriate for determining a local effective moment of inertia using local section forces
[Branson, Dan E., “Instantaneous and Time-Dependent Deflections of Simple and Continuous Reinforced
Concrete Beams”, Report #7, Part 1, Alabama Highway Research Department, Bureau of Public Roads, August
1963, pp.1-78].
56.1.14 Calculation of Effective Curvature Ratio

RAM Concept calculates an “effective curvature ratio” at every cross section:
ECR = Ce / Cg
where
ECR = the effective curvature ratio
Ce = the effective cross section curvature (see calc below)
Cg = the gross section curvature
Ce is calculated by the approximate formula:
Ce = (kc BSR Cg) + ((1 – BSR) Cccs)
where
kc = the concrete material creep factor (often 3.35) = total strain / elastic
strain
BSR = Branson’s Stress Ratio or Eurocode 2 Stress Ratio (see “Branson’s Stress
Ratio” or “Eurocode 2 Cracking Distribution Stress Ratio”)
Cccs = the cross section curvature considering cracking, creep and shrinkage
(see “Cracked Section Analyses”)
Note that if gross-section stresses are kept below the concrete tensile strength, then the effective curvature ratio
will be equal to the concrete material creep factor (kc).
If post-tensioning is considered as an internal force (not an external load) for the active design rules, then the
gross-section calculations are performed with the post-tensioning primary forces added to the calculated cross
section forces.
It is unusual, but possible, for the ECR value to be less than the concrete material creep factor (kc). These cases
occur if the amount of reinforcement is so large that the cracked stiffness (including concrete creep) is greater
than the gross stiffness (including concrete creep).
56.1.15 Use of ECR

ECR values are defined for curvatures of cross sections - we need to be able to transform them into a span
deflection multiplier for convenient design use.
The deflection of a span is proportional to the elastic energy in the span. Considering only bending energy of the
gross section:
Δ g = k ∫(M )(M / EI ) d l
Considering the ECR as “softener” of the gross section stiffness, this equation becomes:

Δecr = k ∫(M )(ECR )(M / EI ) d l
From these two equations we can create a span deflection multiplier for convenient design use:
Deflection Multiplier = Δecr / Δg
k ∫( M )( ECR )( M / EI ) d l
Deflection Multiplier = k ∫( M )( M / EI ) d l
∫( M )( ECR )( M / EI ) d l
Deflection Multiplier = ∫( M )( M / EI ) d l
Note that this multiplier will likely be conservative for indeterminate structures as the bending moments in the
structure will become rearranged (stiffer sections will attract more moment) in a manner that will reduce Δecr .
Note: The deflection multiplier will always be less than the maximum ECR value in the span.
Note: The L.T. deflection plot uses this integral.
56.1.16 Crack Width Predictions

Unless the design code in use specifies a calculation for estimating crack widths, RAM Concept estimates crack
widths based on a paper by Frosch [Frosch, R. J., “Another Look at Cracking and Crack Control in Reinforced
Concrete”, ACI Structural Journal, V. 96, No. 3, May-June 1999, pp. 437-442].
In cracked concrete, with the concrete assumed to carry only small tension stress, the crack width can be
calculated as:
wc = εc sc
where
wc = crack width
εc = cross section strain at crack elevation
sc = crack spacing
The cross section strain (εc ) at the crack elevation can be easily calculated in a cracked-section analysis using
the “plane sections remain plane” assumption.
The crack spacing (sc) is more difficult to predict.
For reinforcement with no bond to the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be:
h ≤ sc ≤ 2 h
where
h = height of the tension zone
For reinforcement with “no-slip” with the concrete, the crack spacing can be shown to be:
d* ≤ sc ≤ 2 d*
where
d* = distance from crack to centroid of nearest reinforcement
= c 2 + ( sb / 2 ) 2 for a single layer of reinforcement
c = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement
centroid
sb = spacing of reinforcement

For deformed bars without special coatings (such as epoxy), Frosch has shown that:
sc = 2 d*
leads to reasonable predictions of the maximum crack width. RAM Concept uses this assumption, but limits d* to
a maximum value of h (the crack height); this limiting value typically only controls in slabs without bonded
reinforcement. The final equation RAM Concept uses for crack width calculation can be written as:
wc = 2 εc d* (d* ≤ h)
For multiple bars and layers of reinforcement, the reinforcement can be optimally placed such that:
d * = ci2 + (si / 2)2
for all reinforcement i

w = Σs;
where
ci = perpendicular (shortest) distance from concrete face to reinforcement i
centroid
si = length along on concrete tension face allocated to reinforcement i
w = width of concrete tension face
RAM Concept iteratively solves for d* (to within 1 mm), using all bonded reinforcement that when considered
minimizes the value of d*. When using bonded post-tensioning, each duct is considered as a reinforcing bar
equivalent. Unbonded and external post-tensioning are ignored. Tendons at an angle of less than 45 degrees to
the cross section are ignored also.
56.1.17 “Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations

Many design codes require that cross sections have a minimum moment capacity of at least some factor (often
1.2) times the cracking load of the cross section. The cracking load is derived as follows:
fcr = (ML + MB)/S – (PL + PB)/A
where
fcr = the cracking stress
ML = the bending moment due to applied loads at time of cracking
MB = the bending moment due to the balance loading (same sign as ML)
S = the section modulus for the direction of bending (Z in some communities)
PL = the axial compression due to applied loads at time of cracking
PB = the axial compression due to the balance loading
A = the section area
Solving for ML results in:
ML = (fcr + (PL + PB)/A)S - MB
Assuming that PL is zero:
ML = (fcr + PB/A)S - MB
Replacing MB with MP + MH and PB with PP + PH:
ML = (fcr + (PP + PH)/A)S – (MP + MH)
where

MP = the “primary” post-tensioning bending moment

MH = the hyperstatic post-tensioning bending moment
PP = the “primary” post-tensioning axial compression
PH = the hyperstatic post-tensioning axial compression (typically negative)
Multiplying by 1.2 to get “1.2 times the cracking load”:
1.2 ML = 1.2 (fcr + (PP + PH)/A) S – 1.2 (MP + MH)
To get the design bending moment, we add in the hyperstatic bending moment:
MD = 1.2 ML + MH = 1.2 (fcr + (PP + PH)/A) S – 1.2 (MP + MH) + MH
Simplifying:
MD = 1.2 (fcr +(PP + PH)/A) S – 1.2 MP – 0.2 MH
It is common and usually conservative to assume that PH is zero:
MD = 1.2 (fcr +PP/A) S – 1.2 MP – 0.2 MH
It is common (although not technically correct) to ignore the 0.2 MH, giving the final design moment equation:
MD = 1.2 (fcr + PP/A) S – 1.2 MP
56.1.18 Concrete “Core” Determination

• The “core” of the cross section is used in various calculations.
• Refer to “About shear core” in Chapter 22, “Defining Design Strips” for explanation of the core calculation.
• Tendon ducts in this core are investigated.
• Ducts are assumed to have the same heights as their widths and are assumed to be rectangular in shape.
For all standard ducts, these assumptions give a conservative approximation of overlapping.
• Ducts are assumed to be centered on the prestressing steel that they contain (this is not true in the real
structure, but this assumption rarely has any impact on the calculation result).
• Any horizontal line across the core is investigated to determine the maximum total width of duct across
the shear area. Bonded duct widths and unbonded duct widths are multiplied by factors that differ for
each code. For example, in BS 8110, 2/3 of bonded duct widths are considered, and full unbonded duct
widths are considered. For ACI, the factors are zero, so the duct width is never excluded.
• The web width is equal to the core width minus the maximum total width of duct across the shear area.
56.1.19 Torsion Considerations

RAM Concept can consider torsion on a cross section in four different ways, depending upon the properties of
the design strip segment or the design section. The four approaches are:
The methods considered are:
• Beam
• Considers torsion by designing with code beam torsion equations.
• As Shear

• Assumes torsion is carried entirely by varying shear across the cross-section “core” length L.
• The shear force per unit length is v = 6 T / L2
• The design shear force is Vd = V +/- 6 T / L
• As Bending
• Considers torsion by adding the torsion to the bending moment and designing bending for the combined
total Md = M +/- T.
• Wood-Armer
• Refer to “Wood-Armer Torsion Design”.
• None
• Torsion is not considered in any way.
56.1.20 Wood-Armer Torsion Design

This new torsion design option allows the designer to use the “Wood-Armer” approach to handle twisting
moments in slabs.
To provide this torsion design options, a new cross section analysis quantity, Absolute Twist, is calculated.
You can plot Absolute Twist, as shown in the figure, “Plotting Results” in Chapter 30.
When you choose the Wood-Armer torsion design, every set of design forces is converted into two sets of design
forces, identical to the original except with the design moments changed to:
Md = M + AT, and
Md = M - AT
where AT = absolute twist
The Wood-Armer method (as originally developed by Wood and Armer) was intended to be applied at every
point in the slab; RAM Concept’s implementation is an extrapolation of the method for use in cross sections.
The Wood-Armer method is NOT applicable to beams, and is not recommended for strips containing beams.
References
• Wood, R. H., “The Reinforcement of Slabs in Accordance with a Pre-Determined Field of Moments,” Concrete,
vol. 2, pp. 69-76, February 1968.
• Armer, G. S. T.,“ Discussion,” Concrete, vol. 2, pp. 319-320, August 1968.

Live Load Reduction Notes
57
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of live load reduction.
57.1 Live Load Reduction for Loadings, Load Combinations and Rule Sets
RAM Concept individually applies live load reduction to each loading of each column, punching check, design
strip segment and design section. For example, the reduction factor for a column may be different for a Live
(Reducible) Loading than for a Live (Storage) Loading.
57.1.1 Loadings
While RAM Concept calculates the live load reductions per loading (and per member), the reductions do not
affect the loading analysis. The analysis results that RAM Concept displays for loadings are never reduced by live
load reduction.
57.1.2 Load Combinations and Rule Sets

When RAM Concept combines loadings into load combinations, it considers the live load reduction of each
loading added to the load combination. The analysis results that RAM Concept displays for load combinations are
always reduced by live load reduction.
Similarly when RAM Concept envelopes load combinations into Rule Sets, it considers live load reduction as all
of the load combinations being enveloped have already been modified by the reduction factors. The analysis
results that RAM Concept displays for rule sets are always reduced by live load reduction.
Note: Remember that Concept only reduces live load on columns, punching checks, design strip segments and
design sections.
Note: See “Viewing live load reduction results” for more information.
Related Links
• Viewing live load reduction results (on page 368)

Tributary Area Calculations
57.2 Tributary Area Calculations

When a loading on a structure is uniform, it is common to assign to each structural member a “tributary area”
that the member (alone) supports. This assignment is typically performed by a simplistic visual analysis. The
assigned area is not truly supported by only the member to which it is assigned. The effects of the (true) uniform
loading on the member are similar to the effects if the entire load of the tributary area was applied to the
member. Most design codes use the tributary area as the primary parameter in the live load reduction
calculations.
RAM Concept calculates tributary areas by applying a unit uniform load to the entire slab and analyzing the flow
of the vertical forces. The tributary areas for the following members are calculated from the unit load as follows:
Columns - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero.
Walls - (not currently reduced).
Punching Checks - the vertical reaction, but not less than zero.
Design Strip Segments - the absolute value of the difference between the vertical shears at both ends. When
multiple segments make up a span, the segments combined tributary areas are used in calculations.
Design Sections - the absolute value of the shear.
With the above calculations, it is possible (but not common) for the sum of the tributary areas of walls and
columns to exceed the total floor area. This happens when one or more of the support reactions are negative.
57.3 Influence Area Calculations

ASCE-7 and IBC 2003 use an “influence area” instead of a tributary area in their live load reduction calculations.
The influence area is defined as the “floor area over which the influence surface for structural effects is
significantly different from zero”.
Influence areas are not calculated when BS 6399 or AS/NZ 1170.1 are used.
RAM Concept uses heuristic methods to calculate influence areas. These methods tend to define areas that are
similar to those of that engineers would produce visually, but the methods do not calculate areas that are exactly
the same as an engineer might calculate manually. RAM Concept's influence areas can be shown on the plans so
you can inspect the areas that Concept is using in its live load reduction calculations.
Per ASCE-7 and IBC 2003, RAM Concept limits the influence areas to be no larger than the following multiple of
the tributary area:
Table 19: Maximum multiple of influence area to tributary
Tributary Area Multiple
Columns 4
Punching Checks 4

Influence Area Calculations
Tributary Area Multiple
Beam Design Strips 2
Slab Design Strips 1
57.3.1 Example of Influence Areas

The following figures show RAM Concept's influence areas and the influence areas commonly used by engineers
for a few slab conditions.
Some engineers might (erroneously) suggest that the tributary area of the column in the following figure is 600
square feet, but continuity effects would obviously increase that value. The results show that the tributary area
is actually 952 square feet.
Figure 489: Slab layout with dimensions in feet from center of column to centerline of walls. An engineer would
typically deem the influence area to be 2400 square feet.

Figure 490: Column and punching check influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept

Figure 491: Design strip segments

Figure 492: Design strip segment influence areas as calculated by RAM Concept

ASCE-7 2002 Live Load Reduction
Figure 493: Column and punching check influence areas for an irregular floor.
57.4 ASCE-7 2002 Live Load Reduction

ASCE-7 live load reduction is specified in code section 4.8. Live load effects on members with influence areas of
less than 400 square feet are not modified by live load reduction.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from passenger car garages shall not be
reduced, except that members supporting two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections 4.8.2
and 4.8.3. These two load types must be drawn on a “Live (storage)” loading to be considered appropriately.
ASCE-7 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section
4.8.4. These loads must be drawn on a “Live (unreducible)” loading to be considered appropriately
The tributary area of one-way slabs is not limited per section 4.8.5. However, if you limit the design strip width
to 1.5 times the span length, and the behavior is that of a one-way slab, then the requirements of this code
section will be met.
Note: ASCE-7 actually defines an “application factor” not a “reduction factor” (reduction factor = 1 - application
factor).

ASCE-7 2010 Live Load Reduction

4.7.5. These loads must be drawn on a “Live (unreducible)” loading to be considered appropriately
The tributary area of one-way slabs is not limited per section 4.7.6. However, if you limit the design strip width
to 1.5 times the span length, and the behavior is that of a one-way slab, then the requirements of this code
section will be met.
factor).

4.7.5. These loads must be drawn on a "Live (unreducible)" loading to be considered appropriately
The tributary area of one-way slabs is limited by section 4.7.6.
factor).
57.7 IBC 2003 Live Load Reduction

IBC 2003 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.9. Live load effects on members with influence
areas of less than 400 square feet are not modified by live load reduction.
IBC 2003 requires that live loads in excess of 100 psf and live loads from passenger car garages shall not be
reduced, except that members supporting two or more floors may be reduced up to 20% per code sections

IBC 2006 Live Load Reduction
1607.9.1.1 and 1607.9.1.2. These two load types must be drawn on a “Live (storage)” loading to be considered
appropriately.
IBC 2003 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section
1607.9.1.3. These loads must be drawn on a “Live (unreducible)” loading to be considered appropriately.
The reduction of live loads for one-way slabs is not permitted per section 1607.9.1.4. RAM Concept will never
reduce one-way slab loads if IBC 2003 is selected.
Note: IBC 2003 actually defines an “application factor” not a “reduction factor” (reduction factor = 1 - application
factor).

appropriately.
IBC 2006 requires that live loads of 100 psf or less in public assembly occupancies cannot be reduced per section
1607.9.1.3. These loads must be drawn on a “Live (unreducible)” loading to be considered appropriately.
The reduction of live loads for one-way slabs is not permitted per section 1607.9.1.4. RAM Concept will never
reduce one-way slab loads if IBC 2006 is selected.
factor).

appropriately.
IBC 2009 requires that live loads of 100 psf and at areas where fixed seats are located in Group A occupancies
cannot be reduced per section 1607.9.1.4. These loads must be drawn on a “Live (unreducible)” loading to be
considered appropriately.
The tributary area of one-way slabs is limited by section 1607.9.1.1.
factor).

IBC 2012 Live Load Reduction

appropriately.
factor).

appropriately.
factor).
57.12 UBC 1997 Live Load Reduction

UBC 1997 live load reduction is specified in code section 1607.5. Live load effects on members with tributary
areas of 150 square feet or less are not modified by live load reduction.
Equation (7-2) [R = 23.1 (1 + D/L)] is not considered in live load reduction calculations. This value needs to be
calculated and set by the user in the maximum reduction property.
UBC 1997 requires that storage loads in excess of 100 psf shall not be reduced, except that live loads on columns
may be reduced up to 20%. These loads must be drawn on a Live (Storage) loading to be considered
appropriately.
UBC 1997 requires that other live loads in excess of 100 psf or in places of public assembly occupancies cannot
be reduced. These loads must be drawn on a Live (Unreducible) loading to be considered appropriately.

AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction
UBC 1997 can be used as IBC 2003 alternate live load reduction in accordance with IBC section 1607.9.2.
Because minimum parking loads in UBC 1997 are higher than IBC 2003 minimum parking loads, it may not be
appropriate to apply UBC 1997 parking garage reduction provisions to IBC 2003 loadings. For this reason,
parking garage loads should be drawn on a Live (Storage) loading and thus will get a maximum 20% reduction
on columns and no live load reduction on other members.
57.13 AS/NZS 1170.1-2002 Live Load Reduction

AS/NZS 1170.1 live load reduction is specified in code section 3.4.2.
When using AS/NZS 1170.1 to perform live load reduction, only live loadings with the “Live (Reducible)” type
are reduced. Live (Storage) loadings are assumed to have loads greater than 5 kPa and are therefore not
reducible per 3.4.2(ii).
Loading effects on one-way slabs are not reduced per 3.4.2(v).
For other member types, the reduction is calculated per the formula in 3.4.2(b).
Note: Section 3.4.2 actually defines an “application factor” not a “reduction factor” (reduction factor = 1 -
application factor).
57.14 BS 6399-1:1996 Live Load Reduction

BS 6399 live load reduction is specified in code sections 6.1 through 6.3.
Only live loadings with the “Live (Reducible)” type are reduced.
For columns, the Table 2 and Table 3 values from the code are calculated and the greater of the two reductions is
used. For other members, the Table 3 values are used.
For columns, the moment and shear values are reduced by the same reduction factor as the axial force values;
this is different from what is specified in the note in Section 6.2 of BS 6399. This does not affect any design in
RAM Concept (or the RAM Structural System), but it does affect the reported column reaction values.
Live load reduction is not used for one-way and two-ways slabs.
57.15 IS 875 (Part 2) - 1987 Live Load Reduction

IS 875 live load reduction is specified in code section 3.2.
For columns, only live loadings with the “Live (Reducible)” type are reduced. For beams, both “Live (Reducible)”
and “Live (Storage)” loadings are reduced.
For columns, the table in section 3.2.1 is implemented. The 5 kN/m2 provisions in section 3.2.1.1 are not
implemented.
For columns, the moment and shear values are reduced by the same reduction factor as the axial force values.

Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Live Load Reduction
For beams, the reductions in section 3.2.2 are implemented. The limitations of subsections “a” through “d” are
not implemented as all loads on a “Live (Reducible)” or “Live (Storage)” loading layer are assumed to be
reducible.
Live load reduction is not used for one-way slabs, two-way slabs and punching checks.
57.16 Eurocode 1-2002 (UK Annex) Live Load Reduction

Eurocode 1 live load reduction is specified in code clause 6.3.1.2(10-11) and UK NA 2.5-2.6.
Only live loadings with the “Live (Reducible)” type are reduced.
For columns, equation NA.1 and NA.2 values from the UK National Annex are calculated and the greater of the
two reductions is used. For other members, equation NA.1 values are used.
Note: Eurocode 1 actually defines an “application factor” not a “reduction factor” (reduction factor = 1 -
application factor).
57.17 National Building Code of Canada 2005 Live Load Reduction

NBC 2005 live load reduction is specified in code clause 4.1.5.9.
Only live loadings with the “Live (Reducible)”, “Live (Storage)”, and Live (Parking) types are reduced. Live
(Reducible) loads are reduced in accordance with 4.1.5.9 2), and Live (Storage) and Live (Parking) types are
reduced in accordance with 4.1.5.9 3).
57.18 Mat Foundations

In the design of mat foundations supporting columns (and/or walls) supporting levels above, the live load
reductions need to be applied to the loads instead of the member forces. The loads need to be reduced instead of
the member forces for two reasons: 1) there is a clear understanding of the tributary area for the loads while (in
most cases) there is not a clear understanding of the tributary area for the design strips; and 2) the zero-tension
soil reaction iterations need to be performed with the reduced loads.
For mat foundations, the live load reduction code should always be set to “None”. Otherwise the live loads may
be reduced twice.
Mat foundation loads that are imported from the RAM Structural System will be automatically reduced
appropriately (by the RAM Structural System). User-drawn loads will need to be reduced manually.
57.19 Special Member Considerations

Special Member Considerations
57.19.1 Columns Above the Slab

Columns above the slab will have zero tributary area and zero influence area assigned to them in the automated
area calculations. If you want to have live load reduction applied to columns above the slab you will need to
manually specify the areas to use.
57.19.2 Columns Above and Below the Slab

When the reactions for columns above and below the slab are reported together, the live load reduction for the
column below the slab is used.
Because of this, the separate reported reactions for the column below and the column above will not necessarily
sum to the reported reaction for the column above and below.

Reinforcement Notes
58
This chapter provides information on how RAM Concept utilizes span detailing, calculates reinforcement
development lengths and lays out and details reinforcement.
58.1 Span detailing

“Span Detailing” is the process of determining the peak reinforcement requirements in a region (normally
support or mid-span) and then extending the reinforcement based upon code or user defined rules.
Code based span detailing are rules prescribed by the applicable building code. The detailed reinforcement for
these spans can be non-symmetrical depending upon whether or not the span is continuous. The Code span
detailing option uses the applicable code rules for continuous and end spans (as well as cantilevers), where
applicable. RAM Concept's Code span detailing generally implements some, but not all, of the specified detailing
rules for a code. Refer to the code span detailing sections for further information (Sections 53.1.3, 53.1.4, 53.1.6
and 53.1.7).
User defined span detailing rules are controlled via the following screen accessed via Criteria > Detailing Rules.
Figure 494: Span Detailing Parameters (Criteria > Detailing Rules)

Reinforcement Notes
Span detailing
A, B, and C represent different sets of reinforcement used to detail rebar in the support region. E, F, and G
represent different sets of reinforcement used to detail rebar in the span region. Each set of reinforcement has
an associated “fraction” which is the amount of the peak reinforcement quantity to assign to that set. The sum of
the three fractions should always be between 0 and 1. The R1, R2 values represent factors to be multiplied by
the span length to arrive at a set's desired bar lengths.
Span detailing in accordance with user rules is always symmetrical in a span (but not in a cantilever). The “R1”
value is applied to the cantilever such that the cantilever is assumed to be that portion of a full span up to the
point of contraflexure, assumed to be 20% of a continuous span's length (hence the factor of 5 applied to Lc).
Span Detailing is controlled via the span segment dialog. See Column Strip tab (on page 220).
Figure 495: Span segment dialog box

Reinforcement Notes
Span detailing
58.1.1 About Concept’s detailing calculations

Two sets of design results are calculated in RAM Concept - With span detailing and Without span detailing.
Without span detailing simply considers the results without extending any reinforcement for span detailing. This
is termed the raw reinforcement.
With Span Detailing considers the results considering the detailed reinforcement as a minimum requirement.
Some other modifications to the “span detailed” summary diagram are done. The developed requirements are
removed from inside the support regions (there is still the requirement that the reinforcement is developed at
the face of the support). Also, for cantilevers, the span detailed requirements are removed from the last cross
section to the end of the span. Also, in the summary reinforcement, at the end of each pass an assumed amount
of developed reinforcement is calculated from the AsRaw requirements and the length available for
development, and applied as a minimum AsDev requirement in each cross section.
58.1.2 Span detailing assumptions

The following general assumptions are made when performing span detailing:
• The peak reinforcement in each region is determined by taking the maximum reinforcement demand in every
cross section over the following regions:
• Support - from support to 0.15L into the span
• Span - from 0.35L to 0.65L
• For a cantilever, the entire span is considered to be in the support region, and none of the span is considered
to be in the span region
• For a span with no supports defined, the entire span is considered to be in the span region, and none of the
span is considered to be in the support region
• Bar length calculations either consider the span length to center of support, or the clear span length
depending upon the code rules (see specific code sections for more details: sections 53.1.3, 53.1.4, 53.1.6 and
53.1.7).
• Bar length calculations consider the support width as necessary (see specific code section for more details)
• At the supports, the lengths of the adjacent span's bar sets are considered in order to keep the detailed bars
centered on the supports as much as possible. If an adjacent span has different fractions than the one being
detailed, the bar length for this span is determined by selecting the longer of the following length fractions:
• the span length and length fraction corresponding to this bar set
• the span length and length fraction of any adjacent span bar set whose fraction overlaps this bar set's
fraction
The span detailing is performed in pass 0 before the main design steps begin. The following outlines the pass 0
process:
1. Any user defined reinforcement is removed from the cross sections in the span.
2. A normal pass 1 is designed on the span (with the user defined reinforcement removed).
3. From the resulting design, the peak reinforcement in each region (support and span) is detailed according to
the user specified or code span detailing rules.
4. The user defined reinforcement is subtracted from the step 3 requirements, which results in the final pass 0
“span detailed” requirements. The resulting pass 0 design can be approximate if the subtracted user defined

Reinforcement Notes
Span detailing
reinforcement does not have the same properties as the program designed reinforcement at that location.
The final designed reinforcement for each cross section, which will be determined in future passes, will
always be accurate.
The pass 0 summarized span detailed design requirements are used as the starting point for the pass 2 span
detailed design.
58.1.3 ACI 318-99, 318-02, 318-05, 318-08, 318-11 Code Span Detailing Rules
RC Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 12.12.3 is implemented in support regions. For this provision, the inflection
point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span from the face of support. ACI 12.11.1 is implemented in span
regions.
RC Two-Way Slabs Figure 13.3.8 (without drop panels) is implemented in support and span regions.
PT Beams, One-Way Slabs, and Two-Way Slabs Rule 18.9.4.2 is implemented in support regions. Rule 18.9.4.1
is implemented in span regions.
58.1.4 AS 3600 - 2001 Code Span Detailing Rules

RC and PT Beams Rule 8.1.8.6 (a) and (b) is implemented in support and span regions.
RC and PT One-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.2 is implemented in support and span regions.
RC and PT Two-Way Slabs Figure 9.1.3.4 is implemented in support and span regions.



Reinforcement Notes
Development lengths / anchorage
58.1.7 BS 8110 - 1997 Code Span Detailing Rules

RC Beams and Slabs, PT Beams and One-Way Slabs Figures 3.24 and 3.25 are implemented in support and
span regions.
PT Two-Way Slabs TR-43 rule 6.10.6 is implemented in support and span regions.
58.1.8 CSA A23.3-04 Code Span Detailing Rules

RC Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 12.12.2 is implemented in support regions. For this provision, the inflection
point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span from the face of support. Rule 12.11.1 is implemented in span
regions.
RC Two-Way Slabs Figure 13.1 (without drop panels) is implemented in support and span regions.
PT Beams, One-Way Slabs, and Two-Way Slabs Rule 18.9.4 is implemented in support regions. Rule 18.9.3 is
implemented in span regions.
58.1.9 IS 456 - 2000 Code Span Detailing Rules

RC and PT Beams and One-Way Slabs Rule 26.2.3.4 is implemented in support regions. For this provision, the
inflection point is assumed to be 30% of the clear span from the face of support. Rule 26.2.3.3 is implemented in
span regions.
RC and PT Two-Way Slabs Figure 16 (without drop panel) is implemented in support and span regions.
58.1.10 EC2 Code Span Detailing Rules

RC Beams and Slabs, PT Beams and One-Way Slabs Figures 8 and 10 from Chapter 10 of The Concrete Centre
publication “How to Design Concrete Structures using Eurocode 2” are implemented in support and span
regions.
PT Two-Way Slabs TR-43 rule 5.8.8 is implemented in support and span regions.
58.2 Development lengths / anchorage

Note: The term development length is used in this chapter. In some countries, the term anchorage is used rather
than development length.
This section presents an overview of the development length calculations performed in RAM Concept.

Reinforcement Notes
Development length calculations in RAM Concept can be treated as per Code Rules, or development lengths can
be specified by the user for a particular reinforcing bar as a multiple of the bar diameter.
The general implementation used for calculating development lengths is:
• The clear spacing of the bars will be detailed to be greater than twice the minimum cover. This is the
responsibility of the user, and is not checked by RAM Concept.
• Each Code has a desired extension length beyond the theoretical cutoff point of the reinforcement.
• The desired extension length for ACI 318, BS 8110, and IS 456 is the maximum of d (effective depth) or 12
times the diameter of the bar. This is required primarily because diagonal tension cracks in a flexural
member without transverse shear reinforcement may shift the location of the calculated tensile stress in a
bar approximately d (effective depth) towards a point of zero moment. Refer to ACI 318 12.10.3, BS 8110
3.12.9.1, and IS 456 26.2.3.1.
• For AS 3600-2001 and AS 3600-2009, the desired extension length, D, is used to satisfy provision 8.1.8.1
(2001) or 8.1.10.1 (2009). While this implementation is not in strict compliance with the Code provisions
near the ends of a member, it meets the design intent away from the ends. For AS 3600-2018, no additional
extension length is provided. In this standard this effect is handled more directly by modifying the strength
design forces on the cross section to account for the level of shear/torsion.
• For EC2, the desired extension length is 1.125 d (effective depth). This is equivalent to EC2-04 equation 9.2
assuming cot θ = 2.5 and z = 0.9d. This is slightly conservative for members without shear reinforcement.
• For CSA A23.3-04, no additional extension length is provided. In this standard this effect is handled more
directly by modifying the strength design forces on the cross section to account for the level of shear/torsion.
• For a user-defined bar, the effective development for any point along the bar is calculated in accordance with
the following diagram. This approach is not used for AS 3600 or EC2 - see AS 3600-2001 and AS 3600-2009
Development Lengths (on page 839) and EC2 Development Lengths (on page 844), respectively, for more
details.
• The end of any user-defined straight bar that is close to a slab edge such that it could not be extended will
use a desired extension length of zero.
• The end of any user-defined bar that has a hook or anchor (regardless of proximity to slab edge) will use a
desired extension length of zero.
• For any length less than a code specified minimum development length (e.g. ACI 318-14 25.4.10.1), the
effective development is zero.
• For any length greater than or equal to the maximum of the desired additional extension length and code
minimum development length, but less than the full development length, the effective percentage
development is (provided length)/(full development length) x 100%. This is accomplished by considering
a fraction of each bar developed.
• For any length greater than the full development length, the effective development is 100%.
Note: The following figure does not apply to AS3600 or EC2 - see the figure in the corresponding sections.
ld
100% Maximum of extension
length and code minimum
development length
0%
bar end
Figure 496: Effective development at any point along a bar.

Reinforcement Notes
• When laying out program-designed bars, RAM Concept uses the first option in the following list that fits in
the slab slab (except AS3600 or EC2):
• Straight bar end with full development length and full extension length.
• Straight bar end with full development length and partial (or no) extension length.
• 90 degree hook bar end with 90 degree hook development length
• 180 degree hook bar end with 180 degree hook development length
• Anchored bar end with no development length
• If the end of a bar is closer to a slab edge than the specified end cover, the bar will automatically be labeled
“anchored” in RAM Concept and considered to be fully developed.
• Development lengths of bars in compression are not considered. Tension development lengths are used in all
locations where development of reinforcement is required, regardless of the actual stresses on the
reinforcing bar.
58.2.1 ACI 318-99, 318-02, 318-05, 318-08, 318-11 Development Lengths

Basic straight tension development length is calculated using equation 12-1. The following factors are used in
this equation:
Ψt = reinforcement location factor
• “concrete below” is taken as the depth from the rebar center to the bottom of the concrete section
• 1.3 for concrete below ≥ 12 inches
• 1.0 for concrete below < 12 inches
Ψe = coating factor
• 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bar) less than 3db (spacing is not calculated)
• 1.2 for all other epoxy coated bars
• 1.0 for uncoated bars
Note: the product ΨtΨe is never taken as greater than 1.7.
Ψs = reinforcement size factor

• 0.8 for #6 and smaller bars
• 1.0 for #7 and larger bars
λ = lightweight aggregate concrete factor
• 0.75 for lightweight concrete
• 1.0 for normal-weight concrete
c = cover dimension, vertical distance from the center of the bar to the nearest concrete surface (spacing is not
considered)
The term (c + Ktr)/db is never taken greater than 2.5
Ktr is conservatively assumed to be zero
For development of standard hooks, basic tension development length is calculated in accordance with the
following equation (12.5.2):

Reinforcement Notes
0.02 ⋅ ψe ⋅ f y
ldh =
´
λ ⋅ fc
The following factors are used to modify this basic length:

• lightweight aggregate concrete factor, λ, as described above
• the coating factor, Ψe, is taken as 1.2 for epoxy-coated reinforcement
In accordance with ACI 318 12.10.3, the extension length used for this Code is the maximum of 12db or the
effective depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to
the farthest concrete surface.
The minimum development length is 12 in for straight bars (12.2.1) and 8db or 6 in for hooks (12.5.1).
58.2.2 ACI 318-14 Development Lengths

Basic straight tension development length is calculated using equation 25.4.2.3. The following factors are used in
this equation:
Basic straight tension development length is calculated using equation 12-1. The following factors are used in
this equation:
Ψt = reinforcement location factor
• “concrete below” is taken as the depth from the rebar center to the bottom of the concrete section
• 1.3 for concrete below ≥ 12 inches
• 1.0 for concrete below < 12 inches
Ψe = coating factor
Note: the product ΨtΨe is never taken as greater than 1.7.
Ψs = reinforcement size factor

• 0.8 for #6 and smaller bars
• 1.0 for #7 and larger bars
λ = lightweight aggregate concrete factor
• 0.75 for lightweight concrete
• 1.0 for normal-weight concrete
c = cover dimension, vertical distance from the center of the bar to the nearest concrete surface (spacing is not
considered)
The term (c + Ktr)/db is never taken greater than 2.5
Ktr is conservatively assumed to be zero
For development of standard hooks, basic tension development length is calculated in accordance with the
following equation:

Reinforcement Notes
0.02 ⋅ ψe ⋅ f y
ldh =
´
λ ⋅ fc
The following factors are used to modify this basic length (25.4.3.2):
• lightweight aggregate concrete factor, λ, as described above
• the coating factor, Ψe, is taken as 1.2 for epoxy-coated reinforcement
In accordance with ACI 318-14 7.7.3.3 and 9.7.3.3, the extension length used for this Code is the maximum of
12db or effective depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from the center of the
reinforcing bar to the farthest concrete surface.
The minimum development length is 12 in for straight bars (25.4.2.1b) and 8db or 6 in for hooks (25.4.3.1b and
c).
58.2.3 AS 3600-2001 and AS 3600-2009 Development Lengths

For a user-defined bar, the effective development for any point along the bar is calculated in accordance with the
following figure.
Figure 497: Effective development at any point along a bar for the undisplaced moment diagram (for AS3600-2001
and 2009 only)
• The end of any user defined bar that is close to a slab edge such that it could not be extended and that has a
180 degree hook will use a desired extension length of zero. For other situations, the desired extension
length is D, the overall depth of the member
• For any length less than the desired extension length D, the effective development is zero.
• For any length greater than or equal to the additional extension length, but less than the full development
length, the effective percentage development is (provided length - desired extension length) / (full
development length) x 100%. This is accomplished by considering a fraction of each bar developed.
For a program designed bar, when the bar is detailed the bar will be extended the full development length plus
the desired extension length. If a bar is unable to be extended this full desired length, RAM Concept will attempt
to extend the bar the 90 degree hook development length plus the desired extension length, then the 180 degree
development length plus the desired extension length, then the 180 degree development length with no
extension length. If there is not enough extension space to satisfy any of these conditions, an “anchor” will be
placed at the end of the bar and it will be considered fully developed from that point.
ld D
100%
0%
bar end
AS 3600-2001
Basic straight tension development length is calculated using equation 13.1.2.1(a). The following factors are
used in this equation:

Reinforcement Notes
• k1 = reinforcement location factor

• “concrete below” is taken as the depth from the bar center to the bottom of the concrete section
• 1.25 for concrete below > 300 mm
• 1.0 for concrete below ≤ 300 mm
• k2 = 2.4 (conservatively)
• fsy = yield stress of bar
• Ab = cross sectional area of reinforcing bar
• 2a + db = twice the vertical distance from the nearest concrete surface to the center of the bar
In addition, the following factors (from ACI 318) are applied:
• coating factor
• lightweight aggregate concrete factor:
• 1.3 for concrete density ≤ 1900 kg/m3
• 1.0 for concrete density > 1900 kg/m3
For development of standard hooks, basic tension development length is calculated as half the straight tension
development length in accordance with Clause 13.1.2.4.
In accordance with 8.1.8.1, the extension length used for this Code is the overall depth of the section. This
extension is applied in addition to the required development length. RAM Concept applies the extension length
to satisfy the Code provision requiring the displacement of the bending moment envelopes by a distance D.
There are some noteworthy differences between RAM Concept's approach and the Code provision:
• In most circumstances, extending the bar by a distance D beyond the required development length will
satisfy the intent of the Code.
• Near the ends of members, where the displaced moment diagram would cause an increased design moment,
RAM Concept will design for the unmodified moment diagram, but will still ensure proper development is
satisfied.
AS 3600-2009
this equation:
• k2 = (132 - db)/100
• cd = assumed to be the vertical clear cover, implying that the minimum bar clear spacing is greater than or
equal to twice the clear cover
In addition, the following factors are applied:
• coating factor

Reinforcement Notes
• 1.5 for epoxy coated bars

In accordance with 8.1.10.1, the extension length used for this Code is the overall depth of the section. This
extension is applied in addition to the required development length.
58.2.4 AS 3600-2018 Development Lengths

For AS 3600-2018, no additional extension length is provided. In this standard this effect is handled more
directly by modifying the strength design forces on the cross section to account for the level of shear/torsion.
following figure.
ld
100% code minimum
development length
0%
bar end
Figure 498: Effective development at any point along a bar for the undisplaced moment diagram (for AS3600-2018
only)
• Clause 13.1.2.4 (a) is used to calculate the code minimum development length for both beams and slabs.
Clause 13.1.2.4 (b) is not considered.
• For any length less than a code specified minimum development length, the effective development is zero.
• For any length greater than or equal to the code minimum development length, but less than the full
development length, the effective percentage development is (provided length)/(full development length) x
100%. This is accomplished by considering a fraction of each bar developed.
• For any length greater than the full development length, the effective development is 100%.
For a program designed bar, when the bar is detailed the bar will be extended the full development length plus
the desired extension length. If a bar is unable to be extended this full desired length, RAM Concept will attempt
to extend the bar the 90 degree hook development length plus the desired extension length, then the 180 degree
development length plus the desired extension length, then the 180 degree development length with no
extension length. If there is not enough extension space to satisfy any of these conditions, an “anchor” will be
placed at the end of the bar and it will be considered fully developed from that point.
this equation:

Reinforcement Notes
• k2 = (132 - db)/100
• cd = assumed to be the vertical clear cover, implying that the minimum bar clear spacing is greater than or
equal to twice the clear cover
In addition, the following factors are applied:
• coating factor
• 1.5 for epoxy coated bars
58.2.5 BS 8110-1997 Development Lengths

Basic straight tension development length is calculated using combined equations 48 and 49.
The resulting equation is:
f y ⋅ db
ld =
γm ⋅ 4 ⋅ β ⋅ f cu
where
fy = yield stress of the bar
db = diameter of the bar
γm = material strength reduction factor
β = 0.5 (assumed Type 2 bars with minimum links in beams)
Note: If any bars other than Type 2 deformed bar are used or if minimum links in accordance with Table 3.7 are
not provided, the development lengths will need to be specified manually. Table 3.27 can assist with this.

• coating factor

Reinforcement Notes
For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is assumed to be 2db for bar diameters less than or equal to
18mm and 3.5db for bar diameters greater than 18mm.
For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 4 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed
12db in accordance with 3.12.8.23 (b)
For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 8 times the internal bend radius but not to exceed
24db in accordance with 3.12.8.23 (a)
In accordance with 3.12.9.1, the extension length used for this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective
depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to the
farthest concrete surface.
58.2.6 IS 456-2000 Development Lengths

Basic straight tension development length is calculated using clause 26.2.1:
fy ⋅φ
ld = 4 ⋅ τ bd
where
fy = yield stress of the bar
φ = diameter of the bar
τbd = design bond stress given in Table 26.2.1.1
For high strength deformed bars, the bond stress can be increased by 60 percent. This increase is assumed for
any bar with fy > 250 N/mm2.
• coating factor
• 1.3 for concrete density < 1900 kg/m3
For development of hooks, the internal bend radius is assumed to be 2db for bars with yield stress less than or
equal to 250 N/mm2 and 4db for bars with yield stress greater than 250 N/mm2.
For 90 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 8 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with
26.2.2.1 (1).
For 180 degree hooks, the effective anchorage of the hook is 16 times the diameter of the bar in accordance with
26.2.2.1 (2).
In accordance with 3.12.9.1, the extension length used for this Code is the maximum of 12 db or the effective
depth of the member, taken as the maximum vertical distance from the center of the reinforcing bar to the
farthest concrete surface.

Reinforcement Notes
58.2.7 EC2 Development Lengths

following figure.
ld 1.125 d
100%
0%
bar end
Figure 499: Effective development at any point along a bar for the undisplaced moment diagram (for EC2 only)
• The end of any user-defined bar that is close to a slab edge such that it could not be extended and that has a
180 degree hook will use a desired extension length of zero. For other situations, the desired extension
length is 1.125 d, the effective depth of the member
• For any length less than the desired extension length, the effective development is zero.
• For any length greater than or equal to the additional extension length, but less than the full development
length, the effective percentage development is (provided length - desired extension length) / (full
development length) x 100%. This is accomplished by considering a fraction of each bar developed.
• For a program designed bar, when the bar is detailed the bar will be extended the full development length
plus the desired extension length. If a bar is unable to be extended this full desired length, Concept will
attempt to extend the bar the 90 degree hook development length plus the desired extension length, then the
180 degree development length plus the desired extension length, then the 180 degree development length
with no extension length. If there is not enough extension space to satisfy any of these conditions, an “anchor”
will be placed at the end of the bar and it will be considered fully developed from that point.
Basic anchorage length is calculated using clause 8.4.3:
σsd ⋅ φ
lb,rqd = 4 ⋅ f bd
where
σsd = f
yk
design yield stress of the bar = γ
m
φ = diameter of the bar
fbd = ultimate bond stress given by equation 8.2
The design anchorage length is calculated in accordance with 8.4.4:
lbd = α1 α2 α3 α4 α5 1b,rqd ≥ 1 b,min
where
α1 = bar shape factor from Table 8.1
α2 = concrete factor from Table 8.1
α3 = 1.0 (transverse reinforcement not considered)
α4 = 1.0 (transverse reinforcement not considered)
α5 = 1.0 (transverse pressure not considered)

Reinforcement Notes
lb,min ≥ max {0.31b,rqd, 10φ, 100mm}

For beams, the minimum cover cd is assumed to be 25 mm. As such, the minimum clear spacing between bars
should be detailed as 50 mm.
For slabs, the minimum cover cd for straight bars is calculated as the minimum vertical clear cover to the nearest
concrete surface. For bent bars the cover cd is calculated as 5 times the bar diameter. The minimum clear
spacing between bent bars should thus be detailed as 10 times the bar diameter.
Anchorage length for bent bars is determined using Figure 8.1(a) and using the minimum bend diameters from
Table 8.1N(a)
A concrete density factor calculated in accordance with equation 11.1 is applied to the calculation of fbd in
equation 8.2.
In addition, the following factor (from ACI 318) are applied:
• coating factor
58.2.8 CSA A23.3-04 Development Lengths

Basic straight tension development length is calculated using equation 12-1.
where
k1 = reinforcement location factor
• “concrete below” is taken as the depth from the rebar center to the
bottom of the concrete section
k2 = coating factor
• 1.5 for epoxy coated bars with cover (to center of bars) less than 3db
(spacing is not calculated)
Note: The product of k1k2 is never taken as greater than 1.7.

k3 = concrete density factor
• 1.3 for concrete density ≤ 1,850 kg/m3
• 1.0 for concrete density > 2,150 kg/m3
k4 = bar size factor
• 0.8 for 20M and smaller bars
• 1.0 for 2.5M and larger bars
dcs = cover dimension, vertical distance from the center o the bar to the nearest
concrete surface (spacing is not considered)

Reinforcement Notes
How RAM Concept lays out longitudinal program reinforcement
The term (dcs + Ktr) is never taken greater than 2.5db.

Ktr is conservatively taken to be zero.
For development of standard hooks, basic tension development length is calculated in accordance with clause
12.5.2.
The following factors are used to modify this basic length:
• Bar yield strength factor = fy/400 where fy is in MPA (12.5.3a)
• Low-density concrete factor (12.5.3e):
• 1.0 for concrete density > 1,850 kg/m3
• Epoxy-coated reinforcement factor = 1.2 (12.5.3f)
The following factors/provisions are not considered:
• Concrete cover (12.5.3b) and ties or stirrups (12.5.3c)
58.3 How RAM Concept lays out longitudinal program reinforcement

Note: This section describes the method RAM Concept used for the layout of longitudinal program
reinforcement. Neither transverse reinforcement nor SSR are considered here.
RAM Concept considers all of the spans' and all of the design sections' designs when laying out program
reinforcement. RAM Concept's layout algorithm uses 5 steps as follows:
Step 1 Divide reinforcement requirements into groups.
RAM Concept divides all the span and section reinforcement requirements into similar groups by considering
the following characteristics:
• Span Direction - latitude or longitude
• Slab Face - top or bottom
• Reinforcement Elevation - the absolute elevation of the reinforcement
• Reinforcement Orientation - the plan view orientation of the reinforcement (always perpendicular to the
cross sections)
Requirements with all similar characteristics are grouped together for further processing.
Step 2 Find regions of overlapping and nearby requirement
For each requirement group, RAM Concept then finds requirements in a region that may be able to be satisfied
by the same reinforcement callout.
Step 3 Create preliminary callouts for each region
For each region's requirements, RAM Concept creates an optimal set of reinforcement callouts considering the
cost factors specified in the General tab of the Calc Options dialog. These preliminary callouts do not consider
development lengths.
Step 4 Consider development lengths

Reinforcement Notes
How RAM Concept details longitudinal user and program reinforcement
For each preliminary callout, RAM Concept investigates all of the related cross sections and determines
(considering the area of developed reinforcement and the total area of reinforcement required at each cross
section) the necessary extension of the bar beyond the related cross sections.
If the required bar extension cannot be provided (due to a slab edge or bar end cover requirements), reduced
extensions using 90-degree or 180-degree hooks are investigated. If the hooks will not provide the adequate
development, “anchors” will be placed at the end of the bar.
Note: Any bar that is required to extend to within the end cover distance of a slab edge will be given an “anchor”
end condition.
Step 5 Convert to concentrated program reinforcement

As a final step, RAM Concept converts the bar callouts (including development lengths and bar end conditions)
into concentrated program reinforcement.
See also “Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters” in Chapter 28, “Calculating Results”.
58.4 How RAM Concept details longitudinal user and program

reinforcement
RAM Concept generates individual bars from concentrated and distributed user reinforcement. This facilitates
the consideration of the individual bars in its cross section and span design calculations.
Also, the generation of individual bars allows RAM Concept to display program or user reinforcement in
perspective drawings.
The bars are still tagged as “user” since they are generated directly from user reinforcement.
RAM Concept also generates individual bars from its concentrated design reinforcement. These program
individual bars are for display purposes only and are not used in calculations.
The concentrated and distributed reinforcement is detailed into individual bars in 5 steps as follows:
Step 1 Create a preliminary layout of bars
Using the shape of the reinforcement region (rectangle or parallelogram for concentrated, and polygon for
distributed), the reinforcement orientation and the spacing/quantity of bars, RAM Concept determines a
preliminary layout of parallel bar locations.
For Concentrated bars, the first and last bars from the edge are always inset by a half bar spacing distance.
Step 2 Determine the elevation of the bars
Each concentrated or distributed reinforcement callout has an elevation reference point. For Concentrated
reinforcement, the elevation reference point is the location where the (symbolic) bar and the extent arrow
intersect. For distributed reinforcement, the elevation reference point is shown as a circle in the center of the
(symbolic) bar.
The elevation of the surface and soffit of the slab are determined at the elevation reference point and this
information along with the reinforcement elevation reference (absolute, above surface, above soffit, top cover or
bottom cover) and elevation values determines the absolute elevation of the bars that the callout creates.
Step 3 Determine the slab shape at the bar elevation

Reinforcement Notes
How RAM Concept details longitudinal user and program reinforcement
For each bar elevation, RAM Concept determines the shape of the slab. This shape may be one contiguous shape
or it may be comprised of multiple separate shapes.
Step 4 Trim the preliminary layout of bars with the elevation slab shape
The preliminary layout of bars is trimmed by the slab shape determined in step 3. Additionally, the required end
cover (as defined in the General tab of the Calc Options dialog) may shorten a bar further. This trimming may
convert a single bar into multiple bars, or may eliminate a bar altogether.
Note that bars with “anchor” ends do not consider the required end cover. They are only trimmed by the slab
shape at the bar elevation.
Step 5 Convert the trimmed bar locations to individual bars
Lastly, RAM Concept converts the trimmed preliminary layout of bars into individual bars. This conversion sets
the individual bars generated from “user” reinforcement to be “user” bars and those generated by “program”
reinforcement to be “program” bars.
Figure 500: Stepped one-way slab with two reinforcement objects identical except for the respective location of the
elevation reference point
Figure 501: Reinforcement bars detailed by RAM Concept from the previous figure

Reinforcement Notes
How Concept treats transverse user and program reinforcement and individual transverse bars
58.5 How Concept treats transverse user and program reinforcement and
individual transverse bars
RAM Concept generates program transverse reinforcement from the results of its shear and torsion calculations.
This generated reinforcement is for display purposes only—it is not used in calculations. It can be changed to
user reinforcement in order to include it in the design/analysis calculations. At locations of complicated
geometry (such as multiple beams in a single span design, or curved beams), RAM Concept may not be able to
create an appropriate representation of the reinforcement required by the design calculations. The correct
design quantities can always be viewed in the Section Design plots of the Design Status Layer.
User transverse reinforcement is considered in the design and analysis of cross sections. The properties of the
user transverse reinforcement that intersect a shear core are considered to fully reinforce that section,
regardless of how far the reinforcement extends beyond the core. Because capacities are only calculated at each
cross section location, caution should be exercised to extend each user reinforcement region an appropriate
amount beyond the section (i.e., half the distance to next cross section).
User transverse reinforcement assumes the reinforcement is oriented and sized optimally to reinforce each
cross section. This assumption means that the assumed transverse reinforcement will lie in parallel planes to the
cross section planes. If a user transverse reinforcement region intersects multiple cross sections that are not
aligned, the resulting assumed transverse reinforcement will be aligned with each cross section at each
intersection location. The assumed size of user transverse reinforcement (which affects calculated shear and
torsion properties) is based upon the dimensions of the shear core and the location of the longitudinal program
bars (whether any were actually designed or not), along with the minimum diameter of any design or user
transverse bars in the cross section.
RAM Concept generates transverse individual bars from user and program transverse reinforcement. These
transverse individual bars are for display purposes only and are not used directly in the calculations. At
locations of complicated geometry, RAM Concept may not be able to create an appropriate representation of the
detailed reinforcement. However, even in complicated geometry the user transverse reinforcement properties at
each intersecting cross section are considered correctly.
Note: If a “closed” shape is used in conjunction with more than two legs, only two of the legs will be considered
able to resist torsion and the remaining legs will be available to resist shear only.
Note: Program transverse reinforcement required by design sections is not shown in on the Reinforcement
layer. This is another reason why design spans are preferable to cross sections.
58.6 Example 1: reinforcement results

The introduction of the reinforcement layer and reinforcement detailing makes RAM Concept much more
powerful and complicated.
The following example shows the effect, for a two span slab supported by walls, of:
• using the span detailer set to code in design strips, and

Reinforcement Notes
Example 1: reinforcement results
• different plot options

• using Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters in the General tab of the Calc Options tab
• two different rule sets: strength and code minimum
58.6.1 Strength (only) calculations

This section shows results where only the strength rule set is considered.
Design Status layer
The following figure shows the effect of code detailing on the reinforcement for the design status layer.
Figure 502: Design Status: Reinforcement Plan
Note that with code detailing:

• the top bars are longer
• some bottom bars are continuous
Note: The “no detailing” example is very similar to results obtained with version 2.1.
Reinforcement layer
The following figure shows the effect of code detailing on the reinforcement on the reinforcement layer.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 503: Reinforcement: Standard Plan
Note that:
• these program bars are rationalized such that the number of top bars is consistent either side of a support
• these program bars could be changed to User bars
• individual bars can be shown via the visible objects
• RAM Concept details the top bars at the right hand support with a 90 degree bend
Effect of Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters
The Reinforcement Layout and Detailing Parameters affect the reinforcement bar layout, the following figure
exhibits different reinforcement results from the previous figure when changes are made to one parameter (in
this case, the Bar Length Cost parameter is 3 rather than 1). See “Reinforcement layout and detailing parameters”
in Chapter 28, “Calculating Results”.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 504: Reinforcement: Standard Plan with the Bar Length Cost parameter set to 3.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing:

For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code has no effect.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 505: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [without span detailing]
Note: See Section 30.6 of Chapter 30, “Plotting Results” for more information about reinforcement plotting.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:

The span detailing plot uses “skyline” plotting.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 506: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [with span detailing]
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code produces more reinforcement.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span detailing:
This plot is exactly the same as “Bottom without span detailing” (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because this
example uses just the Strength Rule Set and all such reinforcement must be developed.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 507: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH Span Detailing
58.6.2 Code Minimum and Strength calculations

This section shows results where both the Code Minimum and Strength rule sets are considered.
Reinforcement layer
The following figure shows the reinforcement for minimum and strength.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 508: Reinforcement: Standard Plan
Note that the minimum designer has increased the bottom bars in the left hand span for the no detailing case.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom without span detailing:
For this plot, the design strips' span detailer setting of code has no effect.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 509: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITHOUT span detailing]
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom with span detailing:

The span detailing plot uses “skyline” plotting.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 510: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom [WITH span detailing]
Note that the design strips' span detailer setting of code produces more reinforcement.
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) without span detailing:
This plot is different from “Bottom without span detailing” (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the
Minimum reinforcement is not required to be developed.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 511: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITHOUT span detailing
Design Status layer with plot: Bottom (Developed) with span detailing:
This plot is different from “Bottom with span detailing” (that is, the Raw reinforcement) because the Minimum
reinforcement at the end supports is not developed, and so the plotted value is zero.
Additionally, portions of the raw reinforcement are now assumed to be developed because the span detailing
process for the design status layer considers that continuous bars, whether they are required to be developed or
not, become at least partially developed.

Reinforcement Notes
Figure 512: Plot on Design Status layer: Bottom (Developed) WITH span detailing

ACI 318-99 Design
59
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of ACI 318-99.
The six sections outline the following:
• Default loadings
• Default load combinations
• Live load factors
• Material behaviors
• How code rules are selected for cross section design
• Implementation of code rules
59.1 ACI 318-99 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new ACI
318-99 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly
noteworthy are discussed here.
59.1.1 Temporary Construction (At Stressing) Loading

This loading type describes a temporary loading that is present during construction when the contractor
stresses the tendons. As it is a temporary load, it is generally only included in the Initial Service Load
Combination.
If a permanent load is present at stressing, you should define the load on the Temporary Construction (At
Stressing) loading layer as well as the appropriate permanent loading layer. Alternatively, you can include a
permanent loading present at stressing with appropriate use of load factors.
59.2 ACI 318-99 default load combinations

This section provides information on the default load combinations (technically, loading combinations) that
RAM Concept creates when you start a new ACI 318-99 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are
given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The load
combinations are from ACI 318-99, unless noted otherwise.

ACI 318-99 Design
ACI 318-99 default load combinations
RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations.
Note: Some load combinations in mat (raft) files are of the Lateral Group type and use a “Zero-Tension” analysis.
Since a load combination using a “Zero-Tension” analysis does not use Alternate Envelope Factors, then such
load combinations in mat files have been expanded into multiple load combinations. In some cases, the
assumption that all gravity loads act in the same direction have been used to keep the number of load
combinations to a minimum. See Specifying Load Combinations (on page 103) for further description.
59.2.1 All Dead LC

This load combination sums all of the dead loadings, with a load factor of 1.0, that act simultaneously in the
standard service condition. This load combination is for information only - it is not used by RAM Concept for
design purposes.
59.2.2 Initial Service LC

This load combination is intended for checking requirements upon application of prestress. The load factors
used are:
Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes a 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not
occurred at this stage)
Note: Although elastic shortening produces a short-term loss, in RAM Concept elastic shortening losses are
considered part of the long term loss lump sum.
Self-Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)

Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 1.0 (std & alt)
59.2.3 Service LC: D + L + Lr

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. This load combination is taken from
IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
59.2.4 Service LC: D + L + S

IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1. The load factors used are:

ACI 318-99 Design

Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
Snow Loading: 1.0 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
59.2.5 Sustained Service LC

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. For the purpose of this load
combination, 100% of the Live (Storage) Loading and 50% of all other live loading is assumed to be permanent
loading. The load factors used are:
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std & alt)
59.2.6 DL + 0.25LL LC
This load combination is intended for checking the requirements of UBC section 1918.9.2.2. This load
combination is used by the DL + 0.25LL Design Rule Set. The load factors used are:
59.2.7 Factored LC: 1.4D + 1.7L + 1.7S

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state. The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Dead Loading: 1.4 (std) and 0.9 (alt)
Live Loading: 1.7 (std) and 0.0 (alt)

ACI 318-99 Design
Snow Loading: 1.7 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
59.2.8 Service Wind LC: D + L + Lr + W

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads. It
is currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1.
The load factors used are:
Live Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
Service Wind Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
59.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + L + S + W

is currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1.
59.2.10 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + W

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind loads. It is
currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1.

ACI 318-99 Design
59.2.11 Service Seismic LC: D + L + Lr + 0.7E

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic and live loads.
It is currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section
1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
Ultimate Seismic Loading: 0.7 (std & alt)
59.2.12 Service Seismic LC: D + L + S + 0.7E

It is currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section
1605.3.1. The load factors used are:
Snow Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
59.2.13 Service Seismic LC: 0.6D + 0.7E

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied seismic loads. It is
currently only generated for mat foundations. This load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.3.1.

ACI 318-99 Design
ACI 318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors
59.2.14 Factored Wind LC: 1.05D + 1.28L + 1.28S + 1.6W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind and live loads. The load
factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.9 (alt)
Note: Since directionality factors were introduced in ASCE 7-98, the wind portion of the “Factored Wind LC:
1.05D + 1.28L + 1.28S + 1.6W” load combination has been increased to 1.6 to account for this effect. The need for
this change is described in detail in ACI-02 9.2.1(b) and commentary. If directionality factors are not applied to
the wind loads, the wind factors may be reduced in accordance with the original ACI 318-99 combinations.
59.2.15 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L + 0.7S + E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. This
load combination is taken from IBC 2000 section 1605.2.1. The load factors used are:
59.3 ACI 318-99 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors

It is recommended that, in order to get the appropriate factors, you draw:
• assembly loads (or live loads in excess of 100 psf) on a Live (Unreducible) layer

ACI 318-99 Design
ACI 318-99 Material Behaviors
59.4 ACI 318-99 Material Behaviors

This section explains how RAM Concept models the concrete, non-prestressed reinforcement and prestressed
reinforcement when using ACI 318-99.
59.4.1 Concrete Behavior

You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 8.5.1 with
the inclusion of wc or a specified value.
When you directly specify values, there must be two elastic modulus values:
Eci = value for initial service (transfer) cross section analyses

Ec = value for all other conditions
When the code equation is selected the following values are used:
Eci = wc1.533 f ci
Ec = wc1.533 f c
where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing
fc = 28 day cylinder strength
For calculations based on the gross section, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material with no
stress or strain limits.
See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves (on page 810) for a description of the stress-strain curves used in a detailed
cross section analysis.
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of 0.003. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
59.4.2 (Non-prestressed) Reinforcement Behavior

This material is described in Non-prestressed Reinforcement Stress-Strain Curves (on page 806) in “Section
Design Notes”.
59.4.3 Bonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior

This material is described in Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves (on page 806) and Relationship of
Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains (on page 807) in “Section Design Notes”.

ACI 318-99 Design
ACI 318-99 code rule selection
59.4.4 Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement Behavior

For service conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendon stresses are not affected by cross section
strains.
For DL + 0.25LL strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress.
For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept’s general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain
curves is detailed in “Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation” in Chapter 51,
“Section Design Notes”.
For ACI 318-99, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by equations 18-4 and 18-5. In the
calculation of ρp, RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section
centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at
each cross section).
59.5 ACI 318-99 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which ACI 318-99 code rules to apply based on the design
strip segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under
consideration.
59.5.1 Code Minimum Reinforcement

• The structural system (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (beam, one-
way slab, two-way slab).
• The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
• The placement of the reinforcement is based on the “min. reinforcement location” selection for the design
strip segment or design section:
• Elevated Slab – Reinforcement is at top near supports and bottom near midspan.
• Mat Foundation – Reinforcement is at bottom near supports and top near midspan.
• Tension Face – Reinforcement location is determined by the design moment envelope for the rule set
(reinforcement may be required on both faces).
• Top – Reinforcement is always located at the top of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
• Bottom – Reinforcement is always located at the bottom of slab (Engineer discretion advised)
• None – No reinforcement is provided (Engineer discretion advised)
• Section 18.9.3.2 is not applied (here), as that is a service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum
reinforcement requirement (see Service (on page 870)).
• Section 18.8.3 is not applied to two-way slabs with bonded post-tensioning, even though the code technically
requires it.
• Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table

ACI 318-99 Design
Table 20: Minimum reinforcement rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.3, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.3, 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab 7.12 18.9.3.3 (at supports only)
59.5.2 User Minimum Reinforcement

RAM Concept allows you to specify minimum reinforcement ratios and precompression limits for each span
segment or design section.
The User Minimum Reinforcement rule set will not design reinforcement unless this rule set is used by at least
one load combination.
About User-Specified Minimum Reinforcement Ratios

Each span segment has four user-specified reinforcement ratio values:
• Column Strip Top Reinforcement
• Column Strip Bottom Reinforcement
• Middle Strip Top Reinforcement
• Middle Strip Bottom Reinforcement
A user-specified top reinforcement and bottom reinforcement ratio can also be defined for design sections.
RAM Concept’s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to design reinforcement at each cross
section. These values are not included in the reinforcement calculated for other rule sets. For example, the
bending strength reinforcement reported in the Strength Rule Set is not in addition to the reinforcement in the
User Minimum Reinforcement rule set.
User Minimum Reinforcement Calculations

RAM Concept’s User Minimum Reinforcement calculations are based on the gross area of the cross section (after
trimming) and the user-specified ratios. For example:
columnStripTopAs = (cross section Ac)(column strip top reinforcement ratio)
About Precompression Limits

Each span segment has four user-specified reinforcement ratio values
• Column Strip Max. Precompression
• Column Strip Min. Precompression
• Middle Strip Max. Precompression
• Middle Strip Min. Precompression
A user-specified max and min precompression can also be defined for design sections.

ACI 318-99 Design
RAM Concept’s User Minimum Reinforcement rule set uses these values to check if the resulting precompression
from post-tensioning is within the specified range. These limits are only checked if the Consider as Post-
Tensioned box is checked in the span segment properties.
Precompression Calculations
RAM Concept’s precompression calculation are based on the following:
• Gross area of the cross section (after trimming)
• Effective tendon force multiplied by the perpendicular vector component of the tendon area intersecting the
section
The effective tendon force is calculated using the Precompression Calc option defined in the General tab of the
section properties. See General tab (on page 214) for an explanation of the available options.
A design failure is produced if the calculated precompression limit is outside the user-specified max and min
precompression range.
Old Files
Pre-RAM Concept 2.0 files require rebuilding of the load combinations and rule sets to have the User Minimum
Reinforcement rule set added. See Rebuilding load combinations (on page 105) for further information.
59.5.3 Initial Service

• Tendons are considered as an external load (and the balance loading is assumed to be included in the load
factors).
• The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (reinforcement
may be required on both faces).
Table 21: Initial service rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b
59.5.4 Service
factors).

ACI 318-99 Design
• Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Table 22: Service rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.6.4 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.2b, 18.4.2c, 18.9.3.2
59.5.5 Sustained Service

factors).
• The stress levels in the structure are determined by the moment envelope for the rule set (failure could occur
on both faces).
Table 23: Sustained service rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.2a
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.2a
59.5.6 Strength
• Tendons are considered as an internal section force (and the hyperstatic loading is assumed to be included in
the load factors).
on both faces).
• See “Torsion Considerations” for how torsion is implemented.

ACI 318-99 Design
Table 24: Strength rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Note: * - 11.6 is applied only if “beam” torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
59.5.7 Ductility
• The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place
before ductility reinforcement is added.
• The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
could be required for both positive and negative moments).
Table 25: Ductility rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.3 18.8.1
One-Way Slab 10.3.3 18.8.1
Two-Way Slab 10.3.3 18.8.1
59.5.8 UBC DL + 0.25 LL

• UBC section 1918.9.2.2 is implemented.
on both faces).
• Unbonded tendons are assumed to have no stress.
• A strength reduction factor (φ) of 1.0 is used in the ACI calculations.

ACI 318-99 Design
ACI 318-99 code implementation
Table 26: UBC DL + 0.25LL rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 11.4, 18.7 (φ=1)
One-Way Slab (none) 11.4, 18.7 (φ=1)
Two-Way Slab (none) (none)
59.6 ACI 318-99 code implementation
59.6.1 Section 7.12 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement

• 7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented
• The gross area of concrete after taking into account the “ignore top depth” and the “ignore bottom depth” is
used to determine the reinforcement specified in 7.12.2.1.
• For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of 7.12.2.1(a) or 7.12.2.1(c) will be
satisfied for whichever provides the least amount of reinforcement. In the calculation of 7.12.2.1(c) only
reinforcement with fy = 60,000 psi will be used in the calculation.
• Ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014 in accordance with 7.12.2.1
• The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in
7.12.2.2. The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be
rounded up to the next whole number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward
satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their
vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing
calculations.
• For the “elevated slab” and “mat foundation” minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of
0.2113 is assumed.
• Post-tensioning is ignored.
59.6.2 Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)

• Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area.
• Strain compatibility design is used
• RAM Concept’s design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create
an over-reinforced section. See “Ductility” for more information on applying ductility requirements.
• Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored

ACI 318-99 Design
• Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section
of design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is
designed to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
• At “T”, “L” and “Z” beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at
different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam,
these forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends
only part way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for
moment equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip
segment properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
• User Es values are used
• For sections with multiple values of f’c, the f’c of each concrete block is used appropriately.
• For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may
exceed the amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains
greater than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM
Concept selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section.
59.6.3 Section 10.3.3 Ductility (Non prestressed)

• The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see Section 10.2 Factored Moment
Resistance (Non prestressed) (on page 873) for details).
• The neutral axis depth is limited to:
(0.75) × (0.003 /(0.003 + εy)) × d
where
εy = maximum reinforcement yield strain of all reinforcement in the cross
section in tension
d = maximum depth of all tensile reinforcement in section (excluding PT)
• Due to very large bar covers or other unusual conditions, the “compression” bar will be considered when
determining “d” if the “compression” bar is in tension.
• For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code criterion, see “Unified Design
Recommendations for Reinforced....” by Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2,
April-March 1992
59.6.4 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non

Prestressed)
• Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented
• Equation 10-3 is calculated using the maximum fc’, minimum fy, and maximum d (of all bars on the
appropriate face).
• bw is taken the core width (see “Concrete “Core” Determination”). If the core width is zero (there is no core),
then bw is taken as the width of the section.
• The bending strength of the section is designed to be at least 1.2 Mcr. This will only control in odd
circumstances such as where the specified cover is extremely large.
• Post-tensioning is ignored.

ACI 318-99 Design

Prestressed)
• Equation 10-5 and the 12(36/fs) criteria are implemented
• A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement.
• Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars that meets the criteria. Fractions of bars can be used
(e.g., 4.3 bars).
• The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face.
For beams with stems in tension, this will typically be the sum of the stem widths.
• The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not added to make
the width start and end with a bar.
• Post-tensioning is ignored (except as it naturally affects the cracked section calculations).
• RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than “necessary” in two circumstances:
• The reinforcement is necessary for equilibrium in the cracked section analysis.
• Compression reinforcement added later in the design process lowers the reinforcement demands.
59.6.6 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Non Prestressed)

• See “Concrete “Core” Determination”.
• For sections with multiple values of f’c, the minimum f’c is used
• Equations 11-5, 11-13, 11-15 are implemented.
• Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not).
• Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
• Lightweight concrete is not considered.
• A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this
requirement is waived per 11.5.5.1a.
• Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered
• If “beam” torsion design is selected, see “Section 11.6 Beam Torsion” for further requirements.
59.6.7 Section 11.4 Shear Resistance of Beams (Prestressed)

• See “Concrete “Core” Determination”.
• For sections with multiple values of f’c, the minimum f’c is used
• If stirrups are provided, the depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8 h or the actual tension
reinforcing depth; otherwise the depth is considered to be the tension reinforcement depth.
• Lightweight concrete is not considered.
• Equation 11-9 is used if the 40% criterion of section 11.4.1 is met; otherwise equation 11-5 is used. When
equation 11-5 is used, both the tension mild steel and the PT in the tension zone is used to determine ρw.
• Equations 11-13 and 11-15 are implemented.

ACI 318-99 Design
• Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not).

• Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
• A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this
• Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered
• If “beam” torsion design is selected, see “Section 11.6 Beam Torsion” for further requirements.
• No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.
59.6.8 Section 11.6 Beam Torsion

• Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design.
• If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib:
• rib width = total core width / num ribs
• with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement
scaled back up by the number of ribs (* num ribs).
• To get a more detailed and exact calculation, use a separate design section or design strip for each rib.
• The side cover is assumed to be equal to the lesser of the top cover and the bottom cover.
• Acp and pcp only consider the cross section “core”.
• Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6.
• θ in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45°.
• The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp.
• The minimum f’c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple
concrete mixes.
• Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
• Longitudinal Reinforcement:
• By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as
follows:
A1fy1 = Tn(ph/2A0)cotθ
• By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as
follows:
A1 f y1 = 5 f ′
c Acp ( )
− 25psi ph bw
• Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.
• Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both
designs:
• Transverse Reinforcement:
• Transverse reinforcement is designed in Pass 2.
• Stirrups/links are assumed to be closed hoops. RAM Concept will report the reinforcement in terms of the
number of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing
reported by RAM Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2.
• Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very
high torsions, this can make shear capacity negative.
• The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.

ACI 318-99 Design
• The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6

• Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
• Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when
determining effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.
59.6.9 Chapter 13 (Two-way slab systems)

• With the exception of span detailing, this chapter is not used for reinforcement design calculations,
specifically:
Section 13.5.3.2 (Unbalanced moment transfer)
• This section is not considered.
59.6.10 Section 18.4.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit

• 0.6 f’ci is the limiting value.
• For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the
limiting stress.
• For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are
reported.
59.6.11 Section 18.4.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit

• 3 f ′ is the limiting value.
ci
limiting stress.
reported.
• The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if
necessary, so no section will fail this criterion.
• Bonded tendons that are at an angle (vertical or horizontal) to the cross section will only have their
component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
• Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.
• User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component
perpendicular to the cross section considered.

ACI 318-99 Design
59.6.12 Section 18.4.2a Sustained Compressive Stress Limit

• 0.45 f’c is the limiting value.
• Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used.
limiting stress.
reported.
59.6.13 Section 18.4.2b Service Compressive Stress Limit

• 0.60 f’c is the limiting value.
limiting stress.
reported.
59.6.14 Section 18.4.2c Service Tensile Stress Limit

• 6 f ′ is the limiting value.
c
limiting stress.
reported.
59.6.15 Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed)

• See “Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)”. Note that if axial forces are included in
the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into
supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
• Post-tensioning Tendons are included.
• Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description “Relationship of
Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains”).
• If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of
the cross section strains and the tendon stresses are used.

ACI 318-99 Design
• Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description “Unbonded
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation”).
• If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution
may not be possible.
59.6.16 Section 18.8.1 Ductility (Prestressed)

• The strain distribution used in section 18.7 calculations is used (see “Section 18.7 Design Flexural Resistance
(Prestressed)” for details).
• The neutral axis depth is limited to:
(0.36/0.85) × d
where
d = depth of tensile reinforcement centroid
• To be rational (instead of literally following the code), “d” is taken as the depth of the total tension
reinforcement, not just the depth of the PT
• For details on how the neutral axis depth limit is related to the code criterion, see “Unified Design
Recommendations for Reinforced....” by Antoine Naaman in ACI Structural Journal, pp 200-210, Vol 89, no.2,
April-March 1992
59.6.17 Section 18.8.3 Cracking Moment

• For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this
criterion is ignored if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support.
• For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is
ignored if the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support. It is assumed
that these regions will contain the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack;
• This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it.
• The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the “Min.
Reinforcement Pattern” selected in the design strip segment or design section.
• See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations (on page 815) for a theoretical discussion of the cracking
moment.
• Modulus of rupture (f ) is 7.5 f ′ times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f’ for the cross
cr c c
section is used.
• Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be wc / 145 pcf ≤ 1.0. The maximum wc for the cross section is
used.
• The “twice that required” criterion is not checked.
59.6.18 Section 18.9.2 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way


ACI 318-99 Design
ignored if the section location is in one of the two regions between L/6 and L/3 from a support.
• For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this
criterion is always applied.
• See “Minimum Reinforcement” for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the
reinforcement will have the reinforcement added.
• This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be
applied to two-way slabs that do not have a uniform thickness. Under IBC 2000 and ACI 318-02 this criterion
need not be used for any two-way slabs.
• User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of
the centroid is counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded
post-tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section.
59.6.19 Section 18.9.3.2 Midspan Two Way Minimum Reinforcement

criterion is ignored if the section location is inside of L/3 of the support.
ignored if the section location closer than L/6 from a support.
• See “Minimum Reinforcement” above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the
• For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for two-way slabs of uniform thickness
(RAM Concept uses it for all slabs declared as “two-way”; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs
that do not have a uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is acceptable to use this criterion for
all two-way slabs.)
limiting stress.
calculated and reported.
• If 2 f ′ is exceeded the entire tensile load, N , is taken by bonded reinforcement.
c c
• User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is
counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded post-tensioning
that are not orthogonal to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of
(fpy-fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
• Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
• The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 f ′ , the minimum length requirements of
c
18.9.4.1 are not considered.

ACI 318-99 Design
59.6.20 Section 18.9.3.3 Support Two Way Minimum Reinforcement

• For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied at the face of support.
ignored if the section location further than L/6 from a support.
criterion is never applied.
• For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should only be used for two-way slabs of uniform thickness
(RAM Concept uses it for all slabs declared as “two-way”; section 18.9.2 should be used for two-way slabs
that do not have a uniform thickness. Under ACI 318-02 and IBC 2000 it is acceptable to use this criterion for
all two-way slabs.)
• Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length.
This will not always exactly match the code requirement
• The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked.
• The number of bars (“4 bars or wires”) is not checked.
• User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate
side of the centroid is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and
bonded post-tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section.
59.6.21 Punching Shear Design

Refer to Punching Shear Design Notes (on page 1188).

ACI 318-02 Design
60
This appendix details RAM Concepts implementation of ACI 318-02.


Combination.

combinations are from ACI 318-02 / IBC 2003, unless noted otherwise.

ACI 318-02 Design
The load and strength reduction factors changed significantly in the ACI 318-02 code. In general, the load factors
were reduced and are now in agreement with the strength design of other materials. The strength reduction
factors were generally reduced in order to provide similar design results as the previous code (ACI 318-99).
RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. The factor on
“L” in ACI 318-02 equations (9-3), (9-4), and (9-5) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live
(Unreducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading, and 1.0 for Live (Parking) Loading.
60.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:
Balance Loading: 1.13 (std & alt) (this includes an 13% increase for long-term losses, which have normally not

60.2.3 Service LC: D + L + Lr
This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:

ACI 318-02 Design

IBC 2003. The load factors used are:

60.2.6 Factored LC: 1.4D


ACI 318-02 Design
60.2.7 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr

Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Unreducible) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Storage) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Parking) Loading: 1.6 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) and 0.0 (alt)
60.2.8 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6Lr

60.2.9 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S

Live (Reducible) Loading: 1.6(std) and 0.0 (alt)

ACI 318-02 Design
60.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S

60.2.11 Service Wind LC: D + L + Lr + W

is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:


ACI 318-02 Design

currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:
60.2.14 Service Seismic LC: D + L + Lr + 0.7E

It is currently only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:
60.2.15 Service Seismic LC: D + L + S + 0.7E


ACI 318-02 Design

60.2.17 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + 1.6W

factors used are:
Live (Roof) Loading: 0.5 (std) & 0.0 (alt)
60.2.18 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5S + 1.6W

factors used are:

ACI 318-02 Design
ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors
60.2.19 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6Lr + 0.8W

factors used are:
60.2.20 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.6S + 0.8W

factors used are:
60.2.21 Factored Seismic LC: 1.2D + f1L+ f2S + E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. The
load factors used are:

ACI 318-02 Design
60.3 ACI318-02 / ASCE-7 / IBC 2003 live load factors




Eci = wc1.533 f ci
Ec = wc1.533 f c
where
strain.

Design Notes”.

ACI 318-02 Design


strains.
calculation of ρp, RAM Concept assumes that the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross
section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity
calculations at each cross section).

consideration.


ACI 318-02 Design
reinforcement requirement (see “Service”).
requires it.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2, 18.9.2





ACI 318-02 Design

section
Old Files
Related Links

factors).
Design System
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b

ACI 318-02 Design
Design System
60.5.4 Service
factors).
• The design strip segment or design section property “Environment” is used to determine the class of post-
tensioned members as follows:
• Protected: Class C
• Normal: Class T
• Corrosive: Class U
• Very Corrosive: Class U
Design System RC PT Class U PT Class T PT Class C
Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.3.3, 18.4.2b, (not applicable) (not applicable)

18.9.3.2

factors).
on both faces).

ACI 318-02 Design
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a
60.5.6 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
60.5.7 Ductility

ACI 318-02 Design
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)
One-Way Slab 10.3.5 (none)
Two-Way Slab 10.3.5 (none)

7.12.2.1 and 7.12.2.2 are implemented.
The gross area of concrete after taking into account the “ignore top depth” and the “ignore bottom depth” is used
to determine the reinforcement specified in 7.12.2.1.
For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of 7.12.2.1(a) or 7.12.2.1(c) will be
Ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014 in accordance with 7.12.2.1
The specified bar size is used to determine the required reinforcement for satisfying the maximum spacing in
7.12.2.2. The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded
up to the next whole number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying
the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector
components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4.
In “critical” span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 13.3.2. For
cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), the “critical” span
locations are those within L/3 of the support. For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports
in the design strip segment), the “critical” span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan location.
In other span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized.
For the “elevated slab” and “mat foundation” minimum reinforcement patterns, an inflection point ratio of
0.2113 is assumed.
Post-tensioning is ignored.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.12.3 is not implemented.

ACI 318-02 Design

There is a significant difference in the strength design of axial/flexural members according to the 318-02 Code.
Axial/flexural members are classified as “compression controlled” or “tension controlled” in accordance with
10.3.3 and 10.3.4 depending upon the tensile strain in the extreme tension reinforcement at the ultimate strain
conditions (when the concrete compressive strain reaches 0.003). When the tensile strain is sufficiently large as
to provide ample ductility, the section is defined as “tension controlled” and a strength reduction factor of 0.9 is
used. When the tensile strain is at or below the balanced strain condition, the member is defined as
“compression controlled” and a strength reduction factor of 0.65 is used. Between these tensile strain values a
linear transition between 0.65 and 0.9 is used.
RAM Concept uses the ratio of neutral axis depth to the depth of the resultant tensile force (rather than the
depth of the extreme tension steel) to calculate the strength reduction factor. For singly reinforced sections, the
results will be identical to using the depth of the extreme tension steel. For sections with multiple layers of
reinforcement (including post-tensioning), this implementation will provide a smoother transition and will be
conservative. In determining the compression-controlled strain limit, RAM Concept uses the maximum of 0.002
and fy / Es. The tension-controlled strain limit is 0.005.
Reinforcement areas are not deducted from the concrete area.
Strain compatibility design is used.
RAM Concept’s design may exceed the maximum amount of allowed reinforcement, and therefore may create an
over-reinforced section. See “Ductility” for more information on applying ductility requirements.
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section of
design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed
to provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
At “T”, “L” and “Z” beams, the beam stem and flanges may have significant tension and compression forces (at
different elevations) that are required for moment equilibrium. If a cross section crosses the entire beam, these
forces will largely cancel (while increasing the bending moment). However, if a cross section extends only part
way across a flanged beam, then the section may have significant axial forces that are required for moment
equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design strip segment
properties) is necessary to ensure a safe design.
User Es values are used
For sections with multiple values of f ’c, the f ’c of each concrete block is used appropriately.
For cross sections with very small moments, the amount of reinforcement calculated by RAM Concept may
exceed the amount necessary. This is because RAM Concept will not allow cross sections to have strains greater
than 20%, which would be necessary to create a smaller compression zone. The reinforcement RAM Concept
selects is that necessary for axial force equilibrium in the cross section.

ACI 318-02 Design

The strain distribution used in section 10.2 calculations is used (see the previous section, “Section 10.2 Factored
Moment Resistance (Non prestressed),” for details).
The maximum reinforcement yield strain of all tensile reinforcement in the cross section is limited to a minimum
of 0.004.
Application of this section is limited to cross sections with net axial load (compression) less than 0.10fc’Ag, in
accordance with section 10.3.5.

Prestressed)
Equation 10-3 and the 200 bwd/fy criteria are implemented.
Equation 10-3 is calculated using the maximum fc', minimum fy, and maximum d (of all bars on the appropriate
face).
bw is taken the core width (see “Concrete “Core” Determination”). If the core width is zero (there is no core),
The bending strength of the section is designed to be at least 1.2 Mcr. This will only control in odd circumstances
such as where the specified cover is extremely large.
A spacing limit of 3h is utilized in accordance with 10.5.4. For typically sized beams, this limit will not control the
amount of reinforcement.
The provisions of section 10.5.2 are not implemented.

Prestressed)
• Equation 10-4 and the 12(36/fs) criteria are implemented
(e.g., 4.3 bars).

ACI 318-02 Design

See Concrete “Core” Determination (on page 816).
For sections with multiple values of f ’c, the minimum f ’c is used.
The effective depth is determined by a cracked section analysis using the bending moment and axial force in
place at time of the shear being investigated. The effective depth is calculated as the distance from the
compression most face to the resultant tension force. For cross sections with no reinforcement in tension, a
“column style” effective depth is calculated as the distance from the compression most face to the maximum
depth of any reinforcement.
When the maximize effective depth option is used the effective depth is first calculated utilizing all
reinforcement in the cross section. A subsequent calculation is then carried out utilizing only the reinforcement
in the 1/4 depth of the cross section nearest the tension most face, and ignoring any post-tensioning. The
effective depth is taken as the maximum of the two calculations. A check is carried out for the latter calculation
that there is enough reinforcement to resist the tension chord of a shear truss considering only the flexural
moment and shear. If this check fails the results of the latter calculation are not used.
Equations 11-5, 11-13 (including 50×bws/fy), 11-15 are implemented.
Section 11.1.2 is implemented (but optional 11.1.2.1 is not).
Sections 11.5.2, 11.5.4.1, 11.5.4.3 and 11.5.6.9 are implemented.
Lightweight concrete is not considered.
A minimum reinforcement criterion of section 11.5.5 is implemented; if the member is a slab, then this
Axial tension and compression are considered in accordance with sections 11.3.2.2 and 11.3.2.3.
If “beam” torsion design is selected, see Section 11.6 Beam Torsion (on page 900) for further requirements.


ACI 318-02 Design
If stirrups are provided, the effective depth of the section is considered to be the larger of 0.8×h or the
calculated effective depth; otherwise the effective depth is considered to be the calculated effective depth.
Equation 11-9 is used to determine the shear capacity.
Equations 11-13 (including 50×bws/fy) and 11-15 are implemented.
Axial Compression (or Tension) is not considered
No check is made to ensure that the structure is post-tensioned.

Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design.
If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib:
• with ultimate forces scaled down by the number of ribs (/ num ribs) and capacity and reinforcement scaled
back up by the number of ribs (* num ribs).
The side cover is assumed to be equal to the greater of the top cover and the bottom cover.
Acp and pcp only consider the cross section “core”.
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.6.3.6.
θ in equations 11-21 and 11-22 is always taken as 45°.
The balance loading axial force and the entire cross section area are used to determine fcp.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 11.6.1(c).
The minimum f ’c of the cross section is used in the unusual situation where a cross section contains multiple
concrete mixes.
Torsion reinforcement is limited to 60 ksi per 11.6.3.4.
Longitudinal Reinforcement:
• By rearranging code equations 11-21 and 11-22, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:

ACI 318-02 Design
• By rearranging code equation 11-24, the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as follows:
A1 f y1 = 5 f ′
c Acp − ( )p
At
s h ⋅ ḟ yv
Longitudinal Reinforcement is designed in Pass 1.

Longitudinal Reinforcement is added to the bending reinforcement and reported as being due to both designs.
• Transverse Reinforcement:
number of legs specified (by the user), but the calculations assume a hoop shape. The link detailing reported
by RAM Concept will be difficult to decipher if the number of legs specified by the user is not 2.
Section 11.6.3.1 (equation 11-18) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high
torsions, this can make shear capacity negative.
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.6.1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.3.6
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 11.6.5.1 and 11.6.5.2
Torsional longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when

With the exception of span detailing, this chapter is not used for reinforcement design calculations, specifically:
This section is not considered.
60.6.10 Section 18.3.3 Service Tensile Stress Limit

A cross-section is defined as Class U, Class T, or Class C using the design strip segment or design section property
“Environment”. The limiting tensile stress values are outlined in the following table.
Class U Class T Class C
Assumed behavior Uncracked Transition between uncracked and Cracked

cracked
Section properties for Gross section Gross section Cracked

stress calculation section
Tensile stress limit f t ≤ 7.5 f ′

7.5 f ′
< f t ≤ 12 f ′ No limit
c c c

ACI 318-02 Design
Deflection calculation Gross section Consider effects of cracking Consider

effects of
cracking
Crack control No requirement No requirement 10.6.4 / 18.4.4
Computation of fs for Not applicable Not applicable Cracked

crack control section
analysis
If a design strip or section is defined as Class C, but the gross tensile stresses are within the Class T limits, the
provisions of 10.6.4/18.4.4 will not be applied.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the minimum concrete strength is used to determine the limiting
stress.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, approximate extreme fiber stresses and centroid stresses are
reported.

0.6 f ’ci is the limiting value.
stress.
reported.
3 f ′ ci is the limiting value.

stress.
reported.
The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.4.1 is added to resist the total tensile force if
User defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular
to the cross section considered.

ACI 318-02 Design
Usable reinforcing stresses are limited to 0.6fy and 30,000 psi.


0.45 f ’c is the limiting value.
Gross-section, linear-elastic stress calculations are used.
stress.
reported.

stress.
reported.
60.6.15 Section 18.4.4 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C Members

The provisions of section 10.6.4 are utilized, modified by the provisions of 18.4.4.
See Section 10.6.4 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) (on page 898).
The following procedure is used to determine the maximum bar spacing:
• The maximum fs in the cross section is determined, including all bonded tendons in the tension zone and all
bar positions.
• For bonded PT in tension zone, an effectively reinforced width is calculated:
( )
540
max f s
− 2.5cci
2
wi = min 3
NumberOfDucts
432
max f s
• This width is subtracted from the total tension face width, and the rebar spacing is calculated using the
remaining width.

ACI 318-02 Design
• A stress limit is calculated using re-arranged equation (10-4) and compared with the fs calculated in the first
step.
• Rebar is added and all steps are repeated until fs is within the calculated stress limit.
If tendons are used to reduce the required tension face reinforcement width, the tendon Δfps will be limited to
36 ksi in accordance with 18.4.4.3. Rebar will be added until this limit is met.
If any tendon wi or any required bar spacing is negative the bar or tendon is deemed ineffective for controlling
crack width and is ignored.
In the unusual circumstance where no bars or tendons are in the tension zone, no rebar will be added.

See Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) (on page 897). Note that if axial forces are
included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning
forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
Post-tensioning Tendons are included.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description Relationship of Bonded
Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains (on page 807)).
If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the cross section under consideration, then vector components of
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation (on page 809)).
If tendon centroid is closer to the extreme compression fiber than the compression reinforcement, a solution

For a cantilever span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is
ignored if the section location is outside of L/3 of the support.
For a regular span (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this criterion is
This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it.
The cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the “Min.
See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations (on page 815) for a theoretical discussion of the cracking
moment.
′
Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 7.5 f c times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f ’c for the cross section
is used.
Lightweight concrete factor is assumed to be Wc / 145 pcf ≤1.0. The maximum Wc for the cross section is used.

ACI 318-02 Design
The “twice that required” criterion is not checked.

For a span with no supports (as determined by the declaration of supports in the design strip segment), this
See “Minimum Reinforcement” above for details regarding which slab/beam face (top or bottom) that the
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post tensioning that is on the tension side of the
centroid is counted toward this requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement or bonded post-
tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section.

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied when the span ratio is in the middle one-third of the span.
stress.
If 2 f ′ c is exceeded the entire tensile load, Nc, is taken by bonded reinforcement.

User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is in the tension zone is
that are not orthogonal to the cross section. Usable bonded tendon stresses are limited to the minimum of (fpy –
fse), (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.
The reinforcement is only provided where stresses exceed 2 f ′ c , the minimum length requirements of 18.9.4.1
are not considered.

ACI 318-02 Design

• Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length.
• User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate
side of the centroid is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and
bonded post-tensioning that is not orthogonal to the cross section.
• The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked.
• The number of bars (“4 bars or wires”) is not checked.


ACI 318-05 Design
61
This appendix details RAM Concept’s implementation of ACI 318-05.


Combination.


ACI 318-05 Design
For the default Load History specification, RAM Concept uses the “Service LC: D + L” combination for the
maximum load case. This load combination does not contain any roof loads. For floors that contain roof loads, a
more appropriate load combination will need to be specified for the maximum load history step.
61.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:

61.2.3 Service LC: D + L


ACI 318-05 Design
61.2.4 Service LC: D + Lr

61.2.5 Service LC: D + S

61.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr

61.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S


ACI 318-05 Design


61.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr



ACI 318-05 Design

61.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S

61.2.13 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S

61.2.14 Service Wind LC: D + W


ACI 318-05 Design

61.2.15 Service Wind LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.75W

61.2.16 Service Wind LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S + 0.75W



ACI 318-05 Design
61.2.18 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.7E

61.2.19 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.525E

61.2.20 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S + 0.525E


ACI 318-05 Design


factors used are:

factors used are:

ACI 318-05 Design

factors used are:

factors used are:


ACI 318-05 Design




Eci = wc1.533 f ci
Ec = wc1.533 f c
where
strain.

Design Notes”.

ACI 318-05 Design


strains.

consideration.


ACI 318-05 Design
requires it.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2, 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2, 18.9.2





ACI 318-05 Design

section
Old Files
Related Links

factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1b

ACI 318-05 Design
61.5.4 Service
factors).
• Normal: Class T
Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4

18.9.3.2

factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a

ACI 318-05 Design
Design System RC PT
61.5.6 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.3, 11.6* 11.4, 11.6*, 18.7
61.5.7 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)

ACI 318-05 Design
Design System RC PT

The gross area of concrete after taking into account the “ignore top depth” and the “ignore bottom” depth is used
in the design strip segment), the “critical”critical span locations are those within L/6 of a support or midspan
location.
0.2113 is assumed.

There is a significant difference in the strength design of axial/flexural members according to the 318-05 Code.

ACI 318-05 Design
For sections with multiple values of f ’c , the f ’c of each concrete block is used appropriately.

of 0.004.

ACI 318-05 Design

Prestressed)
face).

Prestressed)
• Equation 10-4 and the 12(40,000/fs) criteria are implemented
(e.g., 4.3 bars).


ACI 318-05 Design



ACI 318-05 Design


concrete mixes.
A1 f y1 = 5 f ′
c Acp − ( )p
At
s h ⋅ ḟ yv

Transverse Reinforcement:

ACI 318-05 Design


Assumed behavior Uncracked Transition between uncracked Cracked

and cracked
Section properties for Gross section Gross section Cracked section

stress calculation

7.5 f ′
c c c
Deflection calculation Gross section Consider effects of cracking Consider effects of

cracking
Computation of fs for Not applicable Not applicable Cracked section

crack control analysis
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft ≤ 6 root fc'

ACI 318-05 Design
stress.
reported.

stress.
reported.

stress.
reported.

stress.

ACI 318-05 Design
reported.

stress.
reported.

bar positions.
( )
600, 000
max f s
− 2.5cci
2
wi = min 3
NumberOfDucts
480, 000
max f s
remaining width.
step.

ACI 318-05 Design

See Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) (on page 922). Note that if axial forces are
included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning
forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description Relationship of Bonded
Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains (on page 807)).
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description Unbonded
Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation (on page 809)).

This criterion is not applied to bonded two-way slabs, even though the code technically requires it.
moment.
′
is used.


ACI 318-05 Design
This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs. For strict adherence to ACI 318-99 this criterion should be

limiting stress.
c c
(fpy – fse), (0.5fpy) and 30 ksi.
• Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5fpy) and 30 ksi.
c

For span segment strips, this criteria is only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is less
than L/6.

ACI 318-05 Design
Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross section area and the cross section depth times the span length. This
will not always exactly match the code requirement
User defined reinforcement on the appropriate face and bonded post-tensioning that is on the appropriate side
of the centroid is counted toward the requirement. Vector components are taken of reinforcement and bonded
The location of bonded reinforcement (the 1.5 h requirement) is not checked.
The number of bars (“4 bars or wires”) is not checked.


ACI 318-08 Design
62


Combination.


ACI 318-08 Design
62.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:



ACI 318-08 Design


62.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr

62.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S


ACI 318-08 Design


62.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr



ACI 318-08 Design

62.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S

62.2.13 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S



ACI 318-08 Design





ACI 318-08 Design

62.2.19 Service Seismic LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr + 0.525E



ACI 318-08 Design


factors used are:

factors used are:

ACI 318-08 Design

factors used are:

factors used are:


ACI 318-08 Design
62.2.27 Factored Seismic LC: 0.9D + E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic loads. The load
factors used are:




Eci = wc1.533 f ci
Ec = wc1.533 f c
where

ACI 318-08 Design
strain.

Design Notes”.


strains.

consideration.


ACI 318-08 Design
• Section 18.8.2 is only applied to cross sections with bonded tendons, including two-way slabs.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2 (bonded), 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2 (bonded), 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2 (bonded)

18.9.3.3 (at supports only)



ACI 318-08 Design


section
Old Files
Related Links

factors).

ACI 318-08 Design
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
62.5.4 Service
factors).
• Normal: Class T
Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4

18.9.3.2

ACI 318-08 Design

factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a
62.5.6 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.2, 11.5* 11.3, 11.5*, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.2, 11.5* 11.3, 11.5*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.2, 11.5* 11.3, 11.5*, 18.7

ACI 318-08 Design
62.5.7 Ductility
The reinforcement type (as defined in the design section or design strip segment) is considered (PT or RC).
The longitudinal reinforcement from all other designs (except other ductility) is considered to be in place before
ductility reinforcement is added.
The bending moments sign (or signs) is determined by the moment envelope for the rule set layer (ductility
Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)


ACI 318-08 Design
0.2113 is assumed.


ACI 318-08 Design

of 0.004.

Prestressed)
face).

Prestressed)
(e.g., 4.3 bars).

ACI 318-08 Design



ACI 318-08 Design

concrete mixes.

ACI 318-08 Design
A1fy1 = Tn(ph/2A0)cot θ
A1 f y1 = 5 f ′
c Acp − ( )p
At
s h ⋅ ḟ yv



Assumed behavior Uncracked Transition between Cracked

uncracked and cracked

stress calculation

ACI 318-08 Design

7.5 f ′
c c c
Deflection calculation Gross section Consider effects of Consider effects of

cracking cracking
Computation of fs for Not applicable Not applicable Cracked section analysis

crack control
stress.
reported.

stress.
reported.
62.6.12 Section 18.4.1c Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit

The simply supported stress limit is not considered.
stress.
reported.

ACI 318-08 Design

stress.
reported.

stress.
reported.

bar positions.

ACI 318-08 Design
( )
600, 000
max f s
− 2.5cci
2
wi = min 3
NumberOfDucts
480, 000
max f
s
remaining width.
step.

See “Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)”. Note that if axial forces are included in the
design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports
will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility (see detailed description “Relationship of
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description “Unbonded

This criterion is only applied to cross sections containing bonded tendons.
that these regions will contain the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack.

ACI 318-08 Design
moment.
′
is used.
Lightweight concrete factor is calculated in accordance with 8.6.1 of ACI 318-08. The maximum Wc for the cross
section is used.

This criterion is never applied to two-way slabs.

limiting stress.
c c

ACI 318-08 Design
• Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5fpy) and 30 ksi.
c

than L/6.


ACI 318-11 Design
63


Combination.

combinations are from ACI 318-11 /ASCE 7-10 unless noted otherwise.

ACI 318-11 Design
63.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:


ACI 318-11 Design


63.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr

63.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S


ACI 318-11 Design


63.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr



ACI 318-11 Design

63.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S

63.2.13 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S

63.2.14 Service Wind LC: D + 0.6W


ACI 318-11 Design

Ultimate Wind Loading: 0.6 (std & alt)


63.2.17 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + 0.6W


ACI 318-11 Design



63.2.21 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + W

factors used are:

ACI 318-11 Design

63.2.22 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5S + W

factors used are:

factors used are:

factors used are:

ACI 318-11 Design
ACI318-11 / ASCE-7 / live load factors



factors used are:
63.3 ACI318-11 / ASCE-7 / live load factors


ACI 318-11 Design



Eci = wc1.533 f ci
Ec = wc1.533 f c
where
strain.

Design Notes”.


ACI 318-11 Design

strains.
Section Design Notes (on page 806).

consideration.

• Section 18.8.2 is only applied to cross sections with bonded tendons, including two-way slabs.

ACI 318-11 Design
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.8.2 (bonded), 18.9.2
One-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2 (bonded), 18.9.2
Two-Way Slab 7.12 18.8.2 (bonded)

18.9.3.3 (at supports only)





ACI 318-11 Design
section
Old Files
Related Links

factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
One-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.4.1a, 18.4.1c

ACI 318-11 Design
63.5.4 Service
factors).
• Normal: Class T
Beam 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4
One-Way Slab 10.6.4 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 18.3.3, 18.4.2b 10.6.4, 18.4.4

18.9.3.2

factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.4.2a

ACI 318-11 Design
63.5.6 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).
• See Torsion Considerations (on page 816) for how torsion is implemented.
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.2, 11.2, 11.5* 11.3, 11.5*, 18.7
One-Way Slab 10.2, 11.2, 11.5* 11.3, 11.5*, 18.7
Two-Way Slab 10.2, 11.2, 11.5* 11.3, 11.5*, 18.7
63.5.7 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.3.5 (none)

ACI 318-11 Design

0.2113 is assumed.


ACI 318-11 Design

of 0.004.

ACI 318-11 Design

Prestressed)
face).

Prestressed)
(e.g., 4.3 bars).


ACI 318-11 Design


ACI 318-11 Design

concrete mixes.
A1 f y1 = 5 f ′
c Acp − ( )p
At
s h ⋅ ḟ yv


ACI 318-11 Design




stress calculation

7.5 f ′
c c c

cracking cracking

crack control

ACI 318-11 Design
stress.
reported.

stress.
reported.
63.6.12 Section 18.4.1c Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit

stress.
reported.

stress.

ACI 318-11 Design
reported.

stress.
reported.

bar positions.
( )
600, 000
max f s
− 2.5cci
2
wi = min 3
NumberOfDucts
480, 000
max f s
remaining width.
step.

ACI 318-11 Design

See “Section 10.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed)”. Note that if axial forces are included in the
design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports
will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.

moment.
′
is used.


ACI 318-11 Design

limiting stress.
c c
c

than L/6.

ACI 318-11 Design


ACI 318-14 Design
64


Combination.

combinations are from ACI 318-14 /ASCE 7-10 unless noted otherwise.

ACI 318-14 Design
“L” in ACI 318-14 equations (5.3.1c), (5.3.1d), and (5.3.1e) will be equal to 0.5 for Live (Reducible) Loading, 1.0
for Live (Unreducible) Loading, 1.0 for Live (Storage) Loading, and 1.0 for Live (Parking) Loading.
64.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:


ACI 318-14 Design


64.2.6 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75Lr

64.2.7 Service LC: D + 0.75L + 0.75S


ACI 318-14 Design


64.2.10 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5Lr



ACI 318-14 Design

64.2.12 Factored LC: 1.2D + 1.6L + 0.5S

64.2.13 Factored LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 1.6S

64.2.14 Service Wind LC: D + 0.6W


ACI 318-14 Design



64.2.17 Service Wind LC: 0.6D + 0.6W


ACI 318-14 Design



64.2.21 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5Lr + W

factors used are:

ACI 318-14 Design

64.2.22 Factored Wind LC: 1.2D + f1L+ 0.5S + W

factors used are:

factors used are:

factors used are:

ACI 318-14 Design
ACI318-14 / ASCE-7 / live load factors



factors used are:
64.3 ACI318-14 / ASCE-7 / live load factors


ACI 318-14 Design


You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 19.2.2.1a
with the inclusion of wc or a specified value.

Eci = wc1.533 f ci
Ec = wc1.533 f c
where
strain.

Design Notes”.


strains.

ACI 318-14 Design
curves is detailed in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation (on page 809) in
For ACI 318-14, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by equations described in Table
20.3.2.4.1. In the calculation of ρp, RAM Concept assumes that the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side
of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment
capacity calculations at each cross section).

consideration.

• The minimum reinforcement in positive areas specified in Table 8.6.2.3 is not applied (here), as that is a
service reinforcement requirement, not a minimum reinforcement requirement (see Service (on page
997)).
• Section 7.6.2.1 is only applied to cross sections with bonded tendons, including two-way slabs (Section
8.6.2.2) and beams (Section 9.6.2.1).
Design System RC PT
Beam 9.6.1.1 and 9.6.1.2 9.6.2.1 (bonded), 9.6.2.3
One-Way Slab 7.6.1.1, 7.7.2.3 7.6.2.1 (bonded), 7.6.2.3

ACI 318-14 Design
Design System RC PT
Two-Way Slab 8.6.1.1, 8.7.2.2 8.6.2.2 (bonded) and 8.6.2.3 (at

supports only)(





ACI 318-14 Design
section
Old Files

factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 9.3.4.2
One-Way Slab (none) 7.3.4.2
Two-Way Slab (none) 8.3.4.1
64.5.4 Service
factors).

ACI 318-14 Design
• Normal: Class T
Beam 9.7.2.2 9.3.4.1 and 9.3.4.2 9.3.4.1 and 9.3.4.2 9.7.2.2
One-Way Slab 7.7.2.2 7.3.4.1 and 7.3.4.2 7.3.4.1 and 7.3.4.2 7.7.2.2
Two-Way Slab (none) 8.3.4.1 and 8.6.2.3 (not applicable) (not applicable)

factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 9.3.4.2
64.5.6 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).

ACI 318-14 Design
• See Torsion Considerations (on page 816) for how torsion is implemented.
Design System RC PT
Beam 9.5.2, 9.5.3 and 9.5.4* 9.5.2, 9.5.3 and 9.5.4*
One-Way Slab 7.5.2, 7.5.3 and 9.5.4* 7.5.2, 7.5.3 and 9.5.4*
Two-Way Slab 8.5.2, 8.5.3 and 9.5.4* 8.5.2, 8.5.3 and 9.5.4*
Note: * - 9.5.4 is applied only if “beam” torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
64.5.7 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 9.3.3.1 (none)
One-Way Slab 7.3.3.1 (none)
Two-Way Slab 8.3.3.1 (none)
64.6.1 Section 7.6.1.1 and 8.6.1.1 Minimum Flexural Reinforcement


ACI 318-14 Design
to determine the reinforcement specified in 7.6.1.1 / 8.6.1.1.
For members that contain rebar with different yield stresses, the ratios of Table 7.6.1.1 / 8.6.1.1 will be satisfied
for whichever provides the least amount of reinforcement. The ratio is limited to a lower bound of 0.0014.
7.7.2.3 and 8.7.2.2. The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will
be rounded up to the next whole number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward
satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their
vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total number of provided bars for spacing
calculations.
In one-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 3h is utilized in accordance with 7.7.2.3.
In “critical” span locations in two-way slabs, a maximum spacing of 2h is utilized in accordance with 8.7.2.2. For
0.2113 is assumed.
Reinforcement in Fig. R7.6.4.2 is not implemented.
64.6.2 Sections 7.5.2, 8.5.2 and 9.5.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non
prestressed)
21.2.2 depending upon the tensile strain in the extreme tension reinforcement at the ultimate strain conditions
(when the concrete compressive strain reaches 0.003). When the tensile strain is sufficiently large as to provide
ample ductility, the section is defined as “tension controlled” and a strength reduction factor of 0.9 is used. When
the tensile strain is at or below the balanced strain condition, the member is defined as “compression controlled”
and a strength reduction factor of 0.65 is used. Between these tensile strain values a linear transition between
0.65 and 0.9 is used.

ACI 318-14 Design
64.6.3 Sections 7.3.3.1, 8.3.3.1, and 9.3.3.1 Ductility (Non prestressed)

The strain distribution used in those sections calculations is used (see Sections 7.5.2, 8.5.2 and 9.5.2 Factored
Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) (on page 1000) for details).
of 0.004.
Application of this section is limited to cross sections with net axial load (compression) less than 0.10 f c ′ Ag , in
accordance with 9.3.3.1.
Note: This provision is also applied for one-way slabs and two-way slabs although it should rarely control for
this member type.
64.6.4 Sections 9.6.1.1 and 9.6.1.2 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members

(Non Prestressed)
Both criteria are implemented.
9.6.1.2(a) is calculated using the maximum fc', minimum fy, and maximum d (of all bars on the appropriate face).
bw is taken the core width (see Concrete “Core” Determination (on page 816)). If the core width is zero (there is
no core), then bw is taken as the width of the section.
A spacing limit of 3h is utilized in accordance with 7.7.2.3. For typically sized beams, this limit will not control
the amount of reinforcement.

ACI 318-14 Design
The provisions for a statically determinate beam with a flange in tension are not implemented.
64.6.5 Sections 7.7.2.2 and 9.7.2.2 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members

(Non Prestressed)
• The provisions of 24.3 are applied.
• The equation for deformed bars is used considering the 12(40,000/fs) criteria
(e.g., 4.3 bars).
64.6.6 Sections 7.5.3, 8.5.3 and 9.5.3 Shear Resistance (Non Prestressed)
The one-way shear strength will be considered for beams (9.5.3), one-way slabs (7.5.3) or two-way slabs (8.5.3 ).
Equations of Table 22.5.5.1 are implemented, including the equations for minimum shear reinforcement (Section
9.6.3.3) for beams.
Section 22.5.3.1 is implemented (but optional 22.5.3.2 is not).
Sections 20.2.2.4, 9.7.6.2.2 and 22.5.1.2 are implemented.
Lightweight concrete is considered.

ACI 318-14 Design
Minimum reinforcement criteria of sections 7.6.3 and 9.6.3 are implemented

Axial tension and compression are considered in accordance with sections 22.5.6.1 and 22.5.7.1 .
If “beam” torsion design is selected, see Section 9.5.4 Beam Torsion (on page 1003) for further requirements.
64.6.7 Sections 7.5.3, 8.5.3 and 9.5.3 Shear Resistance of Beams (Prestressed)
The one-way shear strength will be considered for beams (9.5.3), one-way slabs (7.5.3) or two-way slabs (8.5.3 ).
Equations of Table 22.5.8.2 are used to determine the shear capacity including the equations for minimum shear
reinforcement (Section 9.6.3.3) and Eq 22.5.10.5.3.
Section 22.5.3.1 is implemented (but optional 22.5.3.2 is not).
Sections 20.2.2.4, 9.7.6.2.2 and 22.5.1.2 are implemented.
Minimum reinforcement criteria of sections 7.6.3 and 9.6.3 are implemented
If “beam” torsion design is selected, see Section 9.5.4 Beam Torsion (on page 1003) for further requirements.
64.6.8 Section 9.5.4 Beam Torsion


ACI 318-14 Design
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85Aoh per 22.7.6.1.1.
θ in equations 22.7.6.1 (a) and (b) is always taken as 45°.
For nonprestressed members, axial force is accounted for according to section 22.7.4.1(c)..
concrete mixes.
• By rearranging code equations 22.7.6.1a and 22.7.6.1b, the longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as
follows:
A1fy1 = Tn(ph/2A0)cot θ
• By rearranging code equation 9.6.4.3(a), the minimum longitudinal reinforcement can be calculated as
follows:
A1 f y1 = 5 f ′
c Acp − ( )p
At
s h ⋅ ḟ yv

Section 22.7.7.1 (equation a) is implemented such that shear capacity is reduced by torsion. For very high
The spacing of transverse reinforcement is determined by 9.7.6.3.3.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by 22.7.6.1(a).
Minimum transverse reinforcement is determined by 9.6.4.1 and 9.6.4.2.

Section 8.4.2.3.2 (Unbalanced moment transfer)

ACI 318-14 Design
64.6.10 Section 24.5.2.1 Service Tensile Stress Limit



stress calculation

7.5 f ′
c c c

cracking cracking
Crack control No requirement No requirement 24.3.2 (deformed bars)

crack control
Note: All post-tensioned two-way slabs are considered as Class U with ft ≤ 6√f'c (Section 8.3.4.1).
provisions of 24.3.2 for deformed bars will not be applied.
stress.
reported.
64.6.11 Section 24.5.3.1 Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit

0.6×f ’ci is the limiting value. The limit for end of simply supported members is not considered.
stress.
reported.

ACI 318-14 Design
64.6.12 Section 24.5.3.2 Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit

stress.
reported.
64.6.13 Section 24.5.4.1 Sustained Compressive Stress Limit

stress.
reported.
64.6.14 Section 24.5.4.1 Service Compressive Stress Limit

stress.
reported.

ACI 318-14 Design
64.6.15 Sections 7.7.2.2 and 9.7.2.2 Reinforcement Spacing Limits for Class C
Members
See Sections 7.7.2.2 and 9.7.2.2 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members (Non Prestressed) (on page
1002).
bar positions.
( )
600, 000
max f s
− 2.5cci
2
wi = min 3
NumberOfDucts
480, 000
max f s
remaining width.
• A stress limit is calculated using rearranged equation for deformed bars and wires (Table 24.3.2) and
compared with the fs calculated in the first step.
64.6.16 Section 7.5.2, 8.5.2 and 9.5.2 Design Flexural Resistance (Prestressed)
See Sections 7.5.2, 8.5.2 and 9.5.2 Factored Moment Resistance (Non prestressed) (on page 1000). Note that if
axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the diversion of post-
tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design sections, as is
appropriate.

ACI 318-14 Design
64.6.17 Sections 7.6.2.1, 8.6.2.2 and 9.6.2.1 Cracking Moment

moment.
′
is used.
64.6.18 Sections 7.6.2.3 and 9.6.2.3 Minimum Reinforcement - One Way


ACI 318-14 Design

• For span segment strips, this criterion is only applied when the span ratio is in the middle one-third of the
span.
limiting stress.
c c
c
8.7.5.5.1 are not considered.

For span segment strips, these criteria are only applied to the first cross section at a support if the span ratio is
less than L/6.
Acf is calculated as the maximum of the cross-section area and the cross-section depth times the span length.
Only bonded tendons that meet the 8.7.5.3(a) 1.5h requirement are utilized. Reinforcing bar locations are not
checked (all reinforcing bars are counted toward this provision). It is recommended that reinforcing bars
designed by RAM Concept be detailed to satisfy this provision.
The number of bars (“4 bars or wires”) is not checked per 8.7.5.3(b).

ACI 318-14 Design


AS 3600-2001 Design
65
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of AS 3600-2001.
65.1 AS 3600-2001 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new AS
3600-2001 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are
particularly noteworthy are discussed here.

Combination.
65.1.2 Snow Loading

For generation of load combinations, this loading type describes the design snow load for a particular floor or
roof, which generally consists of the ground snow load modified by any necessary factors to adjust for roof snow
loads, roof shape coefficients, drifting, etc.

AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 default load combinations
65.2 AS 3600-2001 default load combinations

RAM Concept creates when you start a new AS 3600-2001 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination
are given. You can remove or modify any of these load combinations. You can also add load combinations. The
load combinations are from AS/NZS 1170.0 incorporating amendments 1-5, unless noted otherwise.
RAM Concept uses loading types to determine the appropriate factors in some load combinations. For the short-
term case the factor ψ will be equal to 1.0 for Live (Unreducible) and Live (Storage) and 0.7 for all other live
loadings. For the long-term and combination cases, the factor ψ will be equal to 0.6 for Live (Unreducible) and
Live (Storage), 0.4 for Live (Reducible), and 0.0 for Live (Roof).
65.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:
Self-Dead Loading: 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)

Temporary Construction Loading (At Stressing): 0.8 (std) & 1.15 (alt)
65.2.3 Service LC: D + ψ L


AS 3600-2001 Design

65.2.4 Service LC: D + ψ L + S

65.2.5 Max Service LC: D + L

65.2.6 Ultimate LC: 1.35D


AS 3600-2001 Design
65.2.7 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L

65.2.8 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + ψ L + S

65.2.9 Service Wind LC: D + ψ L + W

This load combination is intended for checking the serviceability limit state with applied wind and live loads.
65.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + ψ L + E


AS 3600-2001 Design

Service Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std & alt)
65.2.11 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + ψ L + W

factors used are:
65.2.12 Ultimate Seismic LC: D + ψ L + E


AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 Material Behaviors

This load combination is intended for use in load history deflection calculations. The long-term factors from
AS/NZS 1170.0:2002 Table 4.1 are used. The load factors used are:
65.2.14 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors

• assembly loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
• roof loads used for floor type activities on a Live (Reducible) layer or Live (Unreducible) layer
65.3 AS 3600-2001 Material Behaviors

reinforcement when using AS 3600-2001.

You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 6.1.2 or a
specified value.

When the AS 3600-2001 code section is selected the following values are used:
Eci = ρ 1.50.043 f cmi
Ec = ρ 1.50.043 f cm
where

AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code rule selection
fcmi = mean value of cylinder strength at stressing

fcm = mean value of 28 day cylinder strength
strain.

Design Notes”.


strains.
For AS 3600-2001, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by section 8.1.6. In the calculation of
befdp, RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the
same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross
section).
65.4 AS 3600-2001 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which AS 3600-2001 code rules to apply based on the design
consideration. Amendments #1 and #2 are included in RAM Concept’s implementation. However, the rules
pertaining to Class L reinforcement are not included in RAM Concept.

AS 3600-2001 Design

Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
One-Way Slab 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2
Two-Way Slab 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2 8.1.4, 9.4.3.2



AS 3600-2001 Design


section
Old Files
Related Links

factors).

AS 3600-2001 Design
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 8.1.4.2
65.4.4 Service
factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) 8.6.2
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2
65.4.5 Max Service

• This is intended for service load combinations where ψ = 1.0.
factors).

AS 3600-2001 Design
Table 60: Maximum service rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) (none)
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)
65.4.6 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).
• See “Torsion Considerations” for an explanation how torsion is implemented.
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
One-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
Two-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
65.4.7 Ductility

AS 3600-2001 Design
AS 3600-2001 code implementation
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.3 8.1.3
One-Way Slab 8.1.3 8.1.3
Two-Way Slab 8.1.3 8.1.3
65.5 AS 3600-2001 code implementation

Note: Class L reinforcement provisions are not included in RAM Concept’s implementation
65.5.1 Concrete Modulus of Elasticity

• The modulus of elasticity for concrete is calculated per 6.1.2(a).
• The value of fcm in the calculation is taken from Table C6.1.2. Linear interpolation is used between the table
values. Values outside the range of the table are interpolated conservatively (if f’c < 20 MPa, fcm = 1.2 f’c; if f’c
> 50 MPa, fcm = f’c + 6.5 MPa).
• This calculation must be selected in the Materials window to be used.
65.5.2 Concrete Flexural Tensile Strength

• The flexural tensile strength for concrete is calculated per 6.1.1.2(a).
65.5.3 Unbonded Post-Tensioning Stress-Strain Curves

• The bonded post-tensioning stress-strain curves are used, but altered as detailed below.
• For service level (elastic) analysis, unbonded tendon stresses are assumed to be independent of section
strains.
• The tendon stress is never reduced below σ p.ef .
• The tendon stress is never exceeds fpy.
• The tendon stress is limited by code section 8.1.6 equation (a) or (b) as appropriate.
Note: The program does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on
grade; the engineer needs to take this into account before starting the design.

AS 3600-2001 Design
65.5.4 Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending

• Strain compatibility design is used. See “General Design Approach” for a description of RAM Concept’s strain
compatibility design.
• See “Concrete Stress-Strain Curves” and for tendon, concrete and mild steel reinforcement stress strain
curves
an over-reinforced section. See “Ductility” for applying ductility requirements.
• If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
or design strip segment under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is
• The diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports (and other regions of the structure) will cause a
hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many cross sections, as is appropriate.
• RAM Concept does not consider section 19.3.5 which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on
• Section 8.1.8 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is not implemented.
• The standard strength reduction factor (φ) of 0.8 is used.
65.5.5 8.1.4 Minimum Flexural Strength

• Cross sections within 1/6 span from supports or 1/6 span from midspan are considered “at critical sections”.
• If the design section is not declared as post-tensioned in the design section or design strip segment, then the
P/Ag and Pe terms of 8.1.4.1 are assumed to be zero (even if the cross section includes tendons).
• See ““Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations” for a theoretical discussion of the “cracking load”.

AS 3600-2001 Design
65.5.6 8.1.4.2 Transfer Compressive Stress Limits

• The second clause in 8.1.4.2 is implemented.
• The cross section is analyzed as cracked. This analysis is somewhat more conservative than the gross section
calculation suggested in the code.
• The concrete compressive stresses are limited to 0.5 fcp.
• If the limit stress is exceeded then reinforcement is added as required to limit the concrete stress; depending
on the bending moment and axial forces, either compression reinforcement, tension reinforcement or both
will be added.
• For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress is reported as the smallest (absolute
value) stress limit of all of the individual concrete areas.
65.5.7 Section 8.1.3 Ductility of Beams in Bending

• See “General Design Approach” for general information on cross section calculations.
• The neutral axis depth (k u ) is limited to 0.4 per section 8.1.3. Reinforcement is added to minimise the
neutral axis depth.
• If the reinforcing bar covers are such that the compression bar is outside of the 0.4 d zone, then a solution
• In certain circumstances it may not be possible to simultaneously provide positive moment ductility and
negative moment ductility. This most commonly happens if there is a large post-tensioning tendon near the
center of the cross section.
65.5.8 Section 8.2 Shear Design

• See “Concrete “Core” Determination” for the web width (bw) calculations.
• Half of the width of bonded ducts and all of the width of unbonded ducts that are located in the shear core are
deducted from the bw width to determine the bv width. Where ducts are at different elevations within the
core, the elevation with the maximum effective duct width is used to determine bv.
• If the section is declared as “post-tensioned”, d 0 is taken as the maximum of the depth of all tension
reinforcement or 0.8D. No check is made to verify that the structure actually is post-tensioned.
• If the section is not post-tensioned d 0 is taken as the maximum depth of all tension reinforcement.
• Ast is taken as the area of longitudinal reinforcement (excluding PT) that is in the tension zone for the cross
section forces under consideration.
• The vertical component of inclined prestressing tendons, P v , is ignored (taken as zero).
• Flexure-shear V uc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (a) (for non-prestressed members the A pt and V 0 evaluate to
zero).
• V 0 is calculated as M0/(M*/V*) for both determinate and indeterminate structures.
• β 2 is taken as 1.0 (no axial force considered).
• β 3 is taken as 1.0.
• A pt is taken as the sum of all post-tensioning (bonded and unbonded) in the tension zone. Vector
components of the tendon areas are used for tendons that are not perpendicular to the design section.

AS 3600-2001 Design
• Web-shear V uc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (b) (for both prestressed and non-prestressed members). The
calculation is performed at the centroid of the member, but the net web width (bv) is used to determine the
shear stress at the centroid. The balance analysis prestressing forces and the gross section properties are
used to determine the axial stress at the centroid.
• V us is calculated per 8.2.10 (a).
• No increases of capacity are considered for sections or loads close to supports.
• If “beam torsion” is selected, torsion design is also performed (see “Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design”).
Maximum shear capacity is reduced by section 8.3.3. If torsion reinforcement is required, then Section
8.3.4(b) is used to reduce available shear capacity.
• Stirrup spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c).
65.5.9 Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design

• Section 8.3 is followed.
• Torsion reinforcement is not provided if the requirements of 8.3.4(a)(i) are met [T* < 0.25 φ Tuc]. The
requirements of 8.3.4(a)(ii) and (iii) are conservatively ignored.
• All torsion is assumed to be taken by the “core”. See “Concrete “Core” Determination” for calculation of the
core.
• Where the core consists of multiple ribs, the calculations are based on an average rib (and then factored up
by the number of ribs).
• Section 8.3.3 is used to reduce the maximum shear capacity.
• In calculating At and ut, the side cover to the centroid of the longitudinal bar is assumed to be the maximum
of the top cover and bottom cover to the centroid of their respective longitudinal bars.
• Longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the compression zone is not reduced by the flexural compression force
[8.3.6(a) is used for both tension and compression faces]
• Torsion capacity is not reported; instead shear capacity is reduced by the fitments, etc. that are used to
provide the required torsion capacity.
• When shear acts simultaneously with torsion, Section 8.3.4(b) is considered when designing the transverse
closed ties.
• Transverse closed ties (Asw) are provided for the lesser of T* and Tu,max. If T* is greater than Tu,max, then the
section will be reported as failing sections 8.2 and 8.3. The minimum requirements of 8.3.7(a) are also met.
• Longitudinal reinforcement is provided based on the Asw value calculated for the lesser of T* and Tu,max.
• Closed tie spacings are reduced by a factor of 0.8 per 8.2.12.4(c), even if the cross section is in pure torsion
(no shear).
65.5.10 Section 8.6.1 RC Beam Crack Control

If there are no tension stresses in the cross section, no reinforcement is provided.
The cross section is considered as a “tension member” if both faces are in tension based on gross section stresses
for the cross section forces being considered. (The code uses the term “primarily tension”.).

AS 3600-2001 Design
Section (a) - This section is not implemented here. Clause 8.1.4.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement
design.
Section (b) – This section is always used in the service design, but never used in the max service design.
• Reinforcement is added on each face in tension to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm. All bars on the
appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered
for spacing requirements. A fractional number of bars and spaces may be used.
• Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of the maximum bar diameter on the face being
considered are converted to an equivalent number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the maximum
bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area.
Section (c) – This section is used if the cross section is a tension member and the environment is not protected.
• For the service design:
• Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table
8.6.1(A).
• The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.1(A).
• For the max service design:
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
Section (d) – This section is used if the cross section is not a tension member and the environment is not
protected.
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A)
or Table 8.6.1(B), whichever is larger.
• The bar spacing for Table 8.6.1(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional
components for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter
of the maximum bar diameter on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of
hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area.
A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
• Reinforcement is added to both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses less than 0.8 fsy.
65.5.11 Section 8.6.2 PT Beam Crack Control

• If the tensile stress in the concrete does not exceed 0.25 f ′ then there is no need for crack control
c
reinforcement and none of the following applies.
• Section (a) with the 0.6 f ′ limit is ignored because it does not give any guidance on how much
c
reinforcement is necessary. Section (b) is always used instead.
• Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the 200 MPa as the
moment changes from decompression to service level.
• In extremely rare circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in compression, even though the
′
concrete stress exceeds 0.25 f c ) this criterion is skipped as adding reinforcement will reduce the

AS 3600-2001 Design
compression (increase the tension) making it impossible to satisfy the criterion by increasing the
reinforcement.
• The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated using gross section strains, while the service
reinforcement stress is calculated using cracked section strains.
• Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing of 200 mm or
less.
• For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct that is in the tension zone (based on gross-section
stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In
the spacing calculation, all effective tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the
number of mild steel bars required – the plan layout of the ducts is ignored.
• A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
65.5.12 Section 9.1 Strength of Slabs in Bending

• Section 8.1 is used for calculating the bending strength of slabs. Any reinforcement required is reported as
being due to 8.1. See “Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending” above for details on the 8.1 implementation.
65.5.13 Section 9.4.1 RC Slab Crack Control

Section (a) –This section is not implemented here. Clause 9.1.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement
design via clause 8.1.4.1.
• Reinforcement is added to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm or two times the cross section depth. All bars
on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are
considered for spacing requirements. A fraction number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
Section (c) – This section is only used for service design, but is not used in protected environments.
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 9.4.1(A) or
Table 9.4.1(B), whichever is larger.
components for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter of
the maximum bar diameter on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of
hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area. A
fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
Section (d) – This section is only used for max service design, but is not used in protected environments.

AS 3600-2001 Design
65.5.14 Section 9.4.2 PT Slab Crack Control

c
c
• Reinforcement is added to try to keep mild steel stress changes on the tension face within the 150 MPa as the
moment changes from decompression to service level. In extremely rare circumstances (where the service
reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete stress exceeds 0.25 f ′ c ) this criterion is
skipped.
• The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated by determining gross section decompression cross-
section strains and applying the strains to the reinforcement.
less. For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct (that is in the tension zone based on gross section
stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the
spacing calculation, all bonded tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number
of mild steel bars required. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the
spacing requirement.
65.5.15 Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature

• This criterion is applied as part of the minimum reinforcement designer as it is independent of the magnitude
of forces upon a cross section.
• This criterion is applied to both beams and slabs, although its application to beams is not required by AS
3600.
• Reinforcement may be applied to both faces if the cross section is subject to both positive and negative
moments and the “tension face” reinforcement location is chosen.
• The amount of reinforcement provided is equal to 0.75 (per 9.4.3.2(b)) times the amount specified by either
9.4.3.4(a)(i), 9.4.3.4(b)(i), or 9.4.3.4(c).
• For “protected” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(1.75 – 2.5 σ cp )(Ag)/
1000
• For “normal” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(3.5 – 2.5 σ cp )(Ag)/1000
• For “corrosive” or “very corrosive” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(6.0 –
2.5 σ cp )(Ag)/1000
• For non-PT design strips and design sections, σ cp is taken as zero.

AS 3600-2001 Design


AS 3600-2009 Design
66


Combination.
66.1.2 Snow Loading

roof, which generally consists of the ground snow load modified by any necessary factors to adjust for roof, snow

AS 3600-2009 Design

load combinations are from AS/NZS 1170.0:2002 incorporating Amendments 1-5, unless noted otherwise.
Live (Storage), 0.4 for Live (Reducible), and 0.0 for Live (Roof). In the case of seismic load combinations ψ will be
equal to 0.3 for Live (Reducible) or Parking loads.
66.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:


AS 3600-2009 Design





AS 3600-2009 Design
66.2.7 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L




AS 3600-2009 Design


factors used are:


AS 3600-2009 Design
AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors

66.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors



specified value.


AS 3600-2009 Design
ρ 1.50.043 f cmi when f cmi ≤ 40 MPa

Eci =
ρ 1.50.024 f cmi + 0.12 when f cmi > 40 MPa
where
fcmi = mean value of cylinder strength at stressing. Determined using Table
3.1.2.
fcm = mean value of 28 day cylinder strength
strain.

Design Notes”.


strains.
befdp, RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the
section).

AS 3600-2009 Design

consideration. Amendments #1 and #2 are included in RAM Concept’s implementation. However, the rules
pertaining to Class L reinforcement are not included in RAM Concept.

Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
One-Way Slab 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2
Two-Way Slab 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2 8.1.6, 9.4.3.2


AS 3600-2009 Design



section

AS 3600-2009 Design
Old Files
Related Links

factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 8.1.6.2
66.5.4 Service
factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) 8.6.2
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2

AS 3600-2009 Design
Design System RC PT
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) 9.4.2
66.5.5 Max Service

factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1 (portions) (none)
One-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)
Two-Way Slab 9.4.1 (portions) (none)
66.5.6 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
One-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*
Two-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2, 8.3* 8.1, 8.2, 8.3*

AS 3600-2009 Design
66.5.7 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.5 8.1.5


• The value of fcm in the calculation is taken from Table 3.1.2. Linear interpolation is used between the table
values. Values outside the range of the table are interpolated conservatively (if f’c < 20 MPa, fcm = 1.2 f’c; if f’c
> 50 MPa, fcm = f’c + 6.5 MPa).

• The flexural tensile strength for concrete is calculated per 3.1.1.3 as function of f'c (using the alternative
option due to absence of data).

AS 3600-2009 Design

strains.
• The tendon stress never exceeds fpy.

• Strain compatibility design is used. See “General Design Approach” for a description of RAM Concept’s strain
compatibility design.
• See “Concrete Stress-Strain Curves” and for tendon, concrete and mild steel reinforcement stress strain
curves
an over-reinforced section. See “Ductility” for applying ductility requirements.
• If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored
• RAM Concept does not consider section 17.3.5, which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on
• Section 8.1.10 (Detailing of flexural reinforcement and tendons) is partially implemented.
• The standard capacity reduction factor (φ) of 0.8 is used.

AS 3600-2009 Design

Pe/Ag and Pee terms of 8.1.6.1 are assumed to be zero (even if the cross section includes tendons), where Pe
is the total effective prestress force considered.
• Cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the “Min.
• See ““Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations” for a theoretical discussion of the “cracking load”.

• The concrete compressive stresses are limited to 0.5 fcp for all cases.
will be added.

• See “General Design Approach” for general information on cross section calculations.
• The neutral axis depth (k ou ) is limited to 0.36 per section 8.1.5. Reinforcement is added to minimise the
neutral axis depth.
• If the reinforcing bar covers are such that the compression bar is outside of the 0.36 d zone, then a solution

• See “Concrete “Core” Determination” for the web width (bw) calculations.
• Half of the width of bonded ducts and all of the width of unbonded ducts that are located in the shear core are
deducted from the bw width to determine the bv width. Where ducts are at different elevations within the
core, the elevation with the maximum effective duct width is used to determine bv.

AS 3600-2009 Design
• If the section is declared as “post-tensioned”, d 0 is taken as the maximum of the depth of all tension
reinforcement or 0.8D. No check is made to verify that the structure actually is post-tensioned.
• If the section is not post-tensioned d 0 is taken as the maximum depth of all tension reinforcement.
• Ast is taken as the area of longitudinal reinforcement (excluding PT) that is in the tension zone for the cross
section forces under consideration.
• The vertical component of inclined prestressing tendons, P v , is ignored (taken as zero).
• Flexure-shear V uc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (a) (for non-prestressed members the A pt and V 0 evaluate to
zero).
• V 0 is calculated as M0/(M*/V*) for both determinate and indeterminate structures.
• β 2 is taken as 1.0 (no axial force considered).
• β 3 is taken as 1.0.
• A pt is taken as the sum of all post-tensioning (bonded and unbonded) in the tension zone. Vector
components of the tendon areas are used for tendons that are not perpendicular to the design section.
• Web-shear V uc is calculated per 8.2.7.2 (b) (for both prestressed and non-prestressed members). The
calculation is performed at the centroid of the member, but the net web width (bv) is used to determine the
shear stress at the centroid. The balance analysis prestressing forces and the gross section properties are
used to determine the axial stress at the centroid.
• V us is calculated per 8.2.10 (a).
• No increases of capacity are considered for sections or loads close to supports.
• If “beam torsion” is selected, torsion design is also performed (see “Section 8.3 Beam Torsion Design”).
Maximum shear capacity is reduced by section 8.3.3. If torsion reinforcement is required, then Section
8.3.4(b) is used to define the extra transverse and longitudinal reinforcement required in addition to any
other reinforcement.

• Section 8.3 is followed.
• Torsion reinforcement is not provided if the requirements of 8.3.4(a)(i) are met [T* < 0.25 φ Tuc]. The
requirements of 8.3.4(a)(ii) and (iii) are conservatively ignored.
• All torsion is assumed to be taken by the “core”. See “Concrete “Core” Determination” for calculation of the
core.
• Where the core consists of multiple ribs, the calculations are based on an average rib (and then factored up
by the number of ribs).
• Section 8.3.3 is used to reduce the maximum shear capacity.
• In calculating At and ut, the side cover to the centroid of the longitudinal bar is assumed to be the maximum
of the top cover and bottom cover to the centroid of their respective longitudinal bars.
• Longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the compression zone is not reduced by the flexural compression force
[8.3.6(a) is used for both tension and compression faces]
• Torsion capacity is reported.
• Section 8.3.4(b) is considered when designing the transverse closed ties.
• Transverse closed ties (Asw) are provided for the lesser of T* and Tu,max. If T* is greater than Tu,max, then the
section will be reported as failing sections 8.2 and 8.3. The minimum requirements of 8.3.7(b) are also met.
• Longitudinal reinforcement is provided based on the Asw value calculated for the lesser of T* and Tu,max.

AS 3600-2009 Design
66.6.10 Section 8.6.1 RC Beam Crack Control

If there are no tension stresses in the cross section, no reinforcement is provided.
The cross section is considered as a “tension member” if both faces are in tension based on gross section stresses
for the cross section forces being considered. (The code uses the term “primarily tension”.).
Section (a) - This section is not implemented here. Clause 8.1.6.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement
design.
• Reinforcement is added on each face in tension to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm. All bars on the
appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are considered
for spacing requirements. A fractional number of bars and spaces may be used.
Section (c) – This section is used if the cross section is a tension member and the environment is not protected.
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A).
Section (d) – This section is used if the cross section is not a tension member and the environment is not
protected.
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.1(A)
or Table 8.6.1(B), whichever is larger.
components for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the diameter
of the maximum bar diameter on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent number of
hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based upon area.
A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be used.

AS 3600-2009 Design
66.6.11 Section 8.6.2 PT Beam Crack Control

c
c
• Reinforcement is added to try to keep bonded tendon and mild steel stress changes on the tension face within
the values given in Table 8.6.2 as the moment changes from decompression to service level.
concrete stress exceeds 0.25 f ′ c ) this criterion is skipped as adding reinforcement will reduce the
compression (increase the tension) making it impossible to satisfy the criterion by increasing the
reinforcement.
• The decompression reinforcement stress is calculated using gross section strains, while the service
reinforcement stress is calculated using cracked section strains.
less.
• For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct that is in the tension zone (based on gross-section
stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In
the spacing calculation, all effective tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the
number of mild steel bars required – the plan layout of the ducts is ignored.
• A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.

• Section 8.1 is used for calculating the bending strength of slabs. Any reinforcement required is reported as
being due to 8.1. See “Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending” above for details on the 8.1 implementation.
66.6.13 Section 9.4.1 RC Slab Crack Control

Section (a) –This section is not implemented here. Clause 9.1.1 is implemented in the minimum reinforcement
design via clause 8.1.6.1.
• Reinforcement is added to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm or two times the cross section depth. All bars
on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section) are
considered for spacing requirements. A fraction number of bars and number of spaces may be used.

AS 3600-2009 Design
Section (c) – This section is only used for service design, but is not used in protected environments.
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 9.4.1(A) or
Table 9.4.1(B), whichever is larger.
Section (d) – This section is only used for max service design, but is not used in protected environments.
66.6.14 Section 9.4.2 PT Slab Crack Control

c
c
• Reinforcement is added to try to keep bonded tendon and mild steel stress changes on the tension face within
the values given in Table 9.4.2 as the moment changes from decompression to service level. In extremely rare
circumstances (where the service reinforcement stress in compression, even though the concrete stress
exceeds 0.25 f ′ c ) this criterion is skipped.
• Reinforcement is also added if necessary to provide a centre-to-centre reinforcement spacing not exceeding
300 mm or two times the cross section depth. For this requirement, each bonded tendon duct (that is in the
tension zone based on gross section stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if
it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calculation, all bonded tendon ducts are assumed to be
optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars required. A fractional number of bars and
number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing requirement.
66.6.15 Section 9.4.3.2 Shrinkage and Temperature

• This criterion is applied as part of the minimum reinforcement designer as it is independent of the magnitude
of forces upon a cross section.
• This criterion is applied to both beams and slabs, although its application to beams is not required by AS
3600.

AS 3600-2009 Design
• Reinforcement may be applied to both faces if the cross section is subject to both positive and negative
moments and the “tension face” reinforcement location is chosen.
• The amount of reinforcement provided is equal to 0.75 (per 9.4.3.2(b)) times the amount specified by either
9.4.3.4(a)(i), 9.4.3.4(b)(i), or 9.4.3.4(c).
• For “protected” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(1.75 – 2.5 σ cp )(Ag)/
1000
• For “normal” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(3.5 – 2.5 σ cp )(Ag)/1000
2.5 σ cp )(Ag)/1000
• For non-PT design strips and design sections, σ cp is taken as zero.

Refer to Punching Shear Design Notes (on page 1188) (no change with respect to the former code).

AS 3600-2018 Design
67


Combination.
67.1.2 Snow Loading

roof, which generally consists of the ground snow load modified by any necessary factors to adjust for roof, snow

AS 3600-2018 Design

load combinations are from AS/NZS 1170.0:2002 incorporating Amendments 1-5, unless noted otherwise.
Live (Storage), 0.4 for Live (Reducible), and 0.0 for Live (Roof). In the case of seismic load combinations ψ will be
equal to 0.3 for Live (Reducible) or Parking loads.
67.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:
considered part of the long-term loss lump sum.



AS 3600-2018 Design




67.2.7 Ultimate LC: 1.2D + 1.5L


AS 3600-2018 Design




AS 3600-2018 Design
AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors

factors used are:



AS 3600-2018 Design
AS 3600-2018 Material Behaviors
67.3 AS3600 / AS/NZS 1170.1 live load factors



specified value.

ρ 1.50.043 f cmi when f cmi ≤ 40 MPa

Ec =
ρ 1.50.024 f cmi + 0.12 when f cmi > 40 MPa
where
fcmi = mean value of cylinder strength at stressing. Determined using Table
3.1.2.
cross section analysis. The maximum stress used in the concrete stress-strain curves is 0.9 f’c per clause 3.1.4(b).
strain.

Design Notes”.

AS 3600-2018 Design


strains.
curves is detailed in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation (on page 809).
befdp, RAM Concept assumes the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross-section centroid
(the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross
section).

consideration. Amendment #1 is included in RAM Concept ’s implementation. However, the rules pertaining to
Class L reinforcement are not included in RAM Concept.


AS 3600-2018 Design
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.6, 9.5.3.2 8.1.6, 9.5.3.2
One-Way Slab 8.1.6, 9.5.3.2, 8.1.6, 9.5.3.2
Two-Way Slab 8.1.6, 9.5.3.2 8.1.6, 9.5.3.2





AS 3600-2018 Design
section
Old Files

factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 8.1.6.2
67.5.4 Service
factors).

AS 3600-2018 Design
• Sections with unbonded prestressing are designed as RC sections per Note 1 in clause 8.6.1.
• A characteristic crack value can be input by the user or determined from the Design Code using the selected
“Environment” design strip or design section property. The “Environment” property controls the maximum
steel stress as follows:
• Protected: w’max = 0.4 mm
• Normal: w’max = 0.3 mm
• Corrosive, Very Corrosive: w’max = 0.2 mm
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.1, 8.6.2 8.6.3
One-Way Slab 9.5.1, 9.5.2 9.5.2.3
Two-Way Slab 9.5.1, 9.5.2 9.5.2.3
67.5.5 Max Service

factors).
• The check applies to RC Beams when “Without Direct Calculation (Tables)” is selected for the CS Crack
Control Design Type property for the design strip or design section.
• Sections with unbonded prestressing are designed as RC sections per Note 1 in clause 8.6.1.
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.6.2.2 (portions) (none)
One-Way Slab (none) (none)

AS 3600-2018 Design
67.5.6 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1, 8.2 8.1, 8.2
One-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2 8.1, 8.2
Two-Way Slab 8.1, 8.2 8.1, 8.2
67.5.7 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 8.1.5 8.1.5

AS 3600-2018 Design


• The value of fcm in the calculation is taken from Table 3.1.2. Linear interpolation is used between the table
values.
• The tabulated fcmi value for f’c = 100 Mpa is used when f’c exceeds 100 MPa. It is recommended to use
specified Ec values when f’c exceeds that value.

• The flexural tensile strength for concrete is calculated per 3.1.1.3 as function of f'c (using the alternative
option due to absence of data). The characteristic value is multiplied by 1.4 to obtain the mean value.

strains.
• The tendon stress never exceeds fpy.

• Strain compatibility design is used. See General Design Approach (on page 806) for a description of RAM
Concept’s strain compatibility design.
• See Concrete Stress-Strain Curves (on page 810) and for tendon, concrete and mild steel reinforcement stress
strain curves
• Capacity reduction factors ɸ are taken from Table 2.2.2(b), (c), and (d).

AS 3600-2018 Design
• Flexural capacity is limited to ɸMuo as required by clause 8.1.5.

• During the flexural/axial design in pass 1, an εx design is performed in preparation for shear calculations in
pass 2. In slabs, the design is performed to limit εx to the maximum value that would prevent the need for
transverse reinforcement. In beams, εx is designed to the maximum value that would satisfy strength using
only minimum transverse reinforcement. εx is never designed less than 0.001.Equation 8.2.7.1(1) is
implemented, with the vertical component of prestress, Pv, taken as zero. When no transverse reinforcement
is present, Vus is taken as zero.
• To satisfy the requirements of 8.2.8, RAM Concept calculates a shear/torsion tension force calculated per
equation 8.2.7.1(1) and adds it to the cross-section demand forces. Because 8.2.1.1(1) is only meant to
account for a single face, forces are tracked separately for the top and bottom faces of the section. The shear/
torsion tension force will effectively increase the tension demand on the tension face as required by equation
8.2.8.2(1) and reduce the compression demand on the compression face per 8.2.8.3(1). In compression fan
regions near supports where the diagonal shear strut angle is steeper, the shear tension diminishes on one
face to zero at the face of support, based upon the orientation of the diagonal shear strut. A compression fan
region factor is applied near supports to account for this effect.
• The designs including shear/torsion tension are enveloped with the strength designs without shear/torsion
tension, so the shear/torsion tension forces can only increase the reinforcement and will never reduce it.
Equations 8.2.8.2(2) and 8.2.8.3(2) are not directly applied, but RAM Concept’s approach ensures cross
section equilibrium with the additional shear/torsion tension forces as intended by this clause.
an over-reinforced section. See Ductility (on page 1059) for applying ductility requirements.
• If the section or strip is declared as not being post-tensioned, then post-tensioning Tendon forces are
ignored.
Note: The shear/torsion tension provisions for this standard are handled as a modification to the axial design
forces. Therefore, ignoring axial forces in strength design would also ignore the shear/torsion requirements
per the standard. Therefore, it is always recommended to include axial forces with strength design.
• RAM Concept does not consider section 17.3.5, which states that unbonded tendons should only be used on
• Section 8.3 (General Details for Beams) is partially implemented.

AS 3600-2018 Design

Pe/Ag and Pee terms of 8.1.6.1 are assumed to be zero (even if the cross section includes tendons), where Pe
is the total effective prestress force considered.
• Cracking is assumed to be top (negative moment) or bottom (positive moment) based on the “Min.
• See Cracking Moment Used in Design Calculations (on page 815) for a theoretical discussion of the “cracking
load”.

• The concrete compressive stresses are limited to 0.5 fcp for all cases.
will be added.

• See General Design Approach (on page 806) for general information on cross section calculations.
• Ductility check is performed in accordance with 8.1.5. For sections with M* > 0.8φMuo, a ductility design is
performed to limit kuo to ≤ 0.36. For sections with M*≤ 0.8φMuo no ductility check is performed but if kuo is
larger than 0.36 an appropriate capacity reduction factor φ is calculated from Table 2.2.2.
• M* is determined from load combinations associated with ductility design rules only. It is recommended that
the same load combinations be assigned to strength and ductility design to keep this check consistent.
• Section 8.1.5(a) and 8.1.5(b) are not implemented
• If the reinforcing bar covers are such that the compression bar is outside of the 0.36d zone, then a solution
• Section 14.4.6 is not implemented.

AS 3600-2018 Design

• Included code sections – 8.2.1.2, 8.2.1.3, 8.2.1.5, 8.2.1.6, 8.2.1.7, 8.2.1.9, 8.2.3.1, 8.2.3.3, 8.2.4.1, 8.2.4.2.1,
8.2.4.2.2 (part), 8.2.4.5, 8.2.5.2, 8.2.5.3, 8.2.5.4, 8.2.5.5, 8.2.5.6, 8.2.7, 8.2.8.1, 8.2.8.2 (part), 8.2.8.3 (part),
8.3.2.2
• Excluded code section – 8.2.1.4, 8.2.1.8, 8.2.2, 8.2.3.2, 8.2.4.2.2 (part), 8.2.4.3, 8.2.4.4, 8.2.5.1, 8.2.6, 8.2.8.2
(part), 8.2.8.3 (part), 8.3.1.4
• See Concrete “Core” Determination (on page 816) for the web width (bw) calculations.
• For section with multiple values of f’c, the minimum f’c is used.
• Where the design yield strength of shear reinforcement, fsy.f is used in calculations, it is limited to 500 MPa
per Table 3.2.1.
• In beams, transverse reinforcement consists of transverse reinforcement perpendicular to the axis of the
member.
• Where the vertical component of prestress Pv increases shear or when Pv is greater than the demand shear,
V* for a design envelope, the design shear will be taken as 1.2Pv + V* per clauses 8.2.1.3 and 2.5.2.2(b).
• Effective web width, bv is calculated in accordance with 8.2.1.5 with kd taken as 0.5 for bonded ducts and 1.2
for unbonded ducts. Ducts (bonded tendons only) with dd < bw/8 are ignored in this calculation. The
effective shear depth, dv, is calculated in accordance with 8.2.1.9 with d taken as the depth to the resultant
tension force.
• Minimum reinforcement is calculated in accordance with 8.2.1.7.
• Vu is calculated using clause 8.2.3.1, ignoring the vertical component of prestress Pv.
• Vu,max is calculated using equation 8.2.3.3(1), ignoring the vertical component of prestress Pv.
• Vuc is calculated using equation 8.2.4.1 where √fc’ does not exceed 8.0 MPa and kv is calculated according to
the general method of clause 8.2.4.2.
• In the calculation of kdg the maximum aggregate size is taken as 20 mm and the limitations for high strength
concrete and lightweight concrete are considered.
• RAM Concept rigorously calculates the longitudinal strain parameter, εx using a strain compatibility analysis.
A shear/torsion tension is added to the cross-section demand forces used for calculation of εx. This tension is
calculated using the shear component in equations 8.2.4.2.2, with Pv taken as zero and without the
simplifying assumption that cot θ = 2. The εx values are limited to a minimum value of -0.2×10-3 and a
maximum value of 3.0×10-3. In compression fan regions near supports where the diagonal shear strut angle
is steeper, the shear tension diminishes on one face to zero at the face of support, based upon the orientation
of the diagonal shear strut.
• In accordance with 8.2.4.5, if another loading case occurs which causes cracking on the compression face of
the case being calculated, the longitudinal strain parameter is taken as the maximum value of 3.0×10-3 to
reflect the potential for reduced aggregate interlock due to load reversal cracking.
• Longitudinal spacing of transverse shear fitments are limited by clause 8.3.2.2. Transverse spacing is not
checked.

• Included code sections – 8.2.1.2, 8.2.1.6, 8.2.3.4, 8.2.4.2.3 (part), 8.2.5.4, 8.2.5.5, 8.2.5.6, 8.3.3 (b) (part)
• Excluded code sections – 8.2.4.2.3 (part), 8.3.3 (c,d)

AS 3600-2018 Design
• Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design. See Concrete “Core” Determination (on page
816).
• If the core consists of multiple ribs, then the torsion calculations are performed for an average rib:
• The side cover is assumed to be equal to the greater of the top cover and the bottom cover.
• Acp and uc only consider the cross section “core”.
• Where the design yield strength of torsion reinforcement, fsy.f is used in calculations, it is limited to 500 MPa
per Table 3.2.1.
• Torsion reinforcement consists of longitudinal reinforcement and closed fitments perpendicular to the axis of
the member according to 8.2.5.4 through 8.2.5.6.
• Equation 8.2.1.2(2) is used to calculate Tcr, with σcp taken as the balanced axial compression at the centroid
of the cross section divided by the cross sectional area.
• Veq* is calculated using equation 8.2.1.2(3). Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh.
• Equation 8.2.3.4(3) is implemented such that the torsion demand reduces the shear capacity. For very high
torsions, this can make the shear capacity negative.
• Where minimum torsion reinforcement is required according to 8.2.1.6(2), the quantity is taken as the
maximum of equation 8.2.1.7 and 8.2.5.5 (a) and the fitments are required to be closed.
• RAM Concept calculates the longitudinal strain parameter, εx using the approach outlined in Section 8.2
Shear Design, but adding the torsion tension component in equations 8.2.4.2.3. The total shear/torsion
tension component is taken as the square root of sum of the squares as indicated in the equations. Pv is taken
as zero.
• The area of closed torsion reinforcement is determined by equation 8.2.5.6.
• The maximum torsion spacing of closed torsion fitments is calculated as the lesser of 0.12ut and 300 mm.
The term ut does not appear to be defined in AS 3600-2018, so the definition from AS 3600-2009 is used.
• Torsional and shear longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement
when determining effective depths and other bending parameters that affect shear design.

Section 8.1 is used for calculating the bending strength of slabs. Any reinforcement required is reported as being
due to 8.1. See Section 8.1 Strength of Beams in Bending (on page 1060) for details on the 8.1 implementation.
67.6.11 Section 8.6.1/9.5.1 Crack Control

When the “Environment” is set to “Protected”, only 8.1.6.1 or 9.5.1 (a) and (b) need be satisfied and no specific
crack control measures are required. If a characteristic maximum crack width value is input by the user, crack
control measures as outlined in the following section will be completed even if the “Environment” is set to
“Protected.”
8.6.1(a) and 9.5.1(a) - These sections are not implemented here. Clause 8.1.6.1 and 9.1.1 are implemented in the
minimum reinforcement design.

AS 3600-2018 Design
8.6.1(b) and 9.5.1(b) – These sections are always used in the service design, but never used in the max service
design.
For beams, reinforcement is added on each face in tension to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm. For one-way
and two-way slabs, reinforcement is added to limit maximum spacing to 300 mm or two times the cross section
depth, whichever is smaller.
• All bars on the appropriate face (including fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section)
are considered for spacing requirements. A fractional number of bars and spaces may be used.
• User-defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component
For all other Environments, additional crack control design measures are implemented. There are two options
for crack control design:
1. Without Direct Calculation (Tables) (see Section 8.6.2.2/9.5.2.2 Assessment of Crack Widths for RC Beams
and Slabs Without Direct Calculation (Tables) (on page 1065) and Section 8.6.3/9.5.2.3 Crack Control for PT
Beams and Slabs Without Direct Calculation (Tables) (on page 1066))
2. Crack Width Calculation (see Section 8.6.3/9.5.2.3 Crack Control with Direct Crack Width Calculation (on
page 1067))
A characteristic maximum crack width can be input by the user or determined from the Design Code using the
selected “Environment” design strip or design section property. The “Environment” property controls the
maximum steel stress as follows:
• Protected: No crack control checks completed unless a characteristic maximum crack width is input
• Normal: w’max = 0.3 mm
• Corrosive, Very Corrosive: w’max = 0.2 mm
Sections with unbonded prestressing are designed as RC sections per Note 1 in clause 8.6.18.6.1 for beams or
9.5.1 for slabs.
67.6.12 Section 8.6.2.2/9.5.2.2 Assessment of Crack Widths for RC Beams and

Slabs Without Direct Calculation (Tables)
When crack widths are assessed without direct calculation, the reinforcement stress is limited to the values in
Tables 8.6.2.2(A) and (B) for beams or Tables 9.5.2.1(A) and (B) for slabs. If a characteristic maximum crack
width is input by the user and the input value is between the tabulated minimum and maximum value in the
tables, linear interpolation is used to determine the corresponding maximum steel stress. If the input value is
outside the bounds of the tables, crack widths will be assessed using the lower or upper bound crack widths in
the table (0.2 mm and 0.4 mm, respectively).
8.6.2.2(a) – This section is used if the cross section is a tension member and the environment is not protected.
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.2.2(A).
• The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.2.2(A).

AS 3600-2018 Design
8.6.2.2(b) – This section is used if the cross section is not a tension member and the environment is not
protected.
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.2.2(A)
or Table 8.6.2.2(B), whichever is larger.
• The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.2.2(A).
• The bar spacing for Table 8.6.2.2(B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including
fractional components for bars at an angle to the cross section). Bars with a diameter of less than half the
diameter of the maximum bar diameter on the face being considered are converted to an equivalent
number of hypothetical bars with a diameter of half the maximum bar diameter. This conversion is based
upon area. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be used.
9.5.2.2 – This section is only used for service design, but is not used in protected environments.
• Reinforcement is added both faces to keep the reinforcement stresses within the limits of Table 8.6.2.2(A)
Table9.5.2.1(A) or 9.5.2.1 (B), whichever is larger.
• The maximum diameter of all reinforcement assigned to a particular face is used in Table 8.6.2.2(A) or Table
9.5.2.1 (A).
• The bar spacing for Table 9.5.2.1 (B) is calculated using all bars on the appropriate face (including fractional
67.6.13 Section 8.6.3/9.5.2.3 Crack Control for PT Beams and Slabs Without
Direct Calculation (Tables)
′
If the tensile stress in the concrete does not exceed 0.25 f c then there is no need for crack control
• User-defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component
• Each bonded tendon duct (that is in the tension zone based on gross section stresses) is considered to be
equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension face). In the spacing calculation, all

AS 3600-2018 Design
bonded tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize the number of mild steel bars
required. A fractional number of bars and number of spaces may be specified to meet the spacing
requirement.
Section (a) with the 0.6 f ′ c limit is ignored because it does not give any guidance on how much reinforcement
is necessary. Section (b) is always used instead.
Reinforcement is added to satisfy the incremental steel stress per section (b)
concrete stress exceeds 0.25 f ′ c ) this criterion is skipped.
67.6.14 Section 8.6.3/9.5.2.3 Crack Control with Direct Crack Width Calculation
When crack widths are assessed by direct calculation, cracked equilibrium strains are calculated using the
equations in 8.6.2.3 assuming that concrete has no tensile strength. The characteristic maximum crack width can
be input directly or using the selected “Environment” as noted in Section 8.6.1/9.5.1 Crack Control (on page
1064). No limits are imposed on the input crack widths.
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs and other wide cross sections, but will not provide accurate crack
width predictions for these wide cross sections when reinforcement is not spaced according to the varying
stress patterns across the section. For narrower cross sections with a uniform stress pattern, the bonded
reinforcement should be spaced uniformly. For this reason, it may not be appropriate to do a “crack width”
onlydesign on full panel strip widths.
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded tendons are considered, and the balance loading
will be considered if included in the load combinations.
w = sr,max(εsm- εcm) ≤ w’max
εsm - εcm = σscr/Es – 0.6(fct/(Espeff ))(1 + ne peff ) + εcs ≥ 0.6 σscr / Es
where
σscr = tension stress in un-tensioned reinforcement from a cracked section
analysis, or maximum differential bonded tendon stress from tendon
stress level at zero strain in the concrete at the same level
εcs = input ultimate shrinkage strain (Criteria > Calc Options > Load
History/ECR tab)
ne = effective module ratio = (1+ σcc) Es / Ec
σcc = creep coefficient (since RAM Concept does not know at what time
cracking occurred, this value is conservatively taken as zero)
fct = mean value of the axial tensile strength of concrete
peff = Ast/ Ac,eff
Ast = area of un-tensioned reinforcement or bonded tendons within area hc,ef
Ac,eff = area of concrete within depth hc,ef
hc,ef = minimum of 2.5(D-d), (D-kd)/3, or D/2
D = overall depth of the cross-section
d = effective depth of the tension steel, taken as the resultant tension force
depth
kd = depth of the neutral axis of the cracked section

AS 3600-2018 Design
sr,max = 3.4c + 0.3k1k2db / peff = maximum crack spacing (eq. 8.6.2.3(3))

c = average cover to reinforcement, weighted by bar/tendon units
k1 = coefficient accounting for bond properties of reinforcement
• 0.8 for un-tensioned reinforcement or 1.6 for bonded tendons
• averaged for cross sections containing both tendons and un-
tensioned reinforcement, weighted by bar/tendon units
k2 = coefficient accounting for longitudinal strain distribution
• 0.5 for bending
• (ε1 + ε2) / 2ε1 for combined tension and bending
67.6.15 Section 9.5.3.2 Minimum Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement in

Primary Direction
This criterion is applied as part of the minimum reinforcement designer as it is independent of the magnitude of
forces upon a cross section.
This criterion is applied to both beams and slabs, although its application to beams is not required by AS 3600.
Reinforcement may be applied to both faces if the cross section is subject to both positive and negative moments
and the “tension face” reinforcement location is chosen.
• For sections declared as post-tensioned, each bonded tendon duct (that is in the tension zone based on gross
section stresses) is considered to be equivalent to a single mild steel bar (even if it is far from the tension
face). In the spacing calculation, all bonded tendon ducts are assumed to be optimally positioned to minimize
the number of mild steel bars required.
User-defined reinforcement that is at an angle to the cross section will only have the component perpendicular
The amount of reinforcement provided is equal to 0.75 (per 9.5.3.2(b)) times the amount specified by either
9.5.3.4(a)(i), 9.5.3.4(b)(i), or `9.5.3.4(c).
• For “protected” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(1.75 – 2.5 σcp)(Ag)/
1000
• For “normal” environments, the amount of reinforcement provided is: As = (0.75)(3.5 – 2.5 σcp )(Ag)/1000
2.5 σ cp )(Ag)/1000
For non-PT design strips and design sections, σcp is taken as zero.

AS 3600-2018 Design

Refer to Punching Shear Design Notes (on page 1188) (no change with respect to the former code).

BS 8110: 1997 Design
68
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of BS8110: 1997 and Technical Report 43 (known as TR 43).
68.1 BS 8110 / TR 43 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new BS
8110 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly
68.1.1 Default Pattern Loading Factors

To fulfill the requirements of considering “Adverse” and “Beneficial” loadings required in code section 2.4.3.1,
RAM Concept uses pattern loading factors. For dead loadings, RAM Concept uses pattern factors of 1.0 and
1.0/1.4, or 0.71. For live loadings, RAM Concept uses Pattern factors of 1.0 and 0. See “About load pattern” for
further information.
The applied dead load pattern factors have the side effect that the self-weight is patterned in the Initial Service
LC which can cause conservative calculations for the Initial Service Design. If problems are experienced with this
design, a separate model and investigation can be used without the dead load pattern factors to investigate the
Initial Service Design.

BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations

Combination.
68.2 BS 8110 / TR 43 Default Load Combinations

RAM Concept creates when you start a new BS 8110 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are
combinations are from BS8110-1: 1997, unless noted otherwise.
68.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:



68.2.4 Ultimate LC: 1.4D + 1.6L + 1.6S


is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are:

currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are:

68.2.7 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2S + 1.2W

factors used are:
68.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: D + 1.4W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind loads. The load factors
used are:
68.2.9 Accident LC
This load combination is intended to fulfill the requirements of code section 2.4.3.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4.
Live Loading: 0.35 (std) (this is 1.05/3) and 0.0 (alt)
This load combination is used by the Accident Design Rule Set.

This load combination is intended for use in load history deflection calculations. For the purpose of this load

BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors

68.3 BS 8110 / BS 6399-1 live load factors

68.4 BS 8110/TR43 Material Behaviors

reinforcement when using BS 8110 / TR 43.

This elastic modulus of concrete is defined by the user in the materials window. You can choose to use the code
equation of BS8110 Figure 2.1 or a specified value.

When the BS 8110 code equation is selected the following values are used:
f cui
Eci = 5, 500 1.5
f cu
Ec = 5, 500 1.5
where
fcui = cube strength at stressing
fcu = 28 day cube strength
For calculations based on the “concrete section”, concrete is assumed to be a perfectly linear-elastic material
with no stress or strain limits.
For detailed cross section analyses, four different stress strain curves are used. All four stress-strain curves are
parabolic-linear curves as detailed in. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear curve is at 2fc / Ec,
where fc is the peak stress and Ec is the elastic modulus at zero strain.

BS 8110/TR43 Material Behaviors
For initial stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress strain curve is
0.67fcui
For service stress conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.67fcu
For strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.67fcu / 1.5
For accident (localised damage) strength conditions, the peak stress in the stress-strain curve is
0.67fcu/ 1.3
strain.
For ECR calculations, the maximum tension stress in concrete is assumed to be 0.6 f cu .
For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened
concrete stress strain curve is used:
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of BS 8110-2:1985 Figure 3.1. A
comparison of the stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:

Figure 513: Figure 3.1 provision
Figure 514: RAM Concept implementation
Since RAM Concept’s crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete
stress strain curve) for the 0.8fy provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack
width design is done will represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension
stiffened concrete stress strain curve. Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use
the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve only.
68.4.2 (Untensioned) Reinforcement Behavior

Untensioned reinforcement is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic material, as is shown in code figure 2.2. The
elastic modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window instead of the code-specified 200,000
N/mm2.
For strength considerations, a γ m of 1.05 is used (Amendment 1 and 2).

For strength considerations, a γ m of 1.15 is used (Amendment 3).

For all other considerations (including accident strength) a γ m of 1.0 is used.

Prestressed reinforcement is modeled as using a power formula. The curve is defined by four parameters:
Eps = the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window)

Fpy = the “yield” stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
Fpu = the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
γm = partial safety factor for materials
These four parameters are used to calculate the three parameters needed for the power formula, as described in
Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves (on page 806) in “Section Design Notes”. The three parameters
are:
Eps' = Eps
Fpy' = Fpy/γm
Fpu' = Fpu/γm
For strength considerations, a γm of 1.05 is used (Amendment 1 and 2).
For strength considerations, a γm of 1.15 is used (Amendment 3).
For all other considerations (including accident strength) a γm of 1.0 is used.

strains.
For “accident” strength conditions, RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress.
For ultimate resistance moment calculations, RAM Concept's general approach to unbonded tendon stress-strain
curves is detailed in Chapter 51, “Section Design Notes”. For BS 8110-1997, the maximum unbonded tendon
stress (fpb, called flimit in Chapter 51, “Section Design Notes”) is defined by equation 52 and 0.7fpu.
When equation 52 is used in a cross section that contains multiple tendons, the following terms are used in the
calculation:
l / d = length of an individual tendon divided by its depth
fpu Aps = sum of all the individual tendons' fpu multiplied by the vector component of their Aps.
fcu bd = minimum concrete cube strength multiplied by the compression face width and the depth to the
centroid of the vector component tendon area
For BS 8110: 1997, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is: k = 5d / L
where

BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection
L = length of the unbonded tendon.

d = depth of the post-tensioning tendon (measured from furthest concrete face)
This is equivalent to assuming a neutral axis depth of 0.5 d and “zone of inelasticity” of ten times this length [see
BS 8110 code text that accompanies equation 52].
In equation 52, RAM Concept needs to determine “d” and “b”. RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed
on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive
and negative moment capacity calculations at each cross section). This assumption typically has no impact on
the ultimate stress in the tendon as when the tendon is on the “wrong” side of the cross section centroid, the
stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to the small tension strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross
section at the tendon elevation.
The tendon length “ l ” in equation 52 is (conservatively) not modified to assume multiple simultaneous inelastic
zones.
68.5 BS 8110 / TR 43 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which BS 8110 / TR 43 code rules to apply based on the
design strip segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under
consideration.

Design System RC PT - bonded tendons PT - unbonded tendons
Beam 3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.4 4.12.2 3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.4, 4.12.2,

TR43/6.10.6

Design System RC PT - bonded tendons PT - unbonded tendons
One-Way Slab 3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.7 4.12.2 3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.7, 4.12.2,

TR43 / 6.10.6
Two-Way Slab 3.12.5, 3.12.11.2.7 TR43 / 6.10.6 TR43 / 6.10.6





section
Old Files
Related Links
68.5.3 Initial Service (“Transfer”)

factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 4.3.5.1

4.3.5.2

4.3.5.2

4.3.5.2

68.5.4 Service
factors).
• Protected: Class 3 (0.2 mm crack)
• Normal: Class 3 (0.1 mm crack)
• Corrosive: Class 2
• Very Corrosive: Class 1
Design System RC PT
Beam 3.12.11.2.1 3.12.11.2.1

4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
One-Way Slab 3.12.11.2.1 3.12.11.2.1

4.3.4.2
4.3.4.3 / TR 43
Two-Way Slab 3.12.11.2.1 4.3.4.2

4.3.4.3 / TR 43
68.5.5 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).

Design System RC PT
Beam 3.4.4 4.3.7

3.4.5 4.3.8
3.4.5.13* 4.3.9*

3.4.5 4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13* 4.3.9*

3.4.5 4.4.1 / 4.3.8
3.4.5.13* 4.3.9*
Note: * - 3.4.5.13 and 4.3.9 are applied only if “beam” torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
68.5.6 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
One-Way Slab 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1
Two-Way Slab 3.2.2.1 4.2.3.1

BS8110 / TR43 code implementation
68.5.7 Accident
• Strength calculations in accordance with code sections 2.4.3.2, 2.4.4.2 and TR 43 section 6.10.4 are
performed if appropriate.
• Unbonded post-tensioning tendons are assumed to have zero stress.
on both faces).
• Reduced γ m factors are used in the strength calculations. For concrete in flexure, γ m = 1.3 and for
reinforcement, γ m = 1.0. Note that for shear reinforcement calculations, the “0.95fyv” (Amendment 1 and 2)
or “0.87fyv” (Amendment 3) values are changed to “1.0fyv”.
Table 80: Accident rule mapping
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 4.3.7

4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced γ m )
One-Way Slab (none) 4.3.7

4.3.8
4.3.9* (reduced γ m )
Note: * - 4.3.9 is applied only if “beam” torsion is selected (see torsion design notes)
68.6 BS8110 / TR43 code implementation
68.6.1 Section 3.2.2.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)

Included code sections - 3.2.2.1 (item b).
Excluded code sections - 3.2.2.1 (rest).
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies “Condition 2” as a limit to the neutral axis
depth, thereby ensuring ductility.
The neutral axis depth is limited to 0.6 times the effective depth.

68.6.2 Section 3.4.4 Design resistance moment of beams

Included code sections - 3.4.4.1.
Excluded code sections - 3.4.4.2 through 3.4.4.5 (these are optional simplifications of section 3.4.4.1).
Items a, b, c, d and e of section 3.4.4.1 are followed.
The optional 0.1fcu clause at the end of section 3.4.4.1 is not followed
Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is 0.0035. The simplified stress block of
Figure 3.3 is not used.
See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves (γ m = 1.5 for concrete; γ m = 1.05 for
reinforcement (Amendment 1 and 2), γ m = 1.15 for reinforcement (Amendment 3)).
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the stress-strain curve of each concrete block is used
appropriately.
Axial forces (loads) on the section are either considered or ignored based on the settings in the design section or
design span under consideration. If axial forces are chosen to be included, the cross section is designed to
provide the required moment simultaneously with the given axial force.
equilibrium; designing for the axial loads (by selecting the appropriate design section or design span properties)
is necessary to ensure a safe design.
over-reinforced section. See Ductility in the previous section for applying ductility requirements.
68.6.3 Section 3.4.5 Design shear resistance of beams

Included code sections - 3.4.5.1 to 3.4.5.4, 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.12
Excluded code sections - 3.4.5.5 (partial), 3.4.5.6 - 3.4.5.11, 3.4.5.13 (considered separately)
See Concrete “Core” Determination (on page 816) for calculation of bv.
vc is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the fcu modifier term.

Longitudinal reinforcement designed by Minimum, Service and Strength designers is considered in the
determination of As used in the calculation of vc.
100As / bvd is taken as 0.15 minimum, to follow the “=0.15” in table 3.8.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used.
place at time of the shear being investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in compression,
then the effective depth is calculated as the distance from the compression-most face to the furthest active
reinforcement (in this case 100As / bvd is taken as 0.15).
vc’ is calculated as the minimum of Equation 6a and Equation 6b, but never less than zero.
fyv is limited to 460 N/mm2 (Amendment 1 and 2) or 500 N/mm2 (Amendment 3).
Links are provided per Table 3.7
Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole length of the beam.
Maximum allowed shear stress is the smaller of 5 N/mm2 and 0.8 f cu .
Spacing of links along the span is 0.75 d. The spacing across the span is not considered.
Bent up bars and regions close to supports are not considered.
Bottom loaded beams are not considered.
The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked.
Net axial forces are considered if the Consider Net Axial… checkbox is checked.
68.6.4 Section 3.4.5.13 Torsion

Included code sections - 2.4.1, 2.4.2, 2.4.4 (part) to 2.4.8
Excluded code sections - 2.4.3, 2.4.4 (part), 2.4.9, 2.4.10
Note: All code references in this section refer to BS 8110, Part 2
Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design. See Concrete “Core” Determination (on page 816).
Torsional shear stress vt is calculated using section 2.4.4.1 equation 2.
Maximum combined shear stress vtu is calculated by Table 2.3, note 2 including the y1 modification factor and
compared to vt. Any remaining capacity is used to calculate maximum remaining shear capacity.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with Table 2.4.
Area of torsion links and longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in accordance with section 2.4.7.
Maximum spacing of links is the least of x1, y1 /2 or 200 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum links will be provided at all locations.
Note: Assume γ in equations in table 2.3, note 2 is a misprint, and should instead be .

68.6.5 Section 3.5.4 Resistance moment of solid slabs

Included code sections - 3.5.4
Excluded code sections - none
See section 3.4.4 for additional details.
68.6.6 Section 3.5.5 Shear resistance of solid slabs

Included code sections - 3.5.5.1 to 3.5.5.3
Excluded code sections - none
Section 3.4.5 for is used to determine the shear resistance of solid slabs, except that Table 3.16 (with bv
determined using the “shear core”) is used in place of Table 3.7.
68.6.7 Section 3.12.5 Minimum areas of reinforcement in members
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned members that are primarily bonded. Refer to “Determination of
Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections” for discussion.
Included code sections - 3.12.5.1 through 3.12.5.3

Excluded code sections - 3.12.5.4
Reinforcement is provided per Table 3.25, assuming that sections are rectangular and subject to flexure.
Reinforcement is provided such that:
Asfy ≥ (0.0013)(460N/mm2)Ac (Amendment 1 and 2)
Asfy ≥ (0.0013)(500N/mm2)Ac (Amendment 3)
As ≥ (0.0013)Ac
For sections that are not declared as post-tensioned, all post-tensioned reinforcement is ignored.
For post-tensioned beams and post-tensioned one-way slabs, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-
most side of the cross section centroid, or is within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is
considered to be equivalent to un-tensioned 460 N/mm2 reinforcement for Amendment 1 and 2, and 500
N/mm2 reinforcement for Amendment 3, and will reduce the amount of un-tensioned reinforcement necessary.
Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross section will have vector components of their reinforcement areas
considered toward the requirement. This interpretation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of
the code requirements.

Note: This section is never used for post-tensioned two-way slabs.
68.6.8 Section 3.12.11.2.1 Bar spacing

For all RC structures, and PT beams and one-way slabs, crack checks are performed per Part 2, 3.8.2 and crack
widths are limited to 0.3 mm. This crack width design supersedes the other requirements in this section.
RAM Concept’s implementation of the crack width calculations are detailed in “Part 2, Section 3.8.”3.
User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the
cross section consider the sum of their vector components divided by the gross area of one bar as the total
number of provided bars for spacing calculations.
68.6.9 Section 3.12.11.2.4 Beam Bar spacing
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams that are primarily bonded. Refer to “Determination of
In beams, the clear distance between bars is limited to 300 mm. This code section is applied even though it is not
required as crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In post-tensioned beams, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross
section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as
equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their
plan locations are ignored. This implementation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the
code requirements.
68.6.10 Section 3.12.11.2.7 Slab Bar spacing
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to “Determination of
In RC slabs and PT one-way slabs, the clear distance between bars is limited to the smaller of 750 mm or 3 d.
This code section is applied even though it is not required as crack widths are controlled per 3.12.11.2.1.
In one-way slabs, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section
centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to
an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes - their plan locations
are ignored. This implementation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code
requirements.

68.6.11 Section 4.2.3.1 Redistribution of Moments (Ductility Check)

RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies item “c” as a limit to the neutral axis depth,
thereby ensuring ductility.
68.6.12 Section 4.3.4.2 Compressive stresses in concrete

For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to fcu.
The increase to 0.40fcu for certain portions of continuous members is not implemented.
For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete
section centroid are limited to 0.25fcu.
Two-way slab compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete section centroid
are limited to 0.24fcu in the support zone and 0.33fcu in the span zone [TR 43 Table 2].
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used to determine the limit stress and the peak
stress reported may be approximate.
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned.
Note: Assume the in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
68.6.13 Section 4.3.4.3 Flexural tension stresses in concrete

The interaction of the BS 8110 requirements, the TR 43 requirements, the different classes and the use of
bonded and unbonded tendons makes describing the service tensile stress limits and requirements in text form
very confusing. In some circumstances, BS 8110 and TR 43 conflict, while in other circumstances neither one
explicitly considers a particular configuration.
Our implementation of these requirements is detailed in the table below. For each combination of tendon type,
structure type and class, two limit stresses and a reinforcement calculation are listed. The first limit stress is the
maximum stress allowed if no supplemental un-tensioned reinforcement is used. The second limit stress is the
absolute maximum stress allowed. The reinforcement calculation details how to calculate the required
supplemental reinforcement when stresses exceed the first stress limit.

Table 81: Flexural tension limit rule mapping
Tendons Member Class Tension limit without Absolute tension limit Reinforcement
Type supplementary calculation
reinforcement
Bonded Beam 1 0 0 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Beam 2 0.36 f cu 0.36 f cu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Beam 3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Beam 3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 1 0 0 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 2 0.36 f cu 0.36 f cu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 3 / 0.1 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded One-way 3 / 0.2 mm Tables 4.2 / 4.3 0.25fcu 4.3.4.3 (c)
Bonded Two-way All TR 43 Table 2 TR 43 Table 2 TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 1 0 0 TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 2 0 0.36 f cu TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 3 / 0.1 mm 0 Tables 4.2 / 4.3* TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded Beam 3 / 0.2 mm 0 Tables 4.2 / 4.3* TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 1 0 0 TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 2 0 0.36 f cu TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 3 / 0.1 mm 0 Tables 4.2 / 4.3* TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded One-way 3 / 0.2 mm 0 Tables 4.2 / 4.3* TR 43, 6.10.5
Unbonded Two-way All TR 43 Table 2 TR 43 Table 2 TR 43, 6.10.5
Note: * - When Tables 4.2/4.3 are used with unbonded tendons, the values for “grouted post-tensioned tendons”
and a 0.1mm crack width are used.

68.6.14 Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections

For the purposes of this section, a cross section is considered as being “with bonded tendons” if the majority of
the tendons in the cross section (based on vector-component areas) are bonded. Cross sections that do not
qualify as “with bonded tendons” are considered as being “with unbonded tendons”. A cross section without
tendons is therefore considered as being “with unbonded tendons”.
68.6.15 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement

Supplemental reinforcement is calculated when the “unreinforced” stress limits are exceeded, even for the
structure types and classes where it is not anticipated by BS 8110. For example, if a class 1 beam has tension
stresses exceeding 0 N/mm2, it will be marked as having failed the 4.3.4.3 criterion; supplemental reinforcement
will still be calculated for the class 1 beam even though the reinforcement cannot solve the failure.
68.6.16 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per 4.3.4.3(c)

The calculation of supplemental reinforcement per 4.3.4.3(c) is as follows:
Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress
As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (400 N/mm2)]
where Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone
68.6.17 Calculation of Supplemental Reinforcement Per TR 43, 6.10.5

0.625Asfy = F1 for support regions of two-way slabs
0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1 for span regions of two-way slabs
0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1 for all regions of beams and one-way slabs
where
F1 = tensile force in concrete
As = area of un-tensioned reinforcement added
fy = yield strength of un-tensioned reinforcement
Aps = vector component area of bonded (grouted) tendons in tension zone
fp = tendon yield stress - tendon effective stress
It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the tension zone if a very large concrete
cover is specified.

Note: For span regions of two-way slabs, and all regions of one-way slabs, this implementation is somewhat
different from a literal code interpretation as it considers the possibility of a mix of bonded and unbonded
tendons in a cross section. It also may require additional un-tensioned reinforcement for a cross section with
bonded tendons, which the code does not require.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used to determine the limit stresses and the peak
68.6.18 Section 4.3.5.1 Design compressive stresses (Transfer)

For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to
0.5fci.
For beams and one-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete sections, at the concrete
section centroid are limited to 0.4fci.
For two-way slabs, compressive stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to 0.24fci in the
support region and 0.33fci in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2].
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fci is used to determine the limit stress and the peak
No check is made to ensure the cross section is post-tensioned
Note: Assume the in TR 43 table 2 for compressive stresses is a misprint.
68.6.19 Section 4.3.5.2 Design tensile stresses in flexure (Transfer)

For beams and one-way slabs, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the concrete section, are limited to:
Class 1: 1 N/mm2
Class 2: 0.36 f ci .
Class 3: 0.36 f ci .
For Class 2 and 3 beams and one-way slabs, where the stresses above are exceeded, bonded reinforcement is
provided as follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]: As = Fi / (0.625fy)
For two-way slabs without supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the
concrete section, are limited to 0 in the support region and 0.15 f ci in the span region [TR 43, 6.10.2].
For two-way slabs with supplemental untensioned reinforcement, tensile stresses in concrete, based on the
concrete section, are limited to 0.45 f ci . Bonded reinforcement is provided as follows [TR 43, 6.10.2/6.10.5]:
As = Fi / (0.625fy)

For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fci is used to determine the limit stress and the peak
Two way slabs can never exceed 0.45 f ci , while there is no limit for beam and one-way slabs that are class 2 or
3.
Note: Clause 4.3.5.2 is unclear on this stress limit for Class 2, as it states that additional reinforcement should be
provided “if necessary”. This is interpreted as reinforcement is only necessary if the tensile stress exceeds
0.36 f ci (since this stress is less than the cracking stress). Hence the stress may exceed this limit if the
additional reinforcement is provided.
68.6.20 Section 4.3.7 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure

Included code sections - 4.3.7.1, 4.2.7.2, 4.3.7.3 (partial)
Excluded code sections - 4.3.7.3 (partial), 4.3.7.4
See section 3.4.4 for general approach. Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or
design section setting), then the diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic
(secondary) tension in many design sections, as is appropriate.
Post-tensioning Tendons are included. See “Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves” for tendon stress-
strain curves.
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility.
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in
“Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves –General Theory”).
Equation 51 and Table 4.4 are not used.
68.6.21 Section 4.3.8 Design shear resistance of beams

Included code sections - 4.3.8.1 to 4.3.8.8, 4.3.8.10
Vco is calculated per equation 54. The flange/web intersection is not checked.
Vcr is calculated per equation 55
The value of Vc is used as shown in the following table.

Table 82: Vc rule mapping
Moment Vc Implementation
M < Mo Vc = Vco
Vc = (stress)bvh
M ≥ Mo Vc = min (Vco, Vcr)

and tension is on the “tension” face * Vc = (stress)bvh

and no tension on the “tension” face * Vc = (stress)bvh
d = dt (assumed)
As = 0 (none in “tension zone”)
Aps = 0 (none in “tension zone”)
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where
the section is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo. For the unusual
case of M ≥ Mo and the section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative
assumptions of column four are made.
“d” is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-
tensioning). This is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression
fibre to the centroid of the tendons as defined in the code.
“ dt ” is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the
tendons, whichever is greater.
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in calculations.
determination of As used in the calculation of vc.
bv is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and
two-thirds of the width of bonded tendons is deducted from bv.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the calculations are averaged.
vc is calculated per Note 2 of Table 3.8, including the fcu modifier term, with (Aps + As) used in place of As. See
section 3.4.5 for detail of the implementation of this table.
When unbonded tendons are used, the value of vc is reduced by a factor of 0.9 [TR 43, 6.11.1].
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 4.3.8.6 to 4.3.8.8.
Link spacing is calculated per 4.3.8.10, with lateral spacing requirements ignored. The “web thickness” used in
the calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the core width is made up of
multiple webs. In such cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each containing only one
web.

Links are only provided in the regions required by calculation, not the whole length of the beam.
68.6.22 Section 4.3.9 Torsion

See section 3.4.5.13 for details.
68.6.23 Section 4.4.1 / 4.3.8 Slabs (shear)

One-way shear (not punching shear) design of prestressed slabs is calculated per section 4.3.8 with one
exception. Links are not required unless V is greater than or equal to Vc.
68.6.24 Section 4.12.2 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons

Un-stressed reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based on the “Min.
Only sections within 1/6 of the span length from supports or 1/6 of the span length from midspan are checked,
as these are considered as the likely locations of first cracking of concrete.
moment (note that the 1.2 factor is not used in BS 8110)
The cracking stress is 0.6 f cu . For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum fcu for the cross
section is used.
68.6.25 Part 2, Section 3.8.3 Assessment of Crack Widths

Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses remain below 0.8fy.
Crack widths are calculated per BS 8110 Part 2, equation 12. A concrete stress strain curve that approximates
tension stiffening is used - see Concrete Behavior (on page 1074). Creep is not considered.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below 0.3mm (per 3.2.4.2).
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but equation 12 will not provide accurate crack width predictions for
two way slabs when wide design strip segments or wide design sections are used.
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the
balance loading will be considered if included in the load combinations.
In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, equation 12 can be manipulated as follows:
Crack width = (3acrεm ) / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)]

= εmsc
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = crack spacing
RAM Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x).

RAM Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing.
Bars and tendons that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored.
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / ht]
where
ht = (h-x) = height of tension zone
sc = 3acr ht / [ht +2(acr - cmin) ]
sc [ht +2(acr - cmin) ] = 3acr ht
sc ht +2scacr - 2sccmin = 3acr ht
sc ht - 2sccmin = 3acr ht - 2scacr
sc ht - 2sccmin = acr (3ht - 2sc)
acr = (sc ht - 2sccmin) / (3ht - 2sc)
However, acr = sb2 + cmin

2
, where sb = half the horizontal spacing between reinforcement
sb2 + cmin
2
(
= sc h t − 2sc cmin ) / (3h t − 2sc)
Rearranging and solving for sb produces:
sb = (sc h t − 2sc cmin )2 / (3h t − 2sc )2 − cmin

2
Using this final equation, RAM Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in
controlling cracking. RAM Concept iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face
width.
For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the “bar”
diameter is assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
68.6.26 TR 43 / Section 6.10.6 Minimum un-tensioned reinforcement
Note: This section is not used for post-tensioned beams or one-way slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to
“Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections” for discussion.
For post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 3.12.5 and 3.12.11.2 are also applied. (Note
that “Table 3.27” in TR 43 refers to the 1985 BS 8110 - this table has been renumbered 3.25 in the 1997 edition).
This interpretation is somewhat more conservative than a literal reading of the code requirements.
For post-tensioned two-way slabs with bonded or unbonded tendons, un-tensioned reinforcement is provided in
support regions as follows:
As = 0.00075Ac.
than 0.2.

For design sections, this criteria is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked.
The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented.
68.6.27 Punching shear design

EC2 (EN 1992-2004) punching design is used instead of BS8110. Refer to Punching Shear Design Notes (on page
1188).

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
69
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980.
69.1 IS 456 / IS 1343 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new IS
456 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly

Combination.
69.2 IS 456 Default Load Combinations

RAM Concept creates when you start a new IS 456 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are
combinations are from IS 456 : 2000 unless noted otherwise.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
IS 456 Default Load Combinations
69.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:


69.2.4 Ultimate LC: 1.5D + 1.5L + 1.5S


IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design


is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. The load factors used are:

69.2.7 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 1.2S + 1.2W

factors used are:

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
69.2.8 Ultimate Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.5W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied wind loads. The load factors
used are:

It is currently only generated for mat / raft foundations. Only the live load percentages specified in Table 8 of IS
1893 (Part 1): 2002 are applied. 25% of the Live (Unreducible) and Live (Reducible) loads are applied, and 50%
of the Live (Storage) loads are applied. No Live (Roof) loads are applied. These percentages are incorporated
into the following combinations. The load factors used are:
Live (Reducible) Loading: 0.2 (std & alt) [0.25(0.8)]
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.4 (std & alt) [0.5(0.8)]
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.2 (std & alt) [0.25(0.8)]
Snow Loading: 0.2 (std & alt) [0.25(0.8)]
69.2.10 Service Seismic LC: D + E


IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
69.2.11 Ultimate Seismic LC: 1.2D + 1.2L + 0.3S + 1.2E

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state with applied seismic and live loads. Only
the live load percentages specified in Table 8 of IS 1893 (Part 1): 2002 are applied. 25% of the Live
(Unreducible) and Live (Reducible) loads are applied, and 50% of the Live (Storage) loads are applied. No Live
(Roof) loads are applied. These percentages are incorporated into the following combinations. The load factors
used are:
Live (Storage) Loading: 0.6 (std & alt) [0.5(1.2)]
Live (Parking) Loading: 0.3 (std & alt) [0.25(1.2)]
Snow Loading: 0.3 (std & alt) [0.25(1.2)]
69.2.12 Ultimate Seismic LC: 0.9D + 1.5E

factors used are:

This load combination is intended for use in load history deflection calculations. For the purpose of this load

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
IS 875 (Part 2) live load factors
69.3 IS 875 (Part 2) live load factors

• car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer
• storage loads on a Live (Storage) layer if you would like their effects to be reducible for beams (only), and on
a Live (Unreducible) layer if you do not want their effects to be reduced for any member.
Note: If you draw car park loads on a Live (Storage) layer, however, RAM Concept applies a (conservative) load
factor of 2.76 in the LT Uncracked Deflection LC.
69.4 IS 456 Material Behaviors

reinforcement when using IS 456/1343.

equation of clause 6.2.3.1 or a specified value.

When the IS 456 code equation is selected the following values are used:
Eci = 5, 500 f cui
Ec = 5, 500 f cu
where
fcui = cube strength at stressing
fcu = 28 day cube strength
For detailed cross section analyses, three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves
are parabolic-linear curves as detailed in IS456 Fig 21. The transition strain from the parabolic to the linear
curve is at 0.002.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
IS 456 Material Behaviors
0.67fcui
0.67fcu
0.67fcu / 1.5
strain.
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked cross-
section strain analyses use the stress strain curve of IS 456 Fig 21. The elastic modulus for these two conditions
will therefore be different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and
ECR calculations.
For service design crack width calculations and for service design cracked stress analyses, a tension stiffened
concrete stress strain curve is used:
Use of this curve is similar, but not technically equivalent, to the provisions of IS 456 Annex F, Fig. 28. A
comparison of the stress diagrams for the Code provision and the Concept implementation are shown below:

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
IS 456 Material Behaviors
Figure 515: Figure 3.1 provision
Figure 516: RAM Concept implementation
Since RAM Concept’s crack width design does a cracked stress analysis (with a non tension stiffened concrete
stress strain curve) for the 0.8fy provision, the concrete and rebar stress results for members on which a crack
width design is done will represent the range of results between the tension stiffened and the non tension
stiffened concrete stress strain curve. Concrete and rebar stress results for all other members will represent use
the tension stiffened concrete stress strain curve only.

Untensioned reinforcement with a yield stress less than or equal to 250 N/mm2 is modeled as a perfectly
elastic/plastic material as is shown in code figure 23B. All other untensioned reinforcement uses the Cold
Worked Deformed Bar curve as is shown in code figure 23A. The elastic modulus is that specified by the user in
the materials window instead of the code-specified 200,000 N/mm2.
For strength considerations, a γ m of 1.15 is used.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
IS 456 code rule selection
For all other considerations a γ m of 1.0 is used.

• Eps = the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window)
• Fpy = the “yield” stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
• Fpu = the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
• γm = partial safety factor for materials
Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves (on page 806) in “Section Design Notes”. The three parameters
are:
Eps' = Eps
Fpy' = Fpy/γm
Fpu' = Fpu/γm
For strength considerations, a γm of 1.15 is used.
For all other considerations a γm of 1.0 is used.
This curve is similar but slightly different than the Stress Relieved Curve as shown in IS : 1343 - 1980 Figure 5A
for normal prestressing materials, assuming this curve depicts strain percentage and not actual strains.

strains.
curves is detailed in Chapter 51, “Section Design Notes”. For IS 456-2000, the maximum unbonded tendon stress
(called flimit in Chapter 51, “Section Design Notes”) is defined by IS 1343-1980 Appendix B, Table 12. For IS
1343: 1980, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is 0.1.
RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the
section). This assumption typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the tendon as when the tendon is on
the “wrong” side of the cross section centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to the small tension
strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross section at the tendon elevation.
69.5 IS 456 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which IS456 code rules to apply based on the design strip
segment or design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design

Design System RC PT
Beam 26.5.1.1 (456) 18.6.3.3 (1343)
One-Way Slab 26.5.2.1 (456) 18.6.3.3 (1343)
Two-Way Slab 26.5.2.1 (456) 18.6.3.3 (1343)

31.7.1 (456) 31.7.1 (456)



IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design


section
Old Files

factors).

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 22.8.2.1 (1343)

22.8.2.2 (1343)
One-Way Slab (none) 22.8.2.1 (1343)

22.8.2.2 (1343)
Two-Way Slab (none) 22.8.2.1 (1343)

22.8.2.2 (1343)
69.5.4 Service
factors).
• The design strip segment or design section property “Environment” is used to determine the “Type” of post-
• Protected: Type 3 (0.2 mm crack)
• Normal: Type 3 (0.1 mm crack)
• Corrosive: Type 2
• Very Corrosive: Type 1
Design System RC PT
Beam 26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343)

22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
26.3.3/Annex F (456) (except Type
1)

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
Design System RC PT
One-Way Slab 26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343)

22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
1)
Two-Way Slab 26.3.3/Annex F (456) 22.7.1 (1343)

22.8.1.1 (1343)
22.8.1.2 (1343)
1)
Note: Crack width design is done on all post-tensioned members except Type 1. This is required by IS 1343
11.3.2 and IS 456 26.3.3. Since the spacing provisions of 26.3.3 are not specifically applied, detailed crack width
design is performed for all members in accordance with 26.3.3. Crack width design is not required for Type 1
members as by definition they have no tensile stresses, and thus no cracking. See code implementation for
additional information.
69.5.5 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam 38 (456) 22.1 (1343)

40 (456) 22.4 (1343)
41 (456) 22.5 (1343)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456) 18.6.3.2c (1343)

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
IS 456 code implementation
Design System RC PT
One-Way Slab 38 (456) 22.1 (1343)

40 (456) 22.4 (1343)
41 (456) 22.5 (1343)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456) 18.6.3.2c (1343)
Two-Way Slab 38 (456) 22.1 (1343)

40 (456) 22.4 (1343)
41 (456) 22.5 (1343)
26.5.1.5 - 26.5.1.7 (456) 18.6.3.2c (1343)
Note: * - IS 456 Clause 41 and IS 1343 Clause 22.5 are applied only if “beam” torsion is selected (see torsion
design notes)
69.5.6 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 37.1.1d (456) 21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
One-Way Slab 37.1.1d (456) 21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)
Two-Way Slab 37.1.1d (456) 21.1.1d (1343)
38.1f (456)

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
69.6 IS 456 code implementation
69.6.1 Section 26.5.1.1

Included code sections - item a.
Excluded code sections - item b.
The 0.85bd/fy criterion is implemented
b is taken the core width (see “Concrete “Core” Determination”). If the core width is zero (there is no core), then
b is taken as the width of the section.
This provision is applied to beams only.
The provisions of item b (Maximum reinforcement) are not considered.
69.6.2 Section 26.5.2.1

Reinforcement is provided in accordance with 0.12 percent requirement. This assumes that high strength
deformed bars have been provided.
This provision is applied to slabs only.
69.6.3 Section 31.7.1

The spacing between bars is limited to a maximum of 2 times the slab thickness.
This provision is applied to slabs only.
If the member is designated as post-tensioned, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension
side of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are
considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing
purposes - their plan locations are ignored. This implementation is somewhat more conservative than a literal
reading of the code requirements.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
69.6.4 Section 37 / 38 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)

Included code sections - 37.1.1 (item d), 38.1 (item f).
Excluded code sections - 37 (rest), 38 (rest).
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies 37.1.1 (item d) as a limit to the neutral axis
0.0035
The neutral axis depth is further limited to ϵ
in accordance with 38.1 item f;
y
0.0055 +
γm
where
εy = maximum reinforcement yield strain of all reinforcement in the cross
section in tension
69.6.5 Section 38 Design resistance moment of beams

Included code sections - 38.1.
Excluded code sections - none.
Items a, b, c, d and e of section 38.1 are followed. Item f is applied under “Ductility” design.
Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is 0.0035.
See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves (γ m = 1.5 for concrete; γ m = 1.15 for
reinforcement).
Post-tensioning Tendon forces are ignored.
appropriately.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
69.6.6 Section 40 Design shear resistance

Included code sections - 40.1 (partial), 40.2, 40.3, 40.4, 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6
Excluded code sections - 40.1.1, 40.5
See “Concrete “Core” Determination” for calculation of b.
τ c is calculated per Table 19, using the equation in SP 24 (1983).
determination of As used in the calculation of τ c .
100As / bd is taken as 0.15 minimum and 3.0 as a maximum in accordance with the “<=0.15” and “3.00 and
above” in table 19.
vc is calculated per the equation in SP:24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 19.
For one-way shear in slabs, the design shear strength is increased by the depth factor in accordance with
40.2.1.1
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used.
place at time of the shear being investigated. If all of the reinforcement in the cross section is in compression,
then the effective depth is calculated as the distance from the compression-most face to the furthest active
reinforcement (in this case 100As / bd is taken as 0.15).
fy is limited to 415 N/mm2.
Stirrups are provided per 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6, and 40.4
In beams, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
Maximum allowable shear stress is determined in accordance with Table 20. Slabs use 1/2 the values in Table 20
in accordance with 40.2.3.1.
Maximum spacing of stirrups along the span is the smaller of 0.75 d and 300 mm.
The spacing across the span is not considered.
The anchorage of longitudinal bars is not checked.
Enhanced shear strength close to supports is not considered.
Beams of varying depth are not considered.
Net axial compression is considered per 40.2.2 if the “Consider Net Axial…” checkbox is checked.
Bottom loaded beams are not considered.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
69.6.7 Section 41 Torsion

Included code sections - 41.1, 41.3, 41.4, 26.5.1.5, 26.5.1.6, 26.5.1.7
Excluded code sections - 41.2
Only the “core” of a cross section is used for torsion design. See “Concrete “Core” Determination”.
• code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design
section or design strip for each rib.
Equivalent shear Ve is calculated per clause 41.3.1.
Equivalent bending moment Me1 is calculated per clause 41.4.2.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with clause 26.5.1.6 and 26.5.1.7.
Area of torsion reinforcement and longitudinal reinforcement is calculated in accordance with clause 41.4.
Maximum spacing of links is the least of x1, (x1 + y1)/4 or 300 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
69.6.8 Annex F Assessment of Crack Widths

Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the reinforcement stresses remain below 0.8fy.
Crack widths are calculated per Annex F. A concrete stress strain curve that approximates tension stiffening is
used - see discussion on Concrete Behavior (on page 1102). Creep is not considered.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below the following limits:
• Environment:
• Protected - 0.3 mm
• Normal - 0.3 mm
• Corrosive - 0.2 mm
• Very corrosive - 0.1 mm
These limits are specified in IS 456 clause 35.3.2. They are applied to post-tensioned members as well (except
type 1) even though they do not match the limiting crack width values for Type 3 in Table 8. This results in a
crack width limit design to 0.3 mm for Type 3 members and a crack width limit design to 0.2 mm for Type 2
members. This crack width design is required by IS 1343 11.3.2 and IS 456 26.3.3 since bar spacing limits have
not been specifically applied.
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs, but will not provide accurate crack width predictions for two way
slabs when wide design strip segments or wide design sections are used.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded post-tensioning tendons are considered, and the
balance loading will be considered if included in the load combinations.
In determining the effectiveness of bonded tendons, the equation can be manipulated as follows:
Crack width = (3acrεm ) / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)]
= ε m Sc
Sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / (h-x)] = crack spacing
RAM Concept assumes the maximum crack spacing is 3(h-x).
RAM Concept assumes that each bar and bonded tendon is placed horizontally to give the same crack spacing.
Bars and tendons that - due to their elevation - cannot provide the crack spacing are ignored.
sc = 3acr / [1+2(acr - cmin) / ht]
where
ht = (h-x) = height of tension zone
sc = 3acr ht / [ht +2(acr - cmin)]
sc [ht +2(acr - cmin)] = 3acr ht
sc ht +2scacr - 2sccmin = 3acr ht
sc ht - 2sccmin = 3acr ht - 2scacr
scht - 2sccmin = acr (3ht - 2sc)
acr = (sc ht - 2sccmin) / (3ht - 2sc)
However, acr = sb2 + cmin

2
, where sb = half the horizontal spacing between reinforcement.
Using this final equation, RAM Concept determines a spacing for each bar or bonded tendon that is effective in
controlling cracking. RAM Concept iteratively determines the sc that gives the sbs that sum to the tension face
width.
For bonded tendons, the cover cmin is assumed to be the cover to the centroid of the tendon, and the “bar”
diameter is assumed to be zero. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
69.7 IS 1343 code implementation
69.7.1 Section 18.6.3.2c Minimum transverse reinforcement

When the depth of the web is more than 4 times the thickness of the web, 0.1 percent reinforcement is provided
in accordance with 18.6.3.2c.
The spacing limit related to the clear depth of the web is not implemented. This spacing, however, should
normally be comparable to the maximum spacing of 0.75 dt applied in other shear provisions.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
69.7.2 Section 18.6.3.3 Minimum longitudinal reinforcement

Reinforcement is provided in accordance with 0.15 percent requirement. This assumes that high strength
deformed bars have been provided.
Any bonded or unbonded tendon areas are applied to this provision before calculating any required untensioned
reinforcement. Only tendons on the tension side (as determined by the minimum reinforcement setting) or
within 10% of the cross section depth are used.
69.7.3 Section 18.6.3.3 Limitation on area of prestressing tendons

Un-stressed reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater than the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based on the “Min.
moment (note that the 1.2 factor is not used in IS 1343)
69.7.4 Section 21.1.1 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)

RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies item “d” as a limit to the neutral axis depth,
69.7.5 Section 22.1 Ultimate limit state for beams in flexure

See section 38 for general approach.
Note that if axial forces are included in the design (per the design span or design section setting), then the
diversion of post-tensioning forces into supports will cause a hyperstatic (secondary) tension in many design
sections, as is appropriate.
See “Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves” for tendon stress-strain curves.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
Bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatibility. If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the
cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses
are used.
Unbonded tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor approach (see detailed description in
“Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves –General Theory”).
69.7.6 Section 22.4 Design shear resistance of beams

Vco is calculated per section 22.4.1. The flange/web intersection is not checked.
Vcr is calculated per section 22.4.2.
The value of Vc is used as shown in the following table.
Table 88: Vc rule mapping
Moment Vc Implementation
M < Mo Vc = Vco
Vc= (stress)bh

and tension is on the “tension” face * Vc = (stress)bh

and no tension on the “tension” face * Vc = (stress)bh
d = dt (assumed)
As = 0 (none in “tension zone”)
Aps = 0 (none in “tension zone”)
Note: * The calculation of Mo uses only 80% of the stress due to prestress. This can produce the rare case where
the section is in reality uncracked and has a tension face different to that calculated with Mo. For the unusual
case of M ≥ Mo and the section is actually uncracked (when considering the full prestress force) the conservative
assumptions of column four are made.
“d” is defined as the depth to the centroid of the tension force in the tension zone (including rebar and post-
tensioning). This is slightly different (and likely more rational) than the distance from the extreme compression
fibre to the centroid of the tendons as defined in the code.
“ dt ” is defined as the maximum depth to any longitudinal mild reinforcement, or the depth to the centroid of the
tendons, whichever is greater.
The vertical tendon force component is ignored.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fcu is used in calculations.
determination of Ap used in the calculation of vc.
b is adjusted by considering any tendons in the shear core. The full width of unbonded tendons is deducted, and
two-thirds of the width of bonded tendons is deducted from b.
For cross sections with multiple tendons, the fpu and fpe values used in the calculations are averaged.
Longitudinal unstressed reinforcement is converted into equivalent area of prestressed reinforcement to
determine Ap used in Table 6.
When calculating fpe/fpu, fpe is taken as the effective prestressing force divided by the equivalent area of
prestressing steel.
vc is calculated per the equation in SP : 24 - 1983 to calculate values from Table 6.
For slabs, Table 6 values are modified by IS 456 40.2.1.1 as appropriate.
Maximum shear stress is in accordance with Table 7. For slabs, this value is adjusted in accordance with IS 456
40.2.3.1.
Shear reinforcement is calculated per 22.4.3.
Minimum shear reinforcement is provided at all locations in beams.
Minimum reinforcement is provided in slabs when Vu > Vc.
The “web thickness” used in the calculations is the same as the shear core width - this may be incorrect if the
core width is made up of multiple webs. In such cases, multiple design sections or design strips can be used; each
containing only one web.
69.7.7 Section 22.5 Torsion

Included code sections - 22.5.1, 22.5.3.1, 22.5.3.2, 22.5.4, 22.5.5 (item a and b)
Excluded code sections - 22.5.2, 22.5.3.3, 22.5.5 (item c and d)
Only the “core of a cross section is used for torsion design. See Concrete “Core” Determination (on page 816).
• code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate design
section or design strip for each rib.
Equivalent bending moment Me1 and Me2 are calculated per sections 22.5.3.1 and 22.5.3.2.
Transverse bending moment Me3 is calculated and reported in the auditor per 22.5.3.3, but no transverse
bending design is performed.
Shear and torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with sections 22.5.4.1, 22.5.4.2, 22.5.4.3 and 22.5.4.4.
In the shear equation for Av in section 22.5.4.3, “ dt ” is substituted for “ dl ” to align this equation with the shear
equation in 22.4.3.2 when no torsion is present. This change may not be conservative, but is consistent with the
publication mentioned in the note below.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
Distribution of torsion reinforcement is calculated in accordance with section 22.5.5.

Maximum spacing of torsion stirrups is the least of x1, (x1 + y1)/4 or 200 mm.
If torsion design is selected, at least minimum stirrups will be provided at all locations.
Note: There is a typographical error in the code section 22.5.4.2 for the calculation of Ve1. The term in the
numerator should be ec, not e as shown in the code. Also, equation for Tc in section 22.5.4.1 is typographically
incorrect. Refer to publications “Design of Prestressed Concrete Beams Subjected to Combined Bending, Shear,
and Torsion” by Rangan and Hall, ACI Journal March 1975 and “Strength of Rectangular Prestressed Concrete
Beams in Combined Torsion, Bending, and Shear” by Rangan and Hall, ACI Journal April 1973 for details.
69.7.8 Section 22.7.1 Flexural tension stresses in concrete

Hypothetical flexural tensile stress limits are taken from section 22.7.1.
For type 2 members, the temporary service loads adjustment is not taken.
For bonded and unbonded cross sections, Type 3 hypothetical flexural tensile stress limits are taken from Table
8 as “Grouted post-tensioned tendons”.
The values in Table 8 are multiplied by the Depth Factors in Fig. 6 as necessary.
For each section, two limit stresses are calculated. The first limit stress is the maximum stress allowed if no
supplemental un-tensioned reinforcement is used. The second limit stress is the absolute maximum stress
allowed. The supplemental un-tensioned reinforcement is calculated in accordance with the Note under Table 8.
Cross sections “with unbonded tendons” (see “Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections”) are
classified as “other members” when calculating supplemental reinforcement.
Note: When calculating supplemental reinforcement per the Note under Table 8, the additional reinforcement is
calculated as a percentage of the cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone as is done in BS 8110.
This is different than a literal reading of the IS 1343 code.

69.7.10 Calculation of Supplemental Untensioned Reinforcement

Supplemental reinforcement is calculated when the “unreinforced” stress limits are exceeded, even for the
structure types where it is not anticipated by IS 1343. For example, if a type 1 beam has tension stresses
exceeding 0 N/mm2, it will be marked as having failed the 22.7 criterion; supplemental reinforcement will still
be calculated for the type 1 beam even though the reinforcement cannot solve the failure.

IS 456 : 2000 / IS 1343 : 1980 Design
The calculation of supplemental reinforcement per Note, Table 8 is as follows: Stress Difference = Actual Stress -
Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress
As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (100 *σ)]
where
Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone
σ = 3 N/mm2 for unbonded cross sections
4 N/mm2 for bonded cross sections
69.7.11 Section 22.8.1 Design compressive stresses

Compressive stresses in concrete based on the concrete section are limited to the values in Fig. 7 for Zone I. Zone
II values are never applied.
Direct compression stresses at the section centroid are limited to 0.8 times the value determined from Fig. 7.
69.7.12 Section 22.8.2 Design compressive stresses (Transfer)

Compressive stresses in concrete based on the cracked concrete section at transfer of prestress are limited to
the values in Fig. 8 for post-tensioned work.
If the limit stress is exceeded then reinforcement is added as required to limit the concrete stress; depending on
the bending moment and axial forces, either compression reinforcement, tension reinforcement or both will be
added.
For sections with multiple concrete strengths, the section limiting stress is reported as the smallest (absolute
The average of the top and bottom concrete stress in the cracked section is limited to the direct compressive
stress limit of 0.8 times the value from Fig. 8.


EN 1992-1-1: 2004 (Eurocode 2) With TR43 Design
70
This chapter details RAM Concept’s implementation of Eurocode 2 (EC2):2004.
This section describes two implementations of the code:
• EC2 with the UK National Annex in conjunction with the TR-43 document for PT provisions
• EC2 with the option to input the National Annex parameters
The version that is utilized by RAM Concept is controlled using the Code selection. Selecting Eurocode 2-2004
(UK Annex) will activate the UK Annex option (with TR-43), while selecting Eurocode 2-2004 will activate the
EC2 code with input National Annex parameters (also referred to as Generic National Annex). When Eurocode
2-2004 is active, you can access the annex factors by selecting Criteria > EC2 Annex.

Figure 517: EC2 Annex dialog

EC2 default loadings

70.1 EC2 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new
EC2 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are particularly
noteworthy are discussed here. It is important to note that the user may create his or her own load combinations
where the default loadings do not comply with the particular national Codes.

Combination.
70.1.2 Snow Loading

loads, roof shape coefficients, drifting, etc. RAM Concept uses the factors from Eurocode 0, Table A1.1 for sites
located at altitude H less than or equal to 1000 m a.s.l.
70.1.3 Live (Parking) Loading

For generation of load combinations, this loading type describes the load for Category F, traffic areas with
vehicle weight less than or equal to 30 kN.

EC2 Default Load Combinations
70.2 EC2 Default Load Combinations

RAM Concept creates when you start a new Eurocode 2 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination are
combinations are from the Eurocode unless noted otherwise.
70.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.
70.2.2 Dead + Balance LC

This load combination sums all of the dead loadings with the balance loads, with a load factor of 1.0, that act
simultaneously in the standard service condition. This load combination is for information only - it is not used by
RAM Concept for design purposes.

used are:


70.2.4 Characteristic Service LC: D + L + 0.5S

This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state. It conservatively does
not consider combination factors for live loads, even though the Code technically permits ψ 0 to be applied to all
accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are:
Note: For mats / rafts this combination is broken into several combinations as no alternate factors are used
70.2.5 Characteristic Service Snow LC: D + ψ0L + S

This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state. The load factors used
are:
70.2.6 Frequent Service LC: D + ψ 1 L

This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state. It conservatively applies ψ
1to all live loads, even though the Code technically permits ψ 2 to be applied to accompanying variable actions.

70.2.7 Frequent Service Snow LC: D + ψ2L + 0.2S

This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state. The load factors used are:
70.2.8 Quasi-Permanent Service LC: D + ψ2L

This load combination is intended for checking the quasi-permanent serviceability limit state. The load factors
used are:
70.2.9 Ultimate LC: 1.35D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0L + 0.75S

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10a) in Table
A1.2 (B). The load factors used are:
Hyperstatic Loading: 0.9 (std) & 1.1 (alt)


Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) (Included in UK National Annex only)
70.2.10 Ultimate LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0L + 1.5S

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10b) in Table
Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt) (UK National Annex, ξ = 0.925)
Dead Loading: 1.15 (std) & 1.0 (alt) (Generic National Annex, ξ = 0.85)
70.2.11 Ultimate LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5L + 0.75S

A1.2 (B). It conservatively applies a factor of 1.5 to all live loads, even though the Code technically permits ψ 0 to
be applied to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.15 (std) & 1.0 (alt) (Generic National Annex, ξ= 0.85)

70.2.12 Accident LC
This load combination is intended for checking the accident limit state. The load factors used are:
70.2.13 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + ψ0L + 0.5S + W

This load combination is intended for checking the characteristic serviceability limit state with wind. It considers
wind as the leading action and applies ψ 0 to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are:
Wind-Service Loading: 1.0 (std) & -1.0 (alt)
70.2.14 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + ψ0L + S + ψ0W

snow as the leading action and applies ψ 0 to accompanying variable actions. The load factors used are:


Wind-Service Loading: 0.5 (std) & -0.5 (alt) (UK National Annex)
Wind-Service Loading: 0.6 (std) & -0.6 (alt) (Generic National Annex)
70.2.15 Characteristic Service Wind LC: D + L + 0.5S + ψ0W

wind and snow as the accompanying actions and treats all live loads as leading actions. The load factors used
are:
70.2.16 Frequent Service Wind LC: D + ψ2L + 0.2W

This load combination is intended for checking the frequent serviceability limit state with wind.

70.2.17 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0L + 0.75S + 1.5ψ0W

This load combination is intended for checking the strength limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10a) in Table
Live (Roof) Loading: 1.05 (std) & 0.0 (alt) ) (Only included in BS EN 1990:2002 UK National Annex)
70.2.18 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5L + 0.75S + 1.5ψ0W

A1.2 (B). The wind and snow loads are treated as accompanying actions and all live loads are treated as the
leading actions. The load factors used are:
Dead Loading: 1.25 (std) & 1.0 (alt) (UK National Annex, ξ= 0.925)
Dead Loading: 1.15 (std) & 1.0 (alt) (Generic National Annex, ξ= 0.85)

70.2.19 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0 L + 1.5S + 1.5ψ0W

A1.2 (B). The wind and live loads are treated as accompanying actions and snow loads are treated as the leading
actions. The load factors used are:
70.2.20 Ultimate Wind LC: 1.35ξ D + 0.9H + 1.5ψ0 L + 0.75S + 1.5W

A1.2 (B). The wind load is treated as the leading action and all other variable loads are treated as accompanying
actions. The load factors used are:

EC2 Material behaviors
70.2.21 Equilibrium Wind LC: 0.9D + 1.5W

This load combination is intended for checking the equilibrium limit state in accordance with Exp. (6.10) in
Table A1.2 (A). The wind load is treated as the leading action and all other variable loads are assumed to be
favorable. This combination is only generated for mat foundations. The load factors used are:
Balance Loading: 1.0
Dead Loading: 0.9
Wind-Service Loading: 1.5
70.2.22 Eurocode 1 Part 1-1 (UK National Annex) Live Load Reduction
• Domestic, residential, and office (Category A and B) loads on a Live (Reducible) layer
• Assembly (Category C and D) loads on a Live (Unreducible) layer
• Car park loads (Category F) on a Live (Parking) layer
• Storage loads(Category E) on a Live (Storage) layer.
• Roof loads (Category H) on a Live (Roof) layer
Note: Live load reduction will conservatively not be considered on Assembly loads in Category C and D. However
it is necessary to assign the loads to the Live (Unreducible) type to get the appropriate factors in the load
combinations.
70.3 EC2 Material behaviors

reinforcement when using Eurocode 2.
The partial safety factors for the different materials will be defined by the used Annex. The UK National Annex
has fixed values and the Generic National Annex allows the user to specify the values.

equation in table 3.1 or a specified value.

When the EC2 code equation is selected the following values are used:
Eci = 22,000[(fcki + 8)/10]0.3 MPa
Ec = 22,000[(fck + 8)/10]0.3 MPa
where
fcki = characteristic cylinder strength at stressing, I MPa
fck = 28 day characteristic cylinder strength, in MPa
For detailed cross section analyses three different stress strain curves are used. All three stress-strain curves are
parabolic-linear curves as detailed in clause 3.1.7. The transition strain is at εc2.
0.85fck / (SLS)γc
(γc = 1.0 for UK National Annex)
0.85fck / (SLS)γc
0.85fck / (ULS)γc
The strength stress-strain curves are truncated at a strain of εcu2. The other stress-strain curves have no limit
strain.
Note: Calculations on the gross cross-section always use the Ec values calculated above, while the cracked cross-
section strain analyses use the stress strain curve of Figure 3.3. The elastic modulus for these two conditions will
therefore be different for most concrete strengths. This may have an effect on initial concrete strains and ECR
calculations.

Untensioned reinforcement is modeled as a perfectly elastic/plastic material, as is shown in code figure 3.8. The
elastic modulus is that specified by the user in the materials window.
For strength considerations, the program uses (ULS) γ s ( γ s = 1.15 for UK National Annex).
For other considerations (accidental LS or SLS), γ s is used (γ s = 1.0 for UK National Annex).


• Eps = the elastic modulus at zero strain (from materials window)

• Fpy = the “yield” stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
• Fpu = the ultimate stress of the reinforcement (from materials window)
• γm = partial safety factor for materials
Post-tensioning Material Stress-Strain Curves (on page 806). The three parameters are:
Eps’ = Eps
Fpy’ = Fpy / γm
Fpu’ = Fpu / γm
For strength considerations, (ULS) γs is used (γs = 1.15 for UK National Annex).
For other considerations (accidental LS or SLS), γs is used (γ s = 1.0 for UK National Annex).

strains.
For accident strength conditions,RAM Concept assumes that unbonded tendons have no stress.
curves is detailed in Chapter 41, “Section Design Notes”. For Eurocode 2:2004, the maximum unbonded tendon
stress (fpb, called flimit in “Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation”) is
defined by the equation in TR-43 clause 5.8.5 for both the UK National Annex and the Generic National Annex.
When this equation is used in a cross section that contains multiple tendons, the following terms are used in the
calculation:
• l / d = length of an individual tendon divided by its depth
• fpuAps = sum of all the individual tendons’ fpu multiplied by the vector component of their Aps
• fckbd = minimum concrete characteristic cylinder strength multiplied by the compression face width and the
depth to the centroid of the vector component tendon area
For Eurocode 2:2004, the value used as a strain reduction factor for unbonded tendons is k = 5d/L
where
L = length of the unbonded tendon
d = depth of the post-tensioning tendon (measured from the furthest concrete
face)
This is equivalent to assuming a neutral axis depth of 0.5 d and a “zone of inelasticity” of 10 times this length.
RAM Concept assumes that each tendon is placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section centroid (the
section). This assumption typically has no impact on the ultimate stress in the tendon as when the tendon is on
the “wrong” side of the cross section centroid, the stress in the tendon is less than fpb, due to the small tension
strains (possibly compression strains) in the cross section at the tendon elevation.

EC2 code rule selection
70.4 EC2 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides EC2 code rules to apply based on the design strip segment or
design section properties, combined with the active design rules for the rule set under consideration.

Design System RC PT
UK National Annex
Beam 9.2.1.1 TR-43 5.8.8
One-Way Slab 9.3.1.1 TR-43 5.8.8
Two-Way Slab 9.3.1.1 TR-43 5.8.8
Generic National Annex
Beam 9.2.1.1 9.2.1.1(1) and unbonded PT Beams

9.2.1.1(4)
One-Way Slab 9.3.1.1 9.3.1.1
Two-Way Slab 9.3.1.1 9.3.1.1






section
Old Files
Related Links

factors).
Design System RC PT
UK National Annex
Beam (none) 5.10.2.2 / TR-43 5.8.2
One-Way Slab (none) 5.10.2.2 / TR-43 5.8.2
Two-Way Slab (none) 5.10.2.2 / TR-43 5.8.2
All Systems (none) 5.10.2.2
70.4.4 Characteristic Service

factors).

• The design strip segment or design section property “Environment” is used to determine the exposure
category of members as follows:
• Protected: X0, XC1
• Normal: XC2, XC3, XC4
• Corrosive, Very Corrosive: XD1, XD2, XS1, XS2, XS3
• Code Rules are applied as shown in the following table:
Table 91: Characteristic service rule mapping
Design System RC Bonded PT Unbonded PT
UK National Annex
Beam 7.2 (2) 7.2 (2) 7.2(5)1
7.2 (5) 7.2 (5)1
One-Way Slab 7.2 (2) 7.2 (2) 7.2(5)1
7.2 (5) 7.2 (5)1
Two-Way Slab 7.2 (2) 7.2 (2) 7.2(5)1

7.2 (5) 7.2 (5)1 TR-43 5.8.12 (Table 4)
TR-43 5.8.12 (Table 4) TR-43 5.8.72
TR-43 5.8.72
All systems 7.2 (2) 7.2 (2) 7.2 (2)

7.2 (5) 7.2 (5) 7.2 (5)
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.2(5) is only performed where “crack width” design is requested.
Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where “stress” design is requested.
70.4.5 Frequent Service

factors).

Table 92: Frequent service rule mapping
UK National Annex
Beam (none) 7.31 TR-43 5.8.12

TR-43 5.8.12 TR-43 5.8.72
One-Way Slab (none) 7.31 TR-43 5.8.12

TR-43 5.8.12 TR-43 5.8.72
Two-Way Slab (none) 7.31 TR-43 5.8.12 (Table 5)

TR-43 5.8.12 (Table 5) TR-43 5.8.72
TR-43 5.8.72
All Systems (none) 7.3 (none)
Note: 1 - for PT members 7.3 is only performed where “crack width” design is requested.
Note: 2 - TR-43 5.8.1/5.8.7 hypothetical stress limit design is only performed where “stress” design is requested.
70.4.6 Quasi-Permanent Service

factors).
• The design strip segment or design section property “Environment ”is used to determine the exposure


Table 93: Quasi-Permanent service rule mapping
UK National Annex
All systems 7.3 7.32 7.31
All systems 7.3 7.32 7.3
Note: 1- for Unbonded PT members, 7.3 is only performed where “crack width” design is requested.
Note: 2- for Bonded PT members, only the decompression design is applied for the appropriate exposure.
70.4.7 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
UK National Annex
All systems 6.1 6.1 / TR-43 5.8.5

6.2 6.2 / TR-43 5.9
6.3 6.3

EC2 code implementation
Design System RC PT
All systems 6.1 6.1

6.2 6.2
6.3 6.3
70.4.8 Ductility
Design System RC PT
All Systems 5.5 5.5
70.4.9 Accident
on both faces).
• Reduced γ m factors are used in the strength calculations. For reinforcement γ m = 1.0 (BS EN 1990:2002).
• Reinforcement location is determined by the Min. Reinforcement Location setting.
• The minimum tensile force that an internal tie is capable of resisting varies between the BS EN 1990-2002
and the Generic version, which uses the Eurocode general recommendation.
Table 96: Accident rule mapping
Design System RC PT
All Systems 9.10 9.10
70.5 EC2 code implementation

70.5.1 Section 5.5 Redistribution of moments (Ductility Check)

Included code sections – (4)
Excluded code sections – (1), (2), (3), (5), (6)
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies 5.5(4) as a limit to the neutral axis depth,
The neutral axis depth is limited to:
• (1.0 – k1)/k2 * effective depth for fck ≤ 50 MPa
• (1.0 – k3)/k4 * effective depth for fck > 50 MPa
where k1, k2, k3, and k4 are taken from the National Annex.
70.5.2 Section 5.10.2.2 Limitation of Concrete Stress (Transfer)

Included code sections – (5).
Excluded code sections – (1), (2), (3), (4).
The compressive stresses in the concrete, based on the cracked section, are limited to 0.6fcki.
70.5.3 Section 6.1 Design resistance moment

Included code sections – (1), (2), (3), (7)
Excluded code sections – (4), (5), (8)
Strain compatibility design is used. The maximum compressive strain is ε cu2 .
See the Materials section for the material stress strain curves.
For span segments or design sections not designated as “post-tensioned”, post-tensioning tendon forces are
ignored.
appropriately.

A tension design is performed for longitudinal torsion tension required by the torsion model. This design
assumes the design yield stress of the reinforcement and the calculated reinforcement is in addition to other
requirements for flexure. Tension demand on a particular face is reduced by the minimum expected value of the
compression chord on that face due to flexure.
70.5.4 Section 6.2 Design shear resistance

Included code sections – 6.2.1(1)(partial), 6.2.1(2), 6.2.1(3), 6.2.1(4), 6.2.1(5), 6.2.1(6), 6.2.1(7), 6.2.2(1),
6.2.2(2), 6.2.2(5), 6.2.3(1), 6.2.3(2), 6.2.3(3), 6.2.3(6)
Excluded code sections – 6.2.1(1)(partial), 6.2.1(8), 6.2.1(9), 6.2.2(3), 6.2.2(4), 6.2.2(6), 6.2.2(7), 6.2.3(4),
6.2.3(5), 6.2.3(7), 6.2.3(8), 6.2.4 (all), 6.2.5 (all)
See Concrete “Core” Determination for calculation of b.
VRd,c is calculated using equation 6.2. For PT members uncracked in bending only equation 6.4 is used. For PT
members that are cracked in bending, the minimum of equation 6.2 and 6.4 is used.
Longitudinal untensioned tension reinforcement designed in Pass 1 and, if the member is PT, the area of bonded
tendons in the tension zone is included in the determination of Asl used in the calculation of VRd,c.
bw,nom is the width of the shear core, less the width of the tendon ducts in accordance with 6.2.3(6). Bonded
tendons are considered to be grouted metal ducts. Any bonded ducts with diameter less than or equal to bw/8
are not considered in the deduction. bw,nom is used in all shear calculations, including ρ w
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fck is used.
“column style” effective depth is determined from the compression most face to the maximum depth of any
reinforcement.
If the member is declared PT, the primary axial force contribution to σ cp in the calculation of equation 6.2.a,
6.2.b, and 6.4 is multiplied by γ P,fav . The primary axial force contribution to σ cp used in equation 6.11 is
multiplied by either γ P,fav or γ P,unfav , whichever results in the lowest value of α cw .

The “shift rule” required by 6.2.2(5) and 9.2.1.3 is performed for all members (with and without shear
reinforcement) by attempting to extend the reinforcement beyond the required development length by 1.125
times the effective depth. This is calculated using eq. 9.2 and using z = 0.9d and cot θ = 2.5. Additional tension
reinforcement in accordance with 6.2.3(7) is assumed to be accounted for using this provision. In normal
circumstances, this will be the case because the horizontal shift required by 6.2.2(5) is related to the magnitude
of the vertical shift performed according to 6.2.3(7).
In all beams at least minimum links will be provided.
Links are provided in accordance with 6.2.3 and 9.2.2. The angle is calculated as the minimum value that can
satisfy the requirement that VEd ≤ VRd,max , within the range specified in 6.2.3(2).
Minimum density of shear reinforcement is determined in accordance with 9.2.2(5).
Maximum shear reinforcement spacing along the span is determined by 9.2.2(6).
The shear reinforcement spacing across the span is not considered.
Net axial force is considered if the Consider Net Axial… checkbox is checked.
70.5.5 Section 6.3 Torsion

Included code sections – 6.3.1(part), 6.3.2
Excluded code sections – 6.3.1(part), 6.3.3
• code provisions are not applicable to multiple ribs, so to get a more exact calculation, use a separate
design section or design strip for each rib.
Torsion truss properties are calculated in accordance with 6.3.2(1). Link dimensions are determined from the
location of specified cover to longitudinal design bars and do not explicitly account for the location of user
reinforcement. The truss wall thickness, tef,i is limited by:
• A/u per 6.3.2(1)
• bw/2
• h/2
• horizontal spacing between outermost horizontal bars
• vertical spacing between outermost horizontal bars
The above limitations effectively create a truss wall with a longitudinal bar located at the center of the wall or
outside the center of the wall (which is considered to be conservative). In these calculations RAM Concept
assumes that the side cover to the longitudinal bars is the maximum of the top and bottom cover.
If the interaction equation 6.31 is satisfied, only minimum reinforcement is provided.
If equation 6.31 is not satisfied, equation 6.29 is used to calculate a maximum shear capacity by deducting the
torsion portion of the interaction capacity. This equation is used to iteratively solve for the smallest value of

theta that can satisfy the interaction equation 6.29. This theta is then used in all subsequent shear and torsion
calculations.
Maximum spacing of links is calculated in accordance with 9.2.3(3).
Minimum torsion reinforcement is provided in accordance with 9.2.3(2).
Minimum longitudinal tension reinforcement is calculated in accordance with equation 6.28. The tension
demand on a particular face is reduced by the minimum expected compression chord force.
If torsion design is selected and the torsion is greater than zero, at least minimum links will be provided.
70.5.6 7.2 Stress Limitation

For all RC and PT members:
• For the characteristic combination of loads, the compressive stress in the concrete based upon the cracked
section is limited to k1 fck in accordance with 7.2(2). The value of k1 = 0.6 is used for the UK National Annex.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep the concrete stresses within the prescribed limits.
For all RC members and for PT members where crack width design is requested:
• For the characteristic combination of loads, un-tensioned reinforcement is added to ensure that the
reinforcement stresses remain below k3 fyk in accordance with 7.2(5). The value of k3 = 0.8 is used for the UK
Annex.
70.5.7 7.3.1 Assessment of Crack Widths

Crack widths are calculated per 7.3.4. Cracked equilibrium strains are calculated assuming that concrete has no
tensile strength. Creep is not considered.
Un-tensioned reinforcement is added to keep crack widths at or below the required limits.
The design strip segment or design section property “Environment” is used to determine the exposure category
of members as follows:
UK National Annex crack width limits are in accordance with Table NA.4 of the applied National Annex.
This criterion is applied to two-way slabs and other wide cross sections, but will not provide accurate crack
width predictions for these wide cross sections when reinforcement is not spaced according to the varying
stress patterns across the section. For narrower cross sections with a uniform stress pattern, the bonded
reinforcement should be spaced uniformly. For this reason it may not be appropriate to do a “crack width” only
design on full panel strip widths.
The crack-limiting capabilities of appropriately placed bonded tendons are considered, and the balance loading
will be considered if included in the load combinations. Bonded tendons are only considered effective if the
average spacing of the bonded tendons and un-tensioned reinforcement within hc,eff is less than or equal to 300
mm in accordance with 7.3.2(3).

Crack width = sr,max(εsm- εcm)

• εsm - εcm = [σs - kt(fct,eff/ρp,eff ) (1 + αe ρp,eff )] / Es ≥ 0.6 σs / Es
RAM Concept uses a rearranged form of this equation, which utilizes strains instead of stresses
• εsm - εcm = σs / Es - kt[ (fct,eff/(ρp,eff Es) + (fct,eff/Ecm)] ≥ 0.6 σ s / Es
• σs = tension stress in un-tensioned reinforcement from a cracked section analysis, or maximum differential
bonded tendon stress from tendon stress level at zero strain in the concrete at the same level
• kt = 0.6 for frequent service design
• 0.4 for quasi-permanent service design
• fct,eff = fctm
• ρp,eff = (As + ξ1 2 Ap’)/Ac,eff
• As = area of un-tensioned reinforcement within depth hc,eff
• Ap’ = area of bonded tendons within depth hc,eff
• Ac,eff = area of concrete within depth hc,eff
• hc,eff = minimum of 2.5(h-d), (h-x)/3, or h/2
• d = depth to the outermost layer of reinforcement
• ϕ
s
ξ1 = ξ ϕ
p
• ξ = 0.5 for fck ≤ C50/60
• 0.25 for fck ≤ C70/85
• Linearly interpolated between C50/60 and C70/85
• φs = largest diameter of reinforcement contained within depth hc,eff
• φp = 1.6Ap’
• αe = Es/Ecm
• sr,max = k3c + k1k2k4φeq /ρp,eff = crack spacing (eq. 7.11)
• k3 = 3.4 (UK National Annex)
• c = average cover to reinforcement, weighted by bar/tendon units
• k1 = 0.8 for un-tensioned reinforcement
• 1.6 for bonded tendons
• averaged for cross sections containing both tendons and un-tensioned reinforcement,
• weighted by bar/tendon units
• k2 = 0.5 for bending (compression strain on one face)
• (ε1 + ε2 ) / 2ε1 for tension (tension strain on both faces)
• k4 = 0.425 (UK National Annex)
• φeq = n1φ12 + n2φ22 + ni φi 2 / (n1φ1 + n2φ2 + ni φi )
If the bonded reinforcement within hc,eff is less than or equal to 5(c+ ϕeq /2), RAM Concept uses equation 7.11
for sr,max. If a larger spacing exists, RAM Concept uses a crack spacing of 1.3(h-x) in accordance with equation
7.14. RAM Concept always assumes the maximum crack spacing is 1.3(h - x).
For bonded PT systems, decompression is checked for exposure class XC2, XC3, and XC4 for the quasi-
permanent load combination and for exposure class XD and XS for the frequent load combination. For the
decompression checks, a check is made that the entire bonded tendon lies within 25 mm of concrete in
compression, using cracked section properties. For this purpose, a constant 25 mm duct depth representing the
depth of a typical flat duct is assumed. Further, it is assumed that the strand is centered in the duct (i.e., at 12.5
mm).

Note: This is a reasonable assumption for flat ducts in slabs, but can be unconservative for checks in multi-
strand, round ducts.
70.5.8 Section 9.2.1.1 Beam Minimum Reinforcement

Included code sections – (1), (4)
Excluded code sections – (2), (3)
This section applies only to beams.
bt is taken as the width on the tension face.
d is taken as the depth from the compression face (as determined from the “Code Min. Reinforcement Location”
setting) to the centroid of reinforcement located closest to the tension face. In PT beams the tendon locations are
included in this calculation.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum fck is used.
See “Code Minimum Reinforcement” for details regarding which face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will
be added to.
For RC beams, post-tensioning is ignored.
For PT beams, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the cross section centroid, or is within
10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered as un-tensioned reinforcement. For AsFy
requirements, tendon (fpy – fse) is utilized as the available yield stress. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross
section will have vector components of their reinforcement areas applied toward these requirements.
For unbonded PT beams, un-tensioned reinforcement is added to provide an ultimate moment capacity greater
than 1.15 times the cracking moment.
The cracking is assumed to be top (hogging moment) or bottom (sagging moment) based upon the “Min.
See ““Cracking Moment” Used in Design Calculations” for a theoretical discussion of the cracking moment (note
that a 1.15 factor is used in EC2).
The cracking stress is taken as fctm,fl in accordance with EC2 clause 3.1.8. For cross sections with multiple
concrete mixes, the maximum fck for the cross section is used.
70.5.9 Section 9.3.1.1 RC Slab Minimum Reinforcement

Included code sections – (1), (3)
Excluded code sections – (2), (4)
This section applies only to one-way slabs and two-way slabs.

d is taken as the depth from the compression face (as determined from the “Code Min. Reinforcement Location”
setting) to the centroid of reinforcement located closest to the tension face. In PT slabs the tendon locations are
included in this calculation.
For cross sections with multiple concrete mixes, the maximum fck is used.
See “Code Minimum Reinforcement” for details regarding which face (top or bottom) that the reinforcement will
be added to.
For RC slabs, post-tensioning is ignored.
For PT slabs, bonded post-tensioning that is on the tension-most side of the cross section centroid, or is within
10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation, is considered as un-tensioned reinforcement. For AsFy
requirements, tendon (fpy – fse) is utilized as the available yield stress. Bonded tendons at an angle to the cross
section will have vector components of their reinforcement areas applied toward these requirements.
The maximum spacing between bars is limited to the minimum of 400mm or 3h. For two-way slabs in column
strips in the first cross section in a support region, the spacing between bars is limited to the minimum of 250
mm or 2h.
In post-tensioned slabs, bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the tension side of the cross section
centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation are considered as equivalent to
an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing purposes – their plan locations
are ignored.
70.5.10 Section 9.10 Tying Systems for Accidental Design Situations

Each cross section is considered to act as a portion of an internal tie. Reinforcement at each cross section is
placed on the tension face in accordance with the force envelopes for the Accident Rule set. Peripheral ties are
not explicitly calculated by RAM Concept.
UK National Annex
Tie force requirements are determined in accordance with the applied National Annex clause 9.10.2.3 (3).
The number of stories is input in the span segment or design section properties.
lr is taken as the largest of the span being calculated or either adjacent span length. For design sections we use
the span length and do not consider adjacent spans.
An equivalent uniform span load (force/length) is calculated representing (gk + qk) times the width of the span.
This uniform span load is calculated as follows:
• For span segments, the total span shear is calculated as the difference in shears at each end of the span. This
value is calculated twice, once with the minimum V envelope at the span start and the maximum V envelope
at the span end and once with the maximum V envelope at the span start and the minimum V envelope at the
span end. The maximum of the differences in these values is used as the total span shear. The uniform span
load is then calculated as the total span shear divided by the span length.
• For design sections, the total span shear is calculated as the twice the maximum span shear, extrapolated
from the cross section shear using the design section span ratio. The uniform span load is then calculated as

the total span shear divided by the span length. For regions of low shear near mid-span where extrapolation
may not be appropriate, we calculate the uniform span load from the moment at the cross section as M/al2
where a = (1/24 – α/2) and α is the span ratio from this cross section to mid-span.

Tie force requirements are calculated at 20 kN/m.
Tie requirements are considered as minimum requirements, not in addition to other requirements. The design
yield stress of bonded tendons located anywhere in the cross section are applied toward the tie requirements.
Vector components are used for tendons that are not perpendicular to the cross section.

70.5.12 TR-43 5.8.1 PT Service Stresses (UK National Annex only)

This section applies to post-tensioned beams, one-way slabs, and two-way slabs. This section of TR43 defines
hypothetical stress limits for comparison with gross section stresses.
The design strip segment or design section property “Environment” is used to determine the exposure category
of members as follows:
For bonded beams and one way slabs, it is assumed that the hypothetical tensile stresses in Table 3 exist at the
limiting crack width values given in Eurocode 2. For exposure class XD or XS, a limiting crack width value of
0.1mm is assumed for the determination of hypothetical tensile stresses. The recommended design strip
property setting “PT Service Design Type” is either “Stress” or “Stress and Crack Width”. “Crack Width” only is
not explicitly permitted by TR43.
The supplemental reinforcement for bonded beams and one way slabs in accordance with TR43 5.8.1 is
calculated as follows:
Stress Difference = Actual Stress - Supplemental Reinforcement Limit Stress
As = Act [(Stress Difference) / (400 N/mm2)]
where Act = cross-sectional area of the concrete in the tension zone
For unbonded beam and one way slabs, for members with tension stresses supplemental reinforcement is
always provided in accordance with TR43 5.8.7. TR43 does not provide an absolute tensile stress limit for

exceeding the Table 3 values. As such, RAM Concept uses the Table 3 values as absolute limits and therefore does
not permit enhancing the stresses by adding un-tensioned reinforcement. The recommended design strip
property setting“PT Service Design Type” is either “Stress” or “Stress and Crack Width”. “Crack Width” only is
not explicitly permitted by TR43.
For two way slabs, for members with tension stresses supplemental reinforcement is always provided in
accordance with TR43 5.8.7. Table 4 or Table 5 values are used depending upon whether or not full panel width
strips are used (average stresses) or column/middle strips are used (‘design strip’ stresses). In determination of
using ‘with bonded reinforcement’ limits the average spacing of the bonded reinforcement on the tension face is
checked (using bonded tendons in the tension zone). If the bonded reinforcement spacing limit is greater than
500 mm at the time when the limits are being determined, the ‘without bonded reinforcement’ limits are used.
Since the reinforcement in the service design is left in the cross section from force envelope to envelope, it is
possible that an envelope will use the ‘without bonded reinforcement’ limits while the subsequent envelope will
use ‘with bonded reinforcement’ limits due to the reinforcement added in the previous envelope. Where full
panel width strips are used, the recommended design strip property setting “PT Service Design Type” is either
“Stress” or “Stress and Crack Width”. “Crack Width” only is not explicitly permitted by TR43. In the case where
column/middle strips are used the recommended setting is “Stress” or “Stress and Crack Width” or “Crack
Width” as TR43 explicitly permits the stress limits in Table 5 to be exceeded where explicit crack width checks
are performed.
Member Exposure Code Design Hypothetical Tension limit Absolute Supplementa Load
Type Class Crack Width Crack Width without Tension l Combination
(mm) (used to supplementa Limit Reinforceme
determine l nt
stress limits) reinforceme Calculation
(mm) nt
Bonded X0, XC1 0.2 0.2 1.65fctm 0.3fck 5.8.1 Frequent1,2

Beam, One
Way Slab
XC2, XC3, 0.2 0.2 1.65fctm 0.3fck 5.8.1 Frequent1,2,

XC4 Quasi-
Permanent3
XD or XS 0.2 0.1 1.35fctm 0.3fck 5.8.1 Frequent1,2,

3
Unbonded All 0.3 - 0 1.35fctm 5.8.7 Frequent2,

Beam, One Quasi-
Way Slab Permanent1
Bonded X0, XC1 0.2 - 0(support) 0.9f 5.8.7 Characterist

ctm
Two Way 0.9fctm(span ic2,Frequent
Slab, Full ) 1
Panel Width
XC2, XC3, 0.2 - 0(support) 0.9f 5.8.7 Characterist

ctm
XC4 0.9fctm(span ic2,Frequent
) 1, Quasi-
Permanent3

Member Exposure Code Design Hypothetical Tension limit Absolute Supplementa Load
Type Class Crack Width Crack Width without Tension l Combination
(mm) (used to supplementa Limit Reinforceme
determine l nt
stress limits) reinforceme Calculation
(mm) nt
XD or XS 0.2 - 0(support) 0.9fctm 5.8.7 Characterist

0.9fctm(span ic2,Frequent
) 1,3
Bonded X0, XC1 0.2 - 0(support) 1.2fctm 5.8.7 Frequent1,2

Two Way 1.2fctm(span
Slab, )
Column/
Middle
Strips
XC2, XC3, 0.2 - 0(support) 1.2fctm 5.8.7 Frequent1,2,

XC4 1.2fctm(span Quasi-
) Permanent3
XD or XS 0.2 - 0(support) 1.2fctm 5.8.7 Frequent1,2,

1.2fctm(span 3
Unbonded All 0.3 - 0(support) 0.9f 5.8.7 Characterist

ctm
Two Way 0.3fctm(span ic2,Quasi-
Slab, Full ) Permanent1
Panel Width
Unbonded All 0.3 - 0(support) 1.2fctm 5.8.7 Frequent2,

Two Way 0.4fctm(span Quasi-
Slab, ) Permanent1
Column/
Middle
Strips
Note: 1 - Used for crack width design (when requested by user)
Note: 2 - Used for hypothetical stress checks (when requested by user)
Note: 3 - Used for decompression check (when crack width design is requested by user)
70.5.13 TR-43 5.8.2 PT Initial Service (transfer) Stresses (UK National Annex Only)
This section applies to post-tensioned beams, one-way slabs, and two-way slabs.

For beams and one-way slabs, where the flexural tensile stresses exceed 0.72fctm additional un-tensioned
reinforcement is designed in accordance with 5.8.7. Compressive stresses are limited to the values in 5.8.2.
For two-way slabs, the flexural compressive and tensile stresses are limited to the values in Table 5 for column/
middle strip design, or Table 4 for full panel width design, where fck is replaced with fcki.
For sections with multiple concrete mixes, the minimum fck is used to determine the limit stress and the peak
70.5.14 TR-43 5.8.3 PT Crack Control (UK National Annex Only)

“Code” crack width limits are determined in accordance with Table NA.4 of the UK National Annex.
See 7.3.1 Assessment of Crack Widths for additional information.
70.5.15 TR-43 5.8.5 PT Ultimate Limit State

The equation for fpb is used to limit unbonded tendon stress. See “Unbonded Prestressed Reinforcement
Behavior” for more information.
70.5.16 TR-43 5.8.7 PT Un-tensioned Reinforcement (UK National Annex Only)

This section applies to unbonded post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs, and to all post-tensioned two-way
slabs.
0.625(Asfy + Apsfp) = F1
where
F1 = tensile force in concrete
As = area of un-tensioned reinforcement added
fy = yield strength of un-tensioned reinforcement
Aps = vector component area of bonded (grouted) tendons in tension zone
fp = tendon yield stress - tendon effective stress
It is possible that the added un-tensioned reinforcement will not be in the tension zone if a very large concrete
cover is specified.

70.5.17 TR-43 5.8.8 PT Minimum Reinforcement (UK National Annex Only)
Note: There are no minimum un-tensioned reinforcement requirements for post-tensioned beams or one-way
slabs that are primarily bonded. Refer to “Determination of Bonded vs. Unbonded Cross Sections” for discussion.
For primarily unbonded post-tensioned beams and one-way slabs the requirements of 9.2.1.1 or 9.3.1.1 are
applied as appropriate.
For post-tensioned two-way slabs in column strips, un-tensioned reinforcement is provided in support regions
as follows:
• As = 0.00075Act.
• Act = sum of cross sectional area of column strip and adjacent middle strips(generated from the same span
segment)
than 0.2.
For design sections, this criterion is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The 300mm spacing requirement is not checked. The requirement that this reinforcement be concentrated
between lines that are 1.5 times the slab depth is not checked.
User defined reinforcement and bonded tendons that are at an angle to the cross section will only have the
component perpendicular to the cross section considered.
For post-tensioned two-way slabs, minimum reinforcement consisting of un-tensioned reinforcement and
bonded tendons is provided as follows:
• As = 0.001 Ac
• Ac = area of cross section
than 0.2.
For design sections, this criteria is applied when the span ratio is less than 0.2.
The spacing of this reinforcement is limited to 500 mm. Bonded (grouted) post-tensioning ducts that are on the
tension side of the cross section centroid, or are within 10% of the cross section depth of the centroid elevation
are considered as equivalent to an un-tensioned bar. These ducts are assumed to be optimally placed for spacing
purposes – their plan locations are ignored.
The recommendations for slab edge reinforcement are not implemented.
70.5.18 TR-43 5.9 Shear Strength

The values of σ cp calculated in accordance with Eurocode 2, Clause 6.2 are modified by the appropriate safety
factor γ p,fav or γ p,unfav as appropriate. The contribution of the vertical component of the tendon is not
considered in one-way shear calculations.

CSA A23.3-04 Design
71
This appendix details RAM Concept’s implementation of the Canadian Standard CSA A23.3-04.
71.1 CSA A23.3-04 default loadings

This section provides information on the loadings that RAM Concept creates by default when you start a new
CSA A23.3-04 file. As the purpose and use of most of the loadings are self-explanatory, only items that are

Combination.
71.1.2 Snow Loading

loads, roof shape coefficients, drifting, etc. The importance factor should not be included in this loading, as it is
addressed in the load combination factors.

CSA A23.3-04 Design
CSA A23.3-04 default load combinations
71.2 CSA A23.3-04 default load combinations

RAM Concept creates when you start a new CSA A23.3-04 file. The purpose and origin of each load combination
load combinations are from the National Building Code of Canada 2005 unless noted otherwise.
The assumed importance factors for the default load combinations belong to the Normal Category. Importance
factors are included in the load combinations, not the loadings. The corresponding load combinations will be
generated incorporating the appropriate importance factor for the “normal” category. For importance categories
other than “normal”, the corresponding load combinations will need to be generated manually.
71.2.1 All Dead LC

design purposes.

used are:

71.2.3 Service LC: D + L + 0.45S


CSA A23.3-04 Design

71.2.4 Service Snow LC: D + 0.5L + 0.9S


Service Wind Loading: 0.75 (std) & -0.75 (alt)
71.2.6 Service Wind LC: D + L + 0.45S + 0.3W


CSA A23.3-04 Design




CSA A23.3-04 Design

This load combination is intended for checking the ultimate limit state. The load factors used are:
71.2.10 Factored LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S

Live (Parking) Loading: 1.5 (st) and 0.0 (alt)
71.2.11 Factored LC: 1.25D + 0.5L + 1.5S

Live (Parking) Loading: 0.5 (st) and 0.0 (alt)

CSA A23.3-04 Design
71.2.12 Factored Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.5L+ 0.5S + 1.4W

factors used are:
71.2.13 Factored Wind LC: 1.25D + 1.5L + 0.5S + 0.4W

factors used are:
71.2.14 Factored Wind LC: 1.25D + 0.5L+ 1.5S + 0.4W

factors used are:

CSA A23.3-04 Design
CSA A23.3-04/NBC 2005 live load factors

71.2.15 Factored Seismic LC: D + 0.5L+ 0.25S + E

Ultimate Seismic Loading: 1.0 (std) & -1.0 (alt)
71.3 CSA A23.3-04/NBC 2005 live load factors

• assembly loads less than 4.8 kPa (or important live loads) on a Live (Unreducible) layer
• assembly loads of 4.8 kPa or more, manufacturing, retail stores, garages, or footbridge on Live (Parking) layer
• storage areas, and equipment areas and service rooms referred to in Table 4.1.5.3 on Live (Storage) layer
• live loads other than those covered by clause 4.1.5.9 sentences 1) and 2) on a Live (Reducible) layer
71.4 CSA A23.3-04 Material Behaviors

reinforcement when using CSA A23.3-04.

CSA A23.3-04 Design
CSA A23.3-04 Material Behaviors

You define the concrete elastic modulus in the materials window. You can choose to use code equation 8.6.2.2 or
a specified value.

When the CSA code equation is selected the following values are used:
Eci = 3, 300 f ci + 6, 900 ( γc

2, 300
)
1.5
Ec = 3, 300 f c + 6, 900 ( γc
2, 300
) 1.5
where
fci = cylinder strength at stressing (MPa)
fc = 28 day cylinder strength (MPa)
γc = density of concrete (kg/m3)
strain.

Design Notes”.


strains.

CSA A23.3-04 Design
CSA A23.3-04 code rule selection
curves is detailed in Unbonded Post-tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation (on page 809) in
For CSA A23.3-04, the maximum unbonded tendon stress, flimit, is defined by equation 18-2. In the calculation of
(dp-cy), RAM Concept assumes that the tendons are placed on the more beneficial side of the cross section
centroid (the same limiting stress value is used for both positive and negative moment capacity calculations at
each cross section).
71.5 CSA A23.3-04 code rule selection

The following explains how RAM Concept decides which CSA A23.3-04 code rules to apply based on the design
consideration.

Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.1 18.7
One-Way Slab 7.8 18.7
Two-Way Slab 7.8 (none)

CSA A23.3-04 Design




section

CSA A23.3-04 Design
Old Files
Related Links

factors).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.3.1.1 and 18.3.1.3
One-Way Slab (none) 18.3.1.1 and 18.3.1.3
Two-Way Slab (none) 18.3.1.1 and 18.3.1.3
Note: 18.3.1.1(c) is not considered. 18.3.1.1(b) is considered in all cases for tension.
71.5.4 Service
factors).

CSA A23.3-04 Design
• Protected: Partial PT/RC, interior exposure

• Normal: Partial PT/RC, exterior exposure
• Corrosive: Full PT, 18.3.2(c)
• Very Corrosive: Full PT, 18.3.2(d)
Design System RC Partial PT Full PT 18.3.2(c) Full PT 18.3.2(d)
Beam 10.6.1 18.8.1, 18.8.3 18.8.1, 18.3.2(c) 18.8.1, 18.3.2(d)
One-Way Slab 10.6.1 18.8.1, 18.8.3 18.8.1, 18.3.2(c) 18.8.1, 18.3.2(d)
Two-Way Slab (none) (not applicable) 18.8.1, 18.3.2(c) 18.8.1, 18.3.2(d)

factors).
on both faces).
Design System RC PT
Beam (none) 18.3.2a
71.5.6 Strength
the load factors).
on both faces).

CSA A23.3-04 Design
CSA A23.3-04 code implementation
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.1, 11.3* 18.6, 11.3*
One-Way Slab 10.1, 11.3* 18.6, 11.3*
Two-Way Slab 10.1, 11.3* 18.6, 11.3*
71.5.7 Ductility
Design System RC PT
Beam 10.5.2 (none)
71.6 CSA A23.3-04 code implementation
71.6.1 Section 7.8 Minimum Reinforcement in Slabs

7.8.1 and 7.8.3 are implemented.
to determine the reinforcement specified in 7.8.1.

CSA A23.3-04 Design
7.8.3. The number of bars is not rounded up to the next whole number in this calculation, but will be rounded up
to the next whole number in the reinforcement summary. User defined bars are counted toward satisfying the
maximum spacing requirements. Bars at an angle to the cross section consider the sum of their vector
For determining if the section is within the band defined by bb for the negative minimum reinforcement, the
distance of 1.5 times the section height is compared with the distance to the nearest support face.
0.2113 is assumed.
71.6.2 Section 10.1 Factored Moment Resistance

Included code sections - 10.1, 10.3, 10.5, 10.6
Excluded code sections - 10.2, 10.4, 10.7
See “Concrete Behavior” for the material stress strain curves. φ c = 0.65 for concrete; φ s = 0.85 for
reinforcement.
For span segments or design sections not designated as “post-tensioned”, post-tensioning tendon forces are
ignored.
For sections with multiple values of fc’, the fc’ of each concrete block is used appropriately.

CSA A23.3-04 Design
The shear and torsion tension forces are included in the flexural/axial design. In slabs, more longitudinal
reinforcement than is required might be provided in order to eliminate the use of tranverse reinforcement. See
“Section 11.3 Shear and Torsion Tension” for additional information.
For sections declared as “post-tensioned”, bonded tendon strains are calculated using strain compatiblity (see
detailed description “Relationship of Bonded Post-tensioning Strains to Cross-Section Strains.” Unbonded
tendon stresses are calculated using a strain reduction factor (see detailed description “Unbonded Post-
tensioning Stress-Strain Curves – Program Implementation”). If a tendon is not perpendicular (in plan) to the
cross section under consideration, then vector components of the cross section strains and the tendon stresses
are used.
71.6.3 Section 10.5.1 Minimum Reinforcement in Beams (Non prestressed)

10.5.1.1 is implemented for beams, which considers the bending strength of the section designed to be at least
1.2Mcr.
10.5.1.3 is not considered.
71.6.4 Section 10.5.2 Redistribution of Moments - Ductility Check (Non

prestressed)
RAM Concept does not currently redistribute moments, but applies equation 10-5 as a limit to the neutral axis
Although the current standard does not state an upper limit for the axial compression for ductility checks, a limit
of 0.1Agfc’ is applied.
71.6.5 Section 10.6.1 Beams and One-way Slabs - Crack Control

• Equation 10-6 is implemented
(e.g., 4.3 bars).
• The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the extreme tension face. For beams with
webs in tension, this will typically be the sum of the web widths.
• The spacing is considered as the tension face width divided by the number of bars. An additional bar is not
added to make the width start and end with a bar.

CSA A23.3-04 Design


Prestressed)
face).

Prestressed)
• Equation 10-6 is implemented
(e.g., 4.3 bars).
71.6.8 Section 11.3 Shear and Torsion Tension

Included code sections - 11.3.9.2, 11.3.9.3, 11.3.9.5, 11.3.10.6

CSA A23.3-04 Design
The longitudinal reinforcement is designed including the additional tension forces caused by shear and torsion
in accordance with 11.3.9.
The calculation is performed iteratively to find the strain at mid-depth of the cross section, ε x using cracked
section analysis. The shear tension is calculated using the shear terms of equations 11-14 and 11-15 and
ignoring the vertical component of prestressing.
The calculated tension forces are modified in accordance with clauses 11.3.9.4 and 11.3.9.5, using a full
reduction at the face of support and linearly reducing it to 0 over a distance of dv cot θ. The distance dv is
conservatively taken as 0.72h for this calculation. In continuous spans the shear tension forces are set to zero at
the face of support in accordance with 11.3.9.4 while at the end of discontinous spans the calculated shear
tension is applied at the location of the design bar on the tension face.
Shear tension forces are combined with torsion tension forces using equation 11-21.
In slabs, the design is performed to limit the strain at mid-depth ε x to the maximum value that would not
require transverse reinforcement. If transverse reinforcement is required, the design is performed such that ε x
is limited to 0.001.
In the calculation of longitudinal strain ε x , no material strength reduction factors are applied.
71.6.9 Section 11.3 Shear Resistance of Beams

Included code sections - 11.2.8, 11.2.9, 11.2.10.2, 11.3.1, 11.3.3, 11.3.4, 11.3.5.1, 11.3.6.4, 11.3.8.1, 11.3.8.3,
11.3.10
Excluded code sections - 11.3.2, 11.3.5.2, 11.3.8.2
See “Concrete “Core” Determination”.
In beams, transverse reinforcement consists of transverse reinforcement perpendicular to the axis of the
member.
General equation 11-4 is used for all cases but vertical component of effective prestress force (Vp) is
conservatively not included in the calculations.
In the determination of the effective concrete web width, the width of the shear core is considered, less the
widths specified in accordance with 11.2.10.2.
Minimum reinforcement is provided in accordance with 11.2.8 and equation 11-1.
The effective depth for shear is taken as the greater of 0.9d or 0.72h, where d is the distance from the extreme
compression fiber to the resultant tension force.
The maximum spacing limits of 11.3.8.1 are applied.
If “beam” torsion design is selected, see “Section 11.3 Torsion Design”

CSA A23.3-04 Design
71.6.10 Section 11.3 Torsion Design

Included code sections - 11.2.9.1, 6.3.2
Torsion properties are calculated in accordance with 11.3.10.
Torsion reinforcement consists of longitudinal reinforcement and closed ties perpendicular to the axis of the
member according to 11.2.6(a).
Ao is assumed to be equal to 0.85 Aoh per 11.3.6.
11.3.10.4 equation 11-19 is implemented such that the torsion demand reduces the shear capacity. For very high
torsions, this can make the shear capacity negative.
The longitudinal torsion tension demand is satisfied by calculating a torsion tension in accordance with equation
11-21, incorporating it with the shear tension and then adding these forces to the section forces and then
performing a bending/axial desing in Pass 1.
The area of transverse reinforcement is determined by equation 11-17.
Torsional and shear longitudinal reinforcement is considered along with other longitudinal reinforcement when

Section 13.10.2 (Unbalanced moment transfer)

CSA A23.3-04 Design
71.6.12 Section 18.3.1.1a Initial (at stressing) Compressive Stress Limit

stress.
reported.
71.6.13 Section 18.3.1.1b Initial (at stressing) Tensile Stress Limit

′
0.25λ f ci is the limiting value.
stress.
reported.
The limiting stress is reported, but reinforcement per section 18.3.1.3 is added to resist the total tensile force if

stress.
reported.

CSA A23.3-04 Design

stress.
reported.
71.6.16 Section 18.7 Cracking Moment

that these regions will contain the peak moments and hence the first part of a span to crack.
This criterion is not applied to two-way slabs.
moment.
′
Modulus of rupture (fcr) is 0.6λ f c times the lightweight concrete factor. The maximum f ’c for the cross
section is used.
71.6.17 Section 18.8.2 Minimum Bonded Reinforcement

The minimum bonded reinforcement is provided in accordance with the following table.
′ ′
Tensile Stress, σ ≤ 0.5λ f c Tensile Stress, σ > 0.5λ f c
Type of Tendon Type of Tendon
Member Type Bonded Unbonded Bonded Unbonded
Beam 0 0.004A 0.003A 0.005A
One-way Slab 0 0.003A 0.002A 0.004A

CSA A23.3-04 Design
′ ′
Tensile Stress, σ ≤ 0.5λ f c Tensile Stress, σ > 0.5λ f c
Type of Tendon Type of Tendon
Member Type Bonded Unbonded Bonded Unbonded
Two-way negative 0 0.006hln 0.0045hln 0.0075hln

moment regions
Two-way positive 0 0.004A 0.003A 0.005A

moment regions
′
> 0.2λ f c
Two-way positive 0 0 n/a n/a

moment regions
′
< 0.2λ f c
stress.
reported.
71.6.18 Section 18.8.3 Minimum Reinforcement of Flexural Members

(Prestressed)
Equation 10-6 is implemented
A cracked section analysis is performed to calculate the stress in the reinforcement.
Iteration is used to find the minimum number of bars and bonded tendon ducts that meets the criteria. A non-
integral number of bars may be used.
The section width used to determine the spacing is the width of the solid areas of the extreme tension face. For
beams with stems in tension, this will typically be the sum of the stem widths.
The spacing is considered as the width divided by the number of bars and bonded tendon ducts. An additional
bar is not added to make the width start and end with a bar.
fs in bonded tendons is calculated as the difference between the stress in the bonded tendon due to the specified
load moment and the decompression moment.
RAM Concept may use more reinforcement than “necessary” in two circumstances:
Reinforcing bar stresses are limited to the minimum of (0.5 fpy) and 30 ksi.

CSA A23.3-04 Design


72
The calculation of concrete floor deflections is complicated. There are many issues to consider, and even with
adequate consideration and calculation, any deflection prediction should only be considered an estimate.
Deflections are affected by:
• member size (section properties)
• concrete modulus of elasticity
• reinforcement (unstressed and post-tensioning)
• applied loads
• load history
• cracking
• shrinkage
• creep
• dynamic effects (vibrations)
Historically, designers have usually calculated deflections of concrete members using elastic methods with
modifications made for some of the factors listed above.
Most post-tensioned floors have been designed to minimize cracking and so elastic deflection calculation
methods have generally been acceptable. The increasing usage of partial prestress methods has made deflection
calculations more important for post-tensioned design. Reinforced floors usually undergo more extensive
cracking than post-tensioned floors, which is one reason why they need more concrete section, and more
consideration of deflection issues.
More aggressive designs (that is, with shallower or thinner concrete sections) require a more rigorous analysis
to determine that the deflection limit states are satisfactory. The aggressive designer must, however, have a
thorough understanding of the methods and issues to ensure satisfactory deflections.
In particular, if the designer pushes the floor design “to the limit” then problems may occur due to issues that are
unforeseen or not considered by RAM Concept. These include:
• poor placement of reinforcement (less effective depth resulting in more cracking)
• vibrations (dynamic effects are not considered by RAM Concept)
72.1 About RAM Concept’s load history deflection calculations

RAM Concept analyzes the concrete floor using a linear elastic global analysis. All deflection contour plans are
representative of the linear elastic analysis and the particular load combination’s std load factors. The load
history deflection calculations perform detailed calculations on the cross sections including the effects of

About RAM Concept’s load history deflection calculations
cracking, creep, shrinkage, tension stiffening, and load history and then uses the results to modify the element
stiffness in the linear elastic global analysis to calculate deflection contours considering the various effects.
Dynamic effects are not considered.
In order to calculate load history deflections the load history must first be specified by the user. This is done in
the “Load History” criteria page.
Each load history step represents an applied load combination for a specified duration of time. Each load history
step is solved in sequence, taking into consideration the effects from all previous load history steps. For
instantaneous load steps the duration can be specified as zero. The specified sequence of load steps makes up
the entire load history. The total age at the end of each load history step is reported as a read only value in the
table.
In order to calculate load history results, span segments and design sections must be specified such that each
finite element with significant stress is covered by the tributary of a design strip cross section or design section
oriented appropriately for the element stress. For one-way slabs, this could be achieved by defining span
segments in the spanning direction only. For two-way slabs, span segments should be specified in orthogonal
directions to cover the entire slab. Since the load history deflection detailed calculations are carried out on the
cross sections and subsequently used to adjust element stiffness, omission of span segments or design sections
in highly stressed regions will result in an inaccurate and potentially unconservative prediction of deflections.
RAM Concept’s load history deflection calculations do not directly consider the effects from specified patterns,
from live load reduction, or from alternate load factors.
Since the load history calculations can be time consuming, they are performed separately from other
calculations in RAM Concept. They are invoked using the Calc Load History Deflections ( ) command. The
button will only be active if load steps are specified in the Load History criteria page and if the current load
history results are out of date.
Results
The results for each load history step are available in the load history folder on the report tree. The results
stored on each load history step represent the state of the structure at the end of the load history step.
Additional load history steps can be added at any desired interval in order to calculate results at any particular
age of interest.
Normally vertical deflections will be the results of most interest on a load history layer, but there are several
other plot quantities that may also be of interest. The following plot quantities are only available for plot on load
history layers, from the Slab Value menu:
fa/fcr - represents the ratio of applied axial stress over the cracking stress (normally the modulus of rupture).
The applied stress is the result of applied loads and induced strains, including the effects of the input shrinkage

The load history deflection calculation process
restraint %. Only values greater than 0 are plotted, and any value of 1 or greater represents an area that will be
considered as cracked for the load history calculations.
fa/fcr (unrestrained) - represents fa/fcr but with the effects of shrinkage restraint % removed. These values are
plotted for information only to help understand the effects of the shrinkage restraint % value input. These values
are not used directly in the load history calculations.
I/Ig - represents the modified long-term load history stiffness over the gross stiffness. This includes the effects of
cracking, tension stiffening, creep, shrinkage, and all other load history effects. This number is normally less than
1.0 due to cracking and creep but can also be greater than 1.0 due to shrinkage warping that can counteract
applied loads. This value is plotted in a spanning direction, so x-axis direction will represent stiffness in an x-
oriented span resulting from cross sections oriented in a perpendicular axis.
Note: The fa/fcr plots are available for top and bottom aspects (nothing will be plotted if mid-depth is selected).
The values respect the axes selected, and rotations are handled assuming the cross sections are principal axes
and using Mohr's circle transformations to other plot axes.
Note: The I/Ig plots are not dependent upon depth aspects, but respect the axes selected and also assume the
cross-section axes are principal axes and use Mohr's circle transformations to other plot axes. Top and bottom
effects can potentially become mixed with angle transformations. For example, if the x-axis is cracked top and
the y-axis is cracked bottom but a 45 degree plot angle is selected these effects will be combined at the selected
axis as if they were compatible.
72.2 The load history deflection calculation process

Load history deflections are calculated using a mult-step process summarized below. For each load history step,
the process is performed separately for the instaneous change in loads at the beginning of the load history step
and the sustained changes over the duration of the load history step, in which the loads are assumed to remain
constant:
1. Solve cross section forces
2. For each cross section, calculate curvatures including long term effects and prior load history:
• Gross cross section curvature (using gross section properties)
• Uncracked cross section curvature (using uncracked transformed section properties)
• Cracked cross section curvature (using cracked transformed section properties)
• Creep cross section curvature (takes into account cracking history of the cross section)
3. Using the calculated curvatures and the tension stiffening model, calculate an “average” curvature for each
cross section.
4. For each element in the structure, use the average calculated curvatures for the tributary cross sections to set
stiffness factors for the element.
5. Re-analyze the structure with the adjusted element stiffnesses and check for convergence. Convergence is
measured by the deflection difference between two iterations as measured at a key node.
6. Repeat 1-5 for each load history step until convergence.

Load history calculations on the cross section
72.3 Load history calculations on the cross section

Load history deflections utilize detailed time-dependent curvature calculations on the cross section. Influence of
creep, shrinkage, cracking, and load history effects are included. Additional information on the detailed cross
section calculations was presented by Hirsch [Hirsch, J., “Accurate Long-Term Deflection Prediction in Flat Slabs
Using Linear Elastic Global Analysis”, 24th Biennial Conference of the Concrete Institute of Australia, Sydney,
Australia, 2009, 11 pp.].
72.3.1 Material Stress Strain Curves

Generally the service level material stress-strain curves for concrete, reinforcement, and post-tensioning are
utilized in the load history deflection calculations. The concrete stress-strain curves designated in the IS 456 and
EC2 standards are not dependent upon the modulus of elasticity of the concrete. Since this a desirable attribute
in deflection calculations and the user may want to define a custom modulus of elasticity that will be taken into
account in the load history calculations, the PCA concrete stress-strain curve in the section “Concrete Stress-
Strain Curves” is utilized in the load history calculations for these standards.
72.3.2 Creep
Creep strains occur over time and a number of models are available to predict the development of creep as a
function of time. The following creep models are implemented in RAM Concept and can be selected for use in the
Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog: ACI 209R-92 (ECR values), ACI209.2 – GL 2000, AS
3600-2018, and Eurocode 2-2004. See Creep and Shrinkage Models (on page 1180) for a brief description of
each model.
Creep strains are assumed to be a linear factor of the elastic strain for a particular load. In order to consider
loads that are applied at different times, the assumption is made that creep strains of like or opposing signs can
be superimposed. These assumptions are likely reasonable for the normal range of service loads.
An ageing coefficient χ is used as a modifier of creep to account for the rate of application loading, its effect on
the creep and the variation of concrete strength over the time period. While the rigorous calculation of the
coefficient is rather involved, this value can normally be taken as 0.8 with little loss in accuracy.
Creep models generally include an adjustment factor for a volume-to-surface ratio or an effective cross section
thickness. The Exposure property in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog defines the element
surfaces that are exposed and used to determine the exposed perimeter for that adjustment. When “Top and
Bottom” is selected, both top and bottom surfaces of the element are assumed exposed. When “Top Only” or
“Bottom Only” is selected, only the top or bottom surface of the element is assumed exposed, respectively.
72.3.3 Shrinkage
Shrinkage strains occur over time and a number of models are available to predict the development of shrinkage
as a function of time. The following creep models are implemented in RAM Concept and can be selected for use
in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog: ACI 209R-92 (ECR values), ACI209.2 – GL 2000, AS

3600-2018, and Eurocode 2-2004. See Creep and Shrinkage Models (on page 1180) for a brief description of
each model.
Shrinkage models generally include an adjustment factor for a volume-to-surface ratio or an effective cross
section thickness. The Exposure property in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog defines the
element surfaces that are exposed and used to determine the exposed perimeter for that adjustment. When “Top
and Bottom” is selected, both top and bottom surfaces of the element are assumed exposed. When “Top Only” or
“Bottom Only” is selected, only the top or bottom surface of the element is assumed exposed, respectively.
72.3.4 Creep and Shrinkage Models

ACI 209R-92 (ECR values)
This was the only creep and shrinkage model implemented in the RAM Concept prior to Version 8 Update 2. This
model will automatically be selected when opening any RAM Concept file that was created in one of those prior
versions.
The ACI 209R-92 creep model utilizes the creep factor that is input in the ECR box in the Load History / ECR tab
of the Calc Options dialog. The input creep factor should represent the final ultimate creep value and should take
into account concrete mix, environmental considerations, etc. and can reflect any considerations required by
regional building codes. The modification factor γla to account for initial load application times other than 7 days
is automatically included in RAM Concept’s load history calculations and should not be incorporated into the
input creep factor.
The ACI 209R-92 model calculates creep strain based upon the modulus of the mean concrete strength at time of
loading. Since Concept calculates curvatures based upon the concrete modulus value at 28 days, an adjustment is
needed to convert creep strains to the code model values. A rigorous conversion in RAM Concept is not possible,
however, because the load history curvature calculations are non-linear. Instead, RAM Concept applies an
approximate adjustment, which recognizes that creep strains are proportional to the inverse of the elastic
modulus. For the ACI 209-92 model, all creep strains are modified by the ratio of the mean elastic modulus at 28
days (Ecmt28) to the mean elastic modulus at the time of loading (Ecmt0). For this conversion, RAM Concept
assumes that the code calculated or directly input Ec value is an experimental value and can be considered a 28-
day mean modulus as a result. The adjustment is based on Equations A-16 and A-17 that are referenced for the
ACI209R-92 model in ACI 209.2R-08 and calculated as follows:
f cmt 0 a + bt From Equation A-17
f cmt 28
= t
≤1
Where, a and b are constants that are functions of the cement type and type of curing (moist curing assumed).
Ecmt 28 1 From Equation A-16
Ecmt0
= f cmt0
f cmt 28
The ratio of the code calculated or directly input Ec value to the code calculated or directly input Eci value is
used as an upper bound for this calculated adjustment.
User Recommendation: In the Material Specifications, input the 28-day design concrete strength and select
“Code” for Ec Calc. The Ec value used during the load history calculated will then be slightly lower than the actual
mean elastic modulus, which will result in slightly higher calculated curvatures and curvatures. Otherwise, input
the experiment determined concrete strength or use the experimentally determined Ec as a Specified Ec, which
will more directly match the creep model.

The ACI 209R-92 shrinkage model for moist curing is implemented. This model utilizes the shrinkage strain that
is input in the ECR box in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog. The input shrinkage strain
should represent the final ultimate shrinkage and should take into account concrete mix, environmental
considerations, etc. and can reflect any considerations required by regional building codes. The adjustment
factor for curing times different than 7 days is automatically calculated by the program using ACI 209.2-08
Equation A-6 and the input Cure Duration.
ACI 209.2R-08/GL 2000

This is the default creep model for new models that are created when any of the following design codes are
selected for use: ACI 318, IS 456, and CAN/CSA A23.3. The GL2000 model was developed by Gardner and
Lockman and is summarized in ACI 209.2-08.
The Basic Creep Coefficient in the Load History/ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog represents the constant (2) in
the first term of ACI 209.2R-08 Equation A-103. When “Code” is selected for the Basic Creep Coefficient
parameter, RAM Concept automatically uses this value for the coefficient. A different value for the basic creep
coefficient can also be input by the user. Whether the Basic Creep Coefficient is set to “Code” or input by the user,
RAM Concept automatically calculates the adjustment terms associated with the second and third terms of
Equation A-103, which use the input Relative Humidity, the selected Exposure, and the geometry of each cross
section. If a value of 0 is input for the Basic Creep Coefficient, then the effective creep coefficient including all
adjustment factors is assumed to be 0.
The ACI 209.2R-08/GL 200 model calculates creep strain based upon the 28-day mean concrete elastic modulus.
Since RAM Concept assumes that the Ec value is a 28-day mean modulus as a result, no adjustment for the elastic
modulus is required at early ages.
User Recommendation: In the Material Specifications, input the 28-day design concrete strength and select
“Code” for Ec Calc. The Ec value used during the load history calculated will then be slightly lower than the actual
mean elastic modulus, which will result in slightly higher calculated curvatures and curvatures. Otherwise, input
the experiment determined concrete strength or use the experimentally determined Ec as a Specified Ec, which
will more directly match the creep model.
The ACI 209.2R-08/GL 2000 shrinkage model utilizes an ultimate shrinkage strain (Equation A-99), which
represents the Basic Shrinkage Strain input in the Load History/ECR tab of the Calc Option dialog. When “Code”
is selected for the Basic Shrinkage Strain, RAM Concept calculates the strain using Equation A-99. A different
value for the Basic Shrinkage Strain can also be input by the user. Whether the Basic Shrinkage Strain is set to
“Code” or input by the user, RAM Concept automatically calculates the adjustment terms, which depend on the
input Relative Humidity, the selected Exposure, and the geometry of each cross section.
Note: While ACI 209.2R-08 references both English and metric unit equations for the GL 2000 model, only the
English unit equations are implemented in RAM Concept and unit conversions are completed, as required, before
using the equations.
AS 3600-2018
This is the default creep model for new models that are created when any of the AS 3600 design codes are
selected for use.
The Basic Creep Coefficient in the Load History/ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog represents the basic creep
coefficient in AS 3600-2018 Table 3.1.8.2. When “Code” is selected for the Basic Creep Coefficient parameter,
RAM Concept automatically calculates this coefficient using the concrete strength and interpolating between the
tabulated values. A specific value for the basic creep coefficient can also be input by the user. Whether the Basic
Creep Coefficient is calculated or input by the user, RAM Concept automatically calculates the code defined

adjustment factors k2, k3, k4, and k5. k2 is calculated for each time step using the equation in Table 3.1.8.3. k3 is
calculated using the time input for the Initial Load Application in the Calc Options dialog. k4 is determined using
the selections for Environment and Exposure and the geometry of each cross section. k5 is determined based on
the concrete strength of the section. The load history calculations in RAM Concept exclude the adjustment factor
k6, which account for creep nonlinearity at high compressive stress. The “Max. Fa/Fc Ratio” for each cross
section is reported in the Load History Analysis Table for each load history step.
The AS 3600-2018 model calculates creep strain based upon the mean modulus of elasticity at 28 days (Ec),
which is a function of the mean in situ compressive strength (fcmi). When calculating the mean elastic modulus,
RAM Concept internally adjusts from the input characteristic cylinder strength to the mean in-situ. In the event
that cylinder strength is determined experimentally (fcm) by the user for use in a RAM Concept model, we
recommend inputting the equivalent characteristic cylinder strength f’c found from Table 3.1.2 in the Material
Specification. Similarly, in the event that the elastic modulus is determined experimentally for use in a RAM
Concept model, we recommend finding an in-situ modulus and entering that value as the Specified Ec in the
Material Specification.
The AS 3600-2018 shrinkage model distinguishes between autogenous shrinkage and drying shrinkage. RAM
Concept calculates and tracks each over time using separate time curves. The Basic Autogenous Shrinkage Strain
in the Load History/ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog represents the final autogenous shrinkage strain defined
by the term εcse* in Equation 3.1.7.2(4). This strain can be calculated by the program or input by the user. RAM
Concept automatically calculates the final Autogenous Shrinkage Strain using equation 3.1.7.2(2). The Basic
Drying Shrinkage strain in the Calc Options dialog represents the basic drying shrinkage strain defined by
Equation 3.1.7.2(5). Like the Basic Autogenous Shrinkage Strain, this strain can be calculated the program or
input by the user. Note that the term εcsd.b should be input for Basic Drying Shrinkage Strain, and not εcsd.b*
Eurocode 2-2004
This is the default creep model for new models that are created when any of the Eurocode 2 or BS 8110 design
codes are selected for use.
The Basic Creep Coefficient in the Load History/ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog represents β(fcm) defined by
Eurocode 2-2004 Equation B.4. When “Code” is selected for the Basic Creep Coefficient in the Load History / ECR
tab of the Calc Options dialog, RAM Concept automatically calculates this coefficient based on the concrete
compressive strength. A specific value for the basic creep coefficient can also be input by the user. Whether the
Basic Creep Coefficient is calculated or input by the user, RAM Concept automatically calculates the code defined
adjustment factors to account for time after loading (Equation B.7), relative humidity (Equation B.3a or B.3b)
and cement type (Equation B.9). The load history calculations in RAM Concept exclude the adjustments to
account for nonlinearity at high compressive stress (Equation 3.7) and the effect of temperature on concrete
maturity (Equation B.10). The “Max. Fa/Fc Ratio” for each cross section is reported in the Load History Analysis
Table for each load history step.
The Eurocode 2-2004 model calculates the creep coefficient based upon the tangent modulus, Ec. Since RAM
Concept assumes that the calculated or input Ec value is the secant modulus, Ecm, an adjustment is needed to
convert creep strains to the code model values. This is adjustment factor is taken as 1.05 based on Clause 3.1.4
(2).
User Recommendation: When calculating the elastic modulus, RAM Concept internally adjusts from the input
characteristic cylinder strength (fck) to the mean compressive strength (fcm). In the event that cylinder strength
is determined experimentally (fcm) by the user for use in a RAM Concept model, we recommend inputting the
equivalent characteristic cylinder strength (fck) found from Table 3.1 in the Material Specification. In the event
that the elastic modulus is determined experimentally for use in a RAM Concept model, we recommend entering
that value as the Specified Ec in the Material Specification since it represents the 28-day mean modulus, Ecm.

The Eurocode 2-2004 shrinkage model distinguishes between autogenous shrinkage and drying shrinkage. RAM
Concept calculates and tracks each over time using separate time curves. The Basic Autogenous Shrinkage Strain
in the Load History/ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog represents the final autogenous shrinkage strain defined
by Equation 3.12. The Basic Drying Shrinkage strain in the Calc Options dialog represents the basic drying
shrinkage strain defined by Equation B.11. Like the Basic Autogenous Shrinkage Strain, this strain can be
calculated the program or input by the user.
The relationship between the input parameters in the Load History/ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog and the
code model equations are summarized in the following table for each creep/shrinkage model. RAM Concept uses
the tabulated value when “Code” is selected for the respective input parameter.
Table 103: Adjusted Modulus of Rupture Calculation (0 days < t < 28 days)
Creep/Shrinkage ACI 209R-92 ACI 209.2/GL2000 AS 3600-2018 Eurocode 2-2004

Model
(ECR Values)
Early Age t
f cmt (t) = βe2 f cm28 f cm (t) = βcc × f cm f ctm (t) = βcc × f ctm
f cmt (t) = a + bt f cm28
Concrete
Compressive (ACI 209.2-08 Eq A-17) (ACI 209.2-08 Eq. A-97) (AS 3600-2018 (Eurocode 2 Eq
Strength 18.2)Note 2 3.4)Note 3
Equation
Adjusted Early f r (t) = 7.5λ f cmt (t) f r (t) = 7.5λ f cmt (t) '
f cr,t(t) = 0.6 f cm (t)
Age Modulus of
Rupture (ACI 318-14 Eq 19.2.3.1) (ACI 318-14 Eq (AS 3600-2018 3.1.1.3)
Equation Note 1 19.2.3.1)
1. The modulus of rupture is calculated using the equation of defined in the selected design code. Any
implemented design code can be used for each of the implemented creep/shrinkage models. The tabulated
formula is a sample equation from only one of the implemented design codes.
2. The referenced clause is for detailed fatigue design. The f cm (t) is used here as it is intuitive that concrete
strength changes over time and the factor is exactly the same as the factor used in Eurocode 2-2004 Equation
3.2.
3. f ctm is the 28-day modulus of rupture calculated using the equation defined in the selected design code.
72.3.5 Cracking/Tension Stiffening

When a flexural load or shrinkage causes the applied tensile stresses to exceed the cracking stress, the stress is
relieved at that location and a redistribution of stress occurs with a resulting increase in cross section curvature.
As load increases, the number of cracks also increases. In the cross section calculations, at the crack locations the
concrete is assumed to carry no tension. In the regions between the cracks the bonded tension reinforcement
transfers tension back into the concrete. This phenomenon is normally referred to as tension stiffening. In a
partially cracked concrete member, the mean curvature over a region lies between the uncracked curvature and
the curvature at the crack locations.
A number of models exist for predicting the tension stiffening behavior. The tension stiffening model presented
in the Eurocode 2-2004 Equation 7.19 is utilized in RAM Concept’s load history calculations:

SR = β ( )
M cr 2
Ma
where
β = a coefficient taking account for the duration of loading
= 1.0 for a short-term loading (characteristic or frequent service rule set)
= 0.5 for sustained loads (quasi-permanent service rule set)
Mcr = the gross cross section cracking moment
Ma = the applied moment
This stress ratio is only the right hand side of equation 7.19 as we use this ratio to modify the uncracked results.
In Eurocode 2 this stress ratio is subtracted from unity to be applied to the cracked results. As this formula does
not consider axial forces which may be present (especially in post-tensioned structures), we have modified it to
consider axial forces:
SR = β ( )
f cr 2
fa
where
fcr = the concrete flexural tensile strength
fa = the cross-section tensile fiber stress (based on gross section properties)
If there is no axial force, then this formulation is identical to the eq. 7.19 formulation. If there are axial forces,
this formulation is a reasonable (but not theoretically identical) extrapolation of the Eurocode formula. This
value is always limited to be less than or equal to 1.0
Eurocode 2 states that β should be taken as 1 for short-term loading and 0.5 for long-term loading (see Clause
7.4.3). Some experts (see Scanlon and Bischoff and Gilbert references 1) have concluded that β is intended to
account for a reduced cracking moment due to additional stresses caused by internal reinforcement restraint to
shrinkage. Since the internal reinforcement restraint to shrinkage is rigorously calculated in RAM Concept’s load
history calculations, the program uses β = 1 to avoid double counting that effect.
Note:
1. See the following references:
• Scanlon, A. and Bischoff, P., “Shrinkage Restraint and Loading History Effects on Deflections of Flexural
Members”, ACI Structural Journal, 105 (4), 2008, pp. 498-506.
• Gilbert, R.I and Ranzi, G., “Time-Dependent Behavior of Concrete Structures”, CRC Press, 2019.
The modulus of rupture for the selected Design Code is used for the concrete flexural tension strength in the
tension stiffening equation. RAM Concept calculates this rupture strength using the 28-day design concrete
strength that is input in the Materials window (Criteria – Materials). Since the compressive strength increases
over time, the program applies a correction factor to covert the modulus for rupture from 28-days to the actual
time of loading in order to account for the reduced strength at early age loading (before 28 days). The
adjustment factors used for each model are referenced in Table 104. When calculating the adjustment, RAM
Concept uses the modulus of rupture calculated with f'ci in the Materials window as the lower bound for the
early age modulus of rupture.

Table 104: Adjustment Factors for Modulus of Rupture
ACI 209R-92 ACI 209.2-08/GL 2000 AS 3600-2018 Eurocode 2-2004
(ECR Values)
f cmt βe βcc( to) Note 1 f ctm,t

Note 2
f cm28 f ctm28
Equation A-97 Clause 18.2
ACI 209.2-08 A-17 (Table 3.1)
Note:
1. The referenced clause is for detailed fatigue design. The factor is applied here as it is intuitive that the
concrete strength changes over time and the factor is exactly the same as the factor in Eurocode 2-2004
Equation 3.2.
2. fctm,t is calculated using βcc(t) from Equation 3.2.
In general, external restraint to shrinkage shortening can increase the cracking in the floor, thus increasing
deflections. Failure to account for this effect can result in underestimation of deflection values. A crude means of
accounting for this is through the “Shrinkage Restraint %” value in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc
Options dialog. This percentage is multiplied by the input free shrinkage strain value (as a function of time) to
determine a hypothetical tension strain. This hypothetical tension strain is combined with the load induced
strains which is then used to determine a hypothetical tension stress from the concrete stress strain curve. This
hypothetical tension stress is used in the tension stiffening calculation. These stresses are not used in the cross
section curvature calculations. As such, increasing this percentage will generally increase the amount of cracking
predicted and used in the tension stiffening interpolation, but will not affect the calculated curvatures directly.
The Shrinkage Restraint % in the Load History / ECR tab of the Calc Options dialog may be selected based on
one of the pre-set options mapped below or input by the user by entering a percentage directly in the field box.
Option Description
None Shrinkage Restraint = 0 %
Mild Shrinkage Restraint = 5 %
Moderate Shrinkage Restraint = 10 %
Severe Shrinkage Restraint = 15 %
72.3.6 Load History

The tension stiffening model generally predicts the response for instantaneous loads, so some extensions are
necessary to account for the effects of the load history on the member.
• Creep and shrinkage strains are included in the calculated uncracked and cracked cross section curvatures.
• Creep strains for the cracked curvature calculations consider the actual cracking history of the cross section.
• While calculating cracked section curvatures, creep is only applied to portions of strain change in
compression.

Element stiffness adjustments
• Once a cross section is determined to be cracked during a particular load history step iteration, it is assumed
to be cracked for all future iterations and load history steps.
• The mean curvature calculated for any loading level is assumed to be proportional to the mean curvature
calculated at the peak loading level.
72.4 Element stiffness adjustments

The element stiffness in a particular iteration is adjusted based upon the influence of the cross sections (from
either design sections or span segment strips) that have tributaries that intersect the element. In the instance
where multiple cross sections cover an element at various angles, a weighted average and vector components
squared of each cross section is used to determine the cross section’s influence on the element stiffness.
The axial and flexural element stiffness for each element in the model is adjusted based upon the ratio of the
calculated gross curvature to the calculated mean curvature. For most normal situations, it will be possible to
calculate equilibrium for the mean curvature and for cross section curvatures predominately caused by loading
the gross and mean curvatures will have the same sign. Unusual cases are handled as follows:
• For the case where equilibrium cannot be achieved in a cross section calculation, a warning is logged in the
calc log and the mean curvature is set to be 50 times the gross curvature. This is normally caused by
inadequate reinforcement specified in the cross section without performing design, or an unexpected load
combination is selected. This can sometimes occur as a normal part of the calculation process, where
cracking in a highly stresses region shifts force to a less stressed region that does not have enough
reinforcement to achieve equilibrium. In this case, this “softening” will effectively shift load back to the region
that is designed to take it, and will predict both locations to be cracked.
• For the case where the mean curvature is opposite in sign from the gross curvature, the mean curvature is set
to be 2 times the gross curvature. This will normally be caused by shrinkage strains larger in magnitude than
the load induced strains, often times in regions of low bending. As a result, this modification will many times
have little effect on the deflection calculations. No warning is issued for this situation.
72.5 Why are load history deflection results different from Long Term
Deflection results plotted for the strip?
Because the methodology is entirely different, the results between the load history calculations will sometimes
differ from the long-term deflections plotted on the strip. It is common for the load history deflections to be
larger or smaller than the strip based long-term deflections. Some of the primary differences are outlined here.
Several aspects of load history deflections that can cause them to be larger than strip based long-term
deflections are:
• Redistribution of forces is considered, which can lead to a more realistic prediction of cracking in the
structure. Cracking in one region can lead to increased forces in adjacent regions (either laterally or along the
span) which can in turn lead to additional cracking throughout the structure.
• Stresses induced in the uncracked concrete due to shrinkage being restrained by the reinforcement or by
specifying a Shrinkage Restraint % are considered in the cracking and tension stiffening calculations.

Advice on drawing cross sections
Several aspects of load history deflections that can cause them to be smaller than strip based long-term
deflections are:
• Compression reinforcement is always considered, whether the cross section is actually cracked or not.
Uncracked transformed properties are used where the cross section is not cracked.
• Load history is taken into consideration. If the maximum load is not sustained through the duration of the
calculation, the load history calculations will take this into consideration.
72.6 Advice on drawing cross sections

In order to get good deflection predictions, it is necessary to define reasonable cross sections. This includes
defining cross sections that cover all regions of significant stress. Cross sections can be defined by drawing span
segments and generating span segment strips or by drawing design sections. When drawing design sections it is
important to pay attention to the “tributary length” property to ensure proper element coverage.
It is also advisable in structures that are cracking sensitive (like RC structures) to define cross sections that are
not too wide in regions of steep moment gradient. An example of recommended usage would be using column
and middle strips in a reinforced concrete two-way slab. Making the cross sections too wide could, due to stress
averaging, cause the cracking prediction for the cross section to be unconservative and result in underestimation
of deflections.
Another example is cross sections with significant axial forces due to bending caused by eccentric element
stiffness. For example, a T beam with separate cross sections for the web and the flanges. In this case, a large
portion of the bending behavior will be captured through eccentric axial forces in the cross sections. However,
since RAM Concept’s load history calculations rely on cross section curvatures and not axial strains to make
element stiffness adjustments, this portion of the bending behavior will not be captured in the load history
analysis. This will generally result in an underestimation of deflections. Therefore, drawing spans and cross
sections in this manner is highly discouraged. A good approach is to utilize a reasonable effective flange in the T
beam cross section, which will minimize the axial forces on the cross sections due to bending. One way to
accomplish this is to select Code T-beam for the Column Strip Width Calc of the Span Segment.
72.7 A final word of caution

Due to the unpredictable nature and variability of early age shrinkage and cracking, it is not possible to
accurately estimate deflections in the early ages (30-90 days). As such, load history deflection results for ages
less than 90 days should be used with extreme caution. When evaluating differential deflections between long-
term deflections and early age deflections (such as at time of installation of partitions), a generally conservative
approach could be to compare the long-term load history deflections with the deflection results for the load
combination (linear elastic results) in place at time of application of partitions (which would not include the
effects of shrinkage, creep, and cracking).
Additionally, deflection calculations can be somewhat sensitive to finite element mesh size. For best results
using load history calculations, at least 12 elements per bay are recommended with a cross section spacing
approximately equal to the resulting element size.

Punching Shear Design Notes
73
Ensuring that a slab will not fail in punching shear is one of the most important tasks in slab design. This chapter
gives an overview of punching shear design and advice on using RAM Concept’s punching shear design
capabilities.
73.1 Punching shear overview
73.1.1 What is a “punching shear” failure?

Large support reactions (or any load) applied over a small area of a slab can cause the slab to fail near the
perimeter of the support in shear-like failure. This “punching shear” is different from “beam shear” because the
failure location is around a perimeter instead of along a line across the slab. Bending moment reactions applied
along with the reaction force tend to lower the amount of load that can be supported without a punching failure.
Local thickenings of a slab may increase the punching shear resistance, or may just move the punching shear
failure location to a perimeter outside of the thickened area. Punching shear failures are usually brittle and
sudden.
73.1.2 How are forces really transferred in a punching zone?

The transfer of forces in a punching zone is extremely complex, and the load path changes with increased
cracking in the zone. There are no simple general models to predict the behavior of the punching zone. Three-
dimensional truss behavior is probably the simplest model that can be applied to a punching zone, but even this
model is too complex for design purposes.
73.1.3 How do the building codes handle punching shear?

All building codes approach punching shear by replacing the actual complicated punching behavior by relatively
simple models that do not reflect the actual behavior of the punching zone. The only reason that these simple
models lead to safe designs is that they have been calibrated with test results for the standard interior, edge and
corner column cases.

How does RAM Concept handle punching shear?
It should always be remembered that for situations other than the standard interior, edge and corner cases, the
building code models might produce results that are illogical and possibly unsafe.
73.2 How does RAM Concept handle punching shear?

In RAM Concept, any slab-column connection can be designed for punching shear considerations. RAM Concept
performs the following steps in the analysis and design of a slab-column connection for punching shear:
73.2.1 Step 1: Determine the force envelopes to be checked

RAM Concept uses envelopes of the reactions on the column to calculate the force envelopes for determining the
critical case. The forces are enveloped about the punch check axes and the following cases are considered: Max
Fz, Min Fz, Max Mr, Min Mr, Max Ms, Min Ms. The controlling envelope can be displayed by checking “controlling
criteria” in the visible objects menu under “Punching Checks” on any plan that displays the Rule Set Design
Layers or Design Status Layer.
Loads applied inside the critical sections
Any loads that are applied within the critical section shape could be excluded from the punching reaction since
they do not contribute to the forces passing through the critical section. RAM Concept calculates the punching
reaction by summing the column above and below reactions with any point loads applied within the column
shape. The column shape is used for this calculation (instead of the critical section shape) as it guarantees a
single set of punching reactions for each punching check. Line and area loads are not considered in this
summation.
Punching Reactions for Lateral SE Loads
Loads of analysis type Lateral SE are appropriately included in the punching reactions. These loads are typically
applied at the column/wall locations and normally consist of at least an applied out of plane concentrated force
with a set of orthogonally applied moments. These forces typically represent the total joint forces applied from
the supports to the slab for the given lateral loading. The correct punching reaction for this type of loading is
simply the loading itself. Since RAM Concept internally removes the column and wall supports in the Lateral SE
loading analysis, the resulting punching reaction will be the summation of any loads applied within the column
shape.
Contribution from the Vertical Component of Prestress
Some building codes allow the vertical component of prestress to be considered in the punching calculations.
This is normally accomplished by adding the contribution of the vertical prestress to the capacity at the critical
section, or by subtracting the vertical prestress component from the punching reaction. RAM Concept can
approximate this effect using the Calc Option Include Tendon Component in Punch Check Reaction. If this option is
selected, after the tendons have been converted into equivalent concentrated balance loads RAM Concept will
modify (normally reduce) the punching reaction by any concentrated forces located within the column shape.
Note: Due to the fact that the tendons are idealized as concentrated balance forces as well as the fact that
Concept uses the column shape instead of the critical section shape, this calculation is approximate. When using
this option, it is extremely important to make sure that the Concept model tendon plan locations and profile
shapes match the final design and field placement in order to obtain accurate results. As such, this option should
be used with extreme caution.

73.2.2 Step 2: Determine the “column” critical sections

RAM Concept investigates the slab geometry within the punching zone radius specified to find likely failure
locations. RAM Concept’s critical section calculations correctly consider slab thicknesses, but make simplifying
assumptions about the elevations of the slab regions. In certain situations this can result in improper location of
critical sections.
In areas of varying thickness, RAM Concept's punching calculations assume that the thickenings protrude toward
the load application. For example, in an elevated slab shear caps are assumed to be located below the slab, and in
a mat/raft foundation plinths are assumed to be located above the mat/raft. If this is not the case, RAM Concept
may not locate the critical sections appropriately. See the example in the following figure.
Figure 518: Shortcoming of Concept’s consideration of failure planes
The location at some distance (usually a function of effective depth “d”) from the face of the column is
considered to be a likely failure area. The location at some distance from a change in section thickness is also
considered to be a likely failure area.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Sector Voids, then any slab edge or hole found within the punching zone
radius creates a sector or zone that offers no resistance to punching.
If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Failure Planes, then RAM Concept investigates a number of critical
sections including sections that connect to edges or openings (which provide no punching resistance) in
attempts to find the most critical section.

If the slab edge/hole treatment is set to Ignore Edges, then the location of the critical sections is not affected by
the holes, but any part of a section intersecting a hole will be considered to provide no punching resistance. It is
recommended that Ignore Edges is only used if the Sector Voids and Failure Planes treatments do not produce
desired critical sections.
Figure 519: Failure plane results for the three different slab edge / hole treatments
RAM Concept tries to connect the likely failure locations together to determine logical potentially critical
sections. The method that RAM Concept uses tends to find the appropriate sections, but does not always find
them. You should always visually inspect the locations of the critical sections that RAM Concept has checked to
see if they are appropriate (this is usually accomplished by a simple visual review of the Design Status: Punching
Shear Status Plan).
73.2.3 Step 3: Determine the code-model stresses on the column sections

Please refer to the specific code section for the description of the code model and calculation of punching
demand.
73.2.4 Step 4: Determine the code-allowable stresses on the column sections

Please refer to the specific code section for the description of the calculation of punching capacity in accordance
with the code model.

Using RAM Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement (SSR) systems
73.2.5 Step 5: Design stud shear reinforcement (SSR) if necessary

If any of the calculated column critical sections have a higher demand than capacity (and thus unreinforced stress
ratio (USR) > 1.0), the user may choose to have RAM Concept design SSR to strengthen the column, if possible.
This is done by selecting the “Design SSR if necessary” option on the punch check properties.
The SSR design is carried out on any sections with an USR > 1.0:
1. Check the maximum section stress against the allowable maximum stress - some codes use this provision to
prevent highly stressed sections from being reinforced. Please refer to the specific Code section for a detailed
description of how each handles this check.
2. Install Initial Rails - some initial rails are installed with an arbitrary length. The initial rails are installed to
satisfy the maximum transverse spacing requirement of the active Code at the face of the column or support.
3. Extend the Rails - the rails are iteratively extended until all cutoff section stresses are within the Code-
allowable stresses for unreinforced sections. A cutoff section is one at the Code specified offset distance
outside the zone reinforced with SSR.
4. Check the calculated/designed stud spacing resulting from the current rail layout. If the spacing doesn't
work, rails are added and the design is restarted at step 2.
Note: In punch checks containing slab edges, it is possible for Concept to extend the rails to a distance within the
punch check radius, but points projected perpendicular to the slab edge would be outside the punch check
radius. In this case Concept may not find the most critical cutoff sections. This can normally be rectified by
increasing the punch check radius. The Engineer should inspect cutoff sections for appropriateness and adjust
punch check properties as necessary.
73.2.6 Step 6: Summarize the Results

Finally, the results are summarized. Direct summarizing of SSR designs is not possible for a number of reasons
(for example, two independent designs might have rails of different lengths, and therefore different depths
which would dictate a different stud spacing). Therefore, if more than one design rule specifies punching shear
design, the force envelopes from each design rule are combined into a single force envelope, then a summary
design is carried out for this combined force envelope as outlined above.
For each resulting critical section the calculated stress is divided by the code allowable stress to determine an
unreinforced stress ratio (USR). If the column contains SSR reinforcement, RAM Concept also reports a
reinforced strength ratio (RSR), which is the punching demand over the strengthened capacity. If one or more of
the potentially critical sections does not fit the standard conditions, then the column is tagged with a
Nonstandard Section label in which case the engineer should review the applicability of the code design
equations to the critical section labeled nonstandard.

Column connection type
73.3 Using RAM Concept's results to specify stud shear reinforcement

(SSR) systems
Typical values specified for an SSR System include number and arrangement of rails at the column or support,
first stud spacing, typical stud spacing, stud diameter, and rail height in addition to the typical stud properties.
Most of the properties required to specify an SSR System are available by plotting the SSR under visible objects >
Punch Checks. The overall height of the rails is not reported by RAM Concept but can be easily determined from
the geometry. Generally, the height of the rails should be dimensioned to be as close as possible to the structural
member's outer surfaces (while observing necessary cover and other Code requirements). RAM Concept's
strength calculations assume that each individual shear stud rail has a single effective depth, calculated as the
thinnest effective depth of any slab area intersected by the shear stud rail. A punching design may have shear
stud rails with multiple depths at a column or support.
For the Ancon Shearfix system design, the input covers are used to calculate a physical rail depth and used to
generate the Ancon part numbers shown in the punching report.
73.4 Column connection type

RAM Concept calculates the allowable shear stress for each potentially critical section based on the applicable
code equations. The allowable stresses are dependent upon the column connection type.
Note: Column connection type is not used in AS3600.
73.4.1 About Connection Type

RAM Concept determines whether a column is “interior”, “edge”, or “corner” based on the Connection Type
property of the punching check. If the connection type property is set to Auto, then RAM Concept assigns a
connection type.
RAM Concept attempts to determine the connection type by dividing the punch check into quadrants. For
rectangular columns, the quadrant boundaries are defined from the center of the punch check through the
column corners. For round columns, the quadrants are equal angles (90° each) and are aligned with the punch
check axes. RAM Concept calculates the total angular “coverage” of critical section segments within each
quadrant, and for each quadrant that has at least 50% coverage calls that quadrant a “side”.
RAM Concept assigns the connections as follows:
• if the number of “sides” is 2 or less: corner
• if the number of “sides” is 3: edge
• if the number of “sides” is 4: interior

Column connection type
Example
The following figure shows how RAM Concept uses quadrants at the corners of a rectangular column
(blue lines). The orange lines represent the extents of the coverage of the critical section segments.
With two potential “sides” having less than the threshold 50% coverage, this column is evaluated by
the program as a corner column for the punching shear check.
Figure 520: An example of an automatically determined corner column
Note: Due to the possible complex geometries, RAM Concept will not always assign the appropriate connection
type, so we advise you to use discretion when using the Auto setting. It may be necessary in some cases to set
the column condition manually.
The connection type assigned by RAM Concept can be viewed on a plan by checking the Column Condition box
under Punching checks on any plan that displays Rule Set Design Layers, or the Design Status Layer. It is also
possible to view the connection type on the Punching Analysis plot tab in Plot Settings.

ACI 318/CSA A23.3 Punching Shear Design
For connections that don't neatly fit into one of the categories, it is conservative to select an option that has more
slab edges (i.e., if a connection appears to be somewhere between an edge and a corner, it is conservative to
select “corner” for connection type).
73.5 ACI 318/CSA A23.3 Punching Shear Design

The ACI/CSA Punching Shear Model
The ACI/CSA punching shear analysis and design approach uses the ACI 318 or CSA A23.3 provisions for the
basis of the implementation. A critical section is defined at d/2 from the periphery of the area of application of
force. These critical sections are arranged to minimize bod. For slab edges located within the punching check,
additional critical sections will be generated by projecting perpendicular lines from the original section to the
slab edges. Additionally, a set of sections will be generated for each basic slab shape (column, drop cap, etc.).
Maximum overhang (from the originating shape) can be limited as a function of d as specified by the user. For
ACI by default no limit is used. For CSA A23.3 the limit is 1.0d in accordance with clause 13.3.3.3.
To calculate the section stresses, an elastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the load/
reaction and the critical section centroid is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric
loading to calculate a linearly varying stress distribution on the section. Where there are eccentricities in two
orthogonal directions, they are considered simultaneously. γ v for each section is calculated about the principal
axes for that section. For column sections, the length/width ratios used to calculate γ v are unmodified. For
cutoff sections, the length/width ratios are modified in accordance with ACI 421.1R99.
73.5.1 Critical Section Properties and Equations for Actual Stress

This section discusses the calculation of punching resistance for an unreinforced section.
Notation
A = area of one side of the critical section, in2
bo = total length of the critical section, in.
b1 = width of the critical section measured in the direction of the span for which moments are determined, in.
b2 = width of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to b1, in.
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement, as outlined in
ACI 318, in.
Ixx = moment of inertia for bending about the x-axis for the entire critical section, in4
Ī xx = moment of inertia contribution about the x-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated
with respect to the centroid of the critical section, in4
Iyy = moment of inertia for bending about the y-axis for the entire critical section, in4
Ī yy = moment of inertia contribution about the y-axis for an individual side of the critical section, calculated
with respect to the centroid of the critical section, in4
Ixy = product of inertia for the entire critical section, in4

Ī xy = product of inertia contribution for an individual side of the critical section, calculated with respect to the
centroid of the critical section, in4
L = length of one side of the critical section, in.
Mox = joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the x-axis at the centroid of the column
utilizing a “right-hand rule” for sign convention, kip-in
Moy = Joint reaction (moments from columns above and below) about the y-axis at the centroid of the column
utilizing a “right-hand rule” for sign convention, kip-in
Mux = column reaction, moment about the x-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
Muy = column reaction, moment about the y-axis at the centroid of the critical section, kip-in
vu = shear stress located at some point on the critical section, ksi
Vu = axial column reaction, located at the centroid of the column with an upward column reaction being positive,
kips
x = x-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in.
x̄ side = x-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in.
xcol = x-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in.

xpoint = x-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in.
y = y-coordinate of the centroid of the entire critical section, in.
ȳ side = y-coordinate of the centroid of a side of the critical section, in.
ycol = y-coordinate of the centroid of the column, in.

ypoint = y-coordinate of the point at which you are calculating stresses, in.
γvx = fraction of unbalanced moment about the x-axis transferred by eccentricity of shear, in accordance with
ACI 318
γvy = fraction of unbalanced moment about the y-axis transferred by eccentricity of shear, in accordance with
ACI 318
θ = angle between a side of the critical section and the positive x-axis
Equations for Calculation of Shear Stress

The equations presented are derived from basic mechanics of materials. A similar formulation can be found in
the article “Design of Stud Shear Reinforcement for Slabs” by Ghali & Elgabry, ACI Structural Journal, May-June
1990. The values of γvx and γvy are always calculated about the principal axes of the critical section.
a. Vu ( y point )
− ȳ γvx M ux I yy + γvy M uy I xy ( x point − x̄ ) γvy M uy I xx + γvx M ux I xy
νu = bo d
+ 2
− 2
I xx I yy − I xy I xx I yy − I xy
b. M ux = M ox + V u ( ycol − ȳ )
c. M uy = M oy - V u ( xcol − x̄ )
d. n
I xx = ∑ Ī xx
sides=1
e. n
I yy = ∑ Ī yy
sides=1

f. n
I xy = ∑ Ī xy
sides=1
g. dL 3
Ī xx = 12
sin 2 ( θ ) + Ld ( ȳ − ȳ side ) 2
h. dL 3
Ī yy = 12
cos 2 ( θ ) + Ld ( x̄ − x̄ side ) 2
i. dL 3
Ī xy = 12
sin ( θ ) cos ( θ ) + Ld(x̄ − x̄ side )( ȳ − ȳ side )
j. γ = 1 − 1
v b1
2
1+
3 b2
Note: Equation a) is based upon standard strength of materials equations for bending in an asymmetric section.
If the moments are applied about one or more axis of symmetry, then Ixy = 0 and equation a) reduces to the
more familiar:
Vu γvx M ux ( y point − ȳ ) γvy M uy ( x point − x̄ )
vu = bo d
+ Ix
− Iy
73.5.2 ACI 318 Specific Provisions
Note: These Code references are from the ACI 318-14 standards.
ACI 318 Equations for Calculation of Allowable Shear Stress on the Unreinforced Section
The allowable shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation from ACI 318-14: 22.6.5.2 or
22.6.5.5.
Equation 22.6.5.2(a) controls in non-prestressed concrete zones with large column aspect ratios. As the aspect
ratio of the column gets larger, the allowable punching shear stress approaches the allowable one-way shear
stress.
Equation 22.6.5.2(b) is intended to correlate the allowable shear stress in non-prestressed zones with the ratio
bo/d. This equation generally controls in thinner slabs with large columns or at critical sections outside column
caps.
Equation 22.6.5.2(c) is the upper bound of allowable shear stress for non-prestressed zones, 4 f ′ c .
Equation 22.6.5.5 is for application to prestressed punching zones. In order to qualify as prestressed, a zone
must meet the following criterion:
1. The effective prestress, fpc at the column shall not be less than 125 psi. The effective prestress is calculated by
averaging the precompression in all the elements within the punching check radius. This could result in non-
prestressed equations being used in drop caps of prestressed slabs where the precompression drops below
125 psi in the cap. Additionally, if large restraining elements are used (i.e., shear walls) that divert the
prestressing force in a region, the non-prestressed equations would correctly be used where the average
precompression is below 125 psi.

2. f’c shall not be taken greater than 5000 psi. If a concrete strength is input greater than 5000 psi, a maximum
f’c of 5,000 psi will be used in prestressed punching zones, but the allowable shear stress will still be
calculated using equations 22.6.5.5.
3. The column must not be closer to a discontinuous edge than four times the slab thickness. In this check the
slab thickness is taken as the average slab thickness over the critical section. A discontinuous edge is defined
as an edge that extends beyond the perimeter of the defined punching check. An opening that is contained
completely within the punching check is not considered a discontinuous edge, regardless of its size.
If any of the above conditions are not met, equations 22.6.5.2 are applied.
For the ACI 318-08, ACI 318-11, and ACI 318-14 standards, lightweight concrete is considered.
ACI 318 Maximum Reinforced Section Stress

′
The reinforced shear stresses vu on the column sections are limited to a maximum of ϕvn, where vn = 6 f c per
ACI 318-05 11.12.3.2. This limit can be raised to vn = 8 f ′ c (This was originally suggested in ACI 421.1R-99).
The higher limit is also applied to all sections in previous ACI standards . Sections with unreinforced stresses
larger than these values cannot be successfully reinforced with SSR.
per
22.6.6.2
ACI 318 Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR

Where SSR is used the punching resistance is calculated as follows:
vn = vc + vs
where
vc = 2 f ′ c (for stirrups)
or
3 f ′ c (suggestion for higher vc headed shear studs) (22.6.6.2)
vs = Av fyvdaveRail / (bosd) (11-15)
Note: This equation has been extended to approximately account for

the situation where different rails at a column have different heights
due to geometrical irregularities.
Av = area in one peripheral line of stud shear reinforcement
daveRail = the average effective depth of the slab containing the rails
vs,min = 2 f ′ c (22.6.6.1)
ACI 318 Miscellaneous Provisions

The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.4 d in accordance with ACI 421.1R-99 equation 3.12. This spacing
is rounded down to the nearest 1/8 in. for US units or 5 mm for metric units.
The maximum typical stud spacing for ACI 318-99, ACI 318-02, and ACI 318-05 is 0.5d, but can be increased to
0.75 d when vu/ϕ is less than or equal to 6 f ′ c by using the suggestion in ACI 421.1R-99 for a higher limit for
spacing. The maximum typical stud spacing for ACI 318-08, ACI 318-11, and ACI 318-14 is 0.75 d when vu/ϕ is
less than or for prestressed slabs conforming to 22.6.5.4 and 0.5d otherwise (8.7.7.1.2).

The maximum tangential spacing of rails at the face of the column is limited to 2d in accordance with ACI
421.1R-99 appendix A.2 and ACI 318-14 8.7.7.1. Tangential spacing requirements are not checked at locations
other than the face of the column/support.
73.5.3 CSA A23.3 Specific Provisions

CSA A23.3 Equations for Calculation of Allowable Shear Stress on the Unreinforced Section
The allowable shear stress is calculated by selecting the appropriate equation from CSA A23.3 (13-5), (13-6),
(13-7), or (18-5).
Equation 13-5 controls in non-prestressed concrete zones with large column aspect ratios. As the aspect ratio of
the column gets larger, the allowable punching shear stress approaches the allowable one-way shear stress.
Equation 13-6 is intended to correlate the allowable shear stress in non-prestressed zones with the ratio bo/d.
This equation generally controls in thinner slabs with large columns or at critical sections outside column caps.
Equation 13-7 is the upper bound of allowable shear stress for non-prestressed zones.
Equation 18-5 is for application to prestressed punching zones. In order to qualify as prestressed, a zone must
meet the following criterion:
1. The effective prestress, fpc at the column shall not be less than 0.8MPa. The effective prestress is calculated
by averaging the precompression in all the elements within the punching check radius. This could result in
non-prestressed equations being used in drop caps of prestressed slabs where the precompression drops
below 0.8MPa in the cap. Additionally, if large restraining elements are used (i.e., shear walls) that divert the
prestressing force in a region, the non-prestressed equations would correctly be used where the average
precompression is below 0.8MPa.
2. The column must not be located near a slab edge or large opening.
If any of the above conditions are not met, equations 13-5 through 13-7 are applied.
CSA A23.3 Maximum Reinforced Section Stress

′
The reinforced shear stresses on the column sections are limited to a maximum of 0.75λϕc f c per CSA A23.3
13.3.8.2.
CSA A23.3 Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR

vr = vc + vs (13.3.7.3)
where
vc = 0.28λϕc f ′
(13.3.8.3)
c
vs = ϕsAvs fyvdaveRail / (bosd) (13-11)
Note: This equation has been extended from CSA equation 13-11 to
approximately account for the situation where different rails at a
column have different heights due to geometrical irregularities.
Avs = area in one peripheral line of stud shear reinforcement
daveRail = the average effective depth of the slab containing the rails

AS 3600 Punching Shear Design
CSA A23.3 Miscellaneous Provisions

The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.4d in accordance with clause 13.3.8.6. This spacing is rounded
down to the nearest 5 mm.
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.5d or 0.75d in accordance with clause 13.3.8.6.
The maximum tangential spacing of rails at the face of the column is limited to 2d. Tangential spacing
requirements are not checked at locations other than the face of the column/support.
′
The SSR is extended until the cutoff section stresses are within the allowable limit of 0.19λϕc f c per CSA A23.3
13.3.7.4. For cutoff sections outside the original column perimeter sections, γv is adjusted in accordance with ACI
421.1R-99 Appendix B.
The minimum rail length is 2d in accordance with 13.3.7.4.
73.6 AS 3600 Punching Shear Design
73.6.1 The AS 3600 Punching Shear Model

The critical section for punching shear is assumed to be at dom/2 from the face of the loaded area or support,
where dom represents the mean value of do, averaged around the critical perimeter. Based on the derivation of
the code equations, dom is not meant to include the thickness of beams. RAM Concept uses a heuristic method for
determining the critical section thickness in regions of differing slab/beam thicknesses around the punching
check. The critical section thicknesses can be inspected by turning them on using “visible objects”.
The AS 3600 model for punching shear assumes that the shear force V* is distributed evenly around the critical
section creating a uniform average shear stress of ν = V*/udom. The unbalanced moment, Mv* is resisted by a 3-
component mechanism:
1. Difference in yield moments at the front and back faces of the slab strips.
2. Eccentricity of the uniform shear stresses ν from the centroid of the support or load.
3. Torsional moment on the side faces (torsion strips).
In the model, the torsional moment in #3 is resolved into a maximum shear stress and added to the uniform
average shear stress ν. The proportion of Mv* contributing to the torsional moment in #3 is actually variable, but
is assumed to be constant to simplify the model. The value of Mv* is taken at the centre of the column/support.
73.6.2 Design Equations

The resulting shear capacity Vuo where Mv* is zero (as well as on slab strip faces) is calculated per AS 3600
clause 9.3.3a:
V uo = udom( f cv + 0.3σcp )
Rearranged to view in terms of limiting stress, this equation becomes:

V *
udom
≤ f cv + 0.3σcp
Where Mv* is not zero, the model results in the following design equation in AS 3600 clause 9.3.4a when there
are no closed ties in the torsion strips and no spandrel beams:
V uo
( )
Vu = *
uM v
1+
*
8V adom
This expression sets an upper limit on the combination of Mv* and V* that can be resisted by the concrete. This
equation can be rearranged to view in terms of limiting stresses:
*
Mv *
V
2
+ udom
≤ f cv + 0.3σcp
8adom
The code allows for increasing the punching capacity by placing a minimum quantity of closed ties in the torsion
strips. RAM Concept provides check box items to include calculation based upon the presence of these minimum
closed ties in accordance with AS 3600 clause 9.3.4b. RAM Concept does not calculate the quantities of minimum
ties required by this clause, which must be calculated and included by the Engineer.
When the minimum quantity of closed ties is present in the torsion strips, the equation in clause 9.3.4b is used:
1.2V uo
( )
Vu = *
uM v
1+
* 2
2V a
This expression can also be re-arranged to view in terms of limiting stresses:

*
Mv *
V
2
+ 1.2udom
≤ f cv + 0.3σcp
2.4a dom
In scenarios where the shear to moment ratio is small and/or torsion strip width to effective depth is small, it is
possible for the AS 3600 equations to calculate a lower strength with ties than without.
RAM Concept does not calculate shear capacity using the beam provisions of clause 9.3.4c and 9.3.4d.
73.6.3 Calculation of Maximum and Allowable Shear Stress and Corresponding

Stress Ratio
The allowable shear stress calculated is: fcv + .3σcp, where
(
f cv = 0.17 1 +
2
βh ) f ′
c ≤ 0.34 f ′
c
and σ cp is the average prestress in the punching check region. If σcp results in tension it reduces the allowable
stress. The reported allowable shear stresses are multiplied by φ = 0.7.
For each set of enveloped force reactions, a maximum unreinforced shear stress is calculated as follows:
1. The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the slab strip face is calculated.
2. The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is
calculated for bending about the r-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.

3. The maximum unreinforced shear stress on the torsion strip due to combined shear and bending is
calculated for bending about the s-axis, using the closed ties provisions if selected by the user.
The absolute maximum shear stress from above is reported as the maximum unreinforced shear stress for that
force envelope. The unreinforced stress ratio for each force envelope is the maximum unreinforced stress/
allowable stress.
73.6.4 Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR

The SSR is used to resist direct shear stresses, but not torsion stresses. Where SSR is provided the punching
resistance is calculated as follows:
1. The following operations are performed individually on each face:
2. A minimum number of rails are installed based upon a maximum transverse rail spacing of 2dom. The rails
are installed at the allowable maximum spacing. The length of each rail is a minimum of 2.5d.
3. The number of strips used for strength is calculated, up to a total of 4 (2 slab and 2 torsion strips). This is
accomplished by determining how many faces contain parts of the critical section. If there is no part of the
critical section on a particular face, this face will not be used for strength design but will get rails placed, if
possible, using the maximum transverse spacing requirement.
4. The perimeter length of the face is calculated both as a slab strip and a torsion strip. The length of the torsion
strip is simply the appropriate width of the critical section. The length of the slab strip is calculated as the
length remaining after any torsion strip lengths have been deducted. If the torsion strip is broken up with
holes/openings, it is possible that the slab strip length will be less than or equal to zero. In this event no
design will be reported and the status will be reported as “Failed”.
5. The average effective depth of the slabs containing the existing rails is calculated.
6. The number of additional rails required is calculated and added, if necessary, and step 4 and 5 are repeated
until a satisfactory solution is found.
The strength equations used in the calculation of SSR are as follows:
For slab strips:
V u = V uo (1 + K s )
where
Ks = 1
V uo
Avs f vy ( )( )
d
s
u
b
Avs = cross sectional area of one peripheral line of studs in the strip
b = width of the strip
fvy = yield stress of the studs in the strip
d = average effective depth of the slab containing the shear stud rails
u = perimeter length of the critical section
For torsion strips:
V uo
Vu = *
1 uM v
+
1 + Kt *
8V adom
where
Kt = 1
V uo
Avt f vy ( )( )
d
s
u
a
a = width of the strip

EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Design
The maximum punching shear force which can be transferred to the column is taken as the smaller of these two
values of φvu:
V ≤ ΦVu
Φ = 0.7
73.6.5 Maximum Reinforced Strength

The maximum strength of the reinforced slab/column connection is given as:
Vumax = 0.2fc’udom
thus giving the following 2 conditions that must be satisfied:
In the slab strip,
Vuo (1+Kt) ≤ 0.2udom fc’
In the torsion strip,
Vuo (1+Ks) ≤ 0.2udom fc’
73.6.6 Miscellaneous Provisions

The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.35 d. This spacing is rounded down to the nearest 5 mm for metric
units (or 1/8 inch for US units).
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d. In seismic applications, the Engineer can limit the typical spacing to
a smaller value by specifying the typical stud spacing directly.
When SSR reinforcement is required, a minimum quantity of reinforcement is provided on all strength strips as
follows:
0.35bw s (for AS 3600-2001)
Asv = f vy
0.06 f ' c bw s 0.35bw s (for AS 3600-2009)

Asv = f sy, f
≥ f sy, f
0.08 f ' c bw s (for AS 3600-2018)

Asv = f sy, f
73.7 EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Design

73.7.1 The EN 1992-2004 Punching Shear Model

The punching shear analysis and design approach uses the EC2 provisions for the basis of the implementation.
Some condition specific EC2 provisions were generalized using CEB-FIP 90. The implementation also
implements suggestions in TR-43 regarding treatment of precompression in the shear strength equations.
A control perimeter (u1) is defined at 2d from the periphery of area of application of force. This control
perimeter is constructed so as to minimize its length. The corners of the perimeter are rounded.
For slab edges located within the punching check, additional control perimeters will be generated by projecting
perpendicular lines from the original control perimeter to the slab edges. Additionally, control perimeters will
be generated for each basic slab shape, cap, etc. This could result in a number of basic control perimeters.
To calculate the perimeter stresses, a plastic distribution of stresses caused by the eccentricity between the
load/reaction and the control perimeter is superimposed with the shear stresses caused by the concentric
loading to calculate a complete stress distribution on the perimeter. Where there are eccentricities in two
orthogonal directions, they are considered simultaneously. The k factor in EC2 equation 6.39 is applied to the
unbalanced moment after the column forces are transformed to the plastic neutral axis of the control perimeter.
EC2 clause 6.4.3(3) requires the calculation of a β factor on the basic control perimeter. The same β factor is then
applied to all subsequent perimeter calculations. This simplification is made due to the complexity in the plastic
section calculations. RAM Concept does not make this assumption, but instead calculates and applies an
appropriate β factor for each perimeter calculated. This is in accordance with the approach for the cutoff section
in CEB-FIP 90.
73.7.2 Calculation of punching resistance for the unreinforced section

Control Perimeter Section Properties and Equations for the Calculation of Actual Stresses
Before any calculations are performed, the following manipulations are carried out on the reactions at the
column center:
1. The column reactions are transformed to the control perimeter elastic centroid.
2. k factors are calculated using ratios about the column principal axes.
3. The reactions are rotated to the column principal axes and multiplied by appropriate k factors.
4. The reactions are rotated to the control perimeter elastic principal axes.
area a
σa + σb σa + σc
area d
area c
σb + σd σb + σc area b
Figure 521: EN 1992-2004 control perimeter

The remainder of the calculations are carried out about the elastic principal axes of the control perimeter. Since
a plastic stress distribution is used, if the “punching” area of the control perimeter on each side of the elastic
neutral axes is not equal, the magnitudes must vary to maintain vertical equilibrium. This is handled by using
multiplication factors representing the ratio of stress on one side of the principal axis over the stress on the
other side. These factors are represented in the following form:
Area a
αx = Area b
Area c
αy = Area d
The stresses in each quadrant (considering bending about each axis separately) can then be represented as:
σb = -αx σa Equation 1
σd = -αy σc Equation 2
Two simultaneous equations can then be set up and solved for the state of stress around the critical section:
M ox = unbalanced moment about the principal x-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
M oy = unbalanced moment about the principal y-axis of the critical section (after adjustment by k)
d = effective depth at location in critical section
M ox = σa∫ady d l + σb∫bdy d l + σc ∫c dy d l + σd ∫d dy d l
Substituting equations 1 and 2 and collecting terms,

M ox = σa ∫ady d l − ∫bαx dy d l + σc ∫c dy d l − ∫d α y dy d l Equation 3
M ox = σa ∫adx d l − ∫bαx dx d l + σc ∫c dx d l − ∫d αx dy d l Equation 4
We refer to the following terms:

∫ady d l − ∫bαx dy d l as Zxx
∫c dy d l − ∫d α y dy d l as Zxy
∫adx d l − ∫bαx dx d l as Zyx
∫c dx d l − ∫d α y dx d l as Zyy
These terms can be envisioned as plastic section moduli and each term has units of cubic length. Due to the
interaction of a in the above equations and the equations below, these values are only valid for the axes about
which they are calculated.
Equation 3 and 4 then become:
Mox = σaZxx + σcZxy
Moy = σaZyx + σcZyy
Solving the simultaneous equations for σa and σc, we get:
M ox Z yy + M oy Z xy
σa = Z xx Z yy − Z xy Z yx
− M oy Z xx − M ox Z yx
σc = Z xx Z yy − Z xy Z yx

For symmetric sections, Zxy and Zyx are equal to zero and the equations above reduce to:
M ox
σa = Z xx
M oy
σa = Z yy
We can then use equations 1 and 2 to solve for σb and σd .

The stress in any given “quadrant” of the critical section is then solved for as:
V Ed
νEd = ud
+ σa/b + σc /d
Calculation of Allowable Stress

The punching resistance for an unreinforced section is calculated as follows:
vRd ,c = CRd ,c k (100ρ1 f ck )1/3 + k1σcp ≤ vmin + k1σcp
where
CRd,c = 0.18/γc
k = 200
1+ d
≤ 2.0d , d in mm
ρ1 = ρ1y + ρ1z ≤ 0.02 relates to bonded tension steel in y and z directions
fck = characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete at 28 days
k1 = 0.1
σcp = (σcy + σcz )/2 average compression in the punching check region
When ρ1 is automatically calculated for use in equation 6.47, the following apply :
• Reinforcement ratios are calculated about each punch check axis individually.
• A distance 3d beyond the column width is used.
• Only user reinforcement is considered (program reinforcement is not used). Once the flexural design is
completed the program reinforcement can be changed to user reinforcement to perform the auto calculation.
• Untensioned reinforcement on the specified face (top or bottom) only is considered (bonded tendons are
excluded).
• Vector components of user reinforcement are used.
• Development lengths are considered (only the developed portion of the bar is used).
• A ratio at each face of the column is calculated, with the results of each opposing face averaged. If one
opposing face has no reinforcement it is excluded from the calculation (this will be common in edge and
corner conditions where reinforcement will cross only a single column face).
• The averaged results in each direction are combined using the equation above.
• If no user reinforcement is detected in a given axis, a warning will be issued and a reinforcement ratio of 0
(zero) will be used.
Calculation of Punching Resistance with SSR

vRd,cs = 0.75vRd,c + [1.5(dsw/sr)Aswfywd]/uidi (6.52)
where
dsw = average effective depth of slab containing shear reinforcement
sr = radial spacing of shear reinforcement

Asw = area of one peripheral line of shear reinforcement

di = the average effective depth of the perimeter under consideration
fywd = effective design strength of the shear reinforcement = fyk/γs
di = the average effective depth of the perimeter under consideration
Note: Because the head sizes of SSR are typically selected to ensure 100% development of the stem, the yield
strength of the SSR reinforcement is used without adjustment for effective depth, d. If the Engineer needs to
make reductions to the effective yield strength of the studs due to depth issues these modifications can be made
by specifying a reduced yield stress in the “SSR Systems” on the “Materials” page.
Limitation of Punching Stress at the Perimeter of the Column or Loaded Area

At the perimeter of the column face the maximum shear stress is limited to:
vEd = vRd,max (6.53)
where
vEd = βVEd/(u0d)
vRd,max = 0.5νfcd
β = maximum beta from calculated control perimeters, u1
v = 0.6[1 - fck/250] fck in N/mm2
fcd = design value of concrete compressive strength
u0 = length of column or loaded area periphery.
For edge columns, u0 ≤ 6d

For corner columns, u0 ≤ 3d
Note: This simplification for edge columns was necessary due to difficulty in calculating the code equation for
irregular situations. This provision is not in strict compliance with the code and should be reviewed by the
Engineer as necessary.
Miscellaneous Provisions
The control perimeter at which shear reinforcement is not required is calculated using eq. 6.47. The outermost
perimeter of shear reinforcement is placed not greater than 1.5d within this perimeter.
The spacing to the first stud is calculated as 0.5 d.
The maximum typical stud spacing is 0.75 d.
The maximum transverse rail spacing is 1.5 d within the first control perimeter and 2.0 d outside the first
control perimeter.
A minimum quantity of SSR reinforcement is provided in accordance with EC2 equation 9.11:
Asw,min ≥ (0.08 f ck sr st ) / 1.5 f yk
where st is assumed to be ≤ 2d (Final rail layout should be confirmed/adjusted to be in agreement with this
assumption)
Note: EC2 has special provisions for column bases. These provisions are not implemented in Concept (the
provisions above are applied to all punching checks). For slabs without prestress, this will always be
conservative. For slabs with prestress, the Engineer will need to evaluate the validity of the results.

Sign convention
73.8 Sign convention

The equations presented require the use of the “right-hand rule” sign convention. While RAM Concept allows
you to set your own sign conventions for reactions, it will internally apply the correct signs to the equations.
Figure 522: Positive moment reactions derived from the “right-hand rule sign” convention.
RAM Concept reports the reactions applied from the column to the slab. The reactions are the forces and
moments that would need to be applied to the column joint in order to keep the system in equilibrium if the
columns were removed. This can be envisioned by removing the column from the structure and replacing it with
the reported reactions applied at the column centroid. Refer to the following figure for clarification.

Advice on the selection of punching check properties
Figure 523: Column reaction sign conventions
73.9 Advice on the selection of punching check properties

Maximum Search Radius - This radius defines the circular area around a column that RAM Concept will
investigate in its search for potential failure locations. A punching zone radius that is set to be a very large
distance will always be conservative. However, having a very large radius has two detrimental effects. First, RAM
Concept will need to review a larger area of the slab, and hence will take longer to check the column. More
importantly, slab holes and slab edges that are far from the column will be considered in determining the
potentially critical sections which may result in a smaller critical section than is appropriate.

Miscellaneous information
Cover to CGS - This is the distance from the top of slab to the centroid elevation of the top reinforcement. In
general this is the distance from the top of the slab to the bottom of the top bar (or the top of the bar under the
top bar). This distance is subtracted from the slab thickness to determine the “d” distance.
Angle - The plan angle about which punching reactions are enveloped. For some codes this also defines the
angle about which the punching calculations are performed. In general, this should either be set to the angle of
the column or (if the column is at a slab edge) the angle of the slab edge. The “Align Punch Check Axis with
Rectangular Columns” checkbox can be used to automatically set the angle.
Edge/Hole Treatment - See the second figure in this chapter.
Connection Type - Corner, edge, interior or auto. Refer to “About Connection Type”.
73.10 Miscellaneous information

Effect of precompression
For post-tensioned slabs, the allowable calculated by RAM Concept may be smaller than that calculated by 2D
frame programs, because RAM Concept uses an effective prestress value that is an average for the punching
zone. This punching zone average will reflect a lower effective prestress in column capitals and other thickened
areas.
73.11 Some final words of advice

RAM Concept is not infallible in its determination of potentially critical sections; for unusual geometries RAM
Concept may not check the appropriate section and/or may check inappropriate sections that give higher than
appropriate stress ratios.
The engineer must review RAM Concept’s selection of potentially critical sections, and must use engineering
judgment to decide if RAM Concept’s selections are appropriate and if the application of the code model is
appropriate.

Vibration Analysis Notes
74
Structures undergo vibrations that may upset the occupants of the structure or disturb sensitive equipment.
While there are a number of sources of excitation that cause vibration, one common source of excitation is
footsteps of the structure occupants. This chapter gives an overview of vibration analysis and advice on using
RAM Concept’s vibration and footfall analysis capabilities. Vibration options are available through the Calc
Options dialog and the analysis is invoked using the Calc Vibration Analysis ( ) command.
74.1 Dynamic Characteristics of Structures

A complete discussion of dynamic behavior of structures is outside the scope of this chapter and can be found in
strucutral dynamics textbooks. Some basic understanding of vibrations and structural dynamics is assumed.
74.1.1 Free Vibration

Free vibration of undamped structures occurs when the structure is displaced to an initial displacement,
released and then allowed to vibrate freely. It is related only to the stiffness and mass in the structure. The
preferred vibration patterns of the structure are referred to as the natural modes of vibration. Each mode of
vibration has a characteristic deflected shape and an associated vibration frequency. If an undamped structure is
initially displaced to a natural mode shape and then released, the structure will undergo simple harmonic
motion (displacement vs. time curve has a sinusoidal shape). The mode shape with the lowest natural frequency
is referred to as the fundamental mode of vibration.
Floor structures may have many very closely spaced natural modes of vibration, with only small parts of the
structure participating in each one. To capture the complete dynamic response, it is necessary to calculate
enough modes to include all modes with natural frequencies of interest, which generally include modes with
frequencies up to about 12-15 Hz for resonant response analysis and up to about 2 times the fundamental mode
of vibration for impulsive response.

Dynamic Characteristics of Structures
Figure 524: Fundamental mode shape
Number of modes
RAM Concept allows the user to input the number of mode shapes to be calculated. The frequencies of the mode
shapes can be viewed in the text tables and the number of mode shapes calculated increased as necessary.
Dynamic concrete modulus factor
RAM Concept allows input of a dynamic concrete modulus factor which represents the ratio of dynamic modulus
to the static modulus. The dynamic modulus of elasticity of concrete (small strains for short durations) is
generally higher than the static modulus of elasticity. The dynamic modulus affects the stiffness of the structure
and thus factors into the calculation of the natural frequencies and mode shapes. The default factor in RAM
Concept is 1.2.
Stiffness matrix
RAM Concept also allows selection of the stiffness matrix to use in the calculation of frequencies and mode
shapes. If one of the load history stiffness matrices is used (for example to account for cracking), the load history
analysis must be run after selecting the load history step to use for stiffness matrix and prior to the vibration
calculations.
Note: Since the load history calculations use stiffness adjustments to account for long-term effects, it is not
recommended to use a load history step that has any prior load history steps with any significant duration as
this can underestimate the short term stiffness.
Mass
The structure self-mass is always considered automatically in the analysis, which can be adjusted by setting the
“Density for Loads” property in the concrete material properties. In some cases there is additional mass
permanently in place that should be considered in the analysis of the frequencies and mode shapes. This
additional mass can be drawn on the additional mass layer located under the Vibrations folder. This layer allows
the user to define area loads, line loads, and point loads that will be converted to mass for vibration analysis
purposes.

Resonant Footfall Response
74.1.2 Damping
Real structures have some level of damping which tends to reduce the vibratory response over time. The higher
the damping, the faster the vibration will decay and the less likely vibrations will cause adverse affects. Damping
is often defined as a fraction of critical damping, which is the level of damping that would be necessary to
prevent oscillation altogether. In RAM Concept a constant damping ratio is used in the calculation of all modes.
Typical damping ratios for concrete structures range from about 0.01 to 0.02 (1% to 2% of critical) for bare
concrete floors, and 0.02 to 0.035 (2% to 3.5% of critical) for concrete floors with typical fit out.
74.1.3 Resonant vs. Impulsive Response

In structures with modes that have lower natural frequences (less than approximately 4 times the maximum
footstep frequency) it is possible for the dynamic response to build up (increase) over time. This is caused by a
phenomenon know as resonance and occurs when the frequency of the excitation closely matches the natural
frequency of a vibration mode of the structure. Resonance is most likely to occur when the walking frequency
matches the natural frequency of the structure, but it is also possible when any of the first four harmonics of the
walking frequency (fw , 2fw , 3fw ,4fw) match the natural frequency (fn ). Resonance at higher harmonics is much
less likely.
In structures whose fundamental mode of vibration has a natural frequency larger than about 12-15Hz, the
dynamic response of each footfall tends to dissipate almost entirely before the next footfall. This type of
response is referred to as impulsive because a buildup of response due to resonance is not likely in this
frequency range.
74.2 Resonant Footfall Response

RAM Concept calculates the footfall response of structures using assumed dynamic loadings that were derived
from a large number of experimentally measured footfall force time histories. These studies also showed that
normal walking rates range from about 1.5 to 2.5 steps per second.
The first four harmonics of the specified range of walking frequencies are considered. From these harmonics, a
set of critical walking frequencies are determined that would coincide with the natural frequencies of the
structure and thus promote resonance. The response must be calculated for each of these critical walking
frequencies as it is otherwise not possible to determine which frequency is most critical.
The assumed periodic footfall function can be separated into any number of harmonic components using a
Fourier series. RAM Concept uses four harmonic components in this evaluation.
n
p(t) = ∑ Wκsin ( j2π
T
t)
j=1
where
W = weight of the individual walking
κ = dynamic load factor (refer to “A Design Guide for Footfall Induced
Vibration of Structures” for a detailed discussion)
j = harmonic number

n = total number of harmonic components considered

T = period of the footfall
This relationship is demonstrated graphically below for a walking frequency of 1.5 Hz:
Figure 525: Assumed footfall forcing function built up from harmonic components
In the resonant analysis, a maximum natural frequency to use in the analysis can be input into RAM Concept.
Only modes of vibration with natural frequencies less than or equal to the input value will be used in the
resonant response analysis.
74.2.1 Resonant Simplified (fast) Analysis

RAM Concept’s Simplified (fast) Analysis is based upon a method in the Concrete Centre’s design guide for
vibrations[Willford, M.R. and Young, P., “A Design Guide for Footfall Induced Vibration of Structures”, Concrete
Centre, 2006]. This method predicts the total buildup that is possible under harmonic loading under a limited
number of cycles. It is performed for each harmonic individually, and finds the peak acceleration, but provides
no information about the phase of the different harmonic results. The results from the different harmonics are
combined using a square root of sum of squares (SRSS) technique.
This method is designated the default analysis method in RAM Concept due to its fast computation time and
relative accuracy of results.

Note: Because the simplified method only calculates accelerations and response factors, velocity envelope
results will not include a contribution from the resonant response analysis. If impulsive response calculations
are performed, the velocity envelopes will only include the results from the impulsive analysis, which can be
misleading. If velocity performance criteria are being used with resonant response analyis, Modal Analysis
should be used instead of the Simplified Analysis.
74.2.2 Resonant Modal Analysis

RAM Concept’s Modal Analysis is based upon a classical mode superposition method, also referred to as modal
analysis. In this approach individual (uncoupled) modal equations are solved to determine the individual modal
responses which are then superimposed to obtain the total response. This approach results in a complete time
history for the total response and calculates accelerations and velocities. This analysis is performed for each
harmonic individually to facilitate combination of the response factors. Since a complete time history for each
harmonic results is known the results can be combined using direct algebraic summation. This method can be
computationally time consuming.
This analysis requires a duration and time interval to be used in the calculations. The recommendation is to
select a duration that will include a minimum of approximately 30 cycles of excitation, and a time interval that is
at least 10 times shorter than the shortest harmonic excitation period. For most problems with normal footstep
frequencies, a 20 second duration with a 0.01 second time interval will provide good results.
74.2.3 RMS Values for Resonant Response

The resonant response analyses result in peak accelerations and velocities, which are often not used in
evaluation of vibration performance criteria because they are not representative of the vibration as a whole. A
measure of the average response amplitude is the root mean square, or RMS values which are generally
evaluated over a certain time period. The RMS method involves squaring the velocity or acceleration at each
time instant, finding the average of the squared values over the evaluation period, then taking the square root of
this average. For simple harmonic motion the RMS value is equal to 1 / 2 or 70.7% of the peak value. In the
calculation of RMS values in RAM Concept, the RMS value is always taken as 1 / 2 of the peak value.
74.2.4 Calculation of Response Factor

The response factor is a multiplier on the level of vibration at the threshold of human perception. Thus, a
response factor of 1 would represent a level of vibration that is just at the threshold of human perception, and a
response factor of 2 would represent twice the perceivable level.. People are more sensitive to vibration at some
frequencies than at others. The base curves for human perceivability are taken from BS 6472. Since vibrations
can contain a range of frequencies, the response factor in RAM Concept is calculated individually for each
harmonic excitation frequency by taking a baseline acceleration (aRMS = 1) from the curve for that frequency,
then combined using square root of sum of squares (SRSS). For resonant response, the response factor is always
calculated using accelerations.

Impulsive Footfall Response
74.3 Impulsive Footfall Response

Impulsive Footfall Response
The most critical response in this type of analysis is for the largest footfall rate, and thus the impulsive analysis
can be performed on just the largest footfall rate in the range (the footfall rate still affects the magnitude of the
impulse). The analysis is based upon a method in the Concrete Centre’s design guide for vibrations[Willford, M.R.
and Young, P., “A Design Guide for Footfall Induced Vibration of Structures”, Concrete Centre, 2006]. The method
calculates a complete time history velocity curve, from which a time history acceleration curve can be derived.
All modes with natural frequencies up to twice the fundamental frequency are considered in the analysis.
74.3.1 RMS Values for Impulsive Response

The impulsive response analyses result in peak accelerations and velocities, which are often not used in
evaluation of vibration performance criteria because they are not representative of the vibration as a whole. A
measure of the average response amplitude is the root mean square, or RMS values which are generally
evaluated over a certain time period. The RMS method involves evaluating the response over a period of one
footfall:
1 T
vRMS = ∫ v (t )2
T 0
dt
74.3.2 Calculation of Response Factor

The response factor is a multiplier on the level of vibration at the threshold of human perception. Thus, a
response factor of 1 would represent a level of vibration that is just at the threshold of human perception, and a
response factor of 2 would represent twice the perceivable level. People are more sensitive to vibration at some
frequencies than at others. The base curves for human perceivability are taken from BS 6472. Since the methods
used in RAM Concept combine the results of the different modes of vibration, the baseline velocity value (vRMS =
1) is taken from the curve using the frequency of the fundamental mode of vibration.
74.4 Evaluating Vibration Performance and Interpreting Results
74.4.1 Excitation and Response Node Options

There are a number of different combinations of excitation and response nodes available for analysis. For
excitation nodes, the following options are available.

Evaluating Vibration Performance and Interpreting Results
Excitation at All This option treats every node in the model as an excitation node.
Nodes
Excitation at This option first does a preliminary analysis on every node in the structure, calculating
Critical Nodes results at only the excitation point and using the simplified (fast) analysis to find a
response factor at each node. Then, only nodes with a calculated response factor greater
than or equal to the entered Excitation response factor threshold are excited in the
primary analysis.
Excitation at Excitation area polygons can be drawn on the Excitation Areas Plan (on the Vibration
Specified Nodes Layer). Only the nodes of any elements intersected by the drawn excitation area polygons
are considered as excitation nodes. This option works in conjunction with other
excitation area options. For example, if an excitation area is drawn and “Excitation at
Critical Nodes” is specified, only nodes that both intersect the excitation area and have a
preliminary response factor greater than or equal to the Excitation response factor
threshold will be excited. If no excitation areas are drawn, every node is considered as an
excitation node.
Response at All When using Modal Analysis, this option calculates the response at all DOF (lateral,
DOF at All Nodes angular, vertical) at all nodes. Since the lateral and angular components are rarely critical
for floor vibrations and calculating these components increases the run time, using this
option is not normally recommended.
Response at This option calculates the response at only the vertical DOF at every node. As each node is
Vertical DOF at All being considered as an excitation node, the response at all other nodes in the structure is
Nodes calculated and enveloped.
Response at This option calculates the response at only the vertical DOF at the excited node only. As
Vertical DOF at each node is being considered as an excitation node, the response is calculated at the
Only Excited Node excitation node and is not calculated at any other node.
74.4.2 Recommendations for Analysis Options

The default setting is to use the resonant simplified (fast) calculation with all nodes considered as an excitation
node and the response calculated at the vertical DOF at the excited node only. This is generally the fastest
combination to get reasonable results calculated for the entire floor. This combination generally captures the
most critical effects in each region, but doesn’t well pick up the extent of the response in each critical region.
This is because the worst case response at some nodes near the critical nodes would be from excitation of the
nearby critical node and not from self-excitation. However, the default setting is very recommended for daily
design use for structures that are not vibrationally sensitive. In order to better pick up the critical effects of the
entire region, the “Response Nodes” setting could be changed to Vertical DOF at all nodes, but there will
normally be a considerable increase in runtime.
For structures that are vibrationally sensitive or if a higher degree of accuracy is desired, the modal analysis
method is recommended. Because this method is computationally expensive, it is generally necessary to use it in
conjunction with other settings to speed up the calculation time. One such example is to use the simplified
method to evaluate the floor as a whole, then excite and evaluate a subset of the structure using modal analysis.
This can be accomplished by using the “Critical Nodes” option and setting the Excitation response factor
threshold to avoid exciting non-critical nodes, by drawing excitation areas to take advantage of known areas of
excitation like corridors and hallways, or a combination of the two.

Note: If the “Critical nodes” or excitation areas are drawn in conjunction with the “Vertical DOF at only excited
node” option, there will not be any response calculated at some nodes. In order to get a response at particular
node it must either be considered as an excitation node (with associated response calculated) or as a response
node while another node is considered as an excitation node (by using the “Vertical DOF at all nodes” setting for
Response Nodes).
74.4.3 Mode Data Text Table

RAM Concept calculates information for each mode that can be viewed in the mode data text table. This includes
the vibration frequency as well as modal mass information for each mode. Calculated modal mass is dependent
upon the normalization method used for the mode shapes. In seismic calculations, a mass normalization
technique is often used which results in the sum of the modal masses equal to the total system mass. In RAM
Concept, the modal masses are calculated using mode shapes that are normalized such that the maximum
displacement on the mode has a value of 1.0. The modal masses reported can be thought of as the amount of
mass participating in a given mode, or as the mass of an equivalent single degree of freedom system. The modal
mass fraction is the modal mass of a mode divided by the total mass in the structure. The sum of the modal
masses reported in RAM Concept will not equal the total mass in the structure.
74.4.4 Velocity and Acceleration Contour Plots

RAM Concept calculates and displays contour plots for velocity, acceleration, and response factors. These plots
represent the envelope at each node of all the calculated cases which include resonant response calculations (for
each critical excitation frequency) and the impulsive response calculation for the critical (maximum) excitation
frequency. These contour plots can be used to evaluate performance criteria and indicate the worst case
vibration response at each location.
74.4.5 Evaluation of Response Factor Plots

The response factor represents a multiple of the level of vibration that is barely perceivable to a human. A
response factor of 1 indicates a vibration that is just perceivable, a response factor of 2 represents twice that,
and so on. The baseline curve that represents R=1 that is used in RAM Concept is from BS 6472 and is consistent
with the ISO standard 2631-2. The curve is reproduced below. Like the velocity and acceleration plots, the
response factor contour plots represent enveloped results of all the different analyses at each node. As such, the
response factor contours are often used for evaluation of performance criteria. The following table lists some
common response factor limits mentioned in BS 6472 and ISO 2631-2 for some different environments.
Table 105: Recommended response factor limits for various environments
Environment Response Factor Limit Description of Use
Workshops, Office 8-10 Perceptible vibration, suitable for

non-sensitive areas.

Environment Response Factor Limit Description of Use
Residential 4-8 Possible perceptible vibration,

suitable for sleep areas in most
cases.
Operating rooms 1-4 Near the threshold of perception,

suitable for sensitive sleep areas
and in most instances for
microscopes to 100x and other low
sensitivity equipment.
Sensitive Equipment rooms 0.0625-1 Suitable for senstive equipment,

electron microsopes, etc.
Figure 526: Vibration base curve for RMS acceleration (response factor = 1)

Index
Symbols default load combinations code span detailing rules
882 834
"core" determination
default loadings 882 default load combinations
concrete 816
design 882 861
material behaviors 890 default loadings 861
Numerics ACI 318-05 design 861
3.12.11.2.1 code implementation 922 live load factors 866
bar spacing 1087 code rule selection 917 material behaviors 866
318-02 default load combinations ACI318-05
code span detailing rules 907 live load factors 915
834 default loadings 907 ACI318-08
development lengths 837 design 907 live load factors 942
318-05 material behaviors 916 ACI318-11
code span detailing rules ACI 318-08 live load factors 967
834 code implementation 948 ACI318-14
development lengths 837 code rule selection 943 live load factors 993
318-08 default load combinations active rules
code span detailing rules 933 types 113
834 default loadings 933 active window print job
development lengths 837 design 933 previewing 413
318-11 material behaviors 942 alternate envelope factors
code span detailing rules ACI 318-11 about 107
834 code implementation 974 alternate load factors
development lengths 837 code rule selection 969 examples of 108
318-14 default load combinations ambiguities
development lengths 838 959 about 427
default loadings 959 analysis
design 959 changing 98
A material behaviors 967 cracked section 811
accident 1082, 1141
ACI 318-14 finite element 785
ACI 318
code implementation 999 notes 780
concrete materials 867, 890,
code rule selection 995 punching 392
916, 942, 968
default load combinations questions about 454
development lengths 837,
985 resonant modal 1215
838
default loadings 985 resonant simplified (fast)
ACI 318-02
design 985 1214
chapter 13
material behaviors 993, 994 section 388
two-way slab
ACI 318-99 self-equilibrium 797
systems 901
code implementation 873 self-equilibrium, about 798
code implementation 896
code rule selection 868 self-equilibrium, details 799
code rule selection 891
self-equilibrium, uses of 798

self-equilibrium, using 798 development lengths 839, CONNECTED projects 154
vibration 394 840 assumptions
analysis errors AS 3600 2009 analysis 787
about 360 development lengths 839, concrete strains 807
information 360 840 formwork 807
analysis options AS 3600 2018 long-term losses 807
recommendations for 1217 development lengths 841 stress-strain curves for mild
anchorage 835 AS 3600-2001 steel 806
Ancon Shearfix code implementation 1022 Auditor
parameters 277 code rule selection 1017 about 441
animation default load combinations about information displayed
enabling 395, 396 1012 by 399
annex f default loadings 1011 how it can assist the design
assessment of crack widths design 1011 process 398
1114 material behaviors 1016 using 398, 401
API 151 AS 3600-2009 using for design summary
appearance schemes code implementation 1041 401, 403
creating new 65 code rule selection 1036 using for guidance on post-
deleting 65 default load combinations tensioning 401
setting for a perspective 64 1031 auto hook tool
setting for a plan 64 default loadings 1030 about 294
application data design 1030 auto-save files
ISM 133 material behaviors 1035 restoring 53
Application Window Layout 50 AS 3600-2018 automatic meshing
area loads code implementation 1059 limitations of 179
drawing 199 code rule selection 1055 averaging
properties 198 default load combinations effects of 374
area spring locations 1049–1053 axes
defining 753 default loadings 1049 design section 800
area spring properties design 1049 design strip segment 800
defining 753 material behaviors 1054,
area springs 1055
drawing 169, 191 AS/NZS 1170.1
B
backup copies
properties 168, 191 live load factors 1016, 1035,
reverting to 52
AS 3600 1053
Balance loading
punching shear design AS3600
special handling of during
1200–1203 live load factors 1016, 1035,
export 421
AS 3600 - 2001 1053
balanced load percentages
code span detailing rules specific options 277
calculating 801
834 ASCE 7-2016
viewing 366, 553, 591, 627,
AS 3600 - 2009 live load reduction 825
670, 709, 749
code span detailing rules ASCE-7
balcony live loads
834 live load factors 866, 915,
defining 520, 563, 601, 637,
AS 3600 - 2018 942, 967, 993
681, 719
code span detailing rules assembly loads
balcony slab area
834 about 97
defining 556
AS 3600 2001 associating

balcony slab areas BS 8110 capabilities
defining 513 code rule selection 1078 about 442
drawing 594, 630, 674, 712 default load combinations centroids
banded tendon polylines 1071 design 800
defining profiles for 314 default loadings 1070 change profiles tool
drawing 313 development lengths 842 using 328
formatting options 319 live load factors 1074 changes
properties 305 material behaviors 1074 undoing 54
bar lengths specific options 277 chapter 13
reinforcement 376 BS 8110 - 1997 two-way slab systems 927,
bars code span detailing rules 953, 979, 1171
reinforcing 91, 433 834 chapters
beam elements BS 8110:1997 critical 48
elements of 787 design 1070 clear cover
beam torsion BS8110 reinforcement 433
section 11.6 876 code implementation 1083 cloud services 154
beams BS8110 Clause 3.7.2.9 229 code
about 175, 436 building codes options 353
deep, considerations 787 knowing 48, 49 code rules
defining mitered corners on error 475
177 codes
drawing 176
C questions about 445
CAD drawings
properties 175 colors
importing 511
slab, error 465 changing 64
CAD Drawings
systems 430 changing in an appearance
using 116
torsion 900 scheme 65
CAD files
upstand 438 column element LLR results
importing 116, 554, 592,
upstand, difference between viewing 368
628, 672, 710, 751
walls above of column elements
calc log
similar proportions about 185
reviewing 361
438 drawing 186
Calc Log
bearing stress plans properties 185
opening 361
viewing 771 column layouts
calc options
bearing stresses irregular 243
reviewing 542, 584, 619,
viewing plans 771 column locations
655, 702, 736, 769
behavior defining 482, 517, 560, 598,
Calc Profile tool
orthotropic 786 634, 678, 716, 752
using 328
wall 796 column properties
calculation options
bending moment contours defining 482, 517, 560, 598,
accessing 351
viewing 367 634, 678, 716, 752
calculation time
bending moments columns
decreasing 361
viewing 506 about 160
calculations
bottom reinforcement mats above slab 830
Code Minimum 855
drawing 508 below slab 830
Strength 855
Branson's formula 812 choosing which to show 79
strength (only) 850
BS 6399-1 connection type 1193
vibrations 357
live load factors 1074

copying below to the same AS 3600-2009 1035 crack width 814
above 446 BS 8110 1074 crack widths
copying from below to CSA 1160 assessment 1145
above 163, 186 EC2 1132 cracking moment 1008
drawing 162, 163 IS 456 1102 cracking moments
element below the slab is concrete form section 18.8.3 879
not attached to slab examples that should use used in design calculations
467 ignore depth 270, 815
error about 467 271 creep
general, properties 160 concrete members effects 811
live load reduction, importing 118 creep and shrinkage
properties 162 concrete mix models 1180–1182
properties 160 specifying material cross section
questions about 447 properties 89 changing 763
two elements below slab are CONNECT Advisor 158 editing orientation 763
at same location 467 CONNECTED Project cross section orientation
concentrated reinforcement assign project dialog 156 changing 763, 766
drawing 284 registering 157 editing 763, 766
drawing in two directions CONNECTED projects cross section trimming
285 associating 154 about 233
orientating 295–298 disassociating 155 error, no concrete
Concept registering 156, 157 remaining at one or
about detailing calculations connecting walls more locations 477
832 drawing 437 cross section trimmings
changing model 137 CONNECTION Client selecting 240
how it treats individual updates 159 cross sections
transverse bars 849 connection types 1193, 1194 advice on drawing 1187
how it treats transverse connections bonded vs. unbonded
reinforcement 849 about type 1193, 1194 determination of
updating model 137 considerations 1089
using only the TR43 stress special member 829 calculating forces on 801
limits 658 consistency checking changing orientation 766
using results to specify stud about 423 determination of bonded vs.
shear reinforcement construction loadings unbonded 1119,
systems 1192 temporary 861, 882, 907, 1149
Concept files 933, 959, 985, 1011, editing orientation 766
creating 135 1030, 1070, 1097, selecting trimming 240
Concept model 1123, 1154 single trimmings 237
updating contour plots trimming 233
changing 137 acceleration 1218 CSA A23.3-04
Concept slabs velocity 1218 code implementation 1166
exporting to ISM 140 conventions code rule selection 1162
concrete sign 800 default load combinations
behavior 867, 890, 916, 942, coordinate points 1155
968 entering 69 default loadings 1154
concrete behavior copies design 1154
AS 3600-2001 1016 number of 410 development lengths 845

live load factors 1160 default loadings viewing a perspective 236
material behaviors 1160 about 94 design strips
CSA A23.4-04 default properties a final word 265
code span detailing rules setting 76 additional information 242
835 default schemes creating 226, 534, 574, 611,
setting new 65 647, 692, 729
deflection defining 211, 487
D viewing 502 definition 211
damping 1212
deflections drawing near walls 263
data transfer paths 130
load history 473 error, too much cover 477
data transfers
questions about 463 more information 242
from ISM 133
sustained, viewing 589, 667, process 213
from STAAD 130
707, 746 skew angles 243
databases
viewing 365 terminology 211
exporting to the RAM
design understanding how they
Structural System
about the three steps 398 work 212
421
design approach viewing with tendons 542,
reimporting 124
general 806 584, 619, 655, 702,
dead load reactions
design flexural resistance 737
viewing 366
section 18.7 878 with no cross sections, tips
dead loadings
design issues on 264
+ 0.25 live load load
questions about 454 design strips with tendons
combination 863
design notes viewing 655
other, defining 521, 602,
section 806 designs
638, 682, 720, 757
design reinforcement crack width 658
UBC 872
looking at 546, 587, 622, rule set, using 112
deep beams
661, 740 stress 658
analysis of
design rules desing strips
with transverse
choosing 112 creating 760
bending
selecting 112 detailed top reinforcement
moments
design section looking at 547, 623, 662,
791
forces 800 741
analysis of for bending
design sections detailing
moment and shear
defining 266 parameters 298
790
drawing 269 development lengths
considerations 787
properties 266 AS 3600 2001 839, 840
design
understanding parameters AS 3600 2009 839, 840
with transverse
273 AS 3600 2018 841
bending
using 266 CSA A23.3-04 845
moments
design status dimension lines
791
looking at 544, 586, 657, drawing 77
design of for bending
769 dimensions
moment shear 790
design statuses adding 76
with torsion
looking at 621 disassociating
analysis of 793
design strip CONNECTED projects 155
default load combinations
forces 800 distributed reinforcement
about 103
design strip cross sections drawing 285, 286

distributed tendon overlaps code rule selection 1135 highlighting geometry 481
properties 308 code span detailing rules in a Concept model, about
distributed tendon 835 427
quadrilaterals default load combinations management tool 479
defining profiles for 314 1123 miscellaneous 475
drawing 314 default loadings 1123 optimization 473–475
formatting options 320 design 1121 resolving 480, 481
properties 305 development lengths 844 severity 479
distribution plots material behaviors 1132 estimate
axial force 374 specific options 277 using 407
section 372 ECR 354–357 viewing 407
selected 374 effective curvature ratio what it calculates 407
shear 373 calculatin 813 Eurocode 2
summary of 375 usage 813 cracking distribution 1183
drawing effective curve ratio stress ratio 1183
precision, with snaps 68 options 354–357 export of reactions
drawings element analysis about 421
importing 116 finite 785 process 422
making visible on other finite, about 785 export reactions access
plans 117 Element layer about 423
showing on the mesh input using 185 export stories
593 element layers checks performed after
showing on the mesh input questions about 447 choosing 424
layer 511, 555, 629, element stiffness checks performed before
673, 711, 751 adjustments 1186 choosing 423
verifying 116 elements
viewing 116 beam 787
drop caps finite 786
F
factored load reactions
adding 431, 776 finite, formulation used in
viewing 366
drawing 514, 557, 595, 631, RAM Concept 786
factored moment resistance
675, 713 slab 787
non prestressed 1000
properties 431 EN 1992-1-1
section 10.2 873
drop panels 204 Eurocode 2 with TR43
factored moments
adding 431 design 1121
viewing about x-axis 367
properties 431 envelope factors
factors
ductility alternate, about 107
live load 889
non prestressed 897, 898, envelope results
features
1001 how Concept calculates 804,
warning about 467
non-prestressed 874 805
files
prestressed 879 envelopes
CAD, importing 116
section 10.3.3 874 questions about 457
Concept, creating 135
section 18.8.1 879 errors
creating 51
about 465
naming for the first time 52
automatic display 479
E filtering 481
new options in RAM
EC2 Concept 130
finding 480, 481
code implementation 1141 opening 51
hiding 481

opening existing 51 drawing 327 about 270
questions about 443 full-span tendons effects on reinforcement
restoring auto-save 53 drawing 323 location 273
saving 51 when to use 270
saving a copy with new import perimeters
location 52
G definition of 119
general parameters
saving a copy with new imported drawings
specifying 428
name 52 checking for correct scale
geometry
saving any open 52 116
exporting to the RAM
saving as a template 52 importing
Structural System
saving for the first time 52 RAM Structural System 121
425
starting 51 impulsive responses
finding errors 481
starting new 51 RMS values for 1216
grid settings
updating options in RAM in-plane behavior
changing for a plan 67
Concept 132 about 780, 781
grids
upgrading old 49 interaction of 784
changing settings for a plan
finite element analysis in-plane stiffnesses
67
about 785 interaction of 787
setting up 66
finite element mesh influence area
to make visible for a plan 67
viewing 180 calculations 819
group load combinations
finite elements influence areas
about 106
formulation used in RAM examples of 820
Concept 786 information
manually drawing 185 H viewing all on one plan 444
flexural members Half-Span Tendon Panels initial compressive stress limit
section 10.5.1 874 drawing 327 section 18.4.1a 877
section 10.6.4 875 half-span tendons initial tensile stress limit
flexural resistance drawing 323 section 18.4.1b 877
design 878 harped tendon warning Instability 786
flexural strength avoiding 469 inter cross sections
minimum 1023, 1043, 1062 slope limit trimming 240
flexural tensile strength interfaces
concrete 1022, 1041, 1060
I RAM Concept 130
floor areas IBC 2003 introduction 45
about 170, 191 live load factors 866 irregular column layouts
floor members IBC 2006 laying out design strips 243
about 170 live load factors 915 irregular grids
font IBC 2009 examples 249
changing 64 live load factors 942 IS 1343
font scale IBC 2012 code implementation 1115
changing 66 live load reduction 827 default loadings 1097
font size IBC 2015 IS 1343:1980
changing 65 live load reduction 827 design 1097
forces ignore depth IS 456
calculating on the cross concrete form examples code implementation 1110
section 801 270, 271 code rule selection 1105
Full-Span Tendon Panels ignore depths

default load combinations sync tools overview 134 latitude tendon polylines
1097 updating repository 137 defining 525
default loadings 1097 ISM repository latitude tendons
material behaviors 1102 changing 137 defining 603–606, 639–642,
IS 456 - 2000 updating 137 683–687, 721–724
code span detailing rules ISM Repository layers
835 creating 134 managing 55
IS 456-2000 substructures 134 understanding 55
development lengths 843 ISM sync tools layout
IS 456:2000 overview 134 parameters 298
design 1097 iTwin Design Review 152 Left Wall tools
IS 875 iTwin Services 152 about 440
live load factors 1102 license restrictions 46
ISM licensing
about 133
J post-tensioning 46
jack regions
application data 133 limitations
drawing 317
Concept rebar, exporting RAM Structural System
jacks
147, 148 import 127
about 329
Concept slabs, exporting to limits
properties 329
140 initial compressive stress
joist
creating repository 134 902
systems 430
data transfer from 133 initial tensile stress 902
export details 137 reinforcement spacing, for
exporting Concept support K class c members 903
members to 142 K Factors 786 service compressive stress
filtering 137 903
import details 137 service tensile stress 901
importing support members
L sustained compressive
to Concept 141 latitude design strip LLR results stress 903
load cases 143 viewing 368 line loads
loads 143 latitude design strips drawing 197
member loading 146 drawing 487, 760 properties 196
models 139 latitude prestressing folders line springs
openings 139 using 304 drawing 168, 191
options 149 latitude profile polylines properties 168, 190
purpose 133 defining 526 line supports
rebar 147 latitude span strips about 165, 188
rebar, importing into regenerating 537, 578, 614, drawing 166
Concept 148, 149 650, 696, 732, 763 drawing on slab elements
section shapes 142 latitude spans 189
slab modeling guidelines generating 535, 575, 611, properties 166, 189
141 647, 693, 729 using to refine the mesh 183
slabs 139 latitude strips line type
slabs, importing to Concept defining 694 changing 64
140 generating 535, 575, 648, lines
small features 140 730, 762 drawing 77
support members 141 strips 612 too short at (x,y) 466

live load factors live loading soil bearing factored wind 865, 888, 889,
ACI 318-02 889 pressure 914, 915, 940, 941,
ASCE-7 889 viewing 368 965, 966, 991, 992,
IBC 2003 889 live loads 1158, 1159
live load reactions balcony, defining 520, 601, frequent service 1125
viewing 366 637, 719 frequent service snow 1126
live load reduction drawing 486 frequent service wind 1129
about 346 typical, defining 520, 601, initial service 862, 883, 908,
ASCE 7-2016 825 637, 719 934, 960, 986, 1012,
column properties 162 load combination 1031, 1071, 1098,
for loadings 818 all dead 883 1124, 1155
IBC 2012 827 load combination types max service 1013, 1032
IBC 2015 827 summary of 108 properties 106
ICB 2003 825 load combinations quasi-permanent service
implementation of 349 1.2D + 1.5L 1013 1126
notes 818 about default 103 rebuilding 105
options 346 about group 106 service 862, 883, 884, 908,
parameters 348 accident 1073, 1128 909, 934, 935, 960,
using 346 adding 105 961, 986, 987, 1012,
live load reduction code all dead 862, 908, 934, 960, 1013, 1031, 1032,
setting 346 986, 1012, 1031, 1072, 1098, 1155
live load reduction parameters 1071, 1098, 1124, service seismic 864, 865,
specifying 348 1155 887, 913, 939, 965,
live load reductions characteristic service 1124 991, 1014, 1033,
AS/NZA 1170.1-2002 828 characteristic service snow 1100
ASCE-7 2002 824 1125 service snow 1156
ASCE-7 2010 825 characteristic service wind service wind 864, 886, 887,
BS 6399-1:1996 828 1128, 1129 911, 912, 937, 938,
Eurocode 1 part 1-1 dead and balance 1124 963, 964, 989, 990,
UK national annex default 882 1014, 1033, 1072,
1132 default, ACI 318-05 907 1099, 1156, 1157
Eurocode 1-2002 (UK deleting 105 specifying 103
Annex) 829 equilibrium wind 1132 sustained service 863, 884,
for load combinations 818 error, has unusual balance 910, 936, 962, 988,
for loadings 818 and/or hyperstatic 1015, 1035, 1101,
for rule sets 818 load factors 476 1157
IBC 2006 826 factored 863, 884–886, 910, ultimate 1013–1015, 1032,
IBC 2009 826 911, 936, 937, 962, 1033, 1072, 1098,
IS 875 - 1987 828 963, 988, 989, 1157, 1126, 1127
National Building Code of 1158 ultimate moments 669, 748
Canada 2005 829 factored moments ultimate seismic 1034, 1100,
UBC 1997 827 viewing 552, 591, 1101
live loading 627, 709 ultimate wind 1034, 1073,
types 347 factored seismic 866, 889, 1099, 1130, 1131
live loading layers 915, 941, 967, 993, viewing 103, 669, 748
copying to 757 1160 load deflections

viewing maximum short available 96 longitudinal direction bottom
term 706 changing 98 reinforcement
load history loadings viewing 364
calculations on the cross adding 99 longitudinal reinforcement
section 1178 deleting 99 program layout method 846
deflection calculation hyperstatic 797 top and bottom 375
process 1178 live longitutde prestressing folders
deflections 1176 parking 1123 using 304
Load History Calc Log post-tensioning 797
opening 361 questions about 452
load history deflection resolving conflicts 125
M
manual latitude tendons
calculations snow 1011, 1030, 1123,
defining 522–524, 565–569
about RAM Concept's 1176 1154
manual longitude tendons
load history deflections specifying 94
defining 527–531
calculating 360, 550, 588 viewing 95
replacing some with a
error, floor may have loads
distributed tendon
incomplete design about superposition of 195
quadrilateral 532
strip/cross section balance 432
manual tendon layer 310
coverage 473 balancing 440
manual tendon layers
results 1186 copying 199
all work done on 313
word of caution 1187 defining 520, 563, 601, 637,
margins
Load History Deflections 681, 719, 757
size 411
calculating 624, 666, 706, drawing 195
mat foundations
745 entering 431
tutorial 751
load pattern errors 468
material properties
effect of mesh on 205 properties 432
specifying 88
load patterns specifying 776
material stress strain curves
about 99 warnings 468
1179
deciding how many to use Long Term Deflections
materials
203 results 1186
adding 92
drawing 204 longitude design strips
deleting 92
filtering 205 drawing 489, 764
viewing available 88
how they work 100 longitude profile polylines
mats
when to use 101 defining 532, 533
error, is likely unstable 476
load percentages longitude span strips
foundations 829
balanced, calculating 801 regenerating 767
questions about 448
balanced, viewing 749 longitude spans
maximum short term load
load vectors generating 538, 579, 615,
deflection
an error occurred while 651, 697, 732
viewing 550
assembling 468 longitude strips
maximum short term load
an error while assembling generating 540, 580, 616,
deflections
468 652, 698, 734, 766
viewing 588, 624, 666, 706
loading longitude tendons
mesh
error 475 defining 570–574, 607–610,
effect on load pattern 205
loading properties 95 643–646, 688–692,
loading types 724–728
about 96

generating 178, 434, 484, minimum reinforcement of deleting from a polygonal
518, 561, 599, 635, flexural members object 73
679, 717, 753 non prestressed 1001, 1002
generating automatically mitered corners
178 defining on a beam 177
O
object numbers
generating, tips 194 mode data 1218
showing 465
improving 180, 242 modeling
object properties
refining selectively 182 about 442
editing 76
regenerating 490, 541, 583, selecting 60
objects
618, 654, 701, 735, modeling guidelines
appending to the layer
768 slabs 141
clipboard 72
viewing 484, 519, 562, 600, models
copying 71
636, 680, 718, 753 manipulating as a whole 75
copying by layer 72
mesh elements mirroring entire 75
copying using relative
drawing single 193 moving entire 75
coordinates 439
mesh input layer rotating 60
cutting 71
showing drawings on 629, rotating entire 75
deselecting 70
751 scaling entire 76
deselecting a group from a
Mesh Input Layer modulus of elasticity
selection 70
using 160 concrete 1022, 1041, 1060
deselecting a single from a
mesh input layers moment distribution plots 372
selection 71
questions about 446 moment of inertia
deselecting from a selection
showing drawings on 593, concrete members 812
70
673, 711 moment transfers
drawing 68, 69
showing the drawing on 511 analysis of
editing 68
mesh warnings through step-beams
editing polygon 72
avoiding 180 795
filtering selected 71
meshing design of
hiding on a perspective 63
errors with 465 through step-beams
hiding on a plan 63
refine using supports 183 795
mirroring 73
warnings with 465 moving loads
modeling with 55
meshing beams approximating 102
moving 73
as slabs 170 multi-span tendon
moving by one of its grips
middle strip support widths drawing with the tendon
74
tips on 264 polyline 323
moving using relative
midspan two way minimum
coordinates 439
reinforcement
section 18.9.3.2 880
N pasting 71
NBC 2005 pasting by layer 72
minimum radius
live load factors 1160 pasting from clipboard 71
editing 469
new perspectives pasting from the layer
minimum reinforcement
creating 60 clipboard 72
midspan two way 880
node options rotating 73
one way 879, 1008
excitation 1216 selecting 70
section 10.5.1 874
response 1216 selecting a group of 70
section 10.6.4 875
nodes selecting a single 70
support two way 880
showing on a perspective 63

showing on a plan 63 setting 414 exporting 419
stretching 73 pages questions about 444
stretching by one of its grips range 410 reducing information shown
75 viewing multiple at once on 440
viewing in text tables 78 414 using 59
one way minimum panning viewing all information on
reinforcement to reposition 61 one 444
section 18.9.2 879 paper plate behavior
openings size 411 review of 780
drawing 515, 558, 596, 632, source 411 plot controls
676, 714 parameters difference 396
optimizable objects detailing 354 plot settings
banded tendon polylines general, setting 773 changing 369
332 Partition Loading plot sign conventions
distributed tendon special handling during about 86
quadrilaterals 333 export 422 plot values
optimization regions 335 paths distribution 372
profile polylines 334 data transfer 130 plots
optimization pattern loading factors questions about 455
errors 473–475 default 1070 plotted results
optimizable objects 332 pattern loadings setting 379
process 337 creating 203 plotting results
tendon parameters 321, 322 PDFs vibration analysis 394
warnings 473–475 printing to 410 point loads
optimization regions 335 performance drawing 196
options questions about 464 properties 196
general 352 perimeter line loads point springs
using "Don't Reduce drawing 198 drawing 167, 190
Integrated M and V perspectives properties 167, 190
due to Sign Change creating new 60 point supports
802 customizing printed about 165, 188
Orient Reinforcement tool appearances o 415 drawing 165, 189
using 293 questions about 444 properties 165, 188
orientation using 59 using to refine the mesh 183
default 411 viewing 59 polygon objects
other dead loadings plans editing 72
defining 521, 564, 602, 638, adding 439 polygon slab mesh areas
682, 720, 757 creating new 59 drawing 193
out-of-plane behavior creating new that plot polygonal objects
about 780, 782 latitude bottom adding a node to 73
interaction of 784 reinforcement 498 nodes
out-of-plane stiffnesses customizing printed adding to a
interaction of 787 appearances of 415 polygonal
deleting unwanted 444 object 73
determining fit of 412 post-tensioning
P determining which contain defining 522, 565, 603, 683,
page orientation
objects 57 721, 776

definitions 303 general options 410 calculation of, for
flat plate tutorial optimizations 414 unreinforced section
ACI 318-08 511 priority method 1204, 1206, 1207
general information 432 about 170 punching shear
licensing 46 profile points ACI 318 1197, 1198
optimizing 331 cannot auto-position at (x,y) checking for 540
specifying 432 due to profile point checks 434
terminology 303 value 470 CSA A23.3 1199, 1200
Post-tensioning Flat Plate error 470 design 881, 906, 932, 958,
Tutorial error, not within the slab 984, 1009, 1029,
EC2 / TR43 628 vertically 471 1048, 1069, 1120,
Post-Tensioning Flat Plate warning 470 1175
Tutorial profile polylines design notes 1188
BS8110 / TR43 592 defining using the Generate failure 1188
CSA A23.3-04 710 Profile Polylines tool handling by building codes
IS 456:2000 672 315 1188
post-tensioning systems drawing 315 handling by RAM Concept
about 92 properties 308 1189, 1190
precision drawing profiling 433 overview 1188
with snaps 68 program reinforcement questions about 460
precompression detailing methods 847 results 377, 393
effect of 1210 Program reinforcement unreinforced sections 1195,
viewing in x-direction 366 about 279 1196
print jobs program tendons viewing 500, 501
paging through 414 generating 318 with SSR 1197–1200
previewing 413 projection punching shear checks
previewing active window setting 60 about 274, 278
413 properties defining 274
report, previewing 413 loading 95 drawing 278, 490
print scales PT design general 274
specifying 412 changing to RC design 264 options 274
print setup options PT flat plate tutorial properties 274
changing 411 AS3600-2001 554 punching shear design
print viewpoint PT Systems 90 ACI 318 1195
setting 412 punching advice on 1210
printed area analysis 392 CSA A23.3 1195
specifying with coordinates Punching Check Auditor EN 1992-2004 1203
412 about information displayed punching shear SSR
printed area on plan by 402 viewing 368
specifying 412 using 403 punching shear status
printer options punching check numbers viewing 367
configuring 410 displaying 477 punching shears
selecting 410 punching check properties checking for 582, 617, 653,
printers advice on the selection of 700, 734, 767
selection 410, 411 1209 handling by RAM Concept
printing punching resistance 1191, 1192
about 409 punching zones

transferring forces 1188 copying to 757 support two way minimum
python 151 reference lines 906
adding 76 text formatting 299
regenerating 62 text formatting, examples of
Q reinforced concrete 302
questions
slab, tutorial 482 top and bottom longitudinal
frequently asked 442
reinforcement 375
applying hooks near slab TR43 specific questions 459
R edge 294 user minimum 869, 870,
rafts AS3600 specific questions 892, 893, 918, 919,
error, is likely unstable 476 458 944, 945, 970, 971,
RAM Concept BS8110 specific questions 996, 997, 1018,
learning 47 459 1019, 1037–1039,
license restrictions 46 calculation of supplemental 1056, 1057, 1079,
options 46 1090 1080, 1106, 1107,
plotting 785 calculation of supplemental 1136, 1137,
relevant axes 785 untensioned 1090, 1162–1164
result categories in 803 1119 viewing 364, 494
RAM Concept interface 130 clear cover 433 viewing controlling criteria
RAM Concept reactions code minimum 891, 917, 496
using in RAM Concrete 424 943, 969, 995, 1018, viewing shear stud 501
RAM Structural System 1037, 1055, 1106, viewing specific 496
importing from 121 1135, 1162 reinforcement bars
reimporting from 126 concentrated, drawing 284 definitions 279
RAM Structural System - RAM design 494, 545, 622 drawing 279
Concept link drawing 507 reinforcement behavior
how it works 424 drawing transverse 286 bonded prestressed 867,
range layout 354 891, 917, 943, 968,
pages 410 looking at 769 1017, 1036, 1077,
RC design midspan two way minimum 1105, 1133, 1161
changing to, from PT design 905 non-prestressed 867, 890,
264 minimum 916, 943, 968, 1017,
Reaction 382 one way 905 1036, 1161
Reaction tab 382 minimum, of flexural unbonded prestressed 868,
reactions members 898 891, 917, 943, 969,
export of 421 non prestressed 898 1017, 1036, 1077,
questions about 455 non prestressed minimum 1105, 1134, 1161
rebar 898 untensioned 1076, 1104,
Concept, exporting to ISM notes 831 1133
147, 148 orientation of 376 reinforcement callouts
recalculating 360 properties 280 concentrated 299
rectangular slab mesh areas properties, transverse 282 distributed 299
drawing 193 questions about 457 reinforcement controlling
recursions shear 377 criteria
too deep 467 specific, viewing 770 viewing 496
warning 467 specifying 433 reinforcement drawings
reducible loading layers

concentrated examples resonant responses viewing other 369
286–290 RMS values for 1215 viewing reinforcement 364
distributed examples response factor plots viewing sustained deflection
286–290 evaluation of 1218 551
reinforcement locations response factors right mouse button
effects of ignore depth on calculation of 1215, 1216 using 54
273 responses Right Wall tools
reinforcement objects impulsive footfall 1216 about 440
types 279 resonant footfall 1213 rows
reinforcement plots resonant vs. impulsive 1213 choosing which to show 79
designing 498 restraint RSS 121
viewing 364 about 438 Rule Set "Strength Design"
reinforcement results result objects error 476
viewing 364 changing visibility 369 rule set design
reinforcement spacing limits for result plans properties 113
class c members 1007 creating new 370 rule set designs
reinforcements results adding 114
code minimum 1078 bending moments 626, 668, deleting 114
drawing 284 708, 747 using 112
other plan tools 293 calculating 350, 361, 434, rule sets
relative coordinates 491, 542, 583, 584, deleting 115
using 69 619, 655, 701, 702,
report 736, 768, 769
specifying as zero 82 calculating all 350
S
scripting 151
report items creating new plans 370
section
changing location 418 deflection 549, 588, 624,
18.4.2b service compressive
report print job 665, 706, 745
stress limit 903
previewing 413 design reinforcement 661,
section 10.1
Report Viewer 705, 740
factored moment resistance
using 404 design status 704, 738
1167
reports envelope 804
section 10.2
changing contents 415 interpreting 1216
factored moment
excluding items 416, 417 miscellaneous, information
resistance
including items in 416, 417 375
non prestressed 922,
opening previously saved partially calculating 350
949, 974
405 plotting 379, 440
section 10.3.5
printing 406, 409 questions about 454
ductility
saving 405 recalculating 543, 586, 620,
non prestressed 897,
resistance 656, 703, 738
898, 923,
design flexural reinforcement 849
924, 950,
prestressed 904 standard 803
975
factored moment, section type of 363
section 10.5.1
10.2 873 vibration 394
minimum reinforcement
non prestressed 899 viewing 363, 491, 542, 583,
in beams
shear, of beams 899 619, 655, 701, 736,
non prestressed
shear, of prestressed beams 768
1168
899 viewing frequently used 363

minimum reinforcement beam torsion 952, 978 limitation on area of
of flexural section 11.6 prestressing tendons
members beam torsion 926 1116
non prestressed 924, section 18.3.1.1a minimum longitudinal
950, 975, initial compressive reinforcement 1116
1169 stress limit section 18.7
section 10.5.2 at stressing 1172 cracking moment 1173
redistribution of moments section 18.3.1.1b design flexural
ductility check initial tensile stress limit resistance
non prestressed at stressing 1172 prestressed 904,
1168 section 18.3.2a 929, 956,
section 10.6.1 sustained compressive 981, 1007
beams and one-way stress limit 1172 section 18.8.2
slabs section 18.3.2b cracking moment 904, 930,
crack control 1168 service compressive stress 956, 982
minimum reinforcement limit 1172 minimum bonded
of flexural section 18.3.3 reinforcement 1173
members service tensile stress limit section 18.8.3
non prestressed 901, 953, 979 minimum reinforcement
1169 servie tensile stress limit of flexural
section 10.6.4 927 members
minimum reinforcement section 18.4.1a prestressed 1174
of flexural initial compressive stress section 18.9.2
members limit 954, 980 minimum reinforcement
non prestressed 898, intial compressive stress one way 905, 930,
924, 950, limit 928 957, 982
976 section 18.4.1b section 18.9.3.2
section 11.2 initial tensile stress limit midpsan two way minimum
shear resistance of 902, 928 reinforcement 957
beams section 18.4.1c midspan two way minimum
non prestressed 951, initial tensile stress limit reinforcement 905,
976 954, 980 931, 983, 1008
section 11.3 section 18.4.2a section 18.9.3.3
shear and torsion tension sustained compressive support two way minimum
1169 stress limit 903, 928, reinforcement 906,
shear resistance of 955, 980, 1006 931, 958, 983
beams section 18.4.2b section 21.1.1
non prestressed 899, service compressive stress redistribution of
924 limit 955, 981 moments
prestressed 951, 977 section 18.4.2b service ductility check 1116
torsion design 1170 compressive stress limit section 22.1
section 11.4 929 ultimate limit state for
shear resistance of section 18.4.4 beams in flexure
beams reinforcement spacing limits 1116
prestresesd 899 for class c members section 22.3
prestressed 925 903, 929, 955, 981 design shear resistance of
section 11.5 section 18.6.3.3 beams 1117

section 22.5 section 31.7.1 1111 design shear resistance
torsion 1118 section 37 1113
section 22.7.1 redistribution of section 41
flexural tension stresses in moments torsion 1114
concrete 1119 ductility check 1112 section 5.10.2.2
section 22.8.1 section 38 limitation of concrete
design compressive stresses design resistance moment of stress
1120 beams 1112 transfer 1142
section 22.8.2 redistribution of section 5.5
design compressive moments resdistribution of
stresses ductility check 1112 moments
transfer 1120 section 4.12.2 ductility check 1142
section 24.4 limitation on area of section 6.1
shrinkage 999 prestressing tendons design resistance moment
temperature reinforcement 1094 1142
999 section 4.3.2.1 section 6.10.6
section 26.5.1.1 1111 redistribution of minimum un-tensioned
section 26.5.2.1 1111 moments reinforcement 1095
section 3.12.11.2.4 ductility check 1088 section 6.2
beam bar spacing 1087 section 4.3.4.2 design shear resistance
section 3.12.11.2.7 compressive stresses in 1143
slab bar spacing 1087 concrete 1088 section 6.3
section 3.12.5 section 4.3.4.3 torsion 1144
minimum areas of flexural tension stresses in section 7.12
reinforcement in concrete 1088 section shrinkage 974
members 1086 section 4.3.5.1 shrinkage 896, 922, 948
section 3.2.2.1 design compressive temperature reinforcement
redistribution of stresses 896, 922, 948, 974
moments transfer 1091 section 7.8
ductility check 1083 section 4.3.5.2 minimum reinforcement in
section 3.4.4 design tensile stresses in slabs 1166
design resistance moment of flexure section 8.1
beams 1084 transter 1091 strength of beams in
section 3.4.5 section 4.3.7 bending 1023, 1042,
design shear resistance of ultimate limit state for 1060
beams 1084 beams in flexure section 8.1.3
section 3.4.5.13 1092 ductility of beams in
torsion 1085 section 4.3.8 bending 1024
section 3.5.4 design shear resistance of section 8.1.5
resistance moment of solid beams 1092 ductility of beams in
slabs 1086 shear slabs 1094 bending 1043, 1062
section 3.5.5 section 4.3.9 section 8.2
shear resistance of solid torsion 1094 shear design 1024, 1043,
slabs 1086 section 4.4.1 1063
section 3.8.3 shear slabs 1094 section 8.3
assessment of crack widths section 40 beam torsion design 1025,
1094 1044, 1063

section 8.6.1 section stresses non prestressed 1002
RC beam crack control 1025, viewing 367 prestressed 1003
1045 selections section 11.3 875
section 8.6.2 mirroring 74 section 11.4 875
post tensioning beam crack moving 73 shear results
control 1045 rotating 74 punching 377, 393
PT beam crack control 1026 stretching 74 shear stud rails
section 8.6.2.2 self equilibrium ACI 318 1197, 1198
RC beam crack control 1065 example 452 CSA A23.3 1199, 1200
section 8.6.3 Self-Dead Loading shear stud reinforcement
direct crack control special handling of during viewing 501
calculations 1067 export 421 short term load deflection
post tensioning beam crack self-weight maximum, viewing 745
control 1066 about 195 short term load deflections
section 8.6.3.2c self-weight reactions maximum, viewing 588, 624,
minimum transverse viewing 366 666
reinforcement 1115 service viewing maximum 706
section 9.1 characteristic 1137 shrinkage
strength of slabs in bending frequent 1138 effects 811
1027, 1046, 1064 initial section 7.12 873
section 9.10 "transfer" 1080, shrinkage strain
tying system for accidental 1107, 1137 drawing 201
design situations intitial 1019 properties 201
1148, 1149 max 1020, 1040, 1058 sign conventions
section 9.2.1.1 1147 quasi-permanent 1139 changing 86
section 9.3.1.1 sustained 871, 894, 920, choosing 84
RC slab minimum 946, 972, 998, 1165 default 84
reinforcement 1147 service compressive stress limit questions about 446
section 9.4.1 section 18.4.2b 878 selecting 84
rc slab crack control 1046 service deflection signs
RC slab crack control 1027 viewing 365, 503 conventions 1208
section 9.4.2 viewing without colors 505 skew angles
post tensioning slab crack service soil bearing pressure design strips 243
control 1047 viewing 368 Skew Reinforcement Extent tool
PT slab crack control 1028 service tensile stress limit using 294
section 9.4.3.2 section 18.4.2c 878 skyline plots
shrinkage 1028, 1047 set print viewpoint about 391
temperature 1028, 1047 showing 413 slab areas
section 9.5.3.2 shear core balcony, drawing 513, 712
shrinkage 1068 error message 477, 478 drawing 174, 483, 512, 555,
temperature 1068 shear cores 593, 673, 711, 752
section design about 234 hatching 484, 516, 559, 597,
about "context" plots 390 in slabs 236 633, 677, 715
process overview 806 shear reinforcement properties 172
section distribution plots 372 one-way, questions about slab beams
section shapes 462 error 465
ISM 142 shear resistance of beams slab elements

analysis of 787 orientation, editing 650, 652 editing with Strip
drawing 193 span cross section orienation Boundaries 699
drawing wall elements on editing 695 generating automatically
187 span cross section orienations 225
general properties 786 editing 700 no width, tips on 264
properties 192 span cross section orientation properties 214, 217, 220,
slab openings editing 537, 539, 577, 582, 223
drawing 177 614, 616, 650, 652, straightening 536, 539, 576,
properties 177 731, 734 580, 613, 616, 649,
slab plot limitations span cross sections 652, 694, 698, 731,
Max and Min 381 editing orientation 614, 695, 733
slab plotting 700, 731, 734 span segments over the wall
about contexts 380 span data deleting 734
slab systems entering 429, 774 span strips
two-way 901 span polylines latitude, regenerating 650
slab thickness defining using the Generate regenerating 614
optimization 344 Span Polylines tool spans
slabs 316 detailing 831
about 379 span segment 2-3 detailing assumptions 833
about plotting contexts 380 editing 585 spansegment 602
error about 467 span segment 6-2 editing 703
error, too many shapes changing 543 specific reinforcement
intersecting the editing 543, 585, 620, 656, viewing 496
column shape at 737 specifying material properties
(x,y) 477 span segment boundaries concrete mix 89
ISM, importing to Concept defining manually 227 split banded tendon polyline
140 span segment strips tool
Max and Min context creating 226 using 317
limitations 381 generating 226 split profile polyline tool
modeling guidelines 141 span segment widths using 318
reinforced concrete, tutorial defining manually 227 springs
482 span segments about 167, 189
slope limits creating 224 SSR callout 301
inter cross section, trimming deleting over the wall 539, SSR callouts
240 734 about 302
soil bearings deleting over wall 580, 616, SSR rails
questions about 463 652 about 302
Span Boundaries deleting over walls 698 SSR Systems 91
editing span segments with drawing a single 225 STAAD
699 drawing manually 225 data transfer from 130
Span Boundary Polyline drawing multiple 226 STAAD interface 130
drawing 577, 578 editing with Span standard results 803
Span Boundary Polylines Boundaries status
drawing 537, 614, 650, 696, editing withStrip viewing 491
697, 732 Boundaries statuses
span cross section 581 viewing 364
editing orientation 577, 616 stiffnesses

in-plane, interaction of 787 strip widths auto-stabilizing 475
out-of-plane, interaction of defining manually 227 defining 160, 482, 511, 554,
787 Strip Wizard 592, 628, 672, 710,
strains about 46 751
creep 1179 completing 434, 777 dynamic characteristics of
shrinkage 1179 conclusion 778 1211
strainscross-section loading settings 434, 435 questions about 446
bonded post-tensioning 807 PT Flat Plate Tutorial viewing 485, 519, 562, 600,
strength 871, 895, 921, 947, comparison with 636, 680, 718, 753
973, 998, 1021, 1040, 778 Subscription Entitlement
1059, 1081, 1109, 1140, Ram Concept Service 159
1165 proceeding with 777 substructures
stress limit reinforcement creating in ISM 134
initial compressive 877 specifying support
initial tensile 877 parameters above properties 431
service compressive 878 777 below properties 431
service tensile 878 saving settings 434 support data
sustained compressive 877 starting 428, 773 entering 430
stress limitation tutorial 773 support members
7.2 1145 using 428 ISM, exporting to Concept
stress limits Strip Wizard settings 142
transfer compressive 1023, saving 435 ISM, importing to Concept
1043, 1062 strip-based initial bottom 141
stress strain curves stresses support reactions
unbonded post-tensioning viewing 367 viewing 365
1022 strip-based initial top stresses support two way minimum
stress-strain curves viewing 367 reinforcement
concrete 810 strip-based long term deflection section 18.9.3.3 880
non-presstressed for ACI 318, viewing 365 supports
reinforcement 806 for AS3600, viewing 365 creating below 775
post-tensioning materials for BS810, viewing 365 sustained compressive stress
806 for EC2, viewing 365 limit
unbonded post-tensioned strip-based service bottom section 18.4.2a 877
808 stresses sustained deflection
unbonded post-tensioning viewing 367 viewing 551, 625
809, 1042, 1060 strip-based service top stresses sustained deflections
stresses viewing 367 viewing 589, 707, 746
concrete 742 strips sustained delfections
Strip hatching 536, 576, 613, 649, viewing 667
Strip tab 386 694, 731, 762 sync tools
strip boundaries structural systems overview 134
defining manually 228 about 46 systems
Strip Boundaries structure beam 430
editing span segments with questions about 446 joist 430
699 structure definition one-way 429
strip design checking 177 two-way 429
process overview 806 structures

T most tedon definition done text
on 313 drawing 77
table columns
tendon profile points text formatting 319
sizing 80
changing multiple 440 text notes
table row
tendon profiles adding 76
sorting 80
error, a tendon is out of the text size
tables
slab 471 selecting 419
customizing 79
tendon voids text tables
exporting 419
drawing 317 viewing objects in 78
technical support 49
properties 308 tips
temperature change
tendons general 436
drawing 200
calculation of number of miscellaneous 439
properties 200
ducts 810 templates 439
temperature reinforcement
changing multiple profile tool buttons
section 7.12 873
points 440 expanding 53, 439
templates
creating, about 312 toolbars
about 53
defining 303 rearranging 54
tips 439
definitions 303 top stress plans
tendon definitions
drawing full-span 323 viewing 623, 663
all done on the tendon
drawing individual 322 torsion
parameters layers
drawing multiple 323 beam 900
313
drawing single 322 considerations 816
most done on the tendon
editing 328 questions about 457
parameters layers
editing based on uplift 328 torsion design
313
errors 469 Wood-Armer 817
tendon effective stresses
external load 809 TR 43
an error occured 471
inclusion of force vector on code rule selection 1078
error, tendon not connected
a cross section 810 default loadings 1070
to any jacks 472
internal force 809 minimum un-tensioned
tendon jacks
making, about 312 reinforcement 1095
drawing 330
manual latitude, defining TR-43 5.8.1
tendon panel layouts
522 post tensioning stresses
options 324
optimization parameters UK national annex
tendon parameter layers
321, 322 only 1149
all tendon definition done
panel layout options 324 TR-43 5.8.2
on 313
parameter drawing post tensioning initial
tendon parameter plan objects
examples 318 service transfer
317
parameters layer 304 stresses
tendon parameter plan tools
parameters, object types UK national annex
317
304 only 1151
tendon parameters
properties 311 TR-43 5.8.3
drawing 319
questions about 449 post tensioning crack
drawing examples 318
viewing design strips with control
object types 304
542, 584, 702, 737 UK national annex
tendon parameters group 310
viewing the design strips only 1152
tendon parameters layer 304
with 619 TR-43 5.8.5
tendon parameters layers
warnings 469

post tensioning ultimate questions about 445 magnifying specific areas in
limit state 1152 selecting 81 61
TR-43 5.8.7 selecting default 81 magnifying with the mouse
un-tensioned updated statuses button wheel 61
reinforcement calculating repositioning with a tool 62
UK national annex reviewing 658 repositioning with the
only 1152 updates mouse wheel button
TR-43 5.8.8 product version 159 61
post tensioning user concentrated rebar visible objects
reinforcement exporting 147 setting 62
UK national annex user distributed rebar
1152 exporting 147
Tr-43 5.9 User Interface
W
wall elements
shear strength 1153 Overview 50
about 185
TR43 user reinforcement
drawing 187
code implementation 1083 detailing methods 847
drawing on slab elements
material behaviors 1074 User reinforcement
187
transfer loading types about 279
drawing where there are no
about 98 user transverse rebar
slab elements 188
transverse reinforcement exporting 148
properties 187
callouts 300 Utility tool
wall location
drawing 286 about 440
defining 560
error message 478 using to move 74
wall locations
example drawings 291 using to stretch 74
defining 517, 598, 634, 678,
properties 282
716, 752
tributary areas
calculations 819
V wall properties
vibration defining 517, 560, 598, 634,
tutorials
analysis 394 678, 716, 752
Strip Wizard 773
results 394 walls
two-way slab systems
vibration analysis about 160
chapter 13 877
calculating 361 above 437, 438
typical live loads
notes 1211 above slab 796
defining 520, 563, 601, 637,
plotting results 394 above, difference between
681, 719
Vibration Calc Log upstand beams of
opening 361 similar proportions
U vibration performance 438
ultimate seismic east loading evaluating 1216 copying below to the same
defining 758 vibrations above 446
undoing changes 54 free 1211 copying from below to
unit costs options 357 above 164, 188
about 408 view history 62 deleting span segments over
editing 407 views 698
units controlling 60 drawing 164
about 81 diminishing with the mouse drawing design strips near
changing 81 wheel button 61 263
choosing 81

move to centerline warning miscellaneous 475 workspace
468 optimization 473–475 about 50
properties 163, 164 resolving 480, 481
questions about 447 severity 479
warnings Warnings and Errors dialog 479
Z
zero tension iteration
about 465 window orientation
options 353
automatic display 479 setting 414
zooming
filtering 481 windows
to diminish 61
finding 480, 481 printing 409
to magnify 61
hiding 481 workflows
management tool 479 expected 284

Ram Concept

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ram Concept

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAM Concept

CONNECT Edition V8 Update 2 (v8.2)

RAM Concept 2 User Manual

RAM Concept 3 User Manual

RAM Concept 4 User Manual

RAM Concept 5 User Manual

RAM Concept 6 User Manual

RAM Concept 7 User Manual

RAM Concept 8 User Manual

RAM Concept 9 User Manual

RAM Concept 10 User Manual

RAM Concept 11 User Manual

RAM Concept 12 User Manual

RAM Concept 13 User Manual

RAM Concept 14 User Manual

RAM Concept 15 User Manual

RAM Concept 16 User Manual

RAM Concept 17 User Manual

RAM Concept 18 User Manual

RAM Concept 19 User Manual

RAM Concept 20 User Manual

RAM Concept 21 User Manual

RAM Concept 22 User Manual

RAM Concept 23 User Manual

RAM Concept 24 User Manual

RAM Concept 25 User Manual

RAM Concept 26 User Manual

RAM Concept 27 User Manual

RAM Concept 28 User Manual

RAM Concept 29 User Manual

RAM Concept 30 User Manual

RAM Concept 31 User Manual

RAM Concept 32 User Manual

RAM Concept 33 User Manual

RAM Concept 34 User Manual

RAM Concept 35 User Manual

RAM Concept 36 User Manual

RAM Concept 37 User Manual

RAM Concept 38 User Manual

RAM Concept 39 User Manual

RAM Concept 40 User Manual

RAM Concept 41 User Manual

RAM Concept 42 User Manual

RAM Concept 43 User Manual

RAM Concept 44 User Manual

Note: The Equivalent Frame method is not used.

1.1 Comparing with “traditional” methods

RAM Concept 45 User Manual

1.2 RAM Concept options

1.2.1 Manage License Restrictions

1.3 Strip Wizard

1.4 Structural systems

RAM Concept 46 User Manual

1.5 Learning RAM Concept

We recommend that you start by doing the tutorials:

RAM Concept 47 User Manual

• For Mat (Raft Users): Chapter 48, “Mat Foundation Tutorial”.

1.5.2 Critical Chapters

1.5.3 Know your building code

RAM Concept 48 User Manual

• CSA A23.3-04 Design (on page 1154)

Rules not considered

1.5.4 Upgrading Old Files

1.6 Technical support